JP2020025584A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining game interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes start pockets capable of receiving a game ball shot into a game area 5a. When a game ball enters a start pocket, determination processing for winning is performed. Then, variation display corresponding to the determination processing result is started, and a winning game is played when a winning pattern is displayed in the variation display. In this respect, the Pachinko machine 1 can perform special display as a performance relating to operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as seen in Patent Literature 1, for example, there has been known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prizes can be acquired when a hit is won is performed.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of a game ball to the starting port. Then, when a game ball is awarded to the starting port, a determination process for determining a hit or the like is performed. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time on a predetermined display. When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the winning has been won, and the opening / closing member of the special winning opening is operated, so that the player is often given to the player. The special game that can win the prize is provided.

JP 2017-006393 A

  In such conventional gaming machines, effects are often performed by operating means, but it is required to further enhance the entertainment interest when the effects are performed by the operating means.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination,
Holding storage means capable of storing determination information used for determination by the determination means,
A symbol variation executing unit that selects one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination information stored by the suspension storage unit, and that can execute symbol variation with the selected variation pattern;
Receiving means for detecting and accepting an action by the player;
Mimic image display means capable of displaying a mimic image display in which an object to be operated by the player is represented as an image,
A reception period in which reception of an operation by the player is allowed, and a reception period execution means for displaying a display after reception when an operation by the player is received within the reception period,
A plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as the reception period,
The first reception period,
When the execution of the first variation pattern is started regardless of the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage unit, the first timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern was started. Can occur when
In the second reception period,
When the execution of the second variation pattern is started when the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage unit is less than a predetermined number, a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern was started. The second variation pattern can be generated when two timings have arrived, but when the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage means is in a state of a predetermined number or more, the second variation pattern is started. It does not occur even when the second timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the fluctuation pattern has arrived,
The mimic image display means can display the mimic image display in any of a plurality of display modes,
The target object to be operated by the player has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light,
A gaming machine, comprising: an operation-related image display unit that can display an operation-related image that prompts a player to accept an operation during the reception period.

  In the above configuration, when the execution of the first variation pattern is started, the first reception is performed when the first timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed arrives regardless of the number of pieces of determination information stored in the hold storage means. A period (for example, FIG. 279 or FIG. 280) can occur, but when the execution of the second variation pattern is started, the predetermined time is determined only when the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage unit is less than the predetermined number. The second reception period (for example, FIG. 282) does not occur when the second timing at which the time has elapsed comes. According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and the number of reservations is reduced, a reception period (a second reception period) of a type that has not been generated will occur. It is possible to expect that the game is not stopped, or to give an interesting impression on the game at the end even if the game is stopped.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 35 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 35 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 37. (A) is a view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a portion where the operation button is partially cut away to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by LL in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in FIG.51 (a). 51A is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63, which is disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a part of a function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where a game board is attached to a pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals inputted and outputted to a connection terminal board of a rental device such as a game ball for relaying an electrical connection between a payout control board constituting a main board, a CR unit and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram illustrating a sequel to FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a delivery motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 4 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure showing arrangement of an output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which performs drawing of the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. 6 is a timing chart for explaining a timing at which a connection confirmation signal is output to an INIT terminal of a transmitter IC for an upper plate side liquid crystal. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting-port passage process (step S5232). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing (Step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a big hit determination process (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st change pattern setting processing (Step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate part passage processing (Step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol normal process (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol change start processing when in the normal gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by a fixed channel method. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel system as this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by an automatic channel method. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, reproduction | regeneration sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a figure showing an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128, a notification content, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition for terminating the notification (release condition). (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) is an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is. FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is. (D) is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the production progress notification processing separately according to the notification state of the pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under control is performed. It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the effect pattern in the effect mode which can perform a sword-drawing effect, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transfer effect according to the type of a fluctuation pattern, (B) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of the sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sword part (sword body part) itself, (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, (C) 2nd. Indicates the sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, and (C) 2nd sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for pseudo consecutive production. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above, the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure showing an example of transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is enabled once and the sword decoration is not enabled, and then the sword decoration is enabled. It is a figure showing about a suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing another example of the specific operation related production. It is a figure explaining an example about the effect when the "specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the production contents for each type about the production when a plurality of types (progress productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as precursor productions. It is a figure which shows the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect is performed as a specific operation related effect. It is a figure showing another example of the production contents when a specific operation related production is performed as a precursor production. It is a figure showing an example of a production in which button image BTG is displayed in a mode (specific production mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure showing the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control in the state of an automatic button production. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control in the state of an automatic button production. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control in the state of an automatic button production. It is a figure for explaining the stable side automatic production processing in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the stable side automatic production processing in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the stable side automatic production processing in the automatic button production state. It is a time chart which shows the contents of processing when timing tm1 when a new design change starts in the situation where a specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. 9 is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation timing (a start timing and an end timing of a symbol change) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. 9 is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation timing (a start timing and an end timing of a symbol change) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until a sword decoration body 5001 returns to an original position. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a state transition between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of performing the expected effect in which the princess character is largely displayed as a background image during execution of a specific effect pattern. FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating a display example when a help image is displayed in a state where the expected effect illustrated in FIG. 200 is being performed. It is a figure showing the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for explaining an example about processing at the time of generating a production restriction period in a non-game state. It is a time chart for explaining an example about processing when an effect restriction period is ended early. It is a time chart which shows an example about processing concerning a special period (opening exclusive use period). It is a time chart which shows an example about processing when a game is started when it is set to a store opening period (special period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation acceptance production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the special operation reception production. 6 is a time chart showing a mode of channel assignment of sound data including an acceptable sound. 6 is a time chart showing a mode of channel assignment of sound data including an acceptable sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of a production when a low expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of a production when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of a production when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the modification when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. 11 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which a first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when a “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in an effect according to a high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in an effect according to a high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect in a case where a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in an effect according to a high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect (movement acceptance control under suppression) which appears in "in the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as an operation target" in a suppression and automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the content of the effect which appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 3 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the content of the effect which appears when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs in the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" in the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows an example as a concept about the processing procedure at the time of implement | achieving various display effects using scenario data and blocks. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (valid period). 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started in the “m + 1” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started from the “m−3” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226. The effect reception period (valid period) in the case where the timing of performing the “operation (setting) of the operation state flag to the ON state” in the frame is performed after the “determination process related to the effect reception” is performed. It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows an example about an integrated mimic image. It is a figure showing the example of a display about an integrated mimic image from the beginning of an effective period until it ends. It is a figure showing the example of a display about an integrated mimic image from the beginning of an effective period until it ends. It is a figure showing an example about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress at the time of a 1st effective period generate | occur | producing. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress at the time of a 1st effective period generate | occur | producing. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress at the time of a 1st effective period generate | occur | producing. It is a figure showing an example about the production progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect which suggests the degree of expectation concerning an integrated mimic image step by step. It is a figure which shows an example about an integrated mimic image. It is a figure which shows the example of a production progress in the effective period in which an integrated mimic image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production progress in the effective period in which an integrated mimic image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production progress in the effective period in which an integrated mimic image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the 2nd reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 1st reception permission state occurs. It is a figure which shows an example about the effect content when a 2nd reception permission state arises. It is a figure which shows an example about the effect content when the 1st reception permission state arises. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 4th reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of an effect when the 5th reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the 1st condition is satisfied and the 1st reception period (1st reception effect) occurs as a result of determination. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the 2nd condition is satisfied and the 2nd reception period (2nd reception effect) occurs as a result of the judgment. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of an effect when a 3rd condition is satisfied as a result of judgment, and a 3rd reception period (3rd reception effect) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the 4th condition is fulfilled as a result of judgment, and the 4th reception period (the 4th reception effect) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the 5th condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment, and the 5th reception period (the 5th reception effect) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the effect when the seventh condition is satisfied as the result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception effect) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the fluctuation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception effect) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a second reception period (a second reception effect) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a second reception period (a second reception effect) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs. It is a modification of the effect related to the reception period. It is a modification of the effect related to the reception period. It is a modification of the effect related to the reception period. It is a modification of the effect related to the reception period. It is a modification of the effect related to the reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when reception period A (reception production A) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when a reception period B (reception production B) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when a reception period C (reception production C) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the production when a reception period D (reception production D) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of the production when a reception period D (reception production D) occurs. It is a table which shows the example of a setting concerning the generating conditions of acceptance periods A-D. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a reception period B (reception effect B) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. It is a figure showing the modification of acceptance period D. It is a figure showing the modification of acceptance period D. It is a figure showing the modification of acceptance period D. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which a reception period E (reception effect E) occurs. It is a figure showing an example of a production in acceptance period E.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 accommodated in the payout control board box 950, and the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and houses a power supply board therein, and is attached to the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. Payout control board box 950 There.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, as viewed from below, with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same length as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10 and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the lateral side outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, An upright wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and bulging forward from near the upper end of the upright wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 mounted on the front left of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been fired by the firing device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges the ball to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface swells forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the cash and the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emitting decoration.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in front view, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190; and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of a rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking unit 135 includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to respective upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions, and the door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The upper end of the lock spring 144 contacts the flange member 143, and the lower end of the lock spring 144 contacts the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is provided with a door frame when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be lowered below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is configured to insert the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 on the body frame side, or to pull it downward. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is viewed. The main frame 4 can be rotatably supported by the hinge.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which is supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a column-shaped door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in a front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for removably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three) are provided with ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear side can be viewed from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward from a position lower than the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 has a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear protruding piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction, so that the player can perform a pressing operation and can present a rendering image to the player. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a central side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 is capable of being pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller in diameter than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) such that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction, extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners at the top, bottom, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detecting pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are depressed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter of the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 includes an operation button spring 438 having four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 and being inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward. The operation button 410 is further restricted from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be viewed from the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. Thereby, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner part of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the rear, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and has a central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, respectively, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal covering substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421, and an inner peripheral surface of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut out to hide the operation button by a first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can display a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part with respect to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation buttons 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the effect operation unit 400, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 from near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Is mounted with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, so that when the player presses the operation button 410 from above in the same manner as a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is panned so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part, since it is mounted on the production operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326. In addition, the whole of the effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 is pressed against the player pressing the operation button 410. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape protruding forward (a part of a substantially spherical surface), the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. As compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  Moreover, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 in the operation button are formed of transparent members, The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated. This makes it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside decoration member 432 of the operation button are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. 46, the concavo-convex lines of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concavo-convex lines of the second button decoration portion 432g intersect with each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the center axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration section 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is increased. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the moving decoration and entertain the player.

  In this manner, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the interest of the player strongly and has a high appeal.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button right inner decoration board 432 inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operating button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operating button inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration part 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422 a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423 a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by illuminating the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the base unit 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (the door frame left side decorative board 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left side of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and on the front left side of the through-hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member to the lower part of the left unit. A left unit lower decorative base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111. ing. The left reflective standing wall portion 538 has a flat surface, and an inner surface provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. The reflecting surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface of the left reflecting wall 538 itself from a reflecting material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflecting seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (the left portion) of the above-described reflecting standing wall portion 33.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. A lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens unit 532 a and the square lens unit 532 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward in a dot shape. With the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c at the front surface. The input lens portion 532e bulging rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e generally increases outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, a groove portion is concavely arcuate backward, and a mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are circumferentially divided by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflector 532f when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between grooves is pointed backward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with respect to a radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the square lens unit 532b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface in the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When light that has been reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially in parallel with the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflection portion 532f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction decreases as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens 532d and is emitted forward from the square lens 532b. At this time, since the cross-section of the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b The light can be applied to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b forward has a shade of concentric striped pattern. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thus, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffused lens member 532, and the circular decorative portion formed at a position located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffused lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of vertically arranged rectangular pyramid-shaped portions on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In addition, the left decorative lens member has a multi-face decorative portion that is forwardly arranged from the square lens portion 532b of the left diffuser lens member 532 by light whose circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left diffuser lens member 532. Each of them is illuminated and decorated by the light applied to the light.

  The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction, with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 534 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end such that the upper side moves from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear as it moves upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, and a left-shaped part. A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent rearward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51A is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 55B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a front view right side of the through-hole 111, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the right side decorative board 552 are attached to the front of the right unit base 551 on the left side from the center in front view, and extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. An opaque box-shaped opaque right unit left light blocking member 559 and a light opaque mounted to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover A plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are provided. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension, extending shortly in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, an inner side surface which is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. In addition to this reflection surface, similarly to the inside surface of the left reflection standing wall portion 538, the inside surface of the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is not only provided from a reflection material such as metal or resin, but also reflected to the inside surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-described reflecting standing wall portion 33.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, and a center mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right unit right decoration member 557 with light emission through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has white front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a plate-shaped main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short plate-like manner. A notch 553c, which is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front view and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d which is shallowly recessed so as to be capable of housing the 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting rearward from the rear end face of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lens portions 553e provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a front end of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it moves forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 553e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in a radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward in a front view as it goes forward, so that the door frame Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection unit 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-blocking member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Accordingly, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f and left on the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. And more uniform light and shade can be radiated to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, a side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection part 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. A portion 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a front view right side of the main body portion 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. As shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the front as going from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 in the right unit can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped and a rectangular parallelepiped portion extending upward and downward, and to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center, a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left side of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right side of the main body 556a, and is reflected by the inner side of the right side to the side reflection section 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by striking the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. As a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f in the main body 556a and the light radiated to the left from the side reflector 556f to the right on the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a outward (to the right) is prevented from becoming light having a concentric striped light and shade. Thus, light with more uniform density can be radiated to the right. Thus, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right decorative member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the right decorative member 554 and the left cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened. The right unit left light-blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body 559a to the right in front view in a flat-plate shape, and a rear wall 559b. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a rectangular shape to the left from the right end side in the front view and formed in a plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The wall portion 559b extends rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extends rearward. A plurality of plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward. It is formed so as to be inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main units 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d which are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where the right unit right light blocking member 560 is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Accordingly, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with a predetermined width in the left and right direction. . Light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is converted into the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, since the inner space of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d, they are arranged behind the respective divided spaces. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 prevents light from interfering between the spaces, and a portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space is removed. , Can be independently illuminated. In other words, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to independently decorate each of them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at a front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Accordingly, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, when a problem such as clogging of a ball or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in the door frame right side unit 550, a right unit left decorative member 554, a right unit right decorative member 557, and a right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the members 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the malfunction and can be recognized, and the malfunction can be promptly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 59 is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571, which is mounted at the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like shape with open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits extending each and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and vertically separated A unit body 271 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 271 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the above, the outer outer light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window; Outside light detection unit 35 (left outside light detection unit 35a, right outside light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outside.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is mounted on the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 and have a plurality of slits 574b closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576 A plurality of (three left and right) transparent plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 over the opening 574a, respectively, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side, and the opening portions 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on portions of the plural (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b respectively formed on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 271 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of substrate bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of substrate bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is assembled diagonally to the door frame top unit 570, and each of the front surfaces is obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front in such a manner that lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 when viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a square extending left and right with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view, and a half of a full width (length in the left-right direction) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the square and defined as a base. The shape is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, the left and right sides of the part protruding forward at the center in the left and right direction on the front face connect the end in the left and right direction of the unit main body 271 and the left and right end of the front end of the part protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a that penetrate back and forth are formed at positions on the front surface of the unit from the left and right ends to the position outside the portion protruding forward. The unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely at a predetermined height in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the front surface that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a part of the front surface of the unit body 271 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to be three vertically separated from each other.

  The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The in-top decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent such that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is entirely formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that its front surface moves along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 and moves rearward downward. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The light guide member 578 will be described as a straight part extending right and left from the end to the center from the end toward the center. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the circular arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed such that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like unevenness, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc portion 578b and having a plurality of unevennesses. It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583 a and 584 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  Also, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is formed by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the whole of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the center in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front face of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular truncated pyramid protruding forward are arranged in right and left rows.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579, between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state where the top middle right decorative member 582 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative board 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall having a square shape in front view extending rightward and leftward outward from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper part of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so that it moves forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves to the front side toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to move to the front side. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled with the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light blocking members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in line with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member are provided. It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the top middle decoration member 576 projects greatly forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponding to the game board 5 having a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower part than the upper plate 321) (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326 c) on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The front surface of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is emphasized and emphasized to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is turned to the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, as well as left and right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 below the lower palate becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, which appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the lower part of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In comparison, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for pulling out game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322a is provided in the lower plate 322 in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so that the lower plate hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Because it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball 322. It can be guided to the hole 322a or indirectly reflected to the right wall to the hole 322a. Thus, in a state in which the lower dish hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are located on the left side of the lower dish hole 322a in the lower dish 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first region A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in which the lower plate 322 faces forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrude largely forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 in the top frame decoration unit 570 is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front edges of the top middle decoration member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the left and right front surfaces are located rearward. This allows only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to appear to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers separated from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the middle top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not conspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, so that the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player, and to make the player enjoy high quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  Thus, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  The door frame 3 has the top decoration member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction and the effect operation unit 400 projecting forward. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can see a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall structure of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 taken apart and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is a view of the game board of FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special lottered by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large winning prize port 2005 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached at a substantially center in the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  The back unit 3000 further includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3200 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable rendering unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back under the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. , Is provided. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step 1121 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. In addition, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner peripheral surface formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and from the front of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It has a plurality of protruding pins 1123 which extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward and engages resiliently with the engaging step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 so that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted. (A center side). By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claw 1124 and the engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The lower side of the rear surface of the out opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 has the same width as the out opening 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 which is notched upward from a lower end at a lower left corner in a front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates the notches 1011 and 1127 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 on the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of Gaming Panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wooden board such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1150 has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide part 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction in front view. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front, and is opened downward, and has a cutout 1152 having the same shape as the cutout 1011 of the front component 1000, and a vertical direction above the cutout 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  The game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating front and rear at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be inserted between the game panel 1150 and the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating before and after for mounting the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  In addition, various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transmissive members so that they can be visually checked from the outside. I have. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, particularly, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 has a surface with poor fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to countermeasures against fraud described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal holding indicator 1408 made up of two LEDs for indicating the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003, and a lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reserve consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery selected by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result. When the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, a round indicator 1407 made up of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is mainly provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board effect display device]
Next, the gaming board effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side face in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side face in front view. The game board-side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the back box 3010 into the 3010c, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. And a special winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at a lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is disposed in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially immediately below the stop section 1006. The second start port 2004 is arranged right below the gate 2003 from the front just below the gate 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center role 2500 that is attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

  The starting port unit 2100 is disposed just above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 is upwardly opened with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the large winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6 pieces), and extend left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to a game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly downward from the center in the up-down direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view in the game area 5a. The upper side unit 2300 has the left end of the shelf approaching the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is located on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes, from the front, a rendering unit and the like provided on the game board side rendering display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that a game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges the ball into the game area 5a. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a game board effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having an open front and having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is mounted rotatably about an axis extending left and right along the axis and accommodates the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 also includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3200 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable rendering unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back under the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is depressed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, and into which the left fixing piece 1601 is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back-to-back movable production unit 3100, a back-top left movable production unit 3200, a back-left movable production unit 3300, a back-up middle movable production unit 3400, and a back-bottom front movable production unit 3500. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, so that the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed. , A game ball can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is placed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is positioned right above the first start port 2002, and is accepted with high probability in the first start port 2002. When game balls are received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the area other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), On the downstream side, it flows down in the area where the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the second starting port 2004 is set to a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), the game machine is in the open state, and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Also, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period from when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to a maximum of four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit”, “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, and “5R big hit”. 15R jackpot "," probability change (probability change) "," time reduction (time reduction) "," probability change time reduction "," probability change time reduction no hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 is ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are supplied from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the special winning opening 2005 is set in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 If any one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in a non-acceptable closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the game board effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is a display in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated and displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, or the like) according to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the game board effect display device 1600 (the symbol row varies. (The time until the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center role 2500, various ornaments of back unit 3000, rear lower movable effect unit 3100, rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, rear left movable effect A light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the game can be performed by various effects. This can make the player entertain and can prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. In the window part, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation button 400 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is provided. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative section 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative section of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member inside the operation buttons of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side are the second decorative body of the present invention, and The second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration 432, the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration 476, and the peripheral decoration 478 of the screen unit 470 correspond to the second decoration of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is a luminous body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 correspond to the base portions of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration full of decorativeness with no perspective, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side (screen unit 470)), the effect display device 460 on the door frame side and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that the button lens 411 can be moved by the operation of the player, so that the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move. Then, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, and the like) approach or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, The first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478) change according to a change in the distance from the clean decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, and the like. , Etc.) can be changed to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration). The decoration (intersecting mode) by the member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decoration body Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration 411a and the second button of the operation button decoration member 432 are viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is much different, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. Through it, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well, and the radial shape of the first button decoration portion 411a can be seen. , The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A) or the door frame passes through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with the second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. Of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 cross each other, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. And the decoration by the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g can be made to stand out to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. it can.

  In addition, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g is provided. The decoration allows the player's line of sight and interest to be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that is visible in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, so that the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, each LED (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is mounted. When the LED 477a) emits light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light-emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner board are operated by the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button decoration section 432g includes the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button While the interior decoration board 435 and the interior decoration board 436 under the operation button are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a is decorated with the second button interior decoration. The part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) diffuses the light by the indirect light diffused. Since the second button decoration 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly light-emitting decorated while the first button decoration 411a is weakly light-emitting decorated, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, With the LEDs (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 emitting light, the first button decoration part 411a and the By looking at the two-button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the sense of perspective is emphasized, and to have a appealing power that can strongly attract the player's interest. A high pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, since the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the decoration member 432 inside the button lens 411 and the operation button (or the door) There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame-side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (or the door frame) are not required. The second side effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward and enlarged as much as possible, and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be made larger. 460A). Further, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be moved. The pachinko machine 1 can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance and attract the player's attention, and have a high appealing power.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is formed into a flat shape. Compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be hardly broken (hardly broken). Therefore, when the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being irritated and deteriorating the fun, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in burden on the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through-hole 111, the pachinko machine 1 has The outer diameter of the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advance / retreat) by being operated by a player in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ３０30 cm, and an operation button decoration that is visible from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. And the frame-shaped frame unit 415 to be attached, the effect operation unit 400 having the largest possible operation button 410 at the position where the storage bowl of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (second Since the staging operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 provided with the unit 411b and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b. First LED 422a, 423a for light-emitting decoration of second button decoration unit 411b, and second LED 422b, 423b for light-emitting decoration of frame side lens 417, are provided with frame side lens 417 and second button. The inside of the frame body 416 that partitions between the decorative part 411b Since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the cylindrical part 416d, the second button decoration part 411b, and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical part 416d and the main body are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration part 411b by the 413a and the inner extension 413f. Lighting can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. Therefore, each of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly and luminously decorated, and a good-looking luminescence effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining light-off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b, light emission effects of various patterns are performed. This can make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and can also entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Also, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light emission and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with one operation button left outer decoration. Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration unit is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. The first LEDs 422a and 423a can be moved as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b as compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently emitted. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the luminous decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 is moved in accordance with the advance / retreat of the operation button 410. In addition, the wiring connected to the decoration board 423 outside the operation button does not bend or extend, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected, and thus the operation button 410 can be moved (operation) or the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminous decoration can be enjoyed by the player without any problem, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 pass through the transparent button lens 411. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edges of the operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Is decorated, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light as appropriate, so that the decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emitting effect and operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). The effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge is made operable by the player, the operation button 410 is provided to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By causing the player to operate, the operation of the operation buttons 410 (player participation type effect) can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player-participation type effect and entertain.

  Furthermore, since it has an opaque main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that enable only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged rearward because the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is bright. The decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be prevented from being hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration and the luminous effect sufficiently, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion from the portion 411b. On the other hand, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is provided at an end (rear end) of the inner cylindrical portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer side Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. I will not. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described operation and effect can be realized.

  Further, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. The body and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely separated by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body 413a on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 Also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body part 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Can be. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can fully enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the part 411b is located, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members and the rear side (rear side) outside the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, so that the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button decoration member 432 (the second effect on the door frame side) changes the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) become relatively dark, the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decoration member 432 in the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b are provided. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, a light emission effect in which light turns around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, and the like, the player can be bored with various light emission effects, and can enjoy the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game, in which the stored game balls are driven into the game area 5a on the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3, is used. At the same time, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 so that a predetermined space is provided behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, a portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is located from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, so that the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively easily noticeable. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were viewed vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the upper portion extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends toward the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are brought into contact with or pressed against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the interest of the player from being lowered, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  Further, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad or uncomfortable by entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j with the game ball, and to enjoy the game for the player. Can be suppressed.

  Also, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 in the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce inside the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. Also, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can move the lower plate main body 325 to the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion). When a hand is put into the lower plate second area A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, so that the fingertips can be prevented. Or the like can be prevented from touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. caused by the contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340, 340A. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340, 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, since the lower plate hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, the lower plate hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged from the lower plate body 325 into the main body. It is difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged, to reduce interruption of the game, and to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Also, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Accordingly, since the speed of the game balls in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be reduced, the lower ball covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition to this, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls contact the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, it can be easily repaired simply by replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce an increase in the burden on the gaming hall on which the player 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction expands forward most below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as accepting a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After being provided on the plate unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been protruded, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the portion that protrudes forward, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is provided with a storage plate capable of storing game balls. The storage plate (the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) is provided outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in a front view. A space at the rear of the lower space first area A1 and the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. , The effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage dish (upper dish 321) can be seen. In addition, the lower plate 322) can be made small and less noticeable. Therefore, a stunning effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen in a portion where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the gaming machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player. Can be recognized at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be provided.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional portion 325B, the second additional portion 325C, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in a region of the lower plate 322 that is not visible from the front (lower plate second area A2). it can. Therefore, a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be ensured contrary to the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first additional portion 325B, and the second additional portion. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portions 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C having a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, and the like, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), the various rendering operation units 400 (second The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the effect operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 has a container shape depressed downward, and the game ball is formed. Can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portions 340a that rise from the upper ends of the main body standing wall portions 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, various configurations can be accommodated. Accordingly, the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are connected to the portion where more game balls are loaded by storage. No boundary (joint, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even when a large number of game balls are stored, a force such that the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. The lower plate cover 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off the lower plate main body 325 without acting.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as receiving a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower operation ball supply port 323c and a lower operation hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And more than half of the lower plate 322 including (i.e., the player) is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (the player). The pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the user. Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize a game ball heading from the lower counter ball supply port 323c to the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a, a game in the lower plate 322 is provided to the player. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and prevent the ball from being distracted, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish of the lower plate 322 of the lower dish 322 that guide game balls from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). Since the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d between the ball hole 322a and the ball guiding portion 322c is made difficult to see, the lower plate hole 322a is left open. The game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is guided by the guide means and is smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is possible to give an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate hole 322a, and the like. In addition, the lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). In other words, since at least half of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate 322 is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

  Further, in a state in which the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supply port 323c are transferred to the lower bowl supply port 323c on the bottom of the lower bowl 322 and the lower bowl 322c. The guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d can smoothly guide the ball to the lower plate hole 322a and discharge it to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to surely make the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front (a player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player from being distracted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is kept open, the game balls supplied to the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supply port 323c can be immediately sent to the player without being noticed by the ball guiding section 322c or the like. Since it is possible to discharge the ball downward from the lower plate hole 322a, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower portion (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is at least twice as large as the size of 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of stored game balls, similarly to the conventional lower plate of a pachinko machine.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as accepting a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit mounting for mounting a large-scale effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 of FIG. In addition to the portion 326a, the dish lower decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than substantially the center in the vertical direction, is recessed so as to go back. Because of the shape, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the production operation unit attaching portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate are viewed side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see it. At a glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the dish front lower decorative portion 326c that is recessed rearward on both left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently ensured. It is not necessary to play while paying attention to the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls, so that the player can be dedicated to the game, and the game can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), when the player places his hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip of the lower plate 322 becomes lower. The rear wall 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like can be made hard to touch. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently secured even by touch, and when the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the lower plate 322 Since it can be recognized that many game balls are stored in the game, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, and the like, the player has the same feeling as the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity given to a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making the player relieved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rearward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is less noticeable on the front surface (the lower front decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to increase the appealing power to the player and to increase the player's appeal. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 covers the side and upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) with the lower plate cover 340, the player can move the lower plate 322 into the lower plate 322. When the hand is put in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from being injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent a game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's attention, and the decoration by the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, it is possible to entertain the decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball hole 322a that penetrates up and down so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine is used. Has the same function as the lower plate in the above, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, when playing with the present pachinko machine 1, will not be confused about the function of the lower plate 322, as in the past It is possible to play a game with such a feeling that the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower counter ball supply port 323c and the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is viewed from the front. The lower ball hole 322a is invisible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer and the appearance can be improved, and a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the player's interest. Machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to a player on a base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the present invention. Of the operation button decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) which decorates the outside of the device, and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470). The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a protruding transparent button lens 411 is attached, and a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Since there is a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the decoration inside the operation buttons are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. The outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the side of the door frame) are reduced from being seen from the gap between the member 432 (the screen unit 470). Thus, the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 in the operation button provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button button 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) to be separated from each other. Since it is possible to make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration portion 411a and the like even if the gap between the large operation button and the large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented. 410 (button lens 411) can be realized without any problem. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent, and the player's interest becomes stronger. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained by attracting.

  Further, since the button base 413 (the main body 413a) that projects in a tubular shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 (operation button internal member) are provided. When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the outer wall of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be shielded by the inner wall of the button base 413 to make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is reduced. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the moving direction of the operation button 410. (A plane perpendicular to the plane), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) are combined by combining the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are provided. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device that allows the player to entertain with the operation buttons 410 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more enjoyable can be realized.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorativeness) is imparted to the operation button 410. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In addition, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 The clearance between the lens 411 and the decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) inside the operation button can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) inside the operation button. Deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like can be reduced to improve the appearance.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 over the entire circumference with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to form a player. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button (screen unit 470) of the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decoration member 432 in the operation button ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be satisfactorily moved.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is formed in a cylindrical shape, the direction of the outer periphery is eliminated as compared with the case where the button lens 411 is formed in a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain a player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the operation buttons 410 are enlarged, when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation buttons 410, it is easy to check the position of the operation buttons 410 without having to operate them. Since the touch operation can be easily performed by touching the operation button 410, the player can easily participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is provided with the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the effect image of the player can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be used. The effect can be enjoyed, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by the effect image or the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making the player actively participate in and entertain the player in the player participation type effect. Also, by performing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make a player think that something is good, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. Can be.

  Further, it is possible to visually recognize the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). This allows the player to immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the present pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and has a high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and a player's expectation for the operation using the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation buttons 410 is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For a pachislot machine, a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed at a portion on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decoration portion 411a may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed in a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) of the operation button 410 surrounds the entire outer circumference of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the outer periphery of the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (the main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation member decorative member 432 and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display units 460A may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a planar decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is desirably subjected to light diffusion processing such as a grain, a slit, a prism, or the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate 322 is described as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, and is recessed backward from both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). 322, or may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), and a part may wrap around behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It may be.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the lower portion of the lower plate 322 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the lower front decorative portion 326c) is curved rearward. Although an example in which the shape is concave is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and a polygonal prismatic surface or a polyhedron-shaped concave front surface may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A device having a rotating body having a decoration on its surface, a device having a decoration having a decoration, and a movable device for moving the decoration, Characters, items, logos, and decorations that simulate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine. ”,“ Characters, items, logos, etc. Or a member having a decoration such as a seal, printing, or the like ", or a member such as a panel. The number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j may be attached.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a which is opened forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. In addition, on the front of such a dish unit cover, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine can be applied by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is set by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. An area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to visually recognize from the front, The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as arc-shaped ones partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an elliptical shape) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side second effect. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is provided under a predetermined condition. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, “a device such as a magic mirror, the rear side of which can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side”, and “a liquid crystal film, which is transparent when the power is turned on / off,” Or become opaque so that the rear side can be seen. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By having a variable light transmission means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member, or, the front member and the rear member, is in a visible state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member disposed on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen, The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapped decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, and the player can be hardly bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  More specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member is darkened by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by a player. When the space between the front member and the rear member, or the rear side of the rear member, is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member The decoration by the surface of the player can be shown to the player. When the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (eg, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, When the space between the rear member and the light emitting portion such as an LED is brightened, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED). ), And the fulfillment conditions of the respective variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are respectively satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) passes through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting a portion to be brightened by the light of the light-emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror, but similar effects can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmission means such as a liquid crystal film can transmit light even in an opaque state (has translucency), the light can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, a variety of effects such as a light emitting effect and a decorative effect can be shown to the player. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram showing a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a connection terminal board for a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG which performs a process for generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V) and a control relating to a game including payout of award balls. And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect related to a game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The two control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG that controls the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, such as a main control program for controlling game operations, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like; A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input; a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like; a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids; A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for a power failure or a momentary power failure at a predetermined voltage. Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the once assigned ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 32767 is set as the minimum value in advance in this embodiment), The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a). Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly duplicated based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are transmitted to the various input terminals. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function without a reset terminal and having no reset function And, it consists of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and the information is output. , Is configured as a circuit in which no signal is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. A signal based on the output signal is output from the various output terminals.

  60, a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and the like. A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting a game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Also, a gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to detect cheating using a magnet is transmitted to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on a detection signal from each of these switches, so that a main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, and a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the panel relay board 4161 and the first special symbol display 1403 via the function display unit 1400 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the ordinary symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) relating to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main circuit with a reset function is output. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. As the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 frequently occurs. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game ball. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 and 2012 where the game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that an input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port is performed. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a mainly includes a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects to the bus 1310ah. It is connected to the circuit (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are provided when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and an operation signal from the operation switch 954 (RAM clear signal). Is output from the dispensing control board 951, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (Cleared).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like, as shown in FIG. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. An operation switch 954 also having a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. ) Is output as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out a game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and detection of various payout-related detection switches A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d and a CR unit for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program converts various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 into a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) upon occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates an operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error release navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b as serial data of the serial system as a signal (command transmitting means). The payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process was executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process was executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information according to the error is stopped (error canceling control means).

  When a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command). When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the dispensing control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The dispensing control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and dispensing control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function. And, it consists of. The payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a later-described dispensing control system reset. , Is configured as a circuit in which no signal is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. A signal based on the output signal is output from the various output terminals.

  An out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting an out-of-ball of a game ball in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the discharge control MPU 952a via the discharge control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the interface.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data system, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting the signal to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

The dispensing control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the dispensing control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and output the status of the pachinko machine 1 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port to an error LED display. By outputting a drive signal to be displayed on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830) is given, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, the payout rotator and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance, so that the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. Notification) and the number When “3” is displayed, it is notified that “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the fullness detection sensor 279, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls). Is displayed, and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut in any one from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is predetermined). That the number of balls has been reached).

  The payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game room (a hall). ), The number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there is an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal plate 784 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down. The main computer 1310 that progresses the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout and the like are provided. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first transmitted to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The input is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball rental display unit 330 to the game ball. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending display unit 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. I have. The payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1 in the power-off processing. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, the operation signal is transmitted to the predetermined information of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. Input to the input terminal of the input port, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental devices such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control substrate 951, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (Accurately, the game ball rental terminal connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880.) , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay is performed. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected.) Between the CR unit 6 and the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. Each wiring (harness) is electrically connected between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the board with the connection terminal board 869 for a game ball or the like and the frequency display board 365. In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) and the ground voltage LG. The game ball and the like are supplied to the payout control board 951 via the connection terminal board 869, and the game ball and the like are supplied to the frequency display board 365 via the connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch is positioned at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. Is mounted, and a ball return display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. The input is made to the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  The ball lending display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line. The three-digit segment indicators are sequentially driven one digit at a time. The lighting of the digit segment indicator is controlled. By such lighting control, the ball rental display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of three signals) for specifying a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display. Are turned on and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of seven signals) for designating the content to be displayed are provided from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the plate 880, the one-digit segment display is sequentially lit according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content by the light emission of the container can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363.

  Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental display section 330. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL via a CR unit lamp 365d, a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the like. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be loaned in one payout operation (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen). Is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And a PRDY signal for notifying that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible is output to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board for connecting a lending device for a gaming ball or the like. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the clerk of the hall or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that a game ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for 200 yen in total are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of paid out game balls as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 that can be electrically connected to or cut off from 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from a pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to rectify 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor improving circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power supply generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a controls the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launching (firing) a game ball according to the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the firing control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal for notifying the fact via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls a drive current for launching (firing) a game ball toward the game area 5a based on an operation signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, The control of sending the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side is performed.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. An effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side effect display device 1600 and a door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, and also controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information for specifying the year, month, day, and time. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and a lower speaker 92 And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and various light emission modes such as LEDs) that are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a blank signal is input Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information such as information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c cannot retain the stored contents only for the time when the power is immediately restored after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (for example, when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931 (not shown). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d stores the stored contents. You can't keep it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted. Motor output data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the rendering operation unit 400. Are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, which are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and the system runs out of control using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Diagnosis of whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I, with the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at the center. / Peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read and written various data via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, and a peripheral control various parallel I. A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between the I / O port 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading / writing from / to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ab g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without input / output devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a frame decoration driving amplifier board, a motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by employing a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. As a result, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control potentiometer 1510a. When the knob of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is rotated, the resistance value is variable, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is controlled. The voltage divided according to the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to a game effect are notified. (For example, to render the screen displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound volume is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to music and sound effects, it is possible to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 or to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. , Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read out and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or may be used when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board-side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further added by 5%, and the game board side is turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power supply of the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired for the 75%. The backlight of the game board effect display 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores, among the various types of information updated by the execution of the various control programs, backup information that exclusively stores the information to be backed up. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy areas 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of the various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. A various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing the copied data, and a backup non-management target for exclusively storing, among the various information updated by executing the various control programs, those not to be backed up. And a work area 1511cf.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and is cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. Regarding the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts RAM clear effect. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described below. ) Is backed up as a backup target, and effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. And Bank0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information. Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank0”, “Bank1”, where the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4" (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set. Other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. ai includes various kinds of information (for example, the effect of the operation operation) of acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data. Directed with peripheral control board 1510 based on LOCKN signal to be described later output to convey A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor-drive-board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf includes a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. −DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is performed in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed is set. The processing proceeds based on the processing.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of presentation information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms), which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs as the effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511 cc is managed as one page, with one pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms). The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511 cc is a pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and a pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d include a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to a momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Also, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Is to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit game state) Etc.), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" provided in an area from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with one pair of two banks as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the second backup area 1511dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing one pair of the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area. An area 1511dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source for controlling, and various character data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of a screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. LCD and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that is disposed near the lower part of the device 460 and is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511. A signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the differential circuit 1512e for differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forcible switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b includes, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, etc., the body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 can be viewed from the player, the display of the service mode screen Break used to display service mode screen image data and break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to incorporate the sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, changes the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control ROM 1511b. After being extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the head sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A built-in VRAM is also provided (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay. The effect display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board effect display device 1600 are Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is, as described above, the peripheral data. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1, the V-by-One ( (Registered trademark) ", the system is less affected by noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to effect display drive board 4450. The serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, which is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 for one screen (1). Frame data) on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and the door frame side Image data for effect display device 460 is shown from channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to rendering data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 in the built-in VRAM. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. The “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this system, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel numbers. An output channel is set, music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized, and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the sound is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track used The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually compared with the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of outputting the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 will be briefly described. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually The volume is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the production sound progressing in accordance with the schedule data is set as the sub-volume value again by adjusting the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the production operation unit 400 is set). When the operation mode is changed to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set.) It is flowing.

  As described above, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1, Although the sound volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data. Then, when the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start flowing again from the point where the notification sound started flowing, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed after the notification sound started flowing. It starts to flow again from where you have progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for directing door frame side]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the interface based on the parallel system is used for the channel CH2. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , Green video signal, and blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, that is, a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to distinguish, the lower two bits that are output from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a and contain the weak color information are invalidated.

  Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Are input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs three image signals of a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. A signal and a clock signal are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and only one differential pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, so that the path from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600 is provided. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door. Since the signal is output (transmitted) to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side (No. Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite side of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. On the side of the main frame 4, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the upper plate 321 is provided on the closed side of the main body frame 4. A full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching out the paid game balls to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is provided.
In addition, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is arranged. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise due to the electrostatic discharge by the game balls, and the like. In an environment that receives noise and the like that has entered the vehicle.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the transmission control IC 1512d for the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes " By adopting the differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less affected by noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not a parallel line provided simply in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where a parallel line is employed as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the electronics for the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided by THine Electronics. Even if a mechanism that is hardly affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., such a hardware configuration alone causes an electrostatic discharge of a game ball. When serial data in parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from the pachinko machine equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. For effect on the door frame side provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) at the time of reception by the transceiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The frame data is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as disturbed data different from the normal data, and in the display area of the door frame-side effect display device 460, an image such as a so-called sandstorm is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The directing transmitter IC 1512d employs a differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise. In addition to such a hardware configuration, A twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. Thus, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display controller 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 In the connection between the two, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally formed, but are separately assembled, and the structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4 is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Accordingly, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the main frame 4 so that the maintenance of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. If it is not possible to solve the problem occurring in the door frame 3, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various kinds provided on the door frame 3' side are provided. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs the differential communication “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Was employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver. More specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive. Each of the substrates and the substrate 4450 is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while each of power supply wires and other wires for transmitting various signals is electrically connected by a harness. Accordingly, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 include, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data in the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates, such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on these relay terminal plates is formed on these relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of a signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is reduced. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral door relay board. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red, the other is gray, the power supply wires of the harness are red, and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In the differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Is transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection to transmit the two signals, When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Have been. Accordingly, when two signals that have been differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit connection is performed so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a period of displaying the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on on the gaming board effect display device 1600, or performing a demonstration by the gaming board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and converts various serialized signals. And a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for restoring the signal to a parallel signal and outputting the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Upon receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , And outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying the predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal and outputs the image to the gaming board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 transmits the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Then, the signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the control unit. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the plate unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that a failure has not occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the 320, if no LOCKN signal has been input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "A failure has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device." Play the game board side by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In addition to outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "there is a problem with the upper-panel liquid crystal display device.") To that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and adds the acquired calendar information and time information to the RTC information. The effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition, in addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the luminance setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date of manufacture and the date and time of manufacture, which is hours, minutes, and seconds.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the production date and time. Sometimes, it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is desired. Or the brightness of the image. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the game board effect is displayed. The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and sets calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. Brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5% which is the correction information obtained for. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information obtained by the correction. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the peripheral date and time described later. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current date and time may be specified.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob of the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1, (E.g., a screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or a notification that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, or the like). Etc.) also flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, so that the sound is muted. The maximum sound volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound volume is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is directed as a more powerful one, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. I have. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music and the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. And adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation to increase or decrease the value of the board volume, thereby adjusting the volume of music or sound effects. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the hall clerk who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel noisy for the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the user operates the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, enters a waiting state for customers, and performs a demonstration using the game board effect display device 1600. If the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall low, the effect operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the store clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the production operation unit By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, the state becomes a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. Accordingly, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, this time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player playing the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the player who has been playing feels loudly at the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud about the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time can use the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 or the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. Power system]
Next, a power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 and FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the hit ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the connection terminal board 869 for a rental device for game balls and the like via the power supply board 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified power to the power factor improving circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies the DC + 37V to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the resulting signal to the emission control circuit 953a of the emission control unit 953 and the power generation circuit 935d.

  Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 952a of payout control unit 952 in payout control board 951. Backup power to the supplied RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball at a launching strength (firing strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302, as shown in FIG. By controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 682, the ball feeding unit 250 outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 to thereby control the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d supplies a direct current + 5V (+ 5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+ 5V"), a + 12V direct current (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V") and a direct current from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24 V (DC +24 V, hereinafter referred to as “+24 V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is a + 5V power line, the power system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is a + 12V power line, and the power system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is a + 24V power line.

  The + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V generating circuit 1310g generates + 5V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout is performed. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the discharge control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The current flows toward the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electric connection method of + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 by an electric connection method in which the supply control substrate 951 returns to the power supply substrate 931 from the supply control substrate 951. Is supplied and can be charged. Thus, when the + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the current does not flow, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the stored contents are maintained by supplying the power supply terminal VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g allows a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward directed by the diode MD0, the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by supplying + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V generation circuit 1310g can generate + 5V. When the power is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB. Although the current is interrupted by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current does not flow, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, three kinds of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three kinds of voltages, + 12V and + 12V Two kinds of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are supplied to the peripheral via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the three kinds of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter, referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board effect display 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to a backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V generation circuit 194a that generates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. In addition to + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates and the like of the door frame 3.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-panel-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates + 3.3V from + 12V. The + 3.3V generated by the upper-panel-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid-crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. And the door frame side effect display device 460. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0 and, for example, to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5 V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and generates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V. On the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. With such a circuit configuration, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply line of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from the + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the power failure or the instantaneous blackout of + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a power failure or a momentary power failure at + 12V and + 24V. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the data is input to the decorative board of the door frame and the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, that is, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, and applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line. As compared with the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Circuit of main control board]
Next, circuits and the like of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described. Various input / output signals to the controller and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid driving circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310g shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 77, in addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), thereby first removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage). And smoothed.

  The + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). , The ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 has a power outage or a momentary power outage at a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of which is connected to a ground (GND) with a capacitor MC4. Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, the + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V generation is performed. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is hindered by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the capacitance of this capacitor MC5 sets the delay time by the delay circuit. You can do it. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is smaller than the threshold value while the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing a ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected at one end to the other end of the capacitor MC8 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A, B, C, and ST in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the output terminal F by applying + 5V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND). It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this circuit receives an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 and the like. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, only the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The operation is performed when the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have a function of canceling an error of the payout control board 951, if an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal to clear the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is output from the payout control board 951. HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 10A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control substrate 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the main control board 1310 is operated while the operation switch 954 is operated. In this case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and inputted.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a must instruct that the RAM stored in the main control built-in RAM be erased to clear the RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform a RAM clear for deleting information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is increased by using the voltage of + 12V. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are shifted to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two kinds of voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors + 12V and + 24V signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when detecting a power failure or a momentary power failure sign, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. 951 to the payout control MPU 952 a and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of a +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or momentary power failure, and output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal, which is a reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is a cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) serving as a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , +12 V and the reference voltage Vref. The third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V, and the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring terminal V2 of +12 V is applied to a fifth terminal, which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to a sixth terminal, which is a minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line and one end. The other end of the resistor MR22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, and the other end of the resistor MR21, MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to fall from + 24V when + 24V fails or momentarily stops. , The monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 has a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12 V is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, a fifth terminal, which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and one end. The other end of the resistor MR25, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the resistor MR24, MR25; Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +12 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47 V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of + 12V starts to fall from + 12V when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. , The monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The terminal is electrically connected to a PR terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

  When the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure notice signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal as the D input terminal in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic becomes LOW is inputted to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal inputted to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal). On the other hand, when the signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured such that when a signal whose logic becomes HI is inputted to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic of the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is LOW. Is maintained, a state where a signal whose logic is HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from the 1Q is a negative logic). The state of output from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal as the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal are each grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal is connected to the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal as the D input terminal is stored, and is not output from the 1Q terminal as the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 supplies a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, for monitoring the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary interruption, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal for inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The power outage clear signal is output after the main control MPU 1310a performs power-on processing to be described later and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches a state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal as LOW.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951, and also outputs a peripheral power failure notice signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b for electrically connecting the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed through the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  A circuit including the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal that is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and is connected to the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Also, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). (Harness) is electrically connected to the payout control board 951. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the subsequent transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The MTR21 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, that is, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The first-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the first-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the second-stage transistor MTR22, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the second-stage switch circuit is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. By being input, the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is reduced to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, whereby the latter transistor MTR22 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is increased to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 of the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 1511 in peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board. 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310b for transmitting a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the control circuit 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, has one transistor, and a power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral. While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. Main control without reset function to output as power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage. The logic of the payout power failure notification signal is based on the logic of the power failure notification signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure notification signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. And is different from the logic of the power failure notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is also connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected to the payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the power control unit 1310 is mounted on the main control MPU 1310a, the power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is provided between the main control MPU 1310a and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 in order to suppress the influence of noise entering a wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU952a and peripheral control MPU1511a Is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to / from main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. An RXA terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 via the main control input circuit 1310b as a main serial data reception signal. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as a main payment serial data transmission signal without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb transmits a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and transmits the serial data transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is transmitted as the peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above is input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, and, for example, a payout that notifies the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The main payment output ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951, and the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function And outputs drive signals from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to various displays, and outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to output the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The control output circuit 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, and the like.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. To the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is increased by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Have been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. ).

To the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310, +12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied via the dispensing control board 951, and to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50, the minus terminal is grounded to ground (GND). Is electrically connected to a positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power outage or a momentary power outage, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main charge serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and the transmission can be completed as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

  As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of the intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main serial data, a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is set to HI by + 12V can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main circumference serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is connected to the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the gate. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is connected to ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is shifted to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  To the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510, + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground terminal (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to a Vcc terminal (terminal No. 6) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (the fourth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (the fifth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main circumference serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Input terminal.

  Accordingly, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or a momentary power failure occurs, by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, a main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without being lost.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is raised to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 Is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the lowered voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. As described above, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V which is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line is reduced, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained. The control reference voltage includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. With no reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 decreases due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, the terminal is the second auxiliary power supply. By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thus, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  The plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all configured as main circumference serial data and are constituted by a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. Thereby, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that allows all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main circumference serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed through the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off or delete a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Can be reliably received.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, and various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The + 5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage). The second terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which a noise component has been removed.

  The third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, and smoothing is performed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to a power supply terminal of a payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. . The power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is provided with a power supply terminal, a VDD terminal. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a, and a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the payout control substrate 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is reduced to VBB. Since the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the current does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by the application of the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 for outputting a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in the present embodiment, 8 MHz) for outputting a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and the various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the capacitance of the capacitor PC5 sets the delay time by the delay circuit. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to an SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a reset terminal of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. The SRT0 terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each a negative logic input. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. Further, the smoothed +5 V is applied to not only the VCC terminal but also an OE terminal which is an output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from an OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to a ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power failure notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main frame 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by a circuit to which a detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, a circuit to which a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit for inputting a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor and a circuit for inputting an operation signal from the operation switch will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration for inputting the detection signal from the switch is substantially the same, the circuit for inputting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state where 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 20A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is also pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27, which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 has a + 12V power supply in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit including the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit including the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit including the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are provided with a door frame opening switch. A switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor PTR 20 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. You. When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is increased to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 because the door frame open switch 618 is OFF. As a result, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is increased to + 5V, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is increased to + 5V, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI outputs the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a by turning off the door frame opening switch 618. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame release switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut off) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door open information output signal.

  The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of a signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a voltage change from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor is turned off. The PTR 24 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the main frame becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR 28. As a result, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board. 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. Then, while the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned off, and the logical Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of a state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. , It is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, but the door frame 3 and / or The player that the main body frame 4 is open can determine that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer end The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, Alternatively, although it cannot be determined whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player who has opened the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 does not normally occur during the game. It can be determined that this has occurred.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the normally open switches of the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are employed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the switch is turned on (conducting), the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducting) for some reason. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (a door frame opening switch 618 ′ and a body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 'is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 is opened for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when a normally open switch is used for the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a disconnection occurs. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of the power failure or the instantaneous interruption of the two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large value are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the paid outage power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the correction of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is performed. Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V. At this time, since the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic has become HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V When there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. , The logic of the payout power failure notification signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the output terminal is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line on the payout control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the third terminal PIC50 through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC40 has a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to When the signal which has been pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI in the payout control board 951 is input to the payout control board 951, the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When a signal whose logic is set to HI by being pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor 44a is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when a signal whose logic is LOW due to being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is raised to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47, and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are supplied to a T-type filter circuit such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. This is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the tank fullness detection sensor 279 is compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the ejection detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the ejection device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. However, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a uses the full tank detection sensor. When it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. Control is performed. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the payout motor 834 has a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored but is not full. In some cases, the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls. When the payout rotator is controlled to rotate the payout rotator to continue paying out the game balls, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 becomes unable to rotate when the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball path described above. The dispensing motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally generates heat to cause a failure, or the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotator. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is firstly subjected to a three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor so that a noise component is removed. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The first and second terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are set to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Also, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding and succeeding stages are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is converted into an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48, and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is + 12V in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly fluctuates on / off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 due to.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from an operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (discharge control built-in RAM) incorporated in the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. The operation is performed when the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from time and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). Function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). In the function for canceling the error in ()), the signal is an error cancel signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes HI becomes the transistor of the preceding stage. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned on, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned on. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 43. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 at the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit at the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. It is determined that the instruction is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. , The transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Will be entered. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, as shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes the transistor of the preceding stage. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 42. Is increased to the +5 V side by the resistor PR51, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that the instruction is given.

  When the operation switch 954 is operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation whose logic becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the RAM becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, receives the logic HI shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to a + 12V power line and a + 5V power line, respectively, to which +12 and + 5V are applied, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be. The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. And the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 via the zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor driving voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is connected to the ground. Discharge motor drive signals are input to certain first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-mentioned zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to a stage preceding the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. Circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 sends BRDY, which is a ball request signal, and BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6 through the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. Are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from 24 V AC supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while a payout control board 951 connects a rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible via terminal board 869. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, input / output circuits for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly include photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and is connected to a transistor via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) without inverting the logic). Is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to a power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) having one end electrically connected to + 12V power supply line at power supply substrate 931 Is electrically connected to the other end. By turning on / off the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. You.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. You.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and a payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the EXS logic output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is different from the EXS signal logic output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible or impossible from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is transmitted via the resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the PDY signal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, an RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via a payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit without resetting function 952cb as the main serial data transmission signal. The payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

  The input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a are connected to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, the dispensing power failure notice signal, the door opening signal, the full signal, and various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) from the CR unit 6. In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output via the payment control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, respectively, to output the EXS signal and the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-described voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage control signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. The payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. Besides doing A payer ACK signal for notifying that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the payer ACK signal is mainly controlled from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output signal is output to the substrate 1310 or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. Output to

[10-3. Various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to external terminal boards]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 includes a payer serial data transmission signal, a payer ACK signal, an operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 includes a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, Games such as jackpot information output signals such as two round jackpot information output signals, probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving information output signals, starting opening winning information output signals, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches ten. Prize ball number information output signal outputted every time, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal A game information signal such as an output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, an information output signal during time reduction, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. I do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 and an award ball number information output signal from the payout control board 951 are output to the external terminal board 784, and the main award ball count from the main control board 1310 is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, hourly information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a game or the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in two rounds (two round jackpots). The number of big hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of big hits of 15 rounds (the number of big hits of 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of occurrences of two rounds or the number of occurrences of 15 land jacks from the total number of jackpots, so that the number of jackpots actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is disposed above the pachinko machine 1. Some players select whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be skewed toward the number of occurrences of the two round jackpots. 15 rounds big hit may not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may excite the player more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer outputs the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer has the number of occurrences of the 2 round jackpot, The number of occurrences of the 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the number of jackpots actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is two round jackpots or 15 round jackpots, and the data counter shows 15 round jackpots. The number of occurrences of big hits and the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of 15 rounds of big hits can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big hit game state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the two round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from the occurrence of the two round jackpot until the end, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal also has the 15 round jackpot information output signal. It is output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the two round big hit information output signal and the fifteen round big hit information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a two round big hit occurs, the two round big hit information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a two-round jackpot information output signal and a 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, a 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered by the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

  As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, an ordinary symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. A signal that indicates that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal includes various prize ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize ports 2001 and 201, and the large prize port 2005 shown in FIG. Is a signal that informs the player every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the game reaches 10 balls. In the state The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability variation is a signal that indicates that the probability variation is occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that there is, and the special symbol display information 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that the state is "stopped", and the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal in a state where the variable display of the ordinary symbol is ended (stopped) on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The information output signal is a signal that informs that there is a certain time reduction, and the information output signal during time reduction is a signal that indicates that the time reduction state is occurring. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is used for outputting a prize ball number information output signal in white. As described above, the number-of-prize-balls information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer sets the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the number of prize balls information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and to grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player whose door frame 3 and / or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during a normal game. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the body frame 4 are open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It is possible to know that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is a signal that indicates that the state is a state. In the present embodiment, the change of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is terminated (stopped) from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the display of the change of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and to count the number of times to display the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting port winning information output signal. The starting port winning information output signal is, as described above, a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the game ball is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer executes the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and to count the number of times that the starting opening winning information output signal has been inputted, and to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

  The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15-round jackpot is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of times when the 15 round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15 round big hit information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the two-round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the two round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a two round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the two round jackpot information output signal is input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of times that the two round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the two round big hit information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT7 is for outputting a normal symbol display information output signal in blue. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal for notifying that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal and, when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the ordinary symbol has been completed (stopped), and to count the number of times, and to display the total variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal during the time reduction. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that indicates that a time saving state is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the information output signal during time reduction from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time reduction state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during time reduction is input. In addition to counting the number of times the information output signal has been input during the time reduction, the total number of times that the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT9 is orange and outputs the information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that the probability fluctuation is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the information output signal during probability variation is input, sets the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the probability variation is occurring. It is possible to grasp that there is, and to count the number of times that the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is provided with a light blue color and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the ball that has hit the ball reaches ten, this signal is transmitted to the ball. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the main prize ball information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. Game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various prize ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize ports 2001 and 201, and the special prize port 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. The output is made at intervals of 0.128 seconds so as to form one continuous signal.

  Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and a wiring having a connector colored in the same color as these colors is electrically connected to each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are connected to the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center to the right side, also in this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side Wiring to carry signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 to the hole, respectively. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island facility side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 accidentally hits 15 rounds at the time when the remaining number is low, the number of the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as the prize balls is insufficient, so that the payout is performed. (For example, if the ball is clogged or the ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of awarded ball number information output signals output on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 as the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 as prize balls. Since the game signal cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall or the like. The clerk at the hall, for example, checks a hose-shaped replenishing nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (for example, if the ball is caught in the payout device 830). Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball is identified) and resolved to return to a state in which the game balls are paid out.

  However, even when the clerk of the hall is proceeding with the work, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and after the 15 round big hit, the game ball is paid out by the work of the clerk of the hall. When returning to the state where the payout control board 951 is returned, the payout control board 951 pays out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal indicating that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches ten, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. In this case, an extremely large number of game balls are paid out even during the period in which the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the relationship cannot be accurately grasped by the hall computer.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 receives the game balls entered into various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the number of game balls reaches ten, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal notifying that, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. Via a hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned trouble (trouble such as clogged ball in the supply nozzle or the like, clogged ball in the dispensing device 830 or the like) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of game balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit for effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near and below the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It mainly comprises a liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the minus signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the disturbance of the serial signal.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The signal is restored to three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a have 8 bits each for the red, green, and blue video signals. Since the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V includes, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two LOCKN signal output request data are also input into the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, where two signals are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals that have been differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so as to be connected to the circuit. Thus, when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so that the two signals are transmitted. , The peripheral control terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450 V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame. From the side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a serial signal (serial data) according to a differential system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect, while the differential circuit 1512e At When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a positive signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the output request of the LOCKN signal is received when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal to be described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, renders the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on as a game board side effect. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period during which the game board effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer and performing a demonstration with the game board effect display device 1600, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510; In order to check whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection with the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, whether the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred, the door frame-side effect display device 460 This is transmitted as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, The data format is completely different from the differential signal (serial data) of the differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of the company. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when the received data is determined to be abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, for the purpose of forced output. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD, VDDO, LVDSVDD, PLLVDD, and PDWN terminals of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GND terminal serving as a ground for the digital circuit. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. A capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GNDO terminal serving as a ground for TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between a terminal and a PLLGND terminal serving as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that when +3.3 V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and indicates that normal operation is performed. It is a terminal to communicate. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge for transmitting various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, a rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal is for instructing whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by connecting the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. And a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are three synchronizing signals (three-bit synchronizing signal). is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, For some reason, a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (a 3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal for some reason. If it is difficult to draw the data on the door frame side effect display device 460 with appropriate data, the mode is automatically switched from the normal mode to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Through this, it is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image is provided from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the effect display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Transmit to the receiver IC SDIC0. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored by receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in advance. The INIT terminal of the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from a CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, and a DE signal indicating that data output from D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 to D17 terminals are provided with three video signals (18, red, green, and blue video signals, respectively) restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue image signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue image signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green image signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green image signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red image signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red image signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. These are input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other, and Has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described. Subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (the payout device 830) drive the payout motor 834 to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage plates. When the game machine is electrically connected to a game ball payout device (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. Commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as the prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. One prize ball is designated by the command 10H, and the command 11H is specified. , Two prize balls are specified,..., 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a rental ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is provided. When the ball lending machine 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the main control board 1310 transfers the payout control board 951. , A command 20H to a command 2EH are prepared, a command 20H designates one winning ball, a command 21H designates two winning balls,..., A command 2EH 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies a self-check. The transmission side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as the command reception confirmation from the reception side is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, ordinary figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power actor related, notification display, state Classified into indications and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization Direction Related]
The special figure 1 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named as "Start special figure 1 synchronizing effect", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special effect 1 synchronizing effect", and "Specify fluctuation state". To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronizing effect start command instructs the start of special figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command specifies out-of-range, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. Note that the probability and the time reduction state include a low probability time reduction state indicating a low probability state and a time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state indicating a high probability state and a time reduction state, and a low probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is not the time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is not the time-saving state and the high-probability state (as the normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that of the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state), and the stop display is performed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. The number of times of stop display is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period during which the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 as shown, it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of possessed balls (in other words, the non-time saving state In addition, the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and when the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed, the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is increased, so that the second starting This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the mouth 2004 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 change, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect starts. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure hit information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing described below.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named start of special figure 2 tuning effect, designation of special symbol 2 and end of special figure 2 tuning effect. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for designating out, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The end of the special figure 2 tuning effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 change, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 tuning effect starts. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. 89, a jackpot opening, a jackpot 1 opening N-th display, a jackpot 1 closing display, a jackpot 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, and a jackpot opening. , A small hit open display, a small hit count display, and a small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening 1 opening N-th display command is started during opening of the jackpot 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (when the starting opening unit 2100 is closed). The large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of the game balls entered into the special winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is started during the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit middle and large winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds is opened (the start opening unit 2100 The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the N-th round of the special winning opening 2005, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the start-up opening unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 count display command is displayed when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the starting winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-large winning opening (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small hit ending command is transmitted. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command named main control return destination at power-on. To these various commands, “D * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is issued when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on and also when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating the fact and when power is turned on (including when power is turned on and when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure and power is restored) )), The above-mentioned information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among the low-probability time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state. And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of the pachinko machine, for example, when each of the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type is created, what kind of work is the copyright, what kind of game specification (for example, a probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the change of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) (A so-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to identify the type code among the Max type, Middle type, and Sweet digital type that indicate the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. The copyright code and the game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that if the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited. And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine or the like) in which the game occurs.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is as follows: When the main control board power is turned on (in addition to power-on, power recovery occurs when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored. Is also transmitted.) Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control-side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission processing, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to tsuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the box 1402, such as start of general figure synchronizing effect, designation of general pattern, end of general figure synchronizing effect, and designation of state at the time of change. To these various commands, "E * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general figure synchronizing production start command instructs the start of general figure synchronizing production in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the general pattern designating command designates out, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the end of the general entraining effect, and the fluctuating state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving state indicating a high probability state and a time saving state as described above. State, a low-probability non-time-saving state indicating that the state is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. As the gaming state, a low probability non-saving time state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the general symbol designating command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The ordinary electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. It is composed of commands called “hit opening”, “opening of normal telephone”, and “ending of normal drawing”. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per day is an instruction to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. (A pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right directions by driving the starting port solenoid 2107. State or time of expansion), and the ending per-figure-end command instructs the start of ending per-figure-per-figure.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is opened. The ending command is transmitted when the ending is started. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification]
As shown in FIG. 90, the categories of the notification display are composed of commands named win award display, connection anomaly display, disconnection / short-circuit anomaly display, magnetic detection switch anomaly display, door open, and door close. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The prize award display command indicates that a game ball enters the special prize port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 when the player wins the special prize port other than during the big hit (during operation of the condition device). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric connection in a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When the disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005 or the like occurs, the start of disconnection / short circuit abnormality display is instructed. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  In addition, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is open, the door frame is instructed to be notified. The door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main frame 4 is in the open state, the main frame opening command is issued. The main frame closing command is issued by the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize abnormal display command is transmitted when a prize is won at a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of sending the command to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619), The frame closing command is transmitted when the main frame closing is detected (when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands called frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error release navigation command (corresponding to an error release command), and frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. The command is set as the status, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error release navigation, the error release navigation command is transmitted during the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section includes various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspection of various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, as shown in FIG. 90, the starting mouth winning, the fluctuation shortening operation end designation, the high probability end designation, the special symbol 1 memory, the special symbol 2 memory, the ordinary symbol memory, the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, “9 * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect. Based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the start of an effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 is determined. And a start of an effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability termination designation command instructs a state transition from the shortened operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and the high-probability end designation command instructs a state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is a special symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). The number of balls that have not been used yet (the number of reserves) is displayed on the display. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). When the ball is entered, the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 notifies the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol. Reserved 0 to 4 (the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the normal symbol change display on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8) The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The pre-reading effect for informing the notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 reservation is instructed. Before the second special symbol display 1405 is used for the variable display of the special symbol, a pre-reading instruction to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation is given. Is what you do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation has been determined after the reduction of the specified number of fluctuations has been completed (after the elapse of the stoppage period). The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the change is determined (after the loss suspension period has elapsed) in which the high probability number in the case of “high probability N times” is exhausted. When the number of balls changes (in a state in which a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is reduced from the number of reservations by using the first special symbol display 1403 to display special symbols in a variable manner.) The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the special symbol 2). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used in the fluctuation display, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the second special symbol display 1405 displays special information based on the number of reserves. Pattern The normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of pending balls has been reduced by using the variable display, and when the number of normally activated ball 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 is performed). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used in the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the symbol display 1402, when the number of the reserves is further increased by the passing of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, or based on the retained number, the ordinary symbol display is used. When the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using the normal symbol in 1402 and the number of reserved symbols is reduced, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is set to the first starting port 2002). Is transmitted when the number of pending balls increases and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls is increased when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (the number of retained game balls enters the second starting port 2004). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the second starting opening wins). When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit sound to notify the user of the fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 uses the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to notify by voice and also monitors for the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not notify the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) is provided with a broken ball, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error, and a CR not connected. When the ball is broken, bit 0 (B0, “B”) is used. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) for 50 or more stocks, and the connection is abnormal. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set in B5, the value 0 is set in B6, and the value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command), a ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error are prepared. In the ball, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor is set. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that payout of game balls that do not consistently occur due to a retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

  For the frame state 2 command, “without ball” is prepared, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) while the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, a change of the frame state, and at the time of an error release navigation, and an error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of the error release navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92. FIG. 94 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and whether or not a reach (reach loss) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random numbers to be used for determination, and fluctuations to be used for determining the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbols which are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot Big hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of symbol random number, first special symbol display 1 when generating a small hit game state 03 and the random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol display 1405, the initial value for the small hit symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol A random number for determination and the like are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed, and an initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number are used. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for jackpot determination is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77, other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. I do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. The counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for determination of the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and a checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum thereof is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when the value does not match the checksum value (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually set to the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and normally updates the random number for pattern hit determination based on the extracted ID code from the fixed numerical range of the counter. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived on the basis of the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated with the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security measure prevents the analysis from being performed by taking two steps of security measures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the same, and obtains an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit judgment value is illegally acquired, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5 ′, that is, in another pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus is analyzed by disassembly. Even if a momentary stop is generated at the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which game balls can be accepted in the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-described main control program performs main control-side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register ”). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and a watch dock timer clear register ( If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, when the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the clock by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clock. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clearing process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs a comparison result by comparing a voltage between + 24V and a reference voltage or comparing a voltage between + 12V and a reference voltage. The result of this comparison is that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic thereof is set to HI, and the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Is input to Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q when the state in which the logic is input to the preset terminal PR terminal as LOW is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) resulting from the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. The main control program determines, based on the logical value of the operation signal, that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, does not indicate that the RAM is to be cleared, and operates the operation switch 954. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 954 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system shown in FIG. 72 that performs the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (boot). I'm waiting for you. In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) before booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. If there is an input of a power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is erased, and the value 0 when the game information is not erased. If the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, if the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, a checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). For this setting, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself, and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets the value of the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main-control-side power-off process described later is normally terminated, and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared as described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in step S32, that is, if the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Also, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates that the RAM is to be cleared and game information is to be erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is extracted, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code is obtained. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and sets this fixed value as a normal symbol per-judge initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol-per-test determination random number described above. I do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310 a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs a test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the random number for the jackpot determination used to determine whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state is updated in hardware by the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Is set to latch and obtain a random number, and the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined high speed is determined based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). The other values in the numerical range are successively extracted without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are rapidly extracted without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and performs main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as the random number for jackpot determination.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in (1) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main processing is started, the error control navigation command for the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) is issued. The execution of the game control RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to convert the detection signal input in response to the operation of the operation switch 954 into the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. The RAM clear processing is executed upon the input (the game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted after the lapse of the predetermined time even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is treated as a release switch for releasing an error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which should have been originally used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storing unit for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit to be described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a lapse of the predetermined time, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described reach determination random number, variation display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-described random number for normal symbol determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there has been an input of a power failure notice signal. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, a main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program executes the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. Then, the drive signals output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program performs setting for prohibiting RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Since the main control MPU 1310 a is not reset, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control-side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs a main control-side power-on process by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be described. First, a problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, a case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is advanced. Will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The charged electric charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous interruption. In other words, even when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the charged power is applied as +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The main-control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the interruption. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the When the power is cut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time standby processing in step S22, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A standby time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) is started, and immediately before the standby time is reached. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within about 7 ms, the step S42 is performed. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52. Thereafter, the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control timer interrupt process described above is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process may not be able to be completed. . For this reason, the main control-side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating a checksum based on the contents of the above is compared with a value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even when the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like when the power is restored and the clerk at the hall does not indicate the intention to clear the RAM. ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notification signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. No, the game information can be prevented from being updated, and there is no fluctuation in the checksum calculation result. It has become so that it does not. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the stored value of the checksum calculation and storage of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the power supply 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information due to the progress of the game by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Is composed of the processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of the side power cut-off, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, when restarted, calculates the checksum in step S28. It is determined that the calculated result of the checksum in the backup processing (ie, the calculated value of the checksum calculated and stored in step S64) matches, so that the instantaneous power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is determined. There is no initialization of game information immediately before a power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af to thereby reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Can be restarted again without any update of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be surely completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the power to the main control at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or the instantaneous power failure occurs. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “shortage of blackout or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. It is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input in step 24 immediately after. If the power failure notice signal is input, the process proceeds to step S24. Returning to the determination, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal is kept input, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12 is cleared in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and starting the time measurement again. . By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then, in step S52, The content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM can be prevented from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt process described later. The mechanism was adopted. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power outage or momentary power outage, a portion covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all, and a main control side power supply. The content of the main control built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is completely completed by the hardware so that the processing at the time of disconnection is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. For transmission, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes, as described above, information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. I have. Here, first, the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , That is, the problem when the power-on main control return destination command does not perform the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen in the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 executes the step In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the gaming state is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started to shift from the state where the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened. That.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power outage occurs, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned, It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, a special winning opening 1 count display command for transmitting the number of balls of the game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the ball of the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even though the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) in the jackpot game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 and ends the large winning opening 2005 by the opening / closing member 2107 when, for example, ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state. From the main control board 1310 to the special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing that the state changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 during the round). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round of the jackpot game state (the fifth round), the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 to close the special winning opening 2005 by the opening and closing member 2107. Transition from the open state to the open state (that is, 5-5 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Becomes

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece has been expanded) indicating that a game state in which a game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 and a game state advantageous to the player is being achieved. When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen to the player on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen informing the user of the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. There is also a case where the player has forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power restoration is returned to the game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (ie, a screen for instructing a game ball to enter the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot know what game the player plays.

  As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the large winning opening 2005 from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107 as a return destination. The peripheral control board 1510 can inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state in which the game is in the state of being in a jackpot game state (ie, a screen indicating the number of the round). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state, A screen that starts driving of the solenoid 2108 and informs that the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 (for example, “Big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please display a message that informs the player that a ball should be thrown in.) Is displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, and power is returned to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Later, it is possible to instruct the player to enter a game ball into the special winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a state in which the player is in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the power is subsequently restored, the starting port solenoid 2107 is used as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs the driver that driving has started and the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, “The movable pieces are being expanded. Is displayed on the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 and the power is returned to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Can be instructed to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Accordingly, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 in detail about the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in a main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of a production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described processing of steps S58 to S68 as a backup processing and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only the two commands of the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted as transmission information. Is stored. These commands are such that a power-on state command is transmitted first, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated and the RAM is cleared by operating the switch 954, information indicating the fact is provided at power-on (in addition to power-on, power failure or instantaneous power failure causes power (Including the time of power recovery to recover.) In any of the above-mentioned low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state, low probability non-time reduction state, and high probability non-time reduction state And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) creates a so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What game specifications (for example, if the probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification is a game specification (a so-called ST machine or the like) in which a probability variation occurs in a state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line determines which of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F) is the main copyright for any of the works. It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). Thereby, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the plurality of works is mixed. With the mixture of the 1310s, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited By watching the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the main control board 1310 determines which work is the copyright of the work. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs. Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor, and can separate the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank of the above. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the process of saving each register on the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on in accordance with the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control processing described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal electric accessory control processing. When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the ACK has been received normally is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program includes, for example, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a magnetic detection sensor for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 reads the detection signal from the payout control board 951 and the payout ACK signal transmitted from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Are stored in the input information storage area as input information. Also, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each of the signals is read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other signals shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. And a corresponding start-up winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning opening 2001 and 2011, and a count sensor 4005 for detecting game balls entering the large winning opening 2005 , A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 , And a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, when this switch input process is started, the first time is read for the first time, and the detection signal is read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the elapse, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is assumed that there is no game ball.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for the first to third times and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, a total of two times of reading is performed. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the hit random number updating process is performed. The above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining a symbol hit is a counter of an initial value update type, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a maximum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the hit random number updating process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The random number for determination of the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, but every time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of the present routine becomes uneven, and If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs award ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball is created and paid out as a prize ball. If the planned number of game balls has reached ten, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created award ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so that the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey the fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 951 has normally received the award ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is checked. A self-check command is generated and transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be replaced by In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. Is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that effect, and the output signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program is a command of various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-described frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 951 of the various commands is output information stored in the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified into the status display in FIG. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Here, the frame state 1 command corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005), or the like. Then, a prize abnormal display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the above described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input (Random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. (A determination as to whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and a value of a counter for updating the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. For example, it is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value is matched (determination of whether or not a probability change is generated). Here, the “probability variation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) that is set higher than at the normal time (a low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 is read in the high probability. ３32767 are set, and are read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches the jackpot determination value, a random number for a jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands relating to the special effect 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. I do. In addition, when a big hit game state is set, for example, according to the game state to be generated, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1) classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, FIG. The second round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the round display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be turned on, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the status indicator 1401 is turned on or off in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not the probability variation has occurred. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol hit described above is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section and the second section of the gate information storage are stored. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage and display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for ordinary symbol hit determination is extracted from the read out gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened and closed is determined based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that a game state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands that are classified as related to the ordinary figure tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and are transmitted as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area described above and to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and is described as the output information. It is stored in the output information storage area. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric act production effect shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol fluctuation based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, and various commands which are classified as related to the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 89 are created. In addition, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 according to the determined ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, and a driving signal is sent to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to the output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as information output information during the working hours And outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, and special figure 2 Command, various commands classified into jackpot-related (for example, when a game ball entering a special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, a large winning prize is determined based on a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). A special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a mouth counting command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as a general drawing synchronizing effect, various commands classified as a normal electric actor effect, FIG. 90 Various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display and status display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 transmits at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea can be completed. At the time of power recovery in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in the reservation setting of a command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Which constitutes a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes a power-on main control return destination command, The mode is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the power-on processing at the main control side, and according to the game information. There are cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (the effect control unit) ) Is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Unit)) (a door frame command sending means, a second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) Unit), a door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted (door frame command transmitting means, second door frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door close command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, while the process can be completed. The power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 for instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electric driving sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is executed by the peripheral control board 1510 Can be output to In other words, the main control board 1310 sets the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 93, and sets the main control built-in RAM work area in step S34 in the same processing. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power-on status command classified as power-on and a power-on main command shown in FIG. The control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is output as main circumference serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600. Effect display in the display area. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the main control board 1310 can display and notify the return destination of the progress of the game in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player in the broken state. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the main control-side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. A power-on main command and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only the state is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, a power-on state command is configured as main circumference serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. This causes the peripheral control MPU 1511a to be in a state in which interrupt permission is set, and output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. In addition to the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While the effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. To start cold.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db also in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM). When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing the initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. Is set in the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in (1), and is set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the luminance of the LED included in the acquired luminance setting information to the game board. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting the backlight is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is set. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the setting information being 80%, the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is determined based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the flow returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when executing the peripheral control unit steady processing, the value 1 is first set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state of being set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmission buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board (in the present embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is generated. The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. When there is no such data, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transferred one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of one byte of data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When serial transmission of serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state of being set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area for the LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of the 1511cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  Whenever a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers this (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The one-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the one-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the buffer becomes empty.), And the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Is not using a bus, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad by one byte at a time. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 and the like based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various information obtained by setting the operation button 410 are monitored, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the state of operation of the operation button 410 is determined. It is determined as appropriate whether or not to reflect this.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated in the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74 by the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when rendering exceeding the rendering capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated rendering data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the gaming board side display device 1600 and the door frame side production. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called dropped frame occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronizing with the effect by music and sound effects etc. according to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs serialized audio data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a positive signal and a negative signal are used. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data of a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the luminescence data arranged in time series that constitute the luminescence mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of luminescence data starting from the first luminescence data is changed to the luminescence of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  In the scheduler updating process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The driving data of the electric driving sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in a time series and constituting the electric driving source schedule data, is described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is configured to transmit information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and various information transmitted from the main control substrate 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. I do. In the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing includes, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, and the number of ordinary symbols held. Normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of pending start changes, and a special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (a special winning opening count command) output every time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command indicating the full state shown in FIG. 90 (a second error occurrence command, It is analyzed whether the command is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means) and it is recognized which game state is currently in play. Also, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame opening command, a main frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands are various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning production related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning production related, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power-on shown in FIG. 89. Various commands, various commands classified in the ordinary figure synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the ordinary electric production production-related, various commands classified in the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-described door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to a test, and various commands to be classified into others.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 by the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of turning on the power, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, the game board side Using the effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device) to visually warn the outside, or use a speaker to audibly warn the outside ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even in the gaming state. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraud on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 in the calendar information storage unit, which is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer is designated by the pointer in the time-series light-emitting data that constitutes the light-emitting mode generation schedule data. On the basis of the emission data, the game board side emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations provided on the door frame 3 The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board is stored in various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and displays the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. From the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and outputs the extracted data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 levels from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for substrate volume 6, and Each volume is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is directed as a more powerful one, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to be backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) in the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied by the peripheral control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored at the start address to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. , And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in the Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and the copy to the backup second area 1511cc in the Bank4 (1fr). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is to be backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. The effect control information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), is used as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

  The high-speed copying of the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are designated by copying the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM). From the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously copied in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time from the head address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the content stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. And the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in the backup second area 1511dc. Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  This peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and then sets 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value of 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. To complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed at the moment will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed assuming that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. Since the peripheral control unit regular processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 of the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. In addition to the transmission to the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed by setting a value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. The fact that this has been done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, so that the routine processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral control unit cannot perform the normal processing until the V blank signal is input and then the next V blank signal is input.

  As a result, in the present peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process which has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing has failed, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the number of executions of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, if the 1st timer interrupt of the 33rd time occurs and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, a motor and solenoid driving process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in chronological order. Among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the motor driving board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When serial transmission of the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is stored. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the staging operation unit 400 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series to constitute. 73 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral controller 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor driving clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs, triggers it (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller in units of 1 byte. 1511ad, and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port and writing the data, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the like is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first one byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial drive I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  Each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created, and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. This is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect transmitter IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , Ie, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of a defect and the state of occurrence of the defect between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device is obtained. A drawing state 460 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time it is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, as the effect backup information (1 ms), Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 of the backup first area 1511 cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied by the peripheral control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac to Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the bank 3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the content stored at the start address to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank4 (1ms). I From the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to this, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times that the status has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3, ie, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the mode of the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and 3 When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values and summing them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Under file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310 is determined. Has been determined. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, when the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are defined by the reception command storage area. 1511 cac is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second byte of the main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored value is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal executed when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and outputs a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input in this determination, this routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input for two microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure notice signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is turned off, the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. As a result, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed, so that even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the transmitted command at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, backup processing of the command is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the contents stored in the head address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to this point are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to transfer the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Copy is specified, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Is specified in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to this point are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc are successively copied in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequence.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs due to the execution of the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not performed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the signal is output to convey the fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores one byte (8 bits: the most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, the least significant bit B0, and "B" represent bits). It has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. A request is made to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data) A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is not requested. Is determined.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 <-B4, B4 <-B3, B3 <-B2, B2 <-B1, B1 <-Least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 such as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least bit B0. From the first bit to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

  As described above, each time the LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. 101, stores the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the determination is made, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the connections, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no failure between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 This is a state in which a failure occurs in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And increments the communication check counter CC-CNT by 1 (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset by an instantaneous power failure or power failure. At this time, the value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number of times. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the value 0 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (greater) than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative number of times in step S1526, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in a state of failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is a flag that indicates whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Value 1 indicates that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset. At this time, the value is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a description will be given of the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95. This connection recovery processing is executed following the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 101, and includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection restoration process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data, so that it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is being activated. When the effect has been completed along with the data and the updating of the pointer has been completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the power-on screen of the pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on is displayed on the gaming-board-side effect display device 1600, or a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, and a demonstration by the gaming-panel effect display device 1600 is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the screen generation schedule data. The start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. When the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state, the game board side effect display device 1600 That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is terminated as it is, and in step S1540, the routine is executed according to the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and the updating of the pointer has been completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not a value 0 (step S1542). As described above, every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is performed, the communication check counter CC-CNT determines whether the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process. The number of times the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure is counted up. (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred once.

  If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is equal to 0 in step S1542, that is, if the number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not been determined once, this value remains unchanged. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not equal to 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem, the number of times of the determination is one. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, and This flag indicates whether the connection between the receiver and the receiver has a failure. If the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure, the value is 1; Are set to 0 when the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where a failure has occurred in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is equal to 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby outputting the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the communication error display process is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display processing, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is used to surely inform that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Perform the process of drawing in For example, a message “A problem has occurred in the upper-panel liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. In the communication error display process, a period in which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the operation, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, A LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. And a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600. In addition to performing a process, a notification sound (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device”) is repeatedly performed from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, a process of lighting all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decoration symbols which are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Variation display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part normal processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery selected by accepting the game ball into the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is completed, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls is paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, and the central decorative pattern is in the center. On the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. Can be recognized by the player. At this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in a semi-transparent mode so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative pattern rotates from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed while being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the stopped decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern correspond to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern have an opaque mode so that the background image at the position is difficult to visually recognize. In this manner, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is displayed in a variable manner and is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are started and stopped in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the first special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, as shown in FIG. When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit in the power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In order to indicate the number of screen data from the top screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the Since the effect has been updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along with the screen generation schedule data. While the data is being activated, that is, during the period from when the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started to stopped and displayed, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is performed. In the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the time when the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started to the stop display. Even when the value is not the value 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that the failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is one, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not connected. The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process Without performing the communication error display process of step S1548, for example, a message such as "A problem has occurred on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk" is not displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame-side effect display device is provided. Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effecting receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effecting transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the time process, the effect is completed along with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the updating has been completed, that is, in the scheduler updating process, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Alarm of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the time process When it is determined in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 that is executed as one process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, when the transmitter When the number of times that it is determined that the connection with the receiver has a failure is not found once, the routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, ie, the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the device and the receiver has a failure is at least one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty. If the cumulative number determined to have not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. If the value of FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-described communication error display is performed. Performs the processing and ends the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are provided. This is the case where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure once even during the connection with the ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure, In the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified, and a LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  The variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is displayed again. Since the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 during the interval period until the start of, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is validated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect A malfunction occurs between the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If there is at least one state, and the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, SYNC By always performing the pattern output process, while performing the process of restoring the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which a problem has occurred in the connection during the period has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver without fail). ), The communication error display processing is always performed, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the like. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is performed The processing for restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 The message "A problem has occurred on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed, so the drawing data received from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the presence, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The image is displayed based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative again. During the interval until the symbol change display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is provided between the time when the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped and displayed. Door frame-side staging receiver ICSD that informs that drawing data received from IC 1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is a combination result in which the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the information of most interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the big hitting game state in which the big hit is generated, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise or the like and is incorrect. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the effect is not interrupted in the middle of the process and the process of restoring to the state where the drawing can be correctly performed is performed. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the waiting state for the customer. During the period in which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, this is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. During the operation, the signal is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a and includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, The two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. The two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to the control MPU 1511a. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, While it can be determined that no failure has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450. The control panel controls the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source to display a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk."). 1600 and a notification sound to convey that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is the serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receiving the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effector receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that no trouble has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify a store clerk or the like of the hall by executing a notification process. The store clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check does not take much trouble. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450 Since this signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. The receiver IC SDIC0 is a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. If the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between image communication between the door frame side effecting receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effecting transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is started. By outputting the image data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a communication failure between image communication can be eliminated. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication error between image communications at an early stage and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the problem. It has become. Therefore, by finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Further, the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame-side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception cannot be performed normally, the effect control microprocessor generates a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the LOCKN signal is inputted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Telling you Is generated, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 to inform the user. You can do it. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a early detects a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the failure. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall, or directly notify the clerk of the hall that happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, by detecting and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460 early, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem during image communication. From the door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d A connection confirmation signal notifying the start of transmission to the frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, so that it is possible to move in a direction in which the communication failure is solved.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during a period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communications is set. Door from door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d When the connection confirmation signal notifying the start of transmission to the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection is confirmed. When the output of the signal is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d changes the door frame to a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern). Stop sending to the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and control the liquid crystal display The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a trouble elimination signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move in a direction in which the communication trouble is eliminated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. When the connection confirmation signal is continuously output only during a period in which the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if the ten main control MPU 1310a starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the door frame The effect distortion (image distortion) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460 is caused by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starting to execute the game again and ending (period between timing K1 and timing K2). (Every (interval period)), it is possible to move in the direction of eliminating.

  According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 in FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port, which is a starting area in which a game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 is provided in the game area 5a toward a game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are mounted.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is turned off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game-related information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, outputs a RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 to perform the payout control unit power-on processing from the power-on to the payout control built-in RAM. A RAM clear function of outputting a RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to a payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information, and a main control power supply of FIG. The period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the power If the operation is performed after a lapse of a period from when the payout control unit is turned on to when the processing is performed, the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 is used as an error release signal for releasing an error generated in the payout device 830. And an error clearing function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is performed. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, for erasing information about the game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period in which a payout control unit power-on process is performed from power-on. A RAM clear function of outputting a RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to a payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in a payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Of the period when the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process When the operation is performed after a lapse of (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on processing is performed after the power is turned on), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is output as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830. An error clearing function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions of a pachinko machine 1 and an error canceling function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error canceling function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input portion of the panel relay board 4161 is provided with various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor , A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. I do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area to manipulate a flowing state of the game ball as desired to obtain an unfair advantage. Illegal gameplay is endless.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting unit, an alarm by sound, or the like. I have.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control relating to the progress of the game and the effect will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (designs, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and the operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable member, etc.) contributing to the production are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time the interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, a first and second start-up opening winning process is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting opening. Done.

  If the processing flag is 0 when the first and second start-up opening prize processing is completed, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the hold state is exhausted and executed, and the result of the jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second start-up winning processing is completed, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored result of the big hit determination, the current game state, and the like. After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the change display of the special symbol to the stop display, and the stop symbol (the big hit symbol, the loss symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second start-up opening winning processing is completed, the processing during the change is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. To stop. Then, thereafter, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the change start processing is a big hit, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the result of the big hit determination stored in the change start processing is not a big hit (losing). , The process selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interruption processing, the processing is started again from the fluctuation start processing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is set to 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the big hit game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set a jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of the jackpot that has been won. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on this. In addition, when the big hit game is over, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and when the type of the hit big hit is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probable change state. After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interruption processing, the processing is started again from the fluctuation start processing.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern is used to determine the time from the start of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol to the end thereof, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing on the effect display device 1600. The type of the pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a large hit variation variation pattern, a loss reach variation variation pattern, and a loss variation variation pattern. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, the change display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the big hit symbol. Is performed. The outreach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. In the effect display device 1600, decoration is performed through the reach effect. An effect is performed in which the variable display of the symbol is developed so that the symbol is finally determined and stopped. The outlier fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and when it is not determined that the reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number, the effect display device 1600 does not pass the reach effect. Then, an effect is developed in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally lost and the symbol is fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by obtaining game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the information, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. Further, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to appear, and also changes the effect display (background or hold image) related to the degree of expectation or effects. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) of the operation unit 400 or to operate a movable member such as the underside rear movable effect unit 3100.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Assuming now that the main control program has shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes On condition that the detection signal from the one starting port sensor 4002 is in an ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first start opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball in the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the big hit control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating either "8R probable big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed eight times after opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won in the special winning opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R big hit game state,
-When the result of the determination process on the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "16R probability change big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "8R probable big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ), The opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005 is repeated 8 times, and the game is controlled to an 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the determination process on the display mode when the second special symbol is stopped in the variable display mode becomes a mode indicating "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated twice to control the 2R big hit game state.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time saving control is executed, the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed, and in the situation where the time saving control is not executed, the right-handed is more effective than the right-handed. As described above, left-handing is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if the jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of up to eight rounds. Only a state (approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning type) ), A large-hit jackpot game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (approximately 2,000 game balls can be acquired), such as the expected value of prize balls that can be acquired when a big hit is won Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than in the left-handed state.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a variation counter, which will be described later, and the like are performed.

  In the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, a high probability is determined in accordance with the winning type of the jackpot which has triggered the jackpot game. Each set processing of the flag and the time reduction flag is executed.

  The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in a jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. The first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) which is set when the big hit game state based on the probable big hit and the 8R probable big hit B) is ended, and when the big hit comes next. Reset with.

  The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control is being executed (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability-time-saving state). As shown in FIG. 110, the time-saving control (high-probability time-saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, will be set when the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R certain big hit A, 16R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit B) ends. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The change number counter is a counter indicating the number of changes in the special symbol since the change number counter was reset, and is used in a first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. It is updated (for example, counted up) when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit B) Is reset when the big hit game state based on the game is started.

  If the big hit execution flag has not been set (NO in step S5235), then as a process in step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hitting game state is being controlled is set. Is determined. As a result, if the small hitting execution flag is set, the small hitting control process for controlling the small hitting game state (step S5240b) is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time reduction flag, Each set process such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), the second special symbol reserved A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is held so that the lottery for the second special symbol in the reserved state is not lost (unless the value of the second special symbol number counter is "0"), the first special symbol is determined. Irrespective of the lottery hold status, only the random determination for the second big hit determination random number is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player only maintains the driving of the game ball to the right side of the center role 2500 (right-handed). Only the lottery (determination process) for the two big hit random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

  It should be noted that the special figure game (symbol variation) using the second special figure (second special design) is limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special design). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which a game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a start winning is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning has occurred, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage process (step S5232).

  Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes each of the random numbers on the first special symbol side (the random number for the big hit determination, the random number for the reach determination, the random number for the big hit symbol, the random number for the variation display pattern) as the process of step S5241. ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is set to the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" which is the (upper limit) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (the determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed in order to set the state.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  Then, the first special figure pre-reading processing for executing the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the processing is ended (step S5245). As will be described later, the first look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In the first special figure pre-reading process, information necessary for the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, the content of the effect, and the like (information related to a hit for the pre-reading determination, a symbol type for the pre-reading determination). Information, information on a variable pattern number for pre-reading determination, and the like, and store the information in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5242 that the number of reserved special first symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S5234).

  Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. In step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes each random number on the second special symbol side (a random number for determining a second big hit, a random number for a second reach determination, and a random number for a second big hit symbol). Random number, a random number for the second variation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed in order to set the state.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Then, the second special figure pre-reading processing for executing the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the processing is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the prefetching effect on the second special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variation display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (hit information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect and the effect content on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

  When the number of reserved special first symbols changes based on a game ball having entered the first starting port 2002, a command instructing the number of reserved special first symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) instructs the number of reserved second special symbols. Command (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors character control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors character control process are the same. Since only the random number and the table used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read big hit determination random number, the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. 1st special symbol normal process in which is performed (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which, for example, a process of determining a mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )

  3. The variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the effect display device (game board effect display device) 1600 is executed in response to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode of the effect display to be performed (step S5282)

  4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 is displayed on the first special symbol display control variation control mode determined based on the result of the determination process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5301. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process proceeds to step S5302 in which the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Of the first special symbol (for example, the first big hit random number, the first reach random number, the first big hit symbol random number, and the first variable display pattern random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol The random number stored in the area is read out from the same main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserve number counter is counted down, and the first special reserve storage area of the first special symbol reserve storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in, first-out (first-in, first-in) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (for example, the first big hit determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first big hit symbol random number, and the first variable display pattern random number). The shift operation is performed in a first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), and the first winning opening 2002 has a winning prize. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol storage area a to second special symbol storage area d). Then, the extracted random numbers are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process for determining the hit of the big hit is performed based on the read random number for the first big hit determination. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is ended.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S5311), the high probability state shown in FIG. A big hit determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), a big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110A is selected (step S5313) and selected. The calculated big hit determination table is compared with the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number). (Low-probability non-work-short state, low-probability work-short state), a large-hit jackpot determination table used in the case of a low-probability work, A big hit determination table at the time of probability. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the type of first big hit determination random number coincides with the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability at low probability; roughly) "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to, the 204 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match the big hit determination values indicating that the big hit has been won, and the 65332 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating that the big hit is a big hit probability at the time of a low probability; approximately “1/321”.

  Also, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to be compared with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the outlier determination value (big hit probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the special symbol and special electric auditors control process performed in step S5239 of the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability is referred to compare with the second big hit determination random number , 2040 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match with the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and 63496 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match with the out-of-place determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The random numbers for the second big hit determination are associated with each other (big hit probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number The jackpot determination values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of the jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability may be different). In this case, at least one of the big hit determination tables at the time of low probability and the big hit determination table at the time of high probability may be made different (or both may be made different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S5315). ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process process) of the present example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (loss determination).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-hours reduction state. And a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is in a low-probability state (low-probability non-hours-saving state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches the reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. Are associated with the reach determination random numbers, respectively. However, the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state matches the reach determination value indicating that all of the 72 types of reach-determination random numbers do not reach, in order to maximize the speed of the game progress in the time-saving state. In this way, it may not be possible to match with the reach determination value indicating the reach.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability reduction state are reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown, and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the low-probability state is higher than that in the high-probability time-saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-work-short state, five types of reach determination including the same reach-determination random numbers as the reach-determination random numbers set in the reach determination tables in the high-probability work reduction state and the low-probability state are provided. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the use random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination values that indicate that the reach is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high probability non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is the same as in the low probability non-hours reduction state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that a reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120). Then, the reach flag indicating that the variation becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, 200 Are stored in a form associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side stores a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit B, 2R normal hit) in the symbol determination table. Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of the present example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first big hit symbol is set to be different from the type of the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high-probability state is the same. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the second big hit symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific games and effects for each type of jackpot.
1. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 gaming balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening 2103 (easy). Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. Is controlled to the effect mode in which the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 game balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls the low-probability time-saving state until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until the 100 times are exhausted), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state An effect display device in which a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) is performed, and in a low-probability time-saving state, it is relatively disadvantageous. 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 game balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big hit game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and determines whether the number of rounds will exceed eight rounds during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (whether it will be 16 rounds) (successful rendering) ) Is performed and an additional challenge effect is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed since the high-probability time-saving state was controlled, a relatively advantageous state 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 game balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and determines whether the number of rounds will exceed 8 rounds (or 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state (failure production) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the high-probability time-saving state is controlled, the state is relatively advantageous. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 opens the large winning opening 2103 for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed twice when detected in the above, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the special winning opening 2103. After this 2R jackpot game state, Until the symbol fluctuation display is completed 100 times (or a jackpot is won in the period until the 100 times is completed), the low probability time saving state is controlled, and a specific character is executed during the execution period of the 2R big hit game state. Perform a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which the player is defeated, and in the low-probability time-saving state, the effect display device 1600 is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and a movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the first special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a big hit (8R certain variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and a big hit (16R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 at the maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times to pay out approximately 2000 game balls.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot A, it is determined to be an 8R probability variable jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 8R ordinary jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot symbol 8R ordinary jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 16R probability variable hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variable hit is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variable hit B is determined, the 8R probability variable hit is determined as the big hit symbol. If it is determined to be a B symbol, and if it is determined to be a 2R normal big hit, it is determined to be a 2R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol.

  If the big hit flag has not been set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag has been set in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the specific symbol stop mode) (step S5334), the flow shifts to step S5337.

  Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the loss symbol as the mode of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (step S5336), and proceeds to step S5337. I do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the lottery result (one of the type of big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S5337. (Which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S5338, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), the process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → Stop display is performed in the order of the middle decoration symbols (note that the left, middle, and right decoration symbols may be synchronously changed and displayed in the same pattern, and may be stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal big hit is won as a big hit. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as another symbol) is determined. In addition, when the out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach pattern accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same pattern whose left and right decorative patterns are "0" to "9" and different middle decorative patterns; When the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined to be the outlier symbol without the reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols out of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

  In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit to appear before the big hit game starts, and the big hit game Is displayed after the start of the game.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it has been done (step S5341), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is set. Is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344). If the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of the reach (step S5345) is set. (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are selected. If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). When the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), the process is ended. Thus, the first special symbol display 1403 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  The variation pattern table of the present example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first random number for jackpot determination, random number for second large jackpot determination) and random numbers for jackpot symbol (first random number for jackpot symbol, second random number for jackpot symbol). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the determination. In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. It is stored in a form associated with each of the first variation display pattern random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads the selected variation pattern table and the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the read random number for variable display pattern with the read random number for variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Is determined. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, the small hit is not won in this example, and therefore, the small hit variation pattern table is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Have been. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 kinds of random numbers for the fluctuation display pattern among the 241 kinds of random numbers for the fluctuation display pattern are set as the determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The kinds of random numbers for the variation display pattern are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the super reach effects with a low jackpot expectation is executed, and the 18 random numbers for the variation display pattern have a high jackpot expectation. This is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any of the super reach effects is to be executed.

  Note that the super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a jackpot game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed The expectation of is increasing. That is, such a super-reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the big hit, and thereby, even if the loss is finally displayed, the player's expectation degree for the big hit game state Can be increased. However, in practice, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation of the jackpot game state, during the period in which the super-reach effect is being executed, a high-expected notice effect that is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern appears (Composite) is required.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss which is provided corresponding to the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state And a 12-second fluctuation time is set in common with the above. On the other hand, in a variation pattern table at the time of loss which is provided in correspondence with the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A change time of 12 seconds can be set, and a change time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time reduction state and in the non-time reduction state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time reduction state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is performed. In addition to the prompting, the player has secured time for winning the game ball to the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the fluctuation time at the time of the loss of the second special symbol, each game ball hit into the game area 5a at 0.6-second intervals in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state). It is possible to prevent the paper from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

  That is, the right-hit game ball is supplied to a region immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is received from this area to the gate unit 2003 in the time saving state (high probability time saving state or the like), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second start port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long time (5.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, under a condition that can be successively accepted by the second starting port 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center role 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if the game balls are accepted, a control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be successively digested with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of about "1/32" each time the game balls are accepted. Will be made possible.

  In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), In many cases, the starting port 2004 receives game balls at 0.6 second intervals. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the loss of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely set as the variation time in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state). It can be set as short as 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol change is completed only in a time (0.1 second) shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so that 0.6 seconds is obtained. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, it is possible to suppress that such game balls are discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5371. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, that the fluctuation time determined by the lottery has elapsed (step S 5372), the process proceeds to step S 5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), the process ends.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 (step S 5371), if the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time to stop the symbol is reached). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5381. As the processing of the above, while performing display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start a big hit gaming state (step S5387). The standby time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit gaming state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5389). S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R probability big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit A, 8R normal big hit, 16R certain variable big hit, 8R positive big hit B, 2R normal big hit) according to the big hit type. Big hit command, 8R positive variable big hit B command, 2R normal big hit command). As a result, an effect (battle effect or additional challenge effect) of a jackpot game state according to the type of jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when the vehicle is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of times the special symbol changes after being controlled to the low probability time reduction state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for terminating the low probability time reduction state is satisfied, and The function is stopped and the game is shifted to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state) (step S 5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S 5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game state is started is set (step S 5394), and the small hit game is performed. The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hitting game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value, of the first special symbol process flag. (Step S5394), the process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the processing of step S5236, and the small hit control processing (step S5240b) is performed. The small hitting game state is executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, when the small hit game state is executed, the game state is not changed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set (NO in step S 5393), it is determined that a loss has occurred and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394), the process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag or the small hit executing flag is not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is performed according to the suspended state. The processing related to the progress of (lottery or symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main signal is output as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 executes a gate passage process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. I do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal process in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped based on the read ordinary random number is performed (step S5403).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process which stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4. Variation display of the normal symbol so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol becomes a mode suggesting "per day", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004. Electric-powered accessory opening processing for executing processing for enabling control (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S5402).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the ordinary reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of Step S5411. Then, based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the ordinary pending number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the processing of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S5414, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in a normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the above-mentioned variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the process of step S5421 as follows. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbols in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then, as a process of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol retaining storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary figure variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Is shifted in a first-in, first-out (First-In, First-Out) manner.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols has been suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time reduction state (low probability non-time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S5425), a non-time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S5425). In step S5427, the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S5428).

  The general chart hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (high probability time reduction state). And a non-working time general time table contact determination table used in time (low probability non-working time state, high probability non-working time state). Then, in the time-saving-time ordinary figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 255 types of ordinary random numbers match the ordinary figure hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 during the working hours, the game ball is always elected per ordinary drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. We control acceptance. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-working time reduction state, may be made to coincide with the general figure hit determination value indicating that the general figure is won.

  In addition, in the non-working time general time stamp determination table which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it is found that all 255 kinds of normal random numbers coincide with the general time stamp determination value indicating that the normal time has been won. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-universal-drawing determination value indicating that the out-of-usual drawing is out of alignment. In this way, in non-working hours, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the ball is not won per ordinary drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no control to allow game balls to be accepted into 2004. However, as described above, it is also possible to obtain the hit of the ordinary symbol even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that of the time saving state, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter period of time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, the movable piece is advanced again. You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the 2nd starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected general symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and determines that the normal symbol hit is determined (step S5429). ), After setting a perpetual hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won per peristaltic perimeter (step S5430), the perpetual perch as a mode when the perturbation control of the perturbative symbol is stopped (a perpetual stop symbol). On the other hand, the symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is a loss as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary processing, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. An unusual symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

  Then, while such control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the peripheral control unit regular processing (the reception command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation at each time is grasped, and an effect according to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation where a start winning has occurred, and when there is such a situation, performs control relating to a hold display or a pre-reading effect according to the start winning. Then, thereafter, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game status, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation process, effect symbol variation stop process, big hit display process One of the big hit game in-game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process: Until the variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, it takes effect (such as demonstration effect) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control regarding the big hit is not performed. When the control is performed and a variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing.

  Effect design variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command and the like, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started based on the determined effect content. Control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing. Of the fluctuation patterns (effect patterns), many of the “variation patterns (effect patterns) stopped at the big hit symbol” are prepared in pairs with the “variation patterns (effect patterns) stopped at the losing symbol”. Since they function as the same fluctuation pattern (effect pattern), an effect as to whether a big hit symbol or a lost symbol appears is provided. Therefore, when a variation pattern (effect pattern) is described below, when a “predetermined variation pattern” or a “specific variation pattern” is described, unless otherwise noted, “stop at a big hit symbol” "Predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) stopped at the losing symbol", and as a result of the effect contents being developed in the same manner It comes to the branch point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Processing during effect symbol change: Various effects determined in the effect symbol change start process are controlled to be started at each timing during the symbol change period, and the value of the process flag is changed when the change time ends. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design confirmation command) for instructing stop of all the symbols, the control of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative design and deriving and displaying the display result (stop design) is performed. When the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process. When the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the process flag value is changed to a fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

  Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect that notifies the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit) in a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. Then, thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing.

  Big hit game processing: Control for various effects during the period of occurrence of the big hit game state is performed. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing.

  Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the fluctuation allowable state (display effect for notifying the player of the end of the big hit game state) is controlled. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determination table T1 which is referred to in the effect symbol change start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, each effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on the (fluctuation effect), the control is performed so that the change of the decorative symbol is started.

  Note that the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (fluctuation effects) is determined based on the effect lottery or the game situation. You may make it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with a part of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  Also, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) in this way, and then performs a preview lottery (a process of judging the notice effect) based on the jackpot determination result, the symbol type, and the change pattern. By performing a control (processing during the fluctuation of the design symbol) to make the preview effect won in the preview lottery appear at a predetermined timing in the execution of the determined effect pattern (variable effect), a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. It is made to be possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit symbol depending on the appearance mode and the like as being compoundable.

  Conventionally, among such composite effects, there are cases where a plurality of appearances are performed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being executed, In this way, it is expected that the entertainment interest will be maintained. However, since the notice effect can be combined only when the expectation degree of the big hit symbol appears is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed becomes naturally low. However, it was considered difficult to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  As will be described later, the “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and displays a count display toward a timing at which the predetermined effect is performed by a first predetermined numerical value. (For example, “60 seconds”) to a second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”), which is executed as a count effect display or a standby display before starting the count display (for example, during preparation). It is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is ensured that some effect always occurs when the count reaches the second predetermined numerical value. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) in which one of an effect mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (an effect mode with a low degree of expectation) and an advantageous effect mode (an effect mode with a high degree of expectation) appears. , B, etc.) are targeted for the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined numerical value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, a notice timer effect executed as a result of the notice lottery), at least at the time when the count display is started, it is kept confidential as to which effect is the effect target. It is desirable to do so. In addition, “the effect target of the timer effect” is the effect of the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 second”) as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the “timer effect” according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer effect as described above, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed since the start of the count ( (E.g., the number of seconds).

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when a winning is made in the preliminary lottery, the above-described effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) is determined. A timer effect (variable timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect can be executed. That is, in this case, if only the notice timer effect to execute the count effect display as "the effect contents of the notice effect that functions so that the big hit expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", Instead, it is also executed as "the effect contents of the effect pattern itself determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", so that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command is Effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without uselessly stacking (additional expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in the preliminary lottery”). For example, if the special jackpot expectation degree when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is “20%”, when the notice side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation degree is increased by the composite effect function. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount. On the other hand, if the variation side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit is expected. The timer effect can be executed with the degree kept at “20%” (appears only when a specific variation pattern is selected), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  It should be noted that the jackpot expectation degree when an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) appears in the determination table T1 is different depending on the change number (further, the effect pattern). There is a tendency to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variation timer effect in which the “conversation notice” is directed as the effect content is executed. The appearance ratio is as follows: variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the expected big hit at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail. An effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a different probability than in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but in the case of the change numbers 5 and 6, the variable timer effect for which the conversation notice is to be directed can be performed. This is different from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that: The variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 9 and 10 execute the variation side timer effect for which the conversation notice is to be directed, and the variation numbers 11 and 14. 12, a variable-side timer effect with cut-in A as the target is executed, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in A, and the variable-side timer effect with the cut-in A as the target. Are different in that they can be Also, the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 execute the variation side timer effect for which the conversation notice is directed, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 is a variable-side timer effect with cut-in B as the production target, and the variation numbers 21 and 22 are the execution of the conversation notice and the cut-in B, and the variable-side timer effect with these as the production targets. Are different in that they can be It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher when the variable-side timer effect with the cut-ins A and B as the target is performed than when the variable-side timer effect with the conversation announcement as the target is performed. Is set such that the expectation of big hits tends to be higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is performed.

  The “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (a change effect of a decorative pattern) is executed, and that a relatively low level of expectation is often added. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and have a relatively high expectation. This is an effect that is often performed (or an effect that always adds up to a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set such that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-ins A and B, and the later-described character A operations and B) having higher expectations. It is something to be done. In addition, the “cut-in” appearing as the content of the variable production is executed in the character reach in such a manner as to correspond to the cut-in A appearing as the production content of the announcement production, whereas the SP-reach performs the notice “cut-in”. This is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (effect patterns) for a plurality of variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as a variable side timer effect. If the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a normal reach production with a low degree of expectation”, a count production display as a notice timer production is displayed. In order to prevent the winning of the effect (by increasing the degree of premium) and appropriately secure the expected degree UP when the notice-side timer effect appears, the fluctuation pattern is “variation pattern (performing the fluctuation-side timer effect) (Variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like), the variation pattern has a predetermined type (for example, variation Nos. 1 to 6) are reduced.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns for which the variation side timer effect is executed. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of the individual types correspond to the above-described predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, and 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, and four variation patterns (variation numbers) are provided. Nos. 1 to 4) correspond to the above-described predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), and the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is such that the count effect display (variable side timer effect) can be performed (count variation pattern), a notice of the variation is more noticeable than when the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. As the effect contents of the effect, the ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice timer effect) cannot be executed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (variable effect) without increasing the degree of expectation and reducing the frequency of appearance.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern (variable effect) determined in the effect symbol change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The appearance rate of the notice side timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the effect on the notice timer is effected, it is possible to appear with a medium lottery probability. ing.

  Note that, even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-described notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in fact, a bigger hit than in the case of a loss The announcement timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability for the effect pattern that has been won, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). Is different as the effect contents (notice timer effect). Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the appearance ratio of a plurality of count displays is high within one effect pattern (variation effect), In some cases, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, so that it is expected that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if the effect pattern (eg, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the announcement timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern in comparison with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effects appear (the ratio at which the notice-side timer effect is determined to be executed in the preview lottery) is set to be high. In other words, in this case, only a big hit expectation degree is required to win one notice-side timer effect in the notice lottery, and two timer effects (variable-side timer effect and notice-side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the production effect of the double timer can be realized without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, the variable timer effect (variable side count effect display) in which "conversation notice" is directed and the variable timer effect (variable side count effect display) in which "cut-in" is directed. In this embodiment, the mode of the count display (the form and color of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even if an effect pattern (for example, change numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable timer effect (variable count effect display) is confirmed. By recognizing the easiness of the notice timer effect to appear, coupled with the fact that the appearance ratio of the notice timer effect is made different depending on which count variation pattern it is, You can expect it.

  Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice timer effect (notice count effect display), regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable timer effect (variable side effect) It may be different from (or different from at least one of) the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display, or may be the same as the same mode (or at least one of them). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (the notice count display effect) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be directed. This is useful for making the player aware that a notice timer effect that is set at a high degree is appearing, thereby improving the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable timer effect (variable count effect display). As for the common mode as the notice timer effect (display of the notice count effect), a plurality of modes (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different expectations are prepared, and any one of them is executed. You may do so.

  Further, in order to be able to more appropriately recognize that the notice timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable timer effect is executed are provided. It is desirable to make the count speed different (for example, the speed at which the number changes during count-up or count-down). In such a configuration, even after the timer effect is started, even during a period in which the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and the fluctuation side timer effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is compared with the timer effect. Of the notice timer effect with a high degree of expectation is being executed, and the entertainment of the game during the timer consumption period can be appropriately maintained.

  Also, at this time, in the variable-side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same as) the count speed of the advance-timer timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in) ( (Cut-in) and a mode in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the notice timer effect (conversation notice), if the notice timer effect is executed or not. Can be made interesting by making the difficulty of the judgment different. In the variable timer effect (or the notice timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice timer effect (or the variable timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the notice-side timer effect are simultaneously executed, it is easy to determine whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) corresponding to the variation-side timer effect. Are set as selectable effect patterns with different start timings or end timings (total count or time required for digesting all counts). Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is obtained, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, and the count display of the variation timer effect and the notice timer are performed. By making the easiness of simultaneous execution with the effect count display (for example, the larger the total number of counts is likely to overlap), the easiness of judging whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed is different. To make it interesting

  In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (the effect target of the timer effect, the reach effect, Although the contents of the production are the same, the production of multiple production patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (the total number of counts or the time required for digesting all the counts) is provided. (The same effect type is used for each effect pattern) and a plurality of different change patterns may be prepared and made to correspond one-to-one.

  In addition, even if the number of displayed counts (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect are made different or the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable-side timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed, thereby giving an interest. .

  In addition, if the notice timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed with a count-up display, so that whether the notice timer effect is executed can be definitely determined. It is expected that the game entertainment will be greatly improved. In addition, while the notice-side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed with the countdown display, it is difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect has been executed depending on the production target, and it is interesting. Can be granted.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is directed to the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, and cases where different effects are directed to the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed to the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the effect is different from the case where different effects are targeted for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the jackpot expectation decreases becomes high, and even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be produced for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is set as the target for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, one of the change-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect is first given a predetermined numerical value. Since the count display is ended and the other count display is continued, at this point, it is as if the effect is a different effect (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode). Looks like). Then, after that, the other count display that has been continued reaches a predetermined numerical value in a manner in which it is clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed, and the process is ended. Even if it is revealed by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation preview with relatively low expectation is to be produced, a different production that can appear later is regarded as a production target ( The timer effect is executed in a mode of relatively high expectation), and it is expected to improve the game entertainment while maintaining the expectation.

  Also, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, the timing at which the variable-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice-side timer effect It is desirable that separate count end indications (for example, “successful count!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) appear at the timing of reaching the numerical value.

  More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and a notice-side timer effect, each of which is directed to a “conversation notice” performed as a variable-side or notice-side effect, appear in one effect pattern. Then, in this case, the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the notice-side timer effect respectively proceed simultaneously, but in the variable-side timer effect, the variable-side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuating side specific production that occurs (such as "Successful success!" And the effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice side timer production involves the The count display is made in accordance with the notice-side specific effect that occurs as the notice-side effect (such as "Chance UP!" Or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect)). By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays will appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are always executed when the effects are set as the effects of the variable timer effect (when the count change pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, if the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when the count display reaches a predetermined value when the effect is to be directed to the variable timer effect. It is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effect that is to be the production target of the variable timer effect is incorporated in advance as the production content of the above-mentioned production pattern (variable production), and only by executing the production pattern, the variable timer production and the production target are created. It is desirable that each of the effects (an aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation) can be made to appear. However, in place of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable-side timer effect is executed, an effect (an aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect is always selected in the preliminary lottery. .

  If the production of the conversation announcement and the cut-in is not set as the production target of the variable timer production, it is determined whether or not to appear as the production content of the announcement side in the announcement lottery described later, as well as the announcement A determination is made as to in what manner (an aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation or an aspect having a relatively low degree of expectation) as the effect content on the side, and the appearance control is performed based on the result of the determination. .

Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expected degree) to the probability of a certain change when a specific effect pattern appears, the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the like. become.

  Then, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable-side timer effect) are prepared as selectable effect patterns associated with the variable numbers. In this case, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the hit in the hit determination. At this time, when the big hit determination has been won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is increased, whereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The tendency is for the probability that a big hit symbol appears to be higher as the time becomes slower.

  Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a special effect condition is satisfied, the count change pattern (change numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable-side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol change is selected in this manner, what kind of notice effect is performed during the execution period of the effect pattern. In such a case, it is determined whether or not to additionally execute (combination) (preliminary lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already described sound data creation processing (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a description regarding the automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly described.

  2. Description of the Related Art In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from speakers in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, there are some reach that should improve the player's expectation, and others that output various sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel to be output in each scene, including each reach, is pre-assigned to each sound, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding predetermined default. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be able to be allocated to the vacant channel due to the channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound effects because it was not possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing the available channels and enhancing the interest of the player is to make the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds). Output means) and each sound to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) is dynamically assigned and managed, while the number of sound combinations to be output is determined by the number of combinations of each channel. If the maximum number of channels is exceeded (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the sound combination to be output through each dynamically allocated channel within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 119 (A) and 119 (B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison object with the present embodiment. FIG. 119A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned to each reproduction channel to be used in advance. Here, as to the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

  In the illustrated “notification sound 1” to “button press sound”, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has started must not be silenced in the middle of the reproduction until the end of the reproduction. As a channel assignment method, a pair of a reproduction channel and a sound is exclusively assigned to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted. As a channel assignment method, assignment is made to the same channel so as to minimize the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the output sound is muted and a new sound is output. For a sound that would interfere if overwritten, an independent channel is assigned, or a sound whose playback timing does not overlap is assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of the reproduction channel number, the left and right pan initial value, the upper and lower pan initial value, the volume initial value, the sound number, the reproduction type setting, and the output type setting are managed for each sound division and sound name. I have. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L). For example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 573L The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Indicates the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the time of starting the reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the gaming state, and the gaming state is, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “big hit middle”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) shows that each sound cannot be reproduced when trying to reproduce it. An example of the problem is shown. In FIGS. 122 (A) to 122 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 122 (A), the game state is “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop of left symbol”, “stop of right symbol”, “stop of middle symbol”, and “big hit” along the time axis which is the horizontal axis. The game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 119B), the “holding winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “first half announcement A”, as shown in FIG. 119 (B). Is overwritten with the hold winning sound, and the output of the “first half notice A” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in the second problem in FIG. 119B), the “holding prize sound” is assigned to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen preview” as shown in FIG. 119 (B). Will be overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the “full screen preview” sound will be stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (A) and FIG. 123 (B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the above-described sound control using the fixed channel, the channel division as the attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel indicates that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to a rule described later (see the above description). Equivalent to “Sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control based on the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority. Here, the basic sound reproduction rules will be described. As described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

  Regarding the “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure, the sound whose reproduction has been started must not be silenced on the way no matter what until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted.

  In the sound control based on the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter, abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined in the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier for specifying a specific AUTO group and a priority (priority) can be specified in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, if a free channel (unused channel) exists in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

  In the above case, when there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no free channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, for each sound division and sound name, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by a fixed channel already described, a left / right pan initial value, an up / down pan initial value, a volume initial value, Instead of the sound number, the playback type setting and the output type setting, an identifier and a priority (also referred to as “playback priority”) for specifying an AUTO group, a left / right pan initial value, a vertical pan initial value, a volume initial value, a sound It manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings, and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among a plurality of AUTO groups in which each sound is reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the sound is to be reproduced with higher priority as the numerical value is higher, while the sound is to be reproduced without priority as the numerical value is lower. In this embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, a notification sound having a priority of “25” (“information sound 1”, “information sound 2”, and “information sound 3”) Sound effect (“big hit decision sound” and “button press sound”) with priority “20”, BGM with priority “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and priority “10”. Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first half preview sound effect" to "second half preview sound effect"), and hold winning sound with priority "01" And Thus, in a state where there is no available channel, for example, when an attempt is made to reproduce the notification sound, there is no need to reproduce the notification sound using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) ) Is played back with priority using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, if “0x00” is set, it is indicated that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and if “0x80” is set, for example, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L. The volume difference output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  As described above, the initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a lower speaker 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of FIG. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume individually output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, within a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. ) Is set so that it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point indicates a reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A effect sound”, while “second half notice A effect sound” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "sound". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such a seek point, the number of sounds that can be registered exceeds the maximum number that can be registered.

  The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the gaming state, and the gaming state is, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “big hit middle”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 126A and 126B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), in the game state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop”, and “ The game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced all the time in reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponding to range A). At this point, if a start winning is awarded (corresponding to "hold winning" in the drawing) and the hold winning sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the reproduction channels 12 and 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved prize sound can be reproduced by using the reproduction channels 12 and 13, all the sounds being reproduced are not overwritten by the retained prize sound (corresponding to "reserved sound reproduction" in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced all the time on reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponding to range B). Here, for example, when a start winning prize (corresponding to “holding prize winning” in the drawing) is present and a new prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the reproduction channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Therefore, the output of all other types of sounds continues without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the winning winning sound (corresponding to “holding sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” in the drawing) is further generated after that, so that the notification sound with the highest priority “25” as a new sound ( Attempting to reproduce the “report 2” shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, at the start timing, the sound having the lowest priority is searched for among the sounds being reproduced, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the hold winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the drawing) is given. Since the priority order of the reserved prize sound is higher than the priority (01), the reserved prize sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number being reproduced, an automatic allocation group, a priority at the time of automatic allocation, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a pan control work, and have respective information corresponding thereto.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The sound number during reproduction indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

  In the automatic assignment group, channels are fixedly assigned when the value is "0", while channels are automatically assigned when the value is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). Equivalent). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, “1” indicates the AUTO group 1 and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment indicates the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time since the registration of the desired reproduction sound as “0”. The elapsed time since the registration is the same as that of the plurality of sounds being reproduced when an attempt is made to reproduce a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of the automatic allocation are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, the sound reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and deleted.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described set values of the left and right pans and the up and down pans.

  FIG. 128 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as a channel X and a channel X) of a finite number of channels prepared as various types of notification sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormal notification sounds) except for the effect sound as sound control by a fixed channel method. 3) shows an example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing a process of outputting only a sound definition table. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the definition of playback priority, left and right pan initial value, up and down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting are managed. are doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of other notification sounds and effect sounds is omitted. Note that, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the effect sound is defined by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter used for determining which of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output irrespective of the assignment state of the low priority notification sound to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X has priority, and after the output of the notification sound ends, the notification sound is assigned to channel X and output. Will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L). For example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 573L The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Indicates the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the time of starting the reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 129 is a table showing, for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition for terminating the notification (cancellation condition) for each type of notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for any notification sound. However, this is to use a single channel X as effectively as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a process for maintaining the state and refraining from the subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet has been performed). It is to notify that there is something. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism is detected” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetic is detected” ), And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” takes 60 seconds (equivalent to six notification sound repetitions) from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and the lighting by the various lamps are continued until the release condition of “power on again” is satisfied. Has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility that an illegal act due to a sticking action is being performed is high) is high. Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that the player is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first special winning opening sensor or the second large winning opening sensor despite not being in the big hit gaming state (the state in which the special winning opening is opened)). A notification sound that indicates that the detection by the winning port sensor has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of winning a game ball by forcibly opening a closed large winning port is performed). 3 (large winning prize abnormal) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed. Regarding the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “buzzer vibration was detected” and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected"), and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and the notification time is detected by the vibration sensor 2405. 60 seconds (equivalent to six repetitions of the notification sound), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, while the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and various lamps Will be continued until the release condition “power-on again” is satisfied. In the notification sound 3 (large winning prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “a booming big prize abnormality has been detected” and a loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "large winning prize is detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (equivalent to six notification sounds) after the detection by the count sensor 4005 is completed, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ends. The display and the lighting by the various lamps are continued until the release condition of “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. (It does not have to be the mode). In addition, the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing includes a notification sound 1 such as “bub-boo” that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of improper conduct is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any one of the above-mentioned items 3 and a message sound (unique sound) playing a role of notifying individual identification as to the content of the notification is adopted. The audible alarm is composed of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning under tense improper situations, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to make it clear from other alert sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  In other words, when reporting a member belonging to the first reporting group (a state in which the possibility of fraud has been high), the hall responds to the fraud rather than specifying which reporting type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, a notification sound of “boo-boo” or a lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices) is output, and only those that belong to the first notification group (for example, if an illegal act is performed). Since it is possible to recognize that the event has been performed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall to a fraud. Still further, a message sound for notifying which notification type follows the notification sound of “boo-boo” is output, and display is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that measures after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side will be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door open) indicates a state where the door frame 3 is detected to be open with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (possibly a wrongdoing by opening the door is performed). However, there is a possibility that the door may be opened due to the abnormal response treatment by the hall side). As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )), And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “The door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is 30 seconds from the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three notification sounds repeated). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are canceled by the door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 switches the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the condition ("detection of closing of the door frame 3") is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), a state in which the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main frame open switch 619 is detected ( A notification sound 5 (frame open) is provided to notify that the body frame has been opened due to the abnormal response by the hall, although there is a possibility that the body frame has been opened, but there is a possibility that the wrong action has been taken. However, when the possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed is in a moderate level and cannot be denied, it is regarded as belonging to the second notification group, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are not notified. The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (open frame), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 ( For example, “frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as a notification time, a body frame opening switch is provided. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to three notification sound repetitions) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is terminated. For the lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame close detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619). Until the detection of it) "I am satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 uses different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, respectively. (It does not need to be the mode). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. As for the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of the content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (an illegal action) (A state in which the possibility of the occurrence of the event is in the middle level). The combination of the successive output with the alarm sound used in any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as “ping-pong ping-pong” which plays the role of notifying that I have.

  That is, in the case of notifying a member belonging to the second notification group (a state in which there is a medium possibility that an illegal act has been performed), it is possible to prevent a person playing an appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side to some extent promptly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as in the case where the notification sound belongs to a third notification group to be described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as the notification sound. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game hardly feels disgust. On the other hand, a warning sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound although it is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for the person playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the output is performed when the lighting mode is different from that in the first notification group but belongs to the third notification group. By performing the notification by lighting the various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality countermeasures on the side of the hall will be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) indicates that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area of the game area 5a which is on the right side with respect to the center role 2500 in the non-time saving state. It is in a state where the passage has been detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a state in which the game is played in a manner that is disadvantageous for the player and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate mode (left-handed)). It is to inform that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (for example, “Please return to left-handed” )) Are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. The processing is terminated in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) from when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower plate 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full tank detection sensor 279 (lower plate) A notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where ball-off is to be performed is provided as a game guidance for appropriately proceeding the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is considered that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when it is in a state to be set, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (balling guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please pull out the ball of the lower plate” and a loop in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 are performed. A display process (for example, "Please remove the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and a looping process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball of the lower plate" as the notification time, and a game board Both of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed. .

  However, as for the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance), those sensors 2401 and 2401 are terminated at 20 seconds after the detection by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7. More specifically, for example, after the output of the message sound for 5 seconds, the silence for 5 seconds is completed. Data is allocated to channel X, and a sound corresponding to the data is output (silence output), and a loop process of repeating a 10-second notification sound in which the message sound and the silence data are set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 output silence data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the silence data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in a busy hall. It is desirable that the silent data be prepared in advance as one sound data including the message sound (sound data for 10 seconds), and the loop processing be performed while the sound data is allocated to the channel X.

  By the way, silence parts may be present in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, but these are very short for providing "between". It is clear that the above is a time-based one, and is fundamentally different from the above-described relatively long silence part (third notification group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boobboo" or "ping-pong ping-pong" is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. It is possible to make a notification about the game guidance without making the player feel disgust.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 128 and FIG. 129, regarding the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, the priority is set to be the same, but the priority is different between the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, loop reproduction for repeatedly reproducing the target sound is adopted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1 SHOT reproduction for reproducing the target sound once may be adopted. . “Booboo” commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group have a connection with the message sound. May be prepared separately for each notification sound as the sound data, or may be prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data combining the message sound and the alarm sound at the time of output is created. The channel may be assigned later.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), assuming that the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, the main The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that the magnetic field has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the updated state of the notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, and finds information on magnetic detection. Is recognized, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification mode is set. (In this case, the alarm sound reproduction is started in a loop of “mute magnetic detection”), and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the alarm time of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c to perform the peripheral control. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X, so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting this in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnetic is detected”). "), And lighting by various lamps provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), at time tα2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed from timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is in a state of loop reproduction, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the reception command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the vibration detection is included, the alarm sound 2 (abnormal vibration) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I will not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority order has already been assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Should be set, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has ended, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection The schedule data for generation is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of “buzzer vibration detected”) is set. Playback is to be performed.

  Also, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the vibration detection schedule data. By extracting the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting the extracted data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and the lamp are performed. These operations are performed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from a position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. I have. In the lamp lighting, although the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection has already been set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the lamps, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection have the same data content. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  Then, at the timing tα3 after 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is repeated based on the expiration of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality). The loop process to be executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required for reproducing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is timed. At the timing tα3, when the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, the loop processing is terminated at a well-cut timing.

  At this time, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not in the state of time-up, so the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and sets the remaining data. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “buzzy vibration Has been detected ”loop).

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at the timing tα3, it is possible to reproduce the notification sound of “Booboo vibration detected” from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) expires, “Booboo vibration detected. It is possible to prompt the user to end the loop processing and stop the reproduction at an incomplete timing (for example, timing such as “buzzing”) in the notification sound such as “do”.

  According to such a configuration, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 130 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here, “boogie”) and the sixth message sound (here, “magnetism detected”) have been reproduced, the seventh alarm sound (here) In this case, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if "buzzing" was reproduced. As a result, "Booboo magnetism detected" and "Booboo vibration detected" are connected in strange places, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent information in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with “bub magnetism” and the notification sound 2 starts with “movement detected”, a meaningless buzzer such as “booboo magnetism detected” Content, which can confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer according to the vibration detection is short, and the notification sound 2 ends at the time of the alarm sound of “boogie boom”, and the message sound ends. Even if the reproduction is not performed, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing and the reproduction is stopped, so that it is possible to recognize that some abnormality is detected at the same time (only the magnetic abnormality is detected). In the case of the notification, the notification sound is ended in a well-cut place). As a result, when the alarm sound is cut off at an incomplete timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show `` magnetism detected '' and `` vibration detected '' respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the state in which the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 130 (b) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  Here, the process performed when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above-described processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), at timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is output, frame opening detection by the body frame opening switch 619 in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame release has been detected. Next, information indicating that frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is output to the outside based on the updated state of the notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is used for processing related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no notification sound is output, and as a result, the frame opening detection When it is determined that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. In addition to starting the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the “frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is set. .

  When the notification sound 5 (open frame) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the open frame is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 5 (open frame) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Become like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting the information and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is a condition for releasing the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the frame is Open ") and lighting by various lamps provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the second notification group).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), at the timing tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback, the step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 5 (open frame) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door open detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (opening frame) having the same priority order has already been assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not processed in a state where the sound generation schedule data is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) has ended, the door open detection is performed. The schedule data for sound generation is set, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, “door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop) The notification sound is reproduced.

  Also, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, and The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Display and lamp lighting are performed.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door is separately displayed at a position different from a position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. I have. When the lamp is turned on, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the detection of the door opening is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the detection of the opening of the frame is already set and has the same priority. Thus, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each lamp emission, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each type of lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data content. In any case, no change occurs in the lamp lighting.

  Then, at the timing tβ3, which is 30 seconds after the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is generated based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  Also, at this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has not been timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection, and By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Is open Ping-pong ping-pong loop will be executed to play the notification sound.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the door open is not set but set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) expires, the “door is open” It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing and stop the reproduction at an incomplete timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as "ping pong ping pong".

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 130 (b)) When the third message sound (here, “frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping-pong ping-pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if "door is open") was reproduced. As a result, "Ping Pong Ping Pong" and "Ping Pong Ping Pong Open" are connected in strange places, making it impossible to recognize the content of the notification in a tense situation. Generation can be suppressed appropriately.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of the door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at an incomplete position, the message sound is reproduced first. As a result, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 130 (c) shows a process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is being output, the game is not performed during the processing in step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) even though the time is not shorter. If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that a game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center role 2500 in the area 5a (the right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), The control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that a right-handed operation has been detected in the non-time saving state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time-saving state) is provided to processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become like In the process of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. 129, the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). A timer for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-hand”) and for notifying the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance). 20 seconds).

  Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in the present embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a. Only information indicating that the ball has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. May be performed, and the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time-saving state is copied to the various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Become like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal is the end of the notification which is the release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) times out). It is continuously executed until Regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the performance, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display of the game board effect display 1600 is performed until the notification sound is finished. The display in the area (for example, “Please return to left-handed”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (c), at the timing tγ2 when 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” is in the loop playback state, the step S110 or It is assumed that the lower tray full sensor has been detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information indicating that the lower plate full state has been detected, as in the case of the timing tγ1 at which the right-handed operation was detected in the non-time saving state. Thus, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of the lower plate being full) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received by the reception command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information of lower plate full detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) shown in FIG. No assignment is made to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the lower tray full at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) in a state where the sound generation schedule data is not assigned to the channel X is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the timer (20) for counting the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) that has not been set yet. Second), and if the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has ended, the lower plate is full. Set the sound generation schedule data according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball from the lower plate" ) Is executed.

  Also, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full state, but does not set the schedule data for the screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full state. The schedule data is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-described display in the liquid crystal is executed. I have.

  In the display in the liquid crystal, the display according to the ball-pulling guidance is separately displayed at a position different from the position where the display according to the left-hand guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Has become.

  After that, at a timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handing” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) having timed out. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required for reproducing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handing” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) is not in the state of time-up, so the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full. Then, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound is reproduced in a loop of "Please remove the ball of the lower plate".

  That is, at the timing tγ2, the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set, but is set at the timing tγ3. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of “Please remove the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball-pulling guidance) times out , So that the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing of the notification sound such as "Please pull out the lower plate ball" (for example, timing such as "Please pull out the lower plate ball"), and it will not be played back Be able to encourage.

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 130 (c)) After the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball of the lower plate") It is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if it were reproduced. As a result, "return to left" and "please remove the ball of the lower plate" are connected at an unusual place, and the occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized is appropriately suppressed. Will be able to do it.

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It has become. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, no sound data for 5 seconds is interposed. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, so that occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized is preferably performed. Can be avoided.

  FIG. 131A shows an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), assuming that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, As for the processing corresponding to the magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. Therefore, at the timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) times out. At the time t-3, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  In the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is at the timing t-2 when the loop is being reproduced. In step S110, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 128). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the process of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Normally, the processing of the lower priority order is the same as the processing of the same priority order described with reference to FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (c). A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some wrongdoing has taken place. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group in which the possibility of fraud is medium”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131A, at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection nor the schedule data for sound generation is set. Only the flag corresponding to the door open detection is set. Then, at timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection and the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door open detection are respectively set. At the same time, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X, and the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the “door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp in response to the detection of the door opening is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism was detected" is displayed while the loop is being reproduced, and the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door has been opened. From the timing t-3 at which the loop playback of the notification sound is ended, the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is reproduced in a whole for 30 seconds. That is, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is reproduced in a more careful notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is performed. Although it is the content (in this case, the loop of “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong”), it is expected that the recognition of the situation that the possibility of fraud is high is promoted.

  In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected", the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which it belongs can be recognized early on. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of “ping-pong ping-pong” after the message sound, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

  FIG. 131 (b) shows an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), suppose that at timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). Regarding the processing corresponding to the detection of the door opening (the processing at the time of opening the door), the same processing as the “processing according to the detection of the opening of the frame (processing at the time of opening the frame)” described with reference to FIG. Is Therefore, at the timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is timed up, tδ3. Then, the information processing sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a good timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing which is the condition for releasing the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of the loop playback, and the step is performed at the timing tδ2. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed operation in the non-time saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the detection of the right-handing in the non-time saving state. From this (see FIG. 128), even when right-handedness detection occurs in the non-time-saving state, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, the processing of the lower priority order is the same as the processing of the same priority order described with reference to FIGS. Is set so that the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set, while the sound generation corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state Schedule data is not set. At the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) has not expired, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is allocated to the channel X by the minute, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of “return to left-handed”).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times, and the warning sound such as "Please return to left-handing" is not included at a good timing. Is reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while maintaining the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It has become. Therefore, even with such silence data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Become like

  FIG. 131 (c) shows an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c), suppose that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 at which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing corresponding to the detection of the door opening (processing at the time of opening the door), the same processing as the “processing according to the detection of the opening of the frame (processing at the time of opening the frame)” described with reference to FIG. Is Therefore, at the timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) times up the timing tε3. Then, the information processing sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a good timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing which is the condition for releasing the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in a loop playback state, the step S112 It is assumed that the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94. In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 128), the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is prioritized, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is performed for both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content is not reflected as the operation of each actuator. It should be noted that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 for each notification. Even when a high-priority notification is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound and the lamp lighting, it has been set up to that time at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from the set state may be performed.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection. Is maintained in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are respectively set. State. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is determined based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the door opening and the content based on the light emission mode generation schedule data. By switching to the contents based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be performed by any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tε2, the process in the execution state with the lower priority (the process when the door is opened) is performed without any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between the two different processes (the door opening process and the magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “buzzer magnetism detected” is started, and the timer of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. In accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds), the notification process such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and the loop processing is terminated at a sharp timing. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection with a high possibility that the misconduct has occurred, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed by any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The output contents are also reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is immediately transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

  FIG. 131 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing t # 1 at which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 130 (c) is performed for the processing (left-hand guidance processing) according to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore, at timing t # 1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is started, and timing t # 3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) times out. In this case, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound which is the condition for canceling the left-hand guidance is up.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing t # 2 when 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t # 1 and a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in a loop playback state, the step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opened) according to the door opening detection. From this (see FIG. 128), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is prioritized, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. It should be noted that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 for each notification. Even when a high-priority notification is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, as a method for preventing the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, a right-hand detection in the non-time-saving state set up to that time at timing tζ2 A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the set state may be performed.

  In this regard, in this embodiment, at timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state, but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. Are also kept in the set state, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection, as well as the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, which has a higher priority than this, are kept. The generation schedule data is set to a set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. In the process of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the detection of the door open, the output content of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), at timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing in the execution state with the lower priority (left-handed guidance processing) without performing any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-hand guidance process, door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door opening) is started. When the timer (30 seconds) elapses, the alarm processing such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a sharp timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing detection which is the condition for releasing the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection that the possibility of the misconduct is medium occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed by the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. In any case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person playing the appropriate game does not disgust, "Ping-pong ping-pong" alarm sounds to notify the second notification group, and it is expected that the hall side will be notified as soon as possible of the switch to the situation where the possibility of fraud has occurred. .

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in a situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value may be changed. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected on some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 128 are to be output, the above-described processing according to the priority order is performed, so that various kinds of processing can be performed. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify the details of the abnormality, game guidance, and the like (a channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group with the medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly reported only by the control based on the priority of the game machine.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is likely to have been committed, but also when there is an abnormality that is not likely to have been committed. is there. In other words, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors). Therefore, even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the status of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is not required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 132 to 137, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority, the state of the gaming machine is further improved by taking into account special conditions. The notification is to be realized in such a manner that it can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, special notification processing will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 132 to 137.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132, the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 at which no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also set. It is set. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 seconds until the timing tα12 arrives. Plays for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal in response to the detection of the door opening is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is no longer detected by the door frame opening switch 618.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection ends and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority level for the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, with respect to the lamp emission according to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation to the various lamp operations is not performed. At the timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. At this time, by setting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, as for the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection has been completed and the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation is that a person who intends to perform some illegal operation opens the door frame 3 to open the door frame 3 and then waits until the notification sound reproduction according to the detection of the door opening has been completed, and It is assumed that the magnet may be momentarily in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when an unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. It is feared that simply performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection is not sufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, the magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity even if any countermeasure is taken.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment utilizes that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued at the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection ends. On the basis of this, the "sound data for sound generation in response to the detection of door opening" which is in the state where the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to the channel X. The special processing to be re-assigned to is performed. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening, which has already been completed, is reproduced in a form linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. Also, as a person who commits fraud, he is already reassured that if the magnetic notification is over, the reproduction of the notification sound has been completed, and it is finally possible to make the situation that the misconduct is inconspicuous. By playing the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening that should have been completed, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected that further misconduct will have a recognition that the risk is too large Become like

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period when the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period when the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, the other channels are used. A process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the change of the assigned symbols and other game sounds (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be the volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound and the other game sounds during the symbol fluctuation assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is being performed (the period in which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). State) or the condition that the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, in the period between the timings tα11 to tα13 and the period between the timings tα14 to tα16, the symbol variation is performed based on the fact that the notification process is being performed by the first notification group. A process of suppressing the volume of the middle production sound and other game sounds (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed (timings tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16), both the notification processes by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During and after the period, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and the volume of other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification process by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. During the period, a process of lowering the value to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states simply by checking the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side is further speeded up.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα16 at which the door open detection ends, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that was already in the end state is reproduced in a form that is linked to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 at which the door open detection ends, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds may not be suppressed but may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is performed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period is the same as the period during which the operation is performed and the period in which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door, but the end periods thereof are all different. In this way, by operating them so as to have different roles in the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp emission, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it is possible to appropriately notify the details of the abnormality, the game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 133, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door open detection ends, right timing detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 132, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act has been performed, so that the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening already in the end state is not reproduced again. Further, during the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the effect of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds is not changed. Incidentally, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, even if frame opening detection is generated instead of right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since there is a low possibility that such an action is performed, when the corresponding notification sound ends, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 134, FIG. 132 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is terminated at timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. I have.

  In the example shown in FIG. 134, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been ended is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. It is never played in connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 132, after a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, the door open detection is performed. Waiting for the completion of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily placed in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when an unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot weather is cooled. It is assumed that the situation may have been entered. However, after the timing tα34, in consideration of the fact that the door frame 3 is closed and a non-illegal state in which no magnetic detection has occurred, even in such a non-illegal state, it is possible to respond to the magnetic detection. It is considered that only the continuous reproduction of the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is vacated when further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep the state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 135, FIG. 132 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the user waits for the notification sound reproduction in accordance with the door open detection to end, and then tries to dispose the unauthorized magnet secretly inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. Sometimes, the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in spite of the fact that the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response thereto, the magnet is kept within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without being depressed by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is about to be repositioned, and more malicious cheating may have occurred. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, while the notification sound 1 is output. A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed to when 60 seconds from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed is taken as a base point elapses. Can be continuously reproduced. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. Finally, a beep sound such as "Booboo magnetism detected" is not terminated at a sharp timing. For example, the loop process is terminated at an incomplete timing such as "Booboo magnetism detection". As a result, it is expected that a great sense of discomfort will be created in the hall and everyone will be noticed.

  Further, at a timing tα44 after a lapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has been already informed for the notification time (30 seconds). The "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection" is set again, and the special processing for re-assigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form that is linked to “reproduction of the notification sound in response to the magnetic detection”, and in addition, an intermediate sound such as “detecting the bubbling magnetism”. At an odd timing, the loop processing is reproduced in such a manner as to be linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state becomes higher, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in a state of being stopped halfway, and in the hall. It is expected that this will create even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 132 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 136, it is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 at a timing tα54 within a period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 136 as well, when the notification sound reproduction according to the detection of the door opening is completed, and an attempt is made to secretly place an unauthorized magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. Although the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response thereto, the pachinko machine 1 is largely shaken without being depressed by such a situation. It is possible that more malicious fraud has been committed. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door open detection which has been already ended is reproduced in a form further linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Second) is set, and at a timing tα55 at which reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a beep sound such as "Boo-boo oscillation detected" is not terminated at a well-cut timing, and for example, the loop process is terminated at an incomplete timing such as "Boo-boo oscillation detection". Since the processing is completed, it is expected that a great sense of discomfort will be caused in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered.

  Further, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). "Schedule data" is set again, and special processing for re-assigning the notification sound to channel X is performed. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening which has already been terminated is further linked to the "reproduction of notification sound in response to vibration detection", which is linked to the "reproduction of notification sound in response to magnetic detection". In addition to the playback of the notification sound, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as “detection of the vibration” and connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been completed is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the vibration detection is reproduced in a state of being stopped halfway, and in the hall. It is expected that this will create even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the end of the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame opening detection instead of the door opening detection. I assume.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 137, it can be said that a situation in which magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the main frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet to be useful. Since there is no such situation, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet side is used to eliminate clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 137 as well, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection which has been already ended is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By performing the reproduction in a manner linked to the “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), a great sense of incongruity is generated in the hall, so that it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at timing tα66 at which the main frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection ends, not only the notification processing (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also the magnetic detection is performed. A special process for terminating each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) is also performed.

  According to such a configuration, while appropriately performing the function against fraudulent acts, when an erroneous detection on the hole side is made, the main body frame 4 is simply closed, and the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection ( (Notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) can all be terminated, so that it is expected that the response of the hole side to erroneous detection is promptly maintained and the atmosphere in the hole is appropriately maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 137, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the magnetic detection. May be performed.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, in the process of step S1108, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, and when it is determined that the effect selection left button 331 has been operated. A process for lowering the set value (player setting value) by the player with respect to the speaker volume is performed, and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the player setting value (player setting value) with respect to the speaker volume is determined. ) Is performed. Further, when the player setting value is reduced and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is output at the reduced volume value. On the other hand, when the set value of the player is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. In addition, it is possible to grasp the volume to which the volume adjustment has been completed and the volume has been changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20”, which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when there is no more available channel, and the output sound volume of the effect sound ( (Audible sound volume) can be more reliably transmitted.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed in a period before the game is started because the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet (for example, when the demo display is performed). (Permissible period), as well as during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the jackpot determination is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared At times and the like, the setting of the volume value can be changed flexibly to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the situation where the channel assignment of various effect sounds is performed according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol change, the pachinko machine 1 When it is detected that 1 has entered a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or a door opening, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound according to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Also, at this time, it is possible to execute an effect progress notification process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value without canceling the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound ends, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, so that only a specific information sound is allocated to the channel during normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-broadcast state), and there are no free channels to which sound data is not allocated at the stage before the end of the specific broadcast sound channel allocation (broadcast state). Risk tends to be higher. If there is no available channel to which no sound data is allocated at a stage before the channel allocation (a notification state) of the specific notification sound ends, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (reporting state) of a specific notification sound is ended, the sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel and is discarded is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Regarding the concern of the vacant channel related to such production sound, if the fixed channel method is used for the channel assignment of the notification sound, there is no direct adverse effect, but the fixed channel method is used for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Or, or whether to adopt the automatic channel method, since it should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of games and effects, even if any channel method is adopted as the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to reduce costs and improve reliability in developing the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed during the effect progress notification process, the value is reduced to the specific value. The output volume of the produced sound is not made variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("pi!" Or "pipi!") Even if the player performs an operation while the performance progress lower notification process is being executed. Accordingly, it is expected that the channel is given a margin by that amount to promote the reduction of the risk of running out of empty channels.

  However, in spite of the pachinko machine 1 capable of dynamically changing the setting of the volume value when a more important production appears, the output volume is set while the production progress lower notification process is being executed. If it is not possible to change the sound, if the production progress lower notification process is performed due to a false detection or a notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.), the sound volume appropriate value is adjusted to the content of the production progress. It is unavoidable that the gaming entertainment will decline due to the inability to change the settings. In addition, if the production progresses during the production progress notification process, a large deviation occurs between the appropriate sound volume value according to the production content and the actual set value, the output volume ( After the setting change of the listening sound volume is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the setting to a proper volume value. In this case, however, the channel is occupied by the above-described sound volume adjustment completion sound. There is a concern that even though the production progress notification process has finally been completed, there is not enough available channels to produce the production sound properly, which may lead to a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification processing is being performed, the value decreases to the specific value. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the produced sound is not changed but maintained, while the change value of the set value (player set value) by the player pertaining to the sound volume is accepted, and When the effect progress lower notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the process is collectively changed to an output volume (audible sound volume) in which all operations up to that point are reflected.

  According to such a configuration, if the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is accepted in accordance with the effect of the progress of the effect while the effect progress notification process is being performed, a new operation is performed. Without performing the process, when the effect progress notification process ends, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) can be changed to the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected. As described above, the accepting of the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is allowed even during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being executed, whereby the effect progress notification process ends. It is expected that the game entertainment will be prevented from deteriorating until the game is completed. In addition, immediately after the completion of the effect progress notification process, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of steps, and a shortage occurs in an empty channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when performing the collective change of the output sound volume to the player setting value when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being executed is performed. Regardless of the number of times the player set value has been changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound is played back only once at the volume after the batch change. Alternatively, the sound may be output in a special mode sound (for example, “B!”) Different from the above.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the production progress lower notification processing is completed, the number of changes of the player setting value or the player during the period in which the production progress lower notification processing has been executed. Regardless of the number of operations, etc., it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively with the end of the effect progress notification process. . According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lower notification processing due to the notification due to erroneous detection or the hall side (door opening, etc.) has been finally ended, appropriate production due to lack of available channels. Can be suitably suppressed from occurring such that the user cannot enjoy the game.

  In the above-described example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection ends while the door opening state is maintained, when a magnetic abnormality occurs thereafter and the notification sound corresponding thereto ends, the door opening detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is in the output state and a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound ends, even if the door opening state is maintained, the door opening detection It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted “notification sound according to door open detection”).

  When the door is in the open state, the lamp is lit according to the detection of the door open.However, the lamp luminescence is continued even after the notification sound in response to the detection of the door open ends when the door is in the open state. Is desirable. Further, it is desirable that the operation is continued for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state ends.

  If there is a specific error that does not output the notification sound even if the abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door is open, the specific error is output. It is desirable to output the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening based on the occurrence of the alarm. According to such a configuration, the occurrence of some abnormality can be recognized by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening detection.

  Alternatively, if there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if abnormality detection is performed, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door is open, the The notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and the state in which the notification can be performed may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in a situation where such an abnormal notification sound is output. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value may be changed. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected on some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example of the processing from the execution of the effect progress notification processing to the change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is described.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram for describing the contents of the effect progress notification processing separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the output volume (audible sound volume) being collectively changed, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 138. Will be described briefly. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 128 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in this description example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the effect sound. For example, in the first sound volume suppression mode, when the setting value (player setting value) of the sound volume is changed by the player, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among the possible settings, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second sound volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first sound volume suppression mode. In this example, particularly, although the processing pertaining to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as an example.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, and large winning abnormalities) belonging to the first informative group having a high possibility of fraud are generated. When the notification process regarding any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set in the second volume suppression mode, which is the higher suppression level. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

  In this example of description, when the notification process relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, winning award abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the sound volume is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, winning award abnormality) corresponding to the abnormality detection is reproduced to when it ends. Is set to

  On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, if the notification processing is performed on any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud, the degree of suppression is set. In the first sound volume suppression mode, which is the lower side, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is performed. However, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) in the first sound volume suppression mode on the lower side of the suppression degree is ended.

  On the other hand, if the notification processing is performed on any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance, out of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the staging effect is obtained. The processing for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. May not necessarily be different from each other, and the output volume of the effect sound is controlled in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. (Audible sound volume) may be suppressed. However, regarding the termination condition of the processing to be suppressed, when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed, the condition is more strict than when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important that you do this.

  FIG. 139 shows the contents of the processing related to the volume adjustment associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the processing relating to the notification sound has not been executed. FIG.

  In this example, the player setting value is made to be variable by “1” within a range of “1” to “5” by operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The sound volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set by the player in a state in which the above-described suppression modes (the first volume suppression mode and the second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value of 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the player setting value of the volume of the effect sound is “3” of “1” to “5”, and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” which is 20 times the output sound volume. Further, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination has not been performed and it is in a state of waiting for a winning start, the effect selection left button 331 is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. A displayed image 331a and a display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a first volume value display OH1 that enables recognition of any of the current player setting values of “1” to “5” is also executed. You. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super-reach effect, which is a reach effect performed with the background image changed. , The display may be hidden and at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when an operation is performed by the player. Further, with respect to the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 139 (A), when the operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to “1” each time the operation is performed. Accordingly, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" at a time. Further, each time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the gauge display indicates which of the current set values is within the range of the player set values “1” to “5”. OH2 (see FIG. 139 (C)) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is reduced. The user setting value remains “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (the audible sound volume) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or the volume is set to “ It is desirable that audible output be prevented by setting to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the winning start is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 139 (A) (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed) but also a symbol change according to the jackpot determination when the game is started. The reception by the player is allowed even during the execution period, and for example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

  That is, FIG. 139 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 139 (B). In the first operation, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60” which is 20 times as large as those. With the setting changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel at the changed volume “80” and played, and the player's setting is changed in the second operation. Under the condition that the value has been changed from “4” to “5” and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) has been changed from “80” to “100” which is 20 times those, Volume adjustment completed with "100", the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the player setting value is changed from “1” to “5”, which is the range of the player setting value. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by a gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This is to clarify which of the current set values is in the range of the player set values “1” to “5”, so that even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as an operation of the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed despite the player setting value being the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical range of “1” to “5” is constantly displayed as a block, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to a change in the player setting value. By performing the display, the current player setting value is indicated.

  Note that the second volume value display OH2 is, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), after the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 139 (C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the display is turned off, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”) Is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Thereby, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation of the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. become.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 140, while the door opening detection is occurring during the symbol change execution period and the processing related to the notification sound is being executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated. It is a figure explaining the content about the processing regarding volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 140 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (A). In such a situation, when a winning start is generated and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), during the symbol variation execution period, the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is being opened ") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  As described above, during the symbol fluctuation period, when the detection of the door opening belonging to the second notification group occurs and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response thereto, the first sound volume suppression mode is set. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3” similar to that in the situation of FIG. 140 (A), but the effect is produced. The output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a first predetermined value (here, “10”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The effect contents will be developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such effect progress notification processing is being performed, the first specification is performed. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound lowered to the value (here, “10”) is not varied but is maintained, while the set value of the sound volume by the player (player set value) The change acceptance of itself is permitted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress notification processing (processing for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all the operations performed up to that point. Is collectively changed as described above.

  That is, FIG. 140 (C) shows a state after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 140 (B). Although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains at the original value (game value). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the predetermined value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the operation of the effect selection right button 332 is performed twice by the player, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained until the effect progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output sound volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect content is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and even in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5”. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, the game board effect display is performed. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5” is: This is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  Then, after returning to the state in which the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again, the door frame 3 is closed, and the processing relating to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the production progress lower notification processing (output volume to a specific value) When each of the processes is ended, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), in response to the end of the process, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value gradually changes from “3” to “4” according to the first operation and “5” according to the second operation during the performance progress notification processing. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) should be “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”). Should be changed stepwise to "100" according to the above, but it is changed collectively from the first specific value (here, "10") to "100" in which all operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, the accepting of the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is allowed even during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being executed, whereby the effect progress notification process ends. It is expected that the game entertainment will be prevented from deteriorating until the game is completed. In addition, immediately after the completion of the performance progress notification process, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of steps, and the volume adjustment completion sound may cause shortage or lack of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound. Such a situation can be suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively (from “10” to “100”) with the end of the production progress notification process, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel adjustment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lower notification processing due to the notification due to erroneous detection or the hall side (door opening, etc.) has been finally ended, appropriate production due to lack of available channels. Can be suitably suppressed from occurring such that the user cannot enjoy the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the specific state includes the magnetic abnormality and the door opening. However, the production progress lower notification process and the door opening in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred occur. The end condition may be different from the effect progress notification process in the state in which the effect is made.

  For example, first, regarding the production progress lower notification processing in a state where the door is opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door opening was continued. ). However, in any case, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively (for example, from “10” to “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completed sound is generated despite the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to make the assignment itself.

  On the other hand, regarding the effect of the production progress notification in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, the end of the state of the magnetic abnormality should not be terminated only when the state of the magnetic abnormality has ended, but should be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power supply is shut down. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively (for example, from “10” to “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored after the power is turned off. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel allocation itself of the volume adjustment completed sound.

  In addition, in the effect progress lower notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the player setting value is changed, a display indicating that fact is displayed, whereas in the effect progress lower notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs, Alternatively, when the player setting value is changed, a display indicating that fact may not be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end condition is different between the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened and the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs. become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hall side, the output (channel assignment) of the volume adjustment completion sound triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob cannot be performed. It is more desirable to make the available channels have room.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the buttons for volume adjustment (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), although not shown. Lamps (such as lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for effects, etc., and gaming lamps such as special figure LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from brightness setting targets. ) Is provided with a button for brightness adjustment (a button for increasing brightness, a button for decreasing brightness, etc.), and when it is determined that the button for brightness adjustment has been operated, the player determines the brightness of various effect lamps. Processing for changing the set value (player set value) can be executed. Further, when the player setting value relating to the brightness is decreased or increased, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the set value related to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the luminance of such an effect lamp can be changed by a player's operation in both a state where the symbol is not changed and a state where the symbol is changed.

  In addition, it is desirable to assign a channel to the brightness adjustment completion sound under the same conditions as the above-described volume adjustment completion sound. In this case, even if the setting value related to the brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment check is performed. A situation in which the channel assignment of the sound itself is not performed, a situation in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output, and the like appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (for example, whether the above-described production progress notification processing is being executed) when the set value relating to the luminance is changed, not the volume. Will be made possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  When a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after being controlled on the demo screen) is satisfied, the player setting value regarding the volume is set to a specific value (for example, “3”) without operation by the player. It may be changed. However, if the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH1) The value display OH2) and the output (channel allocation) related to the volume adjustment completion sound are not performed, so that a third party is notified that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

  Also, if a new volume adjustment is made while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment has been made in the output state, the volume adjustment sound in the output state will be output even if there is an available channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel in the form of aborting it and outputting it (overwriting and outputting) is more effective in giving room to the number of available channels. desirable.

  In addition, when an operation is performed further on the side where the volume is increased despite the player setting value being the maximum value, or when the volume is decreased despite the player setting value being the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is an empty channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and is not output so that the number of empty channels has a margin. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display (the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2) indicating the current set value is displayed. Is also good.

  Although the volume adjustment by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the operation of the player is not permitted may be generated.

  On the other hand, FIG. 141 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection occurred in FIG. 140 is not the opening of the door but a magnetic abnormality, and the processing related to the notification sound is being executed. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the content of a process related to volume adjustment when a right button 332 is operated.

  The situation shown in FIG. 141 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140 (A). In such a situation, when the winning start is generated and the big hit is determined, as shown in FIG. 141B, the result of the big hit determination and the fluctuation are similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. 140B. The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), during the symbol variation execution period, the detection of magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed according to the detection. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism detected" and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetism detection") And lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Further, as described above, during the symbol fluctuation period, when the detection of the magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3” which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 141 (A), but the effect is produced. The output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a second predetermined value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The effect contents are developed under the volume value (here, mute).

  In this regard, also in the case where the production progress lower notification process according to such magnetic abnormality is performed, if the operation on the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”) is obtained. )), The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound (silence here)) is not varied but is maintained, while the set value by the player regarding the volume (the player set value) is itself. Is accepted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point. The fact that they are changed collectively is as described above.

  That is, FIG. 141 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 141 (B). Although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains at the original value (game value). It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the predetermined value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the operation of the effect selection right button 332 is performed twice by the player, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained until the effect progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output sound volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect content is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here, “0”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, the game board effect display is performed. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5” is: This is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this illustrative example, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the above is continuously executed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed under the condition that the volume adjustment guide display OAH has been returned to the state where it is executed again, the production progress lower notification process (specifying the output volume) When the process of lowering to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), in response to the completion of the process, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all the operations up to that point. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value gradually changes from “3” to “4” according to the first operation and “5” according to the second operation during the performance progress notification processing. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here, “0”). Should be changed stepwise to "100" according to the above, but it is changed collectively from the second specific value (here, "0") to "100" in which all operations up to that point are reflected.

  It should be noted that, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the opening of the door is performed, even in the situation shown in FIG. The display (here, “magnetic detection”) in the display area 1600 and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed, respectively. I have. In other words, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the effect sound is out of the suppression target and is determined according to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification processing according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound is ended, the effect sound remains the target of suppression while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (the player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being performed. Thus, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest until the end of the performance progress notification process is ended is suppressed. In addition, immediately after the completion of the performance progress notification process, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of steps, and the volume adjustment completion sound may cause shortage or lack of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound. Such a situation can be suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively ("0" → "100") in response to the completion of the production progress lower notification process associated with the magnetic anomaly. The channel allocation of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed in spite of the change in volume. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate effect cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of available channels even though the effect progress notification process is finally ended due to a notification due to an erroneous detection. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, the notification sound corresponding to the opening of the door such as “Ping-pong ping-pong is open” and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” are shown in FIG. Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) are executed, the effect progress lower notification processing is not executed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be appropriately varied. However, since these notification sounds 6 and 7 are set to “1” (0x1FF) in the third byte of the volume initial value as shown in FIG. 128, regardless of the player setting value, Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group do not set “1” in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the target of volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, regarding each processing described in FIGS. 140 and 141, the state detection is performed not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also in the state before the symbol variation is started, and the timing of the start and the end of the symbol variation. May be executed in the same manner even when the notification process according to the above is executed.

  In each of the processes described with reference to FIG. 140 and FIG. 141, after the effect progress notification process is completed, similarly to before the effect progress notification process is started, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 331. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  In addition, in the processing described in FIG. 140 and the processing described in FIG. 141, the effect of suppressing the effect sound during the period in which the effect of the effect of the progress of the effect is being performed is made different. It is not necessary to make them different from each other, and the output sound volume of the production sound (audible sound) is suppressed in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the volume of the sound may be performed.

  Also, in the effect progress notification process, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of various game sounds is suppressed. Of these game sounds, a game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as sounds played in response to winning (winning sounds), may be played back at the initial value set volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, the hall can easily grasp whether or not the game is continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) reproduced in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the performance progress notification processing is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound is reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not performed.

  As described above, in FIG. 128 to FIG. 141, there is no channel available by adopting a channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation in which the number of available channels is 0) It has been proposed that technical measures be taken in terms of how to make it difficult to appear itself. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, the effect design sound (effect sound) is assigned to a channel that is not vacant (the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical aspects are also applied to the channel assignment of the effect sound at a stage prior to the occurrence of a situation where there is no available channel (a situation where the number of available channels is 0). We are trying to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving type control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. When the automatic channel method is adopted, the control based on the above-described priority may not necessarily be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Further, each example described below can be implemented in an appropriate combination.

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation starts and ends until the symbol variation is started. During the period, a process of developing a display effect according to a specific effect pattern is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and a sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced. Is performed. Then, when the display effect on the game board effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing in the symbol fluctuation period, the sound of “BGM playback” is left assigned to the predetermined channel, and the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence ( When the volume of the “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output, and an operation on a predetermined operation unit (the operation button 410 or the like) is detected in this state, a big hit symbol (the corresponding A special effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation that a special display mode appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested in the special effect may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, in outputting the special effect sound in accordance with the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage of the channel is likely to have a margin. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special sound effect while removing anxiety, such as "there is no possibility that the channel is full and the special sound effect cannot be output". Can be performed, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of “BGM playback”) is to be assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a validity period for effect reception), a sound (““ It is possible to provide the player with an operation opportunity (generate a validity period for effect reception) after setting the "BGM reproduction" sound) in a suppressed mode or in a state where the sound is output in a silent state.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, an effective period of effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within the effective period. It is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression processing is terminated and the volume is returned to the initial value when the operation (production acceptance) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to this is started at an uncertain timing.

  In addition, in addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” is switched to the sound data of “BGM reproduction for exclusive use of special production sound reproduction”, and It is also conceivable to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of "BGM playback" is reproduced in accordance with the contents of various effects from the stop of the specific effect pattern to the end of the effect, the timing of the stop of the symbol, and the like. If it is determined at which timing the operation (reception of the effect) is performed or not (depends on the player), the operation (reception of the effect) may be used to newly reproduce the sound of “BGM reproduction”. In addition, there is a concern that a so-called sound shift may occur between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ("BGM playback" sound) corresponding to the specific effect pattern are stored. For example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, sound data during the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are determined in a time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Processing for sequentially assigning to channels is performed. The specific sound data (one sound material) among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is defined by the sound generation schedule data. Is assigned to the predetermined channel in a time-series manner, the reproduction is started by being assigned to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of the effect reception in the specific effect pattern occurs, and the effective period ends. Then, the reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state for the predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the reproduction.

  In this regard, in a specific section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, compared to the other sections, the processing is performed in a suppressed manner or the sound output without sound. Is performed in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special Within the period, the effect reception period becomes valid in a time-series relationship. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the validity period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The special production sound corresponding to the production reception and the sound of “BGM playback” are performed over two sections in the specific sound data with the period (other section) after the end of the (partial section). Playback is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, super sound, Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect to the predetermined channels in the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output without any sound (special period)”. In addition, when an operation performed by the player is received in the “suppressed mode or the state in which the sound is output without sound (special period)” created in this manner, a special process is performed in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on a predetermined channel is “suppressed or output in a silent state (special period) regardless of the reception of the production. Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after this, a special section (repeated mode or silence sound output) of the specific sound data (one sound material) is completed in a manner that the special sound is sunk into the reproduced special sound. Since the data content of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” can be secretly returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It is possible to provide an effect sound without discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is received in a state where the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, the special effect sound is not suppressed by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. Thus, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 142 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such suppressed operation sound output processing is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 142.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ts 11, the identification that the effect is progressing on the game board effect display device 1600 is specified. The sound of “BGM playback” according to the effect pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (here, stereo playback). The sound of "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol change from the start of the symbol change to the end thereof when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed. (Sound material) may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each of those periods may be May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM playback” over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. At timing ts12, which is before timing ts13 at which an operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) at which an operation opportunity to produce a production sound is given, silence data is set. It is set to be in a playback state in a partial section. As a result, even if the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is not adjusted from the initial value, the sound can be output without sound while the sound is allocated to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is likely to be room in the channel usage status. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special production sound while removing the feeling of anxiety that "there is no chance that the channel is full and the special production sound may not be output." It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, during the operation validity period according to this example, even when there is no operation by the player, the timing ts16 at which the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM reproduction” is ended. At a timing ts15 before the arrival of the game, the period is ended so that the effect of the operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is received at any timing during the operation validity period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” becomes a reproduction state in a partial section set as silent data content. In an atmosphere in which the use situation of the cage channel is likely to have a margin, a special effect sound according to the operation by the player can be generated. Note that the operation validity period is ended not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an effect by the player is received at timing ts14. Based on the reception of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned is performed. , 03 different channels 08 and 09 are assigned special effect sounds for playback.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time (time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to “SY”, and the operation valid period is ended at the maximum time. When the time (time from the timing ts15 to the timing ts16) until the end of the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is “BF”, the operation is within the operation validity period. Even if the operation by the player is received at any of the timings, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain time of “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is received at any timing within the operation validity period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. The sound of “BGM reproduction” can be output in a non-suppressed manner in such a manner as to be mixed into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special effect sound to the output of the “BGM reproduction” sound in the non-suppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted, A buffer period for restoring the sound of "BGM playback" in a non-suppressed manner in the output period of the special effect sound (the sound of "BGM playback" is returned in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed into the special effect sound. The period of time during which the player does not notice that the sound of "BGM playback" is not returned as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is received, but is restored after a predetermined time. You can make it difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of “BGM reproduction” is restored as the data content of the effect sound for BGM reproduction (non-suppression mode), when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is reproduced in the non-suppression mode. In this state, the reproduction of the special effect sound ends.

  In the above description example, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are determined by the operation by the player as shown in FIG. 142 (b). Depending on the accepted timing, it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow, but regardless of which timing, the timing ts16 arrives when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is obvious that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set as the sound of “BGM reproduction” is started.

  Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 142, the user can further remember “uncomfortable feeling due to returning the sound of“ BGM playback ”after a predetermined time without returning to the non-suppressed mode when the operation by the player is received”. To make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of the BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to a reproduction state in a normal section while paying attention to a special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when an operation by the player is received as an effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination is given. A special effect sound may be generated based on the reception of the effect only when the condition is satisfied. Even when the specific production condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when an operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, the effect is received. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is reproduced. Regardless of the operation performed at any timing during the operation validity period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly changed to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. 142 is desirably the same as in the example shown in FIG. 142.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation validity period, the timing at which the sound of the BGM reproduction is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is set to the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Is set to arrive after the end of. According to such a configuration, a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) and the return of the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. (A period during which the length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. Also, by setting such that a resurrection effect in which the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) increases during this silent period can be expected, it is expected that the entertainment of games will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the symbol change is stopped in a loss manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. Is also good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the assignment of the sound of the BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

  In addition, when a special effect sound is generated, a movable effect for operating a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect is also performed to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction. This is desirable in that the reproduced sound is secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output without sound in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM reproduction” in other sections. Whatever is output if is output. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the frequency of vibration of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced, and the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, by setting a time-series period in which the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to a predetermined channel itself is suppressed or silenced, the “BGM reproduction” Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence only by reproducing the sound. However, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to the predetermined channel does not necessarily have to set the time-series period of the suppression mode or silence. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of “BGM reproduction” may not be set. Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (or mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation performed by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is performed with the reception of the effect. Not to be. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing for returning to the volume initial value) is performed. On the other hand, when the specific production condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound or the like) is being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value from the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is completed. (A process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the symbol fluctuation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, a restriction process is performed to make it difficult to generate a new sound assignment to an empty channel at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the timing ts12 arrives to a timing ts16. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric production sound, an adjustment sound, etc., have nothing to do with a result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a change in the symbol being executed. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target and that the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not reproduced without newly assigning it to a channel.

  Also, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect sound (BGM) is set on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. (It is desirable that the sound is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a dialogue sound) so as not to overlap with the sound.) While the specific effect sound is being played, the timing ts12 comes and the BGM playback Is desirably output in a suppressed mode or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of the specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (at the timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable in relieving anxiety that a special effect sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not necessarily need to be reproduced at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and may not be reproduced at a timing after the timing ts12. The playback may be started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if the specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (normal mode) when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state, once " Since the sound of the BGM playback set to the “suppression mode or silence state” can be made to appear to be returned to the playback state in the normal mode, the sound of the BGM playback is set to the suppression mode or silence state. It is possible to make it hard to notice that

  Also, "the specific production sound is to be terminated before (or at or before) the timing ts14 at which the special production sound (or the predetermined production sound) is output". "The output of a specific effect sound is terminated based on the effect of the operation performed by the player within the operation valid period, or automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)." Means that. In other words, if an operation by the player is not accepted until a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation validity period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated.

  When it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol change according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of the BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the silence state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, the sound of the BGM reproduction can be easily mixed into the effect sound, and the sound of the BGM reproduction can be output normally. It is possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Regarding the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even if there is no operation, the effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

  In addition, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) illustrated in FIG. 142 occurs, while the sound of “BGM playback” is being output in the suppressed mode or in silence, the effect reception is permitted. A “acceptable sound” that indicates that the event is accepted (or that the effect acceptance is allowed) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a partial section in the "specific sound data" for outputting the "specific sound effect", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to a channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, “specific sound data” is allocated to the channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific effect sound corresponding to this is output in a non-suppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the "acceptable sound" is output as a sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” is output before and after the timing ts13 so as to straddle the timing ts13. Note that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect performed before the operation valid period occurs (a effect suggesting that the valid period will soon occur). In this case, in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13, a "reproduction section of the precursor effect sound" and a "reproduction section of the acceptable sound" are provided. The “acceptable sound” may be a non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at the timing ts15. It is desirable, but when an effect is received while in the output state, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to set the state to a non-output state.

  That is, “the acceptable sound is output” here means that “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing ts13, and that the channel is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “acceptable acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data that is being made arrives at the timing ts13. Also, in the case of “turning to a non-output state” here, in addition to releasing the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data is terminated and the sound data (including silence data) is reproduced.

  Further, in the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even when the effect is received at any timing within the validity period, the elapsed time from the effect reception is performed. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound of “BGM reproduction” is assigned.

  In this regard, when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), a special effect display corresponding to the effect reception is also displayed as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception, "the execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from when the effect reception is performed reaches the predetermined time value". Rather, it is desirable to perform the process such that “irrespective of the timing at which the effect is received within the validity period, the display is not displayed when a predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives”. As the “predetermined timing in the effect pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) in a period after the timing ts15 and before the timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even when the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must arrive before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, in the processing relating to the special effect sound, the output state is not continued until the timing at which the sound of “BGM playback” comes later than the timing ts16 at which the sound is returned in an unsuppressed manner. However, since the special effect display can be ended before the special effect sound, it is possible to develop the effect after the operation after the operation with a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such an operation and effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored or the timing arriving before the timing ts16. Is important.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), based on the fact that the effect has been received, “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect was received is determined in advance. In parallel with the process for the special effect sound that keeps the output state until the specified time value is reached, and the process for the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Will be started respectively.

  For example, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process related to special effect display” of the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period. The “process relating to special effect sound” in the post-operation effect is ended at a timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed from when the effect was received. On the other hand, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing within the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process related to the special effect display” in the post-operation effect is performed only for a relatively short time. However, among the post-operation effects, the “processing relating to the special effect sound” is executed from the time when the effect is received until the time when a predetermined time value elapses.

  That is, in this case, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), the output state is changed until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value. The function of executing the special effect sound to be continued and the process of the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived are executed.

  According to such an operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the execution state of the “processing related to special effect display” in the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. As a cost, the end timing of the “processing relating to the special effect sound” in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the expiration of the validity period but is operated at a later time, the end timing of the “special effect sound processing” in the post-operation effect is set at a relatively late stage. However, there is a disadvantage that it is not possible to maintain a long execution state of the “processing relating to the special effect display” in the post-operation effects.

That is, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is the most desirable for producing a lively effect.
・ Whether to lengthen the execution state of the “processing for special effects display” and enjoy it in exchange for the earlier completion of the “processing for special effects sound” (operating early in the validity period) Do) or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing for special effect display", whether to extend the time until "processing for special effect sound" is completed and enjoy it (at a later stage during the validity period) Do you operate) or
・ Simultaneously sacrificing the time during which the “processing for special effects display” is maintained as an execution state and the time until the “processing for special effects sound” ends, so as to balance the whole. (Do you operate at a timing that is neither early nor late during the validity period?)
To provide an operation reception effect that is less tiring so that the operation timing can be selected in accordance with the mood of the player. Will be able to

  Here, in the above-described example, as a post-operation effect when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), “processing relating to special effect sound” and “processing relating to special effect display” are performed. Although the above described example has been described, “the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body” may be further executed, or “the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body” instead of “the process for displaying the special effect display”. May be executed. However, as for the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body", similarly to the case of the "process for special effect display" described above, even if the effect is received at any timing during the validity period, The operation state is terminated when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. " Here, “ending the operation state” means that, when the effect is to move the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position is moved to the original position. This means starting the process of operating to return.

  In the above description example, when an effect is received during the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and a" process for a special effect sound "which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. And However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when a predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, when a large hit judgment is lost, or when a predetermined effect judgment is lost). , Etc.), even if an effect is received within the operation reception effect, the “processing related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition is not performed. Is satisfied (FIG. 142), the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short, so that the "process relating to the special effect sound" is performed as a different effect sound. More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected properly (detection error), and the effect may not be received. As a result, the effect is effective without the effect being received. When the period may end, the player's interest in watching the state where “the process relating to the special effect display (or the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed even though the operation is performed may be changed. It is feared that it will decrease. Accordingly, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and" a process for a special effect sound "that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable to be done. As a method of automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation reception and an effect mode related thereto, it is possible to use any of the above-described or later-described examples or an appropriate combination.

  As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, the effect is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state in an unsuppressed manner. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the acceptable sound is released at this time. In this regard, even when a normal valid period that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is not suppressed occurs, the acceptable sound is set to the output state in an unsuppressed manner along with the generation. However, it is desirable that the acceptable sound is continued without canceling the output state even if the effect reception is performed in the output state. In addition, the acceptable sound output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated is an effect sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptable sound output when the normal valid period is generated. It is desirable to use the game for maintaining the entertainment interest of the game even when the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed.

  Further, in the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silence state, N acceptable acceptable sounds indicating that the valid period is generated (or that the valid period is generated) are set as N allowable sounds. There are types (modes), and output is always performed (output in a non-suppressed mode) in any of these types. On the other hand, in the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressed mode as usual, it indicates that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred). Only M types (aspects) less than N are prepared as the permissible sounds, and "when output in any of those types (output in non-suppressed mode)" and "output in any of those types" However, it is preferable that the sound data including the permissible reception sound itself generate a valid period without channel allocation. It is desirable to indicate that "the expected degree of appearance of the big hit symbol differs" depending on the type of the acceptable sound.

  Alternatively, either an effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state, or an effective period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a non-suppressed state as usual. , A plurality of types (modes) are prepared as the acceptable sound, but the rate of appearance of the acceptable sound with a high jackpot expectation occurs when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state. It is preferable that the sound is relatively high during the valid period during which the BGM reproduction sound is output in a normal state in an unsuppressed manner. . Also in this case, in the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, the acceptable sound indicating that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) is not accepted. While the output is always performed (output in a non-suppressed mode), the valid period occurs when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in a normal state in the non-suppressed mode. Or the case where the acceptable sound indicating that the valid period has occurred) is “if output in a non-suppressed manner” and “if the sound data itself including the acceptable sound itself is not allocated without being assigned a channel”. It is desirable to do so.

  According to these configurations, when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptable sound is not so detailed (M kinds of less than N kinds). Or cannot be expected (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptable sound may be overlooked by the sound of the BGM reproduction. Even if it is leaked, the user can be made aware of the possibility that the acceptable sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, in a situation where the sound output in the non-suppressed mode can be emphasized, the acceptable reception sound is set to Since output is always performed in a non-suppressed manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes is adopted, among the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state”, , At least one of the types of acceptable sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner” (for example, (The type with the lowest expectation of big hits) may be included. However, the acceptable sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the unsuppressed mode” include “the sound of BGM reproduction is suppressed or silent”. The acceptable sound that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the state is in the state” is a type that cannot be output (for example, the type with the highest expectation of big hits among the acceptable sounds). Is desirable. Also, the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressed mode” is “BGM reproduction It is desirable to make the number of effect types larger than the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the "effective period that occurs when the sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state". Among the effect types that can appear as an after-operation effect in response to the effect reception in the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output as usual in the unsuppressed mode”, “Sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that may appear as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception in the “suppression mode or the effective period that occurs when in the silent state” may be included.

  Further, in the normal game state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability variation function is activated, the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state, and the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the non-suppression mode. In the case where a plurality of types (aspects) having different jackpot expectation degrees are prepared as the permissible acceptable sounds in any of the valid periods generated when the output is performed as usual, the output is performed in any of the valid periods. When this is done, a special acceptance allowable sound may be output that “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%”. Note that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as the special reception allowable sounds.

  In other words, in this case, when the "permissible period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state" is generated, if the special acceptable sound is output (unsuppressed mode), the effect is produced within the valid period. The post-operation effect performed based on the reception is also performed in a special mode in which when it appears, the ratio of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%. If an effect reception is performed in a state in which the special reception allowable sound is output, the output of the special reception allowable sound is interrupted, and when the special reception allowable sound is output, the ratio of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%. It is desirable that the effect sound be output.

  However, when the “valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressed mode as usual” occurs, when the special acceptable sound is output (non-suppressed mode), the valid period is set. After the operation is performed based on the fact that the effect has been received in the special mode, when it appears, it is executed in the special mode of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%”, and in the special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that a special acceptable sound output when the “valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state” is output, and that “the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressed mode as usual. The special acceptable sound output during the “valid period that occurs when the state is in a state of being in a state” may be different kinds of acceptable sound. In addition, there are a plurality of types of special reception allowable sounds that are output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a non-suppressed mode as usual” is present. The type of the special acceptable sound output when the “valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state” may be the same as, or different from the type of the special acceptable sound. . When an effect reception is performed in a state where the acceptable sound (including the special acceptable sound) is output, the output of the acceptable sound is interrupted, and the effect sound corresponding to the effect after operation (the effect after operation is special). In the case of performing in a mode, it is desirable that when it is output, a special effect sound ("the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%") is output.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state (when the listening mistake is unlikely to occur), if the special reception allowable sound is output, the sound is output within the valid period. After the operation is performed on the basis of the fact that the effect has been received, the effect is always executed in a manner of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%” when it appears. On the other hand, in the state where the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when it is easy to make a mistake due to contention with the sound of the BGM reproduction), it is determined that the special reception allowable sound is output. Also, as the post-operation effect performed based on the effect reception being performed within the validity period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a mode of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%”. As a result, it is possible to give a suspicion (a suspicion as to whether or not the user has mistakenly heard) whether the acceptable sound has been output as the "special acceptable sound", and to maintain the tension appropriately. Become. Thus, while the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, the emphasis is placed on "how not to hear the acceptable sound" and the tension until the acceptable sound is output. This can also be suitably maintained. In order to increase such a feeling of tension, in the operation reception effect, “the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode in which“ there is a 100% stop at the big hit symbol when it appears ”” Compared to the operation reception effect, "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a manner of" the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol when it appears becomes 100% "." It is desirable that the effect (pre-permissible operation-related display or pre-permissible operation-related sound) is executed in a relatively short time so that the validity period is suddenly generated.

  In a state where the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where it is easy to make a mistake in hearing due to competition with the sound of the BGM reproduction), the message “special reception allowable sound is output and the operation is performed. The post-production is not executed in a manner in which “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol when it appears becomes 100%”. The operation reception production (valid period) and “the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation production is“ When it appears, the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%. In the “executed” operation accepting effect (effective period), special acceptable sounds are output as different types of acceptable sounds. Alternatively, it may be output as the same type of acceptable sound. Further, in a state where the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where the reception allowable sound is likely to be erroneously heard due to competition with the sound of the BGM reproduction), “the special reception allowable sound is output. The operation accepting effect (effective period) in which the effect after the operation is performed in such a manner that “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100% when it appears” is not necessarily required to occur. Also, in the operation reception effect (valid period), the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in such a manner that “the rate of stop at the big hit symbol becomes 100% when it appears”. Regardless of which type is output as the sound, the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode in which “the rate of stop at the big hit symbol when it appears becomes 100%”, and this mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

  In addition, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) and the normal valid period that occur while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, an image display simulating the operation means used as the operation target is displayed. A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation is performed. In this regard, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the effect is received, the “effect” is displayed while the gauge display is left (displayed). A process related to a special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and “an elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received” Of the special effect sound continued until the time reaches a predetermined time value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize after the effect has been received based on the remaining gauge as a display which timing in the validity period the effect was received. In this way, it is possible to predict whether or not the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will end immediately. In addition, as a method of starting the production after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this manner, use any of the above or later examples, or an appropriate combination, and further use the contents described in the description. Is possible.

  In the above description example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “specific-type effect patterns” for outputting the sound of “BGM reproduction” in silence or in silence, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number to be smaller than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “other effect patterns” that are not output with no sound in order to improve the entertainment interest when the effect occurs. .

  Further, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as the “effect pattern” for outputting the sound of “BGM reproduction” in a silence mode or silently, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed for the first set time in the effect patterns. Alternatively, an effect pattern for outputting a sound without sound and an effect pattern for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in a suppressed mode or for a silent time for a second set time longer than the first set time are included, and the big hit symbol is included in those effect patterns. It is desirable to make the degree of expectation appear different. According to such a configuration, when the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation degree by how long the state is continued. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (A process of reflecting the sound volume set value as the sound volume). Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player with respect to the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume set value is changed in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "effect pattern for outputting the sound of the BGM reproduction in a suppressed mode or in silence", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the design change regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, since the player who sees the state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained. become. Note that in this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is desirable for making the user aware (aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but this is output at the volume 0, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the reception of the effect when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silence state is displayed for more than twice the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable that the output state be maintained. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the time ts15 elapses, The output time (special effect sound) up to the timing ts15 can be made longer.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, the above description has been given of the gaming machine in which the plate operation unit 400 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of performing the pressing operation by the player and presenting the effect image to the player. With reference to FIG. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 143 is a front view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 144 is a right side view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 will be described.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 stores a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, a flange section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 comprising a sheath 5020 capable of forming a sword.

  The sword decoration 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword section 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword removal direction and the sword placement direction. The sword section 5010 is normally in a sword-pulling state in which the blade section 5011 is housed in the sheath section 5020. In the sword-drawing effect, the sword section 5011 enters a sword-drawing state in which the sword body section 5011 becomes visible to the player. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the sword-drawing state can function as an operating means for receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player and returning to the sword-pulling state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of an opportunity to execute a sword-drawing effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001). FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection table of an effect pattern in an effect mode in which a sword-drawing effect can be executed. (A) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a sword-drawing preparation shift effect according to the type of a variation pattern (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect.

  The effect patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is performed after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, a pattern in which the sword-drawing production effect is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance. There is a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is not performed even though there is a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is not performed or the sword-drawing production is not performed. Further, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing production, Two patterns, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (A), whether to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is determined by lot according to the type of the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the plurality of types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for a large hit at the time of a big hit, a variation pattern for a small hit at a small hit, and a variation pattern for a miss at the time of a loss, and a variation having an advantageous result for a player. The setting is such that the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the sword-preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the big hit, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the small hit, and in the case of the loss fluctuation pattern. Performed with a 20% probability. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the outlier fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the execution of the main sword-drawing effect is randomly selected according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even when the type of the variation pattern is the same, when the sword-drawing preparation effect is executed, the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed is set higher than when the sword-drawing operation is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern has a result that is more advantageous for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of advantage, the execution of the sword-drawing preparation effect is set such that the probability of executing the sword-drawing effect is increased. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for the loss variation, the probability of executing the sword-drawing main effect is higher than when the sword-preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for the small hit variation. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the big hit variation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation shift effect.

  Also, when the sword-drawing production is performed, the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance, and the probability that the sword-drawing production in the form with the aura member is performed is higher as the variation pattern has a more advantageous result for the player. Is set to Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and operation of aura members by sword movement of sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword unit 5010 (sword unit 5011) itself capable of receiving a sword placing operation by the player, and the sword unit 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 146, 147) and the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword body 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 148 and 149).

  FIG. 146 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword body 5011) itself, in which (A) the sword-delivery state, and (B) the first state. A sword-drawing state, (C) shows a second sword-drawing state. FIG. 147 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 147 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (A), the sword decoration 5001 in the normal state is a sword-inserted state in which the blade 5011 is housed in the sheath 5020. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the blade part 5011 is pulled out of the sheath part 5020 and can be visually recognized by the player. Becomes the first sword drawn state. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing main production has the blade body 5011 further pulled out from the sheath 5020 so that the second sword can be mostly viewed from the player. State. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state can function as operating means capable of receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 is sheathed when the blade part 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 146 (A)) to the first withdrawn sword state (FIG. 146 (B)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 147 (B)) inside the section 5020, and the blade section 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the process of changing the blade part 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (FIG. 146 (C)). Although described later, the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is moved to the maximum, so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade part 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. A pinion 5033. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into the rightward movement of the rack 5031a and the leftward movement of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade part 5011.

  An LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on a blade shaft 5011b is included below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated.

  Here, the operation timing of the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state, and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. The example in which the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state after deforming is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword removal state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (including not only the mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operated maximally but also the mode in which the operation is stopped halfway) ).

  FIG. 148 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020. The second sword-drawing state is shown. FIG. 149 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 149 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 147 and 148 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword 5010 (sword 5011) includes the aforementioned sword 5010 (sword 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 (the sword state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword-put state. (1st sword state ⇔ 2nd sword state) This enables the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) to be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to appear as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely stored state) is stored in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 in a completely housed state, and is a hollow cylindrical aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011; , A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated by the driving means (not shown) so that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in front view, and both pinions are engaged with each other. This is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 149 (B), stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form the second bladed state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship in accordance with the change in the state of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword placement state ⇔ first drawn state 抜 second drawn state). Although an example of combining with 5011 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start operating (coalescing) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set before the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (not only the full appearance state in which the sword decoration body is fully operated but also the halfway appearance in which the operation is stopped halfway) (Including the state with the aura member in the state). In addition, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade part 5011 so that the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by a player in the first sword-drawing state from the sword-pulling state.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152. FIG. 150 to FIG. 152 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points mainly differ from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-inserted state functions as an operating means, and detects a sword-drawing operation by the player. Second, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Operable up to the front center.

  When the changing symbols form the reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols changes to the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 150 (A1)), and the start image of princess reach is displayed (FIG. 150 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, there is provided a specific decorative member SDY (robin) that can be moved in the vertical direction. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to a player. I have. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach effect, after the image of the princess heading to the back of the screen is displayed (FIG. 150 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image indicating the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is started to start the operation validity period for receiving the operation of the sword decoration 5001, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to perform the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. Is also good. Then, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword-drawing operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the sword body portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-put state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation in which the sword section 5010 (or the handle section 5012) moves or vibrates up and down so that the player can feel an operation different from the own sword-drawing operation via the handle section 5012 grasped by the player. Just fine. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, it is possible to reduce unnecessary contact (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) with the sword decoration 5001 and prevent the movable body from being broken or damaged. Can be.

  Although the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the player's sword-drawing operation here, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword-drawing operation, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is not overlaid on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and is stationary above the display area (initial state). State), and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 151 (C2)). At this time, the decorative sword body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 151 (C2) is reported, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing at which the detection reporting operation ends. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is centered on the front surface (the lower part of the display area below the display area of the effect display device 1600). (D1) (FIG. 151 (D1)) Then, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body (D1) in FIG. 151. In this case, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed thereafter may be made different to indicate the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (such as the degree of expectation of hitting and the game profit when hitting).

  Then, after the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into the second sword-drawing state by the sword-drawing operation by the player, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword-drawing state is set. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 151 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. The image of the surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (FIG. 152 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation is performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a hit, a princess with a smile is notified of the hit. An image is displayed (FIGS. 152 (E1) and (E2)), and an image notifying the loss is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it becomes a loss (FIGS. 152 (F1) and (F2)).

  Note that, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. However, the movable effect in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player is unable to move because he / she is grabbing when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. Even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, the performance itself proceeds, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player can be performed at the left-right movable timing of the sword decoration 5001 (FIG. 151 (D3)). If it is held at the performed position, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, the effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) progress regardless of whether the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed. The game progress does not stagnate because it is configured to play. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the holding of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is released, or may be configured not to perform the movable effect. You may.

  As described above, in the princess reach effect, the specific decoration member SDY which has suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and movable by the sword operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward by the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (in the operation position). To the left). That is, based on the sword-drawing operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword-drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the operation value of the player and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right direction after operation) by a player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that the left-right movable movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed for the purpose of performing an effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and an effect integrated with the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration operation is performed in a state where the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed by displacing to the left (left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example by the player is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword-drawing operation of pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from below), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in a direction different from the operation direction (here, the up-down direction) at the time of the operation of the player (the left-right direction or the like as in this example).

  Further, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be determined. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually check for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movable performance of the sword decoration body 5001 thereafter, and preventing the movable body from being damaged by unnecessary contact. Furthermore, when the movable effect cannot be performed due to the contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is issued to release the hand from the player, and the operation is required during the operation effective period. Even after the end of the detection notification operation, even the contact of the operating means is prohibited, so that the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other effect pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. 153 to 155 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect including an operation effect of the operation buttons 410 used in various aspects. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggesting effect indicating an expectation at which a change during execution is a big hit as an operation effect of the operation button 410 is performed, and an operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A), (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 153 (A)), first, the operation effective period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is The operation is started, and an operation promoting effect of prompting the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 153 (B)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation validity period are displayed, and operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword-delivery state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an effect indicating a degree of expectation is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, an effect image is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 1600 when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected. After that (FIG. 153 (N1)), an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed (FIG. 154 (N2)). After that, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 154 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the effect indicating the degree of expectation for the fluctuation display during execution. Alternatively, a character that changes the currently held display may appear.

  In a pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 153 (M1) in which an effect image indicating that an operation effect requesting the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of an operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 (here, a message of the title “chance of sword removal” and an operation description “a sword is required”) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 155 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword-drawing state and the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is moved in small increments in the initial state in the initial state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 155 (M3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the current fluctuation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, when the player's sword placing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (the role of the hand) is returned to the initial state again, the big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the hand of the role) has been released. The image (decorative design stop mode “777”, message of “brilliant”) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is out of order, when the player places a sword, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is only stopped at the initial state by the small movement. In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the loss (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting a degree of expectation and developing an operation effect of another operation means (sword decoration body 5001) can be performed. At the time of operating, the subsequent deployment cannot be specified. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's interest in operating the operation buttons 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in interest in playing a game, which is a concern due to a monotonous effect after the operation.

  Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword placing operation) are different between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001). (The pressing operation of the operation button 410) is requested by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation instead of shining.

  In the present example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword putting operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means that is effective in the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 that has a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. It is desirable.

(Other effect pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described. 156 to 160 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect. Here, the pattern ((A), (B1), (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (robin) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not moved based on the pressing operation and is displayed in the out-of-position mode, the symbol display in the out-of-position mode is changed again and the player is provided with an operation opportunity again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when operation opportunity of sword decoration 5001 is given / R when operation opportunity of operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , A message of “moving the movable body with a single button hit” is displayed (FIG. 156 (B)), and an operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 156 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword-delivery state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one time), and may be continuous hitting (a plurality of times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state during the operation period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, if the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivery state to the second sword-drawing state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is movable and a large hit is made, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is completely dropped from the initial state. (See FIG. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 from which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) has been released is displayed with an image (a decorative pattern of a decorative pattern) indicating a big hit. A stop mode “777”, a message of “excellent” is displayed (FIG. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is only stopped to move in small increments, and is dropped and movable. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a mode shifted from the center of the screen (“767”) is displayed in a rocking manner (FIG. 158 (P1)). The decorative pattern is developed into a pattern (FIG. 158 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an out-of-position mode (“767”) or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image (referred to as "Madja") indicating that the fluctuating display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-position mode in FIG. (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 158 (P3)), the decorative pattern is again in the reach state, is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is provided at the center of the screen. Is displayed (FIG. 158 (P 4)). Then, as the time elapses, the displayed eyes of the samurai are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state (FIG. 158 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated and decorated in a fast blinking manner, or the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword-deposited state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (the curtain). Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is to be operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern for which the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat permeates the samurai's forehead of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 159 (R1)). Then, while the small decorative member SDY (small handpiece) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for urging the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 159 (R2)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light emission decoration is stopped.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 159 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible to the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 155 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Next, the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state again, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (robin) has been released is displayed on the screen. An image for notifying the big hit (a message of the decorative pattern stop mode “777” and “spectacular”) is displayed at the center (FIG. 159 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in a case where the result of the variable display is incorrect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is stopped in small steps and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a mode shifted from the center of the screen (“767”) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 159 (R5)).

  When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decoration body) in which the samurai who closes the eyes of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes (Decided image) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-deposited state to the second sword-drawn state with the aura member (FIG. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is effective instead of the operation button 410, but at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 has a form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decoration member SDY (moving hand) is being moved in small increments, the predetermined period elapses in the second sword state, and when the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 160 (Q2)).

  Then, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 159 (R3) and (R4) is followed (FIG. 160 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, in a case where the fluctuation display result is out of order, when a player's sword placing operation is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 159 (R5) is followed (FIG. 160 (Q5)).

  As described above, the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the falling state of the specific decoration member SDY (storage), which is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so that the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. It is possible to provide suggestions, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, even when the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not dropped and movable based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be indicated by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest which is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect instead of shining.

  Although the above-described FIGS. 150 to 160 show three examples of reach effect patterns using the sword decoration 5001, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the entertainment interest can be further enhanced.

(Form of sword decoration)
With reference to FIG. 161, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described. As the form of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, there are provided two types, that is, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating a form of a sword decoration 5001 used for pseudo continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be capable of changing the shape in two stages by deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3. And an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visually recognizable. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the above-described aura member 5035, and operates in the left-right direction similarly to the above-described aura member 5030. FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (D) are diagrams showing types (step changes) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-putting state, and show step 0 to step 3 in order. The sword decoration body 5001 takes one of the stage 0 to the stage 3 depending on the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (A), the stage 0 mode is a mode in a normal state similar to the above-described FIGS. 146 (A) and 148 (A), and an initial state in which no operation is required for any component. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (B), the stage 1 mode shows a mode in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 mode. As shown in FIG. 161 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the pattern portion 5012 spreads and moves so as to be divided into two from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 161 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form a decorative integral with the first decorative portion 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 to stage 3 modes here allow the shape to be changed without causing the decorative sword 5001 to be in the second sword state. Further, the sword section 5010 capable of accepting an operation by the player and the non-operating sheath section 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body as an operating section of the operating means, so that a more powerful operating means is provided. Can be.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 165, a pre-operation suggestion effect that is executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is enabled by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (robin). . Specifically, as the suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (border role), the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is located at the initial position. There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) for generating the operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the initial position even during the operation validity period. Is performed, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes operational with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. Indicates that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid with a probability of 30%. Hereinafter, a description will be given of an example of an effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect.

(First suggestion pattern)
162 and 163 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162 (A)), it is determined in advance that the operation button is set to be valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operation means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. This is displayed (FIG. 162 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (main curtain) maintains the initial position. There is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (main curtain) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation-effective. Let it. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is at the initial position, the operation buttons 410 are enabled at a higher rate than the sword decorative body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the operation button 410 is valid, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is maintaining the initial position. Let it. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Also, even when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation promoting image for prompting the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Also, at this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled.

  When the operation of the effective operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is detected in the above-described FIG. 162 (C) or (D), when the result of the current fluctuation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is released. The image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “excellent” message) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)).

(2nd suggestion pattern)
FIG. 164 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled during the reach effect, similarly to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure showing the example of transition of the reach production performed. Note that in FIG. 165, the operation button 410 is enabled once without operating the sword decoration 5001 even after the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, and thereafter the sword decoration is activated. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern in which the operation of the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is one of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. Moved little by little in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is operated at the suggestion position, the operation valid period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be the operation valid is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is set to be effective, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is valid, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation promoting image for prompting the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled. Further, even when the operation of the operation button 410 is valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), the operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when an operation of the player is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is moved from the state in which the specific decorative member is operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decoration member SDY (storage item) may be moved from the state in which it is operated to the suggestion position without returning to the initial state to the entire falling state or the initial state.

  Then, when the operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) effective for operation is detected in the above-described FIG. 164 (AA2) or (AA3), the operation proceeds to the above-described FIG. 162 (C) or (D). Similarly, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is released. The image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “excellent” message) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In the second suggestion pattern, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, but may include a plurality of operation patterns. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in operation is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled for operation, 164 (AA1) → (AA3) In addition to the basic pattern of tracing the effect transition until the decoration of the sword 5001 becomes valid, the operation button 410 becomes valid once, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective. A step-up pattern is provided to enable the operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is an operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid for operation by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. , That is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) similar to that in FIG. 164 (AA1) described above and display of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) in small steps are performed (FIG. 165 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 165 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 163 described above is not performed, and the switching indicating the switching of the operation effective operation means is not performed. A suggestion image (most blackout images) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, operating means that is enabled to operate is provided from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (a message of “chance of swords” and “a sword is required”) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is in a state where it has moved to the suggested position. When the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 163) after the operation promoting effect in the aforementioned second suggestion pattern.

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) at the time of FIG. 165 (BB2) described above. It is only necessary that the sword decoration 5001 be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present example, before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is validated is generated, the specific decoration member SDY (draft material) is generated. The position of ()) can be changed, and an operation means which is made effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated. In the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the expected degree of expectation is high and the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the suggestion position (in FIG. 164 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001) Has a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective. For this reason, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, and thus suggests before the operation. Enhance the entertainment of the production.

  In the second suggestion pattern, in the suggestion effect before operation, the specific decorative member SDY (draft hand) is gradually moved in the vertical direction. Also, since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (border effect) is used for the notification of the result after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 163), a series of drop effects from the up and down small movement of the pre-operation suggesting effect is performed. , And a decrease in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is enabled by the movable body becomes effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be operated is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration 5001 changes to the second sword removal state, but also the operation means to be operated is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once enabled in the state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is located at the suggested position (or after it appears that the operation is enabled). Ii) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Further, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, there is an expectation that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that there is a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in gaming interest. Can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, an operation effect suggestion image before an operation validity period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is enabled is displayed. At the same time (FIG. 162 (B)), similar to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indicating position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move up and down in small increments between the initial position and the suggesting position. After that, when the operation validity period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the operation suggestion to the player by the first suggestion pattern is made. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. The entertainment of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Perform the effect with the pattern. In a production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by a player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (an effect indicating the degree of expectation related to the privilege provision) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision suggested as a result of the specific operation effect may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation means provided for such an operation effect (an operation that indicates the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated, etc.) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as a sword decoration 5001). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity, the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given only occurs. It is configured so that the player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) related to the privilege grant is higher than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision suggested when an operation opportunity is provided to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest when the stage is in a stage where the effect has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is high) does not appear in the operation-time effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001). Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means during the specific effect reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the entertainment interest through such operation-related effects. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) having such a staging characteristic. In this case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunity is given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect accepting period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect accepting is enabled),
-After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is enabled (allowing to accept the effect) is started, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first effect mode in which a valid period (effect accepting period) is generated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (allowing to accept an effect) without starting an effect of “specific operation-related effect”. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating a valid period (effect accepting period) are prepared, and by executing any of these effect modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect). A validity period (production acceptance period) is generated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where a period occurs in which an effect on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation units (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) can be accepted for effect. Regardless of whether or not a period occurs in which an operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) that is different from the specific operation means can accept the effect, a common (specification) is performed prior to the generation of the period. ) Can be executed, so that it is possible to give an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect, and such an effect can be provided. By performing the operation while the game is performed, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, the effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001). An effect reception period is to be generated. At least at the time when the effect is started, it is determined which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. Should be kept confidential. In addition, for each of the operation-related effects exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. (The effect display may be displayed), or a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. A means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) may indicate which of the operation opportunities is given (displaying an effect result display), and the operation-related effect is executed until any timing. Whether to do so can be changed as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of the operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any of the production acceptance periods occurs after the execution of the common (specific) operation-related production, and the common (specific) In the case where any of the effect reception periods occurs without performing the operation-related effect of (1), the contents of the effect may be omitted. However, in the case where any one of the effect reception periods occurs while the common (specific) operation-related effect is not being executed, the content of the effect is as follows. Or an operation instruction image prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 appears. " Further, in each of the following effect examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed when the reach state is formed. May be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the operation is performed, or may be generated during the execution of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

  Each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined with the effects of each of the different examples described below, and can also be appropriately combined with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined with the effects of each of the other examples described later by substituting a part thereof. When the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to effect each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of each of the other examples described later.

[First production mode]
FIGS. 166 and 167 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can accept an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the effect example (1st effect mode) performed.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect was started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 166 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display which moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and suggests that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 166 (c) shows the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 displayed with the progress of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b). In a state where each of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) is stopped and displayed in the area, an instruction display (here, “operate”) that prompts the user to operate any of these operation means, and an effect reception A bar indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to make it unclear which one of the effects can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 166 (c)) is applied to both the situation where the operation of the operation button 410 can be effected and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 can be effected. There is no other than being displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) are operated before at least one of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. 166 (b) and (c) as shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and (c) over a period until an operation on at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) is enabled to receive an effect. I'm trying to perform a production.

  Therefore, in each of the effect examples described below and other examples thereof as well as the effect examples, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is performed thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect is performed). It is only necessary that it occurs during (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is left unclear as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be rendered. It is possible to indicate that the operation for one is to be able to accept the effect. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily need to be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration may not be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more surely conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is capable of accepting the effect, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and the effect of the sword ornament 5001 In the case where the reception period occurs, it is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related effect is executed (start of the effect) to when the effect reception period occurs to be the same.

  In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unknown which one of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation of any one of the operation means (“Operation "), And always operate a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means, regardless of how each of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting effects. May be displayed. The point is that the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected and the effect on the sword decoration 5001 can be effected as the operation instruction. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect is kept secret.

  Further, in the effect example (first effect mode) illustrated in FIG. 166 (c), it is confidential whether any of the operations on the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be effected or not. , When the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is set to be able to receive the effect, or when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not set to be able to receive the effect (in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means is provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are not illuminated. Both may emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect state in which the image shown in FIG. 166 (c) appears is that only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Whether it is in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 can be accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Are set to be in one of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) of the plurality of situations occurs, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). Expectations related to the award of the privilege are higher than when the situation occurs. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). Is desirably set lower than the rate at which (a situation in which is added) occurs.

  Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any one of the first condition (the operation button 410) and the third condition (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001). Is performed (whether the “FF” progresses in the figure) or in one of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 (when “GG” is advanced in the figure), an effect is received and an operation effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 167 (d) and 167 (f)) Is performed.

  In the operation effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (“Chance!”). In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively low, and “super heat !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively high. A plurality of effect modes may be prepared, and any one of these effect modes may be displayed in response to the reception of the effect, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation of the privilege grant. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front of the display area is not performed, and by causing any of these effect modes to appear in response to the effect reception, Alternatively, the degree of expectation for granting a benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute a control for bringing the operation means into an operation state (a state different from the non-operation state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (d), even though an operation is performed by the player on the operation button 410, the operation is performed in response to the effect reception. The control that reciprocates the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the sword decoration is not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect reception is generated as a result of the operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and the operation effect on the operation button 410 is executed, Even when the button 410 is not operated and the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. "Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword-drawing operation on the sword decoration 5001 and, in response to the reception of the rendering, the sword decoration 5001 is placed in the sword placement position. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword position (sword-drawn state) instead of returning to the (sword-pulled state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword placement position (sword-pulled state) to the sword-drawing position (sword-pulled state) based on the operation by the player, and is in a state where it is maintained in such a sword-pulled state. At the time of operation, the effect will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to make the player feel the feeling that the operation effect is being performed due to the operation of the sword decoration 5001.

  After the operation effects (FIGS. 167 (d) and (f)) are performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 167 (e). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 or the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Even when it is executed, the sword decoration 5001 is not operated (sword placement position (sword placement state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started). Control to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the sword in the drawn state) over the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration) out of the plurality of operation means (the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001) 5001), in both cases where the effect can be received and when the effect cannot be received, a common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) operation is started. While the operation-related effect is being performed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 is set to be able to accept the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) are each produced. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is effected. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is set to be capable of accepting an effect without being enabled, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are provided when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed. In combination with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting effects, the sword ornament body 5001 is capable of accepting effects. You can be deceived as if you weren't. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration body 5001, which is the side where the production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed when the production is accepted. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to provide an interest in which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period does not occur) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect reception period is reduced by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, if the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Although the effect reception required for execution of the effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected, and the operation on the side that can accept the effect based on the detection is performed. Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk of losing an operation opportunity, so that it is possible to urge the user to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect and to perform the operation carefully. become able to.

  Further, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although they are executed, these operation-time effects may have different effect contents. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) , A unique effect sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the entertainment interest when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted.

  In addition, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is not set. The effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, it is the sword decoration 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, the effect acceptance period is set. 166 (c), when there is an operation on the first operation means, an effect at the time of operation may be performed. In other words, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an effect reception period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is set and an operation is performed on the first operation means, When another effect mode is executed as the operation effect, when the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the another effect mode is not set while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed (No. When the first operation means is operated during the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. At the same operation, the effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operation means and the first operation means. In the case where another effect mode is caused to appear as the operation effect, the second operation mode is not performed in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the second operation means side. The effect at the time of operation may be performed as the effect content different from the effect at the time of operation on the means side.

  Note that, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed is defined by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 among these can be effected, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 can be effected, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set so as to correspond to any of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the effect is received, the same operation effect is made to appear, whereas in the third situation, when the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode described above (which is different from the operation effect in the first situation and the second situation) is displayed. However, in the above-described effect example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), in the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), similarly to the production situation shown in FIG. 167 (d), no operation by the player is performed. The control for operating the operating button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has been performed is also operated. Whether or not it is appropriate may be designed appropriately. However, as for the control for operating the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns earlier than before returning to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable that the operation state is terminated so that the gaze of the player is returned to the game board 5 naturally.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same driving source. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY. Examples of the “operation” of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include modes such as “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, and “vibration”. This is not limited to the effect example, and the same applies to other effect examples.

[Second production mode]
168 to 171 show that a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect indicating the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears. When the first effect result appears as a result, it is suggested that an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example (2nd effect mode) which suggests that the effect reception period with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 will generate | occur | produce among them.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows that in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 168 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 168 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In which the lightning image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and suggests that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 168 (c) shows an effect display in which the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b) progresses, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. In the display area of the device 1600, an effect is performed in which the opponents are pressed against each other to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode), “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area? ", And when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect is accepted for the operation button 410. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and (c) is determined by either the effect receiving period for the operation button 410 or the effect receiving period for the sword decoration 5001. , A specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods. "

  168 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG is in a predominant state in which it remains in the display area, and the figure on the right shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts a situation where it is predominant to remain in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance status changes every moment as time passes.

  FIG. 169 (d) shows the result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c) being performed, whereby the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  In other words, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 169 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be received (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation of the operation button 410 is urged by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to the light emitting state.

  The effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is not only a case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.) but also without the specific operation-related effect. Rendering progress (for example, rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 168 (a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is preferable that the degree of expectation related to the grant of the privilege is made higher than that.

  Regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 via a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio in which the length of the effect acceptance period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that in the case where an effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without passing through is performed. Is desirably set to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of a game due to a stuttering effect described later when a specific operation-related effect has been performed.

  FIG. 169 (e) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. It depicts a state in which the production is performed during operation.

  The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 169 (e) is the same as that of FIG. 167 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. Also, at this time, even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player, the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which the operation is not performed is moved to the first position and the second position in response to the effect reception. This is the same in that control for reciprocating with the position (control for operating) is executable. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively low, and “super heat !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively high. A plurality of effect modes may be prepared, and any one of these effect modes may be displayed in response to the reception of the effect, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation of the privilege grant. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, for example, a production mode that does not perform an operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and one of those production modes is made to appear in response to the production reception. Thus, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for granting a privilege. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 169 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 169 (f), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, during the execution period of the reach effect, there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed. Therefore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation-time effect was executed (the reach effect is started. In this case, control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to a non-operated state (sword-inserted state). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the sword in the drawn state) over the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 170 (g), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. An effect depicting the remaining state is performed (second effect). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs.

  In other words, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 170 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be effected (the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "draw a sword" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001). In particular, in this effect example, only the operation unit including the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be set to the light emission state) is set to the light emission state. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

  The effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is not limited to the case where the effect progresses through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.), but also without going through the specific operation-related effect. Rendering progress (for example, rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 168 (a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is preferable that the degree of expectation related to the grant of the privilege is made higher than that. In addition, when the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed without a specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation of granting a privilege may be higher than in the case, and the degree of expectation of granting a privilege may be lower than the case where the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 170 (h) shows that, as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. This is a picture of how the production is performed during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 170 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), displacing the specific decorative member SDY to the front side of the display area, and displaying the effect display device. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, the production mode such as “super heat !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively high is displayed in response to the presentation reception, but it is suggested that the expectation is relatively low. May be displayed. In the same manner, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect is provided in which an operation of displacing the display member to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of the effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. This may indicate the degree of expectation for granting a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the effect of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plurality of modes ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 161 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170 (i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decoration body 5001 is not returned to the sword-pulled state, but is kept in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, and thereafter (during the period during which the reach production is performed), the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword-delivery state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further provided, and in that case, an operation effect at the time of operation in accordance with the operation to the katana state is further executable.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operating means (sword decoration body 5001) in two steps, and the first-stage operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) and the second-stage operation (Operation to the katana state), the effect at the time of the operation is performed in accordance with each operation, so that not only the operation of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) but also the first stage It is expected that the game entertainment for the operation can be suitably maintained even during the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed to the time when the second-stage operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation effect according to the second-stage operation have different effect contents.

  In addition, in the case where an operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) according to the first-stage operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state, and is not maintained in the drawn state. In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. In the operation effect at the time of the first-stage operation, whether the sword decoration 5001 should be maintained at a position (a sword-drawing state) at which a second-stage operation opportunity (an operation opportunity from the sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state) can be given. It may be executed as an effect indicating the degree of expectation of no. In other words, when the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword-pulling state without being maintained in the sword-pulling state, it is practically impossible to provide the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state). Obviously, The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) according to the first-stage operation, if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the drawn state, the predetermined time has elapsed (the reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword-inserted state) before the start of the operation. However, in this case, the operation state (reciprocation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is at least half the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance in the state of the sword. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 171 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, as in the case shown in FIG. 169 (d). Thus, an effect is described in which the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect illustrated in FIG. 168 (c) is performed, the effect illustrated in FIG. 169 (d) or the effect illustrated in FIG. 171 or the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j). It should be noted that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)). (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as “press” or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in ()). Thereby, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something will be recognizable.

  FIG. 171 (k) shows that as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, so that the button image BTG is wrapped in haze MY, and even the external appearance is lost. The production that is being done is performed.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), all effect elements (button images BTG) that suggest that the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected can be removed. Therefore, although there is a situation in which it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) appears. This makes it possible to doubt whether the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 will occur again.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, in this case, the mode of the lightning image IZ is changing (appearing to disappear), and the remaining time until a clear indication of which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  FIG. 171 (i) shows that, as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a production that depicts the situation.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, the appearance of the haze MY suggests that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur. Will be able to

  In the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the mode of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) than that in FIG. 171 (k), and until it is definitely indicated to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period is generated. Suggests that the time remaining is even less.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i) further progresses and haze MY is hidden, a sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG. 169 (d) and FIG. 171 (j), the possibility of the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 being left is left. Will be able to

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG (FIGS. 169 (d) and 171 (j)). The effect on the sword decoration 5001 is confirmed by checking whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and thereby it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY (FIG. 171 (k)), and further. When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) may be performed. If such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (j) and (k) are also kept secret from which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, after the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, in the above-described effect example (second effect mode), even in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 170 (h), FIG. In the same manner as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 7, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has been performed is also operated. Whether or not it is appropriate may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same driving source. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY. Examples of the “operation” of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include modes such as “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, and “vibration”. This is not limited to the effect example, and the same applies to other effect examples.

[Third production mode]
172 to 175 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show another effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 172 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 will be able to receive the effect soon.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated. In this way, from the state where the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side, it is easy to enable any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to be able to accept the effect soon. Make it recognizable. In this case, the control for operating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 from the initial position to the operation position is performed. They operate at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation means has a time left before the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means does not have the effect reception period at all until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) operate respectively. Therefore, when there is still time left before the effect acceptance period occurs, or when the effect acceptance period does not occur at all until the symbol change ends, the entertainment interest for those operations will be changed. It can be maintained suitably.

  Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is not performed by the effect display device 1600 but by each operation (FIG. 172 (b)) of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in this way. After the start, basically the same effect development as in the second effect mode is performed.

  For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 172 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. 168 (b), the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), a state where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), it is suggested that any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) after a specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with a case where an operation opportunity is immediately given without performing the operation-related effect. In the case where the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be received at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further delayed for the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the entertainment interest of the game.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is performed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. At different positions (for example, an intermediate position), it is positioned as an operation state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and an effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred can be operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur It is possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in operation-related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position, so that although the operation state is in the effect reception period This makes it possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect illustrated in FIG. 172 (c) progresses and the effect illustrated in FIG. 172 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button”. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to “410”, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 168 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. Are positioned as operation states (states in which a driving force is applied) at positions different from any of the above.

  Note that in the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-drive position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in an operative state at a position different from the initial position (non-drive position). In this way, by making the form of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the form of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, the matching thereof will be soon. It is possible to indicate that the intended effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) is generated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is displayed in the “operation position”. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operation button 410 at a certain time," the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 169 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the operation button 410 operates in the operation position, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the initial position. (The position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. That is, in this case, the operation button 410 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, so that the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Become so.

  Note that as the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), “display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated to prompt an operation (character display such as “press”, effect display, or the like). (A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement to the operation position” mode, whereas the button image BTG at the time of the display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode of moving to the operation position”. In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the operation buttons 410 at that time, the gap between those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position.)

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 169 (e). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the operation button 410 has been returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is operating at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 173 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 173 (g), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. This is also as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed by operating the sword decoration 5001. 170 (g), except that the instruction content is “pressed in” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “moved to operation position” mode. Content.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from any of the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. It is in the operating state, and the state in which the sword decoration 5001 is operating in the operation position. In other words, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), so that the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Will be done.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is also “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state where the sword decoration image SYG is moved to the operation position)”. After the display effect is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an instruction display for prompting the operation (characters such as “push-in”) is performed. Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG will be in a mode different from the “mode that has moved to the operation position”. As described above, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG appearing as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes is reduced. It will be possible to suggest in advance that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be buried (in this case, the sword decoration 5001 moves to the operation position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 170 (h). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. In this state, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 174 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 174 (j), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is displayed at the “operation position”. The effect content is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 171 (j), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial positions ( (The position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, or that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. Will be able to do it.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (k). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively positioned between the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. They are operating at different positions.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is performed, and the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (l). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively positioned between the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. They are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the haze MY be closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operation position, instead of the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) may be performed. If such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 175 (k) and (l) is also concealed as to which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, when an effect is received by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 during an effective period generated after a specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is received. Accordingly, the sword decoration 5001 on which the operation has not been performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIG. 167 (d) and FIG. 169 (e)). However, it is only necessary that the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which no operation is performed be in an operating state. Examples of the operating state include a mode in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to another place and stays, and a mode in which it vibrates. It is possible to adopt. Also, in the validity period generated after the execution of the specific operation-related effect, if the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated and the effect is received, the effect is also accepted. It is desirable that the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to an operation state (vibration or the like).

  In addition, as for such an effect in which the “operation unit on which the operation is not performed” is in the operating state, the effect after the operation in accordance with the operation is “expected degree (a rate at which a big hit symbol appears,“ 0 ”, Appears when executed in a high mode of “including“ 100 ”), and the post-operation effect according to the operation is“ the expected degree (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”). It may not appear when executed in a "low manner".

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is performed by operating one of the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001), the “operation unit on the other side on which no operation is performed” is also activated. Alternatively, when the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other, the “one operation unit on which no operation is performed” may not be set to the operating state.

  Note that, in this effect example (third effect mode), a drive source that applies a drive force to the operation button 410 and a drive source that applies a drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. Or the same driving source.

  In each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, a basic operation is performed. Is provided with an operation opportunity only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, and when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, an operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. Also, when a “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” appears as a result of an effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration An operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 out of the body 5001, and when an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, an effect at the time of the operation of the sword accessory is performed. In this regard, in the operation effect on the button side, the success-time effect (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the failure effect (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination. In the case of one of the effects, the production at the time of the operation on the sword role side, the production at the time of success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the production at the time of failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the jackpot determination (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated), and the effect contents are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  It should be noted that the button-side operation effect and the katana-side operation operation effect are the same as for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600, as well as the effect as to whether the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it content.

  Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to a specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is determined. Opportunities are given to them. However, there is a case in which a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect contents in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation device, regardless of which effect result appears, such as pressing between specific operation devices. There may be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is drawn into the sword state), or a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is put into the sword-pulling state for one operating means (Operation of (1)), an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given may be performed, and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in a mode according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword-pulling state and the sword-drawing state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in the sword-pulling state or the sword-pulling state when the effect result of the sword is displayed.

  In addition, when the symbol change in the hold state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol change, when the symbol change is in the hold state (when the symbol change is exhausted before this). The effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol change) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both of them, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when a symbol change in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a hold state (within the execution period of the symbol change that has been digested earlier than this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable that a plurality of operating means provided be operated respectively.

  In the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, as the specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images need not always be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that an effect reception period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the effect acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to the different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even if the production mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related production is being executed is adopted, the button image is not displayed when the specific operation-related production is finished. One of BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (the image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (the image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this manner is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute the specific operation-related effect with respect to any of a plurality of operation means by executing the specific operation related to the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ). It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, By causing the sword decoration image SYG to appear from the rock when lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to produce and produce the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) and FIG. 170 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, the effect can be made to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) or FIG. 170 (g). In short, it is desirable that the effect be developed so that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a specific effect is obtained when the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 is generated and when the effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. In addition, it is desirable that after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the effect accepting period be generated for the same time period regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation-time effect) can be generated depends on which of the effect modes performs the effect. The ratio set for the specific operation unit of the plurality of operation units may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operation means on the side (e.g., FIG. 169 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side on which the operation has not been performed to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time from the time of the operation. It may be. However, the operation is not used as a reference, and depending on at which timing in the effect reception period the operation is performed, the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated until the operation is terminated. It is desirable to make the lengths of time periods different.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the shorter the remaining time of the effect reception period, the more the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted depending on whether or not to operate the operating means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on at what timing of the effect reception period the operation was performed (according to the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time up to (such as "Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was accepted and the effect was performed at the time of operation") The length of time for appealing to the game player) can be made different, so that the entertainment of the game can be maintained appropriately.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, if none of the plurality of operating means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operating means provided for the effect at the end of the effect accepting period. May be operated.

  Also, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (such as the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG), the side with the higher expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. May be performed to indicate the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. Although a movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed) Operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) can more reliably operate the specific movable body based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. Desirable for enabling.

  In addition, during the period from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of an effect result (such as a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG), the image corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect accepting period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to produce a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was terminated, even though it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect was performed. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest during the game. In addition, when an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to indicate the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with a high degree of expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which the operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001), the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the entertainment interest when the player recognizes that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In the case where the effect accepting period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operating means while the specific operation related effect relating to the plurality of operating means is being performed, When an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) appears as an effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the reproducibility as the specific operation-related production during a period from the start of the production of the specific operation-related production to the presentation of the production result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation unit having the higher degree of expectation among the plurality of operation units. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect reception periods, when an operation is performed by a player, an effect is normally generated based on the operation. However, even if such an operation is not performed, the effect reception period elapses. An automatic button effect state described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation is performed earlier than that, may be set. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated without operation each time the effect accepting period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed in such an automatic button effect state, the effect accepting period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is no operation of the corresponding operation means during the effect reception period, the same operation effect as when operating the operation means is executed.

  However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, during the stage in which a specific operation-related effect is being performed, only the operation buttons 410 of the operation means are intentionally accepted during the effect accepting period. Is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (disabling the automatic button function). After that, even if an effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect reception period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operating means is operated is performed without doing so (making the automatic button function work). According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect based on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. Is expected to be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the setting change relating to the ON / OFF of the automatic button effect state can be performed, for example, not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410. It is desirable to make it. For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not occurred while the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect state is on, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated during the effect reception period, an operation effect in accordance with the operation is performed, and in addition, an automatic button effect state is set. The setting can be changed from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an operation-time effect by an operation performed by a player while the automatic button effect state is kept on, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation for another operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed on the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the effect being executed is changed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect state is changed from the on state to the off state.

  In the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration 5001 is imitated as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. In the state where the displayed sword decoration images SYG are displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) Period) and, when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode as long as it gives an operation opportunity (effect reception period) to the sword decoration 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 173 (e), the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. (Display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 170 (g) and 174 (h). Is also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (the portion displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started) are displayed. Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is displayed). 169 (d), FIG. 170 (g), FIG. 173 (e), and FIG. 174 (h) in the partial display mode (button image BTG, sword). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display relating to the provision of the operation opportunity is performed by using substantially the entire display area (until the other effect images such as the background portion where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). Being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (a), the first image having the shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) having the operation button 410 incorporated in the design is possessed. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it is implicitly suggested which of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates at least a part of the operation means such as a shape and a part of a design.

  Further, as for the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may also be performed as an effect indicating a different degree of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. Further, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of the effect modes is displayed. May indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the degree of expectation is higher when displayed in a specific display mode than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  For the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as a result of the effect (preferably an effect situation with relatively high expectation), When the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), it is displayed (desirably, it is desirable that the effect situation is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, the effect is directed only to the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). When the button image BTG is displayed, the effect reception period is performed not only for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG but also for another operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) which does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a different interest to the operation from the case where the button image BTG appears in the effect situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decoration 5001.

  Further, when a button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG during the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and It is desirable to indicate that the game is in a production situation with a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period If 410) is operated, the effect acceptance period for another operating means that is being generated at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation of the operating means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period is as follows. When another operation means is operated, the effect acceptance period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the special operation effect is not performed. Even when an operation unit different from the unit is being operated, an operation effect at the time when the operation unit (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is obtained as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, even during the effect reception period, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is performed without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even if the effect acceptance period is generated for both the operation means and another operation means, even if no operation is performed, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. It is desirable that only the operation effect at the same time as the operation is performed, and that the special operation effect that appears only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

  However, before the specific timing at which the operation effect (operation when operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function, within the effect reception period, another specific timing is required. When the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined production condition is satisfied, the special operation production is performed according to the production reception, and the specific timing is reached. It is also desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state even after the end of the effect reception period. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed, each effect described above (effect at operation, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is executed). In a case where the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect reception period is generated for another operation means (eg, the operation button 410) which does not correspond to the sword decoration image SYG. Becomes

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, as a result of an effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating operation button 410” or If any of the “sword decoration images SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” is displayed, and the effect is received by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates), which is an effect content that suggests a high degree of expectation, and an effect content that suggests a relatively low degree of expectation. The second operation effect (for example, an effect in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can be caused to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively higher at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. Is performed, and the first operation-time effect that has the effect content suggesting is performed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception during the effect reception period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is generated using the button image BTG (first operation-time effect). Of the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed based on the reception of the effect on the operation button 410 when the display mode is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect image (the button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is performed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (the sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed Since no demerit is produced on the effect result as compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), it is possible to set “giving an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer objects). That is, in the timer effect for the effect of “giving the operation means to the operation means”, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the operation opportunity is given to the operation means soon. , So that the effect at the time of operation can be enjoyed. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operation of the operating means is performed, the effect results to the player advantageous in accordance with the result of the predetermined effect lottery Make sure that any of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as the production target of the timer production, the ratio of the production result advantageous to the player is higher than that in the case where the production target of the timer production is not the production target. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is performed with the effect of “giving an operation opportunity to the operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001)” appears, the “operation opportunity for the operating means” A specific operation-related effect using “giving” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG, a specific operation-related effect as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). It is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the game is played.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously advanced to one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) immediately before that. However, it is difficult to understand which of the effects should be watched, which may lead to a distraction and a decrease in entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, and the count value It is desirable to start an effect of “specific operation-related effect” after the value has reached a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001). Note that the following timer effects correspond to the above-described notice-side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 177 (b) shows an effect in which during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not been executed yet, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is for. I have.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this example of the effect, while it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed, the count value is first set to the predetermined value ( Here, the count reaches “0”) and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), an effect of “specific operation-related effect” is started. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the above is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, even though two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), the effects are sometimes time-consuming. Since overlapping in a series is avoided, each different effect can be enjoyed.

  However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect It is not possible to recognize whether the game was performed as a game, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and before a specific operation-related effect is started. An effect that suggests the effect type (assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) that is the effect of the timer effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is directed to “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration 5001”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword sword decoration”). ) Is given by the player side in the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given), so that the production of the "specific operation-related production" can be started. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when “sword sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be displayed continuously.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction), and this also indicates that the “giving of an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration 5001 is to be the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted and displayed not only when the timer effect is directed to “giving operation opportunities to the sword decoration body 5001” but also when other effects are directed. May be performed when becomes zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 does not function as an effect indicating the type of effect that the timer effect is directed to, but as an effect indicating that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the start of the effect to be directed, and the timer effect is set as the target of the effect. At the same timing as or before the start of the effect that suggests the effect type, the effect that suggests the effect type targeted by the timer effect during the execution state is also being executed. It is important to make sure that

FIG. 177 (d) shows an effect state in which an effect of “specific operation-related effect” has been started.
In this effect situation, as described above, in addition to the fact that the count value has already been hidden, the effect that indicates the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 has also been completed. However, it is important to perform the effect indicating the effect type targeted by the timer effect and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect is started.

  177 (e) to (h) after the "specific operation-related effect" is started. The effect contents are shown in FIG. 168 (c). ), FIGS. 170 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 172 (d) and 174 (h) to (j), so that the details are omitted.

  In addition, as the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 177 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. You may make it executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point where a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 177, but the specific operation-related effect is not performed. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) in accordance with the timing of starting (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is indicated as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given ( The expectation of hitting a big hit is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer production, the specific operation-related production and the timer production will be produced at the same time, but when the production situation where the production is produced at the same time appears, the specific operation-related production Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the rendering result, their rendering value is the same (the expected degree of giving the privilege (big hit) is the same). The same). In other words, in this case, it is possible to substantially lose the performance of the specific operation-related production itself, and therefore, even if the specific operation-related production and the timer production are performed simultaneously, any production It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to understand whether or not the user should pay attention, and the situation in which the user gets distracted. However, in order to improve the game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are developed at the same time appears, the bonus is given more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the type of the effect target ( Although "sword sword" is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as an effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is set as a timer target among a plurality of effects that can be set as a timer target, a display indicating which of the effects is a timer effect may not be displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, an operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect on whether or not to be given. However, prior to providing an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production acceptance period), a first precursory effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is provided to the sword decoration 5001. Or does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 (prior to the production acceptance period). An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may be made to appear. When performing these precursor effects (the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect), the time required for the performance (the precursor effect) is set shorter than in the case where a specific operation-related performance is performed. It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when an effect appears, in order to enhance the entertainment interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as the indication effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, the fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of standing in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize by overlapping the specific image (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image). Thereafter, the specific image is gradually changed to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed), so that the button image BTG gradually increases. It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the user. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode related to such an indication effect will be described later.

  Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, and the like) having different degrees of expectation regarding the privilege grant (big hit), As the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed is developed, it is possible to make the display mode of the button image BTG interesting.

  It should be noted that a first indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and that no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration The second indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 It is important that the contents be executed as different effects. In addition, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect be different.

  Such an indication effect is the above-described “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the giving of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that this is a higher concept including. As for the precursor effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 178, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursor effect is performed in any of these effect modes. By indicating how long the effect acceptance period that occurs in response to the precursor effect depends on whether or not the advance effect is provided, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the precursor effect is performed. It is more desirable to achieve this.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of an effect when a plurality of types (an indication effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the indication effect.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (a) (a sign effect A), the sign effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The indication effect A is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect accepting period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (a) (foreboding effect A), when the foreboding effect A is performed, the same time length is obtained even if any operation means is to be given an operation opportunity. The effect reception period (valid period) T1 that is held occurs.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIG. 167 (d), (f), 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T1 at that time. Is being done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (b) (the precursor effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed, An indication effect B1 is to be started. The precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but one that is executed before an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation When the indication effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation device (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is caused to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is displayed. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation effect different from the above-described operation effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process for terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (b), an effect reception period corresponding to the precursor effect A. (Effective period) This is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length) from T1. Thereby, depending on which mode (the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B1) performs the precursor effect, it is suggested how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is. Can be maintained, and the entertainment of the game when the indication effect is performed can be appropriately maintained.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (c) (a sign effect B2), the sign effect B2 is started when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. Like the sign effect B1, the sign effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect" but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Which is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, an effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. An effect reception period) T3 is generated.

  Note that also in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (such as a character display such as “press”) that prompts an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2, or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. Display) is displayed. Further, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is performed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect accepting period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (c), an effect accepting period corresponding to the precursor effect A. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed, despite the fact that the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation related to the privilege award (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T3 having a length will occur, an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect has been performed is created, and the precursor effect B2 is generated. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest when the game is performed. Note that in this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant be different between when the effect reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

  The indication effects B1 and B2 are specified by causing the same effect mode to appear from the start of the effect to the timing in the middle of the effect, and causing different effect modes to appear after the timing has elapsed. May be made to have an effect on which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such a production effect, and the production of the precursor productions B1 and B2 may be started when a different time has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation. The indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (d) (sign effect C), the sign effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” about which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 178 (d) (the indication effect C), when the indication effect C is performed, the same time length is applied to any operation means even if the operation opportunity is given. The effect reception period (valid period) T4 that has is generated.

  During the effect reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side indicated as a result of the precursor effect C (character display such as "press", and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIG. 167 (d), (f), 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T4 at that time. Is being done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor effect C is, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (d), the effect acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect A. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than the precursor effect A, as long as the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related performance” described above. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor effect A is generated, the entertainment interest when the precursor effect C is performed is suitably maintained. Will be able to

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 178, the effect reception period (valid period) is associated with the types of the precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby providing the effect reception period. (Effective period) was suggested. However, by setting such that the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period having a predetermined time length (for example, effect reception period T2) differs for each type of precursor effect, the effect reception period (effective period) ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to simulate the same state as the state of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 is operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating at the operation position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is operating at the operating position (sword-pulling state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as operating at the operating position (sword-pulling state). Have been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating as it looks. In this case, when the result of the effect is displayed even though the specific operation-related effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the width of the effect is significantly narrowed, and a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is caused. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Regarding (BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect contents when the indication effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content when the precursor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 179 (a) to (c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the state of the effect, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 side. Assuming that the precursor effect has been executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon. In the indication effect (the indication effect in other examples is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means to which the operation opportunity is to be given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Need not necessarily be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration body 5001 soon after the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. It will be.

  In the indication effect shown in FIG. 179 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a relatively low expectation blue aura and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a relatively high expectation red aura Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content regarding which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this effect situation, it is recognizable that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon, but the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decoration image SYG or the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation is obtained. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, whereby the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation rendering situation. It will be suggested that an effect acceptance period will occur. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (b), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa) is displayed. .

  FIG. 179 (c) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to perform an operation (“pressing in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also moves from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received during the effect reception period, a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sword-inserted state. Will be maintained. In addition, processing for terminating the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means (here, the operation target side) is operated. The effect image (in this case, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side. Are stopped at predetermined positions.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 179 (d) to (g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), if a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” is started in the state of the effect, any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is started. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given soon.

  FIG. 179 (e) shows an effect state in which a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this state of production, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 as the production result of the “specific operation-related production”. Have been. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (e), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (such as the button image BTG) is displayed.

  FIG. 179 (f) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to perform an operation (“press-in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Further, when an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

  In this regard, in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 179 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the drawn state during the effect reception period (the sword decoration image SYG). Is stopped), whereas the sword decoration 5001 is configured to continuously perform upward displacement slowly over a period until the end of the effect reception period, and is set in different states. I am trying to.

  During the effect reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration 5001, an effect is received when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword-put state, and the effect is received. The effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. In addition, processing for terminating the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation. Note that in the examples of FIGS. 179 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the effect reception period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a stopped state.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, in the effect reception period (FIG. 179 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed. In the stoppage state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 179 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state. The other side is kept in a dynamic state so as to be able to be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the effect can be expanded in width, and the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the operation While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and its depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is produced. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

  One of the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a sign effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed but also when a specific operation-related effect as a sign effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG simulating the sword decoration 5001 appears, any one of the effects is displayed. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, it is determined whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation. Can be further provided. Regarding the technique, in addition to the effect example in FIG. 179, the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof may be appropriately adopted.

  Then, when giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or is recognizable, and it is not known whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is displayed). (Such as a recognizable display state) is made to appear by the production progress. Thereafter, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is of high expectation (for example, the outline image of the effect image imitating the operation means) It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed, etc.) in order with further effect development. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after the progress of the effect, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation (for example, if the operation unit is operated). After canceling the outline state of the simulated effect image), the button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined to make a display state in which only the outline can be recognized). And an effect pattern for further effect development may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, a blank state of the sword decoration image SYG) , So that the color can be checked, etc.). Note that, in this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the higher expectation side (for example, red), the display mode is lower than the display mode on the lower expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further performance progress occurs.

  FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (d) to (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 180 (a), the indication effect as “specific operation-related effect” has been started, but the indication effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A first character (an effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a second character (an effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) having a sword (a sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 Is depicted, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. Like that.

  FIG. 180 (b) shows an effect situation in which an effect result of a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (the sword decoration) to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 180 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 176 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed), and While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) are the same. An effect image (display image shown in FIG. 180 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 180 (c) to (e) show an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), when the effect reception period occurs, the sword decoration body 5001 starts operating from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. As shown in FIG. 180 (d), the sword decoration body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (e), as long as there is no operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in a sword-drawn state until at least the end of the effect acceptance period. (The operation from the sword-drawing state to the sword-putting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 180 (c) to 180 (e), a motion (movement in the rotation direction) that is completely different from such a motion (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration 5001. In the lowering operation), the description of the second character swinging down the sword decoration image SYG is performed, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the drawn state. The operation is performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)) within the effect reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the change, and the display change progresses by an amount corresponding to the passage of time. Also, the sword decoration 5001 is brought into the sword-drawing state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)). Is completed, but even if the loop processing is performed, it is not affected by the loop processing and the sword is kept in the drawn state. In addition, when performing the operation to the katana state with respect to the operation target role 141 during the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and the predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. In addition, processing for terminating the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period, The operation modes (operations that play the role of accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for the effects) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending. Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( The effect can be broadened, for example, it can be executed with the background being continued), and the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, the effect contents (display in which characters face each other) appearing when a precursor effect (FIG. 180 (a)) as a specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effects (FIGS. 180 (c) to 180 (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in a form in which both the background image and the background image are changed are executed. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character (sword decoration image SYG are different from each other) while the special background (full moon) is displayed. The image is displayed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), so that it is possible to improve the production performance during the production reception period. In this sense, even in the indication effect, it is necessary to perform the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing property. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting benefits, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  In the case of a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of the effect modes appears. A suggestion may be made as to whether or not an aspect with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when an effect is received during the period. The expectation degree concerning the privilege provision may be suggested using the background image appearing when the precursor effect is performed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 180, when an indication effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the indication effect. Although it was decided to perform the effect within the period, the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (for a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means (or a specific operation form among a plurality of operation modes) ) When the effect acceptance period occurs when the special indication effect when the operation opportunity is given) is performed and both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the indication effect are changed. An effect may be executed. The point is, "an operation-related effect (an indication effect) relating to an operation on the operation means can be generated, and as the operation-related effect (an indication effect), an effect associated with the first effect is received by an operation by a player. At least one operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect relating to a second effect different from the first effect is received by an operation performed by the player can be generated, and are displayed in the first operation-related effect. The first operation prompting image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation prompting image has not yet been displayed is continuously displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with changing the background image to another background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed. " As long as it was Tsu. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image do not have to be the same image, and for example, a button image BTG, a sword decoration image SYG, a gauge display, or "press!" For example, can be adopted as appropriate. Also, the “first effect” and the “second effect” may be different after-operation effects. For example, the “first operation-related effect in which the effect relating to the first effect is received” is the effect reception Can be exemplified as an effect about which aspect appears as a conversation notice when the effect is made. As the “second operation-related effect in which an effect is accepted for the second effect”, an effect is accepted. It is possible to exemplify the effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates at the time. At this time, no matter which aspect appears as the conversation notice, the effect design is such that the ratio of the big hit symbols appearing (including 100%) is higher when the specific decorative member SDY is operated. It is desirable to do. In addition, regarding “the second operation-related effect in which an effect regarding the second effect is received”, refer to FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, FIGS. 217 to 220, FIGS. 223, 250, 253, and the like. It may be executed as one of the operation reception effects described later (operation reception effect under BGM suppression). On the other hand, regarding the “first operation-related effect in which an effect regarding the first effect is received”, an operation reception effect (with BGM unsuppressed) described later with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, FIG. 224, FIG. The operation may be executed as any one of the above (operation accepting effect). Further, each of the different examples of these operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted. The background image is not necessarily a still image, and the background image may not necessarily be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a state in which a river flows or a state in which characters are dueling, A display in which the range in which such a still image or a moving image is displayed is slid (a display in which the coordinates move) is also included. In other words, the background image can be said to be "continuously displayed" as long as it is displayed in a time series or coordinate connection to the displayed depiction contents. On the other hand, "changing a background image to another background image" does not necessarily mean that the image is displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself is time-series or coordinated. Also included are images that suddenly change or are replaced (switched) into “images having different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the effect reception period)” that are not physically connected. In addition, an image that changes to a “black image” or is replaced (switched) is also included. In other words, if there is no connection in the description content in time series or coordinates before and after the change, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the background image in this manner, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, or the like) for hiding the background image that has been displayed until then is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable to display the display area over at least half the area (more preferably substantially the entire area) of the display area, and to display the second operation promotion image together with a new background image after the display. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed in one variation pattern. As described above, the timing at which the background image is changed to another background image may be before the effect reception period occurs, or may include the timing at which the effect reception period occurs, including the timing at which the effect reception period occurs. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 180 (b) may be omitted, and the effect may progress from FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c)).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the effect reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts before the effect reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration 5001 that is started before the effect reception period occurs may be completed before the effect reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation may be performed). The performed operation may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter, the stopped state may be maintained.

  In addition, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001), a display for changing a background image when an effect acceptance period occurs, and a case where the background image is changed There may be a case where the display is not performed. Then, in this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. Is desirable.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, an operation on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is performed, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. In this case, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 167 (d), 169 (e), and 170 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button 410) is also operated so as to improve the performance of the operation-time production after a specific operation-related production. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time production after the specific operation-related production, the operation-time production after the specific operation-related production depends on the result of the production. In this case, an effect state appears when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the game machine main body side) are activated, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While an unsuccessful effect state in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, an operation-time effect performed without a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific effect) Depending on the result of the effect, either the movable member provided on the game board 5 or the movable member provided on the door frame 3 side, depending on the result of the effect. Only when the success of the stage is activated, or the game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described effect modes and specific operation-related effects according to the other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation of granting a privilege is higher than that of the privilege. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the button image is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) in which a princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. When the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (b), a mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific rendering mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG. Note that, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation relating to privilege provision is higher than when displayed in a normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 181 (a)) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 181 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed. )) May be prepared. Then, in this case, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same between the case where the first effect pattern appears and the case where the second effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest in which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, and also to provide the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears, it is possible to provide completely different fun, such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, when such a specific production mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related production, when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 181 (c), when the specific effect mode is at a stage where the effect result (which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) of the specific operation-related effect has not yet appeared. This may be displayed in advance from (for example, during the stage of the production of the specific operation-related production). According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect on which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). Appearing), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, and therefore, even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed, it can be expressed as "a precursor effect by the princess character". It is possible to provide a directing effect having a completely different purpose.

  The sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof has a sword part (stem part 5012, blade body part 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 that can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 151, a second operation in which a sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit The above-described specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of (1). The sword portion (handle 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are both operably supported by one main body support portion (not shown) provided on the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword part (handle 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of operation (operation), the other side has a structure capable of operation (operation). Is formed.

  However, in the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different only when any of the effect results appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even when the operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, the effect image imitating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 (and the effect image thereof) (Instruction prompting for operation) is displayed, the player may be more likely to make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the effect reception period decreases every moment, the operation of correcting the operation error is first performed on the player side, and then the operation in the original correct mode is further performed. It is difficult to do that, and even if a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectation was performed, the production acceptance period would end before the production was accepted. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  The sword decoration body 5001 has a mode such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword portion and a mode “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath portion. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the appropriate side, and the effect acceptance period ends. It can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

  Therefore, when performing the above-described specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the original state, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation effect is performed in accordance with the effect reception.

  FIGS. 182 and 183 show an example of an effect in a case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 182 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 182 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 182 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b), a first effect that simulates a first operation mode for operating the sword portion of the sword decoration 5001 from the sword-drawing state to the sword-putting state An image OX and a second effect image TX imitating a second operation mode of operating the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 to move in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to indicate that an operation opportunity in any one of the operation modes will soon be able to accept the effect. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration body 5001 simulating the sword portion is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In both of the effect images TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  FIG. 182 (c) shows the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode, with the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b) progressing. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect accepting period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this example of the effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (c), if the first effect image OX is left but the situation is dominant, the display such as "pressing in" is visible. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized in a situation where the second effect image TX is predominant but left. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized according to the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be displayed because there is a risk that the effect is erroneously recognized as prompting the operation at the timing when the effect acceptance period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 182 (d) shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 182 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is displayed in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to the effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, no effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) occurs, and the first operation mode does not occur. An effect is received when the operation is performed, and a specific operation effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 182 (d), an effect accepting period for a specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. That is, in the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “push-in” or a time remaining in the effect reception period) is shown. Bar display) will be displayed. Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 operates from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  FIG. 183 (e) shows that the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, but the operation (erroneous operation) in the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. This shows the state of production when performed by a player.

  That is, in this effect example, even if an effect accepting period for a specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received is received. (In this case, “just as it is”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed (here, “calm down and pushed in”) with the passage of time so that the player can regain calmness. It has become. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be informed is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player is in a panic state, this can be suitably performed. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decoration body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 183 (g) shows that the operation on the appropriate side (first operation mode) is performed in the effect situation (effect accepting period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 183 (e) and 183 (f). As a result, a state in which an effect is accepted and the above-described operation effect is performed in accordance with the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the state of the second operation mode to the non-operation state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains unchanged. Even if the operation is performed from the state (the state of the operation error), the effect is appropriately received, so that the decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when a player makes an erroneous operation, the user is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. It is not always necessary to carry out detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, in a situation in which an erroneous operation is performed, there is a possibility that the player has panicked, so that performing notification of complicated contents may have an adverse effect. Therefore, when an operation error is made by the player during the effect reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received is not displayed by a message, but is displayed by an effect or sound only, instead of being displayed by a message. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation has been performed incorrectly, but a special situation is confirmed in which the specific notification is performed based on the performed operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed. Thus, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the appropriate side.

  On the other hand, depending on a player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation may occur in which a certain operation-related effect causes an erroneous operation before the effect acceptance period occurs. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath) is performed on the second operation unit even though an operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath) is not issued, the first operation is performed. It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period relating to a specific operation effect occurs only on the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side. In this case as well, how the player operates There is a concern that people may not be able to recognize it.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation unit (sheath part) is given an operation opportunity is performed, Despite the fact that no operation instruction (remaining time bar display) has been given to the second operation unit side (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 182 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit It is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted even when an operation is performed on. The specific notification may be “a message display indicating that the appropriate operation unit to which an operation opportunity is to be given soon while the operation state is maintained is maintained” or a message display. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or a notification only by sound. In any case, despite performing the operation, by confirming a special situation such that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed, the operation on the appropriate side is thereafter performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect that it will be a good way to go.

  In this case, for example, while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) (the state in which the sword decoration 5001 has moved to the left), the first operation unit (for example, , Even when the effect reception period for the effect at the time of a specific operation occurs only on the side of the sword part), the state in which the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 has been moved to the left, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect is performed according to the operation. Becomes

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception that occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the original state, the effect reception will be performed properly, so the operation error will occur before the effect reception period occurs Also, when the game occurs, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  However, during a period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is provided with the operation opportunity, the effect result is indicated and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be intermingled with the content of the notification (display of instructions, etc.) during the production reception period, and the player will be more confused. There is a concern. Therefore, the effect result suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is in the specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, and in the period until the effect result is displayed. The above-described specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and the first period and the second period are sequentially performed after the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described production example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the above-described effect styles and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the effect style of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to any one of the above-described plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 161). From the stage 0 mode to any one of the stage 1 to stage 3 modes). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to any of the above-described modes, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it do. Alternatively, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described multiple modes.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in”, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), and a sword decoration 5001 Is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 161). It will be.

  However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image 5001 is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the confirmation of the sword decoration image SYG can be made to be interesting. And the production performance during the production reception period is poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a different mode from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure directing performance during the directing reception period.

  At this time, by making the aspect expressed in the sword decoration image SYG higher in the degree of expectation than in the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, the rendition during the effect reception period is improved. This is desirable in order to ensure a favorable situation. For example, in a case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 mode and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed in the stage 1 mode but in the stage 2 mode or the stage 3 mode. To be displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the effect reception period is appropriately maintained.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, it is only necessary that the number of the production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of the production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the sword decoration 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword decoration 5001, the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

  However, if the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the mode of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made to differ in this way, some players may have a discomfort that false display is made. There is concern that this could reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, the mode of the sword decoration image SYG is a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as the mode of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the mode 0 to the mode 3 shown in FIG. 161). Is prepared, and when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the mode of the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decoration image SYG is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG. It may emit light in such a manner that it does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, a rendering effect that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a concern that a false display is made and a discomfort is caused. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be improved by providing a performance that is beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

  Even when the sword decoration image SYG has a special mode as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided in each mode prepared as the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 161). It is desirable that the display in the stage 0 mode to the stage 3 mode can be performed. That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. It is desirable that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the special mode, it is suggested that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, the method of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode may be applied to another effect in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when a symbol change is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is changed within the symbol change. The first indication effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. In addition, when the symbol change is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol change. The second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. In addition, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, a third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. An effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this regard, these predictive effects are executed as different effect contents, but as the effect contents, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears,
-After that, at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize the specific image, an effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・ After that, the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display area (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first predictive effect, a display effect using the “cloud effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means) is performed as the specific image, and in the second predictive effect, “flame effect” is specified as the specific image. Effect (display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image that simulates the operation means. In the third predictive effect, the display effect (water effect image that simulates the operation means) is displayed as the specific image. If the type of the specific image is made different, for example, by making a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it can be recognized that the second predictive effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the “water effect” is used. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third predictive effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated is performed. Will be done.

  In the case of performing the sign effect (at least one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image is used. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize the effect. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a display image with low expectation. Since an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the user is not sure of which of the display modes (for example, blue) is to be displayed, the effect during the effect reception period is given. Characteristics can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is convinced that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot have the effect, it is possible to improve the performance in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed in such an effect content, and FIG. 186 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed in the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, an example of an effect when the first symptom effect is performed will be described. It is also possible to apply to an indication effect.

  FIG. 185 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 185 (b) shows an effect state in which the effect of the first precursor effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 185 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a “cloud effect” gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 186 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or reducing the area where the specific image is displayed).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 186, at timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is changed. The generated button image BTG that simulates the operation button 410 and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. FIG. 185 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the ratio of performing the operation effect in a mode of high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), it is difficult to determine whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Despite this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is performed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode and the first display mode. The effect can be advanced without being convinced which of the two display modes will be displayed.

  Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), the user is not sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to indicate that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 185 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” is displayed while the production acceptance period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 185 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 while it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the effect at the time of the operation is executed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the effect shown in FIG. 185 (d).

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period from when the button image BTG is displayed to when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). In (2)), it is possible to provide the directing effect by making the button image BTG relatively hard to visually recognize.

  In addition, in order to enhance the directivity during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (time t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period between the timings t2 and t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during a period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. For example, at time t2 to t3, If an effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period during the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more appropriately enhanced. Will be able to

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 185, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, the effect condition in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize first appears, and after a predetermined time after the condition, the effect condition is determined to be difficult to recognize. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is in an effect situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect acceptance period occurs, the effect pattern (third precursor) in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode of higher expectation. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect in which the value of watching the button image BTG is higher as the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It can be maintained suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”. The display was made so that the visibility could be maintained. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be made difficult to be visually recognized until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being convinced of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide unprecedented novel performance.

  Also, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 185, the above-described or later-described “reception allowable sound” may be output. In this case, the “acceptable sound” is output from the time when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the operation button 410.

  In addition, when such an “acceptable sound” is output in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (a ratio at which a big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”), the button image BTG It becomes possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the entire appearance, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be improved.

  When an effect reception (operation) is performed in a state where the “acceptable sound” is output, it is desirable that the “acceptable sound” in the output state is not output at that time. In addition, for the “acceptable sound”, the above-described or each configuration described later may be appropriately adopted.

  The “cloud effect” may be transparent, in which case the button image will be seen slightly behind it, but even with such a configuration, the visibility is maintained. .

  The “cloud effect” itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (a ratio at which a big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”). In this case, although the function of the operation button 410 functions to make it difficult to visually recognize, when a high degree of expectation is indicated, an improvement in gaming interest is achieved.

  Between the time when the “cloud effect” is displayed and the time when the cloud effect is completely hidden, a later-described effect method for setting a specific effect sound (BGM) in a suppressed mode or in a silent output state, or in a non-output state is described below. You may make it employ | adopt. In this manner, the specific effect sound (BGM) in the suppressed state, the output state in the silent state, or the non-output state is output to the output in the non-suppressed state even at the time when the operation is performed by the player. It will not be returned.

  In the case of applying such an effect to any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means after the start effect is started is clear. Even if the length of time until the image is visually recognizable (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image simulating the operation means is displayed and then the effect image becomes clear. It is desirable to set the same time (the time until the specific image is hidden) until the image is made visually recognizable. Further, in the case where such an effect is applied to any of the first, second, and third symptom effects, an effect imitating the operation means after the first effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare a plurality of these so as to have a plurality of effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image simulating the operating means is caused to appear in a display mode (timing t2) in which the effect image simulating the operating means is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the transmittance setting of the effect image itself. It may be made to gradually change toward a display mode (timing t3) which is easily visually recognized. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance in such a display mode is itself. May be performed as an indication effect, or in a display mode in which another display is performed as an indication effect, the effect image simulating the operation means is displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Is also good.

  When a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 186 are described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later. ) May be executed only when the error occurs. That is, at the point in time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect, and as a result of the effect being developed, a plurality of Since the effect acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, it may be delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means to operate, rather than being operated by the player. The production acceptance period may end before all remaining time has been consumed. In this regard, if the specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later occurs, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any of the operation means appears as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, the operation by the player on the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function Since the effect is received by any of the above and the effect after the operation is always executed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Auto button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is executable, and control is performed in this automatic button effect state. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big hit determination, Even if the operation by the player is not accepted in the above, a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change as in the case where the operation by the player is accepted for the effect within the effect acceptance period can be executed. I have. According to such an automatic button effect state, since an effect is produced after the operation when the operation is performed without performing the operation every time the effect reception period occurs, a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. Will be able to In addition, regarding the automatic production function, when this function is performed, the same production reception as when the operation is actually performed may be performed, so that the processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed. Instead, the same processing as when an effect is received may be performed.

  In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the techniques, effects, settings, and the like related to the above-described operation may be appropriately combined or replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operating means is operated a plurality of times to automatically switch the button. The setting to the production state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). Is selected and the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation of the operation button 410 alone may be performed a plurality of times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operation unit may be performed a plurality of times.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by being operated once, and such operation is simplified, The setting to the automatic button effect state can be performed while keeping an eye on the effect progress during the symbol change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether the validity period has occurred. If the setting to the automatic button effect state is made just by operating, the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 is changed for a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to operate it once in a mode (so-called “long pressing mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. Accordingly, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is positively performed during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, regardless of whether the valid period is generated, the automatic button effect state is set. Erroneously set. In addition, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed even if the operation is performed in a long press mode when at least the effect reception period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as a method of canceling the automatic button effect state in a state where it is set, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is also used. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be released by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). Is selected and the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is released.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. The setting of the automatic button effect state can be released while keeping an eye on the effect progress during the symbol change. However, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button production state, even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed), the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state. The setting of the automatic button effect state is released only by detecting that the operation has been performed (only by operating in a single operation mode). In other words, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that a desire to perform an operation on the operation button 410 appears. By releasing the state and returning to the normal effect state at an early stage, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is appropriately maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (the peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation units including the operation button 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 or the like is set) Occurs, and even if an operation (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) by the player is not received during the effect reception period, an operation (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) by the player is performed within the effect reception period. It is possible to execute processing (automatic production function) for causing the same change to the production as when the production was received. According to such a configuration, whether a period in which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be accepted for the effect occurs, or another operation means (for example, In the case where the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) regarding whether or not a period during which an operation on the sword decoration 5001) is ready to receive an effect occurs, the effect result Even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is set to accept the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, so that such a specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with confidence. .

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs while being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When the operation on the first operation means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic directing means),
The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 or the like) is set as an operation target among the plurality of operation means when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when the operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation on the second operation means is performed is executed. Possible (second automatic staging means)
Regardless of whether the first side effect reception period or the second side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the occurrence of the period, The automatic processing by the first automatic production means or the automatic processing by the second automatic production means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first-side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is set as the operation target Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of those periods Therefore, you can enjoy the production with peace of mind.

  However, if a first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side effect reception period occurred. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. The effect progress may be performed within the symbol variation as occasionally. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side production reception period. Since the effect is received and the effect is automatically generated after the operation, it is possible to function as a surprise effect.

  It should be noted that when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol fluctuation period as compared to when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The ratio of occurrence of the effect reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the effect reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate during the effect reception period also increases. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the function, the effect accepting period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in gaming interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that both the effect accepting period for the first operating means and the effect accepting period for the second operating means increase. However, it is more desirable that the degree of the occurrence ratio be different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance condition is satisfied within the production acceptance period, the production after operation can be executed (post-production production execution means),
A process of establishing an effect receiving condition based on an operation performed by a player during an effect receiving period is executable (player operation receiving means);
When the operation by the player is not performed within the effect reception period, a process of establishing the effect reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing during the effect reception period can be executed (automatic effect reception means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. You are going to. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself / herself to operate until the automatic staging function functions is given, and the option to cause the staging acceptance by the operation by the player is also left. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurred. When it is assumed that the effect development within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the `` specific time '' or the `` specific time '' Any of the times different from the above is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side effect reception period.

  Here, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period, Then, a process of generating an after-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may be performed.

  Similarly, during the symbol change execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect accepting period for an operation means (such as a sword decoration body 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs. Even when an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the period, a process of generating a post-operation effect in accordance with the reception of the effect and a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the “post-operation effect in response to the effect reception”, an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed during the effect reception period. It is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced by the player's own operation (specific effect mode) (A desire to end the state). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the specific production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button provided with an operation opportunity within the effect reception period The process of terminating the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the effect of causing a change in effect by performing only one operation on the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (only by operating in a single operation mode) (The process of performing the effect after the operation) is performed, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and to develop the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the effect state.

  However, during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed), the setting change (change to the automatic button effect state or cancel setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the automatic button effect state The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with the operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol change, and when the operation opportunity is provided correspondingly, the bigger hit than the operation button 410 is expected. The degree is to be raised. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prevented from being permitted only for the purpose of changing the setting relating to the automatic button production state (specific production state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to enhance the sense of premium when the game is played and to maintain the entertainment interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons other than the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means is displayed. By operating the control button 410 or another operation means a plurality of times, the automatic button effect state can be set or canceled.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the automatic button effect state is not required without operating the sword decoration 5001. The setting can be changed. That is, as described above, when the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed for the purpose.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is the symbol when the automatic button effect state is controlled. An effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, and an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is effected during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Become like

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the plurality of operating means include, when in the automatic button effect state, an "automatic operation for generating an operation effect without operation during the effect reception period". In addition to the operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) that can be targeted by the "effect function", the special operation means that is not targeted by the "automatic effect function for generating an operation effect without operation during the effect reception period" May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and if an operation for the special operation means is received during the effect reception period, the effect is received. The post-operation effect according to the effect reception indicates the degree of expectation of the big hit. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if an operation on the special operation means is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect was received may appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the above-mentioned effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from when the above-mentioned effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  Also, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode), an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs during a period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the sword decoration body 5001 or the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the special operation means) It is desirable that this should not be allowed even if an effect reception period occurs. That is, if the operation button 410 is operated (operated in a long press mode) during the effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410, an automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the effect reception period, the "automatic effect function for generating an operation-time effect without operation during the effect reception period" is activated, so that the original effect reception (operation of an operation means different from the operation button 410 is performed) May be generated without any operation, and from a player who is ignorant of such an automatic button effect state, whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or whether the operation button 410 It may be confusing that a production acceptance period for different operation means has occurred, and this may reduce the interest in gaming This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but controls the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the production acceptance period when not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the production acceptance period when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state) It may be configured to be executed as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize in advance whether or not the state is in an effect state in which the automatic effect function can function within the specific effect reception period, and the effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, at the time of the production acceptance period, at least until the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed, the specific image is directed to the specific area where the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning falls toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (a precursor effect). In other words, in this case, at the time of the production acceptance period, the movement of the production image different from the specific image is confirmed, so that the non-displayed “specific image suggesting the remaining time” is closely watched at the place where it will appear. Can be encouraged, so that it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a situation where the specific effect reception period ends due to the operation by the player not being in time, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state can be executed by the operation of the player, but the result of the big hit determination including the following explanation examples is also included. The state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled in accordance with the progress of the game or the effect based on the game. As an example in which the state setting and the setting release can be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "the automatic button effect state is controlled while the normal game state is controlled, but the big hit game state Or the automatic button effect state is canceled when the state is shifted to the high probability reduction time state, or the automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generating an effect pattern to be canceled when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the automatic button effect state" or "generating an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol changes are executed" It is possible to adopt a control mode such as described above. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 which is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the “auto button effect state” are not performed. Such processing itself is eliminated.

  In addition, the timing at which the above-described automatic production function functions may be a time when the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or a predetermined timing thereafter, or the remaining time of the production reception period may be left. The timing may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). If the above-mentioned automatic production function functions when the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions similarly to the case where the operation is actually performed. At that time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur even if no operation is performed while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends ( It is important that the above-described automatic production function is activated at a specific timing within the period) and the production after the operation is started in accordance with the automatic production function. In other words, in this case, if the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the specific timing within the production acceptance period has arrived, the post-operation production is generated by the player himself operating after the specific timing has come. It is also possible to make the user feel uneasy when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, erroneously that the automatic button effect state is controlled even though the automatic button effect state is not controlled). , The effect may not be confirmed after the operation "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and the effect may not be confirmed after the operation "). Will be able to

  The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described. However, these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples, or the following characteristic techniques may be applied. They may be used in combination as appropriate.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, it is premised that when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that is executable only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific validity period related to the specific display effect is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific validity period. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement of performance by allowing generation of a specific display performance). Of course, even if a specific production state (automatic button production state) has occurred, the automatic production function may not be able to function during another production reception period that is set when a specific display production is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific validity period when a specific display effect is being performed, it is possible to enjoy a VIP feeling due to the fact that the operation of the automatic effect function can be saved and the trouble of operating can be saved. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately enhanced. In addition, it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from being able to function in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed. If the function cannot be performed, the above-described operation and effect when a specific validity period occurs when a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions) occurs. It is possible to expect. In addition, even when such a specific validity period occurs, if the player does not perform an operation until the specific timing within the specific validity period arrives, the above-described automatic staging function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the effect after the operation according to this.

Further, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination.
-If the first specific validity period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-described automatic effect is generated at a timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific validity period occurred. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto,
-If a second specific validity period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific validity period has occurred The automatic production function described above functions at the time when has elapsed, ends the second specific validity period, generates a post-operation production in accordance with this, and furthermore,
-When the third specific validity period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific validity period is controlled despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of the process, each process such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed cannot appear may be performed when in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs when the effect is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation is started from the time when the effect reception period occurs. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions, or the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has passed, Even if the effect reception period ends, the above-described automatic effect function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even when controlled in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is checked which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, when the second predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described operation can be performed. The effect can be made to progress with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic effect function functions as described above or whether the automatic effect function described above does not function at all. Note that all of the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called “operating button”). The effect is received when a single operation is performed, and an effect is generated after the operation.

  It should be noted that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are executable only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. As described above, when the display is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when the control is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. Need not always be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when an effect is received during the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

  In the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the timing of the automatic effect function during the effect accepting period (when the effect is accepted, The automatic staging function worked for the bar display (display in which the image changes (in this case, the area changes) as time elapses) indicating the remaining time of the staging acceptable period so that the user can recognize whether only the remaining time has been left. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where this is not displayed at the time but displayed. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” continuously displayed at the time when the automatic effect function functions, the effect accepting period is set to the first specific effective period ( When the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production acceptance period has elapsed, a period in which the automatic production function functions, and a second specific effective period (relatively long after the production reception period has occurred) (A period during which the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed, during which the automatic effect function operates).

  In this sense, when a first specific valid period (a period in which the automatic production function functions when a first predetermined time has elapsed after the production acceptance period has occurred) occurs, and when a second specific valid period ( The big hit expectation is different from when a second predetermined time elapses after the effect reception period occurs and when the automatic effect function operates (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, in the case where the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit expectation occurs when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In the case where a post-operation effect is generated by an operation performed by the player during the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect occurs, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case where the function is operated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the “bar display” is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body. Is also good.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern from the player's side that the automatically generated effect after the operation cannot be grasped to which operation means. Therefore, in the case where the above-described automatic production function is caused to function to generate the post-operation production, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation target operation) Even if the above-described automatic effect function is functioning, the operation-target effect image is displayed without displaying the operation-object suggestion image. Is desirable. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, and the like) of the operation object suggestion image is not necessarily the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. What is necessary is to be able to recognize which of the above is even in the state where the effect has occurred after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect occurs due to the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic operation may be performed. Similarly to the case where the effect function is performed, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. When the above-described automatic production function functions, such as when the automatic production function functions within the first specific validity period or when the automatic production function functions within the second specific validity period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden.

  Also, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectation degrees, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode are provided. Can be checked at the same time, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed as, for example, light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

  For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-described automatic production function, a big hit expectation degree (for example, appears only when a big hit is obtained) as an operation target suggestion image (a mimic image imitating the operation means). In the case where an operation is received by a player's operation, a plurality of modes having different post-operation effects are executed in different modes are prepared, and when the post-operation effect is started based on the operation reception, the operation target If the suggestion image (a mimic image imitating the operation means) is kept displayed in one of the plurality of modes having different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be improved. Can be confirmed at the same time, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which a mock image is displayed is generated, the type of the effective period (effect acceptance period) (a condition for generating the effective period, and a post-operation effect that occurs when an operation is accepted). And the like, the display area is reduced in accordance with the passage of time (a first effective period generated when the first condition is satisfied), and the display area is reduced in accordance with the passage of time. It is desirable that there be a case where the display is not performed (a second effective period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition). In other words, in the effective period in which the display area is not displayed in which the display area is reduced with the elapse of time, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much remaining time in which the operation reception is allowed is left. It is possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension in the interior. Note that “do not perform display in which the display area of a specific image is reduced with the passage of time” means, for example, in a normal (first effective period), a gauge in which the display area is reduced with the passage of time. When displaying an image, it can be realized by not displaying the gauge image itself in the second valid period, or by adopting a method of displaying the gauge image but not reducing the display area thereof as time elapses. is there.

  In this regard, when an operation is received during the second valid period (when display in which the display area is reduced with the passage of time is not performed), a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation reception is performed. It is desirable that the mimic image is displayed, not hidden, when execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect is started. This makes it possible to grasp that the operation has been accepted while the mock image is being displayed (before the expiration of the validity period), and anxiety such as "Is it possible that the operation was not received in time?" Can be removed.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) of a mimic image before and after a change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception occurs. Transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and may be in a state where the mimic image is difficult to visually recognize by other images. In the operation reception, it is determined which operation means was the operation target. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to preferably obtain such an operation effect, at least at the time when the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is started, It is desirable that the display state of the mimic image is maintained as it was before the operation was received, and that the mimic image is not difficult to be visually recognized by other images. Therefore, if the mimic image is dynamically displayed during the valid period during which operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes corresponding to the operation reception (a change caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp emission). It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even at the time when the execution is started. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of a change caused by an after-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp emission) occurs according to the operation by the player during the first valid period, the change is performed. The mimic image may be hidden in a state where a display change or lamp emission has occurred, or the mimic image is displayed without being hidden as in the case of the above-described second validity period. A change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) according to the operation reception may be generated in the state.

  However, even in such a valid period that “the display area of the specific image is not reduced as the time elapses” is valid, the mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. It is desirable to display an image as a moving image that evolves at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time in which the operation acceptance is allowed based on how much the moving image by the mock image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as the operation means. There is a case in which a valid period (effect reception period) in which operation reception for the second operation means is allowed is generated, and a case in which an effective period (effect reception period) in which operation reception for the second operation means is allowed is generated. In the valid period during which the operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, the first simulation image simulating the first operation means is displayed, and during the valid period during which the operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted, the second operation means is activated. The imitated second imitation image is displayed. In addition, the validity period during which the operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted and the validity period during which the operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted are represented by a jackpot expectation degree (a post-operation effect) suggested when the operation is accepted. (The rate at which a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is executed) is made different. In addition to the valid period in which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted (effect reception period), the valid period in which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted (effect reception period), and a valid period different from these. Further, it may be generated. In this regard, when an operation is received during an effective period (for example, an effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted) on the side where the jackpot expectation is higher, a change (display change or display change) corresponding to the operation reception is made. It is desirable that the mock image (the second mock image) is displayed without being hidden when execution of at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as lamp light emission, is started.

  Thereby, in addition to the case where the operation is received in the situation as shown in FIG. 183 (f) described above, for example, an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). Nevertheless, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is kept in the operating state (the operation is performed). Even if the operation is performed on the second operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) and the operation is received, the player is made to recognize that the effect has been properly received. Will be able to do it.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) of a mimic image before and after a change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception occurs. Transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and may be in a state where the mimic image is difficult to visually recognize by other images. In the operation reception, it is determined which operation means was the operation target. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, at least at the time when execution of a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change or lamp emission) is started, It is desirable that the display state of the mimic image is maintained as it was before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see by another image. Therefore, if the mimic image is dynamically displayed during the valid period during which operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes corresponding to the operation reception (a change caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or a lamp emission). It is desirable to continue the dynamic display even at the time when the execution is started. In order to make the player recognize that the effect has been properly received, a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation received by the operation of the player is performed within the first validity period. When the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs, the mimic image (first mimic image) is not displayed in a state where the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs, and a change (display change, , Lamp emission, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, “the determination means for performing the determination, the production means for performing an effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and the determination means based on the predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means. And a specific operation receiving portion (an operation button 410 that can be displaced between a normal position and a pressed position) that can be displaced between a first position and a second position. ), A first detection unit capable of detecting a specific operation (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit. A second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, a sword placing operation) by the player with respect to (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), and (a post-operation effect generated when an effect is received). (Different types) A plurality of effect reception periods including a first effect reception period and a second effect reception period are prepared. In the first effect reception period, a specific simulation image imitating the specific operation receiving unit is displayed. In the second effect receiving period, a special simulation image simulating the special operation receiving unit is displayed, and the effect is received by the detection by the second detecting unit. Although a special simulation image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed during the second effect receiving period, the specific operation receiving portion is moved by the specific operation by the player. In the case where the specific operation is displaced from the first position to the second position, even if the special operation is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving portion is maintained at the second position, the special operation is performed by the detection by the second detection portion. Reception is performed, and thus with the arrangement such "effect after the operation on the basis of the accepted output 該演 can be performed.

  In such a configuration, even if the special operation is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving portion is maintained at the second position, the effect is received by the detection by the second detection portion, At the time when the production is started after the operation based on the production reception, the special simulation image that simulates the special operation receiving unit is not displayed and is kept displayed, so that it is not the side that operated by mistake, This allows the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an appropriate operation.

  When the special simulation image is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect is started to be executed in the displayed mode. If the effect is received without such an erroneous operation being performed, the mimic image may be kept displayed without being hidden at the time when the effect is started after the operation, or after the operation. The mimic image may be hidden at the time when the effect is started.

  Incidentally, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is provided to the special operation receiving unit is lower than that of the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is provided to the specific operation receiving unit. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of the operation error. Therefore, when the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit occurs, it is suggested that the effect reception is permitted or the effect reception is permitted. It is desirable to output an acceptable sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect reception period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is less likely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that, when the sound starts to be output, an acceptable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is allocated). A sound in a state where an allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output has been started within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed and has entered the state in which the effect reception is permitted, or the output before the set time in which the effect reception is allowed is started. , Or to indicate that the effect reception is permitted, and for example, is output as an effect sound such as “Pikeen”.

  However, even when the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit occurs, it is suggested that the effect reception is permitted or the effect reception is permitted. May be output. In this case, however, it is desirable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the acceptable sound be different between the case where the first effect accepting period occurs and the case where the second effect accepting period occurs. Alternatively, in the first effect reception period, even if an effect is received while the acceptable sound is being output, the acceptable sound in the output state is continued without being terminated. In the above, when an effect reception is performed while the acceptable sound is being output, it is desirable to end the acceptable sound in the output state in the middle. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period will occur, or the operation for the specific operation receiving unit and the special operation receiving period It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operations on the unit has been received.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying the gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is reduced with time. (For example, finally, the display area is set to “0”) to generate a small gauge valid period (effect receiving period) indicating the remaining time in which operation reception is allowed, and A display in which a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) is displayed, and then the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) is reduced with time (for example, the display area is finally set to “0”). ), A large gauge valid period (effect receiving period) indicating the remaining time in which operation reception is allowed is generated. The small gauge validity period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge validity period in which the large gauge image is displayed are based on the jackpot expectation level suggested when the operation is accepted (only during the big hit as a post-operation effect). The rate at which the mode that does not appear is executed is made different (for example, the expectation of the big hit is higher in the large gauge valid period). In addition to the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period, a valid period different from these may be further generated. The small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period may provide an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may provide an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

  In this regard, when an operation is received during the large gauge valid period, a change (at least one of a change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is started at the time when execution is started. It is desirable that the large gauge image is displayed without being hidden. Also, at the time when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as the display change and the lamp emission) is started to be executed, the large gauge image becomes smaller as time elapses. It is desirable that the display be continued without being terminated. As a result, while the large gauge image was displayed, there was a sense of security that a large amount of remaining time appeared to remain, but after the operation was received, it was determined whether the operation was properly received. The user can be made to feel a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to appropriately maintain a feeling of tension.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) of the gauge image before and after the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) according to the operation reception occurs. Transmittance etc.) are not necessarily the same, and the gauge image may not be easily recognized by another image. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, at least when a change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp emission) is started, the operation is performed. It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained as it was before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see by another image. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of a change caused by an after-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) occurs due to an operation performed by the player during the small gauge valid period, the change is performed. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden in a state where a display change or lamp emission has occurred, or the gauge image (large gauge image) may be used as in the case of the large gauge valid period described above. ) May be changed to a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) according to the operation reception in a state in which this is displayed without displaying it.

  In addition, when the large gauge valid period occurs, it is desirable to output an acceptable sound indicating that the effect has been accepted or that the effect has been accepted. . As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge valid period has occurred, and the sense of security until the operation is accepted can be further emphasized. The "acceptable sound" means that, when the sound starts to be output, an acceptable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is allocated). A sound in a state where an allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output has been started within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed and has entered the state in which the effect reception is permitted, or the output before the set time in which the effect reception is allowed is started. , Or to indicate that the effect reception is permitted, and for example, is output as an effect sound such as “Pikeen”.

  However, even when the small gauge valid period occurs, a reception allowable sound may be output to indicate that the effect has been accepted or that the effect has been accepted. However, in this case, it is preferable that the mode (tone color, etc.) of the acceptable sound is made different between when the small gauge valid period occurs and when the large gauge valid period occurs. Or, in the small gauge valid period, even if the effect is received while the acceptable sound is being output, the received acceptable sound in the output state is continued without ending, but in the large gauge valid period, If an effect is received while the acceptable sound is being output, it is desirable to end the acceptable sound in the output state halfway. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp which of the valid period of the small gauge and the valid period of the large gauge occurs. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation receptions has been performed during the period.

  The large-gauge image and the small-gauge image may not only differ in size but also in the form itself (for example, an image having no similarity).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or described later), during the period in which the operation reception is permitted, a dynamic image is drawn so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving unit is displaced. It is what is displayed. In this regard, when the change according to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) is started to be executed, the mimic image is not displayed but remains displayed. In this case, the dynamic display of the mimic image may be continued without being terminated.

  Further, the mimic image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated mime image described later in which they are integrated.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each effect example to be described later, “operation reception” means, in addition to detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving portion with a touch sensor. An operation may be accepted or an operation may be accepted by detecting a movement of a player in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

  Further, when an effect for generating an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any one of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as an “operation effect”, the operation effect is not related to this. May be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, or the like) having no character. However, in this case, if the “operational effect” is executed but “another specific effect not related to this” is not executed, then the “operational effect” and “another It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic production function to be performed is higher than that in a production situation where “specific production” is performed in parallel. In other words, when the “operation-related effect” and “another specific effect not related to this” are in parallel, the effect is not accepted in the “operation-related effect” and the post-operation effect is not executed. Also, since "another specific effect not related to this" is in the execution state, the decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed, while "operational effect" is executed but "another effect not related to this In the production situation where "specific production" is not executed, if there is a case where the production is not accepted in the "operational production" and the production is not executed after the operation, there will be a situation where no production is executed Therefore, it is inevitable that the entertainment interest will decline. Therefore, if the “operational effect” is executed but “another specific effect not related to this” is not executed, the “operational effect” and “another specific effect not related to this By making the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions higher than when the production is in a production situation in which the production is performed in parallel, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest when the operation-related production occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, an indication effect performed before the effect reception period occurs or an effect in which the operation means to be operated operates is performed as an “operation-related effect” or an effect related thereto. It can be said that. In addition, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. Will be able to In this case, it is desirable to execute the effect as an effect that is ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, assuming that the effect occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic production function functions in a high ratio, and it is possible to provide the production with a sense of tension. In this regard, in the case where “another specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, an indication effect), the “another specific effect” is performed a plurality of times within one symbol change. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the effect reception period does not occur, so if the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning when "another specific effect" is executed is high Thus, it is possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not a production acceptance period will occur.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations, Until the 1000th loss variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there are cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function and cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not made to function. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed). Then, when the loss variation of the 1000th time) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) which has reached the specific value, the operation opportunity (any one of the plurality of operation means) is given to the operation means (regardless of the result of the jackpot determination). Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player during the effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function is operated and the player performs an operation during the effect reception period. The same process as that performed at the time of performing the post-operation effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the losing fluctuation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the losing fluctuation is continuously executed. Did not produce any results despite the prompting of the pachinko machine. Even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions automatically, even if there is no operation by the player. Since it is realized as an effect to make the game entertain, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment. In this case, during the effect accepting period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the execution is executed. A special display image (for example, different from a display image (for example, “Operating”) that appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss variation up to 999) "If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf" etc.) is desirable. Further, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached the specific value is consumed, the symbol variation is performed each time the symbol variation is consumed until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In (effect pattern), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is troublesome, I will act on your behalf "), and even if there is no operation by the player during the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function will function and it will respond to the production reception It is desirable to execute a process for always producing an effect after the operation.

  Note that when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed. The number of remaining fluctuations up to the 1000th loss fluctuation may be displayed.

  In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested until the number of executions reaches a specific value. Both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operating means can be generated, but in the symbol fluctuation when the loss fluctuation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value, Alternatively, the effect may be developed so that only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side does not occur. According to such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of the effect acceptance period from having an expectation of itself. Will be able to gain. However, this production example says, "In spite of the fact that the loss fluctuation has been continuously executed, there has been no achievements despite prompting the player to operate each time the production acceptance period occurs. As if it felt the responsibility to date, even if there was no operation by the player, in view of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect for which the automatic effect function always functions, the transient In order not to have any further expectation, an effect acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001) should not be generated.

  Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The second operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) of the plurality of operation means can be generated both when it is not operated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In the second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user, the event cannot occur when the control is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and to increase the effect when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is set. Can be suitably maintained.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
Displaying a mimic image of the operating means (operating object suggesting image indicating the operating means to be operated) (mimic image displaying means);
-If an operation is performed by the player while the mock image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means);
・ After the production acceptance period, if a specific timing arrives without operation by the player while the mock image is displayed, the production after operation can be executed without receiving the operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the mimic image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation) at which the post-operation effect is executed in the “advantageous mode for the player” when the effect is received is different. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving unit and the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving unit. It is possible to generate a post-operation effect in the above.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern from the player's side that the automatically generated effect after the operation cannot be grasped to which operation means. Therefore, in the case where the above-described automatic effect function is caused to function and an effect after operation is generated, first, a mimic image (operation object suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the effect after operation is generated in a state where the mimic image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, and the like) of the operation object suggestion image is not necessarily the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated. What is necessary is to be able to recognize which of the above is even in the state where the effect has occurred after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect occurs due to the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic operation may be performed. Similarly to the case where the effect function is performed, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area in which the mimic image is displayed, or may be light-emitting by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body. May be executed as an operation based on.

  In this case, if the mock image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the expected degree (mim image indicated during the effect reception period, even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation, is performed. Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The mimic image that is continuously displayed in this manner is hidden after the effect after the operation has occurred. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time since the first side production reception period has occurred. In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when different times have elapsed, the time from the execution of the post-operation production to the hiding of the mimic image should be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if it is not, by confirming the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the mimic image, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, the big hit is determined by the big hit determination. May be different from each other.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are provided during the effect reception period. One of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect is always received (the automatic effect function is always functioning) and the effect is performed after the operation corresponding to the effect reception. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, an effect reception (automatic effect function is performed) is performed, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. And directing Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. In other words, if a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the player forgets to operate, a decline in game entertainment due to the inability to confirm the post-operation effect is unavoidable, When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the player forgets to operate the game, it is assumed that the gaming interest does not decrease so much. Therefore, a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. If the player forgets to operate the game at any time, the automatic presentation function must be activated during the presentation acceptance period to avoid a decrease in the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate the game. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, play the game so that you do not forget to operate by making the automatic production function not always function within the production acceptance period And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expected display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) is displayed. You may not be able to appear. Further, during the effect reception period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

  In each of the characteristic techniques described below, other examples relating to the automatic button effect state may be appropriately applied and executed.

[Expectation suggestion by automatic staging function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect accepting period (in the case of applying the above-described alternative example, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the effect is not performed. A process (automatic production function) for causing the same change as when the operation is performed can be made executable. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted. The effect pattern (automatic effect function) that does not execute the effect for the effect may be generated. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received within the effect reception period during the effect reception period, when the automatic effect function does not function, the symbol variation is more than when the automatic effect function functions. In the above, a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the expectation degree (ratio) in which the big hit symbol appears is reduced. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to the symbol change in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "after the operation itself, which could have been confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, the effect itself cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that directing disadvantages may occur, a novel directing effect that allows the player to exercise directing selections such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the directing reception period" As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be accepted. The above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 166 to 186) regarding whether a period occurs or whether a period during which the operation of another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be performed is generated. See)). In this regard, in the automatic button production state, during the production reception period that occurs in response to such specific operation-related productions, compared to the production reception period that occurs when the specific operation-related productions are not executed, these productions are performed. A process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced can be executed so that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function when the operation (effect reception) is not performed within the reception period is increased. At this time, the rate at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as an effect indicating that the above-described automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it is possible to perform the game, it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 is more than when the operation result indicates that the operation button 410 is provided with the operation opportunity. It is set so that the expectation degree of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol change in the execution state becomes higher when it is indicated that the symbol is given. However, in the automatic button production state, when the operation (production reception) is not performed within the production reception period generated corresponding to the specific operation-related production, the ratio of the above-described automatic production function to function is determined by the operation button 410. It is more preferable to set the same ratio when the operation opportunity is indicated to be provided and when the operation opportunity is indicated to the sword decoration 5001.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect state (indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) having a relatively low expectation appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio at which the above-described automatic production function functions is not changed by this (the production result of the specific operation-related production), the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic production function will function should be reduced. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by the effects of each other are performed in parallel, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189.

  FIG. 187 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button effect button”). "Setting in progress") appears continuously.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 187 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which an operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts an operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is specified decoration member SDY (draper). Etc.), and in a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Where the degree of expectation is relatively low, “heat” which is relatively high in the degree of expectation, etc.) in the display area. Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect accepting period is ended when the effect is accepted without exhausting the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the specific effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the ratio of 60% Thus, the above-described automatic production function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-mentioned automatic production function did not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the operation on the operation button 410 was not received within the specific production reception period. As a result, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if the effect reception is performed is not performed. Then, after this, the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), even though the operation on the operation button 410 was not performed within the specific effect reception period. Then, after the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, the post-operation effect having the same content as when the effect is received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception during the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect is generated in response to an operation performed during a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the post-operation effect is generated due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the form displayed in the display area is the same as each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (e), the effect is developed in a form in which the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific effect receiving period has occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific effect reception period is generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “the above-described automatic effect function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination when performing the symbol variation, and as a result, it is 60% during the specific effect reception period. , The automatic effect function does not function, and the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the relevant selection, "the effect reception in which the above-described automatic effect function functions. Period) or an `` effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function '' will be generated, and if a large hit is selected as a result of the jackpot determination, a selection table for the lost selection is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions" or "an effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% during the specific effect reception period, and the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, if the specific effect reception period is to be generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”, the “ Which of these periods should be generated so that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when it is generated as `` the effect reception period when the automatic effect function does not function '' Is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination.

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function is activated when a production reception period in which it is determined that a high expectation aspect (such as “hot heat!”) Appears as a post-operation production when the production is received. When the effect is accepted, the effect is automatically produced when an effect accepting period is determined in which it is determined that when the effect is accepted, a mode with a low degree of expectation (such as “chance!”) Appears as an after-operation effect. The ratio at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, it is determined whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change in the running state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "after the operation itself, which could have been confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, the effect itself cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that directing disadvantages may occur, a novel directing effect that allows the player to exercise directing selections such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the directing reception period" As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), even when the automatic production function is activated when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production acceptance period, the post-operation production is expected. Since a mode with a low degree (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic staging function is performed, the degree of expectation is relatively high, Such continuous suggestions of the degree of expectation (suggestions due to the functioning of the automatic staging function, suggestions according to the mode of the staging after the operation) will realize stunning staging characteristics, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest in the game. Will be as expected.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production reception period, the production reception is not performed. In this case, there is a possibility that a high expectation aspect has appeared in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, so that it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 187 (c) (a situation where the automatic production function did not function and the production did not appear after the operation) appeared, the production situation (automatic production function shown in FIG. 187 (d)) appeared. Has worked, but it is desirable that the degree of expectation is lower than when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appears as an effect after the operation).

  FIGS. 188 and 189 illustrate an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button effect state. Specific examples are shown.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is three, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled). , "Auto button setting") appears continuously.

  FIG. 188 (b) shows the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 (the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ illustrated in FIG. 188 (a). (May be an effect) indicates an effect state in which the effect is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. , A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is being performed, an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 to keep it secret. . However, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation, An effect state indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is in a state to be operated appears as a second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the sword decorations 5001 with the highest operation operability is given is indicated.

  FIG. 188 (c) shows that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 is in a state where the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation. Shows that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for urging the operation of the operation button 410 (here, “press”, etc.) A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which an operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts an operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c), the specific decoration member SDY (such as a hand-painted material) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation or “heat” with a relatively high expectation) in the display area that has a different degree of expectation during the directing operation. Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect accepting period is ended when the effect is accepted without exhausting the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. Does not function, and the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate An operation may not be possible. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect accepting period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 188 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. As compared to the reception period (refer to FIG. 187 (b)), the effect in the symbol fluctuation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function to be operated when there is no operation (effect reception) during the effect reception period is increased. Can be executed. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration can be suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “an appropriate operation cannot be performed during the effect reception period, and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. Interesting as to which of the bodies 5001 is activated can be provided through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the degree of expectation based on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect accepting period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed after execution. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the effect ratio of the automatic effect function is increasing is high (here, "Auto button high accuracy") It appears to appear.

  When the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 188 (d), it is determined that the effect on the operation button 410 has not been received within the effect acceptance period. As long as the effect reception has been performed, the post-operation effect that would have occurred is not executed. Then, after this, the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect reception period occurs. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function does not function. 187, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not performed), the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is made higher than in the case where the user does not do so.

  In addition, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 80%, the production is performed as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the effect was received by the operation performed during the reception period is performed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception during the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect is generated in response to an operation performed during a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the post-operation effect is generated due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the form displayed in the display area is the same as each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the effect is developed in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific effect reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 189 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration 5001 should be operated as a second effect with relatively high expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b). Shows that an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ A character display such as "Pause the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) are displayed. Note that, at this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operating button 410, and also moves the sword decoration 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Operation is allowed.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was performed is performed. However, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (g), an operation on the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). Out of a plurality of modes with different expectations (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation or “hot heat!” With a relatively high expectation) The ratio of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the remaining time is consumed during the specific effect reception period. 188 (c) is the same as in the case of the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 189 (g) (the effect reception did not occur. In the case, the effect reception is generated in the effect condition shown in FIG. 188 (c) even though the effect condition is higher than expected when the effect condition shown in FIG. 188 (c) occurs. As in the case where the automatic rendering function is not performed, the automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation (FIG. 188). (See (c)), the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions is not changed by this (the production result of the specific operation-related production), so that the above-mentioned automatic production function It is possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the function will function. As described above, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects are performed in parallel, so that an unfavorable effect is produced in one of the effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception is not performed), the above-described automatic production function is activated. In this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

  When the above-described automatic staging function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 189 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 has not been stood in the staging period. However, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if the effect reception has been performed is not executed. Then, after this, the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect reception period occurs. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function functions. 187 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. It is desirable to make the expectation higher than in the case where it did not work.

  In addition, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as illustrated in FIG. 189 (i), although the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed during the effect reception period, The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation was received and the effect was received during the effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception during the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation performed during the effect reception period. In both cases, where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same as each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (j), the effect is advanced in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect has occurred.

  The effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ Is generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function, as in the case of the effect reception period in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 187 (b)). At the time of execution, a decision (selection) is made based on the result of the jackpot determination. As a result, during the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, the above-described automatic effect function is activated at a rate of 20%. In other words, the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the relevant selection, "the effect reception in which the above-described automatic effect function functions. Period) or an `` effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function '' will be generated, and if a large hit is selected as a result of the jackpot determination, a selection table for the lost selection is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions" or "an effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, in the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)), the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and is 80%. , The above-described automatic effect function functions.

  Similarly, an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) is also generated as "an effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions". In such a case, the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when the symbol change is stopped, as compared to a case where the above-described automatic effect function does not function. Which of these periods is to be determined (selected) based on the result of the above jackpot determination.

  Note that the post-operation effect occurs in the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) and without the specific operation-related effect being executed. The effect may be executed as a different effect from the effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)). However, even in the case of executing as a different effect, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  The decorative sword 5001 used in the effect example shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be the decorative sword 5001 of the type shown in FIG. Also, in FIGS. 188 and 189, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 is described. The “effect using functions” may be applied to any of the specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 166 to 186.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect accepting period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button production state from being received within the state, the "setting operation to the automatic button production state is not accepted" state is not performed before the production reception period occurs. , It is desirable to generate at least from the state of the effect shown in FIG. 188 (b) (the effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started) and to continue the effect until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform an operation for setting to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has started, the automatic button effect state is not accepted. Can be provided for only those who are playing games continuously while maintaining the `` automatic production function '', and the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button production state It will be able to provide directing value for doing.

  Also, an effect reception period during which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 187 (b)), and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g)) )), A first display mode (for example, a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) or a second display mode (for example, a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration) Image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "effect reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function functions" occurs compared to when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to make the ratio in

  Also, an effect reception period during which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 187 (b)), and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g)) )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the “automatic effect described above” is displayed. The effect accepting period in which the function functions "may always be in a state of occurring.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is not possible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which should have been able to be confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. Provide the decision material on whether to use the staging selection such as "Do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the staging acceptance period" given the risk that the staging of the staging may occur. Can be expected, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation-related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 166 to 186, FIGS. 188, and 189. Is desirably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect reception period (eg, FIG. 187 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate Although it may happen that operations cannot be performed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation by giving the production acceptance period corresponding to "specific operation-related production" a long time. Will be expected.

  In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 188 and 189, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic production function to be set is relatively high in the production reception period corresponding to “specific operation-related production”. For example, it is possible to set the effect reception period to have a longer time than the effect reception period in which the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, whether or not the automatic effect function functions. It can be said that this is desirable in order to maintain the performance of the game for a longer time and to improve the entertainment interest of the game. Note that, in this case, the timing at which the automatic production function functions is performed when the first time has elapsed since the generation of the production period during the production acceptance period in which the “specific operation-related production” is not performed. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, it is possible to make it come when a second time longer than the first time has elapsed after the occurrence of the period, the automatic effect function It is important to maintain the performance of whether or not the function is longer.

  In addition, in the effect reception period in which the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed and the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the time from the start to the end of the period. Even if it is made different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge is reduced. It is desirable to only vary the speed. In other words, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect” occurs, the period continues for the same time as the effect reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related effect”. As it can be made to think that the automatic production function is functioning, it is possible to appropriately maintain the production performance as to whether or not the automatic production function works Will be able to do that.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189, the first effect receiving period (the effect receiving period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Occurs, and even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated during the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although not necessarily executed, in the effect accepting period that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, a second display that occurs without executing the specific display effect is performed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first effect reception period rather than the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this regard, as such an automatic button effect state, the ratio (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) at which the automatic effect function functions differs depending on the type of the effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is referred to as a “first automatic button effect state”, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions differs according to the type of the effect reception period (“50% −50%”, “10%”). % -90% ") so that the automatic production function always functions regardless of the type of the" second automatic button production state "or the type of the production acceptance period when the production acceptance period occurs. The third automatic button effect state may be further prepared, and may be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, the normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always performed in the automatic button effect state (first automatic button effect state, second automatic button effect state, third automatic button effect state). Or an effect may be executed.

  The “type of effect reception period” described above may mean that the type of post-operation effect generated when an operation is received is different. For example, in the first automatic button effect state, the “first effect accepting period for generating an effect after the operation of the conversation notice” and the “second effect accepting period for generating the effect after the cut-in operation” are the same. When the operation of the operating means is not received within the effect reception period of, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is not generated (although the automatic reception is not performed), but "after the operation of operating the movable body A" In the "third effect reception period in which an effect is generated," when an operation on the operation means is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is generated (automatic reception is performed). It will be. On the other hand, in the "second automatic button effect state (second effect state)" in which automatic reception is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button effect state (first effect state)", "conversation notice" In the first effect reception period during which the effect is generated after the operation, the same post-operation effect as when the operation to the operating means is not received during the effect reception period is not generated (automatic reception). However, these effects are not accepted in the “second effect reception period for generating an effect after the cut-in operation” and the “third effect reception period for generating an after-operation effect for operating the movable body A”. When an operation to the operation means is not received within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is generated (automatic reception is performed). However, any of a plurality of effect reception periods including the first effect reception period (conversation notice type), the second effect reception period (cut-in type), and the third effect reception period (movable body A type) occurs. Even if the operation is not received, the operation after the operation is not accepted, the "normal production state" that does not cause the same post-operation production as when the operation is received shall not be prepared and set to this. Will not be able to.

  That is, in this case, "the operating means operable by the player, the determining means for making a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the game based on a predetermined result being obtained by the determination by the determining means. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a person, and a production state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of production states, and as an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means, A plurality of effect reception periods in which the types of post-operation effects that occur when an operation is received are prepared, and in the plurality of effect states, when any one of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs, According to the type of the effect reception period that has occurred, when the operation after the operation unit is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the reception is performed is generated, and A first effect state in which both the effect is not generated after the operation and when the same effect is not generated, and when any one of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs, the type of the effect reception period that has occurred Accordingly, when the operation after the operation is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the reception is performed is generated, and when the operation after the reception is performed, the same post-operation effect as when the reception is performed is performed. There is both the case where it does not occur and the case where it does not occur, but the likelihood of occurrence of the same post-operation effect includes at least a second effect state different from the first effect state, and any one of the plurality of effect accepting periods Even if the occurrence occurs, when the operation of the operating means is not received, the effect state in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is not generated is included. Ikoto and thus provided as a game machine, "characterized by.

  Also, the distribution rate may be set to either 0% or 100% according to the type of the effect reception period and the type of the effect state.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be modified as described below. That is, when the automatic effect function functions during the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing (first time) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred. At the timing within the effect reception period), the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the first effect reception period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto. However, in the case where the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing (first time) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred. The automatic effect function described above does not function at the timing within the first effect reception period), and then the first effect reception period ends without the post-operation effect being executed (the after-operation effect is not executed thereafter). ). On the other hand, when the automatic production function functions in the second production reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second production reception period or At the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function functions, and the second effect reception period or the third effect is activated. The effect reception period is ended and a post-operation effect corresponding to the end is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect reception period or The automatic effect function described above does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and after that, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period without performing the operation after the operation. Ends the effect acceptance period (the effect after the operation is not executed thereafter).

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage. Even if it does not function, the player has enough time to allow the effect to be received by the player's own operation before the end of the first effect reception period. You will be able to play games with your mind. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the function of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and Since there is not much time left for the player to operate himself when it does not function, it is necessary to provide a game with a sense of tension even though the automatic staging function functions at a high rate. Will be able to

  In the above-described modified example, in the first effect reception period, the case where the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (the timing within the first effect reception period) and the case where the automatic effect function does not function However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second effect reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic staging function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic staging function does not function (by any kind of trouble), the time for the player himself to operate Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  In addition to the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, in other effect examples, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be constantly controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Also, the setting itself to the automatic button effect state may not be performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced according to the player's own operation (to end the automatic button effect state) Aspirations). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when an effect reception period for a specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the effect reception is performed. A process for ending the automatic button effect state by performing only one operation on the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is to be given within the period, and the operation in response to the effect reception An effect (a process that may cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button production state and to progress the production depending on the player's own operation occurs within the production acceptance period, switching of the production mode by avoiding the loss of operation opportunity Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is released when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 are not operated when the effect reception period is not generated. An operation for releasing the setting is permitted only for the button 410. On the other hand, in a state where the effect reception period has occurred, if an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) to which the operation opportunity is to be given during the effect reception period. Then, the process of terminating the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (the process that may cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state in which the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred, the operation is not received, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players play the game using a selfish game technique such as "operate and develop the effect only when you like while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode)". It can be assumed that some wish to do so. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is further provided in the door frame 3. When the operation on the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration 5001) is performed during the effect reception period for the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect A process for ending the state (specific production state) and a process that may cause a change in the production are respectively performed (operation unified control in the automatic button production state), but are controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state). If the operation on the special operation means is performed during the effect reception period for the specific effect while Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where the automatic button effect state is to be ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation on the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is performed within the effect reception period. If the user wants to rarely perform the operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the user may perform an operation on the special operation means within the effect reception period. Only by appropriately using the operation means as described above, a game desired by the player can be realized.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192.

  FIG. 190 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows a state in which the effect reception period in which the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is received while the reach state is formed occurs in the effect situation being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button effect button”). "Setting in progress") appears continuously.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, also during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a lower display is shown). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which an operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts an operation on the operation button 410. However, actually, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH”) 1410 in which no change occurs are allowed.

  FIGS. 190 (b) to 190 (d) show that although the operation of the operation button 410 was not performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 7 shows a state in which a post-operation effect having the same contents as when an operation is performed and an effect is received is performed. At the time when the above-described automatic effect function is activated, the effect accepting period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as “PUSH” in the figure) Any operation opportunity for the (operated button) 1410 will be lost.

  That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any of the production results in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (d)) having different degrees of expectation can be obtained. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. Smoke image). After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, the effect image (in this case, the fortune of "Kichi") indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. When the effect progresses to a high effect effect, as shown in FIG. 190 (d), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 190 (b) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (in this case, a fortune of "Nakayoshi") indicating that the effect result is an effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed.

  Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d) appears as a basic effect progression when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-described automatic effect function 190 (b) to 190 (d)), the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless an operation is performed by the player. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced by the player's own operation (automatic button effect state (A desire to end). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for terminating the automatic button production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs an operation on the operation button 410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190A, it is detected that the operation has been performed. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position, a process of ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect in response to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in button production state). At the time when the effect on the operation button 410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect function can no longer function, and special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 described as “PUSH” in the figure) is also lost.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 191 (e), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed. First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as the post-operation effect according to the fact. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 191 (f), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, the effect image (in this case, the fortune of "Kichi") indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. When the effect progresses to a high effect result, as shown in FIG. 191 (g), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 191 (e) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (in this case, a fortune of "Nakayoshi") indicating that the effect result is an effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed.

  However, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190A, the process of ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191 (e) to (g), after the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The displayed message (here, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190A, the process of terminating the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestive display (here, “auto button release”) appears (see FIG. 191 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also special operation means in which no change occurs (in the figure, “PUSH” is described) Button 1414). Then, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 performs the operation by itself only when desired (without switching the production mode) while maintaining the automatic button production state. As described above, it is provided to enable a selfish game technique such as "produce an effect."

  Therefore, even when an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 192 (h). First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as an after-operation effect in response to the effect being received within the effect reception period. After that, when the production progresses to a production result having a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, the fortune of "Kichi") indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed. When the effect progresses to a higher effect result, as shown in FIG. 192 (j), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (in this case, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating that the effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation is displayed. Note that at the point when the operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect The function cannot be performed, and the opportunity for operating the operation button 410 is also lost.

  However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the automatic button effect state based on the operation Is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192 (h) to (j), even after the effect on the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (here, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in the effect reception period generated in FIG. A special operation that cannot appear when the operation is performed, when the above-described automatic staging function functions (FIG. 190B), or when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 191E). Directing can appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 192 (j), the above-described automatic effect function functioned on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (effect after operation) appearing in the case (FIG. 190 (b)) or when the operation of the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 191 (e)), an effect display that shines brilliantly is additionally displayed. I am trying to. In place of the brilliant effect display, an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be additionally implemented.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect acceptance period related to the fortune telling effect, the effect change content When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the production acceptance period for the fortune production. The content of the effect change produced in the case will be different from each other. Then, in this case, when the above-described special effect (here, a brilliant effect display) appears, “the operation of the operation means is performed and the effect after the operation according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is After the operation, the user can recognize that the setting is not canceled and the state is maintained, while enjoying the effect after the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), even when an effect image (here, a fortune of “Yoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed, special The effect (here, a brilliant effect display) can appear.

  Also, for such special effects (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly), based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special effects are made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effects at a predetermined ratio. When an effect is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol change is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is useful for the player to perform an operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH”) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 It is feared that the operation for the will not be performed. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH”) 1410 in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the special effect (here, it shines brilliantly) When the effect display does not appear, any effect result appears by performing an operation on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) or by operating the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol in the symbol change is lower than in the case of the symbol change.

  According to such a configuration, the operation on the “special operation means (the button described as“ PUSH ”in the figure) 1410 causes the“ operation on the operation means to be performed and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears. In order to create `` the state in which the automatic button production state is not canceled and continues to be set '', there is a staging effect such as `` It can be suggested that the rate of appearance of big hit symbols due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low '' Since there is a risk to be obtained, it is expected that the entertainment interest can be appropriately maintained by causing the player to exercise such a staging selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), although the same effect form as the example shown in FIG. 191 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect disadvantages are produced. In this situation, it is possible to recognize that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol change is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 191 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the situation is low in the degree of expectation, the effect form is shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 191 (f). By making them the same as in the case described above, a third party who does not operate the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in an effect situation in which directive selection has failed. This makes it difficult to grasp the game entertainment, and thereby it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game will be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regardless of which staging effect is selected within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a), FIG. 190 (b) and FIG. e), a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as shown in FIG. 192 (h) and the like, but the specific effect image is relatively displayed as the post-operation effect. The effect may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the production mode with a high degree of expectation (in this case, the fortune of “Nakayoshi”) appears, or in which the special application appears at a different rate.

  In addition, even if any staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a), this is omitted without displaying a particular staging image, and staging modes having different degrees of expectation. (Here, the fortune of “yoshi” or “nakayoshi”) may directly appear as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 192 (i)) in which the production selection has failed appears, production modes with different degrees of expectation ( Here, it is desirable to display a specific effect image (in this case, a smoke image due to an explosion) first when any one of “yoshi” or “nakayoshi” appears as an effect after operation.

  In addition, an effect indicating the degree of expectation can be performed even during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), so that it is possible to determine whether to take the above-described effect risk. You may.

  Further, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button effect state when the state is in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, another operation means that has already been prepared may be used.

  In the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), whether a period during which an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be effect-received occurs, Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) regarding whether a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be performed is generated. May be generated as a result of the execution.

  Further, during the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is also given. A reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH”) 1410 in the drawing may be included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect described above (see FIGS. 166 to 186) is lower than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the symbol change appears before the symbol fluctuation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the rate at which the specific operation-related effects described above (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appear depends on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Automatic stabilization process]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which of the operation means are operated" The production acceptance period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, and any operation means within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, whether to activate the automatic production function for any of the plurality of operation means (Which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change to the production as when the production was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" When the production acceptance period of "occurs, it is not" whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear "but" whether there is a possibility that a production result with a lower expectation will appear " Processing that activates the automatic production function for an operation means different from the “operation means that can generate a production that may produce a production result with a lower degree of expectation” (stable automatic production Process) is executable.

  According to such a configuration, among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when an effect is received for any of the plurality of operation means within the special effect reception period, the effect mode with the lowest expectation is: When the automatic production function is functioning, it will not be possible to appear. It can be avoided suitably.

  Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195.

  First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect acceptance period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and a normal effect state is set. In FIG. 193 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holdings is 3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. In the effect state being performed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 under the reach state. An effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is to be started indicates an effect state. In this effect situation, although both the effect reception for the operation button 410 and the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 have not yet been activated, the operation button 410 and the knife The operation button 410 is in a light-emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the sword-drawing position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Further, on effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

  FIG. 193 (b) shows a special effect reception period (one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword putting operation of the sword decoration 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 193 (a). This shows an effect situation in which an effect reception period which can be selected by the user) has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) and the operation buttons on the effect display device 1600 that appeared from the time of the effect condition shown in FIG. While the states of the sword decoration body 4101 and the sword decoration body 5001 are maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed). A corresponding downward arrow and a bar indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period are displayed.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 193 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “wave” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Have been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a special mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means are capable of accepting the effect. In addition, the exclusive mark may not be displayed when both of the two operation means are capable of accepting the effect. For example, even though both the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, the message “Mimicking the operation button 410 is not displayed and the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. Displaying a mimicked image may be performed "or" Displaying a mimicked image of the operation button 410 and not displaying a mimicked image of the sword decoration 5001 "may be performed.

  That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as the post-button operation effect. After the fact that the action has been performed is displayed (FIG. 193 (c)), as a production result, it is suggested that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the expectation and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the expectation. 193 (d) and FIG. 193 (e) in which one of “100 defeats” appears based on the result of the big hit determination. For example, in the effect after the button side operation when the big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) at a rate of “60%”. 193 (d) appears at a rate of “60%”, and a rate of “40%” Thus, it is possible to make the effect form shown in FIG. 193 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, the effect after the sword decoration 5001 is first displayed as the post-sword-side operation effect ( FIG. 194 (f)), as the production results suggesting that the lower the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the higher the number of defeats, the higher the expectation, the results of the “one-shot defeat”, “100 defeat”, and “ An effect (FIGS. 194 (g) to 194 (i)) in which one of "777 body defeats" appears based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the effect after the sword-side operation when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and FIG. 194 (h) at a rate of “50%”. The effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the effect after the sword-side operation when a jackpot is lost is “40%”. 194 (g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 194 (h) appears at a rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 194 (i) appears at a rate of “0%”. It is possible for aspects to appear.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, regardless of which of the effect after the button-side operation and the effect after the sword-side operation is performed, the effect mode in which the number of defeats is small. Has a lower degree of expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. In the case where the number of defeats is the same effect mode (for example, the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 193 (e), the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 194 (h), the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 195 (e) described later). Although the degree of expectation may be different, it is desirable to make them the same.

  In such a configuration, a special effect reception period in which the effect reception is permitted for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) is generated, and the special effect reception period is generated. Can operate different operation effects (effects after button-side operation, effects after sword-side operation) depending on the type of operation means operated on the side that was operated during the effect reception period. It is possible to improve the monotonous directing effect as much as possible, and to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In particular, operating the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) does not cause the same degree of expectation to be indicated, but the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means). Only when the second operation means is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 194 (g)) which indicates that a big hit symbol is unlikely to appear in the symbol change (symbol change in the execution state). Since it is possible to appear the effect mode of “defeat one body”, it is desired to see the effect (effect after operation on the sword side) on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) until such a risk is taken. It will be expected to maintain the entertainment interest by giving conflicts and stimuli about the game.

  In this case, the effect after the button-side operation is “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period. In this case, the risk of appearance of “(the production mode of“ single defeat ”shown in FIG. 194 (g))” is eliminated, so that it functions as a relatively stable post-operation production. In addition, the effect after the sword-side operation is “a specific effect with the lowest degree of expectation (here 194 (g), it has the appearance risk of “the production mode of“ single defeat ”) shown in FIG. 194 (g), and thus functions as a post-operation production that relatively includes disturbance.

  Further, in this effect example, between the time when the effect status shown in FIG. 193 (a) appears and the time the effect condition shown in FIG. 193 (b) appears (here, within the special effect reception period), The production mode shown in FIG. 193 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the production mode appears, it is better than when the production mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" single defeat "shown in FIG. 194 (g))" is low. The production progress is feasible. This ratio may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, until a risk that a “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (in this case, the production mode of“ single defeat ”shown in FIG. 194 (g))” may occur, As a material for determining whether to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the effect of whether or not the effect shown in FIG. 193 (ab) has appeared. 193 (b), it is expected to appropriately improve the game entertainment when the special effect reception period occurs.

  In the normal production state, if the special production reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs but no production is received within the special production reception period, the above-described automatic production is performed. The function does not function, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 195 (a) to 195 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (a), FIG. 195 (ab), and FIG. 195 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except that a display indicating the effect (here, “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is started appears. From the time point till the end of the special effect reception period, the effect is the same as in the above-described normal effect state (FIGS. 193 (a), 193 (ab), and FIG. 193 (b)). Be advanced.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 195 (b), the effect result “lower expected effect (here, FIG. The automatic rendering function is enabled for the operation button 410 different from the “sword decoration 5001 on the side that can generate the rendering in which the“ 1 defeat ”rendering mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) may appear). Processing (stable-side automatic effect processing) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 195 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. Thus, the same change as in the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is received in the special effect reception period during the effect is generated. Therefore, as the effect after the button-side operation, first, it is displayed that the effect has been accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 195 (c)), and then the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats An effect in which one of “50 defeats” and “100 defeats” appears as an effect that suggests a higher degree of expectation based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 195 (d) and 195 (e)). ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when an effect is received for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, the degree of expectation is the lowest. The production mode (here, the production mode of “single-body destruction” shown in FIG. 194 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function is functioning. In this case, an effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears due to the automatic effect function. "

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special effect reception period, the effect condition shown in FIG. 195 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect condition appears , The effect after the sword-side operation while the appearance ratio of the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (in this case, the effect mode of“ single defeat ”shown in FIG. 194 (g))” is low. Since an opportunity to be able to enjoy is provided, it is expected that the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is appropriately encouraged.

  In the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 193 to 195, a special period in which a period during which an operation on the operation button 410 is directed and a period in which an operation on the sword decoration 5001 are directed are simultaneously generated and ended at the same time. Although the control is performed as the effect reception period, it is not always necessary to simultaneously generate these periods. For example, if the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is directed and the period in which the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are directed are overlapped in part of the period, the periods are separated. It may be generated at a timing.

  In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect is determined that “a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. Is performed "may be necessarily generated. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from the time when the design change is started with a specific effect pattern, "which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs. Should you do the setting operation to the automatic button production state before doing it? ", And so on, you can think about a production strategy that assumes a special production reception period will occur . For example, it is possible to confirm “how much noticed production was performed in what type of production (expected degree)” until a special production acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a material for determining which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and the game until the special effect reception period occurs It will be possible to appropriately maintain this for entertainment.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, furthermore, an automatic effect function Is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the big hit determination at the start of the symbol change or at the time of the effect reception (or at the time of the function of the automatic effect function). It is desirable to do so.

  Also, even if the special effect reception period is in an effect state in which a special effect reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001. When the effect display (FIGS. 193 (a) and 195 (a)) indicating that a special effect reception period is to be started is being performed, setting to the automatic button effect state is permitted. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to be performed. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that "a special effect reception period in which the player can select any one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue playing while maintaining the automatic button effect state "Stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state" can be provided only for those who are playing, and production for continuous playing while maintaining the automatic button production state Value can be provided.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 194 (g)” that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword-side operation is performed by the button-side operation. Although it was decided to execute it as a unique production mode different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production was performed, for the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation”, the post-button operation It may be executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when performed (for example, (“50 defeat” shown in FIG. 193 (d)). Is performed, as a result, even if the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears, the same appearance as the production mode that can appear when the production is performed after the button side operation appears for the intended purpose. Operation button It is possible to make it difficult for a third party who does not know which one of the 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is an effect situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. In other words, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect situation such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” is displayed. Despite this, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) depends on whether the effect status is caused by an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword decoration 5001. ), The degree of expectation of the appearance of the big hit symbol will be different, so it will have more fun as a production using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, this is a case where the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-sword-side operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when the button-side operation effect is performed. However, as for the “special production mode with the highest expectation” in the post-sword-side operation, a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the button-side operation is performed (for example, ("777 body defeat" shown in Fig. 194 (i)) is desirably executed.According to such a configuration, in the post-sword-side operation effect, "the specific effect mode with the lowest expectation". Appears, it is difficult to recognize that a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated has an extremely low level of expectation. However, when the “special production mode with the highest expectation” appears in the production after the sword-side operation, even if the third party does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated, This makes it easy to recognize that there is a production situation in which expectations are extremely high, so that the player can take the above risks without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the operation on the sword side). What is necessary is just to be recognizable. For example, the uniqueness with respect to other effect modes may be ensured by executing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of the effect (FIG. 194 (f) to FIG. 194 (i)) performed after the sword-side operation, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 194 ( i)) can appear, and when the “777 defeat” effect mode (FIG. 194 (i)) appears, any other effect mode (FIGS. 193 (d) and 193 (e)) , FIG. 194 (g), and FIG. 194 (h)), the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than when the symbol variation appears. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the appearance mode of “defeat 777” (FIG. 194 (i)) appear. In this case, the production mode shown in FIG. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 194 (h) is set to be higher than the appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) by the lower the degree of expectation of the production mode shown in (g). Becomes

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, effects after button-side operation (FIGS. 193 (c) to 193 (e)) and effects after sword-side operation (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)) ), A common production mode (here, the production mode of “100 defeats”) can appear, but the common production mode should not appear. Is also good. In addition, in the effect after the button-side operation, only the display change appears, but in the effect after the sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, the movable body operation or the lamp emission may be made executable. Further, the effect after the button-side operation and the effect after the sword-side operation do not have commonality as the effect content regarding the number of defeats, and the effect content itself may be executed as a different effect.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 193 to 195, when the effect reception is performed, including when the effect is received by the function of the automatic effect function, first, any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. The display (FIG. 193 (c), FIG. 194 (f), and FIG. 195 (c)) that indicates whether or not the effect has been accepted is displayed here, but the degree of expectation is suggested without displaying the display. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of the effect (FIG. 194 (f) to FIG. 194 (i)) performed after the sword-side operation, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 194 ( i)) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation-related items are more evident than when any of the other effects (FIGS. 193 (d), 193 (e), 194 (g), and 194 (h)) appear. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appears until the symbol change is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (the sword decoration body) on the higher expectation side It is desirable that the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to 5001) be increased. According to such a configuration, in the rendering examples shown in FIG. 193 to FIG. 195, it is possible to appropriately encourage the user to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the rendering risk is high.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (the peripheral control MPU 1511a), when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state does not occur), the pachinko machine 1 responds to the symbol fluctuation. When the restoration operation timing to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol change) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. However, if such a restoration process is executed irrespective of the state of the effect, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned “start timing of symbol variation” is set as “restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation”. Then, as shown in FIG. 196, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. Will be executed.
The effect pattern is set based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol change is started, and the effect pattern set is changed according to the set effect pattern. In particular, based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is acquired when the process for making the effect progress and the symbol change is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change), For performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example illustrated in FIG. 196, it is assumed that a “specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect development concerning the “specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to be operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation appears in which the processes to be performed are performed in parallel.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern is executable, the effect pattern (a relatively expected degree of expectation) that is in a direct relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in an effect pattern having a paired relationship (an effect pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation" is performed. You. In this way, by providing two effect patterns that are in a stage relationship with each other in effect (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body, and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body), at the specific timing tm2 (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having an effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate). Can be executed, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by such rendition.

  However, if the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation may still be in an execution state at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol change is started, the specific timing It becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a state where it cannot perform a staging operation even though tm2 has arrived. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol fluctuation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 196, of the effect patterns, the effect of the effect on the “specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative object at the specific timing tm2” and the predetermined progress for the specific movable decorative object When a situation appears in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change) appears in parallel, until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation, The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation "is terminated. In addition, various methods can be adopted as “the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, but in the following description, “the abnormal state is resolved, Until the predetermined upper limit number is reached, a process of repeatedly performing a restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body "will be described.

  More specifically, with respect to the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of the abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time it takes to complete is different. For example, when only the first restoration operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body and the abnormal state is resolved and the original movable position is restored (restored), the “predetermined restoration of the specific movable decorative body is performed. Although the timing tx at which the “process for performing the operation” is completed arrives at a relatively early stage, the number of times that this operation is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored) is increased. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is postponed so as to shift to a later time. At the latest, when the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the restoration operation is performed once more, the timing tx is exceeded, and the specific movable decoration body is restored. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration state is terminated. Become like

  In addition, when it is assumed that performing the restoring operation for a specific movable decorative body once requires x time, one symbol is set so that a relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. An upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and when the upper limit number n is reached, even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed. By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state.

  According to such a configuration, the effect development relating to the specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative object to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative object are respectively performed in parallel. When such a situation appears, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored at the specific timing tm2, Since the movable decorative body is brought into the stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable decorative body is in a stop state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, this may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, it is possible to give a hope that the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (when the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when a performance operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in actuality, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decorative body has an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the gaming interest.

  As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result in which an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When not provided, it is possible to exemplify a "display effect that appears in advance in such a manner as to inspire whether or not a specific display result appears", and the specific movable decorative body is " That operates based on the effect received by the operation by the player (or that the effect is received but does not operate) "," the effect that causes a specific display to prompt the operation by the player " Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, the specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed. It is assumed that the status has been changed to normal. As described above, at the start of the change (or the “restoring operation timing” such as the last stop of the symbol), the specific timing tm2 in the symbol change arrives after being restored to the normal state even if it is in the abnormal state. Then, at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to perform a specific movable decorative body in a staging operation.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot return (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation arrives, the stop state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol fluctuation is ended and the next restoration operation timing arrives. Becomes That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to include a movable decorative body that performs a multi-step movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body requires a longer time until its restoration processing is completed. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in the case of a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, or an effect pattern having a pair relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol change to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, each time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. It could be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol change is started, the main control MPU 1310a side. When the special effect pattern is selected based on the transmitted command, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol change corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), the specific movable pattern is required. The control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate) is not caused to appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress according to the special effect pattern And a process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation, respectively, when at least a special effect pattern is being performed (a period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process and continues this.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the original movable position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoring process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoring process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale mode (for example, the normal diagnosis is performed even after the restoration, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed). Since the special effect pattern can be performed, the special effect pattern functions as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player is also carefully restored as described above. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent productions with confidence. In this regard, in this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the player loses in the big hit determination. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as “the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait” is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), the timing tm11 comes when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Thus, when the special effect pattern is performed, the restoring process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and continued after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, a restriction such as "the restoration process has to be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body" is eliminated. This makes it possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

  However, at timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case where the effect of holding the game is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation timing (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) comes. At this time, if it is assumed that the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not being located at the original position). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body may be newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the processing content naturally has a limit, and failure to adequately cope with abnormalities may accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (b) and (d), the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes, when the next restoring operation timing (here, the next symbol change start timing) has arrived, the restoring process in the execution state is not terminated but is continued over the next restoring operation timing. . According to such a configuration, even if the suspension during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is in any situation, it may be determined that “the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. The restriction that the restoration process must be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed is removed, so that a more full-scale restoration process can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 197A (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol change being started while the restoration process is being performed on a specific movable decorative body, the new symbol change is started. As a case, a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a symbol variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) to 197 (c), the processing is started from timing tm11 irrespective of the state of the game or the effect (and the state of the restoration, etc.) after the end of the special effect pattern. As for the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol change arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the processing within a time shorter than the time required for performing the predetermined effect). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of the timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable state can be performed for a relatively long time until the time of the timings tm12 to tx ends. The restoration process for the decorative body can be performed continuously.

  After the special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is finished, if a situation appears in which a special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed, After the restoring process is not completed within a new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoring / diagnosis) and straddling three or more symbol variations (effect patterns) (after one restoring process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process extends over two or more restoration operation timings).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 197A, at the timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the state is reached. As described above, by performing one restoration process over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol change start timing), a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally can be obtained. However, this can be restored, and the specific movable decorative body can be produced at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal at the timing tx, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing). If the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol change is terminated from the timing tx, and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoring operation timing further arrives. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body has not been executed, each time the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start timing) arrives, the identification is performed. In some cases, the restoration process for the movable decorative body is started many times. If the specific movable decorative body is broken to such an extent that it cannot be restored, the particular movable decorative body cannot be restored. There is a concern that the entertainment of the game may be reduced by simply repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. (Despite this, it is desirable that when the restoration is not made from the abnormal state, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above-described predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, the special effect patterns for a predetermined upper limit number and the special effect patterns are displayed. One restoration process may be continued so as to straddle the next effect pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, it is not restored from the abnormal state even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. Even when the “+1” -th restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without ending. As described above, regarding the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation timings, the predetermined upper limit number is set regardless of how many times the restoration operation timing arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat the count as a single restoration process so as not to end it, so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

  By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation timing corresponding to a symbol change), a board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back decoration unit). In addition to the middle movable effecting unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain), the frame-shaped movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner described above. You. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, and the like) which is also used as an operation means is provided. However, there is a case where restoration (return) is performed in a mode different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol change is performed, the operation operation giving effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is performed. A system effect pattern (eg, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177) is prepared. Then, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177 (f))" “Process for generating an effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))” and further “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”, bar display indicating remaining time of effect reception period) ) (See FIG. 177 (f)) ". Then, as a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, pushed in operation) and the effect is received, based on the effect reception, the “special decorative member SDY (draft material) ) To perform a staging operation of the board-side movable decorative body (see FIG. 177 (g)) and a “process of causing a change in display content (see FIG. 177 (g))”. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body that is effected in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A.

  However, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, and is not performed normally. While being executable when in the state, the “process for generating an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001” and the “process for performing a display for prompting the operation” are performed when the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state. It can be executed both in a certain time and in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player who has viewed the “display prompting the operation” and the effect is received, “Processing for effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (robin)” and “Processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are performed. In addition, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 is subjected to an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part is operated, thereby causing the abnormal state. May be naturally resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided and the sword decorative body 5001) which is also used as the operating means is provided. In the case of an abnormal state, a return process of applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A). Restoration processing) at the respective timings of “the above-described restoration operation timing (in this case, the start timing of the symbol change)” and “after the effect is received by the player's operation in the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. Executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decorative body is aimed at timing such as at the time of starting or stopping the symbol change (more precisely, after starting or stopping). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing such as the start and stop of the symbol change, but also another unique timing (during the change period) Of these, the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) is aimed at a timing at which an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation by the player) to eliminate the abnormal state. ) Is performed, it is expected that the original position of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in the abnormal state can be quickly restored. .

  FIG. 198 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 198, an effect pattern of a movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 during a period in which the symbol change is performed) is executed. It is assumed that “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is located at the operation position, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”, or effect reception period) When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and the effect is received (timing tm22) during execution of the bar display indicating the remaining time of the game (timing tm22), it is determined that the “special decoration member SDY (draft)” or the like is displayed. The process of effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body and the process of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 198, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A is rendered as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198, at the timing tm22 when the effect is received, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 does not return to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that has performed the effect operation based on the effect reception It is assumed that another abnormality has occurred in the body (the board-side movable decorative body) and cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body are performed, respectively, and the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying the determination is performed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is performed along with the specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notification is performed. This means that the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within the reach (door frame 3) of the player's hand", and if it is notified that this is an abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of reach of the player (gaming board 5)”, and this is an abnormal state. This is because, as a result, it is not possible to assist anything as a player, and it is possible to promote a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game simply by emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 198, while performing the “process of performing a specific movable decorative body effecting operation” based on the reception of the effect at timing tm22, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body. Although it will occur, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by causing the “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” to be executed as usual. It is desirable to make it difficult. Then, after this, the effect pattern of the movable operation system will be developed while both the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body remain in the abnormal state, and the pattern change will be stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, at the timing tm23, the already-suspended symbol change is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 196 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 at which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol change. ), The timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the state of restoration). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, at the start of symbol change) for the sword decoration 5001, the "specific movable decoration" A process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the body "and a process of performing an operation (applying a driving force) so as to return the original position to at least a part of the operations are performed in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “processing for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the restoration state (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it starts).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since the continuation does not occur, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of annoying when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is started / terminated and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 is started / terminated are the same. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  As for “the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 197A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue even after the end of the special effect pattern, the design fluctuation in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoring operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled, the process (one restoring process) can be executed without ending the process. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation ”can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 197A). That is, in this case, also regarding the “processing for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It is executed in the form of the following, but it should be finished regardless of the restoration state between the start of the next symbol change and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  After the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that at the timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 are respectively ended, but the restoration has failed. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body remain in the abnormal state. The symbol change is stopped at the timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific movable decorative body is subjected to an external force (no driving force by a motor or the like is applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to a normal state), the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body during the period from timing tx to tm2 can be said to be an abnormal situation. In such a low reliability situation, even if a specific movable decoration is performed, it is highly likely that it will fail. It can be said that this is desirable.

  Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the state returns to the abnormal state, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed. That is, when the restoration process for the decorative sword 5001 fails and the notification is performed each time the abnormal state is returned again, a misunderstanding is given as if the player is liable that the abnormal state is not resolved. Since it may be impossible, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality occurrence from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by the restoration process triggered by any of the restoration operation timings (here, the symbol variation start timing) arriving after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state. And now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is removed. Assuming that the effect has been accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is directed by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is thereafter changed to the original state. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). In this case, in consideration of the fact that the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (one time) Is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body returns to the original position). It is desirable to end the processing before the return is performed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return processing is being performed. However, in view of the fact that the possibility of the return of the sword decoration body 5001 which has not been able to be restored by such an external force (operation by the player) has been increased, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the original position. When the process of applying the driving force to return to the normal state (return operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is restored to the original state until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is finished. The process of applying the driving force to return to the position is continuously performed (return operation for the sword decoration 5001 is performed again) so that the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, and the player can recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even when the return process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

  And in the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the return processing (return to the original position) for the sword decoration 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter, The effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while both the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are in the normal state, and the pattern change is stopped at the timing tm26.

  Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol change), a restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is received) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even in the abnormal state, the original state is maintained. Since an opportunity to return to the position is given more and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying driving force, a mode of returning using at least external force) are used as a method of returning, the abnormal state is eliminated. The likelihood of the game becoming more entertained can be suppressed, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the process of giving the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation of the player has been started. The driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decoration 5001 is returned using the external force (operation by the player) in the process, it is necessary to perform the process differently from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, this process is performed in a simple manner such that the return process is completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the return status, and if the return fails, a more full-fledged operation will be performed at the next recovery operation timing. It is desirable that a proper return process be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start timing) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed by that number of times. Nevertheless, if the restoration is not started from the abnormal state and the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, Even if the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is received after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after the effect is received is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration 5001 that has not been able to be restored by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. It can be said that it is desirable to execute the process without giving up, even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is abandoned. Therefore, “processing for generating an effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”), and bar indicating remaining time of the effect reception period (See FIG. 177 (f)) "), it is important that the process is performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is abandoned.

  Also, the first operation opportunity is provided so that the sword decoration 5001 is pushed in the state where it is located at the operation position (operates to a specific detection position), and the sword decoration body 5001 is pushed in when it is at the original position (to the specific detection position). If the operation means is provided so that the second operation opportunity may be given to the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state, the effect may be received even if the effect is received at the second operation opportunity. The driving force for returning to the original position is not applied, and the driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the operation amount of the operation part is relatively small, and it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally low.

  In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation by the player, the process of giving a driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily performed. It may not be executed on the condition that it has been performed, for example, may be executed after the end of the effect reception period.

  Note that the restoration operation timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives at least on condition that the symbol change is performed, and may be used as, for example, at least one of the symbol change start timing and the symbol change stop timing. . When the symbol change stop time is used as the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change, the restoring process is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol change is stopped. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the held specific effect pattern arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern which is stored and consumed. Will be performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. It is desirable that the game can be played such that the frequency of appearance of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than in the case of (1).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) or a specific movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 197A, the abnormal state is maintained for a period until after the next effect pattern corresponding to the symbol change is started. , One restoration process for the movable decorative body can be continuously executed. However, in this case, even if a new restoring operation timing (for example, a symbol change start timing) arrives while one restoring process is continuously executed, the restoring process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. Since it is not started, and it is continued without ending one restoration process that is already in the execution state, a movable object different from the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is When the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state, there is a problem as to when to start the restoration processing for the other movable decorative body.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed at a new restoration operation timing (next (The start time of the symbol change). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from a specific movable decorative body during a period from the timing tm11 elapse to a new restoring operation timing (a start timing of the next symbol change). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both methods 1 and 2”, or “both methods 1 and 3” is employed to perform the restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

  Method 1: At least when there is a relationship such as “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body”, When a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoring process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) ), The restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed is treated as valid, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing). The restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference occurs between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of the movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: At least when there is a relationship such as “both a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration operation is not started. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) is determined based on the arrival of the new restoring operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process has not been executed yet is treated as being effective. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body), it is made to wait until one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of those movable decorative bodies will be expected.

  Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such as “both a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (the next symbol change start time) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoring operation time (the next symbol change start time). Without performing the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, and waiting for the completion of one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, and then using the restoring operation timing that arrives thereafter as a trigger, another movable decorative body (panel-side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration body that is not in the execution state yet. Will be treated as invalid with respect to any of the restoration processing for a particular movable decorative body, and unless a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. No processing is performed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take a sufficient measure against the abnormality, so that it is expected that the speed at which these movable decorative bodies deteriorate is reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C, an aspect (method 1 to method 3 and the like) when a new restoring operation timing (symbol change start timing and end timing, etc.) arrives during execution of the restoring operation will be described. It will be described in detail.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the sake of convenience of description, the first movable decorative body (the above-described “specific movable decorative body”), the second movable decorative body, At least a third movable decorative body, a fourth movable decorative body, and a fifth movable decorative body are provided. Then, when only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state are “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”. Regardless of the “movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, or the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decorative body that is not in the normal state is a restoration operation time corresponding to a symbol change (design) The restoration operation (restoration process) is started when the start timing and the end timing of the fluctuation have arrived.

  However, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, all of the movable decoration bodies that are not in the normal state perform the restoration operation at the same time triggered by the restoration operation time. When the (restoration process) is started, there is a concern that the user may not be able to concentrate on the effect corresponding to the design change and may be intrusive.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, a part of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state. Only the restoring operation timing can be triggered to start the restoring operation, thereby avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoring operation all at once. Thus, a restoring operation in a mode according to the situation is realized.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 197B, the timing tm32 at which the symbol variation (first time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts has arrived (restoration corresponding to the symbol variation). When the operation time arrives), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Suppose that Note that the term “abnormal” means that the detection means detects the “abnormal” state, but it does not necessarily need to be in the state where the “abnormality” is detected. May simply mean that an “abnormality” is occurring (undetected state).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, the restoration operations of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body are started in parallel, but the third movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body are started in parallel. As for the movable decorative body of, the standby operation is kept in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation. This prevents all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation at the same time, thereby realizing the restoring operation according to the situation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decorative body which has not been restored at the timing tm32 and has been left in the abnormal state is awaiting the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35). Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. Thereby, it is possible to return all the non-normal movable ornaments to the normal state in the comparatively early stage while avoiding that all the non-normal movable ornaments start the restoring operation at the same time. become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration operation is not started at the timing tm32, and the fifth movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state is set when the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) comes. Also, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid a plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoration operation in parallel in a combination that prevents concentration on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration processing for the second movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm34 at which the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body is finished. When the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, the “third movable decorative body” or the “fifth movable decorative body” does not start the restoration operation. In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration processing for the fourth movable decorative body is completed after the timing tm34 at which the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body is finished. The third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation and does not maintain the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed. When the restoration processing for the fourth movable decorative body is completed, the “fifth movable decorative body” ends. Does not start the restoring operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration processing (restoring operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm32 comes, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is completed.

  The fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoring operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is restored. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the (restoration operation) to end.

  In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorative body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decorative bodies, so that it is possible to respond to the design fluctuation. The restoration process can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the effect.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, although the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state earlier than the “third movable decorative body”, the “first movable decorative body” Is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started first. As described above, by not performing the restoration processing in the order of the abnormal state, it is possible to preferentially return to the normal state from the movable decoration body having a high production importance, and it is possible to appropriately enhance the gaming interest. It is expected to be maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol change (second time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol is changed. It is assumed that a timing tm35 (a restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (the third time) is started comes. Such a restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body that has not originally returned to the normal state. However, here, the third movable decorative body does not use such a function as the restoring operation timing, and continuously executes the restoring process (restoring operation) across the restoring operation timing (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, if the design change (third) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decorative body, “movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the design change (third)” The third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the symbol change, even when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm32 (when the symbol change (first time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol change (second time) starts) It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm31 before the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the symbol change). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed from the timing tm32 (timing tm34).

  However, the third movable decorative body is after the timing tm32 (recovery operation time corresponding to the symbol change) and during the period when the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration processing (restore operation). The normal state is maintained until “timing tm33”, which is the timing of FIG. 197, and even if an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, as in the example shown in FIG. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which) is ended. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 arrived before the timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. The details of “restoration processing (restoration operation) using restoration operation timing at timing tm32” will be described later.

  At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process be continuously performed so as to straddle the timing tm35. In addition, at the timing tm35, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and at the timing when the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body executed across the timing tm35 is completed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that has not been performed can be started earlier than the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decoration with high production importance It will be possible to return to normal with priority from the body. Note that the “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the fact that the restoration processing (recovery operation) for the “third movable decorative body”, which was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm32 (recovery operation time) has arrived, has been completed. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 is started. The “restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 (restoration operation)” is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm32. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body, and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and each of these restoring processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, The restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the “five movable decorations” is started. If the “third movable decorative body” is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the “first movable decorative body” ends, the restoration processing for the “third movable decorative body” is not performed, and the “fifth movable decorative body” is not executed. Is determined to be abnormal. As a result, when it is determined that the state is abnormal, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable decorative body” is in a normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” started at the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is changed to “the symbol variation (1 The timing tm42 ”at which the“ time ”ends (losing stop) and the next symbol change (second time) is started (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change has arrived), and the process is not ended nor is being executed. And at the time when the timing tm42 arrives, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” Are assumed to be in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is not restarted from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, and the timing tm42 ( (Restoration operation timing). As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, if the design change (second time) is to execute a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, the "movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the pattern change (second time)" The first movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the symbol change, even when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration process is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42). However, in this case, for the fourth movable decorative body, the restoring operation is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution, but the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoring operation and wait in an abnormal state. This prevents all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation at the same time, thereby realizing the restoring operation according to the situation.

  In particular, regarding the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 197B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state of “not in a normal state and not performing the restoration process (restoring operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, when the first movable decorative body is in a state of “not in a normal state and performing a restoration process (restoration operation)”, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) ), The restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives.

  That is, the situation in which the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration processing (restoring operation) over the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) means that the first movable decorative body returns to the normal state (returns to the original position). Thus, it can be said that the player side is in a situation where the "first movable decorative body" in such a state is taking notice. Then, in such a situation, if many movable decorative bodies newly start the restoration processing (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the effect according to the design change, and it becomes aroused. It is concerned.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, of the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 197B) capable of executing the restoration process (restoring operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body With regard to, even in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body that is being executed. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the second movable decorative body does not start the restoration process in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution, and Until the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, it is kept in a standby state. Then, in a state where the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body has been completed, it waits for a restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 197C) to newly arrive, and based on the arrival of the timing tm45, The restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament body 2 is started. Thus, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to the normal state, many movable decorative bodies are prevented from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation). Will be eliminated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decorative body which has not been restored at the timing tm42 and has been left in the abnormal state at the timing tm42, similarly to the example shown in FIG. Instead of waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. Thereby, it is possible to return all the non-normal movable ornaments to the normal state in the comparatively early stage while avoiding that all the non-normal movable ornaments start the restoring operation at the same time. become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth movable decorative body that has not been restored at the timing tm42 and has been left in the abnormal state is the same as the example shown in FIG. 197B. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) has arrived, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm46 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. Like that. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid a plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operation in parallel in such a manner as to hinder concentration on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm44 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished. When the restoration processing for the decorative body is completed, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” do not start the restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoring operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm42 comes, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is completed.

  The fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoring operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is restored. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the (restoration operation) to end.

  In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorative body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decorative bodies, so that it is possible to respond to the design fluctuation. The restoration process can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol change (second time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol is changed. It is assumed that a timing tm45 (a restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (the third time) is started arrives. Such a restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body that has not originally returned to the normal state. However, here, the third movable decorative body does not use such a function as the restoring operation timing, and continuously executes the restoring process (restoring operation) across the restoring operation timing (timing tm45). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, if the design change (third) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decorative body, “movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the design change (third)” The third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the symbol change, even when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm42 (the timing at which the symbol variation (first time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts) It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm41 before the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the symbol change). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed from the timing tm42 (timing tm44).

  However, as for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm42 (recovery operation time corresponding to the design change) and during the period when the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration processing (restore operation). The normal state is maintained until “timing tm43”, which is the timing of the first movable decorative body, even if an abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, as in the example shown in FIG. 197C. ) Is desirably started on the basis of the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the end of () is completed. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrives before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. The details of the "restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 (restoration operation)" are as described in the section "restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 (restoration operation)".

  Further, in this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoring operation timing) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm42 (restoring operation timing) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that has not been performed can be started earlier than the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decoration with high production importance The body can be returned to normal with priority. The “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the fact that the restoration processing (recovery operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm42 (recovery operation time) has arrived is completed. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 is started. The “restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 (restoration operation)” refers to a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm42. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body, and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and each of these restoring processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, The restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the “five movable decorations” is started. If the “third movable decorative body” is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the “first movable decorative body” ends, the restoration processing for the “third movable decorative body” is not performed, and the “fifth movable decorative body” is not executed. Is determined to be abnormal. As a result, when it is determined that the state is abnormal, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable decorative body” is in a normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. Becomes

  According to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body is not in a normal state (not in a state to be movable but not in the original position) (first movable decorative body). Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation timing (the pattern change ( With respect to the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body) executing the restoration operation triggered by the start timing of the first), the restoration operation is not performed again, and the restoration operation timing is ignored and the execution is continued. However, as for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not executed the restoration operation, the restoration operation can be started with this timing without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42). In other words, in this case, the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state may or may not ignore the function as the restoration operation timing depending on the situation where each of them is placed. , A restoration process suitable for the situation can be realized.

  Also, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, the “first movable decorative body” performs the restoration operation when the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol change (first time)) corresponding to the symbol change arrives. If the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol change (second time)) corresponding to the symbol change arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body performing the restoration operation again comes. The restoration operation timing (start timing of the symbol change (second time)) thus triggered can be continuously executed without performing the restoration operation again. In other words, in this case, it takes time to return to the normal state, and as a result, even if the restoration operation timing arrives again while the restoration operation is being performed, this is ignored, so that the state is being executed. It is possible to continue the restoring operation without interruption, thereby prompting early return of the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, while the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is being performed over a plurality of changes, another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) is used. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the return operation at the time of the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change, and the third movable decorative body is in the middle of execution. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is not redone at the time of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), and the restoration processing (restore operation) for the third movable decorative body is restored. Immediately after completion of the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body”, which has not been started at the timing (timing tm42), the restoring process for the third movable decorative body ( Since the restoration operation is started, the restoration processing is not performed in parallel for the movable decoration body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decoration bodies. In addition, the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be returned to normal relatively early.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 197C, when the third movable decorative body enters an abnormal state at the timing tm43, the restoration operation time of the third movable decorative body has not yet arrived after the abnormality. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body executed across the restoration operation timing)”. ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrives before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoring operation) so as to straddle the restoring operation timing, the movable ornament using the movable ornament within the symbol fluctuation in which the movable ornament returns to the normal state. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, a movable effect can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. In such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state early by the timing when the movable effect is started.

  In addition, during the execution of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body, even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation arrives a plurality of times, all of them are ignored and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body is performed. It is desirable to continue.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship of performing a restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel as shown in FIG. 197B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, when a new restoring operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decorative body is performing the restoring operation, the second movable operation is performed at the timing tm42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the decorative body is not started, and the restoration operations are not performed in parallel. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent many movable decorative bodies from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation) when the first movable decorative body is in a state where it takes time to return to the normal state.

  Then, when a new restoring operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body ends and returns to the normal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm45. I'm going to start. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started immediately after the situation in which the first movable decorative body takes time to return to the normal state is resolved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) to arrive, it is possible to concentrate on the effect. The environment can be suitably adjusted.

  At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is terminated due to failure, a new restoration operation timing (after the restoration process (restoration operation) ends) When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it is no longer possible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, the movable effect using only the second movable decorative body is restored by using only the second movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it executable.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 197 (C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and normal restoration is performed, a period until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) comes. When the first movable decorative body returns to the abnormal state again, when the new restoring operation timing (timing tm45) arrives, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are respectively restored. It is desirable to start processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

  In the example described above, even if the restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is to be terminated due to failure (not returning to the original position), the first movable decorative body is restored. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is to be terminated due to failure (not returning to the original position), the restoration process (reconstruction operation) for the third movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the (operation).

  In the above-described example, when the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state at the time when the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed (timing tm34, tm44), the first movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decorative body newly enters an abnormal state during the execution period of the “restoring process (recovery operation for the fifth movable decorative body)” thus started, the fifth movable decorative body is reset. When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation), and a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives It is desirable to perform a restoring process (restoring operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body has not been completed yet and is in an execution state at the time when the new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change has arrived, the restoration operation time has arrived. When the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” is not started when the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” is completed, and the restoring operation timing after the end of the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” has come It is desirable to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state, the symbol change (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not performed again without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. Is ignored and the restoring operation is not triggered by the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) of the fourth movable decorative body that has not been subjected to the restoring process (restoring operation). I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even with the fourth movable decorative body which has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), a new movable decorative body is newly created while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed. When the restoration operation timing (timing tm43) arrives, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation timing (timing tm43) and continue the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation timing.

  When there is a movable decorative body in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) is being executed and a movable ornamental body in a state of waiting for the execution of the restoration process (the restoration operation), the effect display relating to the symbol variation is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state in which visual recognition is impossible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, the above-described notification according to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state is performed. The restoration process (restoration operation) that is already in the execution state is continuously executed without being stopped, and the restoration process is also performed on the movable decorative body that is in a state of waiting for the execution of the restoration process (restoration operation) when the restoration operation time comes. It is desirable to newly start (restoration operation).

  When there are movable ornaments that are in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) and movable ornaments that are waiting for the execution of the restoration process (restoration operation), these movable ornaments are used in the design fluctuation. When the execution timing of the movable effect arrives, the driving force for the restoration process (restoration operation) is applied to the movable decorative bodies, but the driving force for the execution of the effect is applied. It is desirable that there is no (no staging operation) in order to realize an early return to a normal state. However, no driving force is applied to the movable decorative bodies for performing the effect, but the light emitting modes provided in the respective movable decorative bodies are such that a light emission mode corresponding to the movable effect appears. It is desirable to make the part emit light normally. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect (light emission effect) constituting the movable effect is appropriately executed. , "0", and "100") also appear in the "movable decorative body that is not in a normal state", and the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, the restoration process (restoring operation) is not performed even if the restoring operation time has come again for the movable decorative body in a state where the restoring process (restoring operation) has failed, so that at least the power supply is continued. It can be said that as long as the movable decorative body is not operated in a movable effect. However, even in the movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing at which the movable effect using the movable decorative body is executed arrives, the movable effect itself is not executed, but the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect (light emission effect) be performed properly. That is, in this case, the light emitting mode different according to the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”) is “the movable decorative body in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has been failed. ”, And it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, the movable decorative body in a state in which the restoration processing (restoration operation) is being executed, the movable decorative body in a state of waiting for the execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation), and a state in which the restoration processing (restoration operation) has failed. The movable decorative body may be one that enables the light emitting unit to emit light as usual even when another effect is performed.

  The restoring operation timing may include not only the one that arrives in response to the symbol change but also one that arrives under another condition. When the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives under a condition different from the symbol variation, the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed. When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started (executed) in a non-notification state without performing the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state, the symbol change (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not performed again without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. Is ignored and the restoring operation is not triggered by the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) of the fourth movable decorative body that has not been subjected to the restoring process (restoring operation). I'm trying to get started. In this way, even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to the normal state, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change has arrived, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not ignored without ignoring it. The “fourth movable decorative body” to be started is used for an important effect such as when a winning result is derived by a symbol change or when the big hit game is started or executed. Desirably.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, with respect to the third movable decorative body, the case where the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” successfully returns to normal (reference position detection) and fails (reference position). Regardless of whether the process is terminated (completed), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body". It is desirable to do so.

  Also, based on the fact that the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” ends with failure to return to normal and the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” ends. This is a case where the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” that has been performed is completed with the normal return being successful, and the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the symbol variation in which the normal return was successful. In the state, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the next symbol change arrives, the “restoration process (restoration operation for the first movable decorative body)” is not performed and “the restoration process for the third movable decorative body ( (Restoring operation). "

  However, at this time, at the time when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol change arrives, the “fifth movable operation started based on the completion of the“ restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ”” is completed. When the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the decorative body” is in the execution state, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorator” and the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorator” are executed. Are not performed, and the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body" is triggered by the "restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation" that arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation for the fifth movable decorative body)" ends. (Restoration operation) ”, it is desirable to perform“ Restoration processing (Restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ”.

  After the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” is successfully completed and the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” is completed, the “restoring process (restoring operation) to the third movable decorative body” is executed. Even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the “restoration processing (recovery operation) for the third movable decorative body” is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing corresponding to the next symbol change. In this case, it is desirable that the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not started at the restoring operation timing. That is, in this case, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative object" arrives after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative object" has been successfully or failed to return to normal. Is started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state, the symbol change (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not performed again without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. And continue to execute this. Also, regarding the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and the “recovery processing (restoration operation for the first movable decorative body)” is completed. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started on the basis of this. In this regard, when the first movable decorative body returns to the abnormal state again while the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” thus started is executed, the “third movable decorative body” is restored. When the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the body” is completed, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” is not started based on the end. It is desirable to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” based on the new arrival.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation newly arrives, the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” has not been completed and is being executed (straddling the restoration operation timing). It is desirable to ignore the restoring operation timing and wait until the “restoring process (restoring operation for the third movable decorative body)” ends. Then, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is started at the restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation arrived after the "restoring process (restoring operation for the third movable decorative body)" is completed. It is desirable to make it.

  That is, in this case, when both the “first movable decorative body” and the “third movable decorative body” are in an abnormal state, the “first movable decorative body” is restored such that the “first movable decorative body” is returned to the normal state in advance. If the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives when the third movable decorative body is not in the normal state, the first movable decorative body performs the restoring operation even though it has a relationship in which the processing is performed. When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decorative body is not executing the restoration processing) and when the restoration operation is not started (when the third movable decorative body is (In the situation where the restoration process is being executed), so that the restoration process according to the situation can be realized.

  The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting change means capable of changing the winning probability for hit determination and the selection probability for effect patterns. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable to use the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation as the same timing (for example, at the start of symbol variation).

  The first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body are provided with movable decorations provided at positions where the player can contact them. The body may be included. And in this case, since the movable decorative body provided at a position where the player can touch is considered to be most likely to be in an abnormal state, the restoration operation time arrives regardless of the state of the other movable decorative bodies. Then, it is desirable to provide the “fourth movable decorative body” for starting the restoration processing (restoration operation).

  After providing the light guide plate on which the light guide pattern is displayed in front of the movable decorative body, the effect of displaying the light guide pattern during the restoration process (restoring operation) on the movable decorative body is not limited. It is desirable to make it executable so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

  The “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” shown in FIGS. 197B and 197C are prepared so as to have an effect relationship in which each of them becomes an operation state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to do. For example, the "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" are provided with decorations related to each other, or are operated at the same time as a movable performance based on a design variation (producing pattern). (Such as the completion of characters and character strings) should be prepared as shaping. The third movable decorative body is prepared so as not to be used when forming a specific movable effect or one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to prevent one decoration from being formed in the same mode (operation at the same time) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  For the “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body”, a game board The components provided on the side of the door frame 5 and the components provided on the side of the door frame 3 may be provided separately.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “ Although the fifth movable decorative body is provided, the “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body” are provided. May not necessarily include all of the movable decorative bodies, and may include “one” of the movable decorative bodies, or “two” or “three” as appropriate. Even with such a configuration, having the technical features described with reference to FIG. 197B and FIG. 197C (in what form the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decorative body”) Becomes

[Operational penalty for operation unit that can produce strobe light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In either of the states, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, there is a tendency that the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to be large. However, these operation units may be roughly handled. If any failure occurs, the operability and the performance are remarkably reduced.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation buttons 410,
-A sword decoration body in which the sword portion 5010 (sword body portion 5011, handle portion 5012, flange portion 5013) is movable (variably) between a sword placement position and a sword removal position by a predetermined operation (sword removal operation, sword placement operation). 5001 (see FIGS. 146 and 161)
Even if no operation opportunity is given, the “operation to remove the sword 5010 (sword body 5011, handle 5012, flange 5013) from the sheath 5020 (sword removal operation)” or “sword insertion” If the “operation” is repeatedly performed, a failure may occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an effect light emitting unit (not shown) is provided for each of the blade unit 5011, the handle unit 5012, and the flange unit 5013, and the sword unit 5010 (the blade unit). 5011, the handle 5012, and the flange 5013) have a special detection unit (not shown) that can detect whether the sheath 5020 is at a specific position (original position) where the sword is placed. Then, at least during the period in which the demo screen is displayed (a non-game state in which a game effect or symbol change according to the big hit determination is not performed), the sword unit 5010 is identified as a result of the detection by the special detection unit. When it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in the non-game state in which the symbol variation is not performed, the sword unit 5010 is shared by the effect light emitting units (sword body unit 5011, handle unit 5012, and flange unit 5013) by a predetermined operation. As a result of being displaced to a certain position, if it is detected that the operation unit is not located at a specific position, an effect restriction period can occur, so that the handling of the operation unit can be suitably suppressed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the “change of the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound” and the “set value related to the emission luminance (brightness set value)” , The above-mentioned effect restriction period is generated while the state in which both of the “change” and the “change” can be accepted by the operation by the player. However, as described later, during this production restriction period,
Regarding the production sound, even if the set value (volume setting value) relating to the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at a volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-With respect to the effect lamp, when the set value (luminance set value) related to the emission luminance is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword unit 5010 that is the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 The (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) are not emitted at a luminance according to the luminance setting value, but are provided in a part different from the detected sword part 5010. With respect to the effect lamp (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), a process is performed in which the effect light emission at a luminance corresponding to the set value is enabled. That can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the above-described effect restriction period occurs, both the change of the set value related to the volume and the change of the set value related to the brightness can be accepted, but the change related to the volume setting is possible. The degree of restriction differs between the processing and the processing related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with respect to the production sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the production sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. Also, by preventing the output from being output, the player is given a sense of tension (perhaps he has done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting units (sword unit 5011, handle 5012, and flange 5013) provided in the “sword unit 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, but the effect lamp provided in a portion different from the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player has the changed effect. By enabling the effect light emission (for example, light emission in accordance with the timing at which a specific notice effect is performed) in a form in which the luminance setting value is reflected, due to the rough handling of the “sword unit 5010”, It is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production while warning that the production restriction is imposed as being recognizable. It made. In this sense, for the effect lamp on the game board 5 where the game ball flows down or wins, the effect light emission is performed as normal, in a manner in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected. Is desirable. With this, it is possible to appropriately warn that "the player has a willingness to start the game or to encourage the end of the game", and to issue a warning about handling the operation unit roughly. become.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release conditions for the respective restrictions are different depending on the restriction on the processing related to the volume setting and the restriction on the processing related to the luminance setting. . In particular, the "processing related to volume setting" on the side where relatively strict restrictions were imposed at the beginning should be greatly improved to the normal state relatively early so as to strongly encourage the continuation of the game. On the other hand, at the beginning, the processing related to the luminance setting, which was a relatively loose restriction, showed an improvement trend, but the overall improvement speed was slowed down, and some In some cases, the restriction is left, so that it is expected that the tension will be maintained moderately over a long period of time, and that rough handling will not be repeated.

[Help image that promotes direction understanding]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, there may be a case where all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern are sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect pattern determination and preview effect determination are performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect contents according to the results of these determinations, so that the variation due to the decorative pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is performed. The effect is executed together with the expected effect (advertisement effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect relating to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background description (background notice), it basically has an effect such as "how many values should be set for the appearance ratio of images with high expectations". It is only done. Therefore, the fundamental problem of "it becomes difficult to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot unless an image having a high degree of expectation (expected effect) appears" has not yet been solved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background description is performed. To display the background image used in the special mode different from that of the original image data. When the background image is displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation ( It is possible to suggest that the jackpot symbol appears at a higher rate.

Here, as the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, for example,
A process of displaying the original image data as rotated processed data rotated by a predetermined angle (such as rotation around any of the x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area);
Processing such as displaying original image data as mosaic processing data into which a predetermined degree of “blur” has been inserted can be exemplified.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to only a slight processing (such as a rotation processing or a mosaic processing). A special effect to display this (display in a special mode) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, even if a special effect in which only a small amount of processing is performed on the original image data is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to definitely detect and recognize the fact. However, in exchange for this, even if the special production is not being performed, it is possible to remember the sensation and fantasy such as "Maybe it is in the state where the special production is being executed" Therefore, even if a state in which an image (special effect) with a high degree of expectation does not appear is continued, it is expected that the feeling of expectation to the big hit is appropriately maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the state of implementation of such “processing to be displayed in a special mode”, it becomes difficult to recognize even the possibility that the situation is highly expected. In the end, performing special productions may lose its meaning.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment displays a help image indicating whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being executed in response to an operation by the player. The process for causing the execution of the process is executable. According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed in response to the operation by the player, it is not possible to recognize whether the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed or not. Is expected to be suppressed, and the expected feeling is appropriately maintained.

  However, the "help image" according to this example does not explicitly indicate whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, but rather includes the difficulty of recognition. ing. Because it is necessary to have such recognition difficulty, even if it does not seem that the “displaying in a special mode” is being executed, it cannot be convinced that it does not appear. Can be left, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 199 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when a state transition is made between a non-game state in which a game is not executed (during a demo screen or the like) and a game execution state in which a game is executed. .

  FIG. 199 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when in a non-game state where a game is not being executed (during a demonstration screen or the like). As shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the effect display device 1600 in the non-game state, the character image PG (here, “ A guidance image AG indicating that a penguin-like character) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation unit (such as the operation button 410) is displayed. In this description example, a description and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a), when a start winning is generated and a game (fluctuation of a special symbol according to a big hit determination) is started, the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 199 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. In this way, by causing the guidance image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the performance in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, a character simulating a penguin) can be appropriately appealed.

  FIG. 199 (c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the variable effect with the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is completed (stop display).

  If the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the guide image AG is not displayed because the hold information is digested and a fluctuating effect with the decorative symbol SZ is newly started. The effect situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) will appear again in the state as it is. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the state is shifted to the non-game state (during the demonstration screen or the like) again. That is, in this case, the guidance image AG is displayed based on the fact that the state in which the game has not been newly started has been continued for a predetermined time since the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is ended (stop display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may not be displayed.

  Then, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” according to this effect example is a state in which the variable effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in a “specific effect pattern” (when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the effect judgment). And during a period in which a specific effect image appears (predetermined timing in a specific effect pattern).

  FIG. 200 shows a state in which the variable effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in the “specific effect pattern”, and an expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image is performed. 18 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the display device is in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state.

  In other words, in this effect example, at least when a “predictive effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is greatly displayed as a background image” is performed, a condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied is satisfied. A process of performing a slight rotation process on each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them (a process of displaying in a special mode) can be executed. I have. When a princess character (specific effect image) on which the “display in special mode” is executed is displayed, a princess character (specific effect image) on which the “process in special mode” is not executed is displayed. The rate at which the big hit symbols appear is higher than when it is displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), “the process of displaying in a special mode” is not executed, and the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are not included in each original image data. It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (b), the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated left three times and then displayed. The process (the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (c), each of the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is shifted left by 6 degrees. The processing of displaying them after performing the rotation processing (processing of displaying in a special mode) is being executed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c), even when the “display in a special mode” is performed, each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is obtained. , Only a small amount of rotation processing is performed. In particular, in the figure, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c). However, in an actual effect, FIG. ) To (c) are displayed, and no comparison can be made between them. Therefore, even when FIGS. 200 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be convinced that the display is in the special mode. The player is expected to be aware of a possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 200 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be convinced that the request is left (to maintain a feeling of expectation) such as "it may be in a state displayed in a special mode".

  A process of subjecting each of the original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) to a left-hand rotation of 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) and displaying them (a process of displaying in a special mode) ) May be performed as a process of performing a rotation process on each original image data separately and then displaying it, or converting each original image data into one image and then May be executed as a process of performing rotation processing on the image and displaying the image.

  Also, as for FIGS. 200 (b) and (c), when the image shown in FIG. 200 (c) is displayed, the rate at which the big hit symbol appears is higher than when the image shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. May be made to have a relationship of increasing. Alternatively, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed, the image shown in FIG. 200A is displayed once, and then displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes every moment in the order of FIGS. 200B and 200C. You may make it do. Alternatively, both FIGS. 200 (b) and (c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 200 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status regarding such “processing to be displayed in a special mode”, performing such a special effect loses its own meaning. Can be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when at least the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed, the operation buttons 410 By performing an operation on a predetermined operation means such as the above, it is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image indicating whether or not the “process of displaying in a special mode” is being executed.

  FIG. 201 shows that the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received in the state where “the expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as the background image” is being performed. The display example on the effect display device 1600 at the time is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, when at least the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed (see FIG. 200), the operation (operation button) by the player is performed. 410, etc.), a character image PG (here, a character simulating a penguin) useful for examining “whether or not a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed” is used as a help image. It is displayed.

  More specifically, if an operation (such as the operation button 410) is performed by the player in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the situation shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 200B, the situation shown in FIG. 201B appears, and when the situation shown in FIG. When an operation (such as the operation button 410) is performed by the player in FIG. 201, the situation shown in FIG.

  However, as is clear from FIGS. 201 (a) to 201 (c), when a character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be useful to determine whether or not “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. In this case, it is not specified whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being executed. Because we dare to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed, we can strongly be aware of the possibility, Even if it does not appear that the “process to be displayed in a special mode” is being executed, it cannot be convinced that the hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. Will be made possible.

  Here, the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is, as shown in FIGS. 201 (a) to (c), whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being executed. Regardless of the execution mode or the execution mode, it can be displayed only in one mode having a predetermined position and holding a ruler in the horizontal direction. As described above, an image (here, a ruler) displayed so as to be extended in the horizontal direction without being affected by the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is caused to appear by an operation performed by the player, so that the image is displayed. (In this case, a ruler) can be made to function as a guide image (help image) for determining whether or not the “special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed”.

  In particular, in this effect example, the position overlapping with the image (princess character) to be subjected to the “processing in a special mode” is not affected by the “processing in a special mode” and is not affected by the horizontal direction. A guide image (here, a ruler) is displayed so as to extend. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) to be subjected to the special processing, it is possible to further help determine whether the special processing is being executed. become.

  That is, in such an effect example, the special effect subjected to the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is a slightly inclined effect, and when the inclined effect is performed, the inclined effect is not performed. Expectation is higher than if not done. For this reason, the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) to determine whether or not the tilted performance is being performed. It is arranged to have a difficulty in recognizing that the processing for displaying in a special mode is not definitely performed. Thereby, it is expected that the player is conscious of the possibility that the degree of expectation is high when it seems that the leaning effect is being executed, and even if it does not appear that the tilting effect is being executed, It is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "the tilted production may be in a state of being executed".

  More specifically, a reference image (here, a ruler) indicating whether or not the special effect (here, the tilt effect is being executed) is set as a target of the “process for displaying in a special mode”. An effect (up to a point where at least a part of the image (decorative design SZ, background image) is displayed in such a manner as to overlap the image (decorative design SZ, background image)) is an effect. ), It is possible to provide an interesting effect that the function is exhibited only for the first time by comparing with an effect image (here, a princess character) that is already displayed.

  Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect progress without displaying the reference image (the ruler in this case) depending on the selection (operation) by the player. If you are not confident that you are in a state where a performance (in this case, a tilted performance) is being performed, you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not dare to perform operations by the player. Become.

  Note that, in this example of the effect, “the process of displaying in a special mode” is executed as “the process of displaying the original image data after performing the rotation processing”, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, image data created based on the original image data may be subjected to a rotation process and then displayed. Further, the image data may not be subjected to the rotation processing, but may be subjected to another processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process for converting the image into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and displaying the image, and when the player is in a situation where the special process can be executed, the special process is performed by the player. The above-described functions and effects can be obtained as long as a guide image that can be displayed can be displayed.

  By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” can be executed when “the expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed. However, according to the result of the effect determination, the decorative symbol SZ may be made executable multiple times within a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It should be noted that, at this time, when the number of times of performing the “display in a special mode” is large, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbols appear is higher than when the number of times is small.

  Also, regarding the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case), not only when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as a background image) is performed, but also the decorative pattern SZ is displayed. The display may be enabled by the operation of the player over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in the stop state, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol SZ by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) to appear is executed. Becomes However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) is a “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image in each case. It is clear that the type differs depending on the type. On the other hand, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is changed in accordance with the type of the background image each time, the character image PG becomes a comparative reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariable and absolute image regardless of the effect state.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed among a plurality of predetermined display positions according to an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

  FIG. 202 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 202A shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this effect situation, the player has a suspicion that “the process of displaying in a special mode has been executed”, and performs an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (reference image). If so, a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at one of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)) predetermined according to the operation mode. Is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at a left position (FIG. 202B) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position (FIG. 202 (c)) in the display area. When the process for displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 202D) in the display area. ) Is performed to display the character image PG.

  As is clear from FIGS. 202 (b) to (d), the form of the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) itself is the same regardless of the display position. Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) and the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) that can be the target of the “display in a special mode” is different, The easiness of determining whether or not the “performing process” is being executed is naturally different.

  For example, when a character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed at the position (center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 202C, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is to be compared. When the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 202 (d) (the right position in the display area). Since the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (standing sign). It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether or not the “processing to be performed” is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, a character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is set to a “display position suitable for comparison” that differs depending on the type of background image each time. Since the display can be performed by the user's operation, it is possible to suitably provide information for determining whether the “display processing in a special mode” is being executed.

  Note that, in this effect example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of times the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time on the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of these operation means is operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In a case where the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (reception period). Can be enabled.

  Further, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation) by itself, and is required for comparison and judgment with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the image becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the expected effect (background image). Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the time when the display is performed by the operation by the player, it is desirable that the display is automatically hidden without any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed and the type of the background image, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed. In some cases, it may not be enough for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to compare / determine whether the state is present. Therefore, in the above-described effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within three seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear again is operated. When the character image PG is displayed, the time for continuously displaying the character image PG is extended. For example, every time the predetermined operation means is operated again, if the display is made to be hidden after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) based on the timing of the operation, intermittently until the player is satisfied. By performing a simple operation, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and the comparison and judgment can be made carefully.

  However, if such endless continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply permitted, it may be extremely easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. . That is, the player may always obtain a confident conclusion that "the special process is being executed" or "the special process is not being executed". Does not explicitly indicate whether or not the display process is being performed, but rather has the difficulty of recognizing it. "

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed (within three seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, By reducing the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler of the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm), the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is reduced. It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is extended in exchange for extension. Since the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) becomes smaller. Can be extended, but it is possible to preferably maintain the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, and the game entertainment interest may be reduced. It could be connected. Therefore, for the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the minimum ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum When the predetermined operation means is re-operated in this state, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended, It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. . That is, in this case, each time a predetermined operation unit is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed as a whole. Gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), and finally does not even appear. Therefore, when one really wants to know whether or not “the process of displaying in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible to encourage the user to perform only the operation, and it is expected that the user will be able to concentrate on the original effect contents in other cases.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over even after the fluctuating effect ends and the next fluctuating effect starts. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable production opportunity, and basically, the “special mode” can be obtained simply by looking at the background image and the decorative pattern SZ. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 200) for estimating whether or not the “display process” is being executed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference images (character images PG) shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 are in a state when they are displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation unit after power-on (or RAM clear). Thereafter, each time an operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally, it does not even appear. . However, when a specific detection is performed or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (when appearing at a plurality of positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of the positions) A process of increasing the display area as a whole (in this case, making the ruler longer) may be prepared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operation means.

  Further, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means for setting the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) to be different from each other, the operation is performed according to which of the operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In this case, the number of remaining times (the number of operations until the minimum unit) in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set separately for each operation means (display position), and the specific operation means is set. It is desirable that, when an operation is performed, only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at a position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operating means is operated in the effect condition shown in FIG. 202 (a), the effect condition shown in FIG. 202 (b) appears. Becomes In the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the first operation means is operated again, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended, but this is not the case. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, even after this, even if the second operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (c) appears, and the comparison criterion associated with the re-operation of the first operating means. The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operation means is operated, only the effect state shown in FIG. 202 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) associated with the re-operation of the first operation means. Is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 202 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (the central position). When another operating means (for example, the first operating means) is not operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display a comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where it is difficult to compare with the background image due to an operation on the predetermined operation unit, the comparison operation is performed separately from the predetermined operation unit. By operating the operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be newly displayed at another display position. Thereby, it is possible to add an interest to search for a position where the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to enhance the ease of comparison.

  Moreover, in the above-described configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already in the display state is not triggered by this. Display is not performed, and the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) And the length in the horizontal direction becomes substantially longer), so that a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the “display in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at a timing or the like where one really wants to know whether or not there is a certain one. However, this consumes two “the number of remaining times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear” set for each of the plurality of operation means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for the above, it can be said that the price for greatly improving the comparability is large.

  As described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed. In order to extend the time during which the PG) is displayed simultaneously, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not it is in the “state in which special processing is being performed” only by the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has appeared by the operation on the first operation means, or the cost is increased. In this case, it is necessary to make a quick decision as to whether or not to further operate the second operation means to greatly improve the comparability, and the disadvantage of the player is reduced by the delay in the decision. Since it is enlarged, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

  According to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timings at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are hidden are different. In addition, the size (the length of the ruler) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) is different from each other according to the operation situation. Further, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) of each operation unit, “the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even when a specific operation unit is operated, but the comparison reference image is displayed when another operation unit is operated. (Character image PG) is displayed ", which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear. Also in the determination, it is possible to provide more interesting by adding a determination element other than the type of the background image to be compared.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable that when the symbol change (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a loss earlier than this, it will be displayed as a non-display as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area. It will be difficult to concentrate on the production contents. As a result, if the player does not notice that the player has stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be used for the production is lost, and the player is stopped due to the loss. It is desirable that the character image PG be hidden when this occurs.

  However, the character image PG may not be hidden when the big hit is stopped, and may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the big hit is stopped, even if the player does not notice this, the big hit game is started. It is expected to function as a production.

  In addition, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that a specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, the user can easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed. It is more desirable to adopt such a technique in order to maintain the gaming interest.

  That is, it is possible to set the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit) in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear for each operation means (display position). If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, so that the user concentrates on the original effect. It becomes difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) can be output as a sound, while the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is “processed to be displayed in a special mode”. The sound output is allowed only when the sound output is not executed. As described above, regarding the execution of the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is not used as the specific suggestion on the negative side (for example, the specific sound (for example, , The sound of a penguin), the player who hates such a specific sound concentrates on the original effect, and is likely to have a high possibility of executing the “processing to display in a special mode”. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at certain times.

  However, for a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “display in a special mode” is not executed. It is desirable that the sound output is not always permitted even if the case becomes. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image already displayed is small (the length of the ruler is changed)) by the operation by the player. When a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin) is output as a sound, it is definitely recognized that the "process for displaying in a special mode" has not been executed. For example, when the sound of a penguin) is not output, there is a case in which the “display in a special mode” is not executed and the state in which the “display in a special mode” is not executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is not output.

  Note that a specific sound (for example, a penguin squeal) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition even when any of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, only when a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means is operated, if the specific sound can be output under the above-described predetermined condition, the specific sound may be output, In the case where a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for determining whether the “display in a special mode” is being executed or the specific sound is not likely to be output, the “special mode” is displayed. It is possible to allow the player to select whether to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for determining whether or not the “display process” is being executed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, the display time is reduced (the ruler is shortened) and displayed, so that the display is performed in a special mode. It is possible to suitably maintain the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the processing is being executed. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin squeals) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (for example, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large). For example, if the volume of the sound is made lower than that in the case where the sound of a penguin is output, the recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is reduced to some extent. It is expected to be maintained.

  The size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are set so that the comparison reference image (character image PG) does not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 202). It is desirable to set each of. The amount of comparison material with the background image can be increased as much as each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, comparison between the background image seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG) is performed. It can be suitably performed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed with a small size (shortened ruler). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any mode may be used as long as it increases the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation unit is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remain the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, a portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with the specific transparency is made smaller (specifically, It is important to display the part that is displayed with the transmissivity shorter), and the part that is no longer displayed at the specific transmissivity may be hidden, or may be displayed with a higher transmissivity than the specific transmissivity. The display may be performed so as to increase the visibility difficulty.

  Further, as described above, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” refers to, for example, the state shown in FIG. 200 (a), the state shown in FIG. 200 (b), and the state shown in FIG. 200 (c). Dynamic depiction processing for changing to a displayed state. When the “processing to be displayed in a special mode” is realized as such a dynamic depiction processing, when the “processing to be displayed in a special mode” is ended, for example, the display state shown in FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b), the display state is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a).

  In this regard, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from being displayed. It is desirable that the “processing for displaying in a special mode” be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player while the “displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is being executed, While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state changes from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) through the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b). 200 (a) "always appears, so that it is possible to facilitate comparison / determination as to whether or not a process for displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

  However, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (the character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player when the “display processing in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b). The display state returns to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a) ". Thus, it is difficult to compare and determine whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being performed. Will be able to In addition, the strategic nature by which the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended can be added.

  In addition, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be performed in a long time. In addition, in the period from when the decoration symbol SZ starts to fluctuate to when it stops fluctuating, a “displaying in a special mode” as a dynamic depiction process performed in a shorter time than a predetermined time (3 seconds); The “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process performed for a longer time than the predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined different timings.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is made non-display after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, the sound of a penguin), the output of the sound is interrupted in a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “display in a special mode” is executed, the specific sound is displayed after the “display in a special mode” is executed. (For example, the sound of a penguin) is suppressed from being maintained, so that the specific sound (eg, , The sound of a penguin) makes it unlikely that a staging situation would occur.

  In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) so as to straddle from before the “display processing in a special mode” is performed until after it is performed. Become. Therefore, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is executed, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed, for example, the display shown in FIG. The state changes from the state through the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is configured from a character simulating a penguin and a ruler, only one of the character simulating a penguin and a ruler may be displayed. In short, it is only necessary that the comparison reference image (character image PG) which is not a target of the “processing for displaying in a special mode” can be made to appear by the operation of the player. However, if a reference image (ruler) indicating a length unit in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being performed. It is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 199 does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's because.

[Prank prevention for multiple operation means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, there may be a case where all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern are sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect relating to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is operated by operating the volume adjusting buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The change processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In either of the states, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation buttons 410, the sword unit 5010, the effect selection left button 331) are used as operation targets by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button (not shown), and the like. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect by the decorative symbol is being performed. We are trying to maintain.

  However, if such a large number of operation means are provided, the existence of these operation means becomes prominent, and thus the player is likely to be subject to mischief. As a result of the rough handling, if any one of the operation means becomes abnormal or malfunctions, the operability and the performance are remarkably deteriorated, and the entertainment interest of the game is inevitably reduced.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-game state in which the game effect according to the big hit determination is not executed (a state in which the above-described operation effect cannot be generated). In a situation where there is a high possibility that mischief has been detected due to detection of an operation by a plurality of operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is to be generated, thereby suppressing the handling of the operation means from being roughly handled. To be able to do it.

More specifically, in a state where the game has not been started (non-game state), of the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means (operations which should not need to be operated) ( Here, when an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword section 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
-In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value relating to the brightness of the staging lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. (Period) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, the operation regarding the volume is accepted, and the volume is not accepted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal operation as the non-gaming state is returned, such that the operation for brightness is accepted and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output.

  In the effect restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value relating to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume The setting value is not displayed '' and the change of the brightness setting value relating to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted even if the operation for the brightness adjustment button is performed, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. '' However, only one of the processing relating to the volume adjustment and the processing relating to the luminance adjustment may be restricted.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment prepares a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the generation of such an effect restriction period (function restriction period). As a result, it is expected to complicate the conditions for generating the production restriction period and to give a sense of tension such as "Is the hall side actually monitoring the mischief?"

  FIG. 203 is a time chart for explaining an example of a process when a production restriction period is generated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined production restriction condition in a non-game state (during a demonstration screen or the like). is there.

  Now, a state in which the game is not started (non-game state) is controlled, and a state in which the standby display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a demonstration screen, or the like) Is displayed). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332) are operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed. If the predetermined effect lamp is in a light emitting state at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the brightness (using the brightness setting value as the light amount). (Reflecting process) is executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

  As described above, in the non-game state, when the player starts the game, the user operates the volume adjustment button and the luminance adjustment button so that the player can set the volume and the luminance to suit his or her preference. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the luminance setting value according to the operation.

  However, as described above, in the non-game state, a mischievous operation may be performed on a plurality of operation means including the volume adjustment button and the luminance adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or a failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and the performance are remarkably reduced, and a decrease in gaming interest is inevitable.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischief detection are prepared, and in the non-game state, any of the operation patterns is used. Based on the detection that the operation has been performed, a process of generating an effect restriction period (function restriction period) to which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) can be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state, it is recognized that the condition relating to the effect restriction is satisfied. And
a. Timing of the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started in response to the detection of the operation on the sword section 5010, and operation detection on the operation button 410 is newly generated until the timing of the first timer time is completed; In addition, the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts counting when the operation of the newly generated operation button 410 is detected, and the operation of the sword unit 5010 is not detected until the second timer time ends. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set
b. Triggering of a third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by detection of the operation of the operation button 410, and newly detecting operation of the sword unit 5010 until the third timer time is completely measured; In addition, when the operation of the newly generated sword unit 5010 is detected, the timing of the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation of the operation button 410 is not detected until the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set

  Note that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and an effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions for other operation patterns are satisfied. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. The first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or the time may be measured using a different timer.

  Here, the “long press on the operation button 410”, the “continuous hit operation (multiple operations) on the operation button 410”, and the like are not required in a state where the game has not been started (non-game state). It can be said. However, these modes are modes in which an operation can be instructed in the operation effect in the game execution state, and therefore, even in the non-game state, when starting the game, the player may have a certain purpose (for example, wishing or running practice). It is assumed that these operations can be performed by the user, and it has been relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, regarding the “combination of operations for a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”)” which is a detection target for the purpose of mischief, the game execution state It can be said that it is important to avoid being erroneously detected as being set so as not to be instructed as an operation at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the effect limitation period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is noted that before and after the operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation on the other operation means (for example, the sword section 5010) is performed. As a condition, only when the operation of a plurality of operation means is disturbed within a relatively short period of time, the detection condition according to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and an effect restriction period (function restriction period) is generated. I have to. Therefore, a player or the like who touches only once each time, not due to the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more suitably avoid a large decrease in the operation rate.

  Strict detection conditions in this way prevent the operation restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from dropping significantly, and also prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being distorted due to mischief. This is because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations when the operation is performed, and even if the detection condition is strict, there is a high possibility that the detection condition will eventually be satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, an operation on the sword unit 5010 is detected at a timing tq1 in the non-game state. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and determines whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer expires. (The first stage).

  That is, as described above, in the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (the sword unit 5010 → the operation button 410 → the sword unit 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period. Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are raised one by one.

  At the timing tq1, the first stair of the three stairs up to the generation of the effect restriction period is ascended. The state of the first stage can be continued until the end of the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds), and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer expires, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state of the 0th stage by going down one staircase).

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is not completely consumed (the first stage state), and the operation pattern (Detection pattern) The “second-stage detection condition” among the three conditions of “a” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and detects the third-stage detection condition (here, the last detection time) until the second timer time is completed. (The detection condition of (2)) is determined (second state).

  That is, at the timing tq2, the user goes up the second stairs among the three stairs until the effect restriction period is generated. The state of the second stage can be continued until the end of the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds), and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword section 5010) is not satisfied. After the end of the second timer period, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state at the 0th stage by descending two stairs).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 203, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is not completely consumed (second state), and the operation pattern (detection The “third-stage detection condition (final detection condition)” among the three conditions included in the pattern a) is satisfied. Therefore, based on the detection, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays (reproduces) the display (reproduction) of the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state in which the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed in the effect display device 1600. Let it start. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value relating to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. Further, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value concerning the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Produce a production restriction. Then, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

  According to such a configuration, if a plurality of operations are performed so as to be disturbed, an effect restriction period occurs, so that the operation by the mischief can be suppressed.

  Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (go up the stairs), but if a time-out occurs in the middle of the road, All state levels are canceled to return to the original state. Thereby, even when the game is ended in a state where the state level is raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player attempts to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of increasing the state level (climbing the stairs) in this way, the operation means to be restricted when the effect restriction period occurs, such as the “volume adjustment button” or the “brightness” A case in which the “adjustment button” is operated may be assumed. However, these operation means (the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button) are set so that when the player starts the game, the operation reception is performed so that the volume and the brightness can be set to suit the user's preference. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much of these operating means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) is operated during the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs), It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or to affect the first timer time, the second timer time, or the like.

  In other words, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated by the mischief, the effect restriction period cannot be generated with this as a trigger. However, at least the already raised state level will not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period has occurred, the production restriction target will be `` volume adjustment button '' or `` brightness adjustment button '' Since the operations for these are invalidated at all, the mischief for the “volume adjustment button” and the “brightness adjustment button”, which are not detected as the operation by the mischief, is also preferably suppressed. To be expected.

  In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used at the time of mischief detection, the operation pattern is sandwiched between “two operations (timing tq1 and tq3 in FIG. 203) on another operation unit (for example, the sword unit 5010)”. Regarding the “operation (timing tq2 in FIG. 203) for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)” which is a form, the condition is that the operation is performed not a single time but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, an operation on the sword section 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within a fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. When the operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the detection condition for the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the effect restriction period is generated. Further, the fifth to seventh timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or the time may be measured using a different timer.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Also, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the sword section 5010, is detected again (a specific number (here, 2 times) larger than the number of times to be detected (here, 2 times)). In the third detection, the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset so that the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. It is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is continuously operated n times (here, twice) at the timing during which the sword unit 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied, and the effect restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated 1 time (> n times) between two operations on the sword section 5010, the effect restriction period is reduced. Since it will not occur, it is expected that it will be complicated to complicate the conditions for the production restriction period and to have a sense of tension such as "Isn't the hall side actually monitoring the mischief act?" Become.

  In order to increase the complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is It is desirable that when the operation is performed within each timer time over (n times), the state is controlled to be different from the original state (the state may be different between m times and 1 times). . Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” in the state controlled to these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

  Further, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword unit 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times), If the production restriction period can be generated (similar to the case where the operation is performed n times), the condition for generating the production restriction period is made more complicated, and "the mischief is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that a sense of tension such as "?" Also in this case, it is needless to say that a timer time is generated each time the operation button 410 is operated, and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of “predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))” that trigger the generation of the effect restriction period are prepared.

  Nevertheless, such mischief is very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to disadvantages on the hall side. Therefore, for specific videos appearing during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content is such that it describes appropriate handling methods for games and productions, etc., so as to suppress a decline in gaming interest. It is desirable.

  As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “the operation reception relating to the volume is permitted. As a result, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation relating to the brightness is accepted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. "

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, at timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the player starts playing the game. A case may be assumed in which, by generating a start winning, a transition is made to a game execution state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischief and starting the game has been achieved, in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed, End the production restriction period (function restriction period) for a certain item.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that the reflection may be insufficient, and therefore, at least the fluctuation of the decorative pattern which has triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but `` Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and the brightness is not output. Even if the brightness is adjusted, the current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. "

  As shown in FIG. 204, when the game is shifted to the game execution state, the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether the control is performed during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the operation on the sword unit 5010 or the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time or the second timer time is not counted as a trigger, and the effect restriction period does not occur. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the game execution state without waiting for the original continuation time as the production restriction period, the game is performed in such a manner that a part of the restriction contents during the production restriction period is left. Since the state is shifted to the execution state, reflection on the mischief can be encouraged without hindering the progress of the game effect.

  In addition, about a partial restriction | limiting period, the decoration symbol which is the trigger which complete | finished the production restriction period until the change display of the decoration symbol is complete | finished, and a decoration symbol is made into a stop state in the state which the number of hold | maintenance is 0 Until (until the non-game state), at least may be continued.

  Further, at a timing when the game execution state ends and the game state shifts to the non-game state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204), a predetermined safe time is set, and the time until the predetermined safe time elapses is set. It is desirable to continue the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated even in the non-game state. That is, in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, it is assumed that the excitement of the player is not cooled down and the operation on a plurality of operation means is performed too much. This is because if a penalty is imposed, the game may be immediately stopped. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game is shifted to the non-game state.

  In addition, when the game is shifted to the non-game state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that the reflection on the mischief may still be insufficient, so the partial restriction is performed until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again after the safe time has elapsed.

  Also, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol change time from the start of the display change of the decorative symbol to the stop. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even when the change display of the decorative symbol is immediately terminated, the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is performed at least until the safe time is terminated. The invalidation state can be continued or the partial restriction period can be continued.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol fluctuation display is started after the effect restriction period (function restriction period) ends, the symbol fluctuation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol fluctuation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative symbols be displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the above-described partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

  Further, in the above-described example, even if it is detected that the approach to the production restriction period is approached during the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (in FIG. 203, a portion where fine dots are given). Also does not appear. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output each time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the user goes up the stairs at which a penalty occurs), thereby prompting the user to stop the operation due to the mischief. You may do so. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operation means that has been detected. Similarly, every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the user goes up the stairs of penalty occurrence), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. Is also good.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's because.

[Prevention of noise due to adjustment confirmation sound at opening]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, there may be a case where all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern are sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect relating to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is operated by operating the volume adjusting buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The change processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In either of the states, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  By the way, since there are only new customers who want to start a game for a while after the hall opens, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently performed to start the game with a set value that suits his / her preference. However, in this case, every time the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is performed, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output, the adjustment confirmation sound reverberates in the hall and the atmosphere is ruined. It's an entertainment.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment does not allow the player to accept an operation related to volume adjustment or an operation related to brightness adjustment from when the power is turned on until a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", and the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value can be accepted. It is decided to be.

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume set value) and the luminance set value relating to the output volume of the effect sound are changed to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. In other words, in this case, the "specific value" that is automatically set is adopted as a set value of the volume that many players tend to like, so that many games can be played in a time period immediately after the hall is opened. It is possible to expect that it is difficult for a user to adjust the sound volume setting value and the brightness setting value to his or her own preference. The satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be that a certain time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that a predetermined command is received from the main control MPU 1310a, or that the peripheral control MPU 1511a The specific process may end.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the sound volume setting value or the sound volume setting value is determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition or the arrival of a predetermined timing after the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Although a change in the brightness setting value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the change in the setting value is accepted is performed for a predetermined time (for example, one hour). First, it is generated. After such a special period (opening-only period) ends, when a change in the set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. I have. As a result, for a while after the opening of the hall (until the time required for completing various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), a state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output is maintained. Thus, it is possible to provide an opportunity to perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment for starting a game with a set value that suits the user's preference.

  FIG. 205 is a time chart showing an example of a process related to a special period (a period exclusively for opening a store).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 205, assuming that power is turned on at timing tr0, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment performs the volume control by the player until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed in a state in which the operation for the adjustment and the operation for the luminance adjustment are not accepted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to a game such as a winning start is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during the restoration of the power supply appears or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (symbol stop display, demo screen, etc.) is not yet performed. Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) comes, detection related to a game such as a winning start is allowed, and a game start waiting state ( (A state of waiting for a winning start). The effect display device 1600 also displays a stop symbol (standby screen), so that it is possible to recognize that the symbol is in a symbol change waiting state.

  At this time, while the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", "acceptance of the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted. Even if the change of the set value is received, a special period (a period exclusively for opening a store) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a store opening period can be continued until a timing tr2 at which a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period comes, and when the period is ended at the timing tr2, the volume is reduced. When a change in the set value or the luminance set value is received, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 has arrived, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the change of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and the background behind it are displayed. Various background images (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative design) displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) are displayed when the transition from the store opening period to the normal business period has been triggered It will not be changed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and the game start wait state is reached, until the timing tr2 comes (until the store opening exclusive period ends). During the period), the state in which the adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained, so that it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound from reverberating immediately after opening. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), the state automatically shifts to a state in which an adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by a new customer have settled down, finer adjustments while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value can be allowed. In addition, while the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) is maintained, the system automatically shifts to the normal business period in which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, so that a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the store. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the control is performed during the store opening period during which the adjustment sound is not output until the adjustment is performed.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game start waiting state is established (after timing tr1), when a change in the volume set value or the brightness set value is accepted, the change is made according to the set value changed in the effect display device 1600. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the luminance side) is performed. Therefore, by confirming the display of such parameters, it is possible to adjust the set value according to the user's preference.

  However, even if the output relating to the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed during the period immediately after the opening of the store (a period exclusively for opening the store), the change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is reflected as the volume or the light amount. In the end, the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in a single color of adjustment, and there is a concern that the atmosphere may be spoiled and spoiled. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the volume set value is received until the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume set value is reflected as a production sound. It is desirable not to. Similarly, regarding the luminance, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the luminance setting value is received before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed luminance setting value is regarded as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (a period exclusively for opening the store), each player adjusts the setting value according to his or her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving the opportunity to adjust the set value according to the user's preference, the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light, so that the atmosphere in the hall is reduced. It can be maintained suitably.

  It should be noted that a state in which the changed luminance setting value is not reflected as the light amount may be maintained even after the timing tr2 arrives for only the luminance out of the volume and the luminance. In other words, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption is increased by the operation of the mischief before the game is started, and for the brightness whose power consumption is larger than the volume, the game is not started while the game is not started. It is desirable that adjustments not be reflected. Also, unlike the volume adjustment sound, it is not possible to confirm the degree of adjustment of the brightness adjustment sound, so that the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (the time as the exclusive period for opening the store has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variable display by the decorative symbol) starts based on the winning start. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is assumed that the frequency of these adjustments is greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening exclusive period based on the detection is ended early. Then, processing for shifting to the normal business period can be executed.

  However, during the decorative symbol fluctuation display period due to the start winning that ended the store opening period early, a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is received, and an adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. In such a case, it is assumed that many of the players will adjust the volume and the brightness after the period dedicated to the opening of the store has ended early, and this may lead to an overturn.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the store opening exclusive period is ended early and the normal business period is started. However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not permitted until at least the end of the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol generated by this (during the fluctuation).

  FIG. 206 is a time chart showing an example of a process when a game is started when the period is set to a store opening period (special period).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 206, it is assumed that a start winning is detected at a timing tr3 in which the time as the special period has not yet been exhausted. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the processing for the exclusive opening period of the store is completed, and the process shifts to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. This fluctuation suppression processing is performed while the fluctuating display relating to the decorative symbol is being performed. "Allows accepting changes in the volume setting value and the luminance setting value, and changing these setting values in the output sound in the output state. It is possible to execute processing to reflect the volume and the amount of light of the staging lamp in the light-emitting state, but to not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the luminance adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is changed. " The difference from the “processing during the store opening period” is that whether or not the decorative design is in a fluctuating state is displayed and the change in the set value is reflected as a volume or light amount. This is the case, and the contents of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remain the same.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, such a fluctuation suppressing process is changed to a non-gaming state (a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Unless it is migrated, it will be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and at the timing tr4, the non-game state is set. If the number of holds is immediately returned to (the state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not passed since the opening of the store opening period that was terminated early. Even after the opening of the store), the special period (a period exclusively for opening the store) does not occur again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-game state after the timing tr4, a period (normal business period) in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when a change in the volume set value or the luminance set value is received. It will be controlled. In the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed luminance setting value is also the light amount of the effect lamp which is in a light emitting state. Has been reflected as. In addition, in the effect display device 1600, a stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that the symbol is in a state of waiting for change.

  A player who creates a situation such as "ending the opening period (special period) early and then immediately ending the game execution state" cannot be satisfied with the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, and once started It is assumed that the player has a desire to make more detailed adjustments until the game is interrupted. ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  In the above-described example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) during which the store opening period (special period) continues may be a fixed time after the store opening period (special period) occurs. Alternatively, it may be the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

  Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the luminance setting value to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be timing tr1 or a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  Also, in the above description example, there is a technical feature in the configuration relating to the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 is the same as described above. You may make it implement | achieve as a different process.

  Further, in the above description example, at the timing tr2, the decorative design and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative design and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be performed.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's because.

  In the above-described example, only one of the set values of the volume and the luminance may be changeable.

[Control for volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, there may be a case where all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern are sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect relating to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is operated by operating the volume adjusting buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The change processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In either of the states, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a case where a first hit determination is performed in response to a game ball being received in the first starting port 2002 and a case where the second starting port 2004 is determined. In which the second hit determination is performed in response to the game ball being accepted, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed in accordance with the hit determination. After that, a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be given. However, the expected values for those benefits are set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

  In the above-described example, at the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 at the maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2,000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 at a maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the change of the volume setting value is accepted in a “game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, “ The first-side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and "the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed." In any of the "second side execution states", the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is permitted in any of the states is set to be the same.

  According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range and the like, regardless of the state (the game start waiting state, the first side execution state, the second side execution state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustment according to each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound is changed when the game start waiting state and the first side execution state are in the above-described state. When this is done, a volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the “second side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

  In other words, in the "game start waiting state", the effect sound is not output because the game is not being executed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed. The subsequent loudness cannot be confirmed as audible sound. For this reason, it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the set value (volume set value) relating to the output volume of the effect sound is changed in the “game start waiting state”.

  Also, in the “first side execution state”, although there is a situation in which an effect sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. In many cases, it is controlled to a state (low-probability non-time saving game state), and the effect cannot be expected so much. In recent years, it has been confirmed that in such a gaming state with a low degree of expectation, a player plays a game while watching a portable device such as a smartphone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is issued in order to reliably notify the player of the change and the changed volume level to the player. Is desirably output.

  On the other hand, in the “second side execution state”, the effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high. ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the degree of expectation for the effect is high, the volume adjustment for enjoying the effect tends to be performed.Therefore, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, It may be difficult to hear the effect sound or BGM according to the double hit determination, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the “second side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound, BGM, and the like according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to provide a chance to adjust the sound volume in an environment in which the user can listen to the game so as to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  However, in the “second side execution state”, the degree of expectation for the effect is increasing, and even after the second symbol change is stopped and displayed in the losing manner, it is likely that the second symbol change will again change and be changed to the big hit mode. It can be said that securing time (afterglow) for consciousness of the game is important for maintaining the entertainment interest of the game. In this regard, if the normal process in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after being shifted to the "game start waiting state", the process related to the "second execution state" may be performed. It is possible for the player to easily detect that the game has been ended in the loss mode and the state has been shifted to the "game start waiting state", and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, when the process related to the “second side execution state” is completed and the process is shifted to the “game start waiting state”, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the “game start waiting state” is performed. Control so that the normal process (the process of permitting the change of the volume setting value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed when in the "game start waiting state". It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”, “the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value has been changed. However, it is desirable that a process of not outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a process of not allowing the change of the volume set value itself be performed. However, the possibility that the "second-side execution state" is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the transition from the "second-side execution state" to the "game start waiting state" is more positively determined. In the same manner as in the "second side execution state", the process of "allowing the change of the volume setting value but not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" It may be more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the “first-side execution state”, the degree of expectation for the effect has not increased, and basically, the first symbol change is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. Therefore, unlike the case of the above-mentioned “second-side execution state”, when the processing relating to the “first-side execution state” is completed and the processing is shifted to the “game-start waiting state”, the “first-side execution state” is different. The above-described normal processing (processing of permitting a change in the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is also performed even in the “state”, is performed as it is. Is desirable.

  By the way, in the situation where the operation is controlled to the “first side execution state”, a mischief operation is performed in which a plurality of operation units are disturbed in a relatively short time due to stress that does not easily win a big hit. It is concerned. In other words, as a result of rough handling, if any one of the operation means becomes abnormal or malfunctioning, the operability and the performance are remarkably reduced, and a further decline in the game entertainment is inevitable.

  Therefore, not only when the game is controlled to the “game start waiting state” but also when the state is controlled to the “first side execution state”, there is a possibility that the operation is detected by a plurality of operation means and a mischief is caused. When the situation is high, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of “Prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means (see FIGS. 203 and 204)” may be generated.

That is, in this case, a predetermined operation of the plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the “game start waiting state (non-game state)” and the “first side execution state” When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword section 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
-In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
・ Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value relating to the brightness of the staging lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Is performed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image on the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if an image related to the “first-side execution state” appears before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation regarding the volume is accepted and the volume is not accepted. A normal state as a "game start wait state" or a "first side execution state" such that an adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and an operation reception relating to luminance is permitted and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Will be returned to.

  In addition, as for the detailed contents and other examples related to such an effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt the respective contents in the description example of “Prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means”. However, in this case, even if the state is shifted from the “game start waiting state” to the “first side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early. Various processes related to the effect restriction period are continued as they are under the same conditions as in the “game start waiting state”. As a result, it is expected that the mischief operation when controlled to the “first-side execution state” having a low degree of expectation is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the state is shifted from the “game start waiting state” to the “second side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the “production restriction period ( Processing for Early Termination of Function Restriction Period) and its modified examples are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere at the time when the “second side execution state” having a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" must be output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's because.

  In the above-described example, only one of the set values of the volume and the luminance may be changeable.

[Period of the operation acceptance period (valid period) itself]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. Etc.), it is possible to execute an effect determination (such as a preliminary determination) as to which of the expected effects (a plurality of effects) is to appear selectively. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and the result of the big hit determination is performed. The fluctuating effect by the corresponding decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description, movable body operation, etc. Is provided as an effect having a "function that indicates the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the above-described variation pattern determination, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the first variation pattern is obtained regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“intrinsic reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is allowed when the based symbol effect progresses to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of performing the variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the announcement effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. When the symbol effect based on the variation pattern of No. 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing, an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is allowed can be generated. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, an operation reception effect (effective Period) does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns for generating an "intrinsic reception effect" and a plurality of second variation patterns for generating an "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared such that “intrinsic reception effect” and “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

  However, the operation accepting effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is a predetermined change (directing) for the effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the valid period. At least one of a display change in the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a change in the light emission by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is performed only after the operation. (Period) The effect of the effect itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game until the effect is performed after the operation is reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
First operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern when an operation by the player is detected;
A second operation effecting means capable of executing a post-operation effect in such a manner that, when an operation by the player is detected, an elapsed time from the timing at which the detection is performed is continued until a predetermined time value is reached; We are preparing for it.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself is performed when the operation reception effect is performed by the first operation effect unit and when the operation reception effect is performed by the second operation effect unit. Is provided with a different effect, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment until the effect is performed after the operation.

  That is, in the operation accepting effect by the first operation effecting means, the post-operation effect is executed until a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed earlier or later during the validity period. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the validity period occurs is advantageous in that the execution state as the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time and the effect is enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the operation accepting effect by the second operation effecting means, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the validity period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until reaching the predetermined time value. The effect is performed after the operation. Therefore, performing the operation at a later time without performing the operation for a while after the validity period has occurred can maintain a longer total production time from the start of the validity period to the end of the post-production effect. It can be said that it is advantageous in enjoying the production.

  In this case, the effect generation condition of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effecting means, the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first fluctuation pattern progresses until a specific timing. The operation accepting effect produced by the second operation effecting means is such that the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the advance effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. To obtain a special result, which can be realized as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern that occurs when the symbol effect has progressed to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation accepting effect by the first operation effecting means occurs when the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first fluctuation pattern is different from the specific timing. You may make it implement | achieve as what arises when it progresses to a timing.

  FIG. 207 shows a first example of performing the post-operation effect in such a manner that the effect is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the valid period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about operation reception production.

  Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern has advanced to the timing tr1 while the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the “first operation accepting effect in which the effect reception is allowed” is satisfied. A first operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) ends when the timing tr3 at which a predetermined set time has elapsed without effect reception being received does not execute the post-operation effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted, an image display simulating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation. An operation promotion effect is performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (valid period) starts, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted (or that the effect reception has been permitted) is output. . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptable sound for the above-described predetermined time, and in the middle stage where the predetermined time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

  Here, "output of the acceptable sound" means that the "sound data including the acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1, and that the sound is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the current sound data arrives at the timing tr1. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before to after the timing tr1 so as to straddle the timing tr1. Here, the term “set to a non-output state” means that the state of assignment to the channel of “sound data including acceptable sound” is maintained, and the state of assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. However, the concept includes that the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is ended and the sound (including silence data) is reproduced thereafter.

  And, as described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been detected and the effect reception has been performed. The post-operation effect (operation-based process using the first effect member) started in this manner is based on the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received during the effective period. The processing is terminated when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) has arrived. The “operation-based process using the first effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process for effecting the effect of the first decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect has been accepted.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 207, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the first effect member) The processing is executed for a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr2a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), an after-operation effect (operation-based processing using the first effect member) Is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation accepting effect, it is possible to perform the operation immediately after the validity period occurs, as an execution state as an after-operation effect (execution state of an operation-based process using the first effect member). Is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous in enjoying the production.

  As will be described later, in the first operation reception effect, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-based process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even if it is performed, the output state of the acceptable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 208 is a time chart illustrating an example of the second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detected timing reaches a predetermined time value.

  Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has advanced to timing tr11 while the second effect condition required for the occurrence of the “second operation accepting effect in which effect reception is allowed” has been satisfied. A second operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. Similarly to the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (valid period) does not execute the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 at which the predetermined set time has elapsed without the effect reception being performed. It is to end. A time value different from the predetermined setting time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect may be set. During the execution period of the second operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted, an image display simulating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. An operation promotion effect is performed.

  Also when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted (or that the effect reception has been permitted) is output. You. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment also does not continue the output state of the permissible sound for the predetermined set time, and does not continue the predetermined set time yet. At the timing tr12, which is a non-output state, so that it cannot be heard.

  Note that the “acceptable sound is output” here also means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr11, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “reception period of the acceptable sound” in the sound data is arrived at the timing tr11. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output so as to straddle the timing tr11 from before to after the timing tr11. Also, in the case of “turning to a non-output state” here, in addition to releasing the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "permissible sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and the sound (including silence data) is reproduced thereafter.

  As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the “operation-based process using the second effect member” as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been detected and the effect reception has been performed. Regarding the post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the second effect member) started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of the timing at which the effect is received during the valid period. It is configured to continue until the elapsed time from the time when the operation is performed reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as an effective period). The “operation-based process using the second effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process for effecting the effect of the second decorative movable body based on the fact that the effect has been accepted.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 208, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the second effect member) The processing is performed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-based process using the second effect member) Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing arriving after the timing tr14) at which a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate the device at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period is generated, until the effect after the operation is completed after the effective period starts. It is possible to provide the effect of maintaining the effect time as a whole for a long time, which is advantageous in enjoying the effect.

  As will be described later, in the second operation reception effect also, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-based process using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the acceptable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, the first and second operation reception effects (effective periods) are given different effects to themselves, and the operation reception effects (effective periods) are different from each other. By generating based on the satisfaction of the condition, it is expected that the entertainment of the game from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (effective period) to the effect after the operation is suitably maintained.

  However, the following problem remains only by adopting the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period). In other words, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is more advantageous to operate at an earlier time during the effective period in order to enjoy the effect, and to operate at a later time during the effective period is more advantageous to enjoy the effect. Since the preferred operation timing for enjoying the effect, such as the presence of the effect, is determined, the effect of the effect within the validity period is still poor, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, it is more preferable that the operation reception effect is executed as a special operation reception effect having a mode described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart illustrating an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has advanced to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the occurrence of the special operation reception effect has been satisfied, the special effect based on the progress to the timing tr21 is established. Generate an operation reception effect (valid period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the first and second operation reception effects, and a predetermined set time elapses and the timing tr23 comes without effect reception. Even if there is no operation, an effect reception is always generated within the validity period, and an after-operation effect described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined time in the special operation reception effect is set to a time value longer than the predetermined time in the first operation reception effect or the predetermined time in the second operation reception effect.

  Also, when the special operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted (or that the effect reception has been permitted) is output. Is done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment converts the permissible reception sound (FIG. 209) into the permissible reception sound (FIGS. 207 and 208) generated corresponding to the first and second operation reception effects. The output state is continued for a longer time. In this example, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 209 is also set to a non-output state at a timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed, so that the sound cannot be heard. However, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 209 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 comes.

  Note that the “acceptable sound is output” here also includes a state in which “sound data including an acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr21, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “reception period of acceptable reception sound” in the present sound data arrives at the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before to after the timing tr21 so as to straddle the timing tr21. Also, in the case of “turning to a non-output state” here, in addition to releasing the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "permissible sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and the sound (including silence data) is reproduced thereafter.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when an operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect reception is performed, based on the effect reception being performed, the “first movable state” illustrated in FIG. The operation-based processing using the decorative body (first production member) ”and the“ operation-based processing using the second movable decorative body (second production member) ”shown in FIG. 208 are started in parallel. It is what you do. Therefore, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is started, and the “operation-based process using the first effect member” started in this manner is not performed at any timing within the valid period. Even when the effect is received, the process is terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has arrived, and the operation using the second effect member is performed. Caused operation ”is started. Regarding the“ operation caused by operation using the second effect member ”thus started, even if the effect is received at any timing within the validity period, the effect is accepted. This is continued until the elapsed time from when the operation is performed reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the validity period). To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 209, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), the “operation-based process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effect. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the “operation-based process using the second effect member” has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. It ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr22a within the validity period (timing tr21 to tr23), the post-operation effect may be described as “the operation caused by the operation using the first effect member. The "process" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the "operation-based process using the second effect member" is determined in advance from the timing tr22a. This is executed until the timing tr26 (the timing arriving after the timing tr25) at which the elapsed time value has elapsed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to the present embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. If an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is reached. Operation-induced processing "and" operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value ".

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-based process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. As a price, the end timing of the “operation-based process using the second effect member” in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the expiration of the validity period and is operated at a later time, the end timing of the “operation-based processing using the second effect member” in the post-operation effect is not changed. Although it is possible to arrive at a relatively late stage, a disadvantage arises in that it is not possible to maintain a long execution state of the “operation-based process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effect.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no operation timing that is the most desirable for exciting the production,
・ In exchange for shortening the time until the “operation-based processing using the second effect member” is completed, the execution state of the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is lengthened and enjoyed. (To operate early in the validity period), or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-based process using the first effect member", should the time until the "operation-based process using the second effect member" end be extended and enjoyed? (Do you operate later in the validity period?), Or
-The time during which the "operation-based process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-based process using the second effect member" is ended are gradually sacrificed, and the entire process is performed. To balance as a result (whether to operate early or late within the validity period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be given a strategic operation production effect such as this, providing an operation reception effect that is less likely to be tired of being able to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player Will be able to

  As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, if an effect reception is performed while the acceptable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (operation-based processing using the first effect member, Operation-based processing using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptable sound is released at this point.

  Here, in the above-described example, when an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (FIG. 209), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes is reached. Used operation-based process "and" operation-based process using a second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value ". . However, even if a special operation acceptance effect occurs, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, if the player has failed to determine the jackpot or has failed to determine the predetermined effect) In this case, even if an effect is received within the special operation reception effect, the “operation-based processing using the first effect member” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 209). It is more preferable that the "operation-based process using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set relatively short is performed in a different effect mode.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. And "operation-based processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value." In this case, the effect content is equivalent to the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) in which only one of them is executed. The feeling can be suitably maintained. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, “the operation-based processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “from the timing at which the effect is received” When the post-operation effect is performed in parallel with the "operation-based process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time of the operation reaches the predetermined time value," the first operation accepting effect or the second operation It is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbols appear in the reception effect is higher than when the effect after the operation appears.

  However, despite the operation within the special operation reception effect, this may not be detected properly (detection error), and the effect reception may not be performed. As a result, the validity period ends without the effect reception being performed. In such a case, the player who saw that the “operation-based processing using the first effect member” was not performed even though the operation was performed was erroneously recognized as being reduced to an operation accepting effect in which only one operation was performed. Then, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, as for the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player during the valid period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the “predetermined in the effect pattern The operation-causing process using the first effect member, the execution state of which is continued until the given timing is reached "and" the operation-based process, which is continued until the time elapsed from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value, " It is preferable that the “operation-based process using two effect members” is executed. As a method for automatically generating (automatically accepting) operation reception and an effect mode related thereto, it is possible to use any of the above-described or later-described examples, or an appropriate combination thereof, and further, the contents described in the description. .

  In the above description example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect occur, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted is output. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the acceptable sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated is changed to the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect. It is used as an effect sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptable sound output when the effect is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is allowed (when an image display imitating the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains is displayed). By confirming how long the permissible reception sound in the output state is continued, the operation reception effect is described as “the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Operation-based process using the effect member "and" operation-based process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value "are executed. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time in which the “operation-based process using the first effect member” can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which effect reception is performed). When the operation reception effect is recognized as the “special operation reception effect”, there is a disadvantage that the strategic strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

  However, even if it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation accepting effect, it is important that some strategic strategic characteristics remain. Therefore, the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the allowable reception sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is determined as “specified operation reception effect (effective period)”. It is desirable to execute the processing as if the output state is set to the non-output state when a specific time that is less than half of the “set time (timing tr21 to tr23)” has elapsed. According to such a configuration, the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation acceptance effect (valid period)” has elapsed. If the output state is maintained, it is possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Timing tr21 to tr23) ”can be provided with a stunning strategic property in a state in which more than half of the time remains.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for the acceptable sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated, the effect reception is performed in the output state. Even if the output state is maintained, the acceptable state output when a special operation reception effect is generated, if the effect is received in the output state, the output state is forcibly terminated. I have to. In other words, in this case, when an effect is received in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect (a situation in which the specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound was output), the operation acceptance effect Is a "special operation reception effect", and whether a more highly expected aspect appeared as a post-operation effect is an important concern. One of them (the operation reception effect is "special operation reception effect" ) Can be easily recognized simply by checking whether or not the output state of the acceptable sound has been terminated upon the reception of the effect. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not terminated and that the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the user switches his / her feeling to "expect as an after-operation effect. It is expected to concentrate on "Is a high degree mode appeared?" In this case, "the effect design is designed to have a relationship in which the rate at which a special operation acceptance effect is newly generated increases until the symbol is stopped, when a mode having a higher degree of expectation appears as the post-operation effect. It is desirable.

  In addition, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, an image display simulating the operation means used as an operation target in each operation reception effect, and how long the effective time is. An indication of whether or not the gauge is left is displayed, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation is performed. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when an effect is received, the gauge state is left (displayed) and "the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Operation-based processing using the effect member "and" operation-based processing using the second effect member continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value "are respectively started. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize after the effect has been received based on the remaining amount of the gauge remaining as an indication of which timing within the validity period the effect was received. Thus, it is possible to predict whether the execution state of the operation-based process using the first effect member will end immediately or the like. In addition, as a method of starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the above-described examples or the following examples or an appropriate combination can be used.

  In the special operation reception effect, by performing an operation-related display (a precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs It is desirable to tighten. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player can suitably enjoy the strategic strategicity over the entire period of the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute an operation-related display (an indication effect) indicating the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted. However, for the operation-related display, it is assumed that this is executed as “a short indication effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function”. Desirable not to have.

  Here, as the operation-related display (a short indication effect short in the timing suggestion function) performed on the effect display device 1600 before the valid period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs, For example, this can be realized as an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when “image display simulating operation means” appears in a fade-in manner.

  FIG. 210 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process related to an operation-related display when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is performed, and a process related to channel assignment of sound data including a permissible sound. is there.

  That is, in terms of ergonomics, when the validity period occurs, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is displayed several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the validity period occurs. It is known that it is possible to perform an operation such that an effect is received at a timing where there is no such effect. However, even though the validity period has not occurred for several frames, if the "image display simulating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode, the "operation means There is a possibility that an effect may not be received even if the operation is performed while the "image display imitating the game" is displayed, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 210, the timing trA several frames before the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started on the basis of the operation, but the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in a normal mode in a situation where the valid period has not occurred.

  More specifically, at the timing trA, a “permissible image” that can be realized as a fade-in image in a state where “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in a fade-in mode, a predetermined effect image, or the like. "Previous operation related display" is started. Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed, the “image imitating the operation means” is changed from the state in which the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed. "Display" is shifted to a state of being displayed in a normal mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, at the time of occurrence of the validity period, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 210, the output of the acceptable sound is not started at the timing trA, but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

  In other words, in order to be able to operate so that the effect is received at a timing shortly after the validity period has occurred, the acceptable sound is also output several frames before the validity period occurs. It seems that it is desirable to make it happen. However, if the acceptable sound is output several frames before the validity period occurs, the output timing may be different from the appearance timing of “image display simulating operation means”. As a result, it may give a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a pre-permissible operation-related sound that is different from the acceptable sound. However, if the permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period of time, the permissible operation-related sound is not an independent effect sound but may be heard integrally with the permissible operation sound. In the end, there is a concern that a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred may be caused.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, prior to the generation of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (the operation-related pre-permission display) is displayed for several frames. On the other hand, the operation-related sound (the operation-related pre-permission related sound) is not intentionally executed, but is output only when the valid period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 210, the acceptable sound is output by allocating “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of allocating the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel is ended so that the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. I have. However, the “sound data including the acceptable sound” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 comes. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left allocated to the channel, but the “reproduction period of the acceptable sound” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the example shown in FIG. 210, when an effect is received between timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 and tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is terminated, and the image display that simulates the operation means is performed. "Is hidden. On the other hand, as for the "sound data including the acceptable sound", the assignment state for the channel is maintained, and the acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle as described above.

  FIG. 211 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process related to an operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and a process related to channel assignment of sound data including an allowable reception sound.

  As shown in FIG. 211, in the special operation reception effect as well, the operation-related display (pre-permissible operation-related display) is performed when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the validity period occurs arrives. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length that is more than twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permissive operation-related display displayed in the “expectation degree as to whether or not the post-operation effect performed when the effect is received is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation” or “the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears” As suggested, any of a plurality of presentation modes can be selectively made to appear. Note that, in a situation where the valid period has not occurred, “image display imitating operation means” is not displayed in a normal mode, as in the case of the example shown in FIG.

  For example, the content of “pre-permissible operation-related display” started at timing trB is different from the content of “pre-permissible operation-related display” shown in FIG. 210, and “image display simulating operation means” follows ( A slightly story-like precursory effect such as repeatedly moving and displaying a plurality of effect images toward a location displayed at timing tr21) and hiding the effect image at the location (described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 184) Any of the above-described “specific operation-related effects” may be applied). At this time, any of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. When the timing tr21 comes while the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed, the “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in a normal mode from the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed. The state is shifted to the displayed state.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception production, as described above, at the time of occurrence of the validity period, the reception permission sound indicating that the production reception has been permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 211, the sound is output from timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data allocated to the channel at timing trB.

  That is, as described above, in the special operation reception effect, before the expiration of the validity period, it is much larger than the "minimum time ergonomically required to enable operation immediately after the validity period occurs" "Permissible operation display" with high rendition is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance in such a performance period (timing trB to tr21), a performance sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) corresponding to the “pre-permissible operation-related display” displayed during the same period is output. It is desirable to make it. Also, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the production, even if the production sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) is output during the production period, the reception is permitted. Inconvenience that can be heard as sound integrated with sound cannot occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the timing trB comes, the pre-permissible operation-related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output, and these output states are changed to the timing tr21. Until now. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state where the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed is shifted to the state where “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in the normal mode, and the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed. The state where the "sound" is output is shifted to the state where the "acceptable sound" is output.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 211, based on the arrival of the timing trB, one sound data including a reproduction section of the “pre-permissible operation-related sound” and a reproduction section of the “acceptable allowable sound” is used as a channel. The above-mentioned effect sound output is realized during the period from timing trB to tr22.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, a part of the sound data assigned to the channel in the form of straddling from the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect is included in the allowable reception sound output when the valid period is generated. It will be output as a production sound reproduced in the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation acceptance effect is generated (for example, when an indication effect is generated), and the first half is an effect corresponding to the indication effect (display before operation permitted). The sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) can be used to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect, and after the validity period has expired, the channel assignment based on the effect reception is made. Since it is possible to appropriately release, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special operation reception production has been executed even after the production reception. The output method for “one sound data” including the playback section of “pre-permissible operation-related sound” and the playback section of “acceptable permissible sound” includes, first, the degree of expectation (when the symbol variation is stopped). After preparing a plurality of sound data having different jackpot patterns, one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as a result of a jackpot determination (or a performance determination (such as a preview determination)). It is desirable that the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 be realized by selectively assigning the channels based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the playback section of “pre-permissible operation-related sound (symptom effect)”, but different in the playback section of “acceptable sound (operation acceptance effect)”. It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

  That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect reception is allowed is ended, and the “image display imitating the operation means” is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state for the channel is also terminated for "sound data including the acceptable sound", and the output of the acceptable sound is forcibly terminated in the middle. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether or not the acceptable sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the effect is received, it is determined that the special operation reception effect has been performed even after the effect has been received. Can be recognized.

  Note that, even with one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half) of the effect sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-permissible operation-related display) is in the playback state. In the present situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, the operation is not forcibly terminated. Only in a situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half) of the production sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the validity period is in the reproduction state, the allocation state to the channel is released based on the operation by the player. Becomes

  The one sound data (sound data including the pre-permissible operation-related sound and the permissible sound) is allocated before the timing trB, and is already allocated at the timing trB. Is also good. As described above, the assignment state for the channel may be continued after the timing tr22. For example, the assignment state for the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is kept allocated to the channel, but the “reproduction period of the acceptable sound” in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of allocating the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel is ended so that the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. I have. However, the “sound data including the acceptable sound” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 comes. It may be. That is, in this case, the sound data itself is left allocated to the channel, but the “reproduction period of the acceptable sound” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 207 to FIG. 211, “a plurality of acceptable sounds having different lengths in which the output state is maintained” are prepared as the acceptable sound accompanying the occurrence of the operation accepting effect, and the effect is accepted. Different permissible sounds are generated between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), which have different post-operation effects. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the acceptable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the strategic strategy is narrowed, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) are performed. 2 operation reception effect) can be recognized.

  In addition, the plurality of acceptable sounds include a first acceptable sound (special operation accepting effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is accepted as an effect, and the output state continues. To be received (first and second operation reception effects). Therefore, when the operation is performed so that the effect reception is performed while the acceptable sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by checking whether the output state of the acceptable sound is terminated when the effect is received. It is possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptable sound should originally be in a non-output state when the validity period ends, and it may be that the output state is maintained when the production is started after the operation. If there is, it may be in the way of directing. In this regard, in the above-described example, the reception effect sound for which the output state is terminated when the effect is received is changed to the first reception allowable sound (the side on which the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long). Special operation reception effect).

  That is, in this case, when an effect is received in the output state of the “second acceptable reception sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively short”, the output state is maintained. However, since the time setting value for maintaining the output state of the second acceptable sound is short in the first place, the second acceptable sound will soon be in a non-output state, and it can be said that it is unlikely to hinder the effect. On the other hand, when an effect is received in the output state of the “first acceptable sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively long”, the original time setting for maintaining the output state is set. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so that it does not obstruct the effect.

  In addition, by confirming how long the output state of the acceptable sound is continued, it is possible to recognize which of the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who tries, if the output state of the acceptable sound is maintained when the time set value for the second acceptable sound has elapsed, the first acceptable sound is not the second acceptable sound. Is output. In this regard, without confirming that the output state of the first acceptable sound is terminated, by confirming that the first acceptable sound is in a non-output state when the effect reception is generated, It is possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect is occurring is correct.

  In addition, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, when the valid period of the operation accepting effect is generated, a pre-permission operation-related display indicating that the valid period is about to occur is displayed. The operation-related displays include a first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time (see FIG. 210) and a second pre-permissible operation-related display with a long display time (see FIG. 211). In this regard, when the first pre-permissive operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the “sound data including the permissible acceptable sound” is unassigned to the channel, and the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is set to the timing at which the valid period occurs. By assigning the "sound data including the acceptable sound" to the channel, the acceptable sound is set to the output state. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first pre-permissible operation-related display is not output, but it is possible to prompt the operation from the time of occurrence of the valid period without causing a sense of incongruity as if a sound gap occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-permissive operation-related display with a long display time is performed, “sound data including the acceptable sound” is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second pre-permissible operation-related display is performed. The state of assignment is set, and the acceptable section sound is set to the output state by setting the reproduction section of the acceptable section sound to arrive at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation acceptance effect is generated (for example, when an effect effect is generated), and the first half is an effect effect (display before operation permitted). In addition to being able to suggest the timing at which a special operation reception effect is produced by the production sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) according to the sound, after the validity period has occurred, it is based on the production reception Since the channel assignment can be appropriately released, the player can be made aware that the special operation reception effect has been performed even after the effect reception has been performed.

  That is, in the pre-permission operation-related display shown in FIG. 211, the pre-permission operation-related sound corresponding thereto is output, and the acceptable reception sound is further output when the valid period is generated. In the display, the permissible operation-related sound corresponding thereto is not output, and the acceptable sound is output when the valid period is generated.

  In addition, in the above-described description examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, as the “effect member”, an effect display device 1600, a speaker, an effect lamp, a movable decorative body, or the like can be used. Further, as the “first effect member”, any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted, and as the “second effect member”, Any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the “first effect member”, can be adopted.

  Further, in the above-described example, the operation means to be operated is not necessarily the same as the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), and may be different. When the operation means to be operated is different, the mimic image displayed within each effective period is different.

  In the first operation accepting effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” is executed as an after-operation effect, "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues the execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "Execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives And “operation-based processing using the second effect member” performed as the post-operation effect. Further, the operation-based processing using a rendering member different from the first rendering member and the second rendering member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation rendering according to the first operation reception rendering, any operation is performed. The originating process is also executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes.

  In the second operation accepting effect, executing “operation-based process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect receiving timing reaches a predetermined time value” is performed as an after-operation effect. However, "the operation-based processing using the first effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value" and "the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives May be executed as the post-operation effect, respectively. " Further, an operation-based process using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation effect according to the second operation accepting effect, any operation is performed. The initiating process is also executed as being continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, “the operation-based processing using the first effect member that continues the execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the time elapsed from the effect reception timing The operation-based processing using the second effect member that is continued until the predetermined time value is reached "is executed as the post-operation effect. However, an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is determined. The used operation-based processing may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-based process that is executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and a time elapsed from the timing at which the effect is received is a predetermined time. What is necessary is to mix the operation-based processing executed as being continued until the value reaches the value.

  Further, in the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 207 to 211, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to. By setting such a long time, it becomes possible to enjoy the above-mentioned effective period with a staging strategic effect.

  In the first pre-permissible operation-related display having a short display time (see FIG. 210), the “expectation degree as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is received is performed in a highly expected manner” or the “big hit” Although the “expected degree of appearance of the symbol” is not suggested, in the second pre-permissible operation-related display having a long display time (see FIG. 211), “the post-operation effect performed when the effect is received is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation of whether the game is performed in a high aspect" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears".

  In the "effective period of special operation reception effect" set as a relatively long time value, by displaying any of a plurality of display modes having different degrees of expectation, "after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed" It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether the effect is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears".

  In addition, in the special operation reception production, even if the production reception is made at any time during the validity period, “the production by the first production member generated due to the production reception” is “the production due to the production reception. Making the relationship that the execution state is terminated earlier than "the effect by the second effect member to be generated" is necessary to make the player recognize that the effect contents are the same as the effect after the operation. desirable.

  In the above description examples shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not mounted and does not occur, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated because the second operation reception effect is not mounted, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation accepting effect and the second operation accepting effect are not mounted, respectively, so that they do not occur, and the special operation accepting effect may be generated based on establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

  In the special operation accepting effect shown in the above-described description example shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to a channel is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. Among them, a state in which effect reception is allowed may be generated.

[Detailed performance of acceptable sounds]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (an advance notice effect, etc.) should be selectively caused to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect contents according to the result of the effect determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorated design is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) relating to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description, movable body operation, etc. Is provided as an effect having a "function that indicates the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the symbol production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (regardless of the predetermined condition Is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is made different depending on the result of the effect determination, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. The rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped are indicated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. . The operation reception effect (valid period) generated in the predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) generated when the symbol effect based on the specific fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the change pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific change pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, a change pattern that generates an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected change pattern (non-reach change pattern). It is desirable to avoid such a situation or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for the effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). After the operation to generate the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body), the operation is performed. The effect of the reception effect (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest until the effect is performed after the operation is reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressed manner. During the execution of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity or the high expected fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) in the output, the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) The corresponding “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or in silence, or is not output (the reproduction period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data is over, or the channel is allocated). Is terminated, etc.), at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity can be generated.

  In such a configuration, when the operation opportunity is given, when the output of the “BGM reproduction (the effect sound of the specific type)” in the non-suppression mode is maintained (low expected non-suppression reception effect), the “BGM reproduction” is performed. (The effect sound of a specific type) "may be output in a suppressed mode, silence, or in a non-output state (suppressed operation accepting effect). Since the ratio (expectation) of winning a big hit varies depending on the effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect), the directivity when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given, " BGM reproduction (produced sound of a specific type) can be improved in entertainment interest by suppressing or not).

  However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state when an operation opportunity is given. There is a concern that the directivity will be poor.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is set as a reception allowable sound. As an output. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately suppress the poor rendition when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, the acceptable sound output when the high expected suppression reception effect is generated is made smaller than the acceptable sound output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, so that it is possible to appropriately suppress the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, the “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode, silence, or is in a non-output state. There is also an aspect that when a later production occurs, the production sound corresponding to this can be made more prominent, and in this regard, it can be said that this is useful in improving the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the acceptable sound output when the high expectation suppression acceptable effect is generated, the effect is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state. And the output state is terminated based on the effect being received. As a result, the effect sound corresponding to the effect after the operation can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable sound.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation reception effect is described as “If no operation is detected within the set time during which the effect reception is permitted, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. In addition to the fact that it can be generated by the “non-automatic reception mode that is performed”, “the automatic reception mode that can generate a post-operation effect even when no operation is detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed” It can also be generated by

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated in the automatic reception mode, even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not perform an operation, and as a result, it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation. However, as will be described later, more strictly speaking, the output time of the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time of the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is shorter than when it was done.

  In the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to the present embodiment, as described later, when no operation is detected, the effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within a set time (automatic button function is enabled). The post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, the effect reception is always generated before the specific timing within the set time arrives, so that the effect reception may be performed within the set time within the time after the specific timing. As a result, the length of the effective period in which the effect acceptance is permitted is substantially reduced. As a result, unlike the case where the production is started after the operation after the set time is over, the activation of such an automatic button function is done in a way that the production tempo is accelerated instead of producing a production delay. It can be realized.

  In addition, when the automatic button function is activated within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity is substantially lost even though the set time has not elapsed. On the other hand, the player is afraid of this, and is expected to actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time or to play with a sense of tension in the effect.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the “gauge display of how much effective time remains” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not performed until a specific timing at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to display the remaining time until the set time elapses, rather than suggesting the remaining time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed at a point before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes “0”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, It is possible to output a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been allowed or that the effect reception has been allowed. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately suppress a situation in which the effect reception is automatically generated due to the forgetting of the operation, and the effect reception cannot be generated by the user's own operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not output the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode. Since the sound can be output as the above-mentioned acceptable sound, by confirming the type of the acceptable sound, the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, not in the non-automatic reception mode, occurs. Will be able to recognize that

  On the other hand, in the post-operation production, there is usually a production risk that is executed in a mode of low expectation. Therefore, it is not always necessary to perform the operation so that the post-operation production is performed in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. There is also an aspect that it is not necessarily. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception permission sound is output only for a time sufficient to indicate that the effect reception has been permitted, the reception permission sound in the output state is output. By terminating the process relatively early, “time when it is possible to consider whether or not to produce an effect reception” is created while the reception-permitted sound is not output.

  However, even in the case of the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is supposed to be terminated early, there is a concern that a misunderstanding that the effect reception is no longer permitted due to the function of the automatic button may be caused. Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, the output state of the allowable reception sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button has not yet functioned and the effect reception is permitted. This indicates that the player is in the state, and thus the player's operation can be encouraged with a sense of security that the automatic button has not yet functioned.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation reception effect, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in silence, or is in a non-output state. The operation opportunity is given while the suppression reception effect (here, the high expectation suppression reception effect) that gives the operation opportunity or the “BGM reproduction (the effect sound of the specific type)” is output in the non-suppression mode. While the non-suppression reception effect (here, the low expected non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the effect reception is allowed, or the effect reception is performed. There is a technical feature in that the reception-permissible sounds indicating that the sound is allowed are generated in such a manner as to enhance their unique performance.

  Hereinafter, such a technical feature will be described. In describing the technical feature, if the “acceptable sound” is described again, the “acceptable sound” indicates that the effect acceptance is permitted. The output is started within the set time, indicating that the effect reception is in an acceptable state, or the output is started before the set time in which the effect reception is allowed is started, and the effect reception is allowed. The sound is output as an effect sound such as “Pikine”. However, when the output state is set to be output before the set time at which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained across the timing at which the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (during the period during which the effect reception is allowed), and it is more important than the time from when the “acceptable sound” is output to when the set time occurs. It is desirable to set the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the “acceptable sound” to be longer. In this sense, the “acceptable sound” can be output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that the sound is output within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or as the output time elapses.

  The “acceptable sound” may be assigned to a channel and outputted as independent effect sound data (see FIG. 210), or may be another effect sound (for example, a set time (effective period)). )), Which is assigned to a channel and output as one effect sound data together with an indication effect executed before the occurrence of the effect or an effect sound output according to the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". (See FIG. 211), and the method of realizing it may be appropriately adopted.

  FIG. 212 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and as a result of the change pattern determination, the “predetermined change If the "pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (e.g., an advance notification determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. After that, the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol (such as the effect description according to the predetermined fluctuating pattern or the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the predetermined fluctuating pattern) is started. An effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) according to the selected “predetermined fluctuation pattern”. In addition, the effect pattern determination (sub-control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side), including the respective effect examples described below, and the advance notice determination (sub-control) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. When performing the control side), regarding the processing related to the announcement effect, the “fluctuation pattern determination” may be replaced with the “effect pattern determination”, and the “fluctuation pattern” may be replaced with the “effect pattern”.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect (valid period) in which the effect reception is permitted when the timing tr32 at which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start has arrived is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is as follows.
The “non-suppression reception effect (FIG. 4) that sets a set time during which the reception of the effect is permitted while the“ sound of BGM reproduction ”corresponding to the variation pattern (effect pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. 212 (a) and (b)), and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the reception of the effect is allowed, the post-operation effect is not generated and "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 212 (j))" in which the set time is ended
As "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect".

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the occurrence of the operation reception effect is caused by the “sound of BGM reproduction” being in the suppression mode. Since the set time (valid period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted without accompanying the directing property such as suggesting is suddenly set (non-suppression reception effect), the player side is surprised. It becomes a form of sagging, and a delay tends to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if an operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is terminated without any effect after the operation (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing an opportunity to produce a post-operation effect, it is possible to appropriately reduce a sense of tension when the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is being executed. Will be able to maintain.

  However, although it is executed as such “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without the effect after the operation, contrary to the player's intention. If this happens frequently, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 212 (b), (c), and (g), a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) at which the effect reception is allowed occurs. Also, when the timing tr31 slightly before arrives, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr32. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the effect is accepted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. It is expected that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) will be ended without producing an effect "will be reduced. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is generated. May be generated.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first acceptable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikeen!" And the "pressing!" And a second permissible sound output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 212 (d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. The delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the user attempts to operate.

  By the way, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time (valid period) or execution in the non-automatic reception mode, It is considered that a player who strives not to miss an opportunity to produce a post-operation effect by repeatedly hitting the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) from the state where the effect reception is not permitted may appear. Can be However, in this case, since the effect is started immediately after the operation is accepted, the started effect is "the effect performed in response to the effect reception (operation after operation)". Or it is difficult to recognize whether it is "a mere announcement effect that has nothing to do with the reception of the effect", and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (especially, FIG. 212 (c)), in the low expected non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the effect is received at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself is ended, but the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not terminated midway. The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output is completed as one allowable sound (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 212 (g)). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the event is being performed (effect after operation) or whether the event is automatically generated as a mere notice effect irrelevant to the effect reception. Kill as to become.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 212, when an effect is received within a set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, in the state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are performed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 switches the operation means set as the operation target in the low expected non-suppression reception effect. A simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. For example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted as a display method of the mimic image and the gauge display. Based on this, they are not displayed (all are not displayed at the same timing).

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a “special effect mode (automatic button effect state)” for enabling the automatic button function for all operation accepting effects for which an operation instruction is given. Alternatively, the setting to the “special effect mode” and the release of the setting may be made possible by an operation by the player. That is, in this case, even in the case of the operation reception effect that occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), in the state where the “special effect mode” is set. , "Non-suppressed reception effect", and will be executed in the "automatic reception mode" described above, and only when the "special effect mode" is not set, the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" Will occur. However, in the specification (especially, “more detailed rendition of acceptable sound” and the description related thereto), unless otherwise specified, “special rendition mode” is not set. The description is given as an example of an effect when the “special effect mode” is not mounted as the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1.

  FIGS. 213 and 214 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and as a result of performing the fluctuation pattern determination, a high expectation of developing into “SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)” Assuming that a “specific fluctuation pattern” is selected from the “variation patterns”, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decorative symbol (such as a rendering effect according to a specific variation pattern or a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect according to the result (notification effect) is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “specific variation pattern”.

  However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) according to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination). Then, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted when a timing tr42 (a timing in the SP reach state) at which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific fluctuation pattern is as follows.
-"Suppression reception effect (Fig. 213 (a)) for setting a set time during which the effect reception is allowed while" BGM reproduction sound "corresponding to the variation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. , (B))], and even if no operation is performed on the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which effect reception is allowed, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception. Aspect (see FIG. 213 (j)) "
As "suppression / automatic reception effect". As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM reproduction” in a suppressed mode or a silent state, a method of setting a silent section (suppression section) in the data of the “sound of BGM reproduction” itself in advance or the method of outputting the “sound of the BGM” in the data itself. A method of changing the volume value of the channel to which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is assigned to a suppression value (for example, “0”), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also called “second suppression operation reception effect”, and the suppression mode here is also called “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the high expected variation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) relating to the specific variation pattern), the “sound of BGM reproduction” is suppressed. Since a set time (valid period) in which the reception of the effect is allowed is set with the effect such that the operation reception effect is generated by being output in a mode or in silence (suppression reception) Production), from the player's side, it is easy to perform the operation immediately after the operation reception production occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. Because of this (automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security without missing the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also the same as the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above with reference to FIGS. 213 (b), (c), and (g). As shown in the figure, when the timing tr41 slightly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started and the timing tr42 is straddled. To maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, a state in which the effect acceptance is permitted at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently appear that "effects will be accepted by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation contrary to the will of the player" Become so. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs, and is generated, for example, in accordance with the generation timing tr42 of the set time. You may do so.

  However, the timing tr40 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is shifted from the state in which the sound is output in the non-suppression mode to the state in which the sound is output in the suppression mode or silence (or the state in which no sound is output) is described above. In order to suitably obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to (c), a relationship such as “the length of the timing tr40 to tr41> the length of the timing tr41 to tr42”. It can be said that it is important to set the timing so that it arrives much earlier than the above-mentioned output start timing tr41 of the acceptable sound that precedes the set time.

  In the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above. Unlike the case of "", the "acceptable sound" is not only the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikeen!" But also the second allowable sound output as a message sound such as "press!" Is also output when the timing tr41 arrives, and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which of the plurality of operation units (the operation buttons 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) of the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since a possibility arises that the mimic image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (timing tr41 to tr42), the possibility of recognizing the situation arises. Operation becomes easier. That is, as will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target” When the operation button 410 is set as the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration 5001 is set as the operation target. In such a case, a message sound such as "Send!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the output of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is started simultaneously. However, the output timings of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are respectively different from each other. May be sequentially set to the output state. In this case, output of only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started from a state in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and (h), the “first allowable sound” is adopted as an effect sound that is output only for a relatively short time, and the “second allowable sound” is used. Is adopted as the production sound output over a relatively long time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and (h), the output states of the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” are maintained for different times, and It is desirable that the timings at which the state is terminated (the timings at which the state is made inaudible) are all different timings before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time remains until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the “acceptable sound” is in. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently appear that “effects are accepted by the activation of the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention”.
-A first situation in which both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" maintain the output state.-The output state of one of the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" is maintained. However, the other is in the output state (inaudible state). The second situation: Both the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” have ended the output state. Third situation (inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 212 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example illustrated in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, “Pikeen!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. That is, in this case, the message sound (the second allowable sound) among the acceptable sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, but the sound effect (the effective sound) (the acceptable sound) is not output. The first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, so that the “sound of BGM reproduction” is suppressed. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect reception is permitted (first allowable sound), while maintaining the effect of the effect suitably (second allowable sound).

  Note that timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) when the acceptable sounds (first acceptable sounds and second acceptable sounds) are output prior to the set time (valid period) or the mimic image display. May be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be the time of two or more frames. That is, if it is possible to output the set time (valid period) or the mimic image display at least a little earlier, the player will be in a state where the reception of the effect is permitted, and Is likely to be recognized earlier by the preceding time.Therefore, the time until the set time ends and the timing when the automatic button function is activated are set. It is expected to prevent the user from forgetting to perform the operation within the period until the arrival.

  By the way, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic button mode, as described above, the operation opportunity can be lost by activating the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (valid period). It is. Therefore, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 (c) and (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (c), the acceptable sounds (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) are different. When an effect is received while the effect is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the effect being received. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) is interrupted at that point, and the state where the effect acceptance is permitted (see FIG. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period has ended, "a state in which the effect reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be activated (a state in which the operation opportunity may be lost)" Can be avoided from being misunderstood. In addition, when the operation is performed at a timing before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period) and the effect is received, the effect is performed at the time when the effect is received. Since the state in which acceptance is permitted is ended, it goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tr42A comes.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, if an effect is received within the set time (valid period) (timing tr42a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (after the operation corresponding to the effect reception) is displayed. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the first effect member and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period), at the specific timing arriving after the timing tr43. In contrast to being rendered invisible (not visually recognizable), the post-operation production sound output (production sound) is maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the production was received. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 213, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is “BGM playback sound”. Is desirably set such that the output state is maintained at the point in time when the timing tr44 at which the control signal "" returns from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives. On the other hand, in the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the output state is ended at the timing tr44 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the output in the non-suppression mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the return of the “BGM reproduction sound” to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the switching of the content related to the display effect occur. It is expected that the game will be greatly changed and the game entertainment will be improved. The “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Further, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of the timing tr44.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 switches the operation means set as the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. In this regard, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, in consideration of the fact that a message sound (for example, “press!”) Is output as the second allowable sound, the non-automatic reception mode is also performed in the effect display device 1600. A message display (for example, “press!”) That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed by the user is displayed. As a display method of the mock image, the gauge display, and the message display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted. Is not displayed (not displayed at the same timing) at a stage where the set time has not yet elapsed based on the effect reception. The message display does not necessarily have to completely match the content of the message sound, and may be anything that prompts an operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to (i), before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period). , The output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), while the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. After the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends. The display state may be maintained thereafter. Note that the set time (valid period) is ended when the effect is received, and in fact, it ends at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated comes. Therefore, the “timing tr43 at which the set time ends” strictly means the timing that ends when the set time is assumed to have continued, and the time set at the timing tr42. This is the timing that arrives after the lapse of the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated prematurely (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the effect is accepted by detecting the operation of the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation object prompted by the message display. It is possible to indicate to the player that the situation is not the same. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, both of the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 212) and the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 213) are performed. Within the set time (valid period), a remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is allowed is completed can be performed. In the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 212), the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses becomes shorter, and when this time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that the gauge amount also becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without detecting the operation, the automatic button function is enabled and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, the effect is not allowed even if the set time has not yet elapsed after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A. Therefore, if the “remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is permitted” is performed within the set time of the operation reception effect (FIG. 213), it is normal. It is conceivable that the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 213), the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr42A arrives. Despite the disappearance, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. It is displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that the gauge amount also becomes “0”. However, here, the effect is not always permitted before the set time becomes “0”, so that the effect is not permitted when the gauge amount remains. State.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is left to be left, so that the player's intention On the other hand, it is possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity", so that in the next set time (valid period), the operation can be performed at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge. Can be encouraged.

  Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode according to the present embodiment, when the effect reception is generated by the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the end of the set time (see FIG. 213). Gauge display) may be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in a state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is not performed. Until the time has elapsed, the “dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases” is maintained.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is no situation in which the effect has been accepted by detecting the operation of the operation target whose operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Note that, as described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. Case ". That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operating means is to be operated after a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr32 in FIG. 212, there is no “in the case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time, such as 3 seconds, as the set time. At this time, the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated may be set later than the timing at which three seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the intention of the player. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the opportunity is lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, when the operation means on the side not being operated is operated, the side being operated is maintained while the erroneous operation state is maintained. It is desirable that, even when the user operates the operation means, the effect is received and the effect is executed after the operation. In other words, if a situation occurs in which the effect is not accepted despite the operation of the operation means, the player may be confused. Since it is difficult to further request the operation of the operation means on the side, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, the effect is received when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated. It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, it is possible to appropriately adopt the items described in the above-described “operation sound output process under suppression (FIG. 142)” and other examples thereof. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 213 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception production, when the operation opportunity is given, the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence, so that the performance is poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception production. Is concerned. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptable sound output when the suppression operation accepting effect is generated is made smaller than the acceptable sound output when the non-suppressing operation accepting effect is generated. The sound can be output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) having different times during which the output state is maintained are used as the first allowable sound. Any of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 212 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 213 (c) and (g), and the “time maintained in the output state”. Is set as the shortest aspect of the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol change is stopped is different depending on which of the above-mentioned plural modes allows the first allowable sound to be output.

  In addition, "which one of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which one of the plurality of operation means is used as an operation target" are obtained as separate determination results in the above-mentioned announcement effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained as a single determination result within the above-mentioned announcement effect determination. However, regarding at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permission is allowed regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. Also in the second mode and the third mode, it is possible to select whether the “operation button 410” is to be operated or the “sword decoration 5001” is to be operated. You may do so.

  FIG. 214 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the second mode is used as the first acceptable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 214, the effect example is basically the same as the effect example described above with reference to FIG. 213, including its occurrence conditions and effect contents (further described in another example). Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect determination, at the timing tr41, the first allowable sound is output not in the first mode but in the second mode longer than the first mode. Here, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second allowable sound.

  According to such a configuration, the output state of the acceptable reception sound output when the suppression operation reception production occurs is longer than the reception allowable sound (first mode) output when the non-suppression operation reception production occurs. Since it is possible to output the sound as a maintained sound, even when the “BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state when an operation opportunity is given, the performance is preferably maintained. Will be able to

  In order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, the first allowable sound output in the second mode may be a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect illustrated in FIG. 212. It is desirable to do.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, there are “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the announcement effect determination. In this case, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is to be operated. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner (for example, “press!”) As in the effect example shown in FIG. 213. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment outputs the first allowable sound in the second mode as shown in FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (g). Also, by ending the output state of the first allowable sound (non-audible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function is also provided in this effect example. It is possible to estimate how much time remains until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output state of the acceptable sound.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” output also in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 213 is ended. By confirming this, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time remains until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, as compared with the case of the effect example of FIG. 213. become. Further, by outputting only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound in another longer mode (second mode), the player side firstly outputs the first permissible sound that is commonly used. Based on the timing at which the output state of the second allowable sound ends, the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" is estimated, and the first allowable sound is determined based on the normal estimation. Since more detailed guessing can be performed in a challenging manner by using the game, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 214, the other items are the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 213. For example, when an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the output is performed. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG.

  When the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) occurs in the state where the “special effect mode” is set, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's intention, even if the effect is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the message display will be displayed. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing at which the effect is received or the timing delayed by the time described above). At this time, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive in the output state when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. When it is performed, it is desirable to function so as to arrive in the output state and end the first allowable sound output in the second mode halfway.

  Further, the case where the first allowable sound (effect sound as acceptable reception sound) is output in the first mode and the case where the first allowable sound (effect sound as acceptable reception sound) is output in the second mode are as follows. In addition, not only the time during which the output state is maintained may be different from each other, but also different effect sounds may be used. For example, when the first allowable sound (effect sound as the acceptable sound) is output in the first mode, an effect sound such as “Pikine” is output, and the first allowable sound (effect sound as the acceptable sound) is output as the second sound. In the case of outputting in an aspect, it is possible to output a production sound such as “gaogao”.

  In the above description example, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as a “variation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed”. The effect example shown in FIG. 212 may be performed when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation patterns.

  In addition, it is desirable that the “suppression / automatic reception effect” exemplified in the above description example should not appear in the low expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) in the normal gaming state. The “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in the description example can also appear in the high expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) including the “specific fluctuation pattern” in the normal gaming state. . In other words, even if the pattern is a high expected variation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to the low expected variation pattern), the non-reach state or the like is basically in a period before the effect is advanced to the SP reach state. Since the effect which appears also in the effect pattern is performed, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 212 can also appear during the period. Even in such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect” appears (high expected fluctuation pattern), when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears (low expected fluctuation pattern or high expected fluctuation pattern). It can be said that the situation where the big hit symbol appears (the degree of expectation) when the symbol change is stopped is higher than that of the pattern change.

  In the low expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to the low expected change pattern) generated during the normal gaming state, the “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or a silent state when an operation opportunity is given. It is preferable that the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is the case where the “special effect mode” is not set or the case where the “special effect mode” is not mounted as the pachinko machine 1.

  The length of time from “timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated” to “timing tr43 at which the set time elapses from the acceptance of the effect reception” is determined by the minimum time (unit of control (processing)). For example, it may be one frame) or two or more frames. For example, the message display is visible at “the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated”, and such a visible state is at least “the timing tr43 at which the set time elapses after the effect reception is permitted”. If it is continued until it arrives, the original length as the set time (valid period) can be suggested, and it is possible to recognize that the player has not performed the operation. Will be able to In the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is displayed for “timing at which the automatic button function is activated” within a set time. It is desirable to output in the relationship described above (see FIGS. 213 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 214 (h) and (i)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIG. 213 (i) and FIG. 214 (i), “the time for which the message display is left after the effect is received (in the example in the figure, timings tr42A to tr43). ) Is also displayed when an effect is received at another timing (FIG. 212 (e), FIG. 213 (e), etc.) by sharing the program. By using the above program, it may be generated only when the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 212 (e), the operation related display is hidden at the timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 213 (e), the operation related display is hidden at the timing tr42a. Become.

  Further, in the above description examples (FIGS. 212 to 214), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) using the speaker (second effect member). And the sound) are started at the same time, but a post-operation effect may be performed so as to shift the start time of these effects. For example, in a situation where the post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (second production member) is started at timing tr42, the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) is performed on the production display device 1600 (first production member). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed yet, and the display of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed at the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 212 to 214 is hidden (or when the fade-out process is started). If started, the switching of the display effect can be performed smoothly.

  As described in the above-described “suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 142)”, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a precursor is set in a period before the set time (valid period) in which effect reception is allowed. An effect (for example, the above-described “specific operation-related effect” or the like) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable that a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation of a big hit symbol be prepared as the precursor effect, and the precursor effect be performed in any one of the modes. Moreover, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the fore-effect sound output during the period in which the fore-effect is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the fore-effect sound depends on the execution mode of the fore-effect. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first allowable sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed while a mock image to be operated, a gauge display indicating the remaining time, and a message display of “press!” Are displayed. It is output in one of a plurality of modes including the mode.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 occurs, the specific sound (second sound) which is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 occurs. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound of the aspect can be output as the permissible reception sound, it is possible to appropriately suppress the poor performance when the suppression operation reception production occurs. Will be able to In addition, by confirming the type of the acceptable sound, it is possible to recognize that the operation accepting effect is occurring in the automatic accepting mode instead of the non-automatic accepting mode.

  Also, regarding the acceptable sound of the non-suppression operation accepting effect (FIG. 212), a first acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect and a second acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output. On the other hand, as to the permissible sounds of the suppression operation reception effects (FIGS. 213 and 214), the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output. Both of the two allowable sounds are output. Thereby, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is being performed.

  In the above-described effect example, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 212) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 213, 214) (FIGS. 212 and 213). ) And a case where a different effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 212 and 214).

  In other words, if an acceptable reception sound different from the normal state is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the effect reception is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not output during normal times, while the first permissible sound (effect sound) is output as a sound that is also output during normal times. It is desirable. Then, while the acceptable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a production sound (second mode) which is not normally output at a predetermined probability. If the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit symbol is made higher than when it is output in the first mode, the "BGM playback (specification) In this case, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance when the "type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a state of silence. In order to obtain such an effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first reception allowable sound in the effect determination such as the notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for judging to be higher is higher than the ratio for judging to output the second mode.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 212) but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode (FIGS. 213 and 214). However, at the time of the occurrence, the reception of the effect is automatically permitted if the operation is forgotten, because the reception of the effect can be output to indicate that the reception of the effect is permitted or that the reception of the effect is permitted. It is possible to preferably suppress occurrence of a situation in which the user's own operation opportunity is lost as a result.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within the set time (valid period). It is determined that the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without the effect reception corresponding to the operation detection being performed. According to such a configuration, the effect can be started after the operation within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. It is possible to make automatic buttons without differentiating the flow of the subsequent production from when there is no

  Further, in the above-described production example, “a message sound (second allowable sound) urging the user to perform an operation” may be output as the acceptable sound, and the message sound (the second allowable sound) must be operated. It is not output in the "operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode" where the effect is not received, and can be output only in the "operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode" where the effect is received without operation. I have.

  That is, only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) directly expressing the effect of the operation is output, or various types of reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound, Although it may be considered to output the second allowable sound), in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk of being executed in a mode of low expectation, so that the post-operation effect is performed. The operation is not always good for improving the entertainment interest of the game. In this regard, the “operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode” is an effect in which it is permissible to make a selection such as “do not intentionally generate an effect after the operation”. Is not directly expressed as a message (second permissible sound), the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, and there is no right to select whether or not to produce a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second allowable sound) only in the “operation reception effect performed in the mode” or to output more types of reception allowable sound. In the “operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode”, if the set time ends without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect and effects related to this will not be performed. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-motion reception effect, no message sound is output in any of the operation reception effects, but in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode”, the type of the message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes (“press!” And “sword!”) Are prepared as message sounds (second allowable sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 are provided. In the example, depending on whether the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (based on the result of the announcement effect determination), any one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected. Output. In this case, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the corresponding message sound (“press!”) Is output, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It is suggested that “the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped” in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, as compared with the case where the message sound (“sword sword!”) Corresponding to the effect is output. The ratio (expectation) at which the presentation mode appears is set to be low. The ratio (expected degree) in which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not a sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, the post-operation effect executed when the effect is received in the operation accepting effect in which the message sound is not output indicates that "the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped". The ratio (expectation) at which the effect style appears is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect is received in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. “The big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped. Is lower than the ratio (expected degree) in which the production mode suggesting "appears." In addition, the ratio (expected degree) in which the above-mentioned effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation reception effect is generated, first, "whether a message sound (second allowable sound) is output" is a branch point for knowing the degree of expectation, and the message sound ( When the (second allowable sound) is output, it is possible to know the degree of expectation according to the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed with relatively high expectation. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to execute the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode so as to prevent the post-operation effect from being missed. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the degree of expectation becomes relatively low, and the “sword decoration 5001” used only when the degree of expectation is high becomes the operation target. Is gone. That is, in this case, it is preferable that the post-operation effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, so that the player has a selection right as to whether to generate the post-operation effect.

  In the operation acceptance effect executed in FIGS. 213 and 214, when a set time (valid period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to (i) and FIGS. 214 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period) The output state is ended (inaudible state) before tr42A, whereas the display state of the message display is maintained even at the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends is reached. That is, in this case, when an effect is received by an operation by the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden at a stage where the set time has not elapsed according to the effect reception, but within the set time, When the automatic button function is activated, the message display (“press!” Or “sword!”) Is continuously displayed at least until the end of the set time.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated prematurely (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the effect is accepted by detecting the operation of the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation object prompted by the message display. It is possible to indicate to the player that the situation is not the same. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is activated (FIGS. 213 and 214), when an effect is received at the timing tr42A because the automatic button function is activated, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display). Will be left behind, so that it is possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" contrary to the intention of the player, and by this, During the set time (valid period), it is possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the remaining amount of the gauge.

  In the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is activated (FIGS. 213 and 214), when the effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. Dynamic display is continued until the time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that the effect is not accepted by the operation detection of the operation target whose operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is erroneously operated, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213, the same effect sound (first allowable sound in the first mode) is output as the allowable reception sound. Even if the operation reception effect of the operation has occurred, the fact that the operation opportunity has been given can be appropriately transmitted to the player. In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213, the second permissible sound that is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is also output, so which of these operation reception effects is generated Can be recognized. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in the specific variation pattern (effect pattern corresponding to), the ratio of execution in the mode illustrated in FIG. 213 is relatively high, and FIG. The ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 214 is relatively low, and the ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 214 is relatively high when stopped in the big hit symbol. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the “first mode” and the “second mode” which is not used in the operation accepting performance shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, as compared to the effect example shown in FIG. (FIG. 214), it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance when "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a state where no sound is output. become able to.

  Further, in the effect examples (suppression operation reception effect) illustrated in FIGS. 213 and 214, the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. It is assumed that the same acceptable sound (first acceptable sound in the first mode) as when the unsuppressed operation accepting effect (FIG. 212) occurs is also possible. Then, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the effect sound (first state) in which the output state is maintained for only a short time In this case, a new effect is added by increasing the rate at which the symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol than when the first permissible sound is output (FIG. 213). Thereby, while making it possible to recognize that the effect reception is permitted, the effect of the effect when the "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state is realized. It can be maintained suitably.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the first allowable sound is output. If an effect is received during a period in which a sound is being output, this is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even during the output stage (see FIG. 214 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (first mode) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 212 and 213), the first allowable sound is “suppression operation reception effect. Or "operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode" (FIG. 213), and if an effect is received during the output, it is not output (non-audible) at that time. (See FIGS. 212 (c) and 213 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, even if an effect is received when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Although the first allowable sound is in the output state also during the period of the timings tr41 to tr42, the effect is not received during this period even if the operation is detected. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing the “BGM reproduction (the effect sound of the specific type)”, so that the post-operation effect is missed. If the possibility is relatively high and the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that a post-operation effect may not be generated. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players hit repeatedly before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, there is a concern that it is difficult to understand whether the effect is generated as an effect after the operation or a notice effect unrelated to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (FIG. 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need to make a continuous hit. Therefore, in order to suppress a game by such a continuous hit, the first allowable sound is generated in the first mode and the second mode when the continuous hit is performed. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize which of the above is output (output is stopped at an intermediate stage).

  In addition, even when the effect is received by the player's operation within the set time, the message display is not displayed within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. May be continuously displayed until the end of the operation, or the dynamic display may be continued until the end of the remaining time display (gauge display) within the set time (see the above description). Shared programs, etc.).

  In addition, as described above, in the post-operation effect, since there is usually an effect risk of being executed in a mode of low expectation, the operation to perform the operation after the operation is performed in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. It is not always good. In this regard, in the effect example (non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 212, if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output only for a time sufficient to indicate that the effect reception has been permitted, it is relatively early. By using the mode (the first mode) that is ended in the first time, “time for determining whether or not to produce an effect reception” is created while the reception-permitted sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), there is no need to create such time, and the reception-permitted sound (first permitted sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, the acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) may be output in a longer mode (second mode), and it is suggested that the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptable sound for a relatively long time, it is possible to indicate that the automatic button function is not yet activated, and thus, there is a sense of security. In particular, the player's operation can be encouraged.

  In the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), the automatic button function is enabled even when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 214). The acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) is set to a non-audible state before the timing tr42A is reached, and the two acceptable sounds (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) are changed at different timings. I try to end it.

  As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive until the acceptable sounds (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) are inaudible. In the non-audible state, it may be possible to indicate that the automatic button function is about to be activated if not operated quickly. In this case, in at least the longer-side mode (second mode) and the second permissible sound in which the output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound are changed over time. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to easily recognize how much time has passed.

  Further, in the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, when an operation opportunity is given, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, whereby an after-operation effect is generated. When this is done, a stunning sound effect corresponding to this sound will be prominently heard. In this regard, regarding the acceptable sound output when the suppression operation accepting effect is generated, if the effect accepting is performed while the accepting acceptable sound is in the output state, the effect based on the effect accepting is performed. Since the output state is terminated, the effect sound corresponding to the effect after the operation can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable sound.

  In the example of the above-mentioned effect, when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, even if an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the output state is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And However, instead of this, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” has a relatively high degree of expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state in the (highly expected variation pattern) (effect pattern corresponding to). Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the effect, the effect is produced when the acceptable sound (even if the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state. This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, the case where the “suppression / automatic reception effect” has occurred has been described. In such a case, the production progress may be made in the same manner when the “non-suppression / automatic reception effect” or the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs.

  In addition, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 213) or the second mode (FIG. 214) can be output as the first allowable sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when the first mode or the second mode is output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and it is possible to recognize the set time (effective It is possible to more appropriately maintain the entertainment interest within the period).

  At this time, in the third aspect, it is desirable that the output state is maintained until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated comes. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output is not the first mode or the second mode but the third mode. The longer the required time, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so that it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension within a set time (valid period) in which effect reception is allowed. Become like Other items when the third aspect is output, such as the fact that the effect is received when the third aspect is in the output state and the effect is received, are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. is there.

  The automatic button function may be activated whenever the timing tr42A in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the specific fluctuation pattern arrives, or may be activated when the big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) arrives, but when the big hit is not obtained, when the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) arrives. It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within a set time (valid period). (Allowable sound, second allowable sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when a set time (effective period) in which the effect acceptance is permitted occurs, the number of acceptable sounds is “0” and the number of acceptable sounds is “1” (first allowable sound). ) And the case where the number of acceptable sounds is “2” (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound), and the pachinko machine 1 suggests to what extent “the operation is promoted”. Will be able to

  As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the timing of hiding the display may be adopted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state in a period from timing tr40 to tr44. The output state (e.g., the reproduction period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or the channel assignment has ended) may be performed. That is, in this case, at timing tr44, "BGM reproduction (specific-type effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel and put into an output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, as described above, as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is obtained. If a particular variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a performance determination (such as a preliminary determination), if the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, the effect is accepted. The operation reception production (valid period) for which
-"Suppression reception production (FIGS. 213 (a), (b)") for setting a set time during which the production reception is allowed while "BGM reproduction sound" according to the fluctuation pattern is output in the suppression mode or silent. And FIGS. 214 (a) and (b)), and no operation is detected on the operation means set as the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which effect reception is allowed. Even if it is the case, when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is performed based on the effect reception. Is started (refer to FIG. 213 (j) and FIG. 214 (j))
As "suppression / automatic reception effect".

  At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (preliminary effect determination), the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the acceptable sounds may be output in any of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode. It is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) among the allowable reception sounds is to be output as “press!” Or “put the sword!”, And the reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound) is determined according to the determination result. As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output (FIGS. 213 and 214). Also, as described above, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and “put a sword!” As the second allowable sound. Is output, the degree of expectation is higher than when "press!" Is output. In this case, as the order of the high degree of expectation, the second order & sword !, the second & push !, the first & sword !, the first & push! It is desirable to maintain the gaming interest when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  As described above, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the above-described effect example, the first allowable sound is in the output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound. Sometimes, when an effect is received, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 213 and 214). Regarding the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output by "press!" Or "sword!", If an effect is received when the second permissible sound is in the output state, Was interrupted.

  However, instead of this, if an effect is received when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the effect being received. When the effect is received while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without terminating the output state. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted halfway, and even if the degree of expectation cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of aspects. Since it is possible to recognize that it is not the case, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed. In addition, even when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first allowable sound having the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of modes is maintained, the post-operation effect is performed. In the first place, by re-recognizing that the effect state is unlikely to have an expectation, it becomes easy to accept the result that appears as the effect after the operation, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is prevented from being significantly reduced.

  Even when such a modified example is adopted, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. The case where the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output in the second mode within the specific fluctuation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 214. That is, among the above-described production examples, the “production state shown in FIG. 213” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception production” appearing in a specific fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 215 is executed instead of the effect mode shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 215, the “production style shown in FIG. 215” is basically the same as the content described in “production style shown in FIG. 213” and the content described in another example thereof. is there. However, in the effect mode shown in FIG. 215, even if an effect is received at timing tr42a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted with the effect of the effect reception. Therefore, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs in the specific fluctuation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode having the lowest expectation among the multiple modes (for example, , The second mode) (for example, FIG. 214 (c)), when an effect is received at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception as described above.

  According to such a configuration, when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. Even if this is done, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by confirming whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is terminated with this as a trigger. In particular, in this effect example (FIGS. 213 and 215, etc.), the first allowable sound is output in such a manner as to cross the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (valid period) from the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. Since the first allowable sound is not interrupted from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42 regardless of the mode, the first allowable sound is set as the first allowable sound. Can be made to function as time for "discriminating" which mode is.

  In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as a state in which the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. And Thereby, even when the post-operation effect is started while the first permissible sound is being output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are generated. The time during which each output state overlaps can be shortened, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can be output also in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212 (c)). Also, in the effect example, the output is not interrupted by the effect reception, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the presentation reception appears, the presentation can be provided as a presentation without a sense of incongruity.

  However, if an effect is received in the output state of the second permissible sound, no matter which mode is output as the first permissible sound, it is determined based on the fact that the effect is received. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 214 (d) and 215 (d)). That is, in this case, the first allowable sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the effect is received early, whereas the second allowable sound has the effect that the effect has been received by operation detection ( The automatic button function will provide a function that suggests whether or not there is a possibility of losing an operation opportunity). By giving these different functions to the acceptable sound, when an operation reception effect occurs Can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, the acceptable sound output when the operation accepting effect shown in FIG. 212 is generated may be always output in the first mode, or may be output in a special mode. However, even if an effect is received when output is performed in a special mode, it is desirable that the output state be maintained without terminating the output state. In addition, when the symbols are output in the special mode, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbols appear when the symbols stop is higher than in the case where the symbols are output in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be performed in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" maintains the output state in a non-suppressed mode, and the problem of poor performance is a problem. Since there is no such effect, it can be said that it is more desirable that the mode as the first allowable sound can be confirmed even in the situation where the post-operation effect has been started, and that the degree of expectation can be recognized.

  In addition, in the "suppression operation accepting effect that provides an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state," the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed manner even in a non-audible state.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, in the pachinko machine 1, “suppression that an operation opportunity is given in a state in which the effect sound of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode, in silence, or in a non-output state” In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 to 215), the reception-permitted sound output when the set time (valid period) is generated is set to any one of “a plurality of modes in which the length of time maintained as an output state is different”. , Output is possible in a non-suppression mode, and the degree of expectation (the ratio of appearance of a big hit symbol) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, also in the “non-suppression operation accepting effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in an uninhibited mode”, the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is also used. In addition to the case of outputting in the first mode in the non-suppression mode (FIG. 212), the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) in a mode different from the first mode (different length, effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output in a non-suppressed manner, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which a big hit symbol appears) may be changed depending on the output manner. According to such a configuration, the acceptable sound output when the “non-suppression operation reception effect” occurs and the acceptable sound output when the “suppression operation reception effect” occurs are both “output state”. It is possible to output in any one of a plurality of modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different, and further, since the degree of expectation differs depending on the output mode, the “non-suppression operation accepting effect” In both of the “suppression operation reception effect” and the “suppression operation reception effect”, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception is performed.

  FIG. 216 is a time chart illustrating an example of an effect in which a first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when a “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 216, in this effect example as well, portions that are not specifically noted are basically the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. However, in the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, at the time of occurrence, an effect determination as to which one of the plurality of modes allows the first allowable sound to be output (for example, at the start of symbol variation) 216 (c) and (g), as a result of the effect determination, not “first mode” but “specific mode” as shown in FIGS. Is assumed, and the effect is such that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol when the symbol change is stopped is higher than that in the case of the output in the “first mode”. The specific aspect is output for a longer time than the first aspect.

  Here, in any of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, when the operation reception effect is generated, the first allowable sound can be output in the first mode. This is described above (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). That is, in this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, when the operation reception effect is generated, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is generated (FIG. 216), the first allowable sound is changed to the second allowable sound when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated. In the case of being output in two modes (FIG. 214), different effect sounds are output as different first allowable sounds over different times. In this effect example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, the first allowable sound is output for a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, in the case where the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same period of time (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)), the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears). Indicates that the “first mode” is output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs, or the “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)”). In this case, when the “first mode” appears when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs, the effect reception is performed. As for the degree of expectation (ratio) suggesting that a big hit symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the “first mode” when the “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215))” is generated Direction reception in case The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the degree of expectation in the case where different effect sounds are output as different first allowable sounds over different times (when the “second mode (FIG. 214)” or the “specific mode (FIG. 216)” appears) ( The ratio of the appearance of the big hit symbol) is the same as the predetermined value regardless of which of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time, one of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs. The degree of expectation will not always be the same depending on whether or not they are present. Further, even when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound is used. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception production" is suggested.

  That is, in this case, regarding the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the expectations are different from each other even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it can be seen that there is no directing relationship with each other. . However, in practice, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the degree of expectation is set to be the same even though the output sounds are different from each other and the output times are different. You will be able to keep secret relationships secretly. For example, when a set time (valid period) in which production acceptance is allowed occurs, the case where “BGM playback” is suppressed and the case where “BGM playback” is not suppressed are usually (the acceptance acceptable sound is the first mode). In this case, when the effect is received, a different post-operation effect (different degree of expectation) is started, so that the effects appear to have no direct relation to each other. However, when the acceptable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation performed when the effect is received while the effect that appears differently depending on whether “BGM playback” is suppressed or not is performed. It is expected to provide a surprising staging performance by giving the staging relationship a secret, such as allowing the same content (same degree of expectation) to appear as the post staging.

  In this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a plurality of modes are prepared as the first allowable sound. Is desirably set as the mode in which the output time is shortest among the plurality of modes regardless of the operation reception effect. Further, the “second mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated, and The “specific mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs. Are desirably different (for example, “the output time of the specific mode” <“the output time of the second mode”) in order to make it appear that there is no direct relation between them.

  In the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not terminated at an intermediate stage regardless of whether the effect is received. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” with relatively low expectation is executed. In the situation where the first permissible sound is output in the “specific mode” that raises to the same expected level as the “suppression / automatic reception effect” with relatively high expectation, this is overlooked. It is possible to eliminate the possibility of the situation. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted when the effect is received in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215.

  In the above-described effect example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” (FIG. 214), the first allowable sound is used in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. When the specific mode is output (FIG. 216), the degree of expectation is the same. However, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output time is maintained as a first allowable sound for a longer time than in the “first mode (FIG. 213)” or the “second mode (FIG. 214)”. When the “third aspect” is enabled to be output, the “third aspect” is output instead of the “second aspect” as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, The setting is made such that the degree of expectation is the same as in the case where “specific mode” is output as the first allowable sound in “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 216, when an effect is received within a set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr32a), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, in the state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are performed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the length of the “time when the acceptable sound is output” is not the length of the “time when the sound data of the acceptable sound is allocated to the channel”, but the “long time”. It means the length of time required to output as audible sound.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in order to make the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” and the “suppression / automatic reception production” appear to have no directing relationship, the “second aspect” or “third aspect” As for the "mode", it is assumed that only "suppression / automatic reception effect" of "suppression / automatic reception effect" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" can be output. It is desirable to make it possible to output only with "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" among "automatic reception effect" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". When the “second aspect” and the “third aspect” are prepared as output candidates in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, respectively, the “suppression / automatic reception effect” and the unique permissible sound (second Even if the third aspect) is output, the “unsuppressed / non-automatic reception effect” does not always have the same degree of expectation as when the unique acceptable sound (specific mode) is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the rendition performance as an acceptable reception sound that is output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated.

  In addition, the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect relating to the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). As described above, among effects related to an expected change pattern (for example, a specific change pattern), the effect may occur during an effect period before the SP reaches the SP reach state.

  By the way, in the above-described effect example, as for the “suppression operation accepting effect” in which the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed, the degree of suppression is relatively low. A plurality of modes including at least a "suppression operation reception effect") and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or non-output are prepared. Is also good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the sound volume may be set to “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) in which the effect acceptance is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the effect of how much the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-described operational effects, the degree of expectation depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It is desirable to make the (ratio of big hit symbols appear) different. Note that, here, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the degree of expectation (proportion) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in “post-operation effect according to the effect reception” is “ When the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” has occurred, the degree of expectation (ratio) indicating that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception” is lower. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

  As for the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and even a reach state are not formed (or The reach state can be formed, but does not evolve to SP reach). The effect according to the low expectation variation pattern can be made to appear in any one of the effects described in “Strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect). )) May not be generated in the low expected effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect according to the high expected fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs is the degree of expectation when the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It can be said that it is lower than degree.

  Further, in order to more suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the special effect condition being satisfied, and in the “special effect state”, Each time an effect is received during a set time (valid period) during which an operation prompting image (a simulation image, a gauge display, or the like) for prompting an operation is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed each time a set time (effective period) in which effect acceptance is allowed occurs. Can be provided, and in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation direction, the degree of expectation is also suggested by such degree of production (how much is suppressed) As a result, it is expected to further improve the entertainment interest when the effect reception is permitted.

  In addition, an effect pattern (for example, a high expected change) in which “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be sequentially executed within the symbol change An effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern among the patterns may be prepared. In other words, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation on the side) with a relatively high expectation level occurs. Reception effect) ”, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of effect sound is low (weak suppression mode). Will be able to

Further, in order to more appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the production determination Regardless of which result is obtained as a (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific variation pattern occurs when the effect progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, whereas the “weak suppression mode (first suppression) Operation reception production))
-Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preliminary determination), the effect of the specific variation pattern does not occur even if the effect progresses to a predetermined timing. It is assumed that when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination), the effect occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs in the effect according to the specific change pattern, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” in the effect according to the specific change pattern. When the effect is received in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a mode of high expectation is higher than when the “” does not occur. Is desirable.

  In such a configuration, in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” always occurs, whereas the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. Does not always occur, and when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the post-operation effect with a high expectation in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” Is increased, the attention can be focused on whether or not the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, and the “weak suppression mode ( It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the "first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs.

  FIGS. 217 to 219 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” in effects corresponding to high expected fluctuation patterns (for example, specific fluctuation patterns). )) Are time charts showing an example of the effect in the case where the occurrences sequentially occur. FIG. 217 shows an example of an effect in a case where an operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (valid period) occurs. FIG. 218 shows a comparison after the set time (valid period) occurs. FIG. 219 shows an example of an effect in the case where an operation is detected at a late stage, and FIG. 219 shows an example of an effect in the case where no operation is detected within a set time (valid period).

  Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (holding down) and the fluctuation pattern being determined, a “specific fluctuation pattern” of “highly expected fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)” Is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (e.g., a notification determination) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after that, a variation effect of the decorative pattern (such as a rendering effect according to a specific variation pattern or a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (advance effect, etc.) according to the result of the (advance judgment, etc.) is additionally executed for the effect (effect pattern) of the selected “specific fluctuation pattern” itself.

  However, in the “specific fluctuation pattern”, the effect contents appearing after the timing tr40 (the timing in the SP reach state) at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol has arrived. Is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. That is, first, when the timing tr40 comes, regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, "a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a “strong suppression state”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern of the decorative pattern) appears while the “strong suppression state” appears. When a specific time has elapsed since the start of the variable production, the timing in the SP reach state) has arrived, regardless of which result has been obtained as a preliminary production decision, operation reception is permitted to accept the production. An effect (valid period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs while the “strong suppression mode” appears is referred to as “second suppression operation reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the “specific change pattern”, when a timing tr51 (a timing before the SP reaches the reach state) at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol comes, the announcement effect determination is performed. On condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which effect reception is allowed is additionally generated for a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of “effect (strong suppression mode)”, a process of suppressing the volume of “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction)” under predetermined conditions can be performed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the effect according to the “specific fluctuation pattern” is being executed, if no special result is obtained as the effect determination (such as the advance determination), FIG. The effect example shown in FIG. 214 will appear, that is, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation accepting effect)” will not occur in the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression mode) will not occur. Operation reception effect)) only occurs. On the other hand, when the special result is obtained as the performance determination (such as the advance determination), as shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) Reception effect) first occurs, and thereafter, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIG. 213 or FIG. 214 further occurs.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the effect contents after the timing tr40 has arrived are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 213, and a description thereof will be omitted here. In this case, regarding the second suppression operation accepting effect (strong suppression mode), depending on the result of the effect determination (such as the advance determination), the first allowable sound is not the first mode illustrated in FIGS. 213 and 217 to 219. 213, such as output in the second mode shown in FIG. 214, and the contents described above in relation to the effects shown in FIG. 213 and other examples and modifications are shown in FIGS. 217 to 219. Needless to say, it is appropriately applied to the effect contents (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)) after timing tr40 among the effect examples.

  As described above, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 217 to 219, the timing tr51 (a state of developing into the SP reach state) at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern). When the timing before the operation is reached), the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation accepting effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the fluctuation effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern,
A set time (valid period) during which the effect reception is allowed while the “sound of BGM reproduction” according to the variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode is set. When the effect reception is performed, the “conditional suppression reception effect (FIG. 217) changes the“ sound of BGM playback ”from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low). (Refer to (a), (b)) ", and if no operation is detected for the operation means set as the operation target within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the effect reception is allowed, The effect reception is not performed, and as a result, each process (the process of changing the “sound of BGM reproduction” from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode or the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, Sound) The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 219 (a), (b), see (f))"
Executed as “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”. As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM reproduction” in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is assigned is set in the case of the strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume). ) May be changed to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than “0”).

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (first suppression operation reception effect)”, as long as the effect is not received by the operation of the player, “specific type of effect sound ( BGM playback sound) is not shifted to the state of being output in the suppressed mode, so that it is possible to make it appear that the “unsuppressed reception effect” shown in FIGS. 212 and 216 is occurring. Become like In other words, in this case, when the player operates, the state changes to “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode”. Because it becomes possible, it becomes possible to aim at the improvement of the game entertainment by the surprise effect.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (for example, notice determination). With regard to the variation pattern, it is set so that it can be selected only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone, etc.), and in the special effect state, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( (FIGS. 212 and 216)) A big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped compared to when in a normal effect state in which a change pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (such as a notice determination) can be selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 212 and 216)” appears. As a result, the above-mentioned surprising effect elements can be combined to enhance the entertainment of the game.

  Further, in order to more suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be generated in both the “normal effect state” and the “special effect state”. In the "normal production state", in the production according to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern that is paired in the hit), "unsuppressed / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 212, FIG. 216) and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213, 214)” can be sequentially generated, and in the “special effect state”, one variation pattern “Condition suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception” Effects (FIGS. 213 and 214) will occur sequentially. It is desirable that way.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) ends without effect reception being performed, the “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) ) Does not shift to the state of being output in the weak suppression mode ”, and proceeds to the subsequent effects (FIG. 219). That is, in this case, which of "unsuppressed / non-automated reception effect" or "conditional suppression / non-automated reception effect" occurred, and by extension, "normal effect state" and "special effect state" Until it is difficult to recognize which situation it is, since the subsequent production will progress, the expectation is considered to be relatively low side `` While being output in an unsuppressed manner , The operation by the player can be more positively encouraged.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a case where “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” occurs and a case where “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( 212), the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the above-mentioned acceptable sound (first allowable sound) for the same period of time. Suppression mode) It is difficult to recognize which of “non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” has occurred.

In the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, similarly to the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs,
When the timing tr50 slightly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
A point where the second allowable sound (for example, a message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (for example, a sound effect) is output; When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated in the operation accepting effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Each configuration such as a point at which a gauge display is performed is also adopted, and thus, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “non-suppression / Non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212) "is made difficult to recognize. Therefore, as the display method of the mimic image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs. It is preferable that the display image (simulated image, gauge display) be hidden in response to the reception of the effect, and the same mode as the effect example shown in FIG. 212 be adopted. desirable.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)” according to this embodiment, the set time (valid time) is also the same as in the effect example shown in FIG. If an effect is received at timings tr51a and tr52a (FIGS. 217 (c) and 218 (c)) in which the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is in the output state after the occurrence of the “period”, the setting is performed. While the time (valid period) itself is terminated, the “acceptable allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is not aborted, and is output as the first allowable sound at the same timing (same as when there is no operation). The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 219 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the effect reception is performed by the operation of the player, only by listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception” The effect (FIGS. 217 to 219) ”or the“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212) ”can be made difficult to recognize. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the weak suppression mode is set. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained each time an effect is received.

  Also, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, if an effect is received within a set time (valid period), timings tr51a and 51b in the figure. ), As post-operation effects in response to the reception of the effects, a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) using the speaker (second effect member). And at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, in a state where the timing tr52 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound). It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

  In addition, as for the acceptable sound and the operation-related display appearing in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, another example or a modification example of the effect example illustrated in FIG. It is desirable to use the same method as each other.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern is effected. A process of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed over a predetermined period of time from the timing of reception.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) has occurred (FIG. 217), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is not significant). The timing tr53a of returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressing mode also comes relatively early, and as a result, the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppressing mode and the "sound of BGM reproduction" Is set to a relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) with the period in which the is set to the strong suppression mode. On the other hand, when an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) has occurred (FIG. 218), the timing at which the “sound of BGM playback” is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period in which “BGM playback sound” is in the weak suppression mode and the period in which “BGM playback sound” is in the strong suppression mode. Only a relatively short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) is provided.

  In other words, in this case, as the timing at which the player performs an operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is later (closer to the timing tr52), the period in which the “sound of BGM playback” is set to the weak suppression mode ends and “ The time until the period in which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode is shortened. Thereby, depending on whether the operation performed by the player is early or late in the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively early, and continuous It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing of appearance of the strong suppression mode after the weak suppression mode has been completed arrives at a relatively late timing. May not appear ", and thus, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Note that, in this effect example, the length of time during which the “sound of BGM playback” is output in the weak suppression mode (a predetermined time) is determined by the effect after operation (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is set to be the same as the execution time, but is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the weak suppression mode is set to be equal to or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). This is desirable in order to emphasize the effect after the operation when the effect is received. Furthermore, even when the effect is received at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (valid period) of the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)”, the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time during which the “sound of BGM playback” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the end timing comes before the timing tr40 of starting the strong suppression mode. Note that, in this effect example, the time of the timings tr51a to 53a is the same as the time of the timings tr51b to 53b.

As shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect according to one variation pattern,
A first suppression operation reception effect (a period from timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) in which a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed at a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode). ), And a second suppression operation accepting effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (the after-operation effect is ended from timing tr40). Period)
Can be generated sequentially. As described above, the second suppression operation accepting effect is expressed as “a variation pattern that is not executed even though the effect mode (type of acceptable sound, operation target, etc.) may change depending on the result of the effect determination. On the other hand, the first suppression operation accepting effect can be generated on the condition that a special result has been obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination). ing.

  In addition, as described above, the first suppression operation reception production is also performed in the production determination (such as the advance determination) in the production according to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception production. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first suppression operation reception effect There may be cases where two suppression operation acceptance effects are sequentially generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period from “timing when the weak suppression mode is ended” to “timing when the strong suppression mode is started”, the effect reception is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect. Since it is set as a variable period that is variable according to the performed timing, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) ends, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed. It is possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it occurs, and thereby, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. In the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is performed before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur, the second suppression operation reception effect is more highly expected (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode) than when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur. Are executed).

  By the way, when an operation accepting effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (second suppressing operation receiving effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the mode). However, when the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed, even if an attempt is made to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether in the strong suppression mode or in the weak suppression mode). In fact, it is difficult to guess without a comparison object whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode). This is especially true when the volume value of the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode is not made so large as to be suppressed, and this is a sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Is appropriately maintained, and the player can be attracted to the effect.

  In this regard, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated. The first permissible sounds are output as the same effect sound over the same period of time (in the figure, output in the "first mode"). That is, in this case, even if the first allowable sound is confirmed, it is possible to keep it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode), This makes it possible to more appropriately maintain a sense of tension for the effect, and to attract more and more players to the effect.

  However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at all, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an effect element that is useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is set within the period from the start of the operation reception effect to the end thereof. They are prepared as follows in a time-series manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a case where the above-described situation in which the first allowable sound is output as the same effect sound as each other over the same time (output in the “first mode” in the drawing) appears. Even if there is, based on the first allowable sound, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated does not end in the middle of the output even if the effect is received while in the output state, and is output for a predetermined time. On the other hand, the first allowable sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, when the effect reception is performed in the output state, based on the effect reception, The output is terminated prematurely (see FIGS. 217 and 218). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. The first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, while increasing the sense of tension for the production by making it difficult to guess. Due to this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to make the guess.

  In addition, the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (the second mode, the third mode, or the like) in addition to the first mode. ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode when the first permissible sound is output, the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode can be used even if the effect is not received when the first permissible sound is in the output state. Can be easily estimated, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension for the effect, the output in a mode that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs (the second mode, the third mode, or the like) is higher than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to reduce the execution ratio.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the allowable sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted is also performed by the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression. Since a difference is provided between the operation reception effect and the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to the fact that it appears later than the acceptable sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. With such a configuration, a slight difficulty is left in estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, and the sense of tension for the effect is maintained.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to infer the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptable sound and the operation-related display is finished. In addition, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both of the “effect by the liquid crystal display” and the “effect by the effect sound” are “performed for a certain period of time from the reception of the effect”. On the other hand, in the post-operation production according to the second suppression operation reception production, the “production by the production sound” is “performed for a certain period of time from the reception of the production”. Is an effect that ends when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of the “effect by liquid crystal display” to the end of the “effect by effect sound” depending on the timing of the effect reception. Is variable, and a large deviation occurs. By confirming such a deviation, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. .

  However, even if the presentation elements useful for estimation are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in a time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, eventually, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of the BGM reproduction is performed based on the effect reception being performed within the set time (valid period). In a mode of weak suppression. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the effect sound of the BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode when the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. A set time (valid period) is generated during the operation, and the effect can be received. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timings at which they are performed differ, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

  Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, unlike the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (valid period). In such a case, the set time elapses without the effect reception being automatically generated (see FIG. 219). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of the effect for the effect sound of the specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Since it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation, it is possible to recognize that the effect is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

  In the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the “BGM playback effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is ended is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as a timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of setting the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode is set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which “the production sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  In addition, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above-described effect example, regardless of at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 217 and 218). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at what timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received. And the length of the period in which the post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (second production member) is performed in parallel (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

  According to such a configuration, the directivity is generated in “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  Further, in the above configuration, it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the post-operation effect is generated, so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The sound is output as the same production sound for the same time, and the production elements that are useful for discriminating them are prepared so as to be scattered in time series. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension in the effect.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the post-operation effect can be intentionally mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern. Therefore, every time an operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension as to “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”. In order to obtain such an effect, in addition to the mode in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect corresponding to the one variation pattern, the effect according to the one variation pattern It is desirable that the mode in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears multiple times is executable.

  In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the action and effect by the rendition of “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”, a specific type of effect in the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The output in the non-suppression mode may be maintained without suppressing the sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction).

  Further, regardless of which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) )), The length of the period in which the production sound output (production sound) is performed in parallel with the operation sound after operation is not changed. It is desirable that it is not possible to appear as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by confirming the manner of execution of the post-operation effect, it can be estimated that a special result is obtained in the notice effect determination (that the expectation is in a relatively high state). In contrast to the effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself that always occurs irrespective of the result of the notice effect judgment, it is expected that if the player recognizes that the additional operation has been performed, the gaming entertainment will be improved. Become like Note that, depending on at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member). The second suppression operation reception effect in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is changed, may be generated only as an effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, both the case where the variation pattern itself occurs as an effect (symbol effect) and the case where the change pattern occurs under the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination) may be made.

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the “sound of BGM playback” is output with a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode may appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). It may be. That is, in this case, after the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the mode is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing an operation opportunity. Then, in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, as the number of times the weak suppression mode appears including the first suppression operation reception effect increases, the degree of suppression is further increased before the symbol change is stopped ( If the second suppression operation accepting effect is further executed (ratio), the effect of the effect on the effect of suppressing the “effect sound of BGM reproduction” can be further improved. Further, when an effect is received within a set time (effective period) that occurs while the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is not set to the suppression mode, “whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (see FIG. Whether it is the embodiment shown in FIG. 212 or the embodiment shown in FIG.

  Also, the strong suppression mode for the “sound of BGM reproduction” may be made to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the second suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the operation is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a directing effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is generated based on the effect reception being performed within the set time (valid period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was adopted. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” starts before the set time occurs, as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect occurs. May be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) during which the effect reception is allowed is generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the “BGM playback effect sound” is generated when a predetermined timing has arrived, depending on whether or not a special result has been obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination). Since the mode is set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) or not to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), the range of the effect can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. It is desirable to arrive.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and FIGS. 217 to 219, in the second suppression operation accepting effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM playback effect sound” is strongly suppressed mode (suppression mode or The process of outputting without sound or in a non-output state) is terminated at the same timing as or before the end timing of the post-production, but the end timing of the post-production has come It may be terminated later. In this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (as long as the symbol change is not stopped), the "sound of BGM reproduction" may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode. Good.

  As described above, the acceptable sound does not have to be generated a little before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and FIGS. 217 to 219, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, while the effect sound output (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is accepted. The process is terminated when a certain period of time has elapsed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. Each of the effects may be terminated at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) , And both of the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be terminated when a certain period of time has passed since the effect was received.

  The effect sound of the specific type to be suppressed (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the timing at which the effect changes at the start of the design fluctuation or within the effect according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). Timing, etc.). On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started at an indefinite timing within the set time (the desired operation).

  The specific variation pattern described in the rendering examples illustrated in FIGS. 213 and 214 and the specific variation pattern described in the rendering examples illustrated in FIGS. 217 to 219 may be different variation patterns, or may be the same. It may be a fluctuation pattern. Also, the special effect state may be an effect state in which the big hit probability related to the big hit determination is relatively high, instead of the look-ahead effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to set the “specific type of production sound” to a non-audible state (output with no sound (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end of channel assignment)). Good.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is set as an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “first suppression operation reception effect”, the only operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the “second suppression operation reception effect”, see FIGS. 213 and 214. However, as described above, based on the result of the announcement effect determination, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) ) ". Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that the sword decoration mode is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that, in the case where “the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and the case where the “sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the effect has been received. The production after the corresponding operation has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated includes:
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) does not move when the set time (valid period) occurs; and An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 can provide a player with an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given by one of these modes.

And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect,
A non-suppressed operation accepting effect in which a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed manner, from the generation of a set time (valid period) to the execution of an effect after operation, and A suppression operation accepting effect is provided in which a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state. Further, as a suppression operation accepting effect,
A first suppression operation accepting effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppressing mode) (for example, the above-described “conditional suppression / non-automatic receiving effect”) )), And a second suppression operation accepting effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (eg, BGM playback effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (for example, the above-described “suppression / automatic reception”). Direction ")
Are prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
-While the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (whether it is output in a suppression mode or in silence, or is in a non-output state), the first operation mode is applied to the operation means. (In this case, the suppressed non-movement reception effect to which an operation opportunity with the operation button 410 is given, and the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (output in the suppression mode or silent) Or a non-output state), a movement reception suppression under suppression in which an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the state where the sword decoration 5001 is removed) is given to the operation means. By preparing, it is possible to further improve the performance when the operation opportunity is given.

  FIG. 220 shows an example of an effect (movement reception under suppression) that appears in the case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). It is a time chart shown. Note that, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), an example of an effect (a non-movement reception effect under suppression) that appears when “the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” This is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 217 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the effect after the operation).

  As shown in FIG. 220, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), also in the case where “sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the second suppression operation is received. In the effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), the part that is not particularly marked as “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” is basically the same (FIGS. 213, 214, 217 to 219), the above-described related effects, other examples, and modifications can be appropriately adopted.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. However, there is a problem as to when to perform the processing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific game state (normal game state or short-change time short game state), first, as shown in FIG. 220 (c) and (h), Unless the timing tr40 at which the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode does not arrive, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of the BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, even if the set time in which the reception of the effect is permitted occurs, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is generated. Is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. That is, in this case, as long as the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is not in the strong suppression mode, even if an operation opportunity is given, this is no longer the second operation mode. Can be suppressed from being operated in an operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation is performed and the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player, when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of the BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, is triggered by the message “Which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode gives the operation opportunity? , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an operation error between them.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is provided until immediately before the operation opportunity is provided, the timing tr40 Tension and amusement for entertainment are maintained suitably after the effect is received and the effect is started after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to the specific position. I'm going to let it. Note that, here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. In such a manner, the announcement effect determination is performed.

  However, in this case, immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed), the effect reception itself is in a permitted state. Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length of the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and (d), the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position is determined by the acceptable sound. The time is set to be shorter than the time until the output of the first mode having the shortest output time in (first allowable sound) is completed. Thereby, even if any mode (the above-described second mode, third mode, etc., in addition to the first mode) is output as the permissible sound (first permissible sound), the effect is received in the middle of the output state. Can be performed (output can be terminated halfway), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is unlikely that a stuttering effect will occur.

  Also, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is determined based on the fact that there is no operation on the operation receiving portion and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. The movement is made at a higher speed so as to be a shorter time than the time required to move from the to the original position (see FIG. 220 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it is possible to show a state in which an effort is made to reduce the time substantially reduced as the set time (effective period), and a game due to the reduced time. It is expected that the dissatisfaction of people will be suppressed.

  In order to more appropriately suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression illustrated in FIG. The set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) of the mode and the operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to post-operation effect) of the weak reception mode shown in FIG. It is desirable to set a time value having a length that is equal to or greater than "the time required to move the unit from the original position to the specific position". According to such a configuration, in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that can more than compensate for the substantially reduced time is used. Since the set time (valid period) is generated, the entertainment of the game can be maintained appropriately. In this case, in order to make the program common, a set time having a similar length may be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, the effect is not substantially received during the timings tr42A to tr43 after the activation of the automatic button function, and the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced. In view of the above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the set reception time (effective period) is the operation reception effect in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 212 (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect). ) And the set time (effective period) of the operation accepting effect (from timing tr50 to the effect after the operation) in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 217 "required when moving the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position. A time value longer than the sum of the "time" and the "time of the timing tr42A to tr43 after the activation of the automatic button function" is set. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. In this case as well, in order to achieve a common program, a set time having a similar length is set when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  In addition, as described above, in the situation where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode, if there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. 220 (a), (h) to (l), an effect reception is automatically generated at timing tr42A, and based on the effect reception, the post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). (Liquid crystal display) and at least the effect sound output (operation sound) after the operation by the speaker (the second effect member) are each executed at least as the effect after the operation. However, in this case, as apparent from the comparison in FIGS. 220 (g) and (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the “speed when the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force” is changed to “moving from the original position to the specific position”. It is intentionally slower than the "speed at the time," so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for shortening the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), the operation receiving unit is configured to perform the movable effect (after-operation effect). Can be expected to function as a part of the game), so that the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (h), the “movement effect from the specific position to the original position” by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation according to the automatic reception of the effect reception (automatic button function). Although the process is started when a predetermined timing in the middle of the execution of the effect is reached, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated, similarly to the effect after the operation.

  However, no matter how slow the “movement from the specific position to the original position” is performed, this alone does not provide enough time for a movable effect, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the entertainment interest in the game. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof), a vibration effect of vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. Thus, the period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving unit is determined by the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”. It is designed to function as a movable stage. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the “operation receiving portion that has not been operated by the player”, and as a result of the effect reception being automatically generated, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). It is expected that the performance of the display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation at the time when the execution time is shortened is suitably maintained. In this case, if the operation receiving portion is caused to emit light in a state where the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect. It is possible to appeal to.

  Here, regarding the movable effect period (moving time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”, the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. , It is desirable to end the processing before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of the specific type is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode, and it is possible to smoothly promote progress (switching of the effect) in the effect content corresponding to the effect sound.

  Another difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that the second allowable sound (message sound) is a message sound such as “put a sword!”. In some cases, a message display such as “push-in” and a mimic image based on the “sword decoration image SYG” may be displayed as an operation-related display or an operation-related display. become.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), no operation opportunity is given in such a second operation mode, but the “specific type of effect sound” is set to the weak suppression mode. If an operation opportunity is given in the first place, an erroneous operation may be promoted when an incorrect recognition of either the weak suppression mode or the strong suppression mode is made. In this regard, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is set based on the “specific type of effect sound” in the weak suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode is made to appear based on the reception of the effect without being given, the useless feeling of tension and expectation that "the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given" may be given. It is possible to provide effects without giving them.

  In the effect example (second operation mode), even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as in the case where no operation is performed on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within a period in which the post-operation effect is being executed arrives, a vibration effect of vibrating the operation receiving unit is performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be ended soon and a new effect progress will appear.

  However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, by starting the vibration effect early based on the effect being received by the operation, during the period during which the post-operation effect is being performed You may make it aim at further improvement of entertainment interest. That is, in this case, when the operation on the operation receiving unit is performed within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when the operation on the operation receiving unit is not performed within the set time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, if the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of the BGM reproduction) is not suppressed. , Or when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode, the rate of providing the operation opportunity in the second operation mode (0 Or may be 100).

  In each of the above-described effects examples (FIGS. 146 to 220), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be activated, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated is set as a set time (valid period). It is desirable to set a time value that has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the "time from when the automatic button function is activated to the end of the set time" to the set time (valid period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value, which is more than the amount of time that is substantially reduced as a period in which the effect reception is allowed, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state,
・ The operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) executed as the effect of the fluctuation pattern itself (symbol effect) based on the result of the fluctuation pattern judgment; An operation reception effect (additional reception effect) that is executed as a condition in addition to the effect of the fluctuation pattern itself (effect pattern).
At least.

  In other words, the "intrinsic reception effect" means that if a special result is obtained in the change pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination on which change pattern to execute the symbol effect) (a special change pattern is selected). Then, it is determined that the execution is performed within the effect according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, even if the “additional reception effect” obtains “the predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” in the fluctuation pattern determination (even if the predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected), The effect is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that an “additional reception effect” is to be generated in the effect determination (such as a preliminary determination) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, once the effect according to the variation pattern is started, the effect determination is determined rather than the occurrence of an “intrinsic reception effect” that is linked to the variation pattern (effect pattern) and whose occurrence is determined. It can be said that the occurrence of an “additional reception effect”, which is permitted depending on the result of the notice (such as a preliminary judgment), is more useful for the player and more important for enhancing the interest in the game. In addition, even when the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as the effect according to the fluctuation pattern, if the “additional reception effect” occurs in the effect, the “additional reception effect” is displayed in the effect. Is higher when the symbol change is stopped than when no symbol has occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the internal reception effect that can be generated during the normal gaming state, the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of “BGM playback”) is suppressed or A case where production is accepted in a state of being output silently or in a non-output state, and a case where production sound of a specific type (production sound of “BGM playback”) is outputted in an unsuppressed manner In some cases, the production reception is permitted. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, the effect reception is not allowed while the output is performed in a suppressed mode or silence, or in the non-output state, The effect reception is allowed while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the effect acceptance is permitted, the effect sound of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or is set to a non-output state. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that a reception effect will occur, and it is expected that gaming entertainment will be maintained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the intrinsic reception effect that may occur when the game is in the normal game state is performed even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. The non-automatic operation in which the post-production is performed in an automatic reception mode capable of generating the post-production and the operation is not performed within the set time in which the production reception is permitted, and the post-production is not performed, and the set time is terminated. It may be executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that can occur when the player is in the normal game state is not executed in the automatic reception mode, but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically (automatic button function) within the set time, it is possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception effect has occurred. As a result, it is expected that game entertainment until the stage is accepted will be maintained.

  FIG. 221 is a time chart illustrating the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 221, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination performed at the start of the symbol variation (for example, the advance determination according to the variation pattern 1), the announcement effect is performed. It is determined at least whether or not to execute A. As a result of the effect determination, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. If the timing effect is not determined to execute the notice effect A, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 arrives. The design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the announcement effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 comes, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect vary in the variation pattern 1 itself (design). Direction) is additionally executed. The “additional execution” can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, the announcement effect A may be displayed so as to cover all the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 and make it invisible, or to cover only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 The announcement effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “ramp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is output with priority over the “ramp effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Further, in the case of the production sound, the “production sound based on the notice pattern A” is assigned to a channel different from the “production sound based on the fluctuation pattern 1”, so that it is based on the “change pattern 1 (production pattern)”. The effect sound is additionally output with the effect sound corresponding to the notice effect A.

  FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the effect contents appearing when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 222, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination performed at the start of the symbol variation (for example, the advance determination according to the variation pattern 2), “addition” is performed. Is determined at least. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212”. Therefore, when it is determined that the “additional reception effect” is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, the “additional reception effect” is changed to a symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212). When the timing tr31 of the above arrives, the symbol effect (effect pattern) is additionally executed (from the timing tr31 until the end of the effect after the operation), and the effect of executing the “additional reception effect” is performed. If the judgment is not made, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception effect" does not appear and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

  Here, as for the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the fluctuation pattern 2 (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is maintained in the output state in the non-suppression mode. In this case, the first allowable sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr32, and the set time ends at the timing tr33 without the automatic button function being activated. Since these are as described above with reference to FIG. 212 and the like, description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) illustrated in FIG. 222 has no particular affirmation as “the effect content when the low expected non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” illustrated in FIG. 212. The parts are basically the same, and the above-described related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 222, an example in which the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed in the above-described another example mode in FIG. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, if the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), it is determined based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, “after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on effect display device 1600 (first effect member),” and “after-effect sound output (effect sound) by speaker (second effect member)” as the after-effect effect. At least, but for the production after the operation,
The “after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is ended at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
The “production sound output (operation sound) after operation by the speaker (the second production member)” is executed in such a manner that it is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing at which the production was received. It will be.

  FIG. 223 is a time chart illustrating the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 223, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained in the effect determination performed at the start of the symbol variation (for example, the advance determination according to the variation pattern 3). Regardless of whether the sound is performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the process of setting the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” to the above-described “strong suppression mode” is performed, and the “strong suppression mode” is performed. At the timing tr41 that arrives during the appearance of “,” an “intrinsic reception effect” is generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 to the end of the post-operation effect).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the “specific variation patterns shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 or FIGS. 217 to 220 and the like”. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 223, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is in a strongly suppressed mode (for example, silence (volume 0)). (Output state or non-audible state such as non-output state), the first allowable sound is output when timing tr41 arrives, and a set time (valid period) is generated at timing tr42, and the set time is set. When the “timing tr42A” before the ending timing tr43 arrives without the reception of the effect, the above-described automatic button function is activated. For these, refer to “FIG. 213 to FIG. 215 or FIG. 217 to FIG. 220 "and so on, and the description is omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) illustrated in FIG. 223 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 213, and is related to the above-described related effects, other examples, and modifications ( 215 and FIGS. 217 to 220) can be appropriately adopted.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode, the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern is referred to as “intrinsic reception”. Although an “effect” may occur, an “additional reception effect” that is additionally executed with respect to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern does not occur, whereas “BGM playback” is performed. During the period in which the effect sound of "" is in the non-suppressing mode, "intrinsic reception effect", which is a symbol effect based on the variation pattern, may occur, and in addition to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern. An "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

  That is, in this case, when an operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern is in the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is “additional reception effect” is excluded. As a result, it is possible to generate a set time (valid period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted in an environment in which the operation reception effect is concentrated in which mode is performed. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is output in the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to recognize that the additional reception effect may be occurring. As a result, it is expected to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in addition to the case where the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” appear in different fluctuation patterns 2 and 3, etc., one fluctuation pattern (for example, It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” can appear sequentially in the effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” occurs at a timing before the “intrinsic reception effect”.

  More preferably, in the effect according to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the non-suppression mode. "Are allowed to appear sequentially, and the" intrinsic reception effect "can further appear while the effect sound of" BGM reproduction "is in the strong suppression mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs depending on the state of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , It is difficult to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” has occurred (non-suppression mode), and the suppression mode for the effect sound of “BGM playback” has appeared. Through this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, when an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode in the symbol effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol change. According to such a configuration, at the time when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect may be “additional reception effect”. In addition to being eliminated, the possibility that an “additional reception effect” will appear until the symbol change is stopped will also be eliminated. In such a manner, the generated “intrinsic reception effect” is executed in such a manner that the generated “intrinsic reception effect” is executed in such a manner as not to have any sense of expectation. You will be able to concentrate.

  Further, when the “additional reception effect” occurs, the “intrinsic reception effect (both non-suppressed mode and strongly suppressed mode)” occurs after the “additional reception effect” has not occurred. As described above, it is desirable to increase the rate of execution of a high expectation (acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

  Also, as described above, when the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is necessarily generated during the period of the strong suppression mode. You may. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are selected as candidates for the variation pattern determination, "the strong acceptance mode is set, but during the period of the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is displayed. The “variation pattern that is not generated” is not included, and the “variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode” is included. . Alternatively, even if the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the period in which the strong suppression mode is performed without an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) may end. It may be. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are selected as candidates for the variation pattern determination, "the strong acceptance mode is set, but during the period of the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is displayed. A fluctuation pattern that is not generated ”and a“ variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when in the strong suppression mode ”are respectively included. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong” sound is generated. Even if the player does not notice that it is in the "suppression mode", it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred is excluded based on the following effect elements.

  That is, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, first, when the first allowable sound is “additional reception effect”, Even if the output sound is output for the same time (output in the “first mode” in the drawing), based on the first allowable sound, instead of “additional reception effect”, “ It is possible to recognize that "intrinsic reception effect" has occurred. More specifically, the first allowable sound (see FIG. 222) output upon occurrence of the “additional reception effect” is terminated in the middle of the output even if the effect reception is performed in the output state. Instead, the sound is output for a predetermined time, while the sound of the "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" and is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated. The first acceptable sound (see FIG. 223) is such that when an effect is received in the output state, the output is terminated midway based on the effect reception.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs, in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second allowable sound is also output, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred by checking whether or not the second allowable sound is output. It is also possible to recognize that it is. However, as described above, the second permissible sound need not always be prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, an operation-related display (display for prompting an operation) that appears within a set time (valid period) in which effect acceptance is permitted. When the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode” and the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs (with message display), the “additional reception effect” occurs In this case, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is excluded.

  Also, in the “intrinsic reception effect” that occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the automatic button function described above can be enabled, In the "additional reception effect", the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also excludes the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred. It is possible to recognize.

  As described above, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, various effects other than the effect elements related to the “suppression mode” are performed. Since a mode different from that when the “additional reception effect” occurs in the element appears, it is relatively clear that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is excluded. It is possible to easily recognize, and it is possible to encourage concentration on the “intrinsic reception effect”.

  On the other hand, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, the common points between “additional reception effect” and various effect elements By making it difficult to recognize which of the “intrinsic reception effect” and “additional reception effect” is occurring, the “additional reception effect” occurs It is designed to provide a directing effect that makes people aware of the possibility of being.

  FIG. 224 is a time chart showing an effect content that appears when the “intrinsic reception effect” as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”. It is. Note that the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 224 corresponds to a change pattern different from the “variation pattern that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223” when the change pattern is selected. May be generated as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) as the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is selected, a symbol effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is generated. .

  As shown in FIG. 224, the “intrinsic reception effect” generated in the “non-suppression mode” also occurs in the “intrinsic reception mode” shown in FIG. 223 in the “strong suppression mode”. In the same manner as the “target reception effect”, regardless of which result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives. Has become something.

  However, the first allowable sound (first mode) output when the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 224 is generated is the first allowable sound output when the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222 is generated. As in the case of the sound (first mode), even if an effect is received in the output state, the output is not terminated midway and is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to determine which of the “intrinsic reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” is occurring based on the output. .

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first mode), and this point is also shown in FIG. 222. It is the same as "additional reception production".

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 224, the operation means to be operated is also displayed as an operation-related display (display prompting operation) within a set time (effective period) in which effect reception is allowed. Only a simulated image and a gauge display indicating the remaining time are displayed, and no message display is displayed. In this respect, the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. Has become.

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 224, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword decoration 5001” is not set as the operation target. This point is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222.

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the above-described automatic button function is not activated, and the effect after the operation is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) elapses without occurrence occurs, and this point is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222.

  As described above, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “non-suppression mode”, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “strong suppression mode”. Unlike the case where the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs, various effect elements are common to the time when the "additional effect effect" occurs, and the "additional effect effect" may occur Become conscious of gender.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, “intrinsic reception effect (intrinsic reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled)” Is generated, there is a case where the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) is output, and a case where the set time occurs without outputting the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the “additional reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “non-suppression mode”, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set permissible sound (first permissible sound) is always output without generating the set time.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “non-suppression mode”, when the acceptable sound is output, the “intrinsic reception effect” is output. And the "additional reception effect", it is difficult to recognize which is occurring, but when the acceptable reception sound is not output, instead of the "additional reception effect", the "intrinsic reception effect" It becomes possible to recognize that the state is occurring. It should be noted that, when the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “unsuppressed mode” and the “intrinsic reception effect” is generated, it is determined whether or not the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output. It is desirable that the determination be made not in accordance with the effect determination but in accordance with the type of the variation pattern. The “intrinsic reception effect” in the non-suppression mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and the “intrinsic reception effect” in the non-suppression mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

  Further, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, when an allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, “intrinsic reception effect” and “additional reception effect” While it is difficult to recognize which of the above is occurring, when the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is “intrinsic reception effect”. Become like

  In the "additional reception effect", it has been described above that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the performance determination (advance determination). When the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, it may not be output (for example, “identification shown in FIG. 216”). Embodiment "). However, for the different aspect, it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the first permissible sound is lower than that of the output in the first aspect.

  Regarding the “intrinsic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 224, another part or modification example of the operation reception effect illustrated in FIG.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 221 and 222, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the effect determination is performed while the symbol effect is being performed, but the effect determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of symbol change.

  In addition, in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 224, with respect to the mode of the rendering after the operation according to the rendering reception, a case where a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination and a case where the big hit is lost in the big hit determination May be different. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, the effect is as shown in the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 212 to 224. The effect after the operation may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in FIG.

  As described above, the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has conventionally been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs are described by program codes representing the operation contents of the effector and the control procedure for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and have been created by a programmer having advanced technology. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of gaming machines, it is required to execute various effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of technology is required for the individual programmers, and the number of development steps is increased, and it is difficult to secure necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for a test for checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality has also increased.

  Therefore, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, an effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) is not realized by the program code. Instead of using a tool for creating LCD rendering effects, the program data for gaming machines is output, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving quality. I am trying to do it.

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of the effect. Each block is provided with a flag (usability information) indicating whether or not an effect based on the block is executable. This flag (usability information) is, for example, stored as rewritable information on the RAM.

  In the scenario data, for example, blocks are prepared in a time-series combination for the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination. That is, when the start condition for starting the symbol change is satisfied, first, an effect determination as to which type of effect is to be generated among the effects is performed, and when the result is obtained, the effect determination is performed. Based on the obtained result, the flag (usability information) is set to the ON state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the determination result of execution is obtained, and the determination result of execution is obtained. The flag (usability information) of the block corresponding to the effect type that has not been set is maintained in the off state. As a result, after the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (for each unit time (one frame)) to correspond to the block set in the ON state. Only the effect of the type is selectively executed.

  Here, as the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each variation pattern type, or may be prepared without depending on the variation pattern. If different data is prepared for each variation pattern type, only blocks corresponding to the effect types that may occur separately for each variation pattern will be configured as time-series combined scenario data, Only the flags (usability information) of the blocks determined to be executed among those blocks are turned on. On the other hand, when prepared as data commonly prepared for each variation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to the blocks) corresponding to all the effect types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure or the like. Then, only the flag (usability information) of a block determined to be executed among those blocks may be operated by turning on the flag. Further, the scenario data prepared without depending on the fluctuation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing read out while processing (analyzing) the block (see “described later”). In this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern will be prepared, and in this case, the scenario data corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern will be prepared. Scenario data not to be used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of variation patterns, so that the processing load and storage capacity can be suitably suppressed.

  However, due to the structure of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, interactive effects for external input by the player, and the like occur, so that each block operated in the ON state is executed. By itself, it is impossible to achieve all the effects.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, process identification information (effect SW) for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or calling a program for executing a predetermined control is included in a block or a block. Can be set (embedded) in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with. Here, the process identification information (effect SW) is prepared for each type of the program to be called, and is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an ON state may be prepared. Thereby, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, the processing identification information is determined according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. The called process is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or may indicate the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be.

  The peripheral control board 1510 obtains (detects) the embedded process identification information in the execution analysis of the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, and executes the program function corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. Call (call back) dynamically. Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.) can be executed. It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting or updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function based on the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of blocks, effect and replacement of symbols, and interactive effect for external input by the player.

  The program function called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created for each type of gaming machine. Therefore, even a designer or a plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge only needs to design and produce various effects, and otherwise sets processing identification information for calling a predefined program function. This makes it possible to easily realize this even with complex production specifications. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) in effect units, it is possible to significantly reduce the development period. In addition, based on random lottery results, the effect By performing a test using the flag (usability information) and the process identification information without performing the test, it is possible to simplify the test process and significantly reduce the time required for the test.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game control means (main control) capable of performing the judgment on the big hit and giving the privilege based on the result of the predetermined judgment (winning of the big hit) being obtained. A substrate 1310), an effect control unit (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processes related to various effects based on the fluctuation pattern according to the determination, and image data in a display area based on the process performed by the effect control unit. Image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for outputting the image data to the time-series image information (scenario data or block, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.). Image information processing means capable of executing a process for displaying an image based on the image information.

  Further, in the time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data or block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) according to this embodiment, at least a part of the time-series image information may include processing identification information. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information and call a process corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while processing relating to the image is performed for each unit time (for example, one frame), processing relating to rendering elements (lamp, sound, movable body, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for displaying the image. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the production elements when realizing one production in cooperation with different production elements. Become.

  In this regard, as described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern. Sections can be included. In such a configuration, in the case where the time-series image information itself, which is data for specifying “processing for displaying an image” in time series, includes process identification information, which is data for specifying that processing is to be read out. Since the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern can include a section in which the process identification information is obtained for each unit time, fine timing Thus, even when it is necessary to perform the rendering process, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a gap between the rendering process and the rendering by the display image.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed in a state where the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or is in a non-output state. Allowed special operation reception effects can be executed. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation-related display before the permissible operation performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the effect reception in the special operation reception effect are permitted. The permissible operation-related display that is performed when the user is in the state of being displayed is displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or is in a non-output state, so that the operation effect Will be expected to focus on However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the directing performance will be poor as much as the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when a special operation reception effect occurs and the permissible operation-related display performed when the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect are described below. Since the images are displayed based on the time-series image information different from each other, various effects can be realized with respect to the display effects, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when no operation is detected within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, a special operation reception effect capable of generating an after-operation effect is executed. It is possible. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation-related display before the permissible operation performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the effect reception in the special operation reception effect are permitted. The permissible operation-related display that is performed when the user is in the state of being displayed is displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even after an operation is not detected within a period in which the effect reception is permitted, a post-operation effect can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation by the player is not performed, and as a result, it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when a special operation reception effect occurs and the permissible operation-related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are described below. Since the images are displayed based on the time-series image information different from each other, a variety of effects can be realized for the display effects, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment reads information corresponding to image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the blocks, and uses the read information as the liquid crystal display control information. It can be output to the unit 1512. In this regard, as will be described later, as a block, a first type block that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing has arrived, and a block that is read without passing a wait time (wait processing period). A second type block is prepared.

  More specifically, the first type block is defined as a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the fluctuation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes. It is possible to constitute as what is read after passing through. For the second type block, for example, in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the first type block, the availability information corresponding to the second type block Is set to the ON state, it can be configured to be read out without passing through the wait time (wait processing period).

  That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared among a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is possible not only to expect the reduction of the processing load and the memory capacity but also to facilitate the effect design and effect change.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect The second time-series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read while the processing based on the scheduler data) is in the execution state, and the second time-series image information is read. Thus, the processing based on the second time-series image information is changed to the execution state in place of the processing based on the first time-series image information in the middle of execution. That is, in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of terminating the process based on the first time-series image information halfway, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity are reduced.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to the present embodiment will be described again. Is assumed to be composed of "a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for each of the image elements (layers). The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is provided with a process for reading information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

  Here, the process for reading information (image number) corresponding to the image data (the process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95)” started for each frame. It is determined for each frame whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the “block”, and if there is such information, it is read out. A drawing list is created based on the information read for each frame and transmitted to the image control unit (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512). Accordingly, the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and outputs the display image to the display area. Direction will be realized.

  Here, the “block” itself may be configured as a data structure that specifies “information (image number) corresponding to image data” for each unit time. In this case, the “liquid crystal” described above is used. Since it has a function as "effect scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" separately from "blocks", and this can be omitted.

  However, the “block” according to this description example specifies the type of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be associated with one “block”. In this case, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is executed in a predetermined order, Alternatively, one of the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is selectively executed.

  In the “block” according to this description example, the “liquid crystal effect” in which a schedule for each frame for information (image number) corresponding to “image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)” is described. In addition to the scheduler data, information on what to execute as "processing related to lamp emission", information about which to execute as "processing related to movable body operation", and information as to "processing related to sound output" It also includes information on whether to execute. That is, in this case, if a “block” for realizing a specific notice effect is read, based on the “block”, “image processing in the effect display device 1600” related to the specific notice effect, and “ Since the “process related to lamp emission”, the “process related to movable body operation”, and the “process related to sound output” are read and executed, respectively, different effect elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound ), When one effect (specific notice effect) is realized, it is possible to suppress the start timing from being shifted between the effect elements.

  As described above, the “block”, together with other blocks or alone, forms one scenario data, and among the scenario data, the “block” for which the availability information is in the on state. By selectively executing (analyzing) only the effect, an effect in a mode according to the result of the effect determination is executed.

  However, regarding the scenario data and the blocks, any data may be used as long as they have a relationship such as "Scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of the effect." There is no limitation on the detailed method of realizing it, including the provision of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”.

  FIG. 225 conceptually illustrates an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using “scenario data” or “block” when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 225, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is described as “animation list”, but these are synonymous.

  As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this description example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. For example, in the scenario data of “Layer 2”, a plurality of patterns indicating the contents of the symbol effect are provided. The blocks (symbol block A, symbol block B, symbol block C, symbol block D) are configured as a time-series combination. However, in the present embodiment, scenario data such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data in which only one is prepared as a block indicating the content of the effect is included.

  Further, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this description example also includes “a configuration that can selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated blocks”. In this case, by setting only the unusable information corresponding to the selected block out of the plurality of blocks to the ON state, and leaving the unusable information corresponding to the other blocks to the OFF state, the plurality of blocks are changed. Is selectively executable. Alternatively, the blocks according to this description example also include “a configuration that can selectively execute any one of the plurality of associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal effect scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to the other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains off. Thus, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executable.

  Now, assuming that the start condition relating to the symbol change (holding digestion) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first obtains information on the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information obtained in this manner also includes information on the variation pattern. The peripheral control unit 1511 reads out the scenario data corresponding to the information (the variation pattern) and associates the scenario data with the scenario data as a candidate for execution. Effect determination as to which block (effect) is to be executed among the plurality of blocks (blocks corresponding to the notice effect). Then, among a plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for the blocks (effects) for which the effect determination has been made to execute, the availability information is operated (set) to an ON state, and the execution is performed. For blocks (effects) for which no effect determination has been made, the availability information is kept off.

  It should be noted that the usability information associated with each block (effect) is turned off (set) when starting a symbol effect (decorative effect by a decorative symbol), such as when reading scenario data. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read in this way, the above-described processing for operating (setting) the availability information of which block is turned on is performed.

  Here, the “block” for which the availability information has been turned on (set) when starting the design effect is executed (analyzed) immediately after the design effect is started based on the scenario data, or It is executed (analyzed) following the other block (production) started based on the data, or executed at the timing after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data or block ( Analysis). However, the blocks (effects) also include “ones that may be executed at a plurality of timings within one fluctuation pattern”, “ones that may be executed with a plurality of fluctuation patterns”, and the like. In other words, when the design effect is started, if the use availability information of all the blocks executed within the fluctuation is operated (set) to the ON state, "the effect mode in which the same contents appear is obtained. It is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set only by different execution timings. " In other words, in this case, different data is prepared in spite of the same effect content, and the effect is executed based on the data. Therefore, there is a concern that the processing load and the memory capacity are adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always executed, but when executing a symbol effect, the specific block (specific effect) is used. ) Is not operated (set) to the ON state, and the symbol effect can be started in the OFF state. In FIG. 225, such a specific block (specific effect) includes an “appearance EF block E”, an “operation waiting block E”, a “post-operation block E”, and the like. Will be described later. Among these, the “post-operation block E” is executed as an effect (effect in which the effect content dedicated to the big hit is prepared) that clearly indicates whether the big hit has been won or lost.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, even for a block (effect) obtained as a result of the effect determination as a result of the effect determination, the block (effect) is also executed in another variation pattern or another timing. If there is a possibility that the symbol effect may be performed, the symbol effect can be started in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information in the on state when the symbol effect is executed. Such blocks include “operation waiting block A” and “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” in FIG. 225, and these blocks will be described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that the starting condition is satisfied at timing ts1. Therefore, at the timing ts1, the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in accordance with the type of the variation pattern. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the blocks associated with the scenario data read in this way and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is to be operated (set) to the ON state. Then, an operation (setting) for the availability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer after the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed in this way, so that the production progresses in a mode according to the result of the production determination.

  However, instead of this, the effect determination corresponding to the type of the variation pattern may be performed before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in the form corresponding to the type of the variation pattern. Good. That is, in this case, the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data are stored in the result of the effect determination executed before reading the scenario data. Respectively.

  Here, in the “layer 1” of the plurality of layers, the “background image” displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and the game is not executed). This corresponds to the scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in “Layer 1”, a new block is not read out when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block that is already in the execution state (normal background block) is continuously executed ( Analysis).

  More specifically, in the normal background block, “what image data” should be output at “when” as “image data for background image” stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 "Liquid crystal effect scheduler data for a normal background", which is information (time-series image information) about. That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for a normal background” for each unit time (one frame), and as a result, “image data for a background image (moving image or Each time information corresponding to “still image)” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with information obtained from another frame, and the drawing list may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. This allows the effect display device 1600 to display the background description (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background”. For the block and scenario data that correspond to the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background”, the timing at which the power-on processing ends and the corresponding effect state (normal effect state, high-accuracy effect state, special effect mode, etc.) ) Is preferably read out as a trigger, and the background image (background moving image) having the same content is set as time-series image information to be loop-displayed at predetermined time intervals. Also, the information corresponding to the “image data for background image (moving image or still image)” is not created together with the information obtained from the other frames to create one information (drawing list). May be transmitted. The point is that information corresponding to “image data for a background image (moving image or still image)” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any form.

  Note that the normal background image displayed on “Layer 1” based on the normal background block includes an SP on “Layer 3” based on “SP reach background block” and “SP end background block” described later. When the background image at the time of the reach is displayed, the background image on “Layer 3” is preferentially displayed, so that it is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, as an internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of the SP reach is displayed on “Layer 3”, “Layer 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on “Layer 1”. And that the processing relating to the normal background image based on is continuously executed, and is not set to a non-executed state according to the processing state of the SP background image on “Layer 3”. Has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of the SP reach is completed, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. A "symbol block D" for displaying a stopped symbol is originally executed. As a result, when the big hit symbol appears, it is possible to easily recognize in which effect state the winning has been achieved, and it is possible to appropriately promote the understanding of the game.

  On the other hand, “Layer 2” corresponds to a scenario data block (symbol block) for “effect symbols (symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600)”. In the specific fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 225, the development extends to the SP reach effect. Therefore, in the “layer 2” scenario data, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for pre-reach change” is associated. "Symbol block B" for associating "symbol block A for design" with "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal reach fluctuation" and "symbol for liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach change" It is defined that the "block C" and the "symbol block D" which associates the "stop symbol liquid crystal effect scheduler data" are sequentially executed (analyzed).

  However, in recent years, during the period in which the SP reach background is displayed, the “effect design” is often displayed in a small size in the effect display device 1600. Back, and then the SP reach background will be displayed again. " That is, in this case, if only the display schedule related to the “effect design” and the display schedule related to the “SP reach background” are executed (analyzed) for each layer, there is a concern that a shift may occur when there is any abnormality. Therefore, the “symbol block C” associated with the “LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach variation” may be executed based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, the processing related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect symbols.

  For example, at a predetermined timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” to be described later, the “processing for turning on / off the use availability information of the symbol block C” is called. By attaching the process identification information, the “symbol block C” and “symbol block D” can be executed based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, regarding the “symbol block C” and the “symbol block D”, the use availability information is kept in the off state when the symbol effect is started, and also the “symbol block A”. "And" Symbol block B "are not included in the scenario data and are configured as different scenario data.

  Further, “Layer 3” corresponds to the scenario data blocks (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) relating to “background image after the start of the SP reach effect”. In this regard, the “background image after the SP reach effect has been started” should not be displayed when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of “Layer 3”, a wait time (wait processing period) is set which functions so as not to execute the block of “background image after the SP reach effect is started” until the corresponding timing comes. I have. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (weight processing period) has elapsed from the start of the symbol effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed) and are accordingly performed. Since the information can be read for each frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

  That is, in this case, the blocks include a first type block (such as a block corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225) read out after a wait time (a wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, A second type block (such as a block corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, and layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225) read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period) is included. The second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data that is shared at all effect timings, thereby promoting a reduction in processing load and memory capacity. In addition to being expected, the effect design and effect change can be facilitated.

  In this regard, in the SP reach production, after the display production of the same content is started irrespective of the hit of the big hit, the production content for the big hit (for example, the production content in which the character wins, etc.) (E.g., the content of a character defeated) to indicate the jackpot determination result in many cases. At this time, despite the fact that the display effect having the same content is executed regardless of the hit of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach effect, they are divided into different blocks (the block for the big hit and the block for the losing). ) Or image data may adversely affect the processing load and memory capacity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect includes a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between the big hit and the loss, and a big hit. Blocks corresponding to different image data at the time of losing (SP ending background block) are separately executed. This makes it possible to execute the SP reach effect while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

  By the way, in the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, “SP reach background block” is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is read. These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time. In the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, a section in which the same process identification information is acquired for each unit time (one frame). Thus, the effect reception period (valid period) is generated by managing each frame of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data instead of time management by a timer or the like.

For example, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” shown in FIG. 225, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” is executed separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present. ), The processing identification information of “X1” is arranged for each frame from the timing ts31 immediately after the processing. Each time the process identification information of “X1” is read, the following “process X1” is read and executed.
Processing X1. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “after-operation block C” based on operation detection information for a specific operation unit (for example, operation button 410)

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time is referred to as “the effect reception period in which the effect can be received by the operation ( In the “processing X1”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the “post-operation block C” associated with “layer 6” is turned on. (Operation). As a result, the “post-operation block C” is read for each unit time corresponding to the “post-operation block C”, and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler” associated with the “post-operation block C”. The “data C” is executed (analyzed) every unit time, as well as the “process related to lamp emission” and the “process related to movable body operation” associated with the “post-operation block C”. , "Processing relating to sound output", etc., are respectively started, so that a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block C" can be generated.

  In addition, in the next frame in which execution of each process associated with the “post-operation block C” is started, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is also used. Data is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect accepting period) in which the process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time, even in the next frame, the “SP reach background The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and the “process X1” corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” also includes a determination process as to whether each process associated with the “post-operation block C” has been started to be executed. When it is determined that the execution has been started, the “process X1” is terminated without further performing the process based on the operation detection information.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged from timing ts31, but are read from the second process identification information (here, “X1”). In the “process X1”, an effect is received, and thereby “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C” associated with “post-operation block C” in “layer 6” is executed (analyzed). The case is assumed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read out the third and fourth process identification information (here, “X1”) painted out in the same figure, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler for SP reach background” is lost. As the "data" is executed for each unit time, it is automatically read. However, every time the data is read out in this manner, a process such as "after the operation has been executed, the process X1 is terminated" is executed in the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "X1"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is disabled).

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in “process X1” (it is determined that the effect after operation is not executed), the use of “post-operation block C” associated with “layer 6” The process X1 ends with the availability information kept in the off state. Until the section in which the same processing identification information (here, “X1”) is obtained for each unit time (one frame) is completed, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler” is displayed for each unit time (one frame). The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read from the “data”, and the corresponding “process X1” is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the section ends with the fourth process identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth process identification information is read out and responded accordingly. If the effect determination is not made within the process X1, the subsequent effect will progress without executing the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is performed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), the “SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading out “process X1 that can produce a post-operation effect” from liquid crystal effect scheduler data is obtained. However, simply analyzing such information can effectively function as an effect reception period (valid period), so that the effect design can be facilitated and shared. Become.

  Note that FIG. 225 shows only such a concept as a concept, and in practice, the process identification information is not acquired only for four frames. If it is to function as an effect acceptance period, it is usually set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period occurring at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the effect reception period occurring at another timing. As described above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

In addition, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” illustrated in FIG. 225, the process identification information (here, “1”) related to the operation effect is also attached at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “process in which effect determination is performed as to whether to generate an after-operation effect”, but rather reads and executes the following “process 1”. Has become.
Processing 1. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect reception can be performed by an operation will soon occur. A process of turning on (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” for performing an operation waiting effect prompting an operation (the above-described simulation image and gauge display, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" separately from "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". However, the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” can be started to be executed at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) defined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become. That is, in this case, the execution of the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” may be started at any timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings. The execution of the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” can be easily realized from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from the effect scheduler data, so that the effect design can be simplified and shared. Can be suitably achieved.

  Here, when the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is executed (analyzed), the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” corresponding to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is read. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. However, in the “appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting”, first, while the effect reception is not permitted, the “operation effect reception by operation” is performed. There is provided a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to an indication effect (appearance effect display or the like) indicating that an effect reception period (valid period) in which “can be performed” will soon occur.

  However, in the “appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting”, the effect waiting period occurs in the middle of the process, and the operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation (the above-described simulation image and gauge Display, etc.), a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the same processing identification information is obtained. Has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts41, "Y3" is displayed every frame from the timing ts42 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. Are attached so that the processing identification information items are arranged side by side. Each time the process identification information of “Y3” is read, the following “process Y3” is read and executed.
Processing Y3. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block D” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached for each unit time is referred to as “the effect receiving period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by operation. ) ". In addition, in the "process Y3", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" from which the "process Y3" is read is based. Is operated (set) to the ON state of the availability information of the “post-operation block D” associated with the same “layer 6”.

  That is, in this case, when the “after-operation block D” is read, various processes including the “after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with the “after-operation block D” are executed. As a result, an after-operation effect corresponding to the “after-operation block D” is generated. In addition to this, the newly read “after-operation block D (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is in the state of being executed, and the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block)”. Of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) of the “layer 6”.

  According to such a configuration, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal) which no longer needs to be read out only by reading the" post-operation block D "because the effect determination is made. The effect scheduler data D) "and the process identification information of" Y3 "for reading" process Y3 "can be substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform a determination or a process for terminating the above, so that it is possible to suitably achieve simplification and commonality of the effect design. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 225, it is read from the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)”. An effect is received within the “process Y3” that has been performed, whereby “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with “post-operation block D” in the same “layer 6” is executed (analysis). It is assumed that it has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “radiation portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is a section in which the “radiation portion” has been erased by overwriting (substantially). (Invalidated section).

  That is, the process identification information of “Y3” may be attached to the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” side, similarly to the effect reception period generated from timing ts31. However, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) associated with the same layer as the“ post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) ” ) "Side, it can be said that it is possible to achieve such excellent operational effects.

However, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment uses, as process identification information for reading out a process relating to the operation effect, "[appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting ( In addition to the process identification information of “Y3” included in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D)”,
-The process identification information of "Y2" included in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" is prepared.

  That is, as described above, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is the same as the “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” “layer 6”. , The process identification information of “Y3” is added to this when the “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is executed. This is useful in that it is automatically deleted (invalidated). However, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is included in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)”. Is performed (analyzed) by operating the availability information on the basis of the process identification information of "." Therefore, if the frame processing with the processing identification information of “1” is skipped when the processing load is high, for example, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation The waiting block D) "itself is not executed, and as a result, an effect reception period (valid period) based on the process identification information of" Y3 "may not be generated.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, as process identification information for reading out a process related to an operation effect (a process of performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect based on operation detection information), The process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are prepared, and the process identification information of “Y2” is provided on the “LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)” side. At the same time, the process identification information of “Y3” is attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” side. As described above, as the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect, the predetermined wait time (the wait process) until the use availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes. A period corresponding to a type 1 block read after a period of time, and a wait time (wait processing) in which the availability information is set to an on state in processing executed based on the type 1 block. By reducing the risk that the effect acceptance period (valid period) does not occur by preparing both the one that is associated with the second type block that is read out without passing through the period. Will be able to

  Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of “Y3”, when the effect determination is made, the above-mentioned availability information of the “post-operation block D” is operated to the on state. In addition, a display effect after the operation on the effect display device 1600 (after-operation effect) is executed. On the other hand, in the “process Y2” executed based on the process identification information of “Y2”, if an effect determination is made, “process related to lamp emission”, “process related to movable body operation”, “process related to sound output” Each process is started. Therefore, even if the process identification information of “Y3” is not read, the post-operation effect can be realized by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output by the process identification information of “Y2”. Have been. The “processing Y2” and the “processing Y3” may be any as long as they can generate different post-operation effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, three pieces of the same process identification information (here, “Y2”) are arranged from timing ts42, but are read from the second process identification information (here, “Y2”). It is assumed that an effect is received in the “processing Y2”, and a post-operation effect based on lamp emission, movable body operation, and sound output is thereby executed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read out the third process identification information (here, “Y2”) painted out in the figure, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” Is executed at every unit time, and is naturally read. However, every time the data is read out in this manner, a process such as "after the operation has been executed, the process Y2 is terminated" is executed in the "process Y2" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "Y2"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is disabled).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
"The first special operation in which the effect reception based on the operation detection information is allowed, which occurs when the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or is in a non-output state. Reception Direction (Direction Reception Period) "
-Regardless of the production state (production mode), even if no operation is detected, a second special operation reception production that can generate a post-operation production (production reception period)
Is executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 142 and FIGS. 212 to 224).

  In the first special operation reception effect, since the effect reception of the specific type of effect sound is allowed in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, or in a non-output state, it is necessary to concentrate on the operation effect. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the directing performance may be poorer by the amount by which the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a state in which the reception of the first special operation reception effect is permitted when the first special operation reception effect is displayed when the first special operation reception effect is generated. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-described mimic image and gauge display) performed during the (during the valid period) is displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize various effects with respect to the display effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a state in which the reception of the effect is permitted in the pre-permission operation-related display (an indication effect) performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated, and the second special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation (during the valid period) (such as the above-described simulation image and gauge display) is also displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize various effects with respect to the display effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

More specifically, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” illustrated in FIG. 225, the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppression mode. In addition, even if no operation is detected, a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that generates a post-operation effect can be generated. The process identification information of "2" is read in order to start the process related to the special operation acceptance effect. However, the process identification information of “2” does not read “process in which effect determination as to whether or not to generate an after-operation effect” is performed, but reads and executes the following “process 2”. .
Processing 2. Availability of the “appearance EF block E” for performing an indication effect (such as appearance effect display) indicating that an “effect acceptance period (valid period) in which an effect can be accepted by operation” will soon appear. Operation to set (turn on) information

  According to such a configuration, apart from the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, a permissible pre-operation-related display (sign effect) and a dedicated block (block E for appearance EF) And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, it is necessary to prepare the "liquid crystal effect for SP reach background" for the "appearance EF block E". The execution can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the “scheduler data”. In other words, in this case, the execution of the “appearance EF block E” at any timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” Since the execution of the “appearance EF block E” can be easily started from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from the “data”, it is preferable to facilitate the effect design and commonality. Will be able to do it.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (expected degrees at which a big hit symbol appears) are separately prepared for the pre-permissible operation-related display (foreboding effect) and the permissible operation-related display. Since it is possible to appropriately combine which combination is to be executed, it is possible to make a variety of variations as a production, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Become. In addition, when adopted in another variation pattern, an effect is realized in which, while the pre-permissible operation-related display (predictive effect) has a common mode, the permissible operation-related display is executed in a unique mode that is not shared. Will also be possible.

  Here, when the “appearance EF block E” is executed (analyzed), the “appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” corresponding to the “appearance EF block E” is read out and executed (analysis). Is done. When the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF” is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-permissible operation-related display) by the predetermined effect display is changed from the “effect accepting section” to the “effect accepting”. Image information (moving image or still image) to be executed while straddling the “permitted section” is acquired.

  However, in the “appearance EF block E” and the “appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E”, “processing that can determine an effect to generate an after-operation effect based on operation detection information” is performed. Since the process identification information is not added, the effect acceptance period does not occur based on the block or the scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when the timing ts52 is reached in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, “3” is set to generate an effect accepting period. Is read. The process identification information of “3” does not correspond to “the process in which an effect determination for generating an after-operation effect based on the operation detection information can be made”, but is data associating the following “process 3”. .
Processing 3. "In the state where the effect reception period is occurring, the availability information of the" operation waiting block E "for performing the operation waiting effect (the above-described simulation image or gauge display, etc.) for prompting the player to perform the operation is displayed. Process to operate (set) to ON state

  According to such a configuration, apart from “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)” and “appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)”, An operation-related display during the permissible operation (such as the above-described simulation image and gauge display) dedicated block (operation waiting block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to this block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting). Although it is necessary to prepare, the “operation waiting block E” may be started to be executed at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) defined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become able to. That is, in this case, the “operation waiting block E” may be started to be executed at any timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be used. The execution of the “operation waiting block E” can be easily started from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from the “data”, so that the effect design can be facilitated and shared. Will be able to do it.

  Here, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts52 is also attached such that the same process identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is arranged for each frame, similarly to the effect reception period during which the effect reception is permitted at the timings ts31, ts42. It may be configured as an effect section to be performed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized by a method different from the effect reception period occurring at the timings ts31 and ts42, and the other effect reception periods are configured by the method described below. It may be.

  That is, for the effect reception period generated at the timing ts52, the state operation (off state, on state) of the operation state flag is such that the effect reception is not permitted (off state) and the effect reception is permitted (on state). ) Is created. When this method is adopted, an effect based on the operation detection information is not performed in the process called based on the process identification information but in the “peripheral control unit steady process” shown in FIG. 95 for each unit time (one frame). It is desirable to make a determination.

  For example, each time the “peripheral control unit steady processing” is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and if the operation state flag is in the on state (the condition is in the effect reception period), the operation detection information Based on the above, it is possible to make an effect determination to generate an after-operation effect. When the effect determination is performed, the availability information of the block (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to the post-operation effect of the type according to the operation state flag that is in the on state is operated to the on state ( Settings).

  That is, in this case, the operation state flag is prepared for the type of the post-operation effect, and after determining the type of the operation state flag that is in the on state, the operation operation flag corresponding to the type is determined. The availability information of the corresponding block is turned on (set). The process of turning off the operation state flag may be executed in the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect in the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. It may be executed in a process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) operated to the state.

  The processing procedure when such a method is adopted will be described again from the point where the processing identification information of “3” is read out at timing ts52 and the “processing 3” is executed. Block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation) "is read and executed (analyzed).

The process of turning on the operation state flag may be performed in the above-mentioned “process 3”, but in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler) In the first frame (processing timing) when (data E) ”is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of“ Z1 ”associated with the following“ processing Z1 ”is read.
Processing Z1. Processing for turning on the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is turned on (set) at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the “peripheral control unit steady processing” described above. By performing the process, the period in which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the “effect reception period”. While the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state, the permissible operation related display based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” (described above) (Simulated image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-permission operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and the permission associated with layer 6 The middle operation related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed so that the display periods thereof partially overlap.

  Here, the pre-permissible operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed closer to the front than the during-permissible operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is preferentially displayed. It has become so. Therefore, at the time when at least a part of the permissible operation-related display is difficult to be visually recognized by the pre-permissible operation-related display, the effect reception is permitted. The present invention is designed to provide an effect that enables an effect reception to be performed under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not an aspect having an appearance appears.

  In this regard, when an effect is received at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which such an effect reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is used. The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” associated with No. 6 in the ON state is executed in the “peripheral control unit regular process” described above. Thereby, each process (a lamp, a movable body, a sound, and the like) including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “post-operation block E” is executed. . At this time, in the layer 6, the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “post-operation block E” is stored in the “operation waiting block E” associated with the “operation waiting block E”. Is performed in place of the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data E”, so that it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the “operation waiting block E” halfway. At this time, the process identification information of “Z3” described later included in the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” can be naturally deleted (invalidated). Become.

Note that the processing for turning the operation state flag to the off state is performed when the processing for operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” to the on state in the “peripheral control unit steady processing” described above. 225, but in the example shown in FIG. 225, the first frame (“analysis”) of the above-mentioned “after-operation block E (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed). At the processing timing), the processing identification information of “Z2” is read out, and the following “processing Z2” corresponding thereto is executed, thereby executing the processing based on the “post-operation block E” after the end of the effect acceptance period. I am trying to do it.
Processing Z2. Processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-permissible operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) is left (displayed) in the screen. As described above, the effect may be accepted. Therefore, in the "process Z2", it is determined whether the appearance EF block E (the appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E) is in the execution state, and if it is in the execution state, the process of terminating the block E is also performed. Is desirable. However, after the “appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is continued without being interrupted, the image display based on the “after operation block E” is changed to the “appearance EF Priority is performed (displayed in front of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E) in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least the entire range in which the image display based on the block E is performed. Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

  Further, in the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, when the process at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), it corresponds to “process Z3” in order to end the effect accepting period. The processing identification information of the attached “Z3” is read. Here, the case where “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54 means “post-operation block E (after operation)” corresponding to the same layer 6. This means that “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is not overwritten by “operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, that is, the timing ts54 comes. This means that the stage has not been accepted. However, the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52 is the same as the “post-operation block E” when the effect is received even if the effect is not received between the timing ts52 and the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information to the ON state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in “operation wait block E (operation wait liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, the following process is executed in “process Z3” executed based on the process identification information of “Z3” read at timing ts54. Is to be done.
Processing Z3. Among the operation state flags, a process of turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” is performed, and the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on. Operation (setting) processing is performed

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, even if the effect is not received within the period, the same block as when the effect was received is read out and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a player forgets to perform an operation. Also, the post-operation effect is not executed after the end of the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52). The process for reading the same block as when the reception was made '' is performed, so that it is possible to realize a smooth production progress without causing a gap between when there is an operation and when there is no operation become able to.

  Further, according to such a configuration, the display image (simulated image or gauge display) based on the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” can be accepted for the effect by the operation by the player. In both the case where the effect is performed and the case where the effect is received by activating the automatic button function, a process of hiding the effect based on the effect being received (here, “operation Since the rear block E ") is executed, the effect can be developed in the same manner even when the player forgets to perform the operation, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed. Will be as expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 225, during the effect reception period generated from timing ts52, the above-described “first operation” is executed when the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode at the time of occurrence. Special operation reception effect ". In the “first special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. 225 as well, when the effect is received, the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is not returned to the non-suppression mode but continues to be output in the suppression mode. Then, during the period in which the effect is performed after the operation, the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is set to return to the output in the non-suppression mode.

  The “specific type of production sound” means the sound of “BGM playback” (BGM playback for normal background or SP background), but here, in particular, corresponds to “SP reach background block”. This is equivalent to the sound (BGM playback sound for SP reach) output by performing the attached “process related to sound output”. Regarding the suppression mode and method, the above-described mode and method can be appropriately adopted.

  In the above configuration, the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed (or the effect reception is performed even when the effect reception is not performed). Is performed, an operation reception effect in which the same operation is performed after the operation is performed), a pre-permissible operation-related display (block E for appearance EF) and a permissible operation-related display (operation waiting block) performed when the operation is performed. Regarding E), they are executed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize various effects with respect to the display effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the operation reception effects (the first special operation reception effect and the second special operation reception effect) at the timings ts52 to ts54, images (displays related to pre-permissible operation) displayed by mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). , Operation-related display during permissible operation) is displayed such that there is a period that overlaps with time. Therefore, it is possible to realize the performance (for example, the above-described difficulty in viewing) involving the “pre-permissible operation-related display” and the “permissible operation-related display”, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. become.

  On the other hand, an operation reception effect, such as an operation reception effect generated at timing ts41, that occurs when the “specific type of effect sound” is not in the suppressed state (or an after-operation effect occurs when the effect reception is not performed). In the non-accepted operation reception effect), the pre-permission operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation reception effect is different from the operation reception effect at the timings ts52 to ts54 (the operation reception effect that suggests a jackpot hit by the post-operation effect), and occurs according to the result of the effect determination (advance determination). Since the display does not occur or does not occur, the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) to facilitate handling according to the determination results. It can be said that it is more beneficial to

  However, even in such a case where the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the pre-permissible operation-related display is on one layer. The display and the permissible operation-related display may be overlapped with each other (for example, there is a time when both the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed. It is desirable to execute those effects so that the part is in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize.

  The process identification information read out based on the block of the permissible operation related display (operation waiting block E) based on the block of the permissible operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) May be operated such that the availability information is turned on in the processing corresponding to the information.

  The operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted at timings ts52 to ts54 may be any one that is executed as at least one of the first special operation reception effect described above and the second special operation reception effect described above. 142, FIG. 212 to FIG. 215, FIG. 217 to FIG. 220, and FIG. 223, etc., which are executed as any of the operation reception effects described above (operation reception effects under BGM suppression). Is also good. In this case, for the other operation reception effects out of the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 225, for example, the operation reception effects described above with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, and FIG. 224 (operation reception under BGM non-suppression). Effect). Further, each of the different examples of these operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted.

  For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at timing ts42. In the reception effect, the same allowable sound may be output when the effect is received (the first allowable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224).

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, if an effect reception is performed during the output of the acceptable sound, the output state is terminated midway, but the operation reception effect (timing ts42) In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately set, such as maintaining the output state even when an effect is received while the acceptable sound is being output (the first acceptable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224). It is possible to adopt to.

  By the way, regarding scenario data relating to SP reach production, a block corresponding to image data that can be shared between a big hit and a loss (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to different image data between a big hit and a loss (SP end background block) and execute them sequentially as described above. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the transition from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP end background block” is performed during the period in which the post-operation effect is being performed. Is set to always arrive.

  That is, in the operation reception production in which the production reception is allowed at the timing ts52, the production is received at any timing within the production reception period (timing ts52 to ts54) (including the automatic button function described above). Even so, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period in which the post-operation effect is always executed (the time setting required to execute the post-operation effect). In the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, a display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (display operation after operation on the effect display device 1600 (after operation Effect)) is performed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has a higher priority display than the display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP ending corresponding to the "block for SP ending background". (Displayed on the nearer side than the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP end background block). In this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set to be longer than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E. The minute will function as a “period in which the effect after operation is always executed”.

  The transition from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP end background block” is performed during the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is performed. By doing so, the display of the block for the SP reach background (the block shared in the hit) and the display of the block for the SP ending background (the block used only in one of the hits) are completely different from each other. Even if the effect design is performed such that it does not make the player feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, the scenario data of “Layer 4” and “Layer 5” is not related to any image, and simply functions as time-series data for calling processing at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed and is not involved in any image display. Data) (sky time-series image information). Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed on layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  There are two methods for such a data calling block (liquid crystal display scheduler data for data calling). First, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 4”, the timing ts21 at which the process is called at the start of the symbol change. A wait time (wait processing period) is set so as to prevent the data calling block B (liquid crystal display scheduler data for data calling) from being executed until. When the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the “data calling block B” is executed (analyzed). As a result, the “data calling block B” corresponding to the “data calling block B” is obtained. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data calling "is executed (analyzed).

Here, the process identification information of "X2" is added to the "data calling block B" or "data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" corresponding to the "data calling block B" for each unit time. Each time the process identification information of “X2” is read, the following “process X2” is executed.
Processing X2. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block B” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In this “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, the section in which the process identification information of “X2” is attached for each unit time is referred to as “effect effect reception in which effect reception can be performed by operation”. In the “process X2”, when the effect determination is performed, the availability information of the “post-operation block B” associated with “layer 6” is turned on. An operation (setting) is made to the state. As a result, the “post-operation block B” is executed (analyzed), and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B” associated with the “post-operation block B” is executed per unit time ( Analysis), “processing related to lamp emission”, “processing related to movable body operation”, “processing related to sound output”, etc. associated with the “post-operation block B”. When the execution is started, an after-operation effect corresponding to the “after-operation block C” can be generated.

  Note that, in the next frame in which the execution of each process associated with the “post-operation block B” is started, the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” is also displayed. Executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect accepting period) in which the process identification information (here, “X2”) is attached for each unit time, the “data calling block B” is also displayed in the next frame. The process identification information (here, “X2”) is read from “(liquid crystal display scheduler data B for data calling)”, and the above-described “process X2” corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” includes a determination process as to whether each process associated with the “post-operation block B” has been started to be executed. When it is determined that the processing has been started, the “processing X2” is terminated without further performing the processing based on the operation detection information, which will be described in the above “processing X1”. As you did.

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in “process X2” (it is determined that the effect after operation is not performed), the use of “post-operation block B” associated with “layer 6” The process X2 ends with the availability information kept in the off state. Until the section in which the same process identification information (here, “X2”) is obtained for each unit time (one frame) ends, the “data calling block B (data calling block B) Process identification information (here, “X2”) is read from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, and the “process X2” corresponding thereto is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the section ends with the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out and responded. If the effect determination is not performed in the process X2, the post-operation effect according to the “post-operation block B” is not executed, and the subsequent effects progress.

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is performed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the “data calling block B” is used. The same process identification information (X2) for reading out “process X2 that can generate an after-operation effect” from “(liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data calling)” is obtained. However, simply analyzing such information can effectively function as an effect reception period (valid period), so that the effect design can be facilitated and shared. Become.

  Here, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) corresponding to “Layer 4” does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and “Process X2” read from the process identification information “X2”. Does not read the "operation waiting block". Therefore, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing ts21, the effect reception is allowed in a state where the mimic image and the gauge display are not performed. "

  According to such a configuration, "data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different set values of the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 5”, the data call block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing the wait time (wait processing period). A substantial weighting function operates in the calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling). That is, in the data calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling), no image information or processing identification information is read until the timing ts11 arrives, and “4” is reached when the timing ts11 arrives. Is read. However, the process identification information of “4” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is performed as to whether to generate an after-operation effect”, but rather reads and executes the following “process 4”. Has become.
Processing 4. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect reception can be performed by an operation will soon occur. A process of turning on (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A” for performing an operation waiting effect prompting an operation (the above-described simulation image or gauge display, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) separately from the "appearance EF & operation wait block A", but the "appearance EF & operation". Regarding the "waiting block A", process identification information of "4" is added from a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from the "data call block A (data effect liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". Since it is possible to appropriately call up the game, the effect design can be easily facilitated and shared.

  Here, when the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A” is executed (analyzed), the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” corresponding to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A” is read. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. However, in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, first, while the effect reception is not permitted, the “effect by operation” A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) that indicates that an effect reception period (valid period) in which reception is possible will soon occur.

  However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting", the effect acceptance period is generated in the middle of the operation, and the operation waiting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation (the above-described simulation image and A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a gauge display or the like is obtained appears. In this section, the same process identification information is obtained for each unit time (one frame). It has become.

That is, in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” executed (analyzed) from the timing ts11, separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, “Y1 "Are attached so that the process identification information is lined up. Each time the process identification information of “Y1” is read, the following “process Y1” is read and executed.
Processing Y1. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “after-operation block A” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached for each unit time is referred to as “the effect receiving period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by operation. ) ". In addition, in the "process Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" from which the "process Y1" is read is based. Is operated (set) to the on state of the availability information of the “post-operation block A” associated with the same “layer 6”.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block A” is read, various processes including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with the “post-operation block A” are executed. As a result, an after-operation effect corresponding to the “after-operation block A” is generated. In addition, the newly read “block A for post-operation (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for post-operation)” which is newly read out is “block A for appearance EF & operation waiting (block for appearance EF & operation Liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) for "layer 6".

  According to such a configuration, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block A) which no longer needs to be read out only by reading the" post-operation block A "because the effect determination is made. The effect scheduler data A) "and the process identification information of" Y1 "for reading" process Y1 "can be substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform a determination or a process for terminating the above, so that it is possible to suitably achieve simplification and commonality of the effect design. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 225, it is read from the second process identification information (here, “Y1”) in “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. An effect is received within the “process Y1” that is performed, whereby “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with “post-operation block A” in the same “layer 6” is executed (analysis). It is assumed that it has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “radiation portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is a section where the “radiation portion” has been erased by overwriting (substantially). (Invalidated section).

  In “Layer 4”, an effect section in which process identification information is added for each frame is set on the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read from the “data calling block” such as “layer 5”. Also, in "Layer 4", as shown in "Layer 5", this is realized by operating a substantial weight function in the data calling block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling). Is also good.

  In “Layer 5”, an effect section in which process identification information is added for each frame is set on the block side read from “Data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. did. However, the effect section may be set in “data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” as in “layer 4”. Also, in “Layer 5”, as shown in “Layer 4”, this is realized by setting a wait for the data calling block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling) itself to wait. Is also good.

  In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 225, when the process identification information of “1” or “4” is acquired, it is suggested that “the effect reception period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by the operation” will soon occur. To perform an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) and an operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation in the state where the effect reception period is occurring (such as the above-described mimic image or gauge display). The process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block” to the ON state is executed. However, it is not always necessary to execute an indication effect (such as the appearance effect display), and an operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation in a state where an effect reception period is occurring (the above-described mimic image or gauge For example, a process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for performing the operation (setting) may be performed. That is, in this case, as soon as the “operation waiting block” is read, the process identification information associated with the “process in which effect determination can be performed” is obtained.

  Also, as described above, the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flag, similarly to the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are set as being read at the same timing as each other. You may make it set.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the block and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block are separately provided, but these may be configured as one data.

  As for the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) from which information corresponding to the image data is acquired for each unit time (for each frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) at the first processing timing (frame). It may be configured such that information corresponding to moving image data over a period can be obtained. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is obtained only at the first processing timing (frame). After that, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed every unit time (one frame). It is not acquired, and the process corresponding to the process identification information is executed only when the process identification information is added.

  The block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) in which the availability information is set to the ON state may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing in which the availability information is set to the ON state, or the availability information may be set to the ON state. May be executed (analyzed) at the processing timing one step after the processing timing set in (1).

  Also, "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is obtained, the same information may be obtained as “information corresponding to image data”. Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same mimic image and the gauge display are displayed for the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result) ) Is obtained and when it is not obtained, an effect section (SP reach background block) in which display data is shared, and a case where a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and not obtained It is configured to be executed in a form that is divided into an effect section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used depending on the case. In such a configuration, when performing a background display effect for a specific reach, different display data is not used over the entire period when a predetermined determination result is obtained and when the predetermined determination result is not obtained. Since the display data is shared up to the section (timing ts55), and different display data is used only in the remaining period to indicate a hit (determination result), a reduction in processing load and memory capacity is expected. Become.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the post-operation effect (“includes”) in the “layer 6” different from the “layer 3” in which the background display effect for the specific reach is performed, so as to straddle (include) the timing ts55. The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (Layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has a higher priority display (SP) than the background display effect (Layer 3) for specific reach. By displaying the image on the nearer side than the image display based on the reach background block or the SP ending background block), it is possible to obtain a “big hit (predetermined determination result) in layer 3” The switch from the production section where the display data is shared between the case where no display data is shared and the production section where different display data is used depending on whether the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not is not displayed. (Or make it harder to see). Thereby, "the effect section in which the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (the predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained", and the case where "the big hit (the predetermined judgment result) is obtained" And the production section where different display data is used in the case where it is not obtained, even if there is a case where the production connection cannot be designed well, it is possible to hide (cheat) by the production after the operation. As a result, the effect design can be facilitated. In this sense, in the post-operation effect, it is desirable to execute a process of moving the movable body forward of the display screen.

  Regarding the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) executed across (including) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, the operation is automatically performed regardless of the effect mode. Since it is configured to be executed on a regular basis, “the effect section in which the display data is shared when the jackpot (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “the jackpot (the predetermined It is possible to reliably conceal the connection between "the effect section in which different display data is used when the determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, the timing ts55 at which the effect section switching occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. (If the end timing of the post-operation effect is shifted due to the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is performed when the effect is received at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts52. It must be set within the period before the non-display timing. In such a configuration, the processing related to the display (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed in “Layer 3”, but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

  However, "the effect section in which the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained" and the case where "the big hit (the predetermined judgment result) is obtained" The configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the “effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained” is to be executable when the big hit has been won. It may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for loss) is executed even when the jackpot has not been won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and a partial effect display or the like is performed. , The display state of the background display effect (layer 3) can be maintained.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “post-operation block E” is read out as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to the specific variation pattern, based on the fact that the effect is received within the period of timing ts52 to ts54. "Is prepared. Regarding the “post-operation block E”, the effect is automatically received even when no operation is detected within the period from timing ts52 to ts54 (by automatically generating the same program as when the operation is detected). (By executing), it is possible to provide an unusually interesting presentation effect.

  In this regard, although illustration is omitted, even when a first variation pattern or a second variation pattern different from a specific variation pattern is executed, the “post-operation block E” is made executable. Is also good.

  For example, in the first variation pattern, “SP reach background block” and “SP ending background block” of the effect contents according to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed. Similarly to the specific fluctuation pattern, the process identification information of “2” and the process identification information of “3” are read based on “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”. That is, in the first variation pattern, the effect contents of the SP reach background (“information about image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) are different, but the same pre-permissible operation-related display as the specific variation pattern (precursor effect) ) And permissible operation-related displays (simulated image, gauge display, etc.) are executed, and the same "post-operation effect" is used as the post-operation effect when an effect is received in the operation reception effect generated in this manner. Block E "is executed.

  Further, in the first variation pattern, the effect reception is automatically performed even if no operation is detected in the operation reception effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block”. It is also the same as the specific variation pattern that the post-operation effect is executed so as to straddle (include) the switching timing with "" to hide the background effect switching.

  In addition, “the effect section where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained”; The configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained is similar to the specific change pattern in the first change pattern. It may be set to be executable when a big hit is won, and may not be executed when a big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, even when different background effects (SP reach effects) are executed in the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern, different background effects are not displayed when a big hit is won. In this way, the same effect (effect after operation) always appears, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot has not been won, it is recognized that the jackpot has been lost at the timing when a background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to In other words, in this case, when the big hit is won, the "background effect" having different staging contents depending on the variation pattern is hidden, and by always showing one staging content, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that a big hit has been lost by displaying the "background effect" having different effect contents according to the variation pattern without hiding it. And hopes can be maintained.

  On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” of the effect contents according to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” in the second variation pattern may have processing identification information of “1”, but may have processing identification information of “2” or “3”. The processing identification information is not included, and immediately before shifting to the “SP ending background block”, an operation accepting effect that can generate an after-operation effect across the shift timing does not occur. .

  In this regard, in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” according to the second variation pattern, at a predetermined timing while the effect acceptance is not permitted, process identification information of “5” not shown is acquired. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of “5”, “the process of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E to the ON state (process 5) is executed. It has become.

  Then, by setting the availability information of the “post-operation block E” to the on state, the “change of operation” is performed in the second change pattern as well as the “specific change pattern” and the “first change pattern” described above. The same post-operation effect based on the “post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” straddles (includes) the switching timing between the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block”. Is executed on another layer.

  In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the effect design should be performed as a display related to the background effect. At the predetermined timing in the production section where no occurrence has occurred, the “post-operation block E” is deliberately executed as a block different from the background image block. Despite the situation, and even in the situation where even the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production (post-operation block E) when the production reception is performed in another variation pattern suddenly appears. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, “the effect section in which the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (the predetermined determination result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained”, and “the big hit” In the effect section in which different display data is used when (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained, even if it may not be possible to design a direct connection well, Can be hidden (cheats), and the effect design can be facilitated.

  In addition, “the effect section where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained”; In the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained, the specific change pattern or the second change pattern As in the case of the one variation pattern, the execution may be performed when the jackpot is won, and may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, when a background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific change pattern or the first change pattern is executed, a different background effect is not displayed when the big hit is won. In this way, the same effect (effect after operation) always appears, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot has not been won, it is recognized that the jackpot has been lost at the timing when a background effect (SP ending background block) having a different content from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to In other words, in this case, when the big hit is won, the "background effect" having different staging contents depending on the variation pattern is hidden, and by always showing one staging content, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that a big hit has been lost by displaying the "background effect" having different effect contents according to the variation pattern without hiding it. And hopes can be maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples, the operation acceptance effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). The processing identification information may not be added to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data), for example, a symbol block (symbol liquid crystal effect scheduler data for symbol). ) Or a block for calling (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for calling) or another block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example, a line in a process read based on process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc. In the effect determination to be performed, the effect determination based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation unit is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be another operation unit. In addition, in all or a part of the above-described effect determination based on processing identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”, a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, It is determined which of the sword production operation units 5000 and the like is in a state in which an operation opportunity has been given, and whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity has been given (effect judgment May be determined). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword production operation unit 5000, etc.) should be given an operation opportunity, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize an operation reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given only when the operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the process identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared. Will be able to do that. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both of the different operation means, and the post-operation effect based on the process identification information may be executed based on the reception of the effect of one of the previously operated operation devices. .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example, a plurality of pre-permission operation-related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 with no movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special appearance EF block E2 with movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410 And executing (analyzing) one of them according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, the blocks can be saved by commonly using the blocks following the appearing EF block E1 and the appearing EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E). Become like

  In the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to a block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data is used. By executing the process to be read, operation of a specific operation unit can be accepted. However, in addition to this, regarding the predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, the processing (for example, the peripheral control unit regular processing) completely unrelated to the processing identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data , An operation may be received, and a change corresponding to the reception may be caused for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the rendering progress due to the block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., the operation on the predetermined operation means can be properly received. It can be maintained suitably.

  In addition, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the effect determination based on the process identification information of “X1,” “X2,” “Y1,” “Y2,” and “Y3.” Thus, all effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be disabled. In such a configuration, layers can be saved.

  In addition, during the effect determination period, a part of each process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3” is converted into other process identification information by a player operation. Or the opportunity may be changed.

  A specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the start of the target variation, and may be used across a plurality of variations.

  The block may be used not only during the fluctuation but also during a hit game. In addition, a block straddling during a hit game from a change or a block straddling during a certain change from a hit game may be provided. It may be attached.

  In addition, the type of the process identification information read according to the game state may be changed, for example, “Y3” is added only to the block (or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probable change state.

  During error notification (abnormality notification) or the like, it is desirable that an error image be displayed or an error sound be output, but the block being executed and the process identification information be not deleted at all. As a result, the effect can be appropriately restored after the error is released.

  Further, among the inventions included in the example shown in FIG. 225 and the other examples, the described effects can be obtained without necessarily using a technique such as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or processing identification information. What can be performed may be realized by another method.

[Direction determination based on operation detection information before the validity period occurs]
Generally, when an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect reception is allowed is generated, the above-mentioned “simulated image”, “gauge display (bar display)”, or the like is displayed according to the generation timing. In this regard, when playing a game for a long time or playing the game many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing in the fluctuation pattern the "simulated image" or "gauge display" is displayed. Then, some players may not be able to wait for the operation, and may operate at a timing anticipating that the "simulated image" or the "gauge display" will be displayed. At this time, if an operation is performed immediately before the “mock image” or “gauge display” is displayed (immediately before the effect acceptance period occurs), the “mock image” or “gauge display” is displayed. As if you were operating in a production acceptance period (a state in which a production reception period is occurring), and as a result, the redoing of operations during the production reception period (valid period) was delayed, and the production was accepted. There was a case where the production acceptance period (valid period) ended without being done.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) according to this embodiment, the effect reception period (effective period) starts at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame after the start of the change. ) Occurs, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect determination is performed by the automatic button function, and the effect after the operation can be generated as described above. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation even if the redo of the operation within the effect reception period (valid period) is delayed in the above-described situation. become able to.

  However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to remember the real feeling that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation by the player, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows the effect determination to generate the post-operation effect only during the effect reception period (valid period), but does not detect the operation state. Even if the effect is made within (immediately before) the period before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the effect is intentionally used as a target (judgment material) for the effect determination. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) is anticipated to occur, the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period). After the operation, the effect is executed. In other words, in this case, the player can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operation state is detected within (immediately before) the period before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specified time. When the effect reception period (valid period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the effect reception is performed within the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to fairly give the production acceptance condition to the player, and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

  Also, as will be described later, at least in the predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs from a predetermined timing in the m-th frame after the start of the fluctuation, at the time when the m-th frame is started In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the “simulated image imitating the operation means (or a gauge indicating the remaining time)” is not displayed yet. In other words, in this case, a period in which the effect acceptance is allowed is internally generated from a state where the mock image (or the gauge display) has not been displayed yet, so that the player runs ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed immediately before the mock image (or the gauge display) is displayed, the effect will be accepted and the effect may not be confirmed after the operation. It can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “effect accepting period (valid period)” according to this embodiment will be described again. “(Effective period)” refers to “a period from the start of the process of generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted to the end of the process”. Here, the details of the “process for generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted” differ depending on the technique of realizing the “effect reception period (valid period)”. For example, for example, the “operation state flag (see FIG. 225)” , A process of setting a timer, and a process of calling a process acceptance determination process based on process identification information (see FIG. 225). In other words, the “effect reception period (valid period)” corresponds to “the effect period (period) from when the process for generating the state in which the effect reception is permitted is performed until a predetermined time elapses”. The “predetermined time” is defined as “the time until the operation state flag is turned off” or “the time until the timer expires”. Time until it is done. " Then, during such an "effect reception period (valid period)", a process of determining whether or not an effect is to be performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every frame) based on the detection of the operation state. However, in the “determination process as to whether or not an effect is received” according to the present embodiment, not only the “operation state detection” performed during the “effect reception period (valid period)” but also the The feature is that "operation state detection" performed before the "effect reception period (valid period)" occurs is also targeted. It is general that such an “effect reception period (valid period)” is created, for example, as a period of about 100 frames.

  FIG. 226 to FIG. 231 are flowcharts illustrating an example of a procedure of processing performed before and after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. In each example described below, a case is described in which an image is displayed using “block” or “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” described with reference to FIG. 225, but the display method is not limited to this. Any method can be used as long as it is a general method for performing image control in units of frames. In addition, the "process for generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted" is also exemplified as "the process for turning on the operation state flag", but is not limited thereto. The process of determining the effect reception may be a process that is called based on process identification information.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period).

  Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, an effect reception period occurring at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) occurs in a specific fluctuation pattern, the “effect” in the “m” -th frame after the symbol fluctuation starts. It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state as "processing for generating a state in which acceptance is permitted". The reason why the operation state flag is turned on (set) at the halfway “timing t1 (m)” in the “m” -th frame is that the operation state flag is turned on (set). Processing ”Even if the processing itself is executed based on the arrival of the“ m ”-th frame, more precisely, the start timing of the“ m ”-th frame is related to the execution of other processing. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including that process, and the various processes are executed in a predetermined order. Because it is always the case.

  When the operation state flag is operated in the ON state in this manner, an effect section (effect accepting period) in which the effect accepting is permitted occurs. A "determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect" is performed.

  The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” illustrated in FIG. Therefore, as for the “determination process as to whether or not to produce a post-operation effect”, as described above, regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (whether or not the operation state flag is on), the “peripheral control unit The processing is performed as “effect determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (one frame) in “processing”. Then, by continuing this even after the effect reception period, even during the effect reception period, the `` determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation effect '' is performed based on the operation detection information at every predetermined time. (In the figure, they are executed at “timing t2 (m)”, “timing t2 (m + 1)”, “timing t2 (m + 2)”, and “timing t2 (m + 3)”, respectively). That is, in this case, the “determination process as to whether to generate the post-operation effect” is also performed in the frame before the “m” -th frame and the like, but the operation state flag is in the off state. In the situation, this is substantially invalidated as described above, so that it is omitted in the figure.

  Also, in this example, the order of the various processes that are performed when a new frame arrives is more “after the operation (operation of setting (operating) the operation state flag to the ON state”) than “the operation after the operation is performed”. The order in which the “determination process as to whether or not to produce an effect” is executed is set later, so that the operation is performed within the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is turned on (set). Acceptance (judgment to produce a post-operation effect) can be made. However, regarding the order, it is not always necessary to execute the “operation (setting) of the operation state flag to the ON state” first, and conversely, the “processing to generate an after-operation effect” may be performed. May be set first. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag has been operated (set) to the ON state, the “determination process as to whether or not to produce a post-operation effect” itself is not performed. The reception (judgment to produce the effect after the operation) is not performed.

  Conventionally, at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” -th frame, “processing for generating a state in which effect acceptance is permitted (here,“ processing for turning the operation state flag on ”)” is executed. Then, based on the operation detection information acquired during the period after the execution of the process (here, “the period during which the operation state flag is in the ON state”), the “ Judgment processing "is executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, at timing t2 (m), it is determined whether or not an operation has been performed within a period from timing t1 (m) to t2 (m) based on the operation detection information, and the operation is determined. When it is determined that the operation has been performed, the effect is performed after the operation, and when it is not determined that the operation has been performed (or the operation state is detected, but the length of time maintained as the operation state is not sufficient). When it is determined that the operation is sufficient), the effect is not executed after the operation, and at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame, it is determined whether or not the operation has been performed within the period from the timing t2 (m) to the time t2 (m + 1). A process of making a determination again based on the detection information is executed for each frame.

  However, in this case, if there is a person who can not wait for the operation and operates aiming at the timing anticipating that the production acceptance period will occur, the production acceptance period will not be accepted As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (valid period) will end. Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows “determination of an effect to generate an after-operation effect” only during the effect reception period (valid period). Regarding the “state detection” itself, even if it has been performed within (immediately before) the period before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, this is used as the target (determination material) for the operation detection determination. I dare use it.

  For example, in such an operation detection determination, it is usually to use “the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more” as a determination condition in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like. Done. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment uses the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives, and within the period from the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). "Even if the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more before the timing t1 (m). If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time period, it is determined that an operation has been performed, and a post-operation effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) is anticipated to occur, the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period). After the operation, the effect is executed. In other words, in this case, the player can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  There is no particular limitation as to which one is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment determines whether the operation state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more for each frame. A frame in which the operation state is maintained (continued) for a period of time (for example, 3 ms) or more is left with a history as an “ON frame”, and a frame without a history as an “ON frame” is handled as an “OFF frame”. I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or at the start of the next frame, or may be left as an “ON frame” when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). It may be.

  As will be described later, in the “determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect” according to this embodiment, three frames in which histories as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left When the operation detection information in a mode in which are displayed is obtained, the effect is accepted (determination that the operation has been performed), and the effect after the operation can be executed.

  Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an “ON frame” or an “OFF frame” at the end of the frame and leaves the history of the frame. In the “determination process as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in (2), the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−3” -th frame, the “m−2” -th frame, and the “m−1” -th frame are used as determination materials, and they are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”. It is determined whether or not a history is left as a “frame”. On the other hand, when the history as the “ON frame” is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the “operation performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. 226 is performed. In the “determination process as to whether or not to generate a subsequent effect”, the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−2” -th frame, the “m−1” -th frame, and the “m” -th frame are used as determination materials, and these are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”. It is determined whether a history is left.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 226 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period). Therefore, at the determination timings (in the figure, timings t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3)) in each frame after the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs. It is determined that the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “OFF frame” is left, and the effect is not accepted (judgment that the operation has been performed), but the effect after the operation is performed. Not executed.

  By the way, with respect to the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, a delay of two frames (or one frame) occurs after the processing related to the display in the peripheral control unit 1511 is started until the image appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for deciding which one to use as an image according to various determinations and creating a drawing list in response to the determination), The processing in the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) which has received the processing result (information about the image such as the drawing list) on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511 (the preparation buffer (the buffer in the non-display state) in the so-called double buffering) This also occurs because one frame is also required for the drawing process on the side of ().

  Therefore, in the related art, the processing related to the “effect during effective period (operation waiting block E)” by the peripheral control unit 1511 is performed in the frame two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs. (“M−2” th frame), so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the valid period from the “m” th frame.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “the effect during the validity period (operation waiting block)” is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is that the state up to the “m−1” th frame immediately before the production acceptance period (validity period) occurs is set to “the effect before the validity period (effect production etc.). In addition to the “processing period for“ appearance EF block E ”), the period from the“ m ”-th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is referred to as“ production during the effective period (such as simulation images and gauge display). The processing period for the operation waiting block E)) is set. As shown in FIG. 225, for the processing period for the effect before the validity period (“appearance EF block E” such as effect effect), the “m” -th frame and subsequent frames are continued, and The processing period for the effect during the period (“operation waiting block E” such as a simulation image or a gauge display) may be overlapped.

  More specifically, in a predetermined period until the “m” -th frame arrives (or a period thereafter), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to “production before effect period (effect production, etc.)”. It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, for a predetermined period after the arrival of the “m” th frame (the period during which the effect is performed during the valid period), the drawing is performed based on the information corresponding to “the effect during the valid period (simulated image, gauge display, etc.)”. A list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, in the peripheral control unit 1511, up to the “m−1” th frame (or even thereafter), “Effect before validity period (block E for appearance EF)” Is performed, and after the “m” -th frame, the processing related to “effect during the validity period (operation waiting block E)” is executed. In the effect display device 1600, in the “m” -th frame, “Pre-validity effect (display based on appearance EF block E)” is still in the process of being executed, and “effect during validity period (display based on operation waiting block E)” is finally started in the “m + 2” th frame. Will be done. That is, in this case, the effect is internally received from the time when the “effect during the validity period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is not yet displayed (the “m” -th frame and the “m + 1” -th frame). Is allowed, the player runs ahead, and as a result, he / she operates immediately before the “effect during effective period (display based on operation waiting block E)” is displayed. Even in such a case, the effect is received, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 226, processing related to “production before validity period (display based on appearance EF block E)” and processing related to “production during validity period (display based on appearance EF block E)” are performed. For convenience of explanation, it is executed in the peripheral control unit 1511 for each frame. However, when these effects are displayed using moving image data, the peripheral control unit 1511 only needs to create a drawing list based on “information corresponding to moving images” at the start frame of the processing. That is, in this case, in each of the subsequent frames, the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) automatically reads and displays the image data. The processing may not necessarily be performed for each frame in the unit 1511.

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started in the “m + 1” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226.

  As described above, in the “determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, three frames in which histories as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When the operation detection information in the side-by-side mode is obtained, the effect is accepted (determination that the operation has been performed), and the effect after the operation can be executed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 227, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing earlier than the timing t2 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” -th frame (timing earlier than the timing of determining the reception of the effect). The "m + 1" -th frame itself also retains a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all of the three frames to be determined (“m−2” frame, “m−1” frame, and “m” frame) Since it is an “OFF frame”, no effect reception (judgment that operation has been performed) is performed.

  At timing t2 (m + 2) in the next frame “m + 2” -th frame, the three frames (“m−1” -th frame, “m” -th frame, and “m + 1” -th frame) to be determined are as follows. Since the histories of “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “ON frame” are left, the effect is not accepted (judgment that an operation has been performed) is not performed.

  Further, at timing t2 (m + 3) in the next frame “m + 3” th frame, three frames (“m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame, “m + 2” th frame) to be determined are The histories of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left, respectively, so that the effect reception (judgment that operation has been performed) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, since the “m + 1” -th frame and the “m + 2” -th frame are “ON frames”, the operation state is equal to or longer than the predetermined time over two frames in the effect reception period (valid period). It is possible to determine that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). Since the “m” -th frame is an “OFF frame”, it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the effect reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation has been properly performed within the period in which the effect reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. ) (Here, at timing t2 (m + 3)), an effect is received and an after-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is performed at the time when the effect is received. However, the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of a frame or the like. Any process may be used as long as the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the effect acceptance is performed so that the operation determination process is not (substantially) performed in the next frame.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when an effect is received at timing t2 (m + 3), the post-operation effect (operation The processing relating to “post-use block E)” is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display according to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the “m + 5” th frame (not shown) after two frames.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 226.

  As described above, in the “determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, three frames in which histories as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When the operation detection information in the side-by-side mode is obtained, the effect is accepted (determination that the operation has been performed), and the effect after the operation can be executed.

  Also, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows “effect determination to generate a post-operation effect” only during the effect reception period (valid period), but “operation operation”. Regarding the state detection ”itself, even if it has been performed within a period (several previous frames) immediately before the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs, this is detected by the operation detection target (determination). Material).

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such a timing is not used in the determination regarding the effect reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the timing t2 in the “m” -th frame. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the three previous frames (the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) is sent to the effect reception. It is used in such a determination. In this example, these frames (the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) are called “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, respectively. As a result, the effect is accepted (determination that an operation has been performed).

  According to such a configuration, the “m−3” th frame is an “OFF frame”, and the “m−2” th frame and the “m−1” th frame are “ON frames”. With this, it is possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more (for example, 3 ms) over two frames immediately before the production acceptance period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, In the example shown in FIG. 228, the effect is received within the effect reception period (valid period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to the effect. ) Is executed (started). When such a configuration is employed, as shown in FIG. 228, the effect reception period (valid period) itself is completed in a very short time in which even one frame is not continued. Even if the operation is started immediately before the anticipation of the occurrence of the operation, the effect is considered to have been performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is generated. Will be able to do that. In other words, in this case, the player can also feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  However, if the reception of the effect in such an aspect is frequently performed, the significance of the effect reception period (valid period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the effect reception is performed based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period). Is performed, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the mock image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, it is possible to give a considerable degree of doubt as to whether or not the “post-operation effect” has occurred due to the provision of the operation opportunity. It is possible to expect that the operation is not started before the time period occurs.

  In addition, the method of realizing "the effect is performed after the operation without displaying the mimic image or the gauge display" is not particularly limited. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing relating to the “effect during the validity period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” th frame without intentionally considering the delay of two frames. Then, when an effect is received at timing t2 (m), a process relating to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed from the frame (“m” -th frame) for which the effect is received. Like that. As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the process relating to the “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is executed without executing the process relating to the “effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)”. Therefore, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the mock image or the gauge display.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. Therefore, what kind of determination is performed based on the assumption and an effect corresponding to the determination is performed will be described. However, as shown in FIG. 229, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” -th frame is not maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame. Even in the case of ending within the -1st frame, if the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame each have a history as an "ON frame" (respectively, If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing described with reference to FIG. 228, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the effect reception period occurs, and is performed only during the period before the effect reception period occurs. However, the judgment conditions (“m−3” frame, “m−2” frame, “m−1” frame are “OFF frames” respectively) for the effect reception at timing t2 (m) , “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are recorded), the effect is received even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m), and the operation is performed. After-effect will be performed.

  Regarding such a configuration, the same can be said when an operation is performed within the effect reception period (valid period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is earlier than the timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame, or “m + 2”. Even if the operation state has been completed in the th frame, the determination conditions (“m” -th frame, “m + 1” -th frame, and “m + 2” -th frame are “ As long as the “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” histories are satisfied), even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), FIG. The effect is received as shown, and the effect is executed after the operation.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the “determination regarding effect reception” is performed, and the timing when the “determination regarding effect reception” is performed. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within a period before (in this embodiment, when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), the operation set as the operation target The effect is received assuming that the operation is properly performed on the means, and the effect is performed after the operation.

  Here, the operation detection information obtained before the effect reception period (valid period) is generated is compared with the operation detection information in the “determination process for effect reception” performed after the stage effect reception period (valid period) is generated. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, the operation is started from a situation in which no indication effect (appearance effect) is executed and there is no sign that the effect acceptance period (valid period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that a person who will be able to accept the effect will appear. That is, if the operation in such a mode is permitted, the significance of the effect reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether an “OFF frame” and an “ON frame” are present, instead of using only the “ON frame” as a determination target. In this way, the above-mentioned concerns are resolved. In this embodiment, ON and OFF are determined for each frame. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine a timing at which an operation is started by detecting a rising or falling edge of a sensor signal, and An effect may be received on condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more from the timing ”. Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long before the rise or fall of the sensor signal has occurred before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, or to determine how long the operation state is maintained. The above problem can be solved by judging how long it has continued.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started from the “m−3” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in this example, the operation started in the “m−3” -th frame three frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs is the effect It is assumed that the operation is continuously performed up to the “m + 2” th frame within the reception period (valid period). Also in this example, when the effect accepting period occurs, first, “determination regarding effect accepting” is performed at timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame. The operation detection information previously obtained (here, the operation detection information obtained in the “m−3” -th frame, the “m−2” -th frame, the “m−1” -th frame) is used as the judgment material. It is supposed to be.

  However, in this example, the “m−3” -th frame, the “m−2” -th frame, and the “m−1” -th frame have a history of “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, respectively. In this state, no effect reception (determination that an operation has been performed) is performed as a result of the “determination relating to effect reception” at the timing t2 (m). In addition, in the “determination regarding effect reception” performed in the subsequent frame such as the timing t2 (m + 1), the “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON” are determined for the three frames to be determined. Since only the history as the "frame" is left, as long as the operation state from the "m-3" th frame is maintained, the effect is produced as a result of the "judgment for effect reception" performed in each frame. The reception (judgment that the operation has been performed) is not performed.

  That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the “m−3” th frame is temporarily ended, and a frame in which the history as the “OFF frame” is left is created, and then the operation is not performed again, the effect is accepted. (Judgment that an operation has been performed) can be prevented from being performed. As a result, even if the operation state is maintained even in a situation where no indication effect (appearance effect) is executed and there is no sign that the effect reception period (valid period) will occur, the operation state is maintained based on this. It is possible to preferably avoid the effect reception being performed.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 227 to 230, when an effect is received at timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the post-operation effect is displayed without displaying the mock image or the gauge display. (See especially FIG. 228). However, in this case, it is not possible to remember the feeling that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may be reduced. However, the effect may be advanced so that the mock image and the gauge display are always displayed. Note that, in this case, the feature that “at the time when the m-th frame is started,“ the effect during the validity period (operation waiting block) ”is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600” It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

  The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited. For example, the timing at which “the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state” in the frame and the “determination relating to effect reception” are performed. This can be realized by setting the timing at which the “processing” is performed so as to be opposite to the case of the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 231 shows an effect reception period (valid when the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state) is performed after the “determination process for effect reception” in the frame. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the period.

  As shown in FIG. 231, assuming that the “m” -th frame has arrived, first, at timing t12 (m) in the frame, the operation state flag is turned on (set). Done. As a result, an effect reception period (valid period) occurs, but in the “m” -th frame, “determination process for effect reception” is performed after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. Never.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in the “m” -th frame, the timing at which the “determination process for effect reception” is performed before the timing t12 (m). At this time, the “determination process related to the effect reception” itself is not performed, or the “determination process related to the effect reception” has been performed, but the effect reception period (valid period) has not occurred. As a result, it is determined that the effect is not accepted.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect reception from being performed in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, regardless of the state of the operation, the “period during the valid period (operation waiting block E )) Is always performed, and a display image (effect during the effective period) corresponding to the process can be displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the “m + 2” -th frame after two frames. become.

  That is, in this case, the effect reception is performed after the effect reception period has occurred at least as long as the “m−2” -th frame, the “m−1” -th frame, and the “m” -th frame are each “OFF frame”. , “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, and the timing t11 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” th frame arrives. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs a process related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” based on the reception of the effect. At this time, the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) uses the preparation buffer (double buffering) based on the processing result regarding “production during validity period” processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m” -th frame. Rendering processing has already been performed on the side of the buffer in the non-display state (refer to “processing in image control means” in FIG. 231).

  Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even if the effect is received in the shortest time after the effect receiving period occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays the “m + 2” -th time effect during the valid period even if the effect is received. Is performed, and the display relating to the “post-operation effect” is performed in the “m + 3” th frame, so that the post-operation effect can be started after displaying the mimic image or the gauge display. become.

  However, the method of starting the effect after the operation after displaying the mock image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 226, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the effect reception can be performed at the timing t2 (m). Therefore, even when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to the “effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be performed.

  That is, in this case, a frame for performing the process related to the “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect reception is made one frame for the frame for which the effect reception is performed. Will be delayed. Therefore, even when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, in the “m” -th frame, “the effect during the valid period (operation waiting The processing related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m + 1” -th frame that is the next frame. . Such a “delay” is not limited to the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, but occurs regardless of the effect reception in any frame. . Even with such a method, after the effect reception period has occurred, even if the effect is received in the shortest time, the effect can be started after the operation after displaying the mock image or the gauge display. Become.

  As described above, according to the examples illustrated in FIGS. 226 to 231 and the other examples, in the “determination processing for effect reception” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the m-th frame is not started. The “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the previous “m−1” -th frame is also used as the determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and the other examples, “the operation detection unit acquires the“ m−1 ”-th frame before the“ m-th ”frame is started. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2" -th frame are used as determination materials for the effect reception. In other words, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (in a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs) in anticipation of the production acceptance period (valid period), this is produced. Since the post-operation effect is performed assuming that the operation has been performed within the reception period (valid period), the player can also realize that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. You will learn.

  In addition, even when the operation state is not maintained at the time when the “determination process for effect reception” in the m-th frame is performed, the “operation detecting means” acquired in the frame before the m-th frame is used. An effect reception can be performed based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence (effective period of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs). However, since it is considered that the operation has been performed within the effect acceptance period (effective period), the effect after the operation is executed, so that the player can perform the effect after the operation due to the operation. You will feel the realities that have occurred.

  However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame as an “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is changed to an “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed within the frame. Operation (setting) may be performed. In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection unit) acquired from the start of the m-th frame to the generation of the effect reception period (valid period) is also used as a determination material for the effect reception. Will be used. That is, in this case, the operation is performed in each of the “m−1” -th frame and the “m” -th frame (for example, the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), and the operation is performed in the “m−2” -th frame. When it is determined that the operation is not performed (for example, the operation state is shorter than 3 ms), the effect is received. According to such a configuration, the time required for the operation by the player to be used as the determination material is shortened, so that it is possible to provide a post-operation effect with high immediate reactivity.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 230 and other examples, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the situation is such that the mimic image and the gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. Then, when an effect is received within the m-th frame, the effect is performed after the operation without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence (effective period of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs). In the case where the post-operation effect is generated in such a manner, it is considered that the operation has been performed within the effect reception period (effective period) and the post-operation effect is executed. Does not display a button image or a gauge display ", and an appropriate operation can be encouraged within the effect acceptance period (valid period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of the modes was displayed, and it is suggested by the mode. There is a production-like disadvantage that it becomes impossible to grasp the degree of expectation.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples, the effect is not accepted when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time. This makes it possible to prompt the user to perform an operation in an appropriate mode during the effect reception period.

  However, on the other hand, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained not for a long time but for a time shorter than a specific time, the effect is received. Even if an operation is performed immediately before the period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence of a period (valid period), it is considered that the operation has been performed within the production acceptance period (valid period), and the post-operation production Is executed, so that the player also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

  In addition, in order for the effect to be accepted, it is not enough that the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than a specific time, and it is also required that the operation state be maintained for a time longer than a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 231 or another example, in the processing in the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, even if any operation detection information has been obtained, the process regarding the post-operation effect ( Among the display processing in the effect display device 1600, the process related to lamp emission, the process related to sound output, and the process related to movable body operation), at least for the display process in the effect display device 1600, "the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed. Without performing the process of reading in the peripheral control unit 1511 ”, and performing the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the effect is not received. I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained in the m-th frame in which the effect reception period is started, processing (effect) in the m-th frame when the effect is not received. At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of display processing in the display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation is necessarily performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, a process (a process of reading out information corresponding to the image data of the effect after the operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) corresponding to the reception of the effect is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the effect is not received (the process of reading information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the “post-operation effect” is an effect started due to the operation by the player.

  Note that, as described above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 231, even in the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, the effect determination can be performed based on the operation detection information. In the frame in which the determination has been made, “processing for reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and “the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed in the next frame. , Reading process in the peripheral control unit 1511 ". That is, in this case, among the processing related to the post-operation effect (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to the movement of the movable body), at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 is effect determination. In the frame in which is performed, the processing when the effect is not received (the processing for reading out the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed. However, at this time, of the processes related to the post-operation effects (display process in the effect display device 1600, processes related to lamp emission, processes related to sound output, processes related to movable body operation), for example, “process related to lamp emission” and “process related to sound output” Regarding the “process”, a process of reading “information on the light emission mode after the operation” or “information on the sound output after the operation” may be performed in the frame where the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, the output of the lamp or the sound is started in the post-operation mode based on the read information in the frame in which the effect is determined or in the next frame.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 225, in a case where a technique of displaying an effect image using blocks is adopted, and when an effect is received by an operation, a “post-operation block” for executing an after-operation effect is used. In addition, a “destruction EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinction EF)” for displaying the destruction effect image until the operation promotion image such as the simulated image or the gauge display that was displayed until then is hidden is displayed. It may be executed. According to such an “extinction EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for an extinction EF)”, for example, an image in which a mimic image or a gauge display fades out when an effect is received (an image that is gradually hidden). Can be displayed. Further, such an “extinction EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for an extinction EF)” may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without effecting after the operation. The “disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)” is also attached to a background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for background) and an operation waiting block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting). It can be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the ON state in the process read based on the process identification information.

  Note that the “process for generating a state in which effect acceptance is permitted (operation for setting (operating) the operation state flag to the ON state)” described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 231 is the scheduler after the symbol change is started. It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and may not necessarily be executed based on a frame.

  Further, the “simulated image” and the “gauge display” may be displayed as an effect before the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, when the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearance EF block E) is performed, the display mode is set to be translucent or to be displayed in a blurred manner by another effect display. For example, it is required to display the "simulated image" or the "gauge display" in a different mode from when the "effect during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)" is performed. Further, at this time, in the effect before the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the "simulated image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without being displayed. .

[Further directivity for mimic image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (an advance notice effect, etc.) should be selectively caused to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect contents according to the result of the effect determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorated design is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) relating to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description, movable body operation, etc. Is provided as an effect having a "function that indicates the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the symbol production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (regardless of the predetermined condition Is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptable sound output when the operation reception effect is generated is made different depending on the result of the effect determination, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a highly expected manner. The rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped are indicated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), An operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. . The operation reception effect (valid period) generated in the predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) generated when the symbol effect based on the specific fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the change pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific change pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, a change pattern that generates an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected change pattern (non-reach change pattern). It is desirable to avoid such a situation or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for the effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). After the operation to generate the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body), the operation is performed. The effect of the reception effect (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest until the effect is performed after the operation is reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), the "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" according to the change pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressed manner. During the execution of the low-expected non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and the design effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expected change pattern (specific change pattern), the change pattern (effect pattern) The corresponding “BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, or is in a non-output state (whether the reproduction period in which the audible sound of the sound data is recorded is over, or the channel is allocated). Has been terminated), and various measures have been taken, such as enabling at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity during the And that it is as described above (FIG 144～ view 195, FIG 207～ Figure 231).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the mimic image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated mimic image integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the mimic image. In this way, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when an operation reception effect (effective period) occurs. For such an integrated mimic image, an operation reception effect (valid period) generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation generated in the predetermined variation pattern described above. It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (valid period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effects and the high expectation suppression reception effect. Also, in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231), the display mode of the illustrated mimic image is replaced with any of the integrated mimic images described below. It is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

Hereinafter, a case where the mimic image is displayed as an “integrated mimic image” will be described.
First of all, the "simulated image" will be described again. The operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception effect includes an "operation receiving portion" for receiving an operation by the player, and a periphery of the operation receiving portion. A “peripheral decoration part” to be decorated is provided. In this regard, the “mimic image” means an image that mimics the “operation receiving section” of such operation means. The “operation receiving section” is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the “peripheral decoration section” is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (production operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the “operation receiving section” corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the “peripheral decoration section” corresponds to the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to In the case of the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 161 and the like, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the “peripheral decoration portion” corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

  FIG. 232 shows an “integrated mimic image” displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) is generated for an operation unit provided with an “operation receiving unit” that receives a “press operation” by a player. It is a figure showing an example.

  In this description example, for convenience of description, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an “operation receiving portion” on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. That is, when the player presses the design button 5014, the design button 5014 is pressed into the design portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is produced (for example, after the operation is performed). ). According to such a configuration, in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit, a “pattern button 5014” that can be operated (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012, and an operation (moves up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving portions with a possible "pattern portion 5012" will be provided.

  FIG. 232 illustrates an “integrated mimic image” when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 occurs when a predetermined fluctuation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the example described below starting with FIG. 232, the “integrated mimic image” when the operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 is not operated on the operation button 410 but on the operation button 410. You may make it apply as an "integrated mimic image" when the operation reception effect (valid period) to which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, the “simulated image imitating the operation button 410” illustrated in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231) is referred to as an “integrated mimic image” described below. In this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

  As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410). When an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button simulation image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. These are displayed as integrated simulation images IGa to IGd. In the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not separately prepared as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). It is configured to be displayed only as the model images IGa to IGd). When the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period), the “first effect mode with relatively low expectation” and the “relative A plurality of production modes including a “second production mode with high expectation” are prepared, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (production determination). . In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d),
In the specific operation reception effect (effective period), the state shown in FIG. 232 (b) (integrated mimic image IGb) is higher than the state shown in FIG. 232 (a) (integrated mimic image IGa) appears. Has appeared as a post-operation effect, so that the appearance ratio of the "second effect mode with relatively high expectation" is higher,
In the specific operation reception effect (valid period), the state shown in FIG. 232 (c) (integrated mimic image IGc) is higher than the state shown in FIG. 232 (b) (integrated mimic image IGb) appears. Has appeared as a post-operation effect, so that the appearance ratio of the "second effect mode with relatively high expectation" is higher,
In the specific operation reception effect (effective period), the state shown in FIG. 232 (d) (integrated mimic image IGd) is higher than the state shown in FIG. 232 (c) (integrated mimic image IGc) appears. Is based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination) so that the relationship where the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation production when the appears One of the model images IGa to IGd is displayed.

  It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated model images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, a mode different from the above-mentioned four modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-Operation means (sword decoration body 5001, sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) displaced by an operation by the player and a peripheral decoration portion (pattern portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400),
Integrated mimic image display means for displaying a mimic image simulating the operation receiving section as integrated mimic images IGa to IGd integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the mimic image;
An operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (a post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player when the integrated mimic image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion; The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

  The details of the “integrated mimic image” shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) will be described separately for each of the aspects (integrated mimic images IGa to IGd).

  First, the “integrated mimic image IGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a) includes a normal button mimic image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa that decorates the periphery. However, in the case of the “integrated mimic image IGa”, the normal button mimic image BMGa is displayed as “an image imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given”. On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa indicates that “the peripheral decoration part (the pattern part 5012 or the frame) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not imitated, and the periphery of the normal button imitation image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

  According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, which of the operation means is given an operation opportunity is determined by the operation means ( Can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button imitation image BMGa that simulates a part of the image. In addition, the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is not a real peripheral decoration portion, but a luxurious and large image (integrated mimic image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and performance. ), The effect of the staging when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for luxurious existing peripheral decorations, and it is possible to achieve a high degree of freedom of presentation that is not restricted by the shape of the actual peripheral decorations. become.

  In the “integrated mimic image IGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a pedestal for setting a button (normal button mimic image BMGa). A predetermined decoration that warns that the button has a high degree of risk is provided. As described above, the “pedestal” and the “predetermined decoration” have a shape different from that of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated model image IGa” according to the present embodiment, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced with time. More specifically, when the operation is not received within the validity period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is changed from the display area of the predetermined maximum value to the predetermined minimum value (including “0”). Is displayed so as to decrease as time elapses until the display area becomes. That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has a function of suggesting the operation means that is the operation target, but also indicates the remaining time until the state where the operation reception is permitted (effective period) ends. It also plays the function of indicating the remaining time.

  In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232 (a), a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is provided. . The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target area”. However, the section image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target area”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) is applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner on the display target area on which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment over the entire period until the empty state.

  When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having the predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area on which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the display method, a method of changing the color of the display target area itself having the predetermined decoration between a portion having a gauge and a portion having no gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), the predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is replaced with the normal peripheral decoration. Since it is intended to be applied so as to straddle other regions in the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target region itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is more expected that the entertainment interest when the "integrated mimic image IGa" is displayed is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which “integrated model image IGa” is displayed occurs on effect display device 1600, a pattern button to be operated is displayed. The 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button simulation image BMGa in the “integrated simulation image IGa”. That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are prepared for the button model image BMG, and the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as one of the modes. Is adopted, the mode (expected degree) of the button simulation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated without visually recognizing the normal button simulation image BMGa.

  The “button mimic image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))” does not necessarily have to accurately imitate the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. Any display device may be used as long as it is displayed with a reproduction level (deformation or the like) enough to recognize which operation means it is.

  On the other hand, the “integrated mimic image IGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b) is basically the same as the “integrated mimic image IGa” described above. , And a peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the “integrated mimic image IGb”, the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed as the same as the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” described above. BMGa "and a" special button simulation image BMGb "having a different shape.

  More specifically, in the “integrated mimic image IGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b), the special button mimic image BMGb is a simulation of the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. However, it is displayed as an image having a shape different from the “button simulation image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))” that imitates the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, when such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it is difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is to be operated when the “integrated mimic image IGb” is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the “integrated mimic image IGa”, the “button mimic image BMGa” simulating the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is integrated with the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” and displayed. Therefore, the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” itself has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is an operation target. In this regard, in the “integrated mimic image IGb”, the “special button mimic image BMGb” is integrated with such “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” and displayed. Even if the “BMGb” does not properly imitate the operation target, it may indicate that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target for the “integrated mimic image IGb” as a whole. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such an operation effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” is different from the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the operation means. It can be said that it is important to prevent the display (for example, the pattern portion 5012) from being displayed when it is the operation target.

  According to such a configuration, the button simulation image BMG imitating the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery thereof are displayed as an integrated simulation image in which the periphery is decorated. The button simulation image BMG, which is only a part of the simulation image, can be displayed with a higher degree of freedom of expression that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operation means to be operated. It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by its character and decoration.

  In addition, in the “special button mimic image BMGb” illustrated in FIG. 232 (b), a button having a streamlined shape is depicted in a more stylish design than the “button mimic image BMGa”, and at the top thereof. Words such as "DANGER" are given. The appearance of the “special button mimic image BMGb” that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible for the player to easily feel a premium feeling, and the “button mimic image BMGa” appears. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that the degree of expectation is higher than usual.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGb” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation is also performed. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button simulation image BMGb in the “integrated simulation image IGb”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode according to the type of the button simulation image BMG in the “integrated simulation image IG”. Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) as the button imitation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated.

  On the other hand, the “integrated mimic image IGc” shown in FIG. 232 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated mimic image IGa” described above. The image is configured as an image in which the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge is integrated. However, in the “integrated mimic image IGc”, the button mimic image BMG is displayed as the same as the “normal button mimic image BMGa” described above, but the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed as the “normal peripheral decorative image SMG” The image is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the image SSGa.

However, the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is the same as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” in the following points.
"The effect display does not simulate the peripheral decoration portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The periphery of the button simulation image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration in the display effect on the device 1600.
A display area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

  According to such an “integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))”, any one of the operation means is operated based on the “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. It is possible to greatly change the overall shape of the “integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” without causing a change in the shape of the “button mimic image BMG” indicating that an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it is possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance by changing the shape without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

  In the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” according to this embodiment, at least a part of the image has the same decoration as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. It is displayed as. Therefore, in the case where the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears and the case where the “united model image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” appears, the same post-operation effect is targeted. It is possible to suggest that the particular operation reception effect (effective period) has been performed.

  In particular, in the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” according to this embodiment, another member having a special decoration is added to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. The whole is displayed as an enlarged image in an expanded form. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is displayed as a development of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, and the degree of expectation is higher than when the “button mimic image BMGa” appears. The expectation is that people will instinctively feel high.

  In the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))”, the shape and the decoration are different from those in the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”, but the gauge image (predetermined image) No change occurs in the GG display target area itself.

  That is, when a part of such an integrated model image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, whether the display target area or the gauge image is merely “a part of the decoration” or “ It is difficult for the player to determine whether the part has a function of suggesting time. In this regard, in the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))”, a gauge having an important function such as “suggesting remaining time”. Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed and the other part is changed in shape, the shape change can be performed without sacrificing the remaining time suggesting function. This makes it possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGc” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation is also performed. The design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button simulation image BMGa in the “integrated simulation image IGc”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode according to the type of the button simulation image BMG in the “integrated simulation image IG”. Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) as the button imitation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated. However, the normal button simulation image BMGa when the “integrated simulation image IGc” is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, “green”) than when the “integrated simulation image IGa” is displayed. It may be. In this case, the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

  On the other hand, an “integrated mimic image IGd” shown in FIG. 232 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated mimic image IGa” described above. This is configured as an image in which a peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge is integrated. However, in the “integrated button image IGd”, the button button image BMG is displayed as a “special button button image BMGb” having a different shape from the above “normal button button image BMGa”. In addition, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” having a different shape from the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” described above.

  That is, in the “integrated mimic image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))”, the “special button mimic image BMGb” used in the “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” and the “integrated mimic image IGc” (FIG. 232 (c)) "is displayed as an integrated image with the" special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb ". According to such a configuration, the operation effect obtained by the “special button mimic image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” and the “integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. c)), the above-described effects obtained by the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” can be obtained, and when the “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” is used as a reference, Since both aspects of the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the instinct is made to feel that the degree of expectation is high.

  On the other hand, while the button mimic image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG both have their modes changed, the same decoration and shape appear in a partial area in the peripheral decoration image SSG. In the case where the “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears and in the case where the “integrated mimic image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” appears, the identification after the same operation is performed. Can be suggested to be an operation reception effect (valid period).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 232 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGd” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation is performed. The design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button simulation image BMGb in the “integrated simulation image IGd”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode according to the type of the button simulation image BMG in the “integrated simulation image IG”. Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) as the button imitation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated. However, the special button simulation image BMGb when the “integrated simulation image IGd” is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, “rainbow color”) than when the “integrated simulation image IGb” is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in the rainbow color.

  As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a symbol effect based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation reception effect (valid period). Is generated, the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated and the integrated simulation image IG is displayed. One side of the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. The other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button simulation image BMG is displayed as the “normal button simulation image BMGa”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( FIGS. 232 (a) and (c). Further, when the button button image BMG is displayed as the “special button button image BMGb”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( FIGS. 232 (b) and (d). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, the button imitation image BMG can be displayed as one of the “normal button simulation image BMGa” and the “special button simulation image BMGb” ( FIGS. 232 (a) and (b). Also, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”, the button imitation image BMG can be displayed as either the “normal button simulation image BMGa” or the “special button simulation image BMGb” ( FIGS. 232 (a) and (b).

  According to such a configuration, although the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed integrally, when the mode is changed, only one side is changed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the mode has not changed, it is easy to recognize that a predetermined operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring, regardless of which mode the other side is displayed. However, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it is possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect may not be changed on one side of the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the aspect may be changed only on the other side.

  Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated simulation image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced with time. It is possible. That is, in this case, the “peripheral decoration image SSG” has a remaining time indicating function indicating the remaining time until the state in which the operation is accepted is completed, and determines which operation means the operation target is. By being displayed as an integrated mimic image IG that is integrated with the “button mimic image BMG” having the function of suggesting, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target and to recognize which of multiple modes has appeared. For example, it is expected that the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring is appropriately maintained.

  Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (Both a portion having a remaining time suggesting function and a portion having no remaining time suggesting function). That is, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed is “decoration of the button simulation image BMG”. It is possible to positively adopt a display mode with the purpose of `` improving operability '', so while suggesting the remaining time, the rendition when an operation reception effect, which is an important effect, occurs It can be significantly improved. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said.

  In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as an entity, when the “pattern 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of modes (a plurality of emission colors). ). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it is possible to check the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be copied simply by checking it.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), when the button mimic image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. However, as a substance, the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral decoration portion, does not change to any of a plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG is to decorate the periphery of the button simulation image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to be adjusted to the mode of the “pattern part 5012” that is the peripheral decoration part, so that it is possible to perform various depictions that are preferable for enlivening the effect. The “pattern 5012”, which is the peripheral decorative portion, may be provided as a non-light-emittable one, such as non-emission.

  Also, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), both the button mimic image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may change (FIG. 232 (d)). However, as a substance, it is desirable that both the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG be changed when the “pattern portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decoration portion, is in one mode.

  In the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”, different modes appear in the “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion. You may do so. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG has at least a different shape between the case where the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. It is desirable that the “pattern portion 5012” be caused to cause only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) without a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decorative portion as a shape that cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function by the peripheral decorative image SSG.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the mimic image, in addition to the button mimic image BMG simulating the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410), a mimic image simulating the design portion 5012 is provided. TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made different depending on which of the mimic images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decoration image SSGa, b for decorating the periphery of the button model image BMG cannot be displayed when a model image different from the button model image BMG is displayed. The decoration image SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a “function that indicates which operation means the operation target is”.

  If the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the mimic image (the button mimic image BMG, the pattern mimic image TMG), the form (thickness) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decorative image , Length) should be different. The operation reception effect in which the button simulation image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern simulation image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (select which one occurs according to the effect determination). Or an effect that occurs at a different variation pattern or at a different timing. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the button simulation image is BMG is not a simulation of the peripheral decoration part, and the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern simulation image is TMG is a simulation of the peripheral decoration part. You may. However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (valid period) is the same in some cases.

  Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG include those areas. , And a gage image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration is enlarged, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment. become able to.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in a superimposed manner on a display target area on which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment over the entire period until the empty state.

  However, the predetermined decoration need not always be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) the predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration is reduced as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Is also reduced, so that the player who dislikes the decrease in the predetermined decoration is promptly operated at an early stage.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (the design button 5014 or the operation button 410) to be operated. Does not simulate the peripheral decoration portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in the image forming apparatus, and is an image representing an intangible object as a gaming machine component. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more flexible decorativeness and performance without being caught by the substance as a gaming machine component.

  In the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), among the button mimic image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, without changing the shape of the button model image BMG, only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing the intangible object can be changed in shape. It is possible to realize a display with a higher level of directivity and decoration by appropriately indicating whether or not the image is displayed, and by changing the shape of the integrated model image IG.

  Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the shape may not necessarily be changed when the button simulation image BMG is in one mode, and only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an intangible object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button simulation image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

  It should be noted that in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG has been changed in a manner to increase its size. As will be described later, such a form changing method may be any of a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (such as the number of decorations) and a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (such as a rectangular parallelepiped and a sphere). It is possible to adopt a method of expanding a target range to be displayed among objects displayed by the method or a predetermined object expressed as an image. In addition, as will be described later, as for the form change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, an effect of gradually changing the form from a low expectation to a high expectation is executed as a precursor effect, and then, finally, The operation reception in the operation reception effect may be allowed while the changed form is maintained.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed, the gauge image included in the peripheral decoration image SSG ( The display target area of the (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the same form without being changed (at least the shape is not changed). Therefore, even if the form as the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to appropriately maintain the suggestion function of how much remaining time remains, and thus to maintain the important function. Holds, the expected degree can also be suggested by a shape change in another area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  Depending on which of the above-described respective effects is intended, the peripheral decoration image SSG may not necessarily represent an intangible object, and may be a peripheral decoration image provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving unit. It may be displayed as an image simulating a part.

  Further, the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) can be dynamically displayed during a “valid period during which operation reception is permitted” such as a predetermined operation reception effect. This prompts the player to perform an operation.

  However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, but the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed together. Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is immovably displayed. According to such a configuration, while one side contributes to improving the directing performance when a button effect, which is an important effect, is generated by a dynamic expression, the other side is displayed so as to remain in place. As a result, when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, it is not moved and displayed, so that the visibility can be suitably secured.

  In the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button mimic image BMG is dynamically changed so that a state in which the operation receiving portion provided with the operation opportunity is displaced in its movable range is depicted. It is displayed, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG Can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced as time passes.

  As described above, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included on the side of the integrated mimic image IG that ensures the appropriate visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed). Thus, while the performance of the operation reception production, which is an important production, is improved by the dynamic display using the button simulation image BMG, how much remaining time is allowed for the production reception. Can be easily recognized.

  In addition, on the side of the integrated model image IG that has secured the appropriate visibility (peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( An area in which the (predetermined image) GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when an effect indicating the degree of expectation is performed on the side of the integrated mimic image IG that secures appropriate visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from being adversely affected on the display target area.

  In the peripheral decoration image SSG, a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button model image BMG are provided with a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation. One of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), but the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of the modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), this is a case where the button simulation image BMG is displayed as an integrated simulation image IG integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery. In addition, when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a mere decoration or pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? There is a concern that it will be difficult to determine whether the function has the function of indicating the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that it is difficult to grasp to which position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced by being mixed with decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG, and there is a concern about a decrease in gaming interest. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the (predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

  More specifically, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is referred to as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) in the display target area. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be displaced in the same manner.

  According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displaced to the predetermined position. Then, since the validity period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely a decoration or a suggestion of the remaining time, the position of the “specific image” By confirming, the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, when such a “specific image” is displayed, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated mimic image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 233, if the timing A0 at which a valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted has arrived within a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the effect display device 1600 , An integrated simulation image IG, and an operation promotion image such as “press!” And “downward arrow” are displayed.

  In this example, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. ) May be displayed. Regardless of which mode the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in an aspect described below as time passes.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a), first, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period has just started.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233 (a), at timing A0 which is the start timing of the validity period, "the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The "specific image whose aspect has been partially changed" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed. Only by confirming, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed since the operation acceptance was permitted (the remaining crotch is decreasing).

  However, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” starts from timing A0 (start timing of the valid period). Until the predetermined time (the time required for the entire appearance of the specific image to finish appearing) has elapsed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner such as "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time". Are displayed in the display target area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), in the integrated mimic image IG at the timing A1 where a short time has elapsed from the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image TG" as a specific image different from the above or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed appears until about half of the image is visible. This indicates that the display area is being increased with time.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (c) and (d), the integrated mimic image IG at the timings A2 and A3 after a long time has elapsed is “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or The “specific image TG” as the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is in a state where the entire image has already appeared, and the gauge image is displayed without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the GG is displaced in the display target area.

  That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is the gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) displayed at or near the end of the GG, and displayed such that its display position is displaced (in a subsequent manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become.

  The “specific image TG” according to this embodiment is displayed as an image in which a star-shaped mark is provided in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Has become something. However, the “specific image TG” may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be used. The end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a partially changed manner, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or in the vicinity thereof.

  In any case, the “specific image TG” originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating that the remaining time has been exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, “0”). Therefore, at the time when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period ends), at least a part (or all) may be kept in the display state without being hidden.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 233 (e), in the integrated mimic image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period, the gauge The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is “0”, and about half the display area of the “specific image TG” is left. If the operation is not received until this state is reached, the period in which the operation is permitted is ended in this state, and the integrated model image IG is not displayed.

  However, as described above, the “specific image TG” does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated specific image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, so that the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. You may make it.

  However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is exactly “0” at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the display position of the “specific image TG” is adjusted in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a subsequent manner). Is displayed so as to be displaced, and when viewed from the player side, up to which of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge images ( (Predetermined image) GG can be ambiguous.

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the validity period ends, and the display area of most (half or all) of the display area is left unremoved from the player side. When viewed, when the validity period ends, the display area also appears to be a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a minimum value (not displayed here). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than the actual one, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than the actual one. As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation accepting effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left to end, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Even if the period does not end immediately after the display, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed so as to be reduced, and thereby the non-display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to feel uncomfortable due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. That is, in this case, the “specific image TG” can be expected to function as a buffer that can absorb such a temporal shift.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 233, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the valid period, the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG partially changes. The specified image is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed on the gauge. The image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the display target area.

  According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed as a part of the gauge image GG. Will be able to show positively as if it is, so that it will appear as if the validity period has been set as a longer period than it looks, and the entertainment interest when the validity period occurs It is expected to improve.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated mimic image IG from the start of the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted to the end thereof.

  Now, assuming that a timing A0 at which a valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted has arrived within the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the effect display device 1600 also has an effect in the example shown in FIG. , An integrated simulation image IG, and an operation promotion image such as “press!” And “downward arrow” are displayed.

  In this example as well, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) (integrated model image IGa) is displayed as the integrated model image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. The information may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Regardless of which mode the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” causes a change in the aspect shown in FIGS. 234 (a) to (d) with time. .

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 234 (a), in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Instead of being displayed, “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” will be displayed. At the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the “specific image TG” may be in such a state that only a part thereof is displayed, but the entirety is displayed here. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to make the “specific image TG” appear as if it functions as a part of the “gauge image GG”, it seems that a longer time remains than it looks. Is possible.

  The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image expressing “eraser”, and does not fit within the area (display target area of the gauge image GG) surrounded by the section image KG, and is not included in another area (out of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , An area in which the mode can change in accordance with the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made more prominent than the “gauge image GG”, and the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time remains is suppressed. Be expected.

  Further, in this example, when the time elapses from the timing A0 to become the timings A2 and A3 and the “specific image TG” is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and (c), the “specific image TG” is changed. Is changed to a "white area" as if the part passed by "" was erased by an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the “gauge image GG” expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors, gloss expression, and the like) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the “specific image TG”. Sometimes, the reduced area is expressed only in one color, so that the contrast at the boundary of the “specific image TG” becomes noticeable, indicating how much remaining time is left. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is performed. It is preferable that the color appearing in the reduced area is a color not used in the “gauge image GG”.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 234, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined images) GG indicating that the remaining time is exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, “0”). Since it does not originally function as a unit, at least when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period ends), at least a part (or all) may be kept in a display state without being hidden. Become.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 234 (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is “0” in the integrated mimic image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period. , And the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. If the operation is not received until this state is reached, the period in which the operation is permitted is ended in this state, and the integrated model image IG is not displayed.

  However, also in this example, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A4 that is the end timing of the effective period, a part of the display area of the “specific image TG” is not displayed and a part is left. May be displayed as follows.

  Even in this example, since the “specific image TG” is displayed so that its display position is displaced (in a subsequent manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, When viewed from the player's side, it is possible to make it ambiguous up to which image is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG among the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Become like

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the validity period ends, and the display area of most (half or all) of the display area is left unremoved from the player side. When viewed, when the validity period ends, the display area also appears to be a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a minimum value (not displayed here). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than the actual one, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than the actual one. As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation accepting effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left to end, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Even if the period does not end immediately after the display, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed so as to be reduced, and thereby the non-display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to feel uncomfortable due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. That is, in this case, the “specific image TG” can be expected to function as a buffer that can absorb such a temporal shift.

  In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of the “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same image may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same image as that in the example shown in FIG. 234 may be used. The validity period during which the images of the “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, and the images of the “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” in the mode shown in FIG. May be generated under different conditions. Note that, in this case, the shape of the integrated mimic image IG itself and at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differ between the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 233 appears and the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. It is desirable to be different.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to (e) and FIGS. 234 (a) to (d), the integrated mimic image IG is dynamic during the valid period of the predetermined operation reception effect. It can be displayed, thereby prompting the player to perform an operation. However, as described above, the button simulation image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving portion provided with the operation opportunity is displaced in the movable range. Does not display this dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on the side on which such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( (The predetermined image) GG is changed, so that even in the integrated mimic image IG that is dynamically displayed, it is easy to recognize how much time remains until the validity period ends. Will be able to do it.

  The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

  According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the “specific image TG” has a display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. It is displayed at or near the end of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the end of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Will be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it is unclear how many of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge images (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to

  Further, the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is at the maximum value, and a predetermined time has passed since the operation acceptance was permitted. Until the time elapses (until the entirety of the specific image TG appears), the display area of the “specific image TG” is supplemented by the reduced display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Is to be increased. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time indicated by the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has not decreased during the initial period from the start of the validity period to the elapse of the predetermined time. Since it is possible to give a good image, it is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). However, the display shapes of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” are the same regardless of the case where the image is displayed in any of these modes. Is desirable. Regarding each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG”, they may be changed according to the degree of expectation. In order to maintain the image properly, it is desirable that even if one of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” changes, the other does not change. For example, if the mark given to the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 233 is not a star but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. As the image (GG) is reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) is gradually made visible, so that it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is non-operable even when the operation is not performed by the player and the validity period ends. The display state is maintained without being displayed. However, with regard to the operation reception effects shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, when the timing A4 arrives without an operation by the player, the operation is internally received and the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned “automatic reception effect” in which only sound is output in response to reception. In this case, the timing A4 may be a timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is the timing after the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is hidden (the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, or a timing later than that), and the timing of the “specific image TG”. It is desirable to set the timing to arrive at a state where at least a part is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the operation acceptance is no longer permitted, even before the display after the operation or the sound output after the operation is performed, the “ Since the “specific image TG” is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output have been started in response to the operation by the player being performed in time and the subsequent operation being accepted. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, by a fade-out after the start of the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output). Etc., which are gradually hidden).

  Assuming that the valid period in which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second condition different from the first condition is used. When the condition is satisfied, a second valid period in which automatic reception is not performed can be generated. Also in the second valid period, the button simulation image BMG is displayed as an integrated simulation image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a gauge image (predetermined image). ) GG display target area is included. However, during the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the “specific image TG” Is not displayed. Except that the “specific image TG” is not displayed, the integrated mimic image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated mimic image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image. Can be done.

  That is, unlike the first validity period generated when the first condition is satisfied, when the set time elapses without performing the operation by the player, the second validity period generated when the second condition is satisfied, The second validity period ends in a state where the automatic reception does not function and the display after operation and / or the sound output after operation (or both) are not generated. Therefore, if the display of the “specific image TG” is left at a time when the reception of the operation by the player is no longer permitted, the valid period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. This can lead to misunderstandings as if they had been done, which in turn could reduce the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the “specific image TG” is not displayed over the entire period from the start to the end.

  In this case, it is desirable that the first effective period and the second effective period have different lengths of set time (time from when the operation is accepted to when it is finished). In addition, it is desirable that the display change (display after operation) and the sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when the operation is accepted are different from each other.

  Further, in addition to the first valid period generated when the first condition is satisfied, a third valid period in which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is satisfied), In addition to the second valid period that is generated when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period in which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, the validity period in which the automatic reception is performed (the validity period in which the occurrence conditions are different from each other) includes at least the first validity period in which the processing related to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described manner. It is sufficient that at least the second effective period during which the processing relating to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described manner is included in the effective periods in which the processing is not performed (the effective periods in which the occurrence conditions differ).

Also, the “first validity period” here is
・ It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output only when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period.
-This means that after-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of the effect state, regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the validity period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare “special effect state (automatic reception mode)” or “a plurality of effect states” as effect states. In addition, when the “second validity period” occurs when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, any may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, "automatic reception may not always be activated regardless of the state of production.") This has nothing to do with the configuration relating to the technical features described here.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a non-linear specific shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, an integrated mimic image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the regions forming the integrated mimic image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed. In the non-linear region of the section, a display is performed in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced as time passes. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced with the passage of time becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as an effective period is consumed. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) having the predetermined transmittance in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined transmittance. (Predetermined image) The GG is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed thereon, or the gauge image (predetermined image) The GG itself is given a specific pattern. The decorativeness of the depiction itself, which reduces the display area of the GG, can be improved. Moreover, in this embodiment, the specific pattern is applied so as to straddle the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG can be further improved.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the non-linear display target area having a specific shape shown in FIG. 233 or 234 is referred to as a “first display target area”. At this time, the second display target area having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the non-linear specific shape and having a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts decreasing the display area to when the gauge image GG ends. Can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation accepting effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without operation by the player, and in the case where the operation is performed by the player. In some cases, the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without an operation being performed. On the other hand, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. May be terminated when the first set time elapses without operation by the player, but may be terminated when the second set time elapses without operation by the player. I am trying not to be terminated.

  In this regard, the operation target to which the operation opportunity is given is given by the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target region is displayed. If the (operation receiving unit) is different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. Together with that, it is possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception production with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target region is displayed imitate different operation receiving units. The mimic image is displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. Also for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations in the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target region is displayed. In any case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

  In order to obtain the above-described effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target region of “non-linear specific shape” is different from the case where “a different shape (non-similar shape)” is displayed. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (the first set time) is set, the display after operation or the sound output after operation is “big hit”. It is desirable to make the ratios at which the “mode suggesting that” appears differ. The ratio may be “0%” or “100%”.

  The operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target region is displayed have the same set time (first set time). Sometimes, it is desirable to provide an opportunity to accept an operation regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. At different set times, it is desirable to give an opportunity to receive an operation for a different post-operation display or post-operation sound output.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, an operation-related display such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is displayed so as to be superimposed on the integrated mimic image IG, so that it is combined with the integrated mimic image IG. Therefore, when these are viewed, the situation that should be operated is expressed more strongly. However, in this case, the operation-related display such as “press!” Or “down arrow” may be displayed so as to overlap with the button simulation image BMG (at any timing dynamically displayed) indicating the target to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image TG indicating the remaining time is not displayed overlapping.

  In such a configuration, an operation such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is performed in such a manner as to avoid important information such as the button simulation image BMG, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the specific image TG of the integrated simulation image IG. Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated model image IG, the operation can be strongly encouraged while appropriately transmitting important information to the player. Needless to say, this is because the button simulation image BMG is displayed as an integrated simulation image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation is received within the valid period is set as the valid period in which the operation is permitted. And a plurality (type) of validity periods in which the contents of the sound output after the operation are different. The conditions for generating the valid periods are different from each other, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, a valid period of a type corresponding to the conditions is generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the “specific image TG” is displayed within a plurality of types of validity periods (first validity period). And a case where the “specific image TG” is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period). Hereinafter, in this example, the “first validity period” and the “second validity period” are referred to as the “first validity period” in which the automatic reception is performed and the “second validity period” in which the automatic reception is not performed. The validity period is described as being the same as the validity period, but may be applied as another validity period.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a precursor effect (specific display) indicating that the operation reception is permitted, the pachinko machine 1 (the specific display) receives the precursor effect (specific display). May be executed before and after the generation timing of the allowable valid period. According to such an indication effect (specific display), since a valid period is generated while a fancy effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the valid period occurs. become able to.

  However, when the indication effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the indication effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated mimic image IG. Even if the model image IG is displayed (internal layer display), a portion overlapping with the indication effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (it is not made visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the indication effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated mimic image IG that overlaps the indication effect (specific display) is difficult to visually recognize. In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area in such a situation where visibility is difficult.

  That is, in this case, the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed, or there is no portion overlapping the indication effect (specific display), and the entire integrated mimic image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG) is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced, so that when viewed from the player side, the effective period (set time) You may remember the impression that is actually shorter.

  On the other hand, the "specific image TG" described above can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, “a sign effect (specific display) is not executed or a sign effect (specific display) is executed) among a plurality of types of validity periods. In the second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) has been completed, "from the occurrence of the second effective period to the end thereof" During this period, the "specific image TG" is not displayed at all. On the other hand, among a plurality (types) of validity periods, when a gauge image is generated during the execution of a precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated mimic image IG becomes visible (or easily visible), (Predetermined image) In the "first effective period in which the display area of the GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first effective period.

  According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed in the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the indication effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. The display area of the GG can be made to look as if it has not decreased so much, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second valid period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 233, when the valid period occurs, the "specific image TG" is not displayed, and the valid period occurs. When the appearance of the “specific image TG” gradually appears as time elapses from, it may be noticed that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that the excitement of the length of time remaining is exaggerated and the entertainment interest of the game is reduced. Therefore, the “specific image TG” is displayed in such a second valid period. It is desirable not to do so in order to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in a plurality (type) of validity periods, in addition to the second validity period, “the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed, but the precursor effect (specific display) is performed. ) Is completed, a valid period (fifth valid period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced may be prepared under different generation conditions, or the first valid period may be different. In addition, “the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and by the time the entire integrated mimic image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). Valid period (sixth valid period) ”may be prepared under different occurrence conditions, and at this time, whether or not the“ specific image TG ”is displayed may be appropriately set. Good. In short, the plurality of (kind) valid periods include at least the second valid period in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the first valid period in which the “specific image TG” is displayed. If at least the validity period occurs, the above-described effects will be obtained in relation to the indication effect (specific display).

  In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233. However, at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. It may be executed.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the effect when the first effective period occurs, of the first effective period and the second effective period.

  FIG. 235 (a) shows an effect display device 1600 in which, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed in a variable display in a specific effect pattern (variable pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the state of the production being carried out.

  FIG. 235 (b) shows an effect state in which a precursor effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 235 (a).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (b), it can be seen that at least the effect display device 1600 is in a state where the integrated mimic image IG has not yet appeared. However, after the indication effect (specific display TH) is started, an integrated mimic image IG is internally displayed, and the indication effect (specific indication TH) is displayed preferentially. The entirety of the mimic image IG may not be visually recognized (or may be made difficult to visually recognize by a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation acceptance is permitted (the valid period is started) from the time when the indication effect (specific display) is started.

  FIG. 235 (c) shows that, as a result of the advance effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b) progressing and the region in which the advance effect (specific display TH) is displayed being reduced, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed. A part that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, indicating that the part is displayed with good visibility.

  That is, the integrated mimic image IG is a timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 235 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 235 (b) appears, and is shown in FIG. 235 (c). When the “specific timing (timing at which the valid period starts)”, which is the timing that arrives before the situation to appear, arrives, the display (display on the layer processing) is executed at least internally. It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 235 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) because they overlap with the indication effect (specific display TH) displayed preferentially. It is difficult), but the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the indication effect (specific display TH).

  According to such a configuration, the indication effect (specific display TH) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the occurrence of the effective period is equal to the indication effect. By the (specific display TH), at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized. That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated mimic image IG is gradually exposed within the validity period, the degree of expectation indicated by the mode of the integrated mimic image IG (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button simulation image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), the button simulation image imitating the operation target is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. However, the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the button simulation image is “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. Therefore, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the image is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), since the “specific image TG” is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the type, the “specific image TG” is originally displayed when the validity period is started ( (See FIG. 234) or the type in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the time when the valid period is started (see FIG. 233) so as to make it difficult to distinguish. I have. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, executing the predictive effect in the above-described manner can be said to be particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  FIG. 235 (d) shows that the indication effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is further developed, and as a result, there is no longer a portion overlapping with the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). (Here, the indication effect is hidden).

  As shown in FIG. 235 (d), when the entire integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state of good visibility, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is performed. The area has already been reduced and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a larger display area than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is obtained. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not been reduced so much. Accordingly, it is possible to expect that a decrease in gaming interest due to the already reduced display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the indication effect (specific display TH) is completed.

  FIG. 235 (e) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches a minimum value (here, “0”) and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (just before performing) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (e), at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the validity period ends. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed is performed even if the player does not perform an operation during the period (FIG. 235). (F)).

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which a player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the validity period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the post-operation display is performed. The "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before the sound output is performed after the operation, and the display and the operation after the operation are performed in response to the operation by the player being performed in time and the operation being accepted accordingly. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when a precursor effect (previous display) is performed in such a mode, when the entire image of the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is viewed well, the gauge image (predetermined display) is displayed. The display area of the (image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, it is likely that a situation in which the operation by the player cannot be performed in time is likely to occur. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the “specific image TG” is displayed and displayed after the operation. It can be said that performing the sound output after the operation or the operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that, regarding the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 235, the case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and the case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. May be applied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235, the indication effect (specific display TH) and the integrated mimic image IG are displayed on different layers, and the indication effect (specific display TH) is displayed in priority by appearing in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect development in the mode shown in FIG. 235 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. This method can be applied to each example described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) appears as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mimic image IG may appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). . Then, when such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the precursor effect in the mode shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  FIG. 236 to FIG. 238 are diagrams showing a modification of the effect progress when the first valid period occurs, of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  FIG. 236 (a) shows an effect display device in which, in the normal gaming state, the display of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. 1600 shows an effect state being performed.

  236 (b) shows an effect in which the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 236 (a). Indicates the situation.

  The first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has advanced to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect is performed. It functions as an effect to perform.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first sign effect (the first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), “ One of the "image shown in FIG. 237 (c)" and the "image shown in FIG. 238 (j)" is displayed, whereby the "normal button mimic image BMGa" and "special" Which of the button model images BMGb ”is likely to appear is suggested.

  Here, when the “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “normal button imitation image BMGa” will be displayed as the button imitation image BMG (here, “100%”). It will be suggested that.

  The “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” according to this example is in a mode (translucent here) in which the “integrated model image IGa” is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)). It is displayed as the represented image IGa ′. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)”, the “integrated model image IGa” may be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 232 (a). Alternatively, the “normal button simulation image BMGa” may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. When the “normal button mimic image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) or may be displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (here, translucent) different from the mode described in (1)).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c), it is approximated to a degree reminiscent of the “normal button imitation image BMGa” itself or the “normal button imitation image BMGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a). At least an image BMGa 'having a (simulated) outer shape is displayed. As a result, the “normal button imitation image BMGa” is integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” to be displayed as “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))”, or the “peripheral decoration image SSGa” is displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that an effective period displayed as “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232 (a))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) shown in FIG. 237 (c) is displayed, the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) is not “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. , An effect that suggests (recalls) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 237 (d), “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to“ the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button mimic image BMGa) ”. The image SSGb ′ is rendered as an effect of gradually approaching the image SSGb ′. As a result of performing such an effect, “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to “the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button mimic image BMGa)”. When the image SSGb ′ ”is added and integrated, a valid period in which the“ integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. 232 (c)) ”appears is generated. On the other hand, “image SSGb ′ expressing special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to “image IGa ′ expressing integrated mimic image IGa” (or image BMGa ′ expressing normal button mimic image BMGa). If they are not integrated, an effective period in which the “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears will occur.

  FIG. 237 (e) shows an effect state in which the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d) is performed, and then the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600. I have.

  The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has progressed to the second timing, and suggests that operation reception is allowed. It is performed as a production. The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “an image IGa ′ representing the integrated imitation image IGa (or an image BMGa ′ representing the normal button imitation image BMGa)”. The “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is to be started while gradually approaching. At the time when the “image SSGb ′ is started”, the “image IGa ′ representing the integrated mimic image IGa” ( Alternatively, it is unknown whether or not the image BMGa ′ representing the normal button mock image BMGa) and the image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) progresses, any of the “image shown in FIG. 237 (f)” and the “image shown in FIG. 237 (h)” is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situation and image contents shown in FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)", and FIG. As a result, the area in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, and as a result, the integrated simulated image IG is displayed. , A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, indicating the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

  That is, the integrated mimic image IG has the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 237 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 237 (e) appears, and When the “specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)”, which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 237 (h) appears, at least the internal processing is displayed (display on the layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 237 (f) and FIG. 237 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed with the second indication effect (specific display TH2) which is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the second indication effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated mimic image IG is gradually exposed within the validity period, the degree of expectation indicated by the mode of the integrated mimic image IG (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button simulation image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

  In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. 237 (d) and (e), the result of the effect shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and (e) shows that “the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the normal button mimic image BMGa is expressed). It can be recognized that the image BMGa ′) has failed to associate with the “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237 (g), the integrated mimic image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) The whole picture will appear. The subsequent development progress is as described above with reference to FIGS. 235 (d) to 235 (f), and will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (h) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG must be in a state where it can be recognized that it is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. 237 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d), “the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button mimic image BMGa)” is changed to the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully connected to the image SSGb ′ ”expressing. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237 (i), the integrated mimic image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)) The whole picture will appear. 235 (d) to 235 (d). The subsequent stage of the effect development is only that the integrated mimic image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is replaced with the integrated mimic image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” is displayed, it is highly likely that “the special button imitation image BMGb” is displayed as the button imitation image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” according to this example is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)) of the “integrated model image IGb” (here, translucent). It is displayed as the represented image IGb ′. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)”, the “integrated mimic image IGb” may be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 232 (b). Alternatively, the "special button simulation image BMGb" may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". When the “special button mimic image BMGb” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in a normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)) or in a normal mode (FIG. 232 (b)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (here, translucent) different from the mode described in (1)).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238 (j), it is approximated to the extent that the “special button mimic image BMGb” itself or the “special button mimic image BMGb” illustrated in FIG. 232 (b) is recalled. At least an image BMGb 'having a (simulated) outer shape is displayed. As a result, the validity period in which the “special button mimic image BMGb” is displayed as “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” integrated with the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” or “special peripheral decorative image SSMG” This makes it possible to indicate that an effective period displayed as “integrated model image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) shown in FIG. 238 (j) is displayed, the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) is not “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))”. , An effect that suggests (recalls) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated model image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 237 (k), “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. The image SSGb ′ is rendered as an effect of gradually approaching the image SSGb ′. As a result of performing such an effect, “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. When the image SSGb ′ ”is added and integrated, a valid period in which the“ integrated mimic image IGd (FIG. 232 (d)) ”appears is generated. On the other hand, “the image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. If they are not integrated, a valid period in which the “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” appears will occur.

  FIG. 238 (l) shows an effect state in which, after the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k) is performed, the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600. I have. Instead of the second symptom effect (second specific display TH2), a third symptom effect (third specific display) different from this may be executed.

  As described above, the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) has advanced to the second timing, and operation reception is allowed. It is performed as an effect that suggests that. The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “an image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or an image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. The “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is to be started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the “image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb ( Alternatively, it is unknown whether the image BMGb ′) expressing the special button simulation image BMGb) and the image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 238 (l) progresses, any of the “image shown in FIG. 238 (m)” and the “image shown in FIG. 238 (o)” is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 238 (m) and 238 (o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)". As a result, the area in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, and as a result, the integrated simulated image IG is displayed. , A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, indicating the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

  That is, the integrated mimic image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 238 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 238 (l) appears, and When the "specific timing (timing at which the valid period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 238 (o) appears, at least the internal processing is displayed (display on the layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the point shown in FIG. 238 (m) or FIG. 238 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed with the second indication effect (specific display TH2) which is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the second indication effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated mimic image IG is gradually exposed within the validity period, the degree of expectation indicated by the mode of the integrated mimic image IG (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button simulation image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

  In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. 238 (k) and (l), the result of the effect shown in FIGS. 238 (k) and (l) is that “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the special button mimic image BMGb is expressed). It can be recognized that the image BMGb ′) has failed to associate with the “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238 (n), the integrated mimic image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)) The whole picture will appear. 235 (d) to 225 (d). The subsequent stage of the effect has only changed from the integrated mimic image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) to the integrated mimic image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (o) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG must be in a state where it can be recognized that it is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k), “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)” is changed to “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully connected to the image SSGb ′ ”expressing. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238 (p), the integrated mimic image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)) The whole picture will appear. 235 (d) to 225 (d), since the integrated development image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is merely replaced by the integrated mimic image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it is omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, when FIG. 237 (c) appears, the probability that the “special button mimic image BMGb” appears as the button mimic image BMG is set to “0%”. The probability that the “special button mimic image BMGb” appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 237 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 238 (m) → (n), ( There is also a possibility that the production progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

  According to such a configuration, when FIGS. 237 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and (o) appear, the manner in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed is not determined. Although it is recognizable, it is not possible to recognize in which mode the button simulation image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is indicated in stages according to the situation related to the progress of the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2), and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. . In particular, when the button simulation image BMG can indicate any of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the validity period has been started and the degree of expectation related to the operation is also indicated. Despite the situation, a state occurs in which the operation target cannot be recognized, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be significantly improved.

  However, even in the situation in which FIGS. 237 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and (o) appear, the operation means (operation receiving section) which is the operation target of the player has a button. It is desirable to emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the model image BMG (for example, to emit light when a valid period occurs). According to such a configuration, a person who has a strong desire to directly operate the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the “type displayed as the button model image BMG”. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 236 (a) may be shifted to the state shown in FIGS. 237 (c) and 238 (j).

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIGS. 237 (g) and (i) and FIGS. 238 (n) and (p). Good. That is, in this case, the effects shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k) function as precursor effects. At the time of the transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be already reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not be reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transfer, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 237 (d) or 238 (k). The (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area.

  236 to 238 may be omitted according to the mode prepared as the integrated mimic image IG. For example, when the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and (d) are not prepared as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 238. In this case, FIG. 237 (c) may be omitted.

  Note that in the effects of FIGS. 236 to 238, an image BMG ′ expressing the button simulation image BMG (or the button simulation image BMG itself) before the operation reception is permitted (before the validity period occurs). (Good) is displayed (FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k)), but in this situation (before the effective period occurs), an image BMG ′ (or a button mimic image BMG) expressing the button mimic image BMG is displayed. Is not dynamically displayed in such a manner that the image is displaced in the movable range of the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, even if the button simulation image BMG and the image BMG 'expressing the button simulation image are displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. Can be suggested implicitly, so that the player can concentrate on the effect without worrying about the remaining time of the validity period. Note that, when the second sign effect (the second specific display TH2) is being performed, the effect reception is permitted, and therefore, the second sign effect (the second specific display TH2) cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to see. In this case, the dynamic display of the button simulation image BMG is performed.

  FIG. 239 to FIG. 243 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  That is, in FIGS. 235 to 238, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed. As for the case, an example related to the production progress has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 239 to 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. In the case where a valid period (second valid period) occurs without being performed, an example relating to the progress of the effect is described.

  The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined sign effect (sign indication) when an effective period in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. However, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment can execute the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized” within the validity period. In order to make the feature stand out when performing the effect, a predetermined sign effect (sign display) itself is not performed when the valid period is generated, or even if a predetermined sign effect (sign display) is performed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG At the point in time when the entire display target area has been made visually recognizable, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and has a maximum value.

  Here, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238 and the like), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the validity period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), “the operation is not performed within the validity period, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. In spite of the above, when the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. First display mode ". According to such a configuration, even in a situation in which a large amount of time appears to be left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Since the user is conscious of the possibility that the validity period is suddenly terminated, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the validity period.

  In addition, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238 and the like), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced every unit time within the effective period. However, a “second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even within the valid period” can be cited. According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is only a little time remaining until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player can use the gauge. The user is conscious of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  That is, in the example described below, the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is described using at least one of the “first display mode” and the “second display mode”. 9 shows a display example in the case of executing.

  First, FIG. 239 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is effected in the second effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the state of the effect being performed on the display device 1600.

  FIG. 239 (b) shows that during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 239 (a), a valid period during which the operation means (operation receiving unit) is allowed to accept an operation is generated. Shows an effect state in which the integrated model image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), at the time when the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced. .

  When the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is “ The period (set time) set for the effective period (first effective period) in which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is not executed is set. In other words, if an attempt is made to execute a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized during the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the first valid period during which the “display mode having a characteristic in the movement of the gauge image GG” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG” Despite the fact that the set time until the end of the effective period is different between the second effective period in which the “display mode with the feature is performed” and the second effective period, whether the integrated mimic image IG itself is the same, The images are displayed in a similar relationship (in this example, the integrated mimic image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”. It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed. However, when a situation where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the time for the time when the situation is not reduced is displayed. Is added, it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

  When the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (b) occurs, a precursor effect indicating the occurrence may be performed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG at the time when the entire integrated image IG (at least the “display area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated image IG”) is displayed without overlapping the indication effect. Is at its maximum value and needs to be in a situation that has not yet been reduced.

  That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the valid period) in which operation reception relating to predetermined post-operation display or predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted. When the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (c) appears after a predetermined time has elapsed from the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (b), the gauge image GG is displayed. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) is reduced, and the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is started.

  Such a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is, as shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and (d), to be continued for a predetermined time after the generation of the period. Has become. However, even in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the operation reception is maintained in a permissible state, and when an operation is performed on the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, the valid period is set. Is terminated, and the integrated simulated image IG is not displayed accordingly, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 239 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, since “a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” appears within the valid period, it is compared with a case where the display area of the gauge image GG is continuously reduced at a constant speed. Thus, it is possible to indicate that the remaining time until the expiration of the validity period is sufficient.

  Further, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an allowable state, so that an image as if the validity period has been extended can be provided. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest when the valid period is generated is improved.

  In addition, in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 239 (c) and (d), in the “period where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed until then is not displayed or is difficult to visually recognize. In this state, the user is urged to pay attention to the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”.

  However, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, a misunderstanding that a so-called “freeze effect” occurs, in which an image in the display screen suddenly becomes a still state, may be given to the player. In other words, the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no response is shown for a predetermined time and the state cannot be canceled, so that it is erroneously recognized that the operation acceptance is no longer permitted. This may cause the player to lose his / her motivation to operate the game, which may cause a decrease in the interest in the game. In particular, in this example, the decorative symbol SZ is set to a non-display state or a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern SZ, and this may also promote erroneous recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the integrated mimic image IG itself is not in a stationary state, but is integrated. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary while the button mimic image BMG included in the integrated mimic image IG is dynamically displayed (displacement in the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. Display) is continued.

  According to such a configuration, a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears while the dynamic display of the button simulation image BMG is continued, so that operation acceptance is no longer permitted ( It is possible to suppress the possibility of being erroneously recognized as “freeze effect has occurred”, and it is expected that the player's willingness to operate is appropriately maintained.

  Here, the dynamic display using the button simulation image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (such as an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving unit) is repeated. In this regard, in the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. Until the time ends, the predetermined operation by the button simulation image BMG is performed as a display that is repeated n times. On the other hand, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. During the valid period (the second valid period shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the display time is set to “the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. It is desirable that the display can be executed as a display in which the predetermined operation using the button simulation image BMG is repeated m (> n) times only within the “period not performed”.

  According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG decreases for a longer time than the first valid period shown in FIGS. Since the state that is not being maintained will continue, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate it Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately. Note that the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first effective period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the like. If there is a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output), the time set for the validity period (set time) is longer than the longest one. It is desirable that the number of times of the predetermined operation by the button simulation image BMG be larger in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” among the second valid periods shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 and the like. .

  As described above, at the time when such a second validity period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set to a predetermined maximum value. This is displayed (FIG. 239 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 234, if the specific image TG is displayed in a state in which the specific image TG is well-viewed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, the amount of the specific image TG displayed However, it may seem that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 233, when the specific image TG may appear in a visually recognizable state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may be displayed. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the excitement of gaming interest due to exaggeration of the length of the remaining time as the validity period is concerned.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG starts to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 239 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG in a state where the specific image TG is not displayed. Is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined time (FIGS. 239 (c) and (d)).

  In this example, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends without an operation being accepted by the operation of the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize it. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG becomes a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 239 (e)), the time set for the second validity period (set time) increases. As a result, the second validity period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is “0”, that is, when the gauge image GG is not displayed (FIG. 239 (e)), the time set for the second validity period (set time) increases. Then, the second validity period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)).

  As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 239 (f)), the same operation as when the operation is received within the second valid period is performed. The rear display and the post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect is performed), and this point also differs from the first validity period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and operation reception is also permitted during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG becomes a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be made in time itself is hard to occur. .

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 239, the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is usually (see FIGS. 233 to 238), and the gauge image GG is predetermined in the valid period. The case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed and the “second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the validity period” has been described. However, as described above, the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238 and the like), and the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the validity period ends, and the message “No operation is performed within the validity period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. Nevertheless, when the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. May be further applied. When such a method is adopted, it is preferable to execute the method in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 240 and 241 or in the modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243 in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. More desirable.

  FIG. 240 and FIG. 241 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  The situations shown in FIGS. 240 (a) to (d) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 239 (a) to (d) and other examples. Therefore, also in this example, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs in the middle of the second valid period, and the period including the period is included in the second valid period. When the operation is received in, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)).

  However, in this example, even if the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is ended without the operation being accepted by the operation of the player, the gauge image GG reduces its display area again. It will not be displayed. In this example, the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” continues until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (a predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 240 (d) and 241 (e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize it.

  As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 241 (e)), the operation is received within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at the time of execution (automatic reception effect function) is not performed. However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, the reception is allowed.

  However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second effective period is set in a state where the display area of the predetermined value is left. Since the game is terminated, the player may not be able to perform the operation even though the player intends to perform the operation, and the second validity period may end. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period ends without an operation performed by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or not reaching 10 seconds before the symbol stops) is satisfied. During this period, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity has been given within the second validity period. When the operation is accepted, the second valid period can be generated again based on the operation. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the second validity period is generated from the end of the second validity period. It can be said that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without the operation by the player, the operation of FIG. ), An operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output can be generated. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (e), when an operation is performed on the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) by the player, the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 241 (f)). Thereafter, the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) to (d), and FIGS. 241 (e) and (g) are repeated again. Therefore, even when an operation is received within the second valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)). ).

  When the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 241 (e), the image shown in FIG. 241 (f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 240 (b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the reception of the operation during the second valid period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIG. 241 (f)). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 241 (e) is the same as the second effective period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIG. 241 (f), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation.

  FIG. 242 and FIG. 243 are diagrams illustrating a modification of the effect progress when the second valid period is generated out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  The situation shown in FIG. 242 (a) is the same as the content described above with reference to FIG. 239 (a) or FIG. 240 (a) or another example thereof. However, in this example, during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 242 (a), if the integrated valid image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the second valid period occurs. A “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is generated for a predetermined time from the time when the integrated model image IG is displayed (FIGS. 242 (b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG sets the display area to the maximum value. It will be maintained as it is.

  It is to be noted that operation reception is permitted even during a period in which the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and a period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, such as the execution of the back sound output, are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 239 to 241 and other examples thereof. .

  Also in this example, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 240 and 241, “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases until the time (set time) set for the second validity period elapses. A period that is not performed ”is continued. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains (the maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 242 (c) and 243 (d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize it.

  As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 243 (d)), the operation is received within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at the time of execution (automatic reception effect function) is not performed. However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is also performed during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, the reception is allowed.

  However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second effective period remains in a state where the display area for the maximum value remains. Is terminated, the player may not be able to perform the operation even though the player intends to perform the operation, and the second validity period may end. There is a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second validity period ends without an operation performed by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or not reaching 10 seconds before the symbol stops) is satisfied. While not being performed, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity has been given within the second validity period. Is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on the operation. In this sense, it can be said that when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the second validity period is generated.

  According to such a configuration, even when the second effective period ends as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without the operation by the player, the operation of FIG. ), An operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output can be generated. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 243 (d), when the player performs an operation on the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 243 (e)). Thereafter, the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 242 (b) and (c), and FIGS. 243 (d) and (f) are repeated again. Therefore, even when an operation is received within the second validity period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 243 (f)). ).

  However, in this example, even when the second valid period re-occurs, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs from the point of time when the second valid period re-occurs. In the situation shown in (1), the decorative symbol SZ is hidden or is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  That is, the “image shown in FIG. 243 (e)” that appears as a post-operation display when an operation is received during the special validity period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is the “image shown in FIG. 242 (b)”. Is the same as Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 243 (f)) which is executed based on the reception of the operation during the second valid period (FIG. 242 (b), (c), FIG. 243 (d), etc.). )) Are different in image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is the same as the second effective period (FIGS. 242 (b) and (c) and FIG. 243 (d)), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243 (f)) executed based on the reception of the operation.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second valid period functions as a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

  In the situation (special validity period) shown in FIGS. 241 (e) and 243 (d), an integrated model image IG may be displayed as in the second validity period. However, the second validity period and the special validity period are set so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation have different validity periods (second validity period and special validity period). It is desirable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated model image IG be different from the valid period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated mimic image IG in the mode corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated mimic image IG in the mode corresponding to the special validity period is newly displayed. Will be displayed. When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the special validity period, a “period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced” may be generated within the validity period, or “a period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced”. May not be generated.

  The “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 can be executed when the integrated model image IGa of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed. Therefore, it is desirable that the processing is not executed when the integrated simulated images IGb to IGd of the integrated simulated images IGa to IGd are displayed. In other words, the integrated mimic image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation, but when the integrated mimic image IGa is displayed, the “movement of the gauge image GG” shown in FIGS. Since there is a possibility that a “display mode with features” may appear, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243, when the operation-related image (such as the integrated mimic image IG) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, the player Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of a predetermined set period (second effective period) elapses without operation being performed, an operation reception occurs and a display change (or , Post-operation sound output). More specifically, even when a predetermined set period (second effective period) has expired, if the operation receiving unit (operating means) that has been prompted to operate by the integrated mimic image IG is operated. A predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, and operation reception is allowed in the regenerated predetermined period (second valid period) (FIG. 241 (e) and (f), and FIGS. 243 (d) and (e). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) ends without understanding the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”. Since the predetermined set period (the second valid period) can be regenerated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  On the other hand, in a predetermined setting period (first effective period) in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is not displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, the operation is not accepted. After the predetermined setting period (first valid period) ends without being performed, even if the operation receiving unit (operation means) which has been prompted by the integrated mimic image IG is operated, the predetermined setting period The (second validity period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 235 to 238).

  Note that, for a predetermined set period (second effective period) in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, the symbol variation is not necessarily required. May not be generated during the execution period. For example, a period during which the RTC function is used regardless of the presence or absence of a symbol change may be used, or a period during which a symbol change is not performed, such as during a jackpot game execution period or a period before a jackpot game is started. ).

  Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) than in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, the integrated mimic image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated mimic image IG is integrated). The model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar relationship, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button model image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is set. Are expected to look the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”. It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed. However, when a situation where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the time for the time when the situation is not reduced is displayed. Is added, it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

  When displaying the integrated mimic image IG in a similar relationship between the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238) and the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the "gauge image" It is desirable that an integrated mimic image IG smaller than the first validity period be displayed in the second validity period in which the “display mode having a characteristic of the movement of the GG” appears.

  Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) becomes a specific value (here, “ 0 "), but in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It ends in the state where it has. In other words, if the time (set time) set for the effective period is long, the tension during the effective period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, “ By giving the possibility that the validity period may end even if the value does not become "0"), it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the case where the integrated mimic image IG is displayed such that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the indication effect is being performed (first effective period), When the effect is not performed, or when the precursor effect is performed, at least during the time when the precursor effect is performed, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (second validity). The image displayed in the display target region of the gauge image GG differs between the periods. In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. “The indication effect is performed, but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the indication effect is being performed,” as illustrated in FIGS. 242 and 243. This includes a case where the display area of the GG is not reduced.

  In this regard, according to the above-described example, in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time has elapsed without performing any operation. In the second valid period (FIGS. 240 to 243), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display) is displayed in a state where no operation is performed and the set time elapses. (Target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period appear longer by the amount of the specific image TG displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period, By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the validity period, it is possible to make the validity period end earlier than expected by the player and maintain a sense of tension. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in the second valid period, a large display area (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value) of the gauge image GG (display target region) is left at the end of the valid period. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced for each unit time during the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, an aspect in which the display area is not reduced in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the nervous feeling is appropriately maintained.

  According to the above-described example, the button simulation image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving unit is displaced in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first valid period, whereas the gauge image GG is different from the first mode in the second valid period. The image is displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the example described above, the button simulation image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated simulation image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG). When the button model image BMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is in a reduced state and when the gauge image GG is in a non-decreasing state. There is to be. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, it is preferable that the button mimic image BMG is dynamically displayed and operation acceptance is permitted as the integrated mimic image IG. Be able to suggest.

  According to the above-described example, only when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed among the normal button imitation image BMGa and the special button imitation image BMGb, “the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized. "Display mode provided" can be displayed. In addition, when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display mode with a characteristic feature” may be displayed, as well as the “gauge image (predetermined image) ) A display mode in which the characteristic of the movement of the GG is not displayed ", and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a mode (normal mode) that also appears when the special button mimic image BMGb is displayed. I did it. Therefore, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest when the normal button imitation image BMGa having a lower degree of expectation than the special button imitation image BMGb is displayed is suppressed.

  In particular, in the second valid period shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. , Only one mode is displayed. That is, in this case, although the remaining time suggestion function and the expectation degree suggestion function by the gauge image GG itself have been lost and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG. Is formed, the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in a manner that the area does not change) in the integrated mimic image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period does not function as an image suggesting the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a simple decoration image in the integrated mimic image IG. Therefore, the function can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first valid period, and the variety of expression as the gauge image GG enhances the interest in gaming. Will be expected.

  Note that the first valid period and the second valid period may be different if their occurrence conditions are different from each other. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol fluctuation period. In addition, the first valid period means a period during which operation reception regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is allowed, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means a period during which operation acceptance for a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display or a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each of those periods. The reaction (display change, sound output) that appears when the operation is received is different from each other.

As for the integrated model image IG,
-After the indication effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is changed every unit time since the indication effect in the display state and the "integrated mimic image IG" are in an overlapping state. Reduced aspects (FIGS. 235 to 238);
The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the “integrated mimic image IG” overlap each other even if the precursor effect is displayed. Aspects (FIGS. 239 to 243)
And there was. According to such a configuration, as a result of the indication effect being performed, whether the display area has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured or not, whether the indication effect has been performed or not. The case where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is made visually recognizable occurs, and it is possible to provide the fun by the directing effect using the visibility of the gauge image GG. Will be able to do it.

  In particular, when the aspect (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is made visible regardless of whether or not the precursor effect has been performed. As long as the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even within the valid period can further appear, the gaze of the gauge image GG can be further enhanced.

  Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the “integrated model image IG” overlap each other even if the precursor effect is displayed. In the case where a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), a case where the display area in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears (FIGS. 239 to 243). A display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is the second condition, a display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The condition for the occurrence of the specific valid period in which the mode does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

  In the above-described example, during the period in which the button simulation image BMG is displayed, there are cases where a display for reducing the display area of the gauge image GG with time elapses and a case where the display is not performed. did. When the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may not be displayed during the valid period. Nevertheless, for the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first effective period in which the display area is reduced in accordance with the passage of time but also the second effective area in which the display area is not reduced in accordance with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the validity period, it is expected that it is possible to appropriately indicate that the effect reception is in a permitted state.

  In the above-described example, the time (set time) set with respect to the valid period (second valid period) elapses without displaying the display area decreasing with the passage of time by the gauge image GG. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function is not activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is activated in some cases, the sense of tension due to the fact that the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image GG may be completely lost. Regarding (2), it is desirable not to enable the automatic reception function (in any effect mode). On the other hand, it is preferable that the automatic reception function be enabled (in any effect mode) for the first valid period described above.

  In addition, when the display method that exclusively displays the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is employed by displaying the button mimic image BMG and the gauge GG separately, a method that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is employed. Then, the user feels a great sense of incompatibility with the fact that the remaining time suggesting function is not exhibited despite the gauge image GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button simulation image BMG is configured to be displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern can be seen on the back side, or the gauge image GG itself has a plurality of colors. Since this itself has decorativeness in the integrated model image IG, it can be expected to suppress a sense of incongruity when a situation in which the remaining time indicating function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited appears. become.

  By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, prior to the occurrence of the first validity period, the “button mimic image BMG” has a low expectation mode (normal button mimic image BMGa) and a high expectation mode. (Special button-simulated image BMGb), and the “peripheral decoration image SSG” as a low-expectation mode (normal peripheral decoration image SSGa) and a high-expectation mode (special peripheral decoration image SSG) SSGb) is produced in a staged manner with respect to which one appears. However, such rendition can be made to appear by the method described below.

  FIG. 244 is a view for explaining a modification of the effect in which the degree of expectation concerning the integrated mimic image IG is suggested in a stepwise manner.

  First, FIG. 244 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is effected in the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the state of the effect being performed on the display device 1600.

  FIG. 244 (b) shows that during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 244 (a), a valid period in which operation acceptance to the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 displays This shows an effect state in which the button simulation image BMG is displayed.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button imitation image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the “peripheral decoration image SGG”, but is displayed only by itself. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button imitation image BMG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (normal button imitation image BMGa) or a high expectation mode (special button imitation image BMGb). In the figure, a case where a highly expected mode (special button simulation image BMGb) appears is shown. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  FIG. 244 (c) shows an effect state in which the special button simulation image BMGb shown in FIG. 244 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  However, the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) may not always be performed. For example, the button imitation image BMG (normal button imitation image BMGa, special button imitation image BMGb) shown in FIG. 244 (b) is valid (first valid period) without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. ) Is produced, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. A period (first valid period) occurs, or the valid period (first valid period) occurs without the effect of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. It will be able to provide fun about what to do. If an effective period (first effective period) occurs without being an integrated mimic image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image different from the button mimic image BMG, and for example, a bar-like (linear) ), The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

  In addition, when the validity period occurs after the button mimic image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected that the button mimic image BMG is stopped with a big hit symbol than when the validity period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable that the degree (ratio) be high. 244 (c) when the special button simulation image BMGb is displayed in the situation illustrated in FIG. 244 (b) than when the normal button simulation image BMGa is displayed in the situation illustrated in FIG. 244 (b). It is desirable to increase the ratio of being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG by progressing to the situation shown in FIG. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c), the button simulation image BMG includes a peripheral decoration image having a low degree of expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image having a high degree of expectation (special peripheral decoration). The image BMGb) is provided with the effect of being integrated with the image BMGb). In the figure, a case where a highly expected mode (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. . Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  Note that, for convenience of description, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example is different from the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) in image type. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for accommodating the button simulation image BMG. In the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, a heart-shaped pattern (illustration omitted) is applied. On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a check pattern is provided. Then, “the area from the upper right to the lower left” of the areas where the patterns are applied is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

  The image shown in FIG. 244 (c) functions as an image (integrated mimic image) IGd in which the special button mimic image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated. 232 (d).

  FIG. 244 (d) shows an effect state in which the first additional decoration HS1 has been added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (c).

  However, it is not always necessary to make the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d). For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated model image IG (the integrated model images IGa to IGd) illustrated in FIG. 244 (c). 244 is prepared, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. A period (first valid period) occurs, or a valid period (first valid period) without the effect of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 being added. Can be provided as to whether or not the problem occurs.

  When a valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the big hit symbol is higher than in the case. 244 (b) when the special button imitation image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). 244 (d) as compared to the case where the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 24 and the case where the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the rate at which the first additional decoration HS1 is added is increased. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 provides a staging effect as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may make it.

  FIG. 244 (e) shows an effect state in which the second additional decoration HS2 has been added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (d).

  However, the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) may not always be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated model image IG (the integrated model images IGa to IGd) illustrated in FIG. 244 (d). 244 is generated, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. A period (first valid period) occurs, or a valid period (first valid period) without the effect of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) and the second additional decoration HS2 being added. Can be provided as to whether or not the problem occurs.

  When a valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 added to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the big hit symbol is higher than in the case. 244 (b) when the special button imitation image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). 244 (e), as compared with the case where the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 24 and the case where the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). It is desirable that the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added is increased. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides a staging effect as to whether the second additional decoration HS2 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may make it.

  FIG. 244 (f) shows an effect state in which a valid period (first valid period) has occurred while the integrated mimic image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (e) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (f), when a valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as "press" or "down arrow" is displayed. In addition, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation is accepted even by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. Note that the specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from those shown in the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) for convenience of description, but is basically the same. It is displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example is intended to depict a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the “end portion of the gauge image GG” that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. Will be done.

  Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 233 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the effective period but is displayed gradually as time elapses). Alternatively, the information may be displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 234 (a method in which the entirety is displayed when the valid period starts).

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (a snail character) or a mode with a high expectation (a frog character), which is not shown. It provides a directing effect as to whether it is performed or not, and the figure illustrates a case where an aspect with high expectation appears. The specific image TG is displayed with a higher expectation when the valid period occurs in the situation illustrated in FIG. 244 (d) than when the valid period occurs in the situation illustrated in FIG. 244 (c). The ratio is high, and the degree of expectation is higher when the valid period occurs in the situation illustrated in FIG. 244 (e) than when the valid period occurs in the situation illustrated in FIG. 244 (d). It is desirable that the ratio at which the specific image TG is displayed is increased. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide directivity as to how much progress can be made to an aspect with high expectation as an operation-related image before the validity period occurs. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest in the operation in a state where the valid period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (the button simulation image BMG, the peripheral decoration image SGG, and the additional decorations HS1 and HS2) indicate the degree of expectation before the expiration of the expiration period, after the expiration period occurs, Since the expected degree is further suggested by another image (specific image TG), it is possible to appropriately improve the interest in the period from before the valid period occurs to after the valid period occurs. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, the timing of whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 244 (b) to FIG. 244 (c), and the effect of the effect progress from FIG. 244 (c) to FIG. 244 (d). 244 (d) and the timing of whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 244 (d) to FIG. 244 (e), etc., the operation-related images (button imitation image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) The display may be temporarily hidden. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related images (button simulation images, peripheral decoration images, additional decorations, etc.) are displayed again, it is necessary to provide the fun of whether the effect has progressed or the validity period has occurred. Will be able to

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, at the stage before the occurrence of the valid period, the button simulation image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, and the like are displayed in the same manner as during the valid period. (Flashing or translucent).

  In the example shown in FIG. 244, it is desirable that the time required to indicate the expected degree stepwise by the operation-related image before the generation of the validity period is longer than the set time for the validity period. .

  By the way, the sword decoration body 5001 according to this embodiment includes a “handle 5012” that can operate (up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020 and a “handle” that can operate (up and down) with the handle 5012. As described above, two operation receiving portions including the button 5014 "are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a valid period (operation accepting effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012 is generated, the valid period (operation In the reception effect), both a “pattern simulation image TMG” simulating the design part 5012 and a “button simulation image BMG” simulating the design button 5014 are displayed. In the valid period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, operation reception for the pattern button 5014 is not allowed, and the effective period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 is not allowed. In), operation reception for the pattern portion 5012 is not permitted.

  In such a configuration, when an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012 occurs, whether operation reception for the pattern portion 5012 is permitted or operation reception for the pattern button 5014 is allowed. Can be hardly recognized as being allowed. That is, when an operation is received during the valid period during which an operation opportunity is provided to the pattern portion 5012, the operation after the operation is performed, compared to when an operation is received during the valid period during which the operation opportunity is provided to the pattern button 5014. The rate of appearance of a mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as a display (or a mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as the post-operation sound output) is high. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether operation reception for the pattern portion 5012 or operation reception for the pattern button 5014 is permitted, and operation reception for the pattern portion 5012 is permitted. Is recognized by the player, the operation on the pattern portion 5012 is performed in an uplifting sensation, and the interest in the game can be significantly improved.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether operation reception for the pattern portion 5012 is permitted or operation reception for the pattern button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the validity period (operation accepting effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the light of the handle 5012 (the light emitting unit of the handle) is emitted. The pattern button 5014 on the side to which no operation opportunity is given (the light-emitting portion of the button) is caused to emit light. That is, in this case, during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which both the “pattern simulation image TMG” simulating the design part 5012 and the “button simulation image BMG” simulating the design button 5014 are displayed, the design part 5012 is displayed. Even if the user directly looks at the design button 5014, it is difficult to recognize which of the design portion 5012 and the design button 5014 is given an operation opportunity. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the operation acceptance for the pattern portion 5012 is permitted, so that the operation for the pattern portion 5012 is performed in a sense of elation. Can be significantly improved.

  That is, in the effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 are directly viewed or the effect display device 1600 is slightly looked at. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5012 or the operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014. For at least a person who plays the pachinko 1 for the first time (beginner) or a person who is not familiar with complicated production specifications (such as an elderly person), an operation opportunity is given to any of the design part 5012 and the design button 5014. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “effective period in which it is difficult to recognize which of the design portion 5012 and the design button 5014 is given the operation opportunity” is generated, It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the design portion 5012 and the design button 5014 is given an operation opportunity within its validity period, but it can be recognized if a certain amount of time is required. Thus, the button simulation image BMG and the pattern simulation image TMG are displayed.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during a valid period (operation accepting effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, a “pattern simulation image TMG” simulating the pattern portion 5012 and a pattern button 5014 Both the button simulation image BMG and the button simulation image BMG are displayed. Of these simulation images, the “pattern simulation image TMG” on the side where operation acceptance is permitted is dynamically displayed. The "button simulation image BMG" on the side where is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. Here, the “dynamic display” refers to, for example, a display that depicts a state in which the operation receiving section is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle section 5012, an operation (up and down movement) with respect to the sheath section 5020). The pattern button 5014 corresponds to a drawn display (corresponding to a display depicting an operation (up and down movement) with respect to the pattern portion 5012).

  Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantaneously recognize which of the design portion 5012 and the design button 5014 is given an operation opportunity within the validity period. However, when a predetermined time that can be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image) elapses, the behavior at the time of operation appears on the pattern simulation image TMG as a dynamic display, but the behavior at the time of operation appears on the button simulation image BMG. Can be noticed that does not appear as a dynamic display, so that it is possible to recognize which of the design portion 5012 and the design button 5014 is given an operation opportunity. When the player recognizes that the operation reception unit (the pattern unit 5012) on the side with a high degree of expectation is permitted to receive an operation, the player performs an operation on the pattern unit 5012 in a sense of elation. It becomes possible to remarkably improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “pattern simulation image TMG” and the “button simulation image BMG” are displayed during the valid period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the design part 5012. In addition, by displaying these mock-up images as “integrated mock-up images” integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates their margins, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs. I try to plan. The functions and modified examples of such an integrated mimic image are basically as described above. For example, the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 to 244 may be displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern model image TMG” in addition to the “button model image BMG”. Good.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “button simulation image BMG” and the “pattern simulation image TMG” are displayed as a “composite simulation image HMG” that simulates at least a part of the sword decoration 5001. In this way, the “composite mimic image HMG” is displayed as an “integrated mimic image IG” integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of the “integrated mimic image IG” displayed when an operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs on the pattern portion 5012.

  As shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, the “pattern simulation image TMG” that simulates the pattern portion 5012 is changed to the “composite simulation image HMG” integrated with the “button simulation image BMG”, and then the “composite simulation image HMG” is created. The image HMG "is displayed as integrated model images IGe to IGh integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. In the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), “pattern simulation image TMG”, “button simulation image BMG”, and “peripheral decoration image SSG” are not individually prepared as image data. It is displayed as one integrated image data (integrated model images IGe to IGh). Further, when the integrated mimic images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation promotion displays such as “push-in” and “lower left arrow” are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “relatively performed post-operation effect that is executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012 is“ relatively ”. A plurality of production modes including a “first production mode with a low degree of expectation” and a “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” are prepared, and these productions are performed based on the results of the jackpot determination (production determination). Any of the aspects is to be performed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d),
In the specific operation reception effect (effective period), the state shown in FIG. 245 (b) (integrated mimic image IGf) is higher than the state shown in FIG. 245 (a) (integrated mimic image IGe) appears. Has appeared as a post-operation effect, so that the appearance ratio of the "second effect mode with relatively high expectation" is higher,
In the specific operation reception effect (valid period), the state shown in FIG. 245 (c) (integrated mimic image IGg) is higher than the state shown in FIG. 245 (b) (integrated mimic image IGf) appears. Has appeared as a post-operation effect, so that the appearance ratio of the "second effect mode with relatively high expectation" is higher,
245 (d) as shown in FIG. 245 (d) than in the specific operation reception effect (valid period) shown in FIG. 245 (c). Is based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination) so that the relationship where the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation production when the appears One of the model images IGe to IGf is displayed.

  It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated model images IGe to IGh. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period only by preparing at least two modes. In addition, different modes from the above four modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (a sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (a handle portion 5012) displaced by an operation by a player and a peripheral decoration portion (a sheath portion 5020 or the like) provided on the periphery thereof;
-Integrated display in which a mimic image (pattern mimic image TMG) imitating the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) is displayed as integrated mime images IGe to IGh integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the mimic image. Image display means,
An operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (effect after operation) when an operation is performed by the player when the integrated mimic image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (the handle portion 5012); And the integrated mimic image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated mimic images IGe to IGh).

  The details of the “integrated mimic image” shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d) will be described separately for each aspect (integrated mimic images IGe to IGh).

  First, the “integrated model image IGe” shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a pattern model image TMGe, a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe that decorates the periphery. It is configured. However, in the case of the “integrated simulation image IGe”, the pattern simulation image TMGe and the button simulation image BMGe (the composite simulation image HMGe) are “images of the pattern portion 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given” and “ While the image simulating the pattern button 5014 to which the operation opportunity is not given is displayed as an integrated image, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is a target to which an operation opportunity is given. It does not simulate a peripheral decoration portion (such as a sheath 5020) actually provided on the periphery of the pattern portion 5012. In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe according to this example, a part of the periphery decoration portion (such as the sheath 5020) is simulated. Most of the image SSGe includes a pattern simulation image TMGe (composite simulation image HMGe) as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. It has become a thing to decorate the edge.

  In the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 245 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a treasure chest containing several treasures including a pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe). As described above, these “treasures” and “treasure boxes” have shapes different from those of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated model image IGe” according to the present embodiment, a display target region of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced as time passes. More specifically, when the operation is not received within the validity period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is changed from the display area of the predetermined maximum value to the predetermined minimum value (including “0”). Is displayed so as to decrease as time elapses until the display area becomes.

  In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245 (a), a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is provided. . The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target area”. In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the section image KG, and a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the necklace. However, the section image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target area”.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the “integrated model image IGe” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern portion to be operated is set. 5012 emits light in the first mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the pattern simulation image TMGe in the “integrated simulation image IGe” (for example, “blue” in FIG. 245 (a))). The pattern button 5014 that is not set as the operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button simulation image BMGe in the “integrated simulation image IGe” (for example, “blue” in FIG. 245 (a)). )). Here, the colors are the same, but the first mode and the fifth mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGf” shown in FIG. 245 (b) is basically the same as the “integrated model image IGe” described above, and the pattern model image TMGf and the button model image BMGf ( The composite simulated image HMGf) and the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated model image IGf”, the pattern model image TMGf and the button model image BMGf (composite model image HMGf) do not change in shape. However, as for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the treasure box itself is displayed as the same as the above-described “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe”, but the amount and type of the treasure that is contained therein are increasing, and the “first special peripheral image SSG” is increased. Decorative image SSGf ". The amount and type of treasure are increasing, and necklaces, treasure swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and are common.

  In addition, in the “integrated model image IGf” illustrated in FIG. 245 (b), as the amount and type of treasure increase, the “necklace (section image KG)” which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The shape is changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is changed. According to such a configuration, the shape of the gauge image GG as the display target region differs (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation is displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left in the course of the decrease, and it is expected that a feeling of tension is appropriately maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when a specific operation accepting effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGf” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated is set. The unit 5012 emits light in the second mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the pattern simulation image TMGf in the “integrated simulation image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 245 (b)). In addition, the pattern button 5014 which is not set as the operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button simulation image BMGf in the “integrated simulation image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 245 (b)). )). Here, the colors are the same, but the second mode and the sixth mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGg” shown in FIG. 245 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated model image IGe” described above, and includes the pattern model image TMGg and the button model image BMGg (composite model). The image HMGg) and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated model image IGg”, the pattern model image TMGg and the button model image BMGg (composite model image HMGg) do not change in shape. However, as for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the aforementioned “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe”, but the treasure box (shape) for storing them is different. Image SSGg ".

However, the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” is the same as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGf” in the following points.
"The virtual decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) actually provided on the peripheral part of the pattern part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not simulated, and is virtual on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern simulation image TMGg (composite simulation image HMGg) is decorated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGg” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated is set. The unit 5012 emits light in the third mode (in FIG. 245 (c), for example, emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the pattern simulation image TMGg in the “integrated simulation image IGg”). The pattern button 5014 that is not set as the operation target also emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button simulation image BMGg in the “integrated simulation image IGg” (for example, “red” in FIG. 245 (c)). )). Here, the colors are the same, but the third mode and the seventh mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGh” shown in FIG. 245 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated model image IGe” described above, and includes the pattern model image TMGh and the button model image BMGh (composite model image). The image HMGh) and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery are configured as an integrated image. In the “integrated model image IGh”, the pattern model image TMGh and the button model image BMGh (composite model image HMGh) do not change in shape. However, as for the peripheral decoration image SSG, the amount and type of treasure are increased and the treasure box (shape) for storing the treasure is different from that of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” described above. The special peripheral decoration image SSGh "is displayed.

  In the “integrated model image IGh” according to this example, the shape of the “necklace (section image KG)”, which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, changes as the amount and type of treasure increase. Accordingly, the display mode of the gauge image GG is made different.

However, the “third special peripheral decoration image SSGh” is similar to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” in the following points.
"The virtual decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) actually provided on the peripheral part of the pattern part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not simulated, and is virtual on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern simulation image TMGh (composite simulation image HMGh) is decorated.

  That is, in the “integrated mimic image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))”, a part (treasure) in the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated mimic image IGf (FIG. 245 (b))” ) And a part (treasure box) of the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated mimic image IGg (FIG. 245 (c))” is displayed as an image. I have.

  On the other hand, since the same decoration and shape appear in a partial area in the peripheral decoration image SSG, the case where the “integrated mimic image IGe (FIG. 245 (a))” appears and the case where “the integrated The appearance of the “simulated image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))” can indicate that it is a specific operation reception effect (valid period) for the same post-operation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (d), when a specific operation accepting effect (effective period) in which “integrated mimic image IGh” is displayed on effect display device 1600 occurs, a pattern to be operated is set. The unit 5012 emits light in the fourth mode (for example, emits light in the same color as the pattern simulation image TMGh in the “integrated simulation image IGh” (for example, “rainbow” in FIG. 245 (d))). . In addition, the pattern button 5014 which is not set as the operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button simulation image BMGh in the “integrated simulation image IGh” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 245 (d)). )). Here, the colors are the same, but the fourth mode and the eighth mode may be different colors.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the pattern simulation image TMG and the button simulation image BMG (composite simulation image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any case. However, as the amount and type of treasure change (FIGS. 245 (b) and (d)), or as the treasure chest changes (FIGS. 245 (c) and (d)), the pattern simulation image The shapes of the TMG and the button simulation image BMG (composite simulation image HMG) may be made different.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in each aspect, the pattern simulation image TMG and the button simulation image BMG (composite simulation image HMG) are displayed in different colors. May be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), when displaying the button simulation image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014, the peripheral decoration image SSGa, b is integrated with the button simulation image BMG and displayed. I did it. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the button simulation image BMG simulating the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but the peripheral decoration image SSGa, b is not displayed. . That is, since the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the case of the example shown in FIGS. It is possible to display images as completely different from those of the examples shown in a) to (d), thereby providing various effects.

  232 (a) to (d) of the configuration according to the example illustrated in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d) has the same function as the example illustrated in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d). It goes without saying that the same functions and effects as those described above with reference to d) are obtained. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), these modifications and effects examples with respect to the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) can be appropriately adopted.

  Also, in the valid period in which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245, the validity period in which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. The specified “specific image TG” is displayed.

  However, in the valid period (a plurality of valid periods) in which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232, the type of the valid period (the type as the post-operation display or post-operation sound output, or the indication of the precursor effect) Depending on the type, the “specific image TG” may be displayed and the “specific image TG” may not be displayed. In the valid period (a plurality of valid periods) in which the IG is displayed, regardless of the type of the valid period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, the type of the indication effect, etc.), the “specific image TG” is displayed. It is always displayed.

  That is, during the valid period (a plurality of valid periods) in which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245, the “state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” shown in FIGS. Does not include the validity period to be generated as a performance. Therefore, it is desirable to display the “specific image TG” in order to clarify how much remaining time is left. When the “specific image TG” is displayed, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  The “specific image TG” when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, or may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. You may make it.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 245, an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012 in a state where the pattern portion 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, thereby moving from the specific position to the original position. The operation (sword putting operation) is allowed. However, when giving an operation opportunity to the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is at the original position, so that the movement operation (sword-drawing operation) from the original position to the specific position may be allowed.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of an effect (operation accepting effect) when the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows an effect display device 1600 in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is in a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination in the state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal game state. In the effect status performed in the above, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect status in which the display of the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238. When the effect patterns are the same, the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the valid period shown in FIG. 246 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. Alternatively, based on the effect determination result, only one of the valid periods (operation accepting effect) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern.

  The indication effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed in such a manner as to straddle before and after the generation timing of the valid period in which operation reception is allowed. At this time, the operation reception for the pattern unit 5012 ( Is not permitted and the validity period has not occurred.

  In this regard, the indication effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by displaying the integrated mimic image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid of the treasure box). At the time shown in FIG. 236 (a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated mimic image IG is displayed as a "closed mode", whereby the pattern mimic image TMGe (composite mimic image HMGe) Are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), and are invisible (or difficult to see).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 246 (a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated mimic image IG has a relatively low degree of expectation as shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and (b). 245 (c) and (d) are displayed in a manner having a relatively high degree of expectation. An example is shown in which the image is displayed in a low manner (FIGS. 245 (a) and (b)). Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). The description of the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is omitted, but the subsequent stage of the production progress is performed in the same manner as “the case where the treasure box is displayed with a mode with a low degree of expectation” described below. Will be performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows an example in which, while the predictive effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) is progressing, the region where the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) is opened and overlapped with “treasure” is displayed. In the case of “treasure”, a part that does not overlap with the lid part of the treasure box (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and the part is displayed in a state of good visibility. Is shown.

  That is, when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses, a specific timing comes and a valid period for the pattern portion 5012 is generated. When the valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the handle 5012 to be operated starts to move to the “specific position” by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the “design part 5012” to be operated and the “design button 5014” not to be operated start emitting light in a predetermined mode (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

  However, at the time when such light emission is started, the indication effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the integrated mimic image IG is such that the lid portion (specific display TH3) of the treasure box is changed from “closed mode (fully closed)” to “open mode”. (Fully open) ”. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 246 (b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed as “an indication effect (specific display TH3) that is drawn (expressed) as if it were on the front side”. ), The reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has also started (progressed). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the indication effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

  According to such a configuration, an indication effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period is generated is Thus, at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is hardly visually recognized by the indication effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the entire image of the integrated model image IG (the pattern model image TMG and the button model image BMG (the composite model image HMG), the peripheral decoration image SSG, the specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the valid period. It is expected that the degree of expectation (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the mode of the pattern simulation image) suggested by the mode of the integrated model image IG are interesting. The valid period can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (b), the “treasure” inside the treasure box is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are small (the mode in which the degree of expectation is relatively low as shown in FIG. 245 (a)). And at least a case where the amount and type are large (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation shown in FIG. 245 (b)). It provides a directing effect as to whether or not it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), it is possible to recognize that the “treasure”, which is the content of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are large (a mode with high expectation). ing. In the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the type, the "specific image TG" is originally displayed when the validity period is started ( (See FIG. 234) or the type in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the time when the validity period is started (see FIG. 233) so as to gradually appear thereafter. I have. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, executing the predictive effect in the above-described manner can be said to be particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in gaming interest. Note that the description of the case where “treasure” is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation is omitted, but this is performed in the same manner as “the case where“ treasure ”is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation” described below. Subsequent production progress will be made.

  FIG. 246 (c) overlaps with the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further development of the indication effect (display according to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (b). This shows a situation in which the portion (the portion where the specific display TH3 is drawn forward of the “treasure”) has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated mimic image IG is being displayed. It is possible to provide one directing effect from the point of time until the end of the game, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the point in time when the entire treasure of the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state of good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG Has already been reduced, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a larger display area than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is obtained. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not been reduced so much. Thereby, when the indication effect (the effect of opening the lid portion which is the specific display TH) is ended, a decrease in the gaming interest due to the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG already being reduced is suppressed. That you can expect. The “specific image TG” according to this example is displayed as an image expressing “light” displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), the pattern simulation image TMG of the integrated simulation image IG is dynamically displayed (display depicting a state in which the pattern portion 5012 is displaced within its movable range). However, as described above, the button imitation image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display for depicting how the design button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

  FIG. 246 (d) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”) and the valid period (set time) ends (or An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 just before the validity period ends) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 246 (d) appears, it is assumed that operation reception is barely allowed in time, but in the state where the screen is displayed, operation reception has already been performed. You may make it unacceptable. However, in this case, the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 are in a state where each light emission has already ended at this time. In this case, images such as “push in!” And “lower left arrow” may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even when the validity period ends.

  When the validity period ends, the light emission of the pattern portion 5012 and the light emission of the pattern button 5014 are both ended. In this regard, in the valid period in which the operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed is performed even if the player does not perform the operation within the period. (See FIG. 246 (e)). This is the same as the above-mentioned automatic reception functioning within the first validity period (FIGS. 235 (e), (f), etc.).

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which a player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the validity period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the post-operation display is performed. The "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before the sound output is performed after the operation, and the display and the operation after the operation are performed in response to the operation by the player being performed in time and the operation being accepted accordingly. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when a precursor effect (previous display) is performed in such a mode, when the entire image of the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is viewed well, the gauge image (predetermined display) is displayed. The display area of the (image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, it is likely that a situation in which the operation by the player cannot be performed in time is likely to occur. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the “specific image TG” is displayed and displayed after the operation. It can be said that performing the sound output after the operation or the operation is effective in suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Further, in this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side to which no operation opportunity is given is made to emit light in accordance with the occurrence of the validity period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the pattern part 5012 or the pattern button 5014. To make it difficult to recognize. That is, in this case, the possibility that the operation within the validity period cannot be made in time increases, and thus it can be said that this is effective in suppressing a decrease in gaming interest when the operation is not made in time.

  Note that the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 246 is the case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and the case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. May be applied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, the indication effect (specific display TH) and the integrated mimic image IG are displayed on different layers, and the indication effect (specific display TH) is displayed in priority in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect development in the mode shown in FIG. 246 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 245 (b) appears as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mimic image IG may appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). .

  According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, when the treasure box, which is a part of the integrated mimic image IG, is displayed prior to the occurrence of the validity period, the treasure box has the “highly expected form” and the “ The first rendition of which of the “low expectations” is displayed is provided. In addition, after the validity period has occurred, the treasure chest of the integrated simulated image IG is gradually opened, and the “treasure” is either “highly expected” or “lowly expected”. The second rendition of whether or not is displayed is provided. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is indicated by the staged effects (first directivity, second directivity) performed over the generation of the effective period, so that the effective period occurs. It is expected that the entertainment interest in the period from before to after is appropriately improved.

  In addition, since such a staged effect is realized by depiction of the integrated simulated image IG itself (depiction on the lid of the treasure chest), other images (specific display TH shown in FIG. 235) are used. , Etc.), the stress is less felt than when the visibility of the integrated simulated image IG is deprived of the integrated mimic image IG. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 246, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 237. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 237, a precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

  In FIG. 246, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the mimic image simulating the operation target is integrated with the “peripheral decoration image (first decoration image)” including the display target region of the gauge image. In the case of displaying as a simulated image, an example of the effect progress (first operation acceptance allowable period) has been described. On the other hand, in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248, when the second effect condition is satisfied, a mimic image simulating the operation target is displayed as a “peripheral decoration image including the display target region of the gauge image (first decoration image). In the case where the image is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with", an example (second operation acceptance allowable period) relating to the effect progress is described. In the example shown in FIG. 246 and the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, it is not always necessary to give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, but the operation opportunity is given to the same operation target. If so, it is desirable that the mimic image itself simulating the operation target be displayed as the same image (including a similar shape).

  Here, as a mode in which the mock image simulating the operation target is displayed as “an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target region of the gauge image”, for example, A mode that is displayed as a single image that is not integrated with the decoration image in the first place, or a mimic image that imitates the operation target is displayed as an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt a mode such as that performed. According to such a configuration, when the validity period occurs, when the mimic image imitating the operation target is displayed as one image, the gauge image is displayed in the image, and when the operation target is imitated. When the mimic image is displayed as one image, the gauge image may not be displayed in the image in some cases, so that it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the effective period.

  In the example described below, a display example is shown in which a mimic image simulating an operation target is displayed as “an image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target region of the gauge image”.

  First, FIG. 247 (a) shows the effect display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a specific effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being 0. In the effect status performed by the device 1600, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect status in which the display of the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 or FIG. 246, or may be different. When the effect patterns are the same, they may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in one effect pattern, respectively, or based on the result of the effect determination, any one of the valid periods (operation accepting effects). Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern.

  In this example, the situation shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and (b) is basically the same as the situation shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and (b), and the description of the same configuration will be omitted. However, the “treasure (second decoration image)” partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 247 (b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 246 (b). The content is different from the “treasure (first decorative image)”. That is, as described above, the “simulated image imitating the operation target” according to this example is displayed as “an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image”. As for the “peripheral decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image”, the part displayed as the same image as the “peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image” and the part displayed as a different image are described above. There is something.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), the “treasure (second decoration image)” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example includes “Holy Grail” in FIG. 246. This is the same as the “treasure (first decorative image)” shown. However, in the “treasure” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the “gold bar” and the “necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)” shown in FIG. 246 are not displayed. The image in which gold coins are packed is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 247 (c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, even if there is no portion (FIG. 247 (c)) in which the specific display TH3 is described as being on the front side of the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)", The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the “treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)”. In other words, in this case, while the “treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)” is gradually improved in visibility by the specific display TH3, even if an attempt is made to find the gauge image GG, it cannot be found. It is possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension as to whether only the time is left.

  In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image (holy grail, etc.) as in the case (FIG. 245 (c)) is intentionally displayed as being included. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it seem as if the “necklace”, which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, is also displayed somewhere, whereby the “necklace”, which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, is displayed. At the time of recognizing that this is not displayed anywhere, it seems that some time has already passed since the validity period occurred, so feelings of tension during the validity period It can be maintained suitably.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), a pattern simulation image TMG imitating the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the gauge image is added to the integrated simulation image IG itself. Is not provided, and the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated mimic image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, and it is difficult to recognize how much time remains in the effective period, so that it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the effective period. The display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated model image IG, and the display area is reduced as time elapses. You may do so.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has elapsed and the valid period is about to end. As described above, in this example, the gauge image is not displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), there is no suggestion that the validity period is about to end, and even if the player views the image, the validity period does not change. I can't recognize it.

  However, even in the valid period according to this example, in the pattern simulation image TMG that is the operation target, a display depicting a state in which the pattern portion 5012 reciprocates (reciprocates from the original position to the specific position) in its movable range. (Dynamic display) is being performed. In this regard, the valid period according to this example is terminated when the reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N does not have to be an integer) after the period occurs, By keeping an eye on the dynamic display using the pattern simulation image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much remaining time as the effective period (how many reciprocations) is left.

  Note that, even during the valid period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (c) and (d), in the button simulation image BMG, a display (moving) depicting a state in which the design button 5014 reciprocates within its movable range is displayed. Is not performed. In this regard, during the valid period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, when the operation receiving unit (here, the design button 5014) corresponding to the mimic image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated. However, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output may be performed according to the operation reception.

  That is, in the valid period according to this example, the gauge image is not displayed and the remaining time is difficult to recognize, so that the player operates in a hurry, and as a result, the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed. Since it is assumed that the possibility of operating is increased, unlike the case shown in FIG. 246, even if the operation receiving unit on the side not dynamically displaying is operated, It is desirable to output the rear sound in order to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. As the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case, for example, a display such as "Push in the design instead of the design button!" Or a sound output can be given. Therefore, even when the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displaying is operated and the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed according to the operation reception unit, the valid period is ended or the set time is set. It is desirable that the dynamic display of the pattern simulation image TMG be continued without stopping, without being reset. When the design portion 5012 is operated within the validity period thus continued, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are performed according to the operation (see FIG. 248 (h)). In this case, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displaying is operated (for example, “not the design button, but the design Of course!). However, “within the valid period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button simulation image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern simulation image TMG corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern simulation image TMG is not operated. A post-operation display and a post-operation sound output (for example, “Congratulations!”) When the operation receiving unit (pattern unit 5012) is operated, and a “button mimic image that is not dynamically displayed within the valid period. After the operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014) corresponding to BMG is operated, the post-operation display when the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern simulation image TMG is further operated, It is desirable that the post-operation sound output (for example, “congratulations to you in time, congratulations!”) Is executed as contents different from each other in order to improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 248 (e) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when an operation is not received within a time (set time) set for the validity period according to this example.

  That is, in the valid period according to this example, if the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIGS. 247 (d) and (e)), the operation is not received by the design unit 5012 within the valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when it was made is not executed (automatic reception effect function).

  However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated mimic image IG, and further, the gauge image GG is not displayed as another image. Even though there is an intention to operate, there is a possibility that the validity period ends without being able to perform the operation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this example, after the validity period ends without an operation performed by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or a condition that the symbol does not reach 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not satisfied) is not satisfied. The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (in this case, the handle portion 5012) to which the operation opportunity has been given within the validity period. , The validity period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the validity period is generated from the end of the validity period.

  According to such a configuration, even if the validity period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having elapsed without the player performing the operation, the operation shown in FIG. 248 (h) is performed by the player's operation. It is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), when an operation is performed on the pattern portion 5012 by the player, the validity period starts based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. (FIG. 248 (f), (g)). Thereafter, the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 247 (b) to (d), and FIGS. 248 (e) and (g) are repeated again. Therefore, even when an operation is received during the re-generated validity period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed in the above-described manner (see FIG. 248 (h)). reference).

  When an operation is received in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), the images shown in FIGS. 248 (f) and 248 (g) (FIGS. c) appear sequentially. Such an image is referred to as an after-operation display that is executed based on an operation being accepted during a valid period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 247 (f) and (g)). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 248 (e) is also valid (see FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIG. 248 (f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation.

  Since the specific image TG is not displayed in the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248, the precursor effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3) is not necessarily performed to generate the valid period. Is also good. For example, when a predetermined condition for permitting operation reception for a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing comes), a situation shown in FIG. 247 (c) appears. After that, the display may be advanced in the same manner as in the above-described example.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the pattern simulation image TMG and the button simulation image BMG are displayed as one image (composite simulation image HMG). It may be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the “button simulation image BMG” and the “pattern simulation image TMG” are displayed as one image (composite simulation image HMG) including both of the simulation images. The “composite model image HMG” is displayed as an “integrated model image IG” integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. However, the "button simulation image BMG" and the "pattern simulation image TMG" are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the simulation images is integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery. It may be displayed as an image. For example, if the “pattern simulation image TMG” is displayed as an integrated image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the “button simulation image BMG” is displayed as a single separate image, the “pattern simulation image TMG” is displayed. While displaying both “TMG” and “button mimic image BMG” simultaneously, the “pattern mimic image TMG” can be made more prominent, and the operation corresponding to “pattern mimic image TMG” can be performed. This makes it possible to imply that the receiver (the handle 5012) should be operated. At this time, the “pattern simulation image TMG” in the integrated simulation image IG is dynamically displayed, while the “button simulation image BMG” displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. The configuration and other examples are similarly applicable.

  In the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246, both the button simulation image BMG and the design simulation image TMG are displayed. Only the mimic image TMG) may be displayed.

  Also, it is desirable that the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 is generated as a set time longer than the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIG. In this case, the manner in which the mimic image (here, the pattern mimic image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIG. 246 and the reciprocating speed and the like are shown in FIGS. 247 and 248. It is desirable that the mimic image (here, the pattern mimic image TMG) is dynamically displayed in the same manner (reciprocating speed or the like) within the indicated validity period (operation reception effect). According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to confirm “the state of dynamic display of the mimic image” based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed, so that there is a margin. You will be prompted to operate.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be an image of “treasure”, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the mimic image that is not dynamically displayed is referred to as “first operation receiving unit”, in the examples shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the “first operation receiving unit”. However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 246, when the dynamically displayed operation receiving unit is the “second operation receiving unit”, the mimic image that is not dynamically displayed in the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248. Is desirably configured to be a “third operation receiving section” different from the “second operation receiving section”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship of the three operation objects (operation receiving units) slides. Thus, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  The valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not necessarily have to be generated during the execution period of the symbol change. For example, a period during which the RTC function is used regardless of the presence or absence of a symbol change may be used, or a period during which a symbol change is not performed, such as during a jackpot game execution period or a period before a jackpot game is started. ).

  In the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, similarly to the valid periods in the examples shown in FIGS. Alternatively, it may be set to make it difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it easy to recognize that there is a special effect state in which the gauge image is not displayed.

  246 (c) may be prepared as a plurality of valid periods having different occurrence conditions. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may not be made in all of the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may be made in at least one valid period.

  247 (c) may be prepared as a plurality of valid periods having different occurrence conditions. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not have to be made in all of the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 may be made in at least one valid period.

  In the valid period (operation accepting effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, unlike in the case of the valid period shown in FIG. You may make it display possible only in an aspect.

  The valid period (operation accepting effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the design part 5012 and the design button 5014, and an operation opportunity is given to the other. When it is provided, a valid period (operation accepting effect) in which the gauge image is always displayed may be generated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the validity period (the validity period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which the integrated mimic image in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and the gauge image An effective period (effective period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) in which an integrated mimic image in which a GG display target area is not originally provided can be generated as one of a plurality of types of effective periods. I have. In this regard, in these valid periods (FIGS. 239 to 241, 247, and 248), when an operation by the player is not accepted or the operation is accepted in order to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. After the same operation as described above, the effect is not performed (there is no automatic button function), and in the valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238 and FIG. 246) in which the display in which the gauge image GG is reduced with time elapses, the feeling of tension is reduced. In order to suitably maintain, when the operation by the player is not received, it is desirable that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received is performed (the automatic button function is provided).

  In this regard, an effective period (effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which an integrated mimic image in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease, or an integrated period in which a display target area of the gauge image GG is not provided in the first place. When an operation is received for an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during a valid period (a valid period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) in which a mimic image is displayed, a change (display) corresponding to the operation is received. It is desirable that the integrated mimic image be displayed at the time when the execution of at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a change and lamp emission, is started. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated mimic image be continued. This makes it possible to give a sense of anxiety as to whether or not the effect has been properly received while the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, and is expected to maintain the tension more appropriately. Become so.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color or color) of a mimic image before and after a change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception occurs. Transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and may be in a state where the mimic image is difficult to visually recognize by other images. In the operation reception, it is determined which operation means was the operation target. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. On the other hand, during the validity period (FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246) in which the display in which the gauge image GG is reduced with the passage of time is performed, a change (display change, , At least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as lamp light emission), when the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs, the integrated model image (both the model image and the gauge image) ) May be hidden or, as in the case described above, a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation reception may be made while displaying the integrated mimic image without hiding it. You may make it generate | occur | produce.

  However, even in such a valid period that “the display area of the specific image is not reduced as the time elapses” is valid, the mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. It is desirable to display an image as a moving image that evolves at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time in which the operation acceptance is allowed based on how much the moving image by the mock image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

[Integrated mock-up image, effect before validity period, mock image disappearance effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (an advance notice effect, etc.) should be selectively caused to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, thereby making the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect based on the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the motion of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and the movable body operation and the like are provided. Is provided as an effect having a "function indicating the degree of expectation that a jackpot is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the symbol production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (regardless of the predetermined condition Is established), it is possible to generate a reception permitted state (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the effect determination corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern (such as a preliminary judgment), the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then, it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the effect determination, the acceptable state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific variation pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is desirable to avoid such a situation or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the acceptable reception state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for a rendering member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the operation after the operation that generates the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, the reception is performed. The performance of the permissible state (effective period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment of the game until the performance is performed after the operation is reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when an acceptable state (valid period) to which an operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is set. By displaying the simulated image as an integrated simulated image (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the simulated image, the game is played until the effect is performed. We try to suppress the decline. For such an integrated mimic image, an operation reception effect (valid period) generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation generated in the predetermined variation pattern described above. It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (valid period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low expectation non-suppression reception effects and the high expectation suppression reception effect. Also, in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231), the display mode of the illustrated mimic image is replaced with any of the integrated mimic images described below. It is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  The “integrated model image” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or a modification thereof. A display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. Also, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as “integrated model images”, and the same is true in that any one of the modes is displayed.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptable state is generated, an acceptable sound indicating that the operation is acceptable or the acceptable state is indicated. The output is performed so that it is difficult to forget to operate. Here, the "acceptable sound" means that, when the sound starts to be output, an acceptable state (valid period) always occurs while the sound is output (while sound data is allocated). , A sound that is in a state where an acceptable state (valid period) has already occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptable states including a first acceptable state and a second acceptable state are prepared as acceptable states (valid periods). I have. Here, the first reception allowable state can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns). A valid period that cannot occur in the predetermined fluctuation pattern (or in any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (based on the first condition being satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination) Validity period generated). Further, the second reception allowable state includes a case where a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) and a case where a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). Is valid (or at least one of the variation patterns), the validity period (the second condition different from the first condition in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination) Validity period generated based on the establishment).

  The “integrated mimic image” according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first acceptable state and the second acceptable state. Here, since the first reception permitted state and the second reception permitted state are both assumed to occur as a reception permitted state in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410), The “integrated mimic image” displayed in the first acceptable state and the second acceptable state is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

  However, among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated model image”, the special mode having a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) is one of the first and second acceptable modes. Of these, display is possible only in the first acceptable state, and in the second acceptable state, display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). ing. In the first acceptable state, based on the result of the jackpot determination, a determination as to which one of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)) to display the “integrated mimic image” is made. The “integrated mimic image” is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. In the second acceptable state, whether the "integrated mimic image" is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) not including the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. The determination may be performed, and the “integrated mimic image” may be displayed in a mode according to the result of the determination.

  In such a configuration, in the first acceptable state, two types of acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output, and in the second acceptable state, One type of acceptable sound (third acceptable sound) is output. Here, the first permissible sound and the third acceptable permissible sound are output as sound effects such as “Pikeen!”, For example, and may be output as the same sound or different from each other. It may be output as a sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is output as a message sound such as “press!”. However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound. If the second allowable sound is different from the first allowable sound and is output over a different output time, two types of acceptable sounds are output. It is possible for the player to appropriately recognize that the sound (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is being output.

  Here, as described above, in the first reception permission state, the “integrated mimic image” can be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with relatively low expectation). Even in this case, two kinds of acceptable sounds (a first acceptable sound and a second acceptable sound) are output. That is, in this case, when an acceptable state is generated (integrated mimic image is displayed), if only one kind of acceptable sound is output, the special mode is not displayed as the “integrated mimic image” and the special mode is displayed. Will be displayed, but when two types of acceptable sounds are output, a special mode will be displayed as an "integrated mimic image", and a mode different from the special mode will be displayed. And there will be.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility of the “integrated mimic image” being displayed in a special mode based on the manner in which the acceptable sound is output. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the state occurs.

  In addition, when the “integrated mimic image” is displayed in the first acceptable state or the second acceptable state, a preceding effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this display. Are displayed (displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize) in such a state that at least a part of the “image relating to the previous effect” is overlapped in a state where such a previous effect is being executed. Then, in the integrated mimic image, the “image related to the previous effect” is gradually reduced so that the overlapping portion is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the “image related to the previous effect” is gradually reduced. As a result, the state (whole) is dewed (displayed in a state that is easy to visually recognize) after the occurrence of the acceptable state. Such a pre-production (foreboding production) is, for example, the production shown in FIGS. 235 (b) and (c) and FIGS. 237 (c) to (f) and executed in the same manner. You may make it.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start outputting at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts outputting later than this. ing. However, at the point in time when the first allowable sound is output in advance, "the integrated mimic image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize the mode". Of course, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started with a delay, at least a part of the integrated mimic image is in a state in which the image of the pre-production (foreboding production) is displayed in an overlapping manner from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. Note that the acceptable reception state (valid period) is set to occur when the preceding effect (sign effect) is started or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second allowable sound is started. It is in a state where it has already occurred, or it occurs when the output starts.

  According to such a configuration, at least when there is a situation such as “the first allowable sound is output and the second allowable sound is not output”, two types of acceptable allowable sounds (the first allowable sound and the first allowable sound). The first acceptable state where the second acceptable sound is output (or occurs) or the second acceptable state where only one type of acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) is output occurs ( Or has occurred). However, when a situation such as “the second allowable sound starts to be output after the first allowable sound is output” appears, two types of acceptable allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptable state has occurred and that the integrated mimic image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize in which form the integrated mimic image is displayed (or whether it is displayed).
-When transitioning from "a state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output" to "a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output" (first permissible state) When,
When the state does not shift from “a state in which only the first permissible sound of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output” to “a state in which at least the second permissible sound is output” (a second permissible state) Can be generated, and the “transition of output of acceptable reception sound” can indicate “the possibility that the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode”. Therefore, during the “state in which only the first permissible sound out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound is output”, before the image related to the previous effect (sign effect) is hidden, It is possible to make the user interested in whether or not the output of the second allowable sound is started, and thereby, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Then, as a result, if the second permissible sound is output while the image relating to the pre-production (foreboding production) is displayed, the integrated image having the special mode is displayed (displayed). This makes it possible to provide a stunning effect such that the integrated mimic image is gradually exposed in such a sense of expectation.

  As described above, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated mimic image is hardly visually recognized by the “image related to the previous effect”. Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated mimic image may be displayed in a special mode, it is difficult to at least easily recognize in which mode the integrated mimic image is displayed. Needless to say. At the time when the output of the second allowable sound is started, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained, or the output state of the first allowable sound may be ended. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a third condition (third acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated mimic image is displayed without outputting any acceptable sound (the first allowable sound or the second allowable sound), and the operation means (here, the integrated mimic image is displayed). When the operation is accepted for the operation button 410), a display change, an output sound after the operation, or the like is generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptable state or the second acceptable state. Good. In this case, the contents of the display change and the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of the acceptable reception state (the first acceptable permission state, the second acceptable permission state, the third acceptable permission state).

  In other words, by displaying an integrated mimic image without outputting any acceptable sound, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp when operation acceptance has been permitted, and it has become possible to understand the operation-related It will be possible to improve the game entertainment. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated mimic image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated mimic image is displayed in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a “gauge stop period” in which the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined value (0) and the integrated image is left as it is. Since the image is hidden or the like, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the acceptable reception state is occurring, and to more appropriately improve the game entertainment related to the operation. You can plan.

  Alternatively, when displaying the integrated mimic image without outputting any acceptable sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated mimic image, and the display is not performed even in the display target area. Is also good. Such a display method is the same as described above with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. For example, “the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the display of the gauge image GG is performed. The same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the target area is displayed is intentionally displayed as being included, and the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated model image. And so on, and so on. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the gaming interest related to the operation. become able to.

  In addition, in the accepting state according to this example, a case where operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and a case where a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is performed ) May be permitted to be accepted while being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. “To output a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppressed mode” according to this example includes a case where a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output at a volume “0” (silent output). is there. The “non-output state” means, for example, a case where a channel is not even allocated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception permitted state in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode, and the specific type of effect There are a plurality of acceptable accepting states in which a sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The “permissible state” and the “third acceptable state” are acceptable states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The state is included as one of the states, and the above-mentioned “second reception allowable state” is a state in which the operation reception while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the non-suppression mode is performed. Out of acceptable acceptance states It has become what is included as one.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of the BGM reproduction (the effect sound of the specific type) is suppressed or set to the non-output state, the possibility that the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode can be considered. It is possible to enjoy the production by giving more concentration while the sound of BGM playback is suppressed or non-output while avoiding the situation where the performance is poor. Will be able to do it.

  The “acceptance state in which the operation sound is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state” is output in the unsuppressed mode. After the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in a non-output state, an acceptable state may be generated, or the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) may be generated. BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and an acceptable state is generated, and a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is suppressed in (or simultaneously with) the accepted state. Output or non-output state. The point is that any operation sound can be received while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the suppressed mode or in a non-output state.

  Further, even in the reception permission state according to this example, when an operation is not detected within a set time in which operation reception is permitted, the operation is performed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In some cases, the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, among the acceptable reception states, the acceptable acceptance state in which the “automatic acceptance mode” is executed is as described above,
・ It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output only when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period.
-This means that after-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of the effect state (state of effect setting) regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare “special effect state (automatic reception mode)” or “a plurality of effect states” as effect states. In addition, if the reception permission state in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed in the reception permission state is set when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, is the automatic reception enabled? Either may be adopted as to whether or not (for example, "automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the production state", or "special production state (automatic reception mode)" The automatic reception may be validated as long as this is the case)), regardless of the configuration of the technical features described here.

  More specifically, during the demo screen (a period during which symbol fluctuation is not performed), if settings relating to the game are possible, and even if any of those settings is selected, the “acceptance acceptable state” In the acceptance permitted state in which the “automatic acceptance mode” is executed, the automatic acceptance is always enabled. Then, among these settings, when at least a specific setting condition is satisfied, the acceptable condition in which the “automatic accepting mode” is executed and the acceptable condition in which the “non-automatic accepting mode” is executed are different. It can happen in the first place. The settings relating to the game include not only a special effect state (automatic reception mode) but also settings such as volume, brightness, and effect appearance probability, and the setting relating to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not necessarily installed. It does not have to be something. When a setting relating to a special effect state (automatic reception mode) is provided, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set under the “specific setting conditions”.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when a specific setting condition is met, the acceptance permitted state in which the “automatic acceptance mode” is executed and the “non-automatic acceptance mode” are executed. Although a plurality of acceptable accepting states are prepared for each, the above-mentioned "first acceptable accepting state" is included as one of acceptable accepting states in which the "automatic accepting mode" is executed. In addition, the above-described “second reception permitted state” and “third reception permitted state” are included as one of the reception permitted states in which the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed.

  According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility of the game entertainment being significantly reduced when the player forgets to perform the operation). In the state, the “automatic reception mode” is executed. Therefore, even if the user forgets to operate the integrated mimic image in the special mode having a high expectation (the mode in which the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol is higher than the other modes), the post-operation effect (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a staging operation by a movable decorative body) can be generated, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Will be able to On the other hand, the second acceptable state or the third state where there is no possibility that the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the gaming interest will be significantly reduced when the player forgets to perform the operation). In the reception-permitted state, the “non-automatic reception mode” is executed. Therefore, it is preferable to suppress a decrease in amusement when the player forgets to perform the operation, and to adjust the feeling of tension when the operation is permitted. Can be maintained.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptable sound is output overlaps with the acceptable state, and the operation is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been received, the output state of the acceptable sound can be terminated halfway (it can be made inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the reception-permitted sound is terminated halfway is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation reception). Whether the state is a state in which reception has been performed or a state in which operation reception has not been performed yet "is suppressed.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptable sound is output overlaps with the acceptable state, but when the acceptable sound is in the output state. Even if an operation is accepted, there is a case where the output state of the acceptable sound is not terminated (can be made inaudible) on the way based on the fact that the operation is accepted, and may be maintained. I have to. As will be described later, there are a plurality of acceptable states in which the acceptable sound is terminated halfway and a plurality of acceptable states in which the acceptable sound is not terminated midway. Is included as one of the acceptable states in which the acceptable sound is terminated halfway, and the “second acceptable state” described above is the acceptable state in which the acceptable sound is not terminated midway. Are included as one of them.

  According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility of the game entertainment being significantly reduced when the player forgets to perform the operation). In this state, if an operation is received while the acceptable sound is being output, the operation is terminated halfway. Therefore, when the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode having a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol is higher than the other modes), it is determined whether or not the operation is being received. It is possible to concentrate on post-operation effects such as display after operation, output sound after operation, light emission change by lamp, staging operation by movable decorative body, etc. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. On the other hand, in the second acceptance allowable state where there is no possibility that the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (the possibility that the entertainment interest of the game is significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). Even if the operation is accepted while the permissible sound is being output, the operation is not terminated midway, so that the decrease in the entertainment interest is suppressed, but the tension when operating is reduced. It can be maintained suitably.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state is permitted, When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). I have time to do it.

  More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in a reception-permitted state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or operation is permitted in a non-output state. In addition to the above-described first acceptable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, at least a fourth acceptable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included. When the mimic image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) and when the integrated mimic image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). However, in the fourth acceptable state, the integrated mimic image is not displayed in the special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), and is different from the special mode (FIGS. 232 (a) to (232)). c)). In the first acceptable state, when an operation is received while the acceptable sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptable sound is terminated halfway based on the operation being accepted (non-audible state). On the other hand, in the fourth acceptable state, if an operation is received while the acceptable sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptable sound is interrupted on the basis of the operation being accepted. Do not end (do not make it inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, a reception-permissible state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state occurs, and the reception is performed. When the integrated mimic image is displayed in a special mode in the allowable state, the acceptable sound is terminated on the way based on the accepted operation. On the other hand, an acceptable state occurs in which the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppressed mode or the output sound is in the non-output state. When the model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases where the acceptable sound is terminated halfway based on the operation acceptance and where the acceptable sound is maintained without being terminated midway. Become like

  In other words, in this case, in a reception-permitted state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, an integrated mimic image is regarded as a special mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which the game entertainment is unlikely to be significantly reduced when the player forgets to perform the operation). In some cases, the permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated midway, so if the acceptable sound was not terminated prematurely, it may be because the operation was not received because the operation was not received. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is the occurrence of the fourth acceptance allowable state, and it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in gaming interest. It is possible So as to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptable state occurs, a wide area using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) before the first acceptable state occurs. In the case where the second reception allowable state occurs, a narrow area pre-production using only less than half of the predetermined display area is started prior to this. Is to be done. Then, the mimic image (in this case, the integrated mimic image) imitating the operation receiving unit is displayed both during the period in which the wide area pre-production is being performed and during the period in which the first acceptable state is generated. However, in the period in which the wide area-type pre-production is being executed and the period in which the first reception-permitted state is occurring, they are displayed in different forms from each other.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated mimic image (mimic image) displayed during the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being performed and the period during which the first acceptable state occurs. The integrated model image (model image) is displayed based on image data different from each other, although it is a model of the same operation receiving unit (operation button 410). Thus, not only the color scheme, but also the outline shape itself is displayed as being different.

  According to such a configuration, when performing a wide-area pre-production, the degree of freedom can be increased without being restricted by the form (image data) of the integrated mimic image (mimic image) displayed in the first acceptable state. Since it is possible to display an integrated mock image (mock image) with a highly independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing a pre-production (wide-area pre-production) in a wider range. Become like It is apparent that such an effect cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

  In addition, in the acceptable reception state where the wide area type pre-production is executed, the effect at the time of the big hit which appears only when the big hit is obtained as the post-operation effect compared to the reception allowable state where the narrow area type pre-production is executed The appearance ratio of the aspect is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptable states are prepared as the acceptable states corresponding to the wide-area pre-production (the wide-area pre-production is executed). One of them is a first acceptable state and a third acceptable state. Also, a plurality of acceptable states are prepared as the acceptable state corresponding to the narrow area pre-production (the narrow area pre-production is executed), and the second acceptable state is one of these acceptable states. A state and a fourth acceptable state are prepared.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptable state, an operation is performed in a state where the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The reception can be performed, and the second reception allowable state is such that the operation reception can be performed while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is in the non-suppression mode. As you did. That is, in the case where a narrow-range pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, operation reception while the specific-type production sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode without being in the suppression mode is not accepted. Since it can be performed (the second reception allowable state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the wide-area type pre-production that is relatively superior in performance is not performed. On the other hand, if the operation sound can be received while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, a wide-area type that is relatively superior in production performance Since the previous effect is to be performed (first accepting state), a game due to the fact that the operation sound was not received while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) was output in the non-suppressed mode was not performed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least in a specific setting condition (one production state), no operation is detected within the set time in which operation reception is permitted in the first reception permission state. When the operation is detected, the operation is performed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second reception allowable state, the operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception is permitted. As described above, when there is no operation, the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode in which the same display change as when the operation is detected is not performed. In other words, in the first reception-permitted state in which the wide-area pre-production is performed, there is a concern that the entertainment interest may decrease when the player forgets to perform the operation due to the high reproducibility. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player forgets to operate. On the other hand, in the second reception allowable state in which the narrow-range type pre-production is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the production is firmly performed. It is possible to enjoy after-operation effects such as post-operation display and post-operation output sound only for those who are paying attention and notice that the operation reception is acceptable Will be able to maintain.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the operation accepting state in which the effect accepting of the operation sound while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the suppressed mode or in the non-output state is allowed. Means that at least the first acceptable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied are included. As described above. In this regard, in the fourth accepting permission state, an operation can be accepted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, the operation sound can be received depending on whether the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode or is in the non-output state. I have to. In addition, when the fourth acceptable state occurs, prior to this, the execution of the narrow area type effect using only less than half of the predetermined display area is started. That is, in the case where a narrow-range type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, even if the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is set to the suppression mode, the degree of suppression is reduced. In the (fourth reception allowable state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that a wide area-type pre-production that is relatively superior in performance is not performed. On the other hand, it is possible to accept an operation depending on whether a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode or is in a non-output state. In the case (first acceptance allowable state), the wide-range type pre-production that is relatively superior in production performance is performed, so that the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. A decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is received by the player while the first reception allowable state occurs and the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed, the pachinko machine 1 determines that the operation has been accepted. After the corresponding operation, an effect (at least one of a display change on the effect display device 1600, a sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and an effect operation by a movable decorative body) is started to be executed, and a simulation image (integrated simulation) is performed. When hiding the image), a wide-area extinction effect (wide-area extinction effect) using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed. When an operation is received by the player while the second accepting state occurs and the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed, the operation after the operation in accordance with the operation accept is performed. (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a change in light emission by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is started, and the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is not displayed. At the time of displaying, a narrow-area extinction effect (narrow-area extinction effect) using only less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed.

  Here, the extinction effect (wide-area extinction effect, narrow-area extinction effect) refers to a state in which a part or the whole of the mimic image (integrated mimic image) in the display state is hard to visually recognize or is invisible. This refers to "an image different from the mimic image" or "display effect on the mimic image" to be displayed. Such an annihilation effect (an annihilation effect) may be, for example, an effect that is executed as an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed. , The mock image (integrated mock image) and the image (destruction effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and a part or the whole of the mock image (integrated mock image) in the moving image is deleted (deletion effect). (Effect), and may be one that expresses a state that it is difficult to visually recognize the image, or may be performed by changing the display mode of the mimic image (integrated mimic image) itself (display effect). It may be. However, in order to indicate the degree of expectation or to improve the entertainment of the game as such a disappearing effect, when hiding the mock image (integrated mock image), Needless to say, it is more desirable to display the image as another image.

  Also, "when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is hidden, the disappearance effect is executed" means "in accordance with hiding the mimic image (integrated mimic image)." .. "The disappearance effect is executed" may be used, or "Mimi-image (integrated mimic image) itself has high transmittance while mimic image (integrated mimic image) is being hidden. "The disappearing effect is executed" or "The disappearing effect is executed after the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is hidden". , Meaning any of these embodiments. Also, the fact that the transmittance itself increases during the process of hiding the mock image (integrated mock image) is referred to as "when the mock image (integrated mock image) is hidden". ... Annihilation effect is executed ".

  According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect according to the operation reception by the player is started and the mimic image is not displayed, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there is a case where the short-range disappearance effect is executed and a case where the short-range disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to enhance the performance of the mock image (integrated mock image) until the disappearance.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such a vanishing effect (image at the time of vanishing) is executed, the narrow-area vanishing effect (image at the time of vanishing the narrow region) has the narrow-band vanishing effect (narrow-band vanishing effect). The background image that was displayed prior to the display of the narrow-area disappearance effect (the image at the time of the narrow-area disappearance) is displayed until the narrow-area disappearance effect (the image at the time of the narrow-area disappearance) is hidden, or after the operation. (Display after operation and output sound after operation) are displayed (maintained) without being changed during execution. On the other hand, in the wide area extinction effect (wide area extinction image), the wide area extinction effect (wide area extinction image) is displayed before the wide area extinction effect (wide area extinction image) is displayed based on the operation received by the player. The background image is changed to a different background until the wide-area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide-area disappearance) is hidden or during the after-operation effect (after-operation display or after-operation output sound). It will be changed to an image.

  That is, when the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is executed, at least a part of the background image as well as the mock image (integrated mime image) is also subjected to the wide-area disappearance effect (the wide-area disappearance image). Image), the background image is changed (replaced) with a different background image aiming at the timing at which such a wide-area disappearance effect (image at the time of wide-area disappearance) is executed. This makes it possible to realize a smooth effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) using the button effect. For example, the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is an image displayed on a layer in which the mimic image (integrated mime image) is displayed and another layer in front of the layer in which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the mock image (integrated mock image), the background image, and the image (annihilation effect) may be displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the mock images (integrated mock image) may be displayed in the moving image. A part or the whole, or a part or the whole of the background image, may be rendered difficult to visually recognize by the image (destruction effect).

  On the other hand, when the narrow area disappearing effect (the image when the narrow area disappears) is executed, while the narrow area disappearing effect (the image when the narrow area disappears) is not displayed, or after the operation, While the effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is being executed, the background image is not changed, so that the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, the player is interested in which of the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) and the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed in addition to the post-operation effect. As a result, the game entertainment related to the mimic image can be suitably maintained from when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed until it is hidden.

  Also, when the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed, a bigger hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed. It is designed that the ratio of the appearance mode at the time of the big hit that appears only when the player is in the high state is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of reception allowable states are prepared as the reception allowable states corresponding to the wide area disappearance effect (the image when the wide area disappears) (the wide area disappearance effect is executed). A first acceptable state and a third acceptable state are provided as one of the acceptable states. Also, a plurality of accepting acceptable states are prepared as the accepting acceptable states corresponding to the narrow area vanishing effect (the image at the time of the narrow area vanishing) (the narrow area vanishing effect is executed). A second acceptable state and a fourth acceptable state are prepared as one of them.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first accepting permission state, a game in which the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The second accepting state is such that the player can accept an operation while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is in the non-suppression mode. This is as described above. That is, when a narrow-range disappearance effect that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, a player of a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode without being in the suppression mode. Since the operation reception can be performed (second reception allowable state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the fact that the wide-area extinction effect which is relatively superior in the performance is not performed. On the other hand, when a specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state and the player can accept an operation, the production performance is relatively reduced. Since the superior wide-area extinction effect is performed (the first acceptable state), the operation acceptance by the player while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game due to not being performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least under specific setting conditions (one production state), an operation is detected within the set time in which the operation reception by the player is permitted in the first reception permission state. When there is no operation, the operation is performed in an automatic reception mode in which the same display change as when the operation is detected is performed. As described above, when an operation is not detected in the non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception-permitted state in which the wide-area disappearance effect is performed, there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced when the player forgets to perform the operation due to the high rendition. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player forgets to operate. That is, in this case, even when the operation is not received by the player and the automatic reception functions, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the operation is received by the player. On the other hand, in the second accepting state in which the short-range disappearance effect is performed, since the non-automatic accepting mode is executed, the set time elapses without the player performing an operation (the second accepting permitting state). When the state is completed), the simulation image is displayed without performing the post-operation effect (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second acceptance allowable state, even when the mimic image is not displayed while the effect is not performed after the operation, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, thereby forgetting to operate. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the post-operation effect is not executed. At this time, the narrow-range disappearing effect may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation is received and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception allowable state according to this example, a narrow-range disappearing effect that appears when an operation is received and an after-operation effect is executed, and a case where the operation is not received and the after-operation effect is not executed. In this case, different modes (images) appear from the narrow-range extinction effect appearing in FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the reception in which the operation reception by the player is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The permissible state includes at least the first permissible reception state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, and the fourth permissible reception state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. Is as described above. In the fourth reception allowable state, the operation reception by the player can be performed while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the fourth suppression mode. In the accepting state, the operation by the player is performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than in the fourth suppression mode or is in the non-output state. The fact that the reception can be performed has also been described above. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is received by the player in the fourth reception allowable state, not the wide area type disappearing effect but the narrow area type disappearing effect is executed. . That is, when a narrow-range disappearance effect that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed in advance, but the degree of suppression is reduced. As a result (fourth reception allowable state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the wide-area-type disappearance effect, which is relatively superior in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, it is possible to accept an operation depending on whether a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode or is in a non-output state. In the case (the first acceptable state), since the wide-area extinction effect which is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. A decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  FIG. 249 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second acceptable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second acceptable state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended and exhausted) in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving) and the “second change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs First, an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, thereafter, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the second fluctuation pattern and the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second fluctuation pattern) is started (see the situation shown in FIG. 251 (a)). ), An effect (advance effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed to the selected "second change pattern" effect within the execution period of the change effect. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a as shown in FIG. 249 (b). In addition, when the timing tB3 at which the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived, the operation accepting for the second post-effect is permitted (the valid period). Is generated (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second acceptable state (valid period) is
"Sound of BGM reproduction (effect sound of specific type)" according to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, operation reception while BGM reproduction sound during normal fluctuation maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode The operation is in the permissible “non-suppression reception permitted state (see FIGS. 249 (a) and (b)”), and no operation is detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which operation reception is permitted. In this case, the “non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 249 (h))” does not generate the post-operation effect (second operation effect) corresponding to the second reception allowable state.
As "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect".

  According to such a configuration, a set time (effective period) in which operation reception is permitted without accompanying directivity, such as indicating that the "sound of BGM reproduction" is in a suppression mode to indicate the occurrence of a reception allowable state. ) Is suddenly set (non-restriction reception effect), so that the player is suddenly hit, and a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if an operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time is ended without any effect after the operation (non-automatic reception). Aspect), it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension by being conscious of the risk of missing an opportunity to produce a post-operation effect (here, the second operation effect).

  However, such a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is a post-operation effect (here, a second post-operation effect) performed in a manner that appears only at the time of a big hit as compared to the “suppression / automatic reception effect” described later. Although the ratio (may be 0% or 100%) is low, if there is a frequent occurrence of no post-operation effects contrary to the player's intention, the gaming interest may decrease. I am concerned. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b), (e), and (i), a set time (timing tB3 to tB4) at which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. When the immediately preceding timing tB2 arrives, the output of the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” is started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)”), and the timing within the set time Even if an operation is received at tB3a, the output state is maintained so as to straddle the operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set, and the “operation” It is too late to notice that the reception has been accepted, the operation by the player will not be in time, and the effect after the operation (here, the effect after the second operation) will end without being generated. " Will be as expected. However, the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs. You may make it generate | occur | produce in synchronization with the generation | occurrence | production timing of tB3.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first acceptable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikeen!" And the "pressing!" And a second permissible sound output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (f) and 249 (j), in the second acceptable state, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the player attempts to operate even by the output restriction on the “acceptable sound”.

  By the way, in the second reception allowable state, as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time or execution in the non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (here, the operation means, It is considered that by repeatedly hitting the button 410), a player who strives not to miss an opportunity to produce a post-operation effect may appear. However, in this case, the effect after the operation is started immediately after the operation reception is permitted. Therefore, the started effect is “the operation performed in response to the operation reception (the effect after the operation)”. It is difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice effect irrelevant to the operation reception", and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (particularly, FIG. 249 (e)), in the second acceptable state, the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When an effect is received at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is ended, but the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not terminated midway and is set as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the output is completed (the same timing tB3c (FIG. 249 (e), (i)) as when there is no operation). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the effect has been performed (the effect after operation) or whether the effect has been automatically generated as an effect unrelated to the operation reception. Yo To become.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when an effect is received within the set time of the second reception allowable state (timing tB3a in the figure), an effect display device is displayed as a post-operation effect according to the operation reception. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) at 1600 (first effect member) and an output sound (effect sound) after operation by a speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 249 (d)). See). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing arriving after the timing tB4, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, even if the operation is received at any timing, if the timing tB4 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. It is necessary to maintain the state.

  In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 249, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 at which the set time of the second acceptable state is set arrives, the operation display device 1600 sets the operation unit as the operation target. Is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)"). Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permission state is set, and the “operation” It is too late to notice that the reception has been accepted, the operation by the player will not be in time, and the effect after the operation (here, the effect after the second operation) will end without being generated. " Will be as expected. In this example, the timing at which the mock image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the output of the acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of them is started earlier. It may be. Alternatively, only one of the mimic image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mimic image) may be started before the timing tB3.

  Further, as described above, the mimic image displayed when the second acceptable state occurs (an image simulating the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given) is a margin that decorates the periphery of the mimic image. It is displayed as an integrated mimic image IG integrated with the decorative image. This “integrated model image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, a gauge image (predetermined An image) GG display target area (section image KG) is provided. Also, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image IG", and the same is true for selectively displaying any one of the modes. However, in the second acceptable state, a special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) having a high degree of expectation among a plurality of modes prepared as an "integrated mimic image" is selected by lottery (selection). ) Is not included, and only a mode different from the special mode (for example, a normal mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the integrated mimic image IGa having the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated mimic image IG.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 249 (c) to (f), it is assumed that a timing tB3a arrives and an operation is accepted while such an integrated mimic image is displayed. When the operation is received in such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and change in the movable decorative body). As at least one of the effect operations), an output relating to the liquid crystal display and an output relating to the effect sound are respectively started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f)”).

  However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (c), (d), and FIG. 251 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated mimic image IG is not displayed when the post-operation effect is started. And keep the display state. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), the integrated mimic image IG (specific layer) does not cause a change due to it, and a short time (from there). Until the timing tB3b at which the (predetermined time) has elapsed, the “display on the integrated model image IG” is continued in the same manner as in the state where the operation reception is permitted, The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in FIG. 251, a conversation notice (maybe a chance) by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

  Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (annihilation effect) is displayed in which a part or the entirety of the integrated mimic image in the display state is displayed in a state in which it is difficult or invisible to display (see FIG. 251). (G)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed on a different layer before the layer on which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, or the integrated mimic image IG and the image (disappearing effect). ) Is displayed as a single moving image prepared in advance, and expresses a state in which part or the whole of the integrated mimic image IG becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the image KSE (annihilation effect) in the moving image. May be as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated mimic image IG is not displayed even when the display of such an image KSE (destruction effect) is started. And keep the display state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearing effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, a change caused by the integrated model image IG is caused. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, when the disappearing effect is displayed on a layer on the front side, the mimic image and the gauge image GG are difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized.

  That is, in this case, in order to make the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) difficult to see or to make it invisible, the image KSE of the disappearing effect (the same applies to the image HSE of the wide-area disappearing effect described later). Despite the situation in which the image is displayed on the predetermined layer, the mock image (integrated mock image IG) displayed on the specific layer (the rear side (lower priority side) than the predetermined layer) is itself. The display as it was when the operation reception was permitted is maintained as it is, so that no change occurs. In addition, also for the gauge image GG, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued over the operation reception. Thus, even while the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG) is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize or is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized, the mode (at least a part of) the mode when the operation reception is permitted is visually recognized. 251 and the time required to maintain the state shown in FIG. 251 (f) can be reduced.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) relating to the integrated mimic image IG is completed within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) in which the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 251 (i)). After that, the disappearance effect (here, the narrow area disappearance using less than half of the predetermined display area) in a situation where the integrated model image IG is not displayed on the layer. Effect) image KSE is displayed. The image KSE of such an annihilation effect is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) from the start of the display (timing tB3b) (see FIG. 251 ( j)). In this regard, regarding the non-display timing tB3d, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is no matter what timing the operation is received. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearing effect image KSE and the integrated mimic image IG are displayed on a layer in front of the image (display of a conversation by the princess character) relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 251 (g) to (i), while the image KSE of the annihilation effect is being displayed, the image relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (the conversation notice by the princess character) is visually recognized. It is becoming difficult. This is the same for the wide area extinction effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is received, first, the effect is started after the operation, and in addition, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in any form at the time when the operation is received. 232 (a) to (d) in FIG. 232, and how much remaining time is suggested by the gauge image GG is maintained as a state that can be grasped (see FIG. 251 (f) "). Then, after this, the display by the image KSE of the disappearing effect in such a manner that the “image relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600” and the integrated mimic image IG among the effects after the operation are respectively difficult to visually recognize is started. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (g)”). As described above, the disappearance effects include the narrow-range disappearance effect with low performance and the wide-area disappearance effect with low performance. Here, the effect is executed as the narrow-range disappearance effect. While such an annihilation effect image KSE is displayed, the integrated mimic image IG is not displayed (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (i)”). When the image KSE is hidden, the “image related to display change on the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)” among the effects after the operation can be finally visually recognized in a clear state (“ 251 (j))).

  That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated mimic image IG was, and then to enjoy what aspect appears as the disappearing effect. Since it is possible to enjoy what kind of appearance (here, any of a plurality of conversation notice modes having different degrees of expectation) appears as a post-operation effect, when an operation is received with such various effects. Can be improved.

  In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing for starting to display the image (effect after operation) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tB3a but the timing tB3b or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing as being within the period of execution (timing tB3b to tB3d). However, also in this case, the effect after the operation by the effect sound or the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tB3a, so that the start timing of the after-operation effect itself remains at the timing tB3a.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 249 (g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the second accepting state ends) without detecting the operation by the player. As described above, since the second accepting state is executed in the non-automatic accepting mode, if the set time elapses without performing the operation by the player, the post-operation effect is not performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not displayed.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state in which operation reception is permitted (the second reception permission state) is terminated. The mimic image on the specific layer (in this case, the integrated mimic image IGa) is not hidden, and maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptable state. More specifically, even when the operation acceptance is no longer permitted, at that time (timing tB4), no change due to the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) is caused. Until the timing tB4a after a short time (predetermined time) has arrived, the “display on the mimic image” is continued in the same manner as in the state where the operation acceptance is permitted. I have. Further, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG slightly remains even when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception permitted state) is ended, and the display area is changed after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced so as to become "0".

  According to such a configuration, even when the valid period (the second acceptable state) ends without any operation, the model image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether or not it was. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to “0” after the expiration of the validity period, it is possible to prompt the user to think “sorry” when the operation is not received in time for the last minute. As a result, it is expected that a decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  Note that, in this example, the valid period (the second acceptable state) ends without receiving the operation, compared with the time from the timing tB3a when the operation is accepted to the time when the mimic image is hidden (not visually recognizable). The time from the timing tB4 to when the mock image is not displayed (not visible) is made shorter.

  Further, as described above, in the second accepting permission state, if the set time has elapsed without an operation by the player being detected, the post-operation effect is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 249 (g), when the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IGa) is not displayed, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed. The mimic image (in this case, the integrated mimic image IGa) is not displayed while the narrow area disappearance effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the narrow-range disappearance effect when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g)) is the narrow-range disappearance effect when the post-operation effect is executed. (FIG. 249 (c)) is executed in a different mode (image).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether or not it was in time), it is possible to properly understand the mode by confirming the mode of the narrow-range extinction effect. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to know whether or not the effect is being performed after the operation. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the mode of the narrow-range disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is performed when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g)). It is desirable not to appear in)). However, for example, the narrow-range disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is represented by “A (for example, a change in the mimic image itself)” and “B (for example, what is the mimic image? 249), the narrow-range disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed is executed by “A”. You may. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted at the point in time when the mode of “B” does not appear in the narrow-range disappearance effect, and the situation in which the effect is performed after the operation is performed It is possible to avoid a decline in entertainment interest due to the inability to determine whether the game is in the game.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 at which the second acceptable state occurs occurs, a narrow-area pre-effect using only less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. This is started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (b)”). Then, during a period in which the image KTH relating to such a narrow-range type pre-production is displayed, first, a display of a mimic image (here, an integrated mimic image IGa) simulating the operation receiving unit and a first allowable image are displayed. The output of the sound is started (timing tB2, corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)”). At the time when the display of the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow area type pre-production. It is difficult. That is, by reducing the display range of the image related to the narrow-range type pre-production or increasing the transmissivity of the image in accordance with the elapse of time, the “simulated image (integrated model) The visibility of the image IG) is gradually increased "(FIGS. 251 (b) to (d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, while the narrow-range pre-effect is being performed and the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IGa) is being displayed, the second The timing tB3 at which the reception permission state occurs arrives, and operation reception is permitted (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)"). That is, in this case, operation acceptance is allowed during the stage in which the visibility of the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is being enhanced, so that the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) can be used. Whether or not to accept the operation (effect after operation) without confirming the mode (expected degree) and hide it, or check the mode (expected level) as the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) Then, it is possible to provide an effect with a strategic nature such as whether or not the operation is accepted (the effect after the operation) and the image is hidden.

  Here, as the image KTH used for such a narrow-range pre-production, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed may be used. Alternatively, the mimic image (integrated mimic image) and the image (narrow-range type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) in the moving image is displayed. May be expressed in such a way as to be gradually increased.

  Note that, in the narrow area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600 but also the production sound related thereto may be output. However, in view of the fact that the second reception-permitted state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to the operation, the narrow-range pre-production is not performed. It can be said that it is desirable to perform the display as an image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related thereto, in order to increase the concentration on the effect.

  Also, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation may be prepared as the narrow-range type pre-production, and any of those modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the production judgment based on the result of the jackpot determination. . However, in view of the fact that the second reception-permitted state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and if the operation is forgotten, the post-operation effect is not executed, the narrow-range type pre-effect is: It is desirable to prepare only one mode and display it in only one mode in order to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player forgets to operate.

  FIG. 250 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a fluctuation pattern in which the first acceptable state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended and exhausted) in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving) and the “first change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a First, an effect determination (such as an advance determination) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, thereafter, the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the first fluctuating pattern and the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first fluctuating pattern) is started (see the situation shown in FIG. 252 (a)). ), An effect (advance effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the selected “first change pattern” effect within the execution period of the change effect. It will be.

Then, as described above, in the effect according to the “first variation pattern”, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination), as shown in FIG. When the timing tC4 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the SZ has arrived, the first reception in which the operation reception regarding the first post-operation effect is permitted is allowed. An allowable state (valid period) is generated (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptable state (valid period) is
-The "sound of BGM reproduction" according to the first variation pattern is output in the suppressed mode or the operation is allowed to be accepted while in the non-output state. (Refer to (b))), and even if no operation to the operation means set as the operation target is detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which operation acceptance is permitted, When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the effect is started after the operation. "Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 250 (h))"
As "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also called “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, an operation reception while the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state is allowed (suppression reception effect), so that the game is played. From the user's side, it becomes easy to perform the operation immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) has the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that does not miss the high-expected operation after the operation . In other words, in such a “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a ratio (0% or 100%, where the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that appears only at the time of the big hit than the above “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”) Is higher as described above.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also the same as the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above with reference to FIGS. 250 (b), (e), and (i). As shown in FIG. 5, when the timing tC3 slightly before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which the effect reception is allowed arrives, the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” is set. The output is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tC4 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). Accordingly, even if the player does not recognize that the “sound of BGM playback (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the operation is performed at timing tC3. Being able to recognize that a state in which reception is permitted will soon occur, and that "the effect reception will be made by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation against the will of the player" Is expected to be less frequent. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily need to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) occurs, and is generated, for example, in accordance with the generation timing tC4 of the set time. You may do so.

  Note that, in order to more suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect (suppression reception effect), the “sound of BGM reproduction” is changed from “state output in non-suppression mode” to “state output in suppression mode or non-suppression mode”. The timing tC2a at which the transition to the “output state” is different from that shown in the drawing. However, the timing tC2a has a relationship such as “the length of the timing tC2a to tC3> the length of the timing tC3 to tC4”. It can be said that it is desirable to set the timing considerably before the above-described output start timing tC4 of the acceptable sound which occurs earlier than the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide area type pre-production is started.

  Further, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 250 (f) and (j), unlike the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above, As the "acceptable sound", not only the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikeen!" But also the second allowable sound which is a message sound such as "Press!" Moreover, in this example, the second allowable sound is delayed by a predetermined time from the timing tC3 at which the output of the first allowable sound is started, and is in a state (valid period) in which operation reception has already been permitted. At the timing tC4a, the output of which is to be started.

  That is, in this case, in the second acceptable state (valid period) in which the integrated mimic image IG (mimic image) cannot be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is the set time (valid period) The output is started without delay, and the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptable state (valid period) in which the integrated mimic image IG (mimic image) can be displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound is set for the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay, and the output of the second allowable sound is started after the generation of the set time (valid period).

  According to such a configuration, the output of the first allowable sound (sound effect) is started when the state of the integrated model image IG (model image) is difficult or invisible due to the previous effect. Then, when the first acceptable state (valid period) occurs, the state can be shifted to a state in which both the first acceptable sound (sound effect) and the second acceptable sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated model image IG (model image) is displayed in a specific high expectation mode (special mode) is indicated by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. Will be able to do it. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, an integrated mimic image having a specific high expectation mode (special mode) It is possible to have a sense of expectation that IG (mimic image) will be displayed, and in such a situation, the integrated mimic image IG (mimic image) will be gradually exposed (clear) Will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and (f), while the “second wide area type previous effect” is being executed among the wide area type effects (the image of the previous effect) Is displayed), the output of the second allowable sound is started.

  As will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation target” When the operation button 410 is set as the operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration 5001 is set as the operation target. In such a case, a message sound such as "Send!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the “second allowable sound” is adopted as an effect sound output for a relatively short time. Although the "first allowable sound" is adopted as the effect sound output over a relatively long time, the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the output states of the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” are maintained for different times. At the same time, the timings at which the output states are ended (the timings at which the output state is made inaudible) are made to come at different timings before the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time remains until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the “acceptable sound” is in. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently appear that “effects are accepted by the activation of the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention”.
A first situation in which only the “first permissible sound” of the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” maintains an output state; • both a “first permissible sound” and a “second permissible sound” Is in the output state, the "first allowable sound" maintains the output state, but the "second allowable sound" has ended the output state (the state is inaudible). Yes) Third situation-Fourth situation in which both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" have finished the output state (they are inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, “Pikeen!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. That is, in this case, the message sound (the second allowable sound) of the acceptable sound is output as an effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic acceptable effect”, but the sound effect (the sound effect) of the acceptable sound is output. Since the first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the “sound of BGM playback (effect sound of a specific type)” is suppressed. It is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the production is in a state where the reception of the production is permitted, while appropriately maintaining the production performance in the present situation (second allowable sound) (first). Acceptable sound). However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 249, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example shown in FIG. You may make it output.

  Note that the time length between arbitrary timings shown in each of the above-described drawings and each of the following drawings may be a minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be two frames. The above time may be used. For example, if the acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) can be output at least a little before the set time (valid period), the player will be in a state where operation acceptance is allowed (or ) Can be recognized earlier by the preceding time, so that the time until the end of the set time or the time until the timing to activate the automatic button function comes It is expected to prevent the user from forgetting to perform an operation in the inside.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 250, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 249, the operation is performed when the acceptable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is in the output state. When the operation is accepted, the output state is terminated halfway based on the fact that the operation is accepted. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptable sounds (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) is interrupted at that time, and the operation is permitted to be accepted ( Validity period) has been completed. This makes it less likely that an erroneous recognition that an operation has been received even though the operation has not been received is unlikely, and prevents a situation in which the automatic reception function is activated against the intention of the player. become able to. If the operation is performed at a timing earlier than the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period) and the operation is accepted, the operation is performed at the time when the operation is accepted. Since the state in which the reception is permitted is ended, it goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tC4f arrives.

  Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e) and (f), the output of the first allowable sound is started without delay of the generation of the set time (valid period), and the output of the second allowable sound is performed for the set time (valid period). The output is started after the occurrence of the period. According to such a configuration, the output of the first allowable sound is started regardless of how soon the operation by the player is received, but the second allowable sound depends on the timing of receiving the operation. (When an operation is received between timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation is permitted without the output being started is ended, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect in this case). ) Will be executed. Note that, when the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, no operation is accepted, and the first allowable sound is not ended by this operation. If the operation is received before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

  According to such a configuration, after confirming that the second permissible sound is output (after confirming that it is in the first reception permissible state), the effect is started after the operation, or (2) It is determined whether or not to start the effect after the operation without confirming that the allowable sound is output (without recognizing whether the state is the first acceptable state or the second acceptable state). Since it can be left to the player's choice, the range of the game is expanded, and it is expected that the interest in the game is improved.

  In addition, in this example, as described later, as shown in FIGS. Are not hidden, and the display state is maintained. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timing tC3 to tC4a), the form (expected degree) of the integrated mock image (mock image) cannot be clearly recognized by the previous effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the above-mentioned game characteristics such as "rely on the choice of the player" more interesting.

  Also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 250 (d), if an operation is received within a set time (valid period) (timing tC4b in the figure), an after-operation effect according to the operation reception is made. (Here, the first post-operation effect), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member), and the like. Is generated at least (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)"). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, with respect to the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), even if the operation is received at any timing within the set time (valid period), the timing is not changed. At the specific timing (same timing) arriving after tC5, the display is made non-display (not visually recognizable). On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (production sound) is predetermined from the timing at which the operation is received. The output state is maintained for a given time (constant time). In the example shown in FIG. 252, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

  However, as shown in FIG. 250, even if the operation is received at any timing within the set time (valid period), the post-operation output sound (production sound) is “BGM playback sound ( It is desirable to set the output state to be maintained when the timing tC6 at which the “specific type of production sound)” changes from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives.

  On the other hand, in the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is ended at timing tC6 when the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at the timing tC6, both the output of the “sound of BGM reproduction” in the non-suppressed mode and the switching of the content of the display effect occur, so that the effect is greatly enhanced. It is expected that it will be changed and the entertainment interest will be improved. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may be maintained when the timing tC6 comes. The “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3 before the time tC4 at which the set time of the first reception allowable state is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 performs an operation targeted for operation. A simulated image of the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)"). Accordingly, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 at which the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) of the first reception permission state is set, and the "operation It is late to notice that the reception has been accepted, and the operation by the player will not be in time, and the effect after operation (here, the effect after the first operation) will end without being generated. " Will be as expected. In this example, the timing at which the mock image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the output of the acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of them is started earlier. It may be. Alternatively, only one of the mimic image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mimic image) may be started before the timing tC4.

  In addition, as described above, the mimic image displayed when the first accepting permission state occurs (an image simulating the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given) is also a margin that decorates the periphery of the mimic image. It is displayed as an integrated mimic image IG integrated with the decorative image. This “integrated model image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG ( A display target area (partition area KG) of a (predetermined image) GG is provided. Also, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image IG", and the same is true for selectively displaying any one of the modes. However, unlike the second acceptable state, in the first acceptable state, a special aspect having a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 232) among a plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated model image IG” As described above, the mode (integrated model image IGd) shown in (d) is included as an object of the lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

  By the way, in the first reception permitted state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time is displayed based on the time until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation (see FIG. 250). It is possible to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first acceptable state (FIG. 250) according to this embodiment, the remaining time is displayed based on the time up to the timing tC5 at which the set time has elapsed, instead of the time up to the timing tc4f. The gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that the gauge amount also becomes “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect is started due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is left as it is. It is possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" contrary to the intention of the player, so that the next set time (valid period) regardless of the gauge remaining amount It is possible to encourage the user to perform the operation at an early stage.

  However, with regard to the first reception permitted state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received may not necessarily be started within the set time, but may be performed within the set time. May be started when or ends.

  Also, the integrated mimic image IG (mimic image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 is not necessarily the same as the integrated mimic image IG (mimic image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. Good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation means (operation receiving section) to be operated is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the operation means (operation receiving section) to be operated is performed. May be realistically described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as an operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated mimic image IG (mimic image) that simulates this. In the example shown in FIG. 250, a handle 5012 (sword decoration 5001) is used as an operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) that simulates this. 245 (a) to 245 (d)). The “integrated model images IGe to IGh” are as described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. A (predetermined image) GG display target area (section image KG) is provided. Also, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image IG", and the same is true for selectively displaying any one of the modes.

  As described above, in the operation accepting effect that occurs at the timing tC4 in FIG. 250, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. There is. That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operating means is to be operated after a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tB3 in FIG. 249, there is no “case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time, such as 3 seconds, as the setting time. At this time, the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated may be set to be later than the timing at which three seconds have elapsed since the occurrence of the set time (valid period), contrary to the intention of the player. It is desirable to suppress occurrence of a situation in which opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tC4 in FIG. 250, when the operation means on the side not being operated is operated, the side being operated is maintained while maintaining the erroneous operation state. It is desirable that, even when the user operates the operation means, the effect is received and the effect is executed after the operation. In other words, if a situation occurs in which the effect is not accepted despite the operation of the operation means, the player may be confused. Since it is difficult to further request the operation of the operation means on the side, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, the effect is received when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, as described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, since the effect sound of the specific type is set to the output or non-output state in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect It is feared that the directivity is poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. The sound can be output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer time than the acceptable sound (first allowable sound).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) having different times during which the output state is maintained are used as the first allowable sound. Any of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIG. 250 (e), and the “time maintained in the output state” is set as the shortest mode among the plurality of modes. Is what it is. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol change is stopped is different depending on which of the above-mentioned plural modes allows the first allowable sound to be output.

  In addition, "which one of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound" and "which one of the plurality of operation means is used as an operation target" are obtained as separate determination results in the above-mentioned announcement effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained as a single determination result within the above-mentioned announcement effect determination. However, regarding at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permission is allowed regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. Also in the second mode and the third mode, it is possible to select whether the “operation button 410” is to be operated or the “sword decoration 5001” is to be operated. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which output is possible only when the “sword decoration 5001” is to be operated. Then, regardless of the case where the first permissible sound is output in any of these modes, the output state is maintained with a length equal to or longer than the time required for the mode shown in FIG. 249.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (c) to (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated mimic image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. are doing. When the operation is received in such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and change in the movable decorative body). As at least one of the effect operations), an output relating to the liquid crystal display and an output relating to the effect sound are started.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and (d), also in this example, when the post-operation effect is started, the integrated model image IG on the specific layer is not hidden. , The display state from when it was in the acceptable state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)”), it is attributed to the integrated mimic image IG. No change occurs, and until the timing tC4c after a short time (predetermined time) has arrived therefrom, the “integrated model image IG is applied in the same manner as in the state where operation acceptance is permitted. "Display" is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearing effect) that appears in such a manner that a part or the whole of the integrated mimic image IG in the display state is difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized appears (see FIG. 252 (j) "). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer (predetermined layer) before the specific layer on which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, or may be an integrated mimic image and the corresponding image. An image (annihilation effect) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated mimic image in the moving image is rendered difficult to be visually recognized by the image (annihilation effect). It is as described above that the information may be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and an image HSE ( Even when the display of the “extinction effect” is started, the display is not hidden, and the display state is maintained as it was in the acceptable reception state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearing effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, a change occurs due to the integrated model image IG. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, when the disappearing effect is displayed on a predetermined layer before the disappearing effect, the mimic image or the gauge image GG is difficult to visually recognize or gradually becomes invisible.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) relating to the integrated mimic image IG is completed within a period (timing tC4c to tC4g) in which the image HSE of the disappearing effect is displayed. The image HSE of the vanishing effect (here, a wide-area vanishing effect using half or more of the predetermined display area) is displayed in a situation where the IG is not displayed on the specific layer. The image HSE of such an annihilation effect is made non-display when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) after its display was started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the non-display timing tC4g, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is no matter what timing the operation is received. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE of the disappearance effect and the mimic image (integrated mimic image) are displayed on a predetermined layer on the front side of the image relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (the effect after operation). And are displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, while the image HSE of the annihilation effect is being displayed (FIGS. 252 (j) and (k)), it is difficult to visually recognize the image (effect after operation) related to the display change on the effect display device 1600. I have.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation is received, first, the effect is started after the operation, and in addition, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in any form at the time when the operation is received. (In any of the modes of FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the remaining time indicated by the gauge image GG, and the like) are maintained. Then, after this, of the post-operation effects, the image HSE of the disappearing effect in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” and the integrated mimic image IG. Is started. As described above, as the disappearing effect, there are the narrow-range disappearing effect having low performance and the wide-area disappearing effect having low performance. Here, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed. While such an annihilation effect image HSE is displayed, the integrated mimic image IG is hidden. After that, when the annihilation effect image HSE is hidden, the post-operation effect is displayed. The “image relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” is finally made visible in a clear state (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l))”.

  That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated mimic image IG was, and then to enjoy what aspect appears as the disappearing effect. Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of appearance appears as a post-operation effect, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the operation is accepted by such various effects.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the timing for starting to display the image (effect after operation) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tC4b but the timing tC4c or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing as being within the period of execution (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, also in this case, the effect after the operation by the effect sound or the lamp is started to be executed at the timing tC4b, so that the start timing of the effect after the operation itself remains at the timing tC4b.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the first reception permission state ends) without detecting the operation by the player. As described above, since the first accepting state is executed in the automatic accepting mode, the post-operation effect is performed even if the set time has elapsed without the player performing the operation. In this case, the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is not displayed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 250 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is activated, the pachinko machine 1 operates in the same manner as when the player's operation is accepted. The mimic image (in this case, the integrated mimic image) is not hidden, and maintains the display state. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), a change caused by the mock image (here, the integrated mock image) does not occur. Until the timing tC4fa after a short time (predetermined time) has arrived, the “display on the mimic image” is continued in the same manner as in the state where the operation reception is permitted. I have. Further, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG slightly remains even when the state where the operation reception is permitted (the second reception permission state) is ended, and the display area is changed after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced so as to become "0".

  According to such a configuration, even when the post-operation effect is started by activating the automatic button function, the mock image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes having different expectations). Can be confirmed.

  Further, in this example, the time from the timing tC4c at which the operation was received until the mimic image is hidden (not visually recognizable), and the timing from the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is enabled, are not displayed (visually invisible). ) To make the same time.

  Further, in this example, even when the automatic button function is activated (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 250 (g), the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IG) is not displayed. In this case, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed, and the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image) is not displayed while the wide-area vanishing effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the image related to the wide area-type disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (c)) when the operation by the player is accepted and the image when the automatic button function is activated. The image is executed in the same manner as that of the image related to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (g)) (all images are “image HSE”). This is a different part from the case of the example shown in FIG. 249 (the narrow-area disappearance effect when the mimic image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from the operation when operated).

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation is not received in time for the last minute, the same mode as when the operation is received is displayed. Has been started to be executed ", and it is expected that a decrease in the interest in gaming will be suppressed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC1 before the timing tC3 at which the first acceptable state occurs occurs, the wide area-type pre-production using at least half of the predetermined display area is started. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)”). Then, during the period in which the wide area-type pre-production is being performed, the display of the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IG) simulating the operation receiving unit and the output of the first allowable sound are started respectively ( This is timing tC3, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). At the time when the display of the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IG) is started, a part or the whole of the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG) becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the image relating to the wide area type pre-production. ing. That is, as the time period elapses, the display range of the image related to the wide area type pre-production is reduced or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the “simulated image (integrated model image) ) Is gradually increased ”(FIGS. 252 (f) to (h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, while the wide-area type pre-effect is being performed and the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image IG) is being displayed, the first reception is performed. At the timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs, operation acceptance is permitted. That is, in this case, operation acceptance is allowed during the stage in which the visibility of the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is being enhanced, so that the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) can be used. Whether or not to accept the operation (effect after operation) without confirming the mode (expected degree) and hide it, or check the mode (expected level) as the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) Then, it is possible to provide an effect with a strategic nature such as whether or not the operation is accepted (the effect after the operation) and the image is hidden.

  Here, the image used for such a wide-area pre-production may be, for example, an image displayed on another layer before the layer on which the mock image (the integrated mock image IG) is displayed. The mock image (integrated mock image) and the image (wide-area type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image) in the moving image is gradually increased. It may be one that expresses how to go.

  It should be noted that, unlike the case of the second reception allowable state, the wide area type pre-production is different from the case of the second reception allowable state in view of the fact that it indicates the occurrence of the first reception allowable state having a relatively high degree of expectation. It is desirable that not only the image display but also the production sound related thereto be output. Then, it may be executed such that a part of the effect sound according to such a wide area type pre-effect functions as the first allowable sound.

  In addition, as the wide-area pre-production, preparing a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, based on the result of the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot determination, selectively displaying any of those modes, It is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), the wide-area pre-production effect according to this example is started when the timing tC1 in the “first variation pattern” arrives, and the first acceptance allowable state occurs. The process is executed in a manner straddling the timing tC4, and is completed within the set time of the first acceptable state. However, from the start to the end of such a wide area pre-production, the first wide area pre-production and the second wide area pre-production are sequentially executed as the wide area pre-production. It has become. These two wide-area pre-productions may be displayed as one moving image data or may be displayed as different moving image data.

  Here, the first wide area-type pre-production is started when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)”), and the second wide-area pre-production is performed at the timing tC1. When the time tC2 arrives, the display is started in a manner that replaces the first wide area pre-production (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e))”, and any of these pre-productions is displayed. Even if it is during the period, a "simulated image imitating the operation means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the previous effect is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250 (c), a mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed when the timing tC1a arrives during the period in which the first wide-area pre-production is being performed. This makes it possible to recognize which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given at a relatively early stage (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (c)”). In FIG. 252 (c), the image HTH1 of the first wide-area type pre-production produces a description in which “an image in which the entirety of a mimic image (here, an integrated mimic image) is outlined” is produced. This is a state in which the image is merely a white outline and cannot be said to be an image simulating the effect button to be operated. Thereafter, the “image A1 in which the entirety of the mock image (here, the integrated mock image) is outlined” is “at least the outline of the mock image (here, the integrated mock image) is determined by at least one of the decoration and the pattern. The image is displayed as a "shaped image A2" (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (d)"), thereby suggesting that the operation target is an effect button. From this, it can be said that such an "image A2" is a mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated. In other words, such an image A2 is executed as an effect that makes it appear as if the “image HTH1 based on the first wide-area type previous effect” was produced. The “contour of the mimic image (here, the integrated mime image)” means the contour of the operation receiving portion (here, the contour of the operation receiving portion and the contour of the peripheral decoration image).

  However, when the timing tC2 comes, it is determined whether the “image A2 as a mimic image (integrated mimic image)” and the “image HTH1 related to the first wide area pre-production” that were previously displayed are not displayed. The execution of the “second wide area type pre-production” is started in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e))”. Then, when the timing tC3 within the period in which the second wide area type pre-production is being executed arrives, the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is displayed again (in the “situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). In the displayed state, the timing tC4 at which the first acceptable state occurs occurs (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)”). That is, the second simulation image (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from when the operation is accepted until at least the operation is not accepted. The operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started to be executed.

  That is, in this case, the pre-production is performed twice before the first reception-permissible state occurs, and among the pre-productions, “the non-display is performed before the operation reception is permitted” is performed. 252 (c) and (d) of FIG. 252, and the second mimic (FIG. 252 (f)-(k)) which continues the display state even after the operation is accepted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a higher degree of freedom without considering a mode to be displayed when the accepting state is occurring (a result of the effect determination and the like). A mock image (a mock image (first time) that is hidden before the operation is permitted) can be displayed under the staging design, so the width of the staging can be expanded. In this sense, "Operation acceptance is allowed. Before the operation is accepted within the period in which operation acceptance is permitted (a mode different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232). It is desirable to be done.

  Here, the mimic image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-effect is being performed is the same as the mimic image displayed during the narrow area type pre-effect described above. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted occurs, the display state is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 232 (in the example shown in FIG. 250, IGd). On the other hand, with respect to the mimic image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is being performed, at least one of a shape or a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (here, image A2). For example, as for the shape, the operation means (operation receiving section) to be operated is deformed and expressed, such as making the outline of the mock image round or using many curves without using straight lines. It is possible to adopt a method of displaying as an image or the like. It should be noted that, in the above-described narrow-range pre-production, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from the reception allowable state does not appear.

  In the case where the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, the mimic image (second time) displayed during the second wide-area type pre-effect is performed by a plurality of mimic images shown in FIG. Regardless of the mode in which the image is displayed, the mimic image (first time) displayed during the execution of the first wide-area pre-production is displayed in one mode (the same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide-area pre-production can be used only for "indicating which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity". According to such a first wide area type pre-production, the player can be made to recognize the operation target without deteriorating the entertainment interest of the game, and thus the operation target can be recognized by the player. , A transition is made to the second wide-area pre-production where the degree of expectation is suggested.

  In order to preferably obtain such an operation and effect, in the first wide area type pre-production, the operation means (sword decoration) on the side with a higher degree of expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decoration body 5001). It can be said that it is more preferable that the processing is executed only when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). That is, in this case, either a case where a reception allowable state where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or a case where a reception allowable state where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs. Even before this, the wide area type pre-production is executable, but for the first wide area type pre-production, there is an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It will be executable only when granted. In this case, the first acceptable state may be generated as an acceptable state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword decoration 5001. On the other hand, the second wide area-type pre-production is executed regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible. At this time, the second wide area type pre-production is executed in the same manner when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It may be executed in a different manner.

  When the mimic image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is being performed is displayed as the integrated mimic image IG, the display area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. Is formed, but even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed for the mimic image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is being performed. May be displayed as an image that does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the mimic image (integrated mimic image) will be different. At this time, the mock image may be displayed as an integrated mock image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or may be an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. May be displayed.

  According to the above-described effect example, in the second acceptable state shown in FIG. 249, the mock image (the integrated mimic image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptable sound is output as the acceptable sound. However, the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptable state shown in FIG. 250, a mock image (integrated mimic image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound are respectively accepted as acceptable sounds. Output is enabled. However, in the first accepting state shown in FIG. 250, even if a mode different from the special mode (low-expected mode used in FIG. 249) is displayed as the mock image (integrated mock image IG). Regarding the acceptable sound, the processing described with reference to FIG. 250 is performed, and it goes without saying that the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound can be output as the acceptable sound.

  At the start of the output of the second permissible sound (message sound), the image related to the wide-area pre-effect is left, and the mode of the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is difficult to visually recognize. In a state where the mode of the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is difficult to visually recognize, the state shifts from a state in which only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output to a state in which the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, the possibility that the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG) is displayed in a special mode can be indicated by the acceptable sound. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to expect that a mock image (integral mock image IGd) having a special mode will be exposed. The mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is gradually revealed in the inside.

  The integrated model image IG includes a display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, and the integrated model image IG is displayed in either the low expected mode (IGa) or the high expected mode (IGd). Even when the gauge image GG is displayed, the display target region of the gauge image GG (the target portion where the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion which increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it is easy to recognize how much remaining time is left irrespective of the mode of the mimic image.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 232, the low expected mode (IGa) and the high expected mode (IGd) differ not only in the mock image but also in the mode of the peripheral decoration image. Further, the operation means (effect buttons and the like) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the mimic image, but the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  According to the above-described production example, when in the predetermined game state, the reception accepting state at the time of suppression in which operation reception while the specific production sound is suppressed is permitted, and the specific production sound is suppressed. There are a plurality of unacceptable reception acceptable states in which operation acceptance is permitted in the absence of each, but in the first acceptable reception state of the suppression acceptable reception state, the integrated model IG has a special mode. While the display can be displayed, the integrated mimic image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd) in the second acceptable mode in the non-suppressed acceptable mode, and is different from the special mode. Is displayed. In the second acceptance allowable state, the integrated mimic image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) having different degrees of expectation except for the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). Only the information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the user from feeling that the performance is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a third condition (third acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, after the integrated mimic image is displayed, the gauge image GG included in the integrated mimic image is one of the modes illustrated in FIGS. 239 to 243 (for example, the modes illustrated in FIGS. 242 and 243). ) Is displayed as described above. However, when such a third acceptable state (a valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced) is generated, as in the first acceptable state, the “BGM reproduction sound (specific type) Is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display (which does not appear in the other acceptable states, including the first acceptable state and the second acceptable state). It is desirable that an after-operation effect) or an after-operation output sound be executed. That is, when the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state) when the acceptable state is generated, it is expected that a highly expected mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated model image IG. However, when the sound is not displayed in the special mode, only the effect that the “sound of BGM reproduction” is inferior to the case where the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output without suppression becomes noticeable. There is concern that the interest may decline. In this regard, in the third reception allowable state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is allowed to appear, and the post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. In addition, even if the special mode does not appear as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  However, in any of the first acceptable state and the third acceptable state, the “sound of BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)” in the suppressed state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation reception. It is preferable that the output is not restarted in the non-suppression mode, and the display change or the post-operation output sound is executed while the suppression state (or the non-output state) is maintained.

  In addition, even if the "sound of BGM playback (production sound of a specific type)" is in the acceptable state after the suppression state (or non-output state), the third acceptable state occurs. Unlike the case of the 1 acceptance allowable state, the integrated model image IG is not displayed in a special mode, and can be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the “sound of BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state), one of the first acceptable state and the third acceptable state is set. It becomes possible to add an interest in whether or not this occurs.

  Also, in the third acceptable state, the process is executed as a valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. However, instead of this, a mode in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is not included (FIG. 247, FIG. 248), it may be executed as a valid period during which a mimic image (may be an integrated mimic image or not an integrated mimic image) is displayed. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that the same operation and effect can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types having different occurrence conditions are prepared as the acceptable reception states. However, if this is a specific type of acceptable state, it is desirable that the integrated mimic image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, in the accepting state in which the integrated mimic image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd), executing in the automatic accepting mode can prevent a decrease in gaming interest when an operation is forgotten. Is desirable.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 250, the automatic button function is enabled at a predetermined timing within the set time (valid period). However, when the set time (valid period) ends, the automatic button function is activated. The button function may be activated and execution of “the same post-operation effect as when an operation by the player is received within the validity period” may be started. In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the “processing from timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 250 (g) and (h).

  Regarding the image related to the annihilation effect shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, a predetermined transmittance is set to the image itself, so that the image behind the image can be visually recognized, although difficult. Good.

  According to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 249 to 252, when the operation after the operation is started after the operation by the player is received or the automatic button function is activated, the mimic image (integrated image) Both the mode of the model image IG) and the mode of the gauge image GG are displayed in a state of good visibility without being made difficult to see by the disappearance effect (FIG. 251 (f), (See FIG. 252 (i)). As a result, the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is displayed in any form, and after recognizing how much remaining time is left, the user can enjoy the post-operation effect, It will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 251, even if an operation is received in the second acceptable state and the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed, the background image is displayed before and after the post-operation effect is started. This is maintained without switching. On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 252, when an operation is received in the first reception-permitted state and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed, before and after the post-operation effect is started. Switching is performed on the background image (the space background after the operation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and to appropriately switch the background image even if the operation is forgotten. Can be developed smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception-permitted state where the automatic reception function is not enabled, the background image is prevented from being changed. It is possible to avoid an undesired event such as a sudden change.

  In addition, in the second reception allowable state, after the operation is received (or the automatic button function is activated), a large part of the display area overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide area extinction effect, and thus cannot be visually recognized. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, even if there is only a small portion that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide area erasure effect, the image in that portion is checked to determine the state after the operation. Can be recognized, and the disadvantage caused by the execution of the wide-area disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to preferably obtain such an operation and effect, when the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated) in the second acceptance allowable state, the operation after the operation is performed in such a manner that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is relatively high. Background images when the post-operation effect is executed are different from each other when the effect is executed and when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is relatively low. Is more desirable. These proportions may be 0% or 100%. In this case, when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is relatively high, the background image itself is changed, whereas the post-operation effect in a mode in which the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is relatively low. May be maintained without changing the background image.

  In the above-described effect example, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (second acceptable state), and a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode. Or a non-output state (a first acceptable state), and the ratio (expectation) at which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that it appears only at the time of winning the big hit differs depending on the type. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendition when an operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In the first acceptable state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, so that a post-operation effect occurs. The production sound is made to be distinctive so that the production sound corresponding to this can be heard clearly. In this regard, in the above configuration, with respect to the acceptable sound output when the first acceptable state is generated, if the effect is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the effect is accepted. Since the output state is terminated on the basis of this, the effect sound corresponding to the effect after the operation can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable sound.

  A plurality of types are prepared as acceptable reception states in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd). In any of these acceptable states, an operation is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state. Then, it is desirable that the permissible reception sound be terminated halfway. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared also as an acceptable state in which the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd). An acceptable state in which the acceptable sound is terminated halfway when an operation is accepted, and an acceptable state in which the accepted sound is not terminated midway if an operation is accepted while the acceptable sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both of them (for example, the second acceptable state) (can occur under different conditions).

  As described above, the acceptable sound includes a sound effect and a message sound. In this regard, the message sound is always interrupted when the effect is received in the output state, even if the integrated mimic image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa). When the integrated mimic image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when the effect is received when the effect is received in the output state (first accepting state). It is desirable that there be a time (the second acceptable state). It is desirable that a plurality of types of acceptable states including the first acceptable state be prepared as the acceptable states where the message sound is output.

  The wide-area pre-effects shown in FIGS. 250 and 252 are realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area pre-effect and the second wide-area pre-effect. In this regard, in the first wide-area pre-production and the second wide-area pre-production, a mimic image (integrated mimic image) that simulates the operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated is displayed in any of the pre-productions. However, the mimic image A2 displayed during the execution period of the first wide area type pre-production is a mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptable state (first acceptable state). And the image does not gradually change to the simulation image (integrated simulation image IG).

  That is, the mimic image A2 (FIG. 252 (d)) displayed in the first wide-area pre-production is not displayed when the second wide-area pre-production is performed prior to the occurrence of the first acceptable state. The display state (invisible state) is set. After a lapse of a predetermined time period during which no simulation image of the operation target is displayed (maintained as a state in which the operation target cannot be visually recognized) (FIG. 252 (e)), the simulation image within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-production is displayed. An image different from the mimic image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-production is displayed (FIG. 252 (f)). The “mock image within the execution period of the second wide area type pre-production” is the mock image (integrated mock image IG) itself displayed within the set time of the acceptable state (the first acceptable state). The images related to the second wide area type pre-production are displayed in a manner that straddles the occurrence of the acceptable state (the first acceptable state) together with the HSE, so that the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is displayed. In such a case, operation reception is allowed. The mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is also displayed when the operation is received and the post-operation effect is started (FIG. 252 (i)). The information is displayed over a period from before the acceptance allowable state occurs to after it ends.

  Here, if the mimic image A2 is displayed in the wide area type pre-production (the first wide area type pre-production), the operation means (operation receiving unit) that the mimic image A2 is imitating soon (another effect). (Without intervening). In other words, in the above-described effect example, the mimic image A2 is set to a non-display state, and the "operation target" is set in the wide-area type previous effect. A state in which no mimic image imitating the image is displayed "is generated once, and then a mimic image imitating the operation means (operation receiving unit) is displayed as an image (A2) which is differently described from the first time (A2). It is displayed as an integrated image IG).

  According to such a configuration, even in a case where the mimic image is displayed for a long time as the pre-production, the operation reception is permitted, in order to suggest that the reception permission state having a high degree of expectation occurs. It is expected that the operation will be prompted without delay. In other words, if the mock image is displayed for a long time as the pre-production, and if the mock image is displayed and the reception permission state is generated, the timing at which the operation reception is permitted suddenly comes. This may result in frequent operation delays despite the execution of the previous effect. In this regard, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptable state, a mimic image having a different depiction from the mimic image displayed within the set time of the acceptable state is generated. After a period during which no mock image is displayed as well as the mock image is displayed, the mock image displayed within the set time of the acceptable state is displayed. That is, the player can be made aware that the first acceptable state can only occur within a period after the mimic image displayed within the set time of the acceptable state is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation delay less likely to occur while displaying the mimic image for a long time as the pre-production.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, the "time required for the first wide-area pre-production" or the "time during which the mimic image A2 is displayed" is more effective than the "time required for the second wide-area pre-production". It is possible to set so that the time until the first acceptable state occurs or the time from when the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is displayed until the first acceptable state occurs becomes shorter. It is clear that it is desirable. The mimic image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area pre-production.

  Further, in order to preferably obtain such an operation and effect, the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-production is referred to as “operation in the movable area” as an operation means (operation receiving unit). And "behavior at the time of operation" are dynamically displayed (see FIG. 233 and the like), while the mimic image A2 displayed in the first wide-area pre-production is such an image. It is more desirable to display without performing dynamic display. It should be noted that the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type pre-production will continue its dynamic display state even after the first acceptable state has occurred. In addition, the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) displayed in the narrow-range type pre-production also represents “operation in a movable area” or “behavior when operating” as an operation means (operation receiving unit). This is dynamically displayed, and the state of the dynamic display is continued after the second acceptable state occurs.

  The mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (f) and the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) in the state shown in FIG. Although they are the same, the transmittance may be made different.

  It is more desirable to display the image KTH related to the narrow area type pre-effect shown in FIG. 251 as an image having a size that can cover the entire mock image (integrated mock image IG) from the front side. . Then, by performing at least one of reducing the display area of the image KTH and / or increasing its transmittance, the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG) is displayed from the position where the image KTH was displayed. ) Is desirably displayed in such a manner that it is gradually exposed as time passes.

  Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 according to the wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 252, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the mimic image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the mimic image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed on the front side of the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG) (has no adverse effect on the visibility of the mimic image (the integrated mimic image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image large enough to cover the entire mock image (the integrated mock image IG) from the front side, as in the case of the image KTH relating to the narrow-range pre-production (see FIG. 252 ( e)), a mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) from the place where the image HTH2 was displayed by at least either reducing its display area or increasing its transmittance. Are gradually exposed as time elapses. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to emphasize the depiction of the mimic image A2, the disadvantage of making the mimic image difficult to recognize when giving an operation opportunity (any operation It is difficult to recognize whether or not an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay is caused).

  The wide area type pre-production is performed by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production. It is desirable that the output be made by reproduction of two sound effects / songs).

  In the narrow-area pre-production shown in FIG. 251, the background image displayed before this is maintained without being changed in the narrow-area pre-production, but the wide-area pre-production shown in FIG. In the previous effect, the background image displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-effect (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-effect). In such a configuration, since the background change can be executed as a part of the wide-range type pre-production, a front effect with a higher directivity can be obtained as compared with the narrow-range type pre-production which is limited to a partial production change. It will be executed as an effect. It should be noted that the background image displayed before the narrow area type effect is performed (FIG. 251 (a)) and the background image displayed before the wide area type effect is performed (FIG. 252 (a)). A background image different from a)) may be used.

  In the second wide area-type pre-production shown in FIG. 252 (f), an integrated mimic image integrated with the “peripheral decoration image in which the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)” Although the model image is displayed as the IG, in the first wide-area pre-production shown in FIG. 252 (d), a model image in which such a section image KG is not decorated (depicted) is displayed. As a result, in the first wide-area pre-production, it is possible to enjoy the pre-production without worrying at least of the remaining time on the player side. It is sufficient that the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) as long as the section image KG to be decorated (depicted) in the integrated model image IG is not displayed, and at least a part of the integrated model image IG is not displayed. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge region) is not displayed, the mode itself may be different from the integrated mimic image IG.

  As described above, “acceptance of an operation in which the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state is allowed, and the operation is accepted in the automatic reception mode”. Are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and a "first reception allowable state" is prepared as one of these reception allowable states. However, these acceptable states include “the first wide-area pre-stage effect (FIGS. 252 (c) to (e)) in which the mock image is displayed and hidden, and the occurrence timing of the acceptable state. In addition to the first acceptable state in which each of the second wide-area pre-productions (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the mimic image is displayed, and "the mimic image is displayed and hidden. The second wide-area pre-rendering (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the first wide-area pre-rendering is not performed and a mimic image is displayed straddling the occurrence timing of the reception-permitted state (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) is performed. It is desirable to include a state. That is, in this case, in the first accepting permission state, the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that appears only at the time of the big hit than in the specific accepting permission state. It becomes possible to enhance the entertainment of the game from the time when the previous timing (the timing at which the first wide-area type pre-production appears) arrives. In this case, the second wide-area pre-production performed when the first reception-permitted state occurs and the second wide-area pre-production performed when the specific reception-permitted state occurs do not necessarily have to be the same. It may be performed as different effect contents (images). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first acceptable state and the second acceptable state.

  As described above, the “acceptance of operation in which the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in the non-suppression mode and the operation is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” is based on the occurrence condition (variation A plurality of patterns (eg, patterns) are prepared, and a “second acceptable state” is prepared as one of these acceptable states.

  The wide area-type pre-production performed in the first reception allowable state is performed under the condition that “specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction)” is suppressed or not output. (BGM playback) "is performed for a longer time than the narrow-range pre-production (second acceptance allowable state) performed while being output without suppression, so that the game entertainment is suitably maintained. Will be able to In particular, by setting the first wide-area pre-production to be executed for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-production, among the wide-area pre-productions, it is possible to greatly enhance the gaming interest from a long time before the acceptance acceptable state occurs. Can be increased. The timing at which the “specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction)” is suppressed or non-output may come during the execution of the first wide area type pre-production, or may be performed during the first wide area type pre-production. The effect may come before the execution is started.

  According to the above-described production example, when the wide-area type pre-production (FIG. 252) is performed when the first reception-permissible state occurs, the production change including the background image occurs. When the narrow-area type effect (FIG. 251) is performed, the effect is changed while the background image is not changed and is maintained. Further, in the first reception-permitted state that occurs while such a wide-area type pre-production is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation production (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. On the other hand, in the second acceptance allowable state that occurred while the narrow area type pre-production was being performed, the post-operation production did not change the background image without changing the background image so that the production could be advanced. I have. According to such a configuration, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence of the background image in the first acceptable state, so that the effect is produced as compared with the second acceptable state. Sexuality can be greatly increased, and it becomes possible to encourage more concentration on operation-related effects.

  In the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-described effect example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 252 (j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide-area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 252 (i), the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the wide area type disappearing effect first makes the background image displayed in the acceptable reception state difficult or invisible (FIG. 252 (j)). , The background image is not changed), and thereafter, the background image is changed by displaying another background image (the situation shown in FIG. 252 (k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)). Other background images may be displayed in such a way that they are gradually revealed while the wide area extinction effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide area extinction effect ends. You may.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252, as a post-operation effect, first, the display change (background notice by the princess character) on the liquid crystal display is started to be executed. The execution may be started first as a post-operation effect, and the display change in the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at a timing when the background image is changed).

  As described above, a plurality of “acceptance-permitted states in which the execution is performed in the automatic reception mode and the wide-area disappearance effect is performed” are prepared in different forms in which occurrence conditions (such as fluctuation patterns) are different. For example, a “first acceptable state” is prepared. However, in these acceptable states, in addition to the “first acceptable state”, an after-operation effect (the first after-effect) in the same mode as the first acceptable state can be executed, but the wide-area disappearance effect It is desirable to include a "special reception allowable state" in which the images are executed as different images (the timing at which they are displayed may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation effect is performed, the disappearing effect becomes different, so that it is possible to improve the effect of the effect, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment. become. The special reception allowable state may be the specific reception allowable state described above. The specific reception allowable state and the special reception allowable state are executed in the same manner as the first reception allowable state in terms of the display timing of the mock image, the processing relating to the output of the reception allowable sound, and the processing relating to the disappearing effect. .

  As described above, a plurality of “acceptance acceptable states in which the execution is performed in the non-automatic acceptance mode and the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed” are prepared in different forms in which occurrence conditions (such as fluctuation patterns) are different. The "second acceptance allowable state" is prepared as one of them. However, in these acceptable states, in addition to the “second acceptable state”, after-operation effects (for example, a notice of conversation and movement of a movable body) of a type different from the second acceptable state (for example, an effect after the third operation) ) Can be executed, but it is preferable to include a “special acceptance allowable state” in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the timing at which it is displayed may be the same). In other words, in this case, even if a different post-production effect is performed, the disappearing effect itself is displayed as the same image, which makes it easy to accept the operation regardless of the type of post-production effect. Will be able to recognize. The special reception allowable state is executed in the same manner as the second reception allowable state in terms of the display timing of the simulated image, the processing relating to the output of the allowable reception sound, and the processing relating to the disappearance effect.

  In the narrow-range disappearance effect, even when the mock image (integrated mimic image IG) is hidden after the performance is started after the operation, the image KSE relating to the narrow-range disappearance effect is not displayed. Instead, the display state is maintained (see FIG. 251 (i)). In this regard, the time from when the operation is accepted (when the effect is started after the operation is started) to when the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is not displayed is longer than the time taken for the mock image (integrated mock image IG). ) Is desirably set so that the time from when the image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect is hidden until the image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect is hidden is longer. According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the post-operation effect is maintained while the display state of the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is maintained so that the mode can be confirmed. The reason why it is not clearly exposed is not due to the “mock-up image in which the display state is maintained”, but to the effect of the “image KSE applied to the narrow-range vanishing effect” due to the directivity. As a result, the decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed not by a fade-out that ends relatively early but by dynamic display using an image different from the mimic image. As for such a narrow-range disappearance effect, “dynamic display by another image”, a plurality of types having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and the occurrence conditions are selectively displayed according to the type of the acceptable state. It is more desirable to do so.

  According to the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-described effect example, it is possible to expect a function that indicates that the first reception-permitted state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptable state, since the operation is received only by the operation of the player and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that performing the image according to the disappearance effect by using the small-area-type disappearance effect is advantageous in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed in a state of good visibility. According to such a configuration, in the case of the wide area type disappearing effect, it is required to secure the visibility by changing the background image, but in the case of the narrow area type disappearing effect, the background image is not changed. It is possible to ensure the visibility by simply performing the post-operation effect while maintaining the above.

  As described above, in the second acceptable state, a plurality of modes (first mode) in which the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) are different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination. , Including the second aspect), the post-operation effect (second post-effect effect) is executed. In this regard, in the case where the first aspect (an aspect having a relatively high ratio) appears as the post-operation effect (the second post-production effect) and in the case where the second aspect (an aspect having a relatively low ratio) appears, In each case, the narrow-range extinction effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped (may be 0% or 100%) are different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination , Including the fourth mode), the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, in the case where the third aspect (an aspect having a relatively high ratio) appears as the post-operation effect (the effect after the first operation) and in the case where the fourth aspect (an aspect having a relatively low ratio) appears, The wide-area extinction effect is executed in different modes (images), or when the third mode (an aspect having a relatively high ratio) appears, the wide-area extinction effect is executed and the fourth mode (relatively). It is desirable to execute the narrow-range extinction effect when the aspect having a low ratio) appears. At this time, the narrow-area disappearing effect may be the same as or different from the narrow-area disappearing effect performed in response to the second acceptable state.

  According to such a configuration, of the first reception allowable state and the second reception allowable state, in the first reception allowable state in which the wide-area disappearance effect may occur, the extinction effect itself has a degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a decrease in the visibility of the post-operation effect due to the wide-area disappearance effect. Note that, in addition to the first acceptable state and the second acceptable state, the fourth acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state, which will be described later, are used in both the fluctuation pattern that has been selected for the big hit and the fluctuation pattern that has been won for the big hit. The first variation pattern and the second variation pattern described above, and the fourth variation pattern and the fifth variation pattern to be described later are referred to as a “variation pattern at the time of a big hit and a variation pattern at the time of a loss (at the time of unselection). It is needless to say that "they are prepared in pairs."

  Further, the second acceptable state may be generated not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptable state is generated at a relatively early timing in the first variation pattern, and then the first acceptable state is generated at a relatively late timing.

  Timing at which the display output (display on the layer) related to the mimic image (integrated mimic image IG) is completed within the period in which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed (timing from when the operation is received until it is not displayed). May be different between the first allowable receiving state and the second allowable receiving state.

  When an operation is received in the “situation in which the image KTH relating to the narrow-range type pre-production is displayed” shown in FIG. 251 (d), the image KTH is not hidden in response to this operation. It is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while the display of the image KTH is continued. That is, in this case, in the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f), the image KTH is displayed. Then, after this, when the execution of the narrow-range extinction effect is started, the “image KTH according to the narrow-range extinction effect” becomes difficult or invisible due to the “image KSE according to the narrow-range extinction effect”. It is desirable to develop the production so that it is performed.

  Also, when an operation is received in the “situation in which the image HTH2 related to the wide area type pre-production is displayed” shown in FIG. 252 (g), the image HTH2 may not be displayed in response to this operation. Instead, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i), the image HTH2 is displayed. Then, after this, when the execution of the wide-area disappearance effect is started, the “image HTH2 according to the wide-area pre-effect” is made difficult or invisible by the “image HSE according to the wide-area disappearance effect”. It is desirable to develop the production.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, when the operation reception while the “specific type of effect sound (BGM playback)” is in a non-output state is allowed, the “specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)” is allowed. BGM playback) "may not necessarily be output again until the symbol is stopped. For example, at the timing tC6, any of the “specific-type effect sound (BGM reproduction)” that is already in the non-output state and the “effect sound related to the post-operation effect” that is started to be output upon reception of the operation. Alternatively, a different special effect sound may be newly output. The output of the special effect sound is not started when the operation is received, but is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing in the variation pattern.

  The image relating to the wide area type pre-production and the image relating to the narrow area type pre-production are displayed until the set time of the acceptance allowable state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated). Is also good. Also, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained until the set time of the acceptable state ends (or the automatic accept button is activated).

  Also, in the above-described production example, the mimic image simulating the operation receiving unit is displayed in both the wide-area pre-production and the narrow-area pre-production, but in the wide-area pre-production (the first wide-area pre-production). Thus, the image is displayed in a mode (image data) different from a mode (image data) that appears during a period in which operation reception is permitted (first reception permitted state). Thereby, in the wide area type pre-production (the first wide area type pre-production), even if the mimic image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, the operation reception is permitted. It is possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation reception effect (acceptance of reception) while making it difficult to cause erroneous recognition, so that a large-scale pre-effect requiring a relatively long time can be performed. become. Note that in the second wide area type pre-production and the narrow area type pre-production, a mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed as it is in a mode (image data) that appears during a period in which operation reception is permitted (reception permitted state). As the previous effect is hidden (the display area is reduced), it is gradually revealed. That is, in this case, the display state of the mimic image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptable state occurs is maintained from before the acceptable state occurs to after it occurs. This is the same in a fourth acceptable state described later.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 249 (FIG. 251) and the effect example shown in FIG. 250 (FIG. 252), in any of the effect examples, the change according to the operation reception (the effect after the operation) Yes, at least one of the changes caused by the effects after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission, is displayed (not a dynamic image) without displaying the mimic image (gauge image) at the time when execution is started. (See FIG. 251 (f), FIG. 252 (i), etc.). After that, the extinction effect (narrow-area extinction effect or wide-area extinction effect) is started to be executed (see FIGS. 251 (g) and 252 (j)). However, in the case of the wide-area extinction effect executed in a relatively large range, it is difficult to visually recognize most of the once-presented changes (effects after the operation), and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. Therefore, when the narrow-range extinction effect is executed, prior to the execution of the narrow-range extinction effect, a change (a change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp emission) corresponding to the operation reception is performed. At least one of them) is started to be executed, and at this time, the mimic image (gauge image) is not hidden and is displayed without being difficult to be visually recognized by the narrow-range disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide-area extinction effect is executed, prior to the execution of the wide-area extinction effect, a change according to the operation reception (display change, lamp light emission, etc., and after-operation effects). (At least one of the resulting changes) may not be started. That is, in this case, at the time when a change (at least one of a change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) is started according to the operation reception, a mimic image (gauge image) Is displayed without being hidden, but is hardly visually recognized by the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 252 (j)).

  In other words, when the narrow-range extinction effect is executed, at the time when the change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) is started, the operation is started. The display state of the mimic image (gauge image) is maintained as it was before the reception was made. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect is started, the mimic image (gauge image) is not made difficult to visually recognize by the narrow-range disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area type disappearing effect is executed, FIG. 250 (j) may appear after FIG. 250 (i), or the post-operation effect without passing through FIG. 250 (i). 250 (j) may appear at the point in time when the execution of is started.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as for the accepting state executed in the “suppression operation accepting effect” in which the effect sound of the specific type can be suppressed, the degree of suppression is relatively high or the output is not performed. In addition to the first acceptable state executed in the “strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 250)”, the “weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance allowable state executed in step ()) are prepared. In this case, the effect sound of the specific type to be suppressed may be a different effect sound or the like, for example, as long as it is output as an effect sound having the same function, such as an effect sound of BGM reproduction. I just need.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) during which operation reception is allowed occurs, it is possible to have a directing effect on how much the specific type of effect sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” and the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” occurs. It is desirable that the ratios of the symbols appear). Note that, here, when the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” occurs, the ratio (expectation) that is executed in a mode in which the “post-operation effect in response to the operation reception” appears only at the time of winning the big hit is In the case where the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” occurs, the ratio (expected degree) that is executed in a mode in which the “post-operation effect according to the operation reception” appears only at the time of winning a jackpot is reduced. ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptable state)”, an effect according to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and even a reach state are not formed (or reach). A state can be formed, but it does not evolve to SP reach). The effect can appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, whereas the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)” May not be generated in the low expected effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect according to the high expected fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the big hit expectation when the “weak suppression mode (the fourth acceptable state)” occurs is lower than when the “strong suppression mode (the first acceptable state)” occurs. It can be said.

  Further, in order to more suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the special effect condition being satisfied. Each time an operation is received during a set time (valid period) during which an operation prompting image (a simulation image, a gauge display, or the like) for prompting an operation is displayed, a specific type of production sound (for example, a production sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception is executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed each time a set time (valid period) during which operation acceptance is allowed occurs. (Whether any of a plurality of modes including the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears) can be provided, and separately from the degree of expectation indicated by the post-operation performance, Since the degree of expectation is suggested by (how much the degree is suppressed), it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game when the effect reception is permitted is further improved. Note that, in this case, the second accepting state described above does not occur in the “special effect state”, but can be generated in a different effect state (normal effect state).

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern in which the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” and the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” are sequentially executable within the symbol fluctuation (for example, a high expected fluctuation pattern) Among them, an effect corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)” on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state) on the relatively high expectation side occurs. )) Can be left, so that a decrease in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression of a specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode) can be suppressed. Become like

Further, in order to more appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the “weak restraint mode (fourth acceptable state)” occurs, the “strong restraint mode (first acceptable state)”
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the production determination Regardless of which result is obtained as a (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific variation pattern occurs when the effect progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, whereas the “weak suppression mode (first suppression) Operation reception production))
-Even if the specific variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preliminary determination), the effect of the specific variation pattern does not occur even if the effect progresses to a predetermined timing. It is assumed that when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination), the effect occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptable state)” occurs in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptable state)” occurs in the effect according to the specific variation pattern. The rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a mode of high expectation when an effect is received in the “strongly suppressed mode (first reception-permitted state)” (a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit) compared to when the event has not occurred. It is desirable to make the ratio (percentage of the execution performed by the program) higher.

  In such a configuration, the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)” always occurs in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, whereas the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)” occurs. When the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptable state)" occurs, the post-operation effect with a high degree of expectation is executed in the "strongly suppressed state (first acceptable state)". Since the ratio becomes higher, attention can be focused on whether or not the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” occurs, and the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” can be obtained. )) ”Can be improved.

  However, the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception permitted state)” does not necessarily have to occur in the same fluctuation pattern as the “strong suppression mode (first reception permitted state)”. The “(first acceptable state)” occurs within the first variation pattern, and the “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptable state)” may occur within the fourth variation pattern.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 253 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fourth acceptable state occurs.

  Now, for example, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the above “special effect state” and the “fourth fluctuation pattern” is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs First, an effect determination (e.g., a priori determination) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the fourth variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a as shown in FIG. 253 (b). In addition, when the timing tD3, at which the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol SZ, has come, the operation accepting for the fourth post-effect is allowed (the valid period). Generate. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fourth acceptable state (valid period) is
A set time (valid period) during which operation acceptance is permitted while the “sound of BGM reproduction” according to the fourth variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is received, the “conditional suppression reception effect” (see FIG. 5) that changes the “sound of BGM playback” from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is triggered by the operation reception. 253 (a), (b)), and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) in which operation reception is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth reception permission state "Non-automatic reception mode (refer to FIG. 253 (h))" which does not generate a post-production (fourth operation after production)
Executed as “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”. As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM playback” in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum “100”) for the channel to which the “sound of BGM playback” is assigned is set in the case of the strong suppression mode (for example, Alternatively, a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) having a lower suppression degree than the volume value (audible volume) is “0” can be adopted.

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (fourth reception allowable state)”, as long as no operation is received by an operation by the player, “specific type of effect sound (BGM) 249 does not shift to the state in which the sound of reproduction is output in the suppression mode, so that it appears that the “non-suppression reception effect (first reception permission state)” shown in FIG. 249 has occurred. Will be able to do it. In other words, in this case, when the player operates, the state changes to “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode”. Because it becomes possible, it becomes possible to aim at the improvement of the game entertainment by the surprise effect.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the fourth variation in which “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (such as the advance determination). The pattern is set so that it can be selected only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone). When the pattern is in the special effect state, a “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)), the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped rather than in the normal effect state in which a change pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (such as a notice determination) can be selected (expected degree ) Should be high. According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” appears. In other words, the above-mentioned surprise effect elements can be combined with each other to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)” can be generated in both the “normal effect state” and the “special effect state”. In the “normal effect state”, the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249) is performed within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern (one variation pattern that is paired in the hit). )) And “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 250)” can be sequentially generated, and in the “special effect state”, one variation pattern (one of "Variable pattern of the" conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253) "and" suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 250) "sequentially. It is desirable to be able to do so.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) elapses without receiving an operation, the “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is output in the weakly suppressed mode, and the subsequent production proceeds without being shifted to the “state output in the weak suppression mode”. That is, in this case, which of "unsuppressed / non-automated reception effect" or "conditional suppression / non-automated reception effect" occurred, and by extension, "normal effect state" and "special effect state" Until it is difficult to recognize which situation it is, since the subsequent production will progress, the expectation is considered to be relatively low side `` While being output in an unsuppressed manner , The operation by the player can be more positively encouraged.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a case where “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” occurs and a case where “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” Is generated, the same effect sound is output as the above-mentioned permissible sound (first permissible sound) for the same period of time, which also results in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect." (FIG. 253) "or" non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249) ".

In the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)”, similarly to the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” occurs,
a. Prior to the operation being accepted, a narrow-range pre-production is performed at timing tD1;
b. The output of the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is started when the timing tD2 slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. A second allowable sound (for example, a message sound) is not output, and a first allowable sound (for example, a sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2, which is slightly before the occurrence of the set time, arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mimic image (integrated mimic image) that simulates the operation means to be operated in the operation accepting effect. And a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed.
e. Even if an operation is received during the output of the acceptable sound, the acceptable sound in the output state is not terminated prematurely.
f. When the operation is accepted, the mimic image (integrated mimic image) and the gauge image are not hidden, and the display state is continued g. Executing a narrow-range extinction effect while a mimic image (integrated mimic image) and a gauge image are displayed; and h. Even when the operation is not received, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed in a mode (image) different from that when the operation is received. Each of the configurations is also adopted, which also produces either “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)” or “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)”. I try to make it difficult to recognize if you are doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, the “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the weak suppression mode. It becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the state has been shifted to the “executed state”, so that it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained each time an effect is received.

  Therefore, as a display method of a mock image, a gauge image, a narrow-range pre-production, and a narrow-range disappearance effect, for example, as shown in FIG. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is also desirable to adopt the same mode as the effect example shown in FIG. However, the same mode does not necessarily need to be adopted.

  Also, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)”, if an operation is received within a set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation is accepted. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated as the corresponding post-operation effect. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tD4, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the operation is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, if the timing tD4 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. It is required to set to maintain the state.

  In addition, the acceptable sound, the operation-related display, the pre-production, the disappearance effect, and the post-operation production that appear in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 253)” are different from the production examples shown in FIGS. 249 and 251. Examples and modifications can be adopted as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same method as each other.

  Note that, in this effect example, the length of time during which the “sound of BGM playback” is output in the weak suppression mode (a predetermined time) is described as “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (first Even if the operation is received at the latest timing tD4 in the set time (valid period) of “4 reception allowable state)”, the timing for ending the weak suppression mode is the timing for ending the production sound related to the post-production performance. It is set to arrive at the same or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode of the “sound of BGM reproduction” is ended may be set to be always the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect is ended. In any of such configurations, it is possible to emphasize the post-operation effect when the effect is received.

  By the way, when an operation acceptance effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first reception allowable state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the fourth reception is permitted in the weak suppression mode). However, when an effect sound of a specific type (for example, an effect sound of BGM playback) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether the mode is strong suppression mode, non-output mode, or weak suppression mode). Even if it is attempted, it is difficult to infer, without comparison, whether the degree of suppression is actually high (strong suppression mode or non-output) or low (weak suppression mode). This is especially true when the volume value of the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode is not made so large as to be suppressed, and this is a sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Is appropriately maintained, and the player can be attracted to the effect.

  However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at all, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an effect element that is useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is set within the period from the start of the operation reception effect to the end thereof. They are prepared as follows in a time-series manner.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptable sound output when the fourth acceptable state occurs occurs, even if the effect is accepted while in the output state, the output is interrupted halfway. The first acceptable sound output when the first acceptable state is generated is accepted when the output is in the output state, whereas the first acceptable sound is output for a predetermined time without being terminated. The output is terminated halfway based on the effect reception. In such a configuration, the first permissible sound itself is provided with a function useful for estimating the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptable state is generated, in addition to the first acceptable sound, the second acceptable sound is also output, so that the second acceptable state is output. By confirming whether or not a sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in any of the first acceptable state and the fourth acceptable state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display for prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted includes the special mode in the first reception permission state. 232 (a) to (d)), while in the fourth acceptable state, any of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode. , It is possible to guess whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the operation-related display.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to infer the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptable sound and the operation-related display is finished. In addition, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. In other words, in the post-operation effect (fourth operation effect) according to the fourth reception allowable state, both of the “production by the liquid crystal display” and the “production by the production sound” are “fixed from the reception of the production reception. On the other hand, in the after-operation effect (the first after-operation effect) in accordance with the first reception-permitted state, "the effect by the effect sound" is "for a certain period of time since the reception of the effect." The "effect by liquid crystal display" is "one that ends when a predetermined timing comes". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the first reception permission state, the time from the end of “the effect by the liquid crystal display” to the end of the “effect by the effect sound” depends on the timing of the operation reception. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, by confirming such a deviation, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the execution mode of the pre-production and the disappearance effect with respect to the acceptable state. Can also be. That is, in the pre-production or disappearance effect according to the fourth reception allowable state, an image related to the pre-production or an image related to the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively small area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-production and extinction effects according to the first reception allowance state, the image related to the pre-production and the extinction effect are displayed in a relatively large area, and the background image is changed at that time. And so on. By confirming such a mode, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong control mode or the weak control mode.

  However, even if the presentation elements useful for estimation are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in a time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, eventually, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the fourth acceptable reception state (weak suppression mode), the production sound of the BGM reproduction is generated based on the reception of the production within the set time (valid period). The mode is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first acceptable reception state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the effect sound of the BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from a situation where the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. In the mode, a set time (valid period) occurs so that the effect can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing at which the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed in the fourth acceptable state (weak suppression mode) and the first acceptable state (strong suppression mode). Are different from each other, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the timing.

  Further, in the fourth acceptable state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first acceptable state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). If not, the effect is not automatically generated after the operation (see FIG. 253 (h)). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself is also performed when an operation for a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) is received. Since it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation, it is possible to recognize that the effect is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

  In the first acceptable state (strongly suppressed mode or non-output) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the “BGM playback effect sound” to the strongly suppressed mode is ended is the end timing of the post-operation effect. It is set as the same or earlier timing. Therefore, in the fourth acceptable state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of setting the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode may end after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which “the production sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Further, as described above, in the fourth acceptable state according to the above-described effect example, regardless of at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is performed. The length of the period during which the rear display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received. The length of the period in which the output sound (effect sound) after the operation by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

  According to such a configuration, the directivity is generated in “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output with a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode should be able to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the fourth acceptable state does not occur). You may. That is, in this case, after the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the mode is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing an operation opportunity. Then, in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, as the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears including the fourth acceptance allowable state increases, the rate of suppression is further increased before the symbol variation is stopped (No. If the ratio of (1) the acceptable state is further increased), the performance can be further improved through the state of suppression of “production sound of BGM reproduction”.

  Also, the strong suppression mode for the “sound of BGM reproduction” may be made to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first reception permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the operation is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a directing effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is suppressed based on the fact that the operation is received within the set time (valid period) (weak mode). Suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the fourth acceptable state occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case of the first acceptable state. In a mode (weak suppression mode), a set time (valid period) during which an effect reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, depending on whether or not a special result has been obtained in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination), the “effect sound of BGM reproduction” is set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode) at a predetermined timing. Since the control mode is not set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), it is possible to expand the range of the effect. In the fourth acceptance allowable state, the timing at which the “BGM playback effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to do so.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to set the “specific type of production sound” to a non-audible state (output with no sound (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end of channel assignment)). Good.

  Further, in the above-described effect examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is set as an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “fourth acceptable state”, only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the “first acceptable state”, as described above, the result of the announcement effect determination , There is a case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode) and a case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode). Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that the sword decoration mode is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that, in the case where “the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and the case where the “sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the effect has been received. The production after the corresponding operation has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated includes:
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion touched when the player operates) does not move when the set time (valid period) occurs; and An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” assumes a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 can provide a player with an operation opportunity while moving to a specific position. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given by one of these modes. In addition, as described above, in the first acceptable state, an operation opportunity may be always given to the sword decoration 5001.

  According to the above-described production example, a reception-permitted state (suppression) in which the post-operation production is performed while the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the reception effect), the case where the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)) means that the permissible reception mode is “first reception permissible mode (strongly suppressed mode)”. This means that the mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)) as the special mode. (Strong suppression mode or non-output) "or" fourth acceptable reception state (weak suppression mode) ".

  That is, in this case, when the mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed in a special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), if the operation is accepted while the acceptable sound is being outputted, the operation is terminated. (The first acceptable state). On the other hand, when the mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), when the acceptable sound is received while the operation is being accepted in the middle of outputting, there are cases where the operation is terminated halfway. In some cases, the process is not terminated halfway (the first acceptable state, the fourth acceptable state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

  When the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), the accepting state is executed in the automatic accepting mode (first accepting state). On the other hand, when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the case where the acceptance allowable state is executed in the automatic reception mode and the case where the reception allowable state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode (The first acceptable state and the fourth acceptable state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

  In this regard, when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the display is performed when the first acceptable state occurs and when the fourth acceptable state occurs. May be made different in size. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the acceptable sound is terminated in the middle or whether the acceptable sound is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

  Further, according to the above-described production example, by confirming whether the pre-production is performed as “wide-range pre-production” or “narrow-range pre-production”, the production sound of the specific type (for BGM reproduction) When the sound) is set to the suppression mode, it is possible to easily confirm whether this is the “weak suppression mode” or the “strong suppression mode or non-output”. After that, when the operation is performed while the acceptable sound is being output, it is confirmed whether or not the operation is terminated in the middle, so that the operation is in the “weak suppression mode (not terminated in the middle)” or the “strong suppression mode”. It is possible to reconfirm whether it is "mode or non-output (completed halfway)" during the effect after the operation.

  Further, according to the above-described production example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the wide-range type sound is generated while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is in the strong suppression mode or non-output. In the case where the effect is executed, but the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow-range front-stage effect is executed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction sound) is not set to the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance when the narrow-range type pre-production is performed.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first accepting state, the rate of executing the mode only appearing at the time of the big hit as the post-operation effect is higher than in the second accepting state (the expectation degree is higher). Is higher) as described above. This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-described production examples, when the first reception permitted state (special reception permitted state) occurs before the operation is received, and when the second reception permitted state (predetermined reception permitted state) occurs. Since the effect contents (acceptable sounds, mock-up images, previous effects, etc.) appear differently from when the (state) occurs, the second acceptable condition may occur due to such effect contents (or , The event may occur in advance, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptable states, the fifth acceptable state (specification) generated based on the fifth condition being satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination. (Acceptance acceptable state) is further prepared. In the fifth acceptable state, an operation is accepted while making it difficult to distinguish it from the second acceptable state until the operation is accepted. After that, by realizing the progress of the effect reminiscent of the first acceptable state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest at least until the operation is accepted. In order to preferably obtain such an operation and effect, when the fifth accepting state occurs, the first accepting state becomes longer after the symbol is stopped than when the second accepting state occurs. It is desirable to set so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped is different from each other when the second acceptable state occurs and when the fifth acceptable state occurs. These proportions may be 0% or 100%.

  While making it difficult to discriminate between the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptable state, the effect progresses to recall the first acceptable state. For example, the same mode is output as the acceptable sound when the second acceptable state occurs and when the fifth acceptable state occurs, but the first acceptable state occurs when the second acceptable state occurs. In this case, a mode that cannot be output as the acceptable sound in both the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state (for example, the type of the sound as the first acceptable sound is changed, Output mode). Then, when an operation is received in the second reception allowable state, the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time when the operation was received. On the other hand, in the first accepting state or the fifth accepting state, when an operation is received, (all of) the sound that was in the output state at the time the operation was accepted is output in a suppressed mode. The state is set to a state or a non-output state, and the effect after the operation (the effect after the first operation or the effect after the fifth operation) is executed in the state. In this regard, if the specific effect movable body is used as an object that causes a change in any of the first post-production effect and the fifth post-production effect, the second reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state can be distinguished. Is made difficult, but after the operation is received in the fifth acceptable state, an effect progress that reminds the first acceptable state can be realized. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptable state has occurred (the possibility that the user has mistakenly heard the acceptable sound) becomes conscious, and it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed. .

  That is, in this case, in the first accepting permission state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the effect after the operation (the effect after the first operation). As such an effect, for example, Performing a movable effect (movement effect shown in FIGS. 162 (C) and (D), and effects shown in FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is possible.

  On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance allowable state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the effect after the operation (the effect after the fifth operation), but the effect is the first operation. It is desirable to execute the post-production assuming that the contents of the production are significantly different. That is, the fifth acceptable state refers to “a state in which the appearance of the pre-production and the acceptable sound suggests the possibility of the second acceptable state with a low degree of expectation appears. Until the game is performed, the game entertainment can be maintained. " If something goes wrong, it will be inevitable that the entertainment of the game will drop when the player notices the misrecognition.

  Therefore, as such post-operation production (fifth post-production production), it is desirable to perform production with a tendency that is more suppressed than in the case of the first post-production production. For example, operation reception is performed. At a certain point in time, the specific production movable body that was in a light emitting state is not operated (no driving force is generated), and its light emission range is reduced or the light emission is turned off. Can be performed as an effect that causes In the effect after the second operation, there is no effect change that tends to be suppressed, such as a reduction in the light emission range of the specific effect movable body or a non-emission state. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

  According to such a configuration, an effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to remind the first acceptable state (the effect after the first operation), and thereby the second acceptable state (the second acceptable state). While allowing the user to recognize that the effect is not a post-operation effect), while the suppressed effect contents are being gradually revealed, it is also calmly determined that the operation is not in the first acceptable state (the first operation effect). As a result, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  In order to more suitably execute the fifth post-production effect as a production having a tendency to be suppressed as compared to the case of the first post-production, the first post-production production is regarded as an operation target. The operation means (operation receiving unit such as a production button) is caused to emit light (or cause a change in light emission) in response to the operation being received, and the driving means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operation means ) Is driven to generate a predetermined motion (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-production effect, the operation means (operation receiving unit such as a production button) which is the operation target is operated. The light is turned off (or may be turned off gradually) in response to the reception being made, and a predetermined movement is performed without driving the driving means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means. ( It is desirable to ensure that does not cause the dynamic, etc.). As described above, while performing the post-operation effects (the first post-operation effects, the fifth post-production effects) on the same movable decorative body in the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, The effect after the 1st operation and the effect after the 5th operation are made to appear in such a manner that the contents of the effect are opposite to each other, so that the above-described operation and effect can be suitably exerted.

  FIG. 254 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fifth acceptable state occurs. The variation pattern will be described as a fifth variation pattern, but may be the first variation pattern as described above.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended exhaustion) in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving) and the “fifth change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs First, an effect determination (such as an advance notification determination) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the fifth variation pattern or the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern) is started, and the advance notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), when the timing tE3 at which the fifth predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived, the fifth operation is performed. The fifth reception allowable state (valid period) in which the operation reception regarding the subsequent effect is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fifth acceptable state (valid period) is
The “non-suppression accepting state (“ non-suppression accepting state ”) in which“ BGM reproduction sound (effect sound of a specific type) ”according to the fifth variation pattern is permitted to accept an operation while maintaining the output state in the non-suppressing mode. 254 (a) and (b)), and no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which operation reception is allowed However, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started. “Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 254 (i))”
As "non-suppression / automatic reception effect". The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may come when or after the set time ends.

  According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second acceptable state has occurred until the execution of the post-operation effect is started, whereas the execution of the post-operation effect is started in the automatic reception mode. When this is done, the progress of the effect as if recalling the first acceptable state is realized, so that the entertainment of the game until the start of the effect after the operation can be suitably maintained. .

  In the fifth acceptable state, similarly to the second acceptable state, as shown in FIGS. 254 (b), (e), and (j), the set time during which the operation is permitted (timing tE3 to tE4). ) Occurs, the output of the “acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)” is started when the timing tE2 arrives, and the output state is changed over the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from when the output of the first allowable sound is started to when the operation is accepted is the same. Further, not only is the sound itself output as the first allowable sound itself, but also the point that the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output is the same as in the second acceptable state. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same acceptable sound appears in the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state as to the acceptable sound, so that it is possible to appropriately maintain the gaming interest. Be expected.

  However, as described above, in the second acceptable state, the operation is performed at the timing tB3a (FIG. 249 (e)) in which the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is in the output state after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the reception is made, the set time itself is ended, while the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not interrupted, but is output as the first allowable sound at a timing (no operation is performed). The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (FIG. 249 (e)) as that at the time when the set time (valid period) is generated in the fifth acceptable state. When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 254 (e)) in which the “acceptable sound)” is in the output state, the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” as well as the set time itself is ended. Also That is, with regard to the “acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)”, such a behavior (intermediate termination) appears when an operation is accepted in the first acceptable state. Since there is (FIG. 250 (e)), even in the situation where the fifth acceptable state is occurring, the production progress as if reminiscent of the first acceptable state is realized, It is expected that game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation is received within the set time of the fifth reception allowable state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is displayed as an after-operation effect according to the operation reception. 1600 (first effect member), a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (see FIG. 254 (d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) maintains the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of the time when the operation is received, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. , But is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is not always necessary to execute the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display).

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, in this effect example, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) corresponding to the fifth acceptable state and the post-operation effect (first operation corresponding to the first acceptable state). In each of the above-mentioned "effect after operation", "effect using the specific effect movable body" is at least executed. The production contents of the “production using the specific production movable body” corresponding to the first acceptable reception state and the “production using the specific production movable body” corresponding to the fifth reception acceptable state are as described above. It is. For example, as the post-first operation effect, the movable effect of moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 162 (C) and (D), and FIGS. 163 (CC1) to (CC3) ) Can be performed. Further, as the post-fifth operation effect, there is produced an effect change such that the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body which was in the light emitting state at the time of receiving the operation is reduced or the light emitting range is turned off. It can be performed as an effect.

  According to such a configuration, an effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to remind the first acceptable state (the effect after the first operation), and thereby the second acceptable state (the second acceptable state). While allowing the user to recognize that the effect is not a post-operation effect), while the suppressed effect contents are being gradually revealed, it is also calmly determined that the operation is not in the first acceptable state (the first operation effect). As a result, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  Also, in the effect example (fifth accepting state) shown in FIG. 254, as in the effect example (second accepting state) shown in FIG. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated and displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Are performed respectively. In addition, the display mode of the mimic image and the gauge image is the same as that in the second acceptable state, and is displayed as, for example, an integrated mimic image IG. The same applies to the point that the special mode shown in FIG. 232 (d) is not displayed as the integrated model image IG. As a result, until the operation is received, the same mode appears in the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state with respect to the mock image and the gauge image, so that the gaming interest is appropriately maintained. It is expected.

  In this example, the timing at which the mimic image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the output of the acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and either of them starts earlier. May be performed. Alternatively, only one of the mimic image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mimic image) may be started before timing tE3. However, even in the case of adopting such another example or the other example described above, the configuration until the operation is accepted should be matched between the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (c) to (f), when such an integrated mock image (mock image, gauge image) is displayed, the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted. Is assumed. When the operation is accepted in such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the fifth operation, the effect (the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the movable decoration). At least one of the body effecting operations) is started, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the effect is started after the fifth operation, an integrated mimic image (a mimic image, a gauge image) Is not hidden and remains displayed. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tE3a), the integrated mimic image (specific layer) does not change due to it, and a little time (predetermined Until the timing tE3b at which the time has elapsed, the “display relating to the integrated model image (model image, gauge image)” in the same manner as in the state where the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tE3b comes, an image (annihilation effect) displayed in such a manner that a part or the whole of the integrated mimic image (mimic image, gauge image) in the display state is difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized. Let it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated mock image (mock image, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (extinction effect) starts to be displayed. Maintain state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), the integrated mimic image (mimic image, gauge image) is displayed in the layer where the mimic image is displayed. The image) does not cause a change due to the change, and the display area of the gauge image is reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearing effect is displayed on the layer on the front side, the mimic image and the gauge image are difficult to visually recognize or are invisible.

  In other words, in this case, despite the situation in which the image of the disappearing effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the mock image or the gauge image (integrated mock image) or making it invisible. A mock image or gauge image (integrated mock image) displayed on a specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) remains as it was when operation acceptance was permitted Is maintained, and no change occurs. In addition, for the gauge image, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued over the operation reception. As a result, even when the mimic image or the gauge image (integrated mimic image) is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize or is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized, the mode (at least a part of) the mode when the operation reception is allowed is allowed. You will be able to see it.

  In addition, the display output (display on the layer) relating to the integrated mimic image (the mimic image and the gauge image) is completed within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) in which the image of the disappearing effect is displayed. The image of the disappearance effect is displayed in a situation where the mimic image (the mimic image and the gauge image) is not displayed on the layer.

  Such display methods after the operation is accepted for the mock image and the gauge image are common to the first acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state, so that the gaming interest may be reduced by this. There is no.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptable state occurs occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area. The execution of the narrow area type pre-production using only the area is started. Then, during the period in which the image related to such a narrow-range type pre-production is displayed, first, a mimic image (here, an integrated mimic image) simulating the operation receiving unit is displayed and the first allowable sound is displayed. Output is started (timing tE2). When the display of the mimic image (in this case, the integrated mimic image) is started, a part or the whole of the mimic image (integrated mimic image) becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the image related to the narrow area type pre-production. I have. That is, by reducing the display range of the image related to the narrow-range type pre-production or increasing the transmissivity of the image in accordance with the elapse of time, the “simulated image (integrated model) Image) will be gradually improved. " In this regard, even in the fifth acceptance allowable state, while the narrow area type pre-production is being performed and the mimic image (here, the integrated mimic image) is being displayed, the fifth acceptability state is set. Is received, and operation reception is permitted. The narrow-range pre-production is performed over the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permission state occurs.

  Here, the image used for such a narrow-range type pre-production may be, for example, an image displayed on a different layer before the layer on which the mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed. Then, the mock image (integrated mock image) and the image (narrow area type pre-production) are displayed as a single prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) gradually increases in the moving image. It may be one that expresses a state of being enhanced. However, it is desirable to use the same image of the narrow-range pre-stage effect corresponding to the fifth acceptable state as the image of the narrow-region pre-stage effect corresponding to the second acceptable state.

  Note that, in the narrow area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600 but also the production sound related thereto may be output. However, in view of the fact that the second reception-permitted state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to the operation, the narrow-range pre-production is not performed. It can be said that it is desirable to perform the display as an image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related thereto, in order to increase the concentration on the effect.

  In this manner, the same mode appears in the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state also for the narrow-range pre-stage effect that occurs before the operation reception is permitted, so that the gaming interest is enhanced. It is expected to be maintained suitably.

  According to such a configuration, until the operation is received, the effect is developed in the same manner as the effect contents shown in FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (e). Even if the player is informed in advance that the first reception allowable state with a high degree of expectation has not occurred, it is interesting whether the second reception allowable state or the fifth reception allowable state occurs. It can be expected that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth acceptable state and the post-operation effect (fifth post-effect effect) is started to be executed, the first acceptable state is set instead of the second acceptable state. The effect will be developed in such a way as to remind the user.

  That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (operation reception) in the fifth reception permission state, the sound (in the output state in the non-suppressed mode at the time of the operation reception) Are set to an output state in the strong suppression mode or a non-output state, and this is terminated midway. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first acceptable state), when an operation is accepted, the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are changed to the strongly suppressed mode. In the example shown in FIG. 254 (fifth acceptable reception state), when the operation is accepted, the non-suppression is performed. The “sound of BGM reproduction” and the “first permissible sound”, which were in the output state in the mode, are set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or are set to the non-output state, and are terminated partway. Thereby, with respect to (all of) the sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode before the operation was accepted, the operation was accepted in both the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state. Since the state is set to the output state or the non-output state in the strong suppression mode, the first acceptable state can be recalled at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. 254, It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

  In this case, either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state in response to the operation reception may be determined, but the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state may be different. It is desirable to perform the same processing. For example, in the second accepting state, if the sound that had been in the output state in the non-suppressed state until the operation is accepted is changed to the non-output state in the second accepting state, the operation is accepted in the fifth accepting state. The sound that was in the output state in the non-suppression mode until that time is changed to the non-output state.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 254 (g) to 254 (k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptable state ends) without detecting the operation by the player. As described above, since the fifth acceptable state is executed in the automatic accepting mode, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without an operation by the player, when the operation is accepted, The same processing will be executed.

  Therefore, at the timing tE3c, the sound after the operation (fifth operation after the operation) is started to be executed, and also the sound (here, the sound of the BGM reproduction) which has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode is strongly suppressed. The output state in the mode or the non-output state is set, and these are terminated prematurely. Even in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 250), a predetermined sound (for example, a first allowable sound) is output in a non-suppressed manner until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, and the timing tC4f In the above, the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state may be set, and this may be terminated halfway.

  Further, at the timing tE3d, the execution of the “wide-area disappearance effect” as the above-described disappearance effect is started while the effect after the fifth operation is already in the execution state. The image of the “wide area type disappearing effect” is not necessarily the same as the image itself in the case of the first reception permitting state, but disappears with a change from the background image displayed until the operation is received. It is desirable to be performed as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that the processing is performed using at least half or more of the display area. Accordingly, the same effect (wide-area-type disappearing effect) is applied to the disappearing effect after the operation is received (after the effect is performed after the operation) in both the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state. After the operation is received (after the effect is performed after the operation is performed, the first reception allowable state can be recalled, and the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained. The aspect of such an annihilation effect is the same when an operation is received (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). Is the same as in the case of the first acceptable state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254, the timing after which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output again in the non-suppressed mode in the fifth acceptable state, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends. Is set as the timing tE5 to be performed, but it may be a timing that arrives during the execution of the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) or the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect). It may be the timing of arrival after the end.

  Also, in the first acceptable state, similarly to the fifth acceptable state, the timing at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppressed mode is set when the operation is accepted. Is also good.

  In the first reception permitted state or the fifth reception permitted state, the process of setting the sound that was in the output state in the non-suppression mode to the “output in the suppression mode” or the “non-output state” and the output sound after the operation are performed. The processes to be output do not necessarily have to be executed at the same timing, and may be any processes that are started based on the fact that an operation has been accepted.

  In addition, as described above, when an operation is received in the fifth reception allowable state, the specific production movable body that has been in the light emitting state is turned off for a predetermined period of time in response to this operation (the fifth operation When the operation is received in the first reception allowable state, a driving force is applied to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect operation appears (after the first operation). Direction) is desirable. Also, at this time, in the first post-operation effect, it is necessary to generate a driving force on the driving means corresponding to the operation means set as the operation target so that a predetermined movement (vibration or the like) appears on the operation means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such processing in the effect after the fifth operation. In this case, in the first post-operation effect, the light emission mode of the operation means set as the operation target is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission of the operation means set as the operation target is turned off. It is desirable to make it. It is desirable that these processes in the first reception allowable state and the fifth reception allowable state are modes that can appear when the same result (for example, a big hit win) is obtained as a result of the big hit determination.

  In addition, when a movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the effect after the first operation, it is preferable that the light can be emitted in a mode that does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

  Also, in the first post-production effect, the production sound according to the operation reception is started and then continuously output, whereas in the fifth post-production production, the production sound according to the operation reception is made. Is output for a predetermined time, it is desirable that a state in which no effect sound is output in the non-suppression mode (a state in which the sound is output in the strong suppression mode or a non-output state) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-production effect, there is a tendency that the production sound corresponding to the operation reception is appropriately executed, but the production sound is suppressed compared to the first post-production effect. It can be expected to maintain the entertainment interest of the game appropriately.

  Further, it is desirable to make the acceptable reception sound output different between the first acceptable permission state and the fifth acceptable permission state. That is, as described above, in the first acceptable state, the first acceptable sound (sound effect) and the second acceptable sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth acceptable state, the second acceptable sound is output. An allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and a first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself be output as a different sound.

  As described above, the first acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state (second acceptable state) are the same as the mimic image (integrated mimic image) (FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). Mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as a mimic image (integrated mimic image) in the first acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state (second acceptable state), the size required for the display Are desirably different (similar to each other), and are preferably displayed in a smaller mode in the fifth acceptable state (second acceptable state) than in the first acceptable state. However, the size is displayed in the same mode in the second acceptable state and the fifth acceptable state. In the first acceptable state, a special mode can be displayed as a mimic image (integrated mimic image), but in the fifth acceptable state (second acceptable state), a mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed. ), No special mode is displayed as described above.

  Further, in the first post-operation effect according to the first reception permission state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, the production sound (variation pattern) not triggered by the operation reception It is desirable to start the output of the effect sound output at a predetermined timing in a non-suppressed manner (for example, BGM return). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect according to the fifth reception allowable state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, the effect sound not triggered by the operation reception ( It is desirable that the output of the effect sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern is not started in an unsuppressed manner. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the production sound (the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) not triggered by the operation reception is non-output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first reception permission state.

  Further, as described above, the second acceptable state can be generated in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptable state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptable state does not occur. When the state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptable state may occur within a period until the symbol change in the execution state is stopped. Also, the fifth acceptable state can be generated in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptable state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptable state does not occur. In such a case, there is a possibility that the first acceptable state may occur within a period until the symbol change in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth acceptable state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first acceptable state becomes higher within the period until the symbol change is stopped than when the second acceptable state occurs. It is desirable to set to. This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player detects in advance that the first acceptable state has not occurred before the operation is accepted, the fifth acceptable state occurs. Since it is possible to expect the possibility, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  According to the above-described effect example, as a result of receiving an operation when a mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), If the acceptable sound is not terminated on the way based on the acceptance, not only the acceptable sound but also other sounds (such as “sound of BGM playback”) that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are also used in the non-suppressed mode. The output state is maintained (see FIG. 249). On the other hand, as a result of receiving the operation when the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), based on the received operation, When the acceptable sound is terminated in the middle, not only the acceptable sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are output or non-output in the strongly suppressed mode. (See FIG. 254).

  According to the above-described effect example, in a situation where a big hit has been obtained in the big hit determination, as a result of the operation being received while the mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed, the operation is received based on the operation reception. When the permissible sound is terminated on the way, based on the operation reception, “when the specific effect movable body emits light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)”, and There is a case where a process of reducing or extinguishing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body and causing no effect operation is performed (FIG. 254). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game in a situation where the acceptable sound is terminated on the way. In addition, when "the specific effect movable body emits light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)", non-light emission is performed by "processing to reduce or turn off the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body". It is desirable to emit light also in the portion indicated by the arrow.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each effect example described later, the integrated mimic image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Further, in the case where the mock image and the gauge image are displayed as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

  In each of the above-described examples and each of the following examples, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output such that there is a time when they are output overlapping each other. The output of the second allowable sound may be started.

  In addition, in the acceptable state according to each of the above-described examples and each of the following examples, the mimic image is displayed as an integrated mimic image IG including the gauge image GG. However, the mimic image is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. It is not necessary.

  The accepting state according to each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below can occur in both the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the variation pattern at the time of the loss.

  In each of the above-described acceptable states and each of the acceptable states described below, when the post-operation effect is performed, the disappearing effect is executed as an image different from the mimic image. As a result, it is desirable to execute the disappearance effect by fading out the mimic image itself only when the post-operation effect is not executed in order to prevent the recognition of the degree of expectation. In this case, a process is performed in which the mimic image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the state when the image is in the acceptable state.

  In each of the above-described acceptable reception states and the respective acceptable reception states described below, even if the same acceptable reception state is used, when a big hit is won, when a big hit is lost (losing), or after the operation is performed, The type of the disappearing effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such an aspect.

  The wide-area extinction effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area extinction effect is set to less than half of the display screen. However, if "display area of wide-area extinction effect> display area of narrow-area extinction effect", it is not necessarily It does not have to satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half. Similarly, for the pre-production, the wide-area pre-production was made at least half of the display screen, and the narrow-area pre-production was made less than half of the display screen. ", It is not always necessary to satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half.

  The effect after the operation may be executed by only one of the liquid crystal display, the sound output, and the light emission by the lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, what is necessary is just to cause some change in display, sound, light emission, and the like when the operation is received.

  Further, the “specific type of effect sound” may be a BGM reproduction sound output during a normal fluctuation, or a BGM reproduction sound output across a plurality of fluctuations.

  In addition, the fourth acceptable state may not necessarily be executed in the non-automatic mode, and may be executed in the automatic mode.

  In addition, the post-operation effect when the operation is received in the first reception allowable state (the first operation effect) and the post-operation effect when the operation is received in the fourth reception allowable state (the fourth operation effect). It is desirable to make the production contents different from each other.

  In each of the above-described examples and each of the following examples, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, a process of lowering the visibility of the integrated mimic image IG (specific layer) itself (e.g., increasing the transmittance). May be performed together.

  In each of the above-described examples and each of the following examples, the image relating to the extinction effect (wide-area extinction effect, narrow-area extinction effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance. Even if the simulation image (integrated simulation image) is displayed so as to overlap the entire simulation image, it is possible to confirm the mode of the simulation image (integrated simulation image).

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each effect example to be described later, “narrow area type pre-effect” means “background change (a background image that has been displayed until then cannot be visually recognized, and a new background image is displayed. A direct effect that does not involve an effect that causes the effect to be performed in a state). In this case, the “wide-area pre-production” is “background change (production in which the background image that was being displayed until then cannot be viewed, and the production is performed while a new background image is being displayed). Pre-production accompanied by "). The background image may be a black or white image.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each effect example to be described later, the form shown in FIG. 232 (d) may be omitted as the form of the integrated mimic image. In this case, the “special mode” refers to a mode (a mode illustrated in FIG. 232 (c)) in which the shape of the operation unit (the mimic image itself imitating the operation receiving unit has the same shape and the peripheral decoration image has a different shape). Will be used.

  When a mimic image (integrated mimic image) is displayed in each of the above-described effect examples and each effect example to be described later, the mimic image is referred to as “operation in a movable area” or “operation As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when doing". In this regard, it is desirable that such a dynamic display be continued on a specific layer even after the operation is received until the display is hidden.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each effect example to be described later, the display method related to the mimic image is appropriately changed to the contents described in FIGS. Or may be added. 212 to 248, the description corresponding to these figures, and "BGM" in another example are shown for the mock image, the gauge image, the acceptable sound, and the effect after the operation when the first acceptable state occurs. The validity period in which the sound of the reproduction is in the strong suppression mode "may be changed or added as appropriate to the description or the content applied to another example described in the" Explanation of validity period ". . 212 to 248, the description corresponding to these figures, and "BGM" in another example are shown for the mock image, the gauge image, the acceptable sound, and the effect after the operation when the second acceptable state occurs. The description may be changed or added as appropriate to the description or the description applied to another example, which describes the "valid period that occurs while the playback sound is in the non-suppressed mode." .

[Detailed reproducibility of mimic image disappearance production etc.]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation as to which one of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (holding out). Pattern determination can be performed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (an advance notice effect, etc.) should be selectively caused to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such effect determination (fluctuation pattern determination, notice determination, and the like) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the content of the effect according to the result of the effect determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) relating to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect) and the like. And, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol. The transition to the probability gaming state is made executable.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and the movable body operation and the like are provided. Is provided as an effect having a "function indicating the degree of expectation that a jackpot is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the symbol production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (regardless of the predetermined condition Is established), it is possible to generate a reception permitted state (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the effect determination corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern (such as a preliminary judgment), the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then, it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the effect determination, the acceptable state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific variation pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is desirable to avoid such a situation or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the acceptable reception state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is defined as the production member to be produced as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). A post-acceptance effect (after-operation effect) for generating a predetermined change (at least one of a display change in effect display device 1600, a change in sound effect in a speaker, a change in light emission by a lamp, and an effect operation by a movable decorative body) is executed. However, the performance of the reception-permitted state (effective period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest related to the reception period is reduced.

  Note that, including the above-described examples and the examples described below, the “operation by the player” to be detected is directly operated by the player, such as the “operation button 410” or the “sword decoration 5001”. It is not limited to what is performed (pressing operation or sword-drawing operation), but "touch operation by a player to a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor or "player in a specific space to be detected by the non-contact sensor" Operation ". In short, it is necessary to provide one or a plurality of receiving means (operating means) for receiving an operation by a player (pressing operation, sword-drawing operation, touch operation, non-contact operation, etc.) so as to be provided for the effect. I just need.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with, for example, the following special effects. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations. For example, even if at least one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, Interestingness can be reduced, or some configuration deemed necessary for obtaining further operational effects may be selectively provided. In addition, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the reception period.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, with respect to the mimic image display displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. After the effect has been advanced (after the effect change based on the acceptance has started), it is possible to display the mimic image display even after the effect has been advanced based on the acceptance. During the period, the player can grasp which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) was displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the contents of the effect to be advanced when the pachinko machine is accepted (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc., as the effect after reception, and the notice effect (expected expectation effect) A plurality of reception periods (valid periods) of different types are prepared, and a reception period (valid period) of a type according to the result of the determination (effect determination) can be generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as described later, when an operation by the player is received within the specific reception period, the specific post-reception effect image is displayed on the “effect display device 1600” based on the reception. And a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-acceptance effect image, so that the appearance of the mimic image display becomes difficult when the specific mode appears. That is, in this case, after the acceptance, it is possible not only to check which mode has appeared as the mimic image display, but also to specify the specific mode until the mimic image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility, it is expected to encourage the player to naturally move the gaze target from “mock image display” to “specific post-reception effect image” .

  However, since the mock image display is originally displayed during the reception period for which the reception has not yet been made, if the mock image display is displayed after the reception is made, It is difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-acceptance effect image is in a displayed state, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the mimic image display is not displayed (not visible) while the specific mode is appearing, but is produced after a specific reception. The image is displayed while the specific mode is appearing. That is, in this case, after the action is received by the player, the display effect from the display before reception (display of a mimic image) to the display after reception (a specific post-reception effect image) is displayed in a specific mode. Since the transition will be realized, simply confirm whether the situation is before the appearance of the specific aspect or the situation where the appearance of the specific aspect is finished. It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the display effect to the display after reception (specific post-reception effect image) has been completed.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific mode and the specific post-acceptance effect image both appear based on the reception. However, the specific mode includes the specific reception mode. Before the post-effect image is displayed, the specific post-reception effect image appears in a situation in which the post-effect image has not been displayed yet. That is, in this case, in a situation where the effect image after the specific reception has not been displayed yet, the mimic image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the above-described specific mode. After the reception, the effect image is likely to appear soon, and it will be possible to prompt in advance to prepare the mind to change the gazing point by the player from "simulated image display that is hard to see" .

[Configuration 2]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is received within a first reception period (valid period) of the plurality of reception periods (valid periods), An aspect in which the first post-acceptance effect image can be displayed based on the reception, and the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize separately from the first post-acceptance effect image (first effect mode) Can appear. In addition, when an action by the player is received within a second reception period of the plurality of reception periods (valid periods), a motion image different from the first post-reception effect image is based on the reception. The second effect image can be displayed after the reception, and a mode different from the first reception period (second effect) is that, unlike the second effect image, the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize. Aspect) can appear. The “specific mode” may correspond to one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode, or may not correspond to any of the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  According to such a configuration, the mimic image display can be visually recognized without confirming which of the “first post-reception effect image” and the “second post-reception effect image” is displayed as the post-reception effect image. The type of the post-acceptance effect image (the first post-acceptance effect image and the second post-acceptance effect image) can be inferred simply by checking what kind of aspect the difficulty becomes. That is, the mode (the first effect mode and the second effect mode) in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize means that a predetermined area in the “display screen of the effect display device 1600” where the mimic image display is displayed is at least partially included. The image is realized as an image displayed in the overlapping specific area (a predetermined transmittance is set when the image overlaps with the entire area from the start of appearance), It goes without saying that the effect is realized as an effect using a predetermined effector located at the overlapping position (for example, a moving object effect). Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the gaze destination from the mimic image display even after being accepted, the type of the mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) that appears at the watch target (to overlap the mimic image display) ) Can be confirmed, so that the type of the post-acceptance effect (the first post-acceptance effect image, the second post-acceptance effect image) can be estimated without changing the gaze point. Become

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within a third reception period (valid period) of the plurality of reception periods (valid periods), Although it is possible to display a third post-acceptance effect image different from any of the first post-acceptance effect image and the second post-acceptance effect image based on the reception, the third post-acceptance effect image is displayed. Separately, the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception period can appear as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display.

  According to such a configuration, when the first effect mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display, it is unknown which of the first and third post-acceptance effect images will appear, When the second effect mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display, it becomes possible to infer that the second after-effect image will appear. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it can be recognized that the possibility that the second after-effect image is output is denied, but the first and third after-effect images can be recognized. It is unknown which one will appear, and it will be possible to make the player interested in which one appears, so when a mode appears that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display It is possible to appropriately promote the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the effect is performed after the reception, while maintaining the effect and the sense of tension.

  Note that, here, the post-acceptance effect has been described by exemplifying the “post-acceptance effect image”. However, for example, the “post-acceptance effect” includes “lamp emission” and “movable body operation” in the first reception period and the second reception period. If it is executed in a different manner (or executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but not executed when there is an acceptance within the other acceptance period), the above-described “acceptance” It is also possible to replace "post-effect image" with "lamp emission" or "movable body operation". In any case, in view of the above-described effects such as "the type of the effect after reception can be estimated without changing the gazing point", a mimic image is displayed for the effect after reception. The position is shifted from the front when viewed from the front, and is realized as being executed at a non-overlapping position (a position where the player cannot confirm unless the gaze destination is changed from the position where the mimic image display is displayed). Further, when a plurality of post-reception effects such as “post-reception effect image”, “lamp light emission”, and “movable body operation” are performed in parallel based on the reception, at least one of the post-reception effects is the same as described above. If it is equivalent to the "post-reception effect", it can be said that the above-described operation and effect are achieved.

  When a plurality of post-reception effects (a plurality of post-reception modes) such as “post-reception effect image”, “lamp emission”, and “movable body operation” are performed in parallel based on the reception, the post-reception effects ( The point that at least one of the (after-reception mode) can be equivalent to the “post-reception effect” can be applied to each of the effect examples described below, in addition to the effect examples described above.

[Configuration 3]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation by a player is received within a reception period (specific reception period), the post-reception effect (based on the reception) is performed. As one mode), a special effect mode can be executed, and during the execution of the special effect mode, there are a state where the mimic image display is relatively easily visible and a state where the mimic image display is relatively hard to visually recognize. I have to.

  That is, in this case, even after the execution of the special effect mode (the effect after reception) is started based on the reception, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the mimic image display. . Also, during the execution of the special effect mode (post-acceptance effect), the mimic image display is made to be relatively difficult to visually recognize. ”Is expected to prompt the player to naturally move the gaze target.

  Note that, in the pachinko machine 1, the special effect mode (effect after reception) does not affect the visibility of the mimic image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being received. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the mimic image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600). In the special effect mode (effect after reception), at least a part of the predetermined area is displayed. It is not an image display that is displayed using the display, nor is an effect performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area in a front view. As a result, during the execution of the special effect mode (post-acceptance effect), the mimic image display is made relatively difficult to visually recognize. )), It is expected to prompt the player to naturally move the gaze target.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a reception is made within a specific reception period, at least a special effect mode and a predetermined effect mode appear in parallel based on the reception. It has become. However, the execution of the predetermined effect mode is started after the execution of the special effect mode (behind the special effect mode) so as to adversely affect the visibility of the mimic image display (make the mimic image display difficult to recognize). It is something to be done. As a result, during the execution of the special effect mode (post-acceptance effect), the mimic image display is made relatively difficult to visually recognize. )), It is expected to prompt the player to naturally move the gaze target.

  The process for causing the predetermined effect mode to appear is also started to be executed based on the reception. Therefore, a plurality of post-acceptance effects (a plurality of post-acceptance effects) including at least the special effect mode and the predetermined effect mode are performed in parallel with the post-acceptance effect, and the predetermined effect mode is realized as one mode of the post-acceptance effect. You may do so. In any case, the predetermined effect mode described in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area in which the mimic image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. This is realized as an effect executed using an effecting body located at a position overlapping with the front view.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, when an operation by a player is received within a reception period (a specific reception period), while the mimic image display is displayed, By using a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area, which is a display target area of the mimic image display, it is possible to display a “specific disappearance effect display” as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. The image display is not displayed while the specific disappearance effect display is being displayed after the display of the specific disappearance effect display is started.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the mimic image display. Also, the visibility of the mimic image display is reduced by the specific disappearance effect display until the mimic image display is hidden, and the mimic image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. As a result, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the mock image display is hidden is small, and a decrease in gaming interest when the mock image display is hidden is suppressed. Will be able to gain.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance effect display can be displayed even after the mimic image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. In such a case, the production is started after the reception. The post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area, which is a display target area of the specific disappearance effect display, or (at least one of the specific disappearance effect display). ) Is realized by using an effecting body located at a position that overlaps with the front view when viewed from the front.

  According to such a configuration, among the post-acceptance effects, for a specific post-acceptance effect that is executed at a position overlapping the specific disappearance effect display in front view, the user gazes at the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. Recognition becomes possible without shifting the destination. That is, in this case, at the time when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gazing point in order to grasp the mode of the specific reception effect, It is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment.

[Configuration 5]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, in the period from the time when the operation of the player is received in the reception period (specific reception period) to the time when the mimic image display is not displayed, the specific mode is set. In some cases, when the specific mode appears, the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the indication effect display is executed in a specific indication mode based on the result of the hit determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). If the action by the player is received during the reception period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific aspect is that during the period from when the operation is received until the mimic image display is hidden. To be able to appear.

  In other words, in this case, when the indication effect display is executed in the specific sign mode, it is possible to recognize that the specific mode appears until the mock image display is hidden, and the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to pay close attention to the manner in which the mimic image display appears before the player performs the action. Note that the “specific mode” according to the configuration 5 and the “specific mode” according to the configuration 1 may be the same mode, may be different modes, or may occur in response to different reception periods. It may be.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific indication mode based on the result of the hit determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). When an action by the player is received within a reception period (a reception period different from the specific reception period) corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific mode is such that the mimic image display is not displayed from the time of the reception. There is a case where it appears within the period up to the case where it does not appear, and a case where it does not appear within the period.

  According to such a configuration, when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific indication mode, the specific mode is changed from when the specific mode is received to when the mimic image display is not displayed. Since it will be unknown whether or not it will appear within the period of, the rendition will be improved from the time it is accepted until the mock image display is hidden, Tension can be appropriately maintained.

  The above configuration 5 may be realized by replacing the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (reception period) different from the configuration 5 described above. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the mimic image display is set to the non-display state after the operation by the player is received in the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period). During this period, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the indication effect display is set to the special sign mode (the same as the specific sign mode) based on the result of the hit determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit). If the action by the player is received within the reception period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific mode is such that the mimic image display is hidden from the time of the reception. Not be allowed to appear within the period until In other words, in this case, when the indication effect display is performed in the special indication mode, the specific mode does not appear until the display of the mimic image is hidden, and the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that it will not be compromised.

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the result of the hit determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probable big hit), the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the special signal mode, and the signal is displayed. When an action by the player is received within a reception period (a reception period different from the above-mentioned reception period) corresponding to the effect display, the specific mode is such that the mimic image display is hidden from the time of the reception. In other words, there is a case where it appears within a period up to and a case where it does not appear within that period. Even with such a configuration, when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the special indication mode, the specific mode is set to the non-display state from the time when the specific mode is received. Since it will be unknown whether it will appear in the period up to, the rendition will be improved from the time it is accepted until the mock image display is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

  As for the configurations according to these modified examples (substitution examples), the above-described or later-described configurations applicable to the above-described configuration 5 can be appropriately applied.

[Configuration 6]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect indicating that a reception period in which an operation by a player is to be received will soon occur. Then, a specific symptom effect display among a plurality of types of symptom effect displays can be executed in such a manner as to straddle the timing at which a corresponding reception period occurs, and whether the specific symptom effect display is displayed. , So that the action by the player can be accepted.

  That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to accept an operation by the player while enabling confirmation of which type (aspect) is displayed as the indication effect display, the type (aspect) of the indication effect display is changed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to forgetting to confirm.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received while a specific indication effect display is displayed, a post-reception effect corresponding to the reception (for example, a special post-reception effect). The execution is started, and even when the effect is started after the reception, the specific indication effect display is displayed without being hidden.

  That is, in this case, an operation by the player is received while it is possible to confirm which type (aspect) is being displayed as the indication effect display, and the effect is started after reception in accordance with the reception. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest caused by forgetting to confirm the type (form) of the indication effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.) occurs, the reception by the reception unit is permitted, or the reception by the reception unit is permitted. Since the process of audibly accepting the acceptable sound indicating that the state will be (soon) can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

  Even if the acceptable sound is realized as an audible sound before the corresponding reception period occurs (indicating that the reception period will soon occur), the acceptable reception sound is determined as follows. The audible state is set in a straddling manner, and the audible state can be set to the audible state at least halfway during the reception period. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 in which the tone setting value can be set to "0", in the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", the acceptable sound is output but not in the audible state. It will not be done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by a player is received while the acceptable sound is audible (output state) during a reception period (for example, a specific reception period, etc.), the above-mentioned “mimic image display is performed”. Before the appearance of the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize (such as disappearance effect display)” appears, in the state where the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (such as disappearance effect display)” has not yet appeared, the above-mentioned acceptable sound is generated. Execution of processing for making the state inaudible is started.

  In other words, in this case, even if the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” has not yet appeared after the reception, it is necessary to notify the player that the reception period has already ended. Can be suitably suggested. This makes it difficult to cause inconvenience even if the timing of the appearance of the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears after the acceptance, so that the mimic image display can be displayed in a good visibility mode. become

[Configuration 8]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period (a plurality of reception periods having different effects after reception) are prepared as the reception periods. Then, during the period from when the player's action is received while the mimic image display is being displayed to when the mimic image display is not displayed, the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize. Is to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the case where an operation by the player is received while the mimic image display is displayed in the first reception period, and the case where the mimic image display is displayed in the second reception period. In both cases where the action by the player is accepted, the "mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see" appears before the mimic image display is hidden. ing.

  That is, in this case, in any of the first reception period and the second reception period, the reception period ends while it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the mimic image display after the reception was made. Be able to suggest that you are in a state. Note that the “first reception period” and “second reception period” according to Configuration 8 may be the same type of reception periods as the “first reception period” and “second reception period” according to Configuration 2 above. However, reception periods of different types may be used.

  Further, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to see”, and the first mode appears in the first reception period. Since the second mode appears in the second reception period, it is possible to provide the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” to have an effect related to the type of the reception period.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a third mode is further prepared as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and in the first reception period, regardless of whether or not the reception is performed within the period. First, the first mode may appear, but in the second reception period, the second mode appears when the request is received within the period, and the third mode appears when the request is not received within the period.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player has been received during the reception period, based on the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”. However, in the first reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not a player's action has been received within the reception period based on the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” that has appeared. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved through such directivity.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples or each of the later-described production examples, “the mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” refers to the disappearance effect display in a specific area including at least a part of a predetermined area where the mimic image display is displayed. In addition to the mode in which the effect is displayed, the mode in which the effect using the effector located at a position overlapping at least part of the predetermined area in which the mimic image display is displayed in front view is executed, and the mimic image display itself is visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, the display is reduced in size, blurred, or the setting of the transmittance is changed).

[Configuration 9]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the reception by the reception unit is permitted when the reception period (for example, the specific reception period or the like) occurs, or in a state in which the reception by the reception unit is permitted. Since the process of making the permissible reception sound that indicates (soon) to be audible can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for reception.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect that indicates that a reception period in which an operation by a player is to be received will soon occur. Then, a specific symptom effect display among a plurality of types of symptom effect displays can be executed in such a manner as to straddle the timing at which a corresponding reception period occurs, and whether the specific symptom effect display is displayed. , So that the action by the player can be accepted. That is, in this case, since the operation by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which mode is displayed as the precursor effect display, the game by forgetting to confirm the mode of the precursor effect display A decrease in interest can be suppressed. The “specific indication effect display” according to Configuration 9 may be the same as the “specific indication effect display” according to Configuration 6, or may be a different type (form) of indication effect display. .

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display of the specific precursor effect display is performed even after the effect (the post-reception effect) according to the acceptance of the operation by the player is advanced. This allows the player to confirm which aspect has appeared as the indication effect display even after the reception has been made.

  However, since the indication display effect is originally displayed in a state in which the reception is not allowed (before the reception period occurs), the operation by the player in the state where the indication display effect is displayed is performed. Even if it is performed, the player may be concerned about whether the operation has been accepted. Nevertheless, even after the acceptance, if there is a simple indication of the indication effect indication, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made and the entertainment interest will decrease. You.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, when an operation by a player is received while a specific precursor effect display is displayed, the specific precursor effect is performed even after the reception is performed. A display is displayed, and a mode is displayed in which the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize while the specific precursor effect display is being displayed. Then, after the appearance of the mode, the specific precursor effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, while it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the sign effect display, the visibility is reduced until the sign effect display is hidden. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception has already been performed.

[Configuration 10]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur can be respectively executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (the effect display device 1600) is displayed in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. In the parentheses), a predetermined image display can be displayed, and the mimic image display can be displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. I have. Then, when an action by the player is received during the reception period, a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize is displayed while the mimic image display is being displayed. The “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize” is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the above-described predetermined image display that can be displayed even in a symbol change in which the reception period does not occur.

  That is, in this case, the visibility of the predetermined image display, which is not related to the reception period, is displayed in a specific disappearance effect display so as not to affect the visibility. The game can be advanced without adversely affecting the production performance.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) is used as an image display that is not directly related to the reception period (reception period during occurrence). The second image display can be displayed within the reception period, and the specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( Pending) is displayed so as to affect the visibility.

  According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the type may affect the visibility when a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears. When the action is performed by the player, whether the image display is not directly related to the reception period or not should be checked. It will be possible to provide the directing effect.

  However, in this case, the first image display is displayed as an image (a plurality of modes) relating to (imposing) the improperness (expected degree) of the symbol change, and the second image display is displayed as the image change of the symbol change. Displaying as a display irrespective of a hit (expectation) (not suggesting) avoids a decline in gaming interest when the visibility of the second image display is affected. Above is desirable.

  In addition, when the “specific disappearance effect display” displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the operation by the player is accepted during the reception period. In this case, while the mimic image display is being displayed, the mimic image display is specified using a specific area including at least a part of a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) which is a display target area of the mimic image display. Will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur can be respectively executed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (the effect display device 1600) displays both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. , A predetermined image display can be displayed, and the mimic image display can be displayed even after the effect is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. . The “predetermined image display” in the configuration 11 may be the same as the “predetermined image display” in the configuration 10 or may be a different image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation by the player is received during the reception period, it is difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display while the mimic image display is displayed. A plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as modes that can appear and make the mimic image display difficult to visually recognize.

  That is, in this case, any one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode appears as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. Is expected to be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “first mode” as the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” is executed, the “first mode” When the “second mode” is executed as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to recognize”, the “second mode” is determined to be both the mimic image display and the predetermined mode. The image display is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize only the mimic image display.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to produce a directing effect as to which of the “first mode” and the “second mode” appears as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. It is expected to improve the interest.

  Note that the simulation image display and the predetermined image display are performed in a state where either the reception period of the type corresponding to the “first mode” or the reception period of the type corresponding to the “second mode” occurs. Is desirably displayed in order to improve the game entertainment.

[Configuration 12]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
A first reception period in which reception by the reception unit (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted can be generated, and when an operation by the player is received within the first reception period, it is determined that the reception has been performed. A first reception effect executing means capable of executing an effect display after the first reception in any one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped), and reception means (for example, by operating the button 410) Or a sword decoration 5001 different from the operation button 410), a second reception period in which the reception by the player is permitted can be generated, and the operation by the player is performed within the second reception period. When received, the second reception performance capable of executing the post-second reception effect display in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped) based on the reception being performed. It has an execution means. Note that the degree of expectation (rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%. Further, the first post-acceptance effect display and the second post-acceptance effect display are executed as displays of different types as notice effects. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 12 are reception periods of the same type as the “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the above configurations 2 and 8. The reception periods may be of different types.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either the case where the operation by the player is received within the first reception period or the case where the operation by the player is received within the second reception period is described. Also, it is possible to make the appearance of the mimic image display difficult to be visually recognized while the mimic image display is being displayed after the acceptance.

  That is, in this case, regardless of the type of the reception period, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the mimic image display even after the reception is made. Further, since the visibility of the mimic image display is reduced before the mimic image display is hidden, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the mimic image display is hidden is small. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the display of the mimic image is hidden.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, the first mode is executed as the first post-reception effect display and the first post-reception effect display is performed. Regardless of whether the second aspect having a higher degree of expectation than the one aspect is executed, the same aspect appears as “an aspect in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second aspect having a higher degree of expectation than the first aspect (or the first aspect having a lower degree of expectation than the second aspect) is executed as the effect display after the second reception. Indicates a specific mode as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. However, if the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception, “the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. The specific mode does not appear as the “mode that makes it difficult” and a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the “mode that makes the mimic image display difficult to see” itself does not appear. As described above, the expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, depending on the type of the reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as the effect display after reception only by confirming “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. Since the case where the degree cannot be estimated occurs, it is expected that the effect of such a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” will enhance the game entertainment. .

  As the “specific mode” that can occur in correspondence with the second reception period as the “mode in which the simulation image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the “mode in which the simulation image display is difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the first reception period is described. ", It is possible to infer the type of the reception period based on" a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize ", thereby improving the entertainment interest of the game. Will be able to In order to obtain such an operation and effect, as “an aspect in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, “an aspect” that can occur in correspondence with the first reception period is described as “an aspect in which the mimic image display is difficult to see”. It is more preferable that the display does not appear as a “mode in which the display is difficult to visually recognize”.

  However, as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the “mode” that can occur in the first reception period and the “mode” that can occur in the second reception period are the same. It may be possible to appear.

[Configuration 13]
Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can display a reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, or the like) at least during the reception period in association with the occurrence of the reception period. In connection with the occurrence, at least the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) can be output during the reception period. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received during the reception period, a post-reception output sound related to the post-reception production based on the fact that the operation has been performed (this is one mode of post-reception production) Can also be viewed as a), and when an operation by the player is received while the reception-related effect display is being displayed during the reception period, it is determined based on the fact that the reception has been made. To hide the reception-related effect display. Similarly, when an operation by the player is received while the reception-related production sound is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related production sound is set to the non-audible state based on the reception. I am trying to do it.

  In the above configuration, the post-acceptance effect sound related to the post-acceptance effect is output, the reception-related effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is non- Since the state is set to the audible state, it can be easily recognized that the state is accepted.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not finished at the time when a specific post-reception effect corresponding to the reception is started. Although it is displayed, the reception-related effect sound is terminated at the point in time when the specific post-acceptance effect sound according to the reception is started, and is made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display that is displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the effect is started after the specific reception, while the reception-related effect display is displayed during the reception period. The reception-related effect sound that is made audible (output) is not in the audible state at the time when the output sound after reception is started to be executed. Thereby, even after the performance after the specific reception is started, the reception-related effect sound is set to be inaudible while the mode as the reception-related effect display displayed during the reception period can be confirmed. Thus, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

  In addition, the non-audible state may be a state in which the output process of the reception-related effect sound itself is terminated or the output process of the reception-related effect sound itself in each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below. May be in a state in which the sound is adjusted but the volume is adjusted to “0” but is not made audible. In addition, in the above-described examples and each of the examples described below, the specific post-acceptance effect is a composite effect using a plurality of effectors (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable bodies, and the like). When executed as a special effect, the effect may be equivalent to “effect using a specific effector” among the effectors.

[Configuration 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as an indication effect display, and a specific indication effect display can be displayed before a reception period occurs. Audible output (such as acceptable sound) can be started. The specific indication effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed in a manner that straddles the timing of the reception period. The specific indication effect display is displayed and the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state (output). , The action by the player can be accepted. In this regard, as will be described later, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received while the specific indication effect display is being displayed during the reception period, the specific pachinko machine 1 performs the specific operation based on the reception. Hide the sign effect display. Further, when an action by the player is received while the reception-related production sound is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related production sound is set to a non-audible state based on the reception. ing.

  In the above configuration, based on the fact that the action by the player has been received within the reception period, the specific precursor effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is set to the non-audible state. Therefore, even if the action by the player is received while the specific indication effect display and the reception-related effect sound that are in the execution state before the reception period is executed are received, It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the state has been performed. The “specific indication effect display” according to Configuration 14 may be the same as the “specific indication effect display” according to Configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (form) of indication effect display. Is also good. Further, the “reception-related effect sound” according to the configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the “reception-related effect sound” according to the configuration 13.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned specific indication effect display starts execution of a specific post-reception effect corresponding to being received within the corresponding reception period. At some point, it is not finished and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related production sound is terminated at the time when the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started, and is made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, the specific indication effect display, which is displayed before the occurrence of the reception period, is displayed until after the specific reception effect is started to be executed. The reception-related effect sound that is made audible (output) before the occurrence of the period is not in the audible state at the time when the execution of the output sound after reception is started. Thereby, even after the performance after the specific reception is started, it is possible to confirm the form as the indication effect display that is displayed before the occurrence of the reception period, and the reception-related effect output before the occurrence of the reception period. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the reception period has already ended. The “specific post-reception effect” and “specific post-reception output sound” according to the configuration 14 are the same as the “specific post-reception effect” and “specific post-reception output sound” according to the configuration 13, respectively. May be present or different.

[Configuration 15]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of reception periods in which “the effect content (the type of effect after reception) that is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received” is different. In addition, the mimic image display can be displayed even after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation by a player is received within a specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, a plurality of operations are performed based on the reception. Any one of the effects is made to appear, but a specific mode can be made to appear even if any of those effects appears.

  In the above-described configuration, the type of the presentation mode that appears based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted (“conversation notice” about which conversation appears, and “movable body” about whether the movable body operates or not) A plurality of reception periods for different types of notice effects such as “operation notice” are prepared. In this regard, if an action by a player is received within a specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, any one of the plurality of effects will appear based on the fact that the reception has been made. Even if it is performed, a specific mode can appear. That is, in this case, even if any of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode also appears in accordance with the appearance, so that these are caused by the fact that the action by the player was received within the specific reception period. Yes "can be suggested to be a common production.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation by a player is received during a special reception period different from the above-described specific reception period among a plurality of reception periods, special conditions (a jackpot winning condition, a certain Any of a plurality of modes including a special mode having a different appearance ratio (may be 0% or 100%) depending on whether or not an inrush condition is satisfied. When it appears, the mimic image display becomes difficult to see.

  According to such a configuration, a special mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears before the mimic image display is hidden, and the mimic image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the special mode. Thus, the player can enjoy the effect of changing from the mimic image display to the effect after reception (special mode) without changing the point of gaze.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “specific mode” appears based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received within the specific reception period, the mimic image display is displayed as “ The "specific mode" makes it difficult to visually recognize. According to such a configuration, when the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (special reception period) due to the special mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is suggested, and in the specific mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is not suggested. In some cases, the mimic image display may be difficult to visually recognize (specific reception period), so that the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (specific mode, special mode)” may have directivity. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the “specific reception period” according to Configuration 15 may be the same as the “specific reception period” according to Configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Configuration 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggestion display in which the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced as time passes during the reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced while the effect is in progress, it is difficult to recognize “Is the state being accepted” even after the acceptance is made, and I feel nervous. It is expected to be maintained properly.

  As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment displays a specific divided area on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestion display, and also displays a specific image within the specific divided area. It is described that the display area of a gauge image or the like is reduced. Then, after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted, the display is continued not only for the specific image (such as a gauge image) but also for the specific partitioned area. According to such a configuration, even after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted, the specific partitioned area is displayed, so that the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced. This makes it easier to determine whether the number has decreased.

  In addition, "the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the effect is advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted" means, for example, that the action by the player has been accepted. At the time when the effect is advanced based on the above, a predetermined display area is left as a gauge image, but the display area is set to 0 (non-display) at a later time. is there. However, in this case, at the time when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, it is required that the specific area is still displayed, and the display area of the gauge image is set to 0 for the specific area. It will be hidden after the timing.

  For example, in the configuration 16, when an operation by the player is received, a remaining time suggestion display (a specific image, a specific divided area, or the like) is hidden based on the reception, but the remaining time is indicated. Prior to hiding the time suggestion display, regardless of how much the display area of the specific image has been left at the time of reception, the display area within the specific divided area is a specific value (a predetermined value). ) Is displayed, or only a specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). Is possible.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation by the player is received (when the progress of the effect according to the reception is started), the execution is performed before the reception. The “depiction in which the display area of the specific image is reduced” is continued without being ended. After that, when a predetermined timing comes, a specific image whose display area is a specific value is displayed in the specific partitioned area, or only the specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed. Display is performed (the display area is reduced to 0).

  In other words, in this case, at the timing when the production progresses in accordance with the acceptance, the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. After that, it is difficult to recognize "whether or not the state has been accepted", and it is expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained. In addition, at a timing later than the timing at which the performance of the production according to the reception has been started, the description for significantly reducing the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is performed. It is possible to make it look as if it was just in time within the reception period), and it is expected to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

[Configuration 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of precursor effect displays as precursor effect displays indicating that a reception period will occur. In this regard, as described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific precursor effect display is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, a mock image display related to a reception target has a reception period. It is displayed both within the precursor period before and during the reception period. The mimic image display displayed during the precursor period is different from the mimic image display displayed during the reception period, and is assumed to be hidden before the reception period occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the performance related to the operation is improved from the time before the reception period occurs.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is received within the reception period, the mimic image display is hidden based on the acceptance, but the mimic image display is not displayed. By this time, "a specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display" can be appeared. However, as will be described later, regarding the “specific mode of making the mimic image display difficult to see”, when the mimic image display displayed in the aura period (a specific symptom effect display) is hidden, the non-display is performed. We don't want to appear before it is done.

  According to such a configuration, during the precursor period (specific precursor presentation display), the mimic image display is not displayed without the appearance of the “specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” corresponding to the reception period. Will be displayed. Therefore, even if the mimic image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor display), even if the display is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know. It is possible to make it harder to misunderstand that the reception period has ended.

  If a plurality of “modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” that can appear in response to the acceptance are prepared, including a plurality of “specific modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display”, In any of the aspects, it is desirable that the mimic image display displayed within the precursor period does not appear as it is hidden. However, if the mode is different from any of the multiple modes prepared as “an aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” according to the reception, the mimic image display is not displayed within the precursor period until it is hidden. A “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” may appear. In other words, in this case, since it is recognized as a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” dedicated to the precursor period, even if a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” appears within the precursor period. Thus, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended without the knowledge of the player.

  The “specific indication effect display” according to the configuration 17 may be the same as the “specific indication effect display” according to the configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different indication effect display. You may.

[Configuration 18]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the first accepting period can be generated as an accepting period during the execution period of the symbol change, and the second effect condition is satisfied. A second reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of the symbol change. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period can be continued even after the symbol fluctuation in which the first reception period has occurred is ended and the next symbol fluctuation is started to be executed. However, the second reception period is not continued until after the symbol change in which the second reception period has occurred is ended, and is ended before the symbol change is ended. It has become something. Further, the mimic image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the action by the player is received during the first reception period, In both the case where the action by the player is received within the period, the disappearance effect mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize based on the fact that the action has been received appears.

  That is, in this case, the following effects can be obtained: "Even after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm that the reception period has ended while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a mimic image display." , Can be suitably obtained regardless of whether the period is the first reception period or the second reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the disappearance effect mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to recognize is different between when the image is displayed during the first reception period and when the image is displayed during the second reception period. It is executed in a different manner. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the reception period is ended within the symbol fluctuation during execution based on the type of “extinction effect mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the “first reception period and second reception period” according to Configuration 18 may be the same as the “first reception period and second reception period” according to Configurations 2, 8, and 12, or different reception periods. It may be equivalent to a period.

[Configuration 19]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state) having different game conditions (such as the ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is launched into a game area) are set. And the second game state) can be generated, and the reception period can be generated in both the first game state and the second game state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation by a player is received during the reception period, the “image” is displayed on the display of the mimic image based on the reception. A mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction effect mode) "can appear, and thereafter, the mimic image display is hidden.

  That is, in this case, there is an operation effect such as "It is possible to indicate that the reception period has ended while enabling confirmation of which mode has appeared as a mimic image display even after the reception is made." , Can be obtained even if the reception is made within the reception period generated in any of the first game state and the second game state.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period of the plurality of reception periods is only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The second reception period of the plurality of reception periods can be generated only in the second game state (big hit game) among the first game state and the second game state. In this regard, the mimic image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first gaming state (when received during the first reception period), a specific “mimic image display that cannot appear in the second gaming state (when received during the second reception period) is visually recognized. A mode (extinction effect mode) that is difficult to perform ”can appear.

  According to such a configuration, the first game can be performed simply by checking which mode has appeared as the "mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction effect mode)" without checking the effect after reception. It becomes possible to grasp which of the state and the second game state is being controlled, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that, even in the second game state (when the game is accepted in the second reception period), the "simulated image display is difficult to visually recognize", which is different from the specific "simple image display hardly visible (extinction effect manner)". (An extinguishing effect mode).

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a simulation image related to the reception target (such as a simulation image of the operation receiving unit) is generated. By displaying the image as an integrated mimic image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the image, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game entertainment until the effect after reception (the effect after operation) is executed. I try to suppress it. For such an integrated mimic image display, an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach occur as a result of the advance judgment. It is desirable to be displayed in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and to be displayed in both the low expected non-suppression reception effect and the high expected suppression reception effect. . Also, in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231), the display mode of the illustrated mimic image is replaced with any of the integrated mimic images described below. It is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  The “integrated model image display” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. Is provided with a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as “integrated model image display”, and the same is true in that the mode is displayed in any one of these modes.

  Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permission state (reception period) occurs, it indicates that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. An acceptable sound is output, so that forgetting to operate is less likely to occur. Here, the “acceptable sound” means that, when the sound is started to be output, an acceptable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is allocated). , A sound in a state in which the acceptable reception state (reception period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the “acceptable sound” is a sound that is not output in a situation where an effect that has no relation to the acceptable state (acceptance period) is being performed.

  Further, each acceptable state (each acceptable period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptable state classified into the first type can be generated when the high expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) is selected, but the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) Is an effective period that cannot be generated (an effective period that is generated based on a specific condition (specific high expected variation pattern selection) being established in the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination). In addition, the second type of acceptable state refers to a valid period that can be generated regardless of either a high expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) or a low expected variation pattern (occurs as a result of a preliminary determination. Validity period).

  The “integrated model image display” according to the present embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and the second type of acceptable state (acceptance period). Here, both the first type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period) are receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that the event occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the “integrated mimic image display” displayed in those reception periods is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

  However, a special mode having a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among a plurality of modes prepared as “integrated model image display” is a first type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period). , And in the second type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). ing. In the first type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period), “integrated mimic image display” is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) including a special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to be displayed, and "integrated mimic image display" is displayed in a form according to the result of this determination. In the second type of acceptable state (acceptance period), any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) that do not include the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination, “integrated mimic image” May be determined, and the “integrated mimic image display” may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 1 having the above configurations 1 to 19 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is a kind of effect contents (a sound effect, a cut-in effect, a movable body effect, etc., as a post-acceptance effect) that is advanced when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted. ) Are prepared, a plurality of reception periods (reception effects) are prepared, and a reception period (reception effect) of a type corresponding to the result of the determination (big hit determination, effect determination, or the like) can be generated. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception effect) to a seventh reception period (reception effect) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

  Here, the "conversation notice" as a post-acceptance effect indicates the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) depending on which of the plurality of conversation contents appears. The “cut-in notice” indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a big hit symbol appears) depending on which cut-in image among a plurality of cut-in images appears. The “notification” indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a big hit symbol appears) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

  Each feature will be described for each reception period (reception effect) with reference to FIGS. Each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 254 may be prepared as a reception period different from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or may be prepared as the first reception period to the seventh reception period. It may be realized as any of the seventh reception periods.

  FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. 262 and 263 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time saving is performed), the starting condition is satisfied (reserved exhaustion), and the “first change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination being performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the first variation pattern. Then, thereafter, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the first variation pattern and the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern) is started (see the situation shown in FIG. 262 (a)). )) Performing an effect (advance effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination in addition to the effect of the selected “first change pattern” itself during the execution period of the change effect. Become. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 262 (a), for the sake of convenience, the first effect display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-described “timer effect” and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol change. These displays may be displayed during the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings from each other. The second effect display FE itself may or may not indicate the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ stops in the variable effect.

  That is, when a special result is obtained (when the first condition is satisfied) in the performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the first variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a decorates as shown in FIG. The first reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance of effects after the first reception" is permitted is generated when the timing tF3 after the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the symbol SZ. (“Situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)”). Thus, when an action by the player is received within the first reception period, an effect after the first reception is performed based on the reception.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception period (effective period) is related to the occurrence of such a first reception period. ), An indication of the imminent effect that will occur soon, a mock-up image that suggests the reception target (operation receiving section, etc.), a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, and disappearance that makes it difficult to see the mock-up image display A related display (a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize) and a post-acceptance effect display indicating a degree of expectation (a rate at which a big hit symbol appears) are performed in accordance with the acceptance. As described above, the mimic image display according to the present embodiment is displayed as an “integrated mimic image display” integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 arrives before the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (b), the display screen (effect display device) At 1600), execution of “first sign effect display ZEH1” is started as the sign effect display. The “first precursor effect display ZEH1” according to the example illustrated in FIG. 255 (b) is a timing in which a corresponding reception period (first reception period) occurs (reception for the first post-reception effect is permitted). At the same time as the arrival of the time tF3, it may be hidden before the timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), during the first reception period according to this example, the "first indication effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state where the operation of the player is allowed to be accepted. It has never been.

  However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 262 (c), the timing tF2 before the first reception period occurs is changed. When it arrives, “Integrated mimic image display IG (Mic image display, Gauge image display)” is displayed while “1st precursor effect display ZEH1” is displayed, and “Integrated mimic image display IGH” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first sign effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) during which both “the integrated mimic image display IG” and “the first precursor effect display ZEH1” are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). The first precursor effect display ZEH1 makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the "integrated mimic image display IG". Accordingly, in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) before the first reception period occurs, the player is strongly interested in which target (operation receiving unit) the operation by the player is permitted. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of forgetting to operate or erroneous operation after the first reception period has occurred.

  Note that in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) during which both the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “first indication effect display ZEH1” are displayed, the visibility of the “integrated mimic image display IG” is reduced. It is more desirable to display “the first sign effect display ZEH1” so that the tendency to be gradually improved toward the occurrence of the reception period appears in order to improve the game entertainment. For example, this can be realized by gradually reducing the display range of “the first indication effect display ZEH1” (the range overlapping with the integrated model image display IG) or gradually increasing the transmittance thereof. is there.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIGS. 262 (c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “integrated mimic image display IG” Are displayed so as to straddle the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs. The “integrated model image display IG” is hidden when the reception is made within the first reception period or when the first reception period is ended without the reception. It should be noted that the first reception period according to this example is terminated when the timing tF4 arrives when no operation is received by the player (see FIG. 255 (b)).

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 255 and the effect from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” or “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” are produced. In the example that progresses, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tF3a within the first reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (a), based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received at the timing tF3a, the first reception period is ended, and The effect after reception (the effect after the first reception) is started.

  In the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))”, the degree of expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period. The example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and the reception corresponding to the first reception period is performed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-production.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), the point in time when the operation by the player is received (at the time of reception). At the timing tF3a, which is the time point when the effect is started after the first reception, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize. Like that.

  That is, the first post-acquisition effect according to the present embodiment includes a “first post-acquisition effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or a movable liquid crystal display). Body, effect lamp, etc.) and an effect that is at least a composite of the first post-acceptance output sound using the third effect device (speaker) using the third effect device (speaker). However, among the effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in which an integrated mimic image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display) is displayed, the first effect as an effect after the first reception. (1) The time at which the production display is started after reception is delayed as compared to other production devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made. Has become

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), the integrated model image display IG is provided in a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 (FIG. Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize which of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that it is expected to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest. become.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time during which the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in an easily recognizable manner" after the acceptance. However, even though the reception has been performed and the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) have already been executed, the case where the integrated mimic image display IG is in the reception period. If the same state (the state shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) and (e2)) continues to be displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that "it is late to notice the effect after reception in the execution state".

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), and FIG. 263 (f1) or (f2), the first reception period ends when the operation by the player is received. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tF3a (when the timing tF3b arrives), the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period) is set as “a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. The display according to the first disappearance-related display SK1 (first mode) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, “first disappearance related display SK1- 1 is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" is displayed is "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, even when the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is performed, the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, and thus, after the reception, The effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) can be indicated to be in a situation where the effect is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination of the player will be automatically shifted from the integrated simulation image display IG to the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) (at and after timing tF3b). Thus, even in the situation where the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize the effect. Is made possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period. Further, even after the first post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is started, until the integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (timing tF3a to tF3b). Since the integrated simulated image display IG can be checked with good visibility, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  In the first reception period, the post-reception effects corresponding to the first reception period have low expectations (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1)) and high expectations (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2)). In either case, the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance-related display SK1. , Third effect device), the degree of expectation of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) can be maintained confidential.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (g1) or (g2), the display relating to the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (integrated simulation image display) When the timing tf3c within the period during which the IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the operation by the player has been received within the first reception period. Of the first post-acceptance effect display UG1 as an effect after reception. However, here, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (the first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and “A2” is displayed from FIG. 262 (d). (FIG. 263 (e2)-(i2))) (in the case where the degree of expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), the first reception is performed as shown in FIG. 263 (g2). The second mode (first after-effect presentation UG1-2) is displayed as first after-effect presentation UG1 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, while the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” are displayed, respectively, the “first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or The execution of the effect display UG1-2) after the first reception is started. With this, even when the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the first reception period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) can be used. The post-acceptance effect (the first post-acceptance effect display) can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other effect devices, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display is started after the first reception while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, it is suggested by the player that the first reception period has already ended. The gaze point may be automatically shifted from the “integrated mimic image display IG” to the “first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1-2)”. As expected (after timing tF3c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display according to “first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1-2)” is started. As shown in FIG. 255 (b) or FIG. 263 (h1) or (h2), the “first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1) First, among the "Integrated mimic image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "Integrated mimic image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 263 (i1) or (i2), the “first disappearance related display SK-1” Is not displayed, and as a result, it is determined that the visual recognition is good, so that "the first post-reception effect display UG1 (the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first post-reception effect display UG1-2)" is displayed. Is displayed.

  In this regard, the “first reception effect display UG1” refers to a plurality of modes (here, the first reception effect display UG1-1 or the first effect display UG1-1 or the first effect reception display UG1-1) based on the fact that the action by the player has been received. It is displayed in any of the presentation displays UG1-2) after the reception. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), “first after-reception effect display UG1” is displayed after “integrated mimic image display IG” and “first disappearance-related display SK-1” are hidden. Will be executed for a relatively long time.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the first reception period is generated, so that the effect is within a limited time (the thick line shown in FIG. 255), and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tF3c) of the first post-acceptance effect (first effect display after reception) according to the reception is set to be shorter than the received timing tF3a. The fact is that they have to be delayed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second effect device is prepared separately from the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the operation by the player is performed within the first reception period. When received, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and (c), based on the fact that the reception has been made, a first post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (specification after the first reception) Effect) is started prior to the first post-acceptance effect using the first effect device (the effect display after the first reception).

  According to such a configuration, the delay of the execution start from the timing tF3a at which the reception is performed in the first reception period is limited to a part of the first post-reception effect (display after the first reception). The effect after the first reception itself can be started without delay from the same timing tF3a.

  Such a second effect device may be, for example, a device provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effecting an effect, or It may be provided as an effect lamp capable of effect light emission. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emitting effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 263, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), FIG. 263 (e1) As shown in the figure, the mode in which “Sueyoshi” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the first post-reception specific effect UGT1 (first post-request identification) corresponding to the first reception period. The first post-acquisition effect using the first effect device (first post-acquisition effect display UG1-1) as the first post-acquisition specific effect UGT1-1), which is a mode of low expectation of the effect UGT1. Execution is started. On the other hand, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which “good” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the above-described first effect-specific effect UGT1 (first effect) corresponding to the first reception period. As the first post-acquisition specific effect UGT1-2), which is a mode of high expectation of the rear specific effect UGT1, it precedes the first post-reception effect using the first effect device (first post-reception effect display UG1-1). And start to run.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 262, apart from the first indication effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first reception period. (FIG. 262 (b) to (d)). The first precursor specific effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tF3 at which the first reception period occurs is different from the first effect effect display ZEH1. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tF3.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first reception period occurs, at the timing tF2 shown in FIG. The output of the acceptable sound is to be started (corresponding to "a situation in which the output of ♪ is started in FIG. 262 (c)"). That is, the permissible reception sound corresponding to the first reception period is audibly output so as to straddle the timing tF3 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)”) at which the first reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), or FIGS. 263 (e1) to (g1) or FIGS. 263 (e2) to (g2), the reception allowable sound is audibly output. Even if the player accepts an action during the game, the acceptable sound is not terminated halfway and is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the above-described plurality of reception periods, when an operation is received by the player while the reception-permitted sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the reception-permitted sound is based on the reception. Includes a reception period that is terminated halfway. Therefore, when the mode in which the audible output of the acceptable sound is continued as a result of the reception while the acceptable sound is audibly output within the first reception period appears, whether the state is the accepted state. Can be made difficult to recognize, and it can be expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained.

  However, in the first reception period, even if the player accepts an operation while the reception-permissible sound is audibly output, the reception-permissible sound is terminated halfway (end of the audible output state). However, when the reception is made, an audible output of the first post-reception output sound (corresponding to “♪♪” output in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2)) is started based on the reception. Has become something. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), the “acceptable sound” which is a sound audibly output within the first reception period and the audible sound as a result of the reception during the first reception period. Since both the output sound and the “output sound after the first reception” can be output audibly, it is more necessary to recognize whether the sound is within the reception period or the reception period has ended. It will be more difficult to recognize.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (d), such an output sound after the first reception is similar to the "post-reception effect display UG1", as shown in FIG. Even after the display of “−1” is hidden, the execution is performed for a relatively long time (“♪♪ is output in FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1). Situation "). Further, as for the first post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (the expectation as the post-acceptance effect is relatively low) Case) and an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception). It is desirable to output an output sound (aspect).

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 255, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that the operation by the user is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the first reception period occurs, the timing tF4 comes without any operation by the player being received. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (at the time when the first reception period has ended and the operation is no longer accepted by the player), at the timing tF3a (the first effect device). As shown in FIG. 263 (e3), as in the case of the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the operation is received by the player during the reception period of (1), the integrated simulation image display IG Is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, even if the first reception period has ended in time for the player's reception of the operation, the integrated simulation is performed within the first reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Then, after that, even when the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 263 (f3), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is set as “an aspect in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see”. -2 (the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, “first disappearance-related display SK1- 2 is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG is continuously displayed after the first reception period ends without receiving the image, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to indicate that the first reception period has ended. Further, even in the situation where the first reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated mimic image display IG for a relatively long period of time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” that appears when an operation by the player is not received within the first reception period is the first reception time. It is configured to be executed as a mode different from the “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” that appears based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted within the period. Thereby, when the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” appears, it is possible to indicate that the operation by the player has not been accepted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 263 (g3), among the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2”, the “integrated mimic image display IG” is first turned off. Display. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden, the "first disappearance-related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 263 (h3).

  FIG. 256 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with non-probable change / non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended) and the “second change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination being performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern. Then, thereafter, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the second variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern) is started (see the situation shown in FIG. 264 (a)). )) Performing an effect (advanced effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination in addition to the effect of the selected “second change pattern” itself within the execution period of the change effect. Become. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

  However, in the effect according to the “second fluctuation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol SZ is obtained regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination). When the timing tG3 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) at which the second predetermined time has elapsed since the production started, the second reception period in which “acceptance for the second post-production” is permitted (A validity period) (“the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)”). Thus, when an action by the player is received during the second reception period, the effect is performed after the second reception based on the reception.

  In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, the above-described first reception period occurs (FIG. 255). In the same way as above, an indication effect display indicating that the reception period (valid period) will soon occur, a mimic image display indicating the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.), and a suggestion of the remaining time of the reception period Direction of the gauge image display, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display (a mode in which the mimic image display becomes hard to see), and a presentation after reception that suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) according to the acceptance. The display is performed respectively. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”. As described above, the mimic image display is displayed as an “integrated mimic image display IG” that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be separately displayed. It may be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 arrives before the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. The execution of the “second sign effect display ZEH2” is started as a display. As for the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 255, the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) is set. When the timing tG2 before the occurrence has arrived, the above-mentioned “second sign effect display ZEH2” is displayed (see FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 264 (c)). )). As shown in FIG. 264 (c), at least a part of the area where the “integrated mimic image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “second omen effect display ZEH2” is displayed. Regarding the point that the “integrated mimic image display IG” is difficult to visually recognize by the “second sign effect display ZEH2”, the example shown in FIG. 262 (c) also indicates the sign effect corresponding to the first reception period. Is the same as

  Also, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. When the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) or when the second acceptance period is ended without the acceptance. This is also the same as the case of the example shown in FIG. 255 (first reception period). It should be noted that the second reception period according to this example is terminated when the timing tG4 has arrived when no operation is received by the player.

  However, in the example (second reception period) shown in FIG. 256 (b), the “second omen effect display ZEH2” is related to the example (first reception period) shown in FIG. 255 (b). In addition to the aspect (image display) different from the case of the “first indication effect display ZEH1”, the timing (the second after-effect) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. Is not displayed as the time tG3 arrives, but is displayed across the timing tG3.

  In other words, in this case, in the second reception period, not only the “integrated mimic image display IG (mimic image display, gauge image display)” but also the “integrated mimic image display IG” that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “second precursor” While the effect display ZEH2 "is being displayed, the player can accept the operation. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period occurs, at least a part of the “integrated mimic image display IG” is hardly visually recognized by the “second sign effect display ZEH2”, Tension during the period can be appropriately maintained.

  Here, the “second sign effect display ZEH2” may be displayed until the timing tG4 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or the reception period may be displayed. The display may be hidden at a predetermined timing within (here, the second reception period). Further, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the indication effect display (the second indication effect display ZEH2) is “integrated model” within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period). In order that the area overlapping with the image display IG (display of a simulated image and display of a gauge image) tends to be gradually reduced, the display range is gradually reduced so as to be displayed. This is desirable in that the visibility of the “image display IG” is gradually improved during the reception period. In addition, the area where the second symptom effect display is displayed and at least a part of the area where the “integrated mimic image display” is displayed do not necessarily overlap each other during the entire period in which the second symptom effect display is displayed. For example, after a predetermined timing within the reception period of the entire period has arrived, the second indication effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed. You may make it.

  Also, the second indication effect display ZEH2 according to this example is received when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) or the reception period (here, the second reception period). When no action by the player is received until a predetermined timing within the period, the display is hidden.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 256, and the effect from FIG. In the example that progresses, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tG3a in the second reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), based on the fact that the action by the player has been received at the timing tG3a, the second reception period is ended, and The effect after reception (the effect after the second reception) is started.

  In the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))”, the degree of expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period. The example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and the reception corresponding to the second reception period is performed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-production. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 256 as well, at the timing tG3a when the operation by the player is received (when the effect is started after the second reception in response to the reception), the “integrated mimic image display IG” is displayed. Is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated simulated image display IG, but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 when the operation by the player is received (when the effect is started after the second reception) ) At timing tG3a so that it is not hidden or made difficult to see.

  That is, the second post-acquisition effect according to the present embodiment includes a “second post-acquisition effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or a movable liquid crystal display). Body, effect lamp, etc.) and at least a combined effect of the second post-acceptance output sound using the third effect device (speaker) using the third effect device (speaker). However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in which an integrated mimic image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display) is displayed, the second effect as an effect after the second reception is provided. 2 The time at which the production display is started after the reception is delayed as compared with other production devices, so that even after the reception is made, the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second sign production display” ZEH2 ” It has become a thing to maintain the 認性.

  According to such a configuration, as in the case of the above-described first reception period, as shown in FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), even after the reception is made, the integration is continued within the reception period ended. In which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the chemical image display IG is displayed, and in which mode the precursor effect display is (first precursor effect display ZEH1, second precursor effect) The player can easily recognize whether or not the game was displayed on the display ZEH2, etc.), so that it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest is appropriately suppressed.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in what manner the integrated mimic image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH were displayed during the reception period, it is necessary to set the following after the reception. It can be said that it is desirable to set a long time “the time during which the integrated simulated image display IG and the indication effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner”. However, although the reception has been performed and the post-reception effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) have already been executed, the integrated mimic image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are not accepted during the reception period. , It may be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game has been accepted. Will be delayed. "

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (b), FIG. 265 (f1) or (f2), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second reception period ends due to the operation being received by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b comes), the display of the “second disappearance-related display SK2” different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started as “a mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. I have to.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, “second disappearance related display SK2” Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed is displayed with "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

  According to such a configuration, even when the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is performed, the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, and thus, after the reception, The effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) can be indicated to be in a situation where the effect is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination of the player is automatically shifted from the integrated simulation image display IG to the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) (at and after timing tG3b). Thus, even in the situation where the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize the effect. Is made possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period. Further, even after the second post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is started, until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second indication effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility, so that the integrated mimic image display IG is hardly visually recognized only by the second indication effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately. In addition, when the reception is performed after the second indication effect display ZEH2 is hidden within the second reception period, the second indication effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, it is possible to check the aspect of the integrated simulated image display IG without any visual confirmation while maintaining good visibility.

  Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second disappearance-related display SK2” is displayed while the “sign effect display (here, the second sign effect display ZEH2)” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the “second disappearance-related display SK2” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “second omen effect display ZEH2” is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, by making it difficult to visually recognize the second indication effect display ZEH2, it is suggested that the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) is already being executed. It is expected that the gaze destination of the player is automatically shifted from the second indication effect display ZEH2 to the effect after reception (at timing tG3b and thereafter). Thus, in a situation where the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) has already been executed, the second indication effect display ZEH2 can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the precursor effect display was displayed during the reception period. In addition, even after the effects after the reception (the second effect device and the third effect device) are started, until the indication effect display becomes difficult to recognize (timing tG3a to tG3b), the indication effect display is not performed. Since the mode (here, the second indication effect display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the second reception period, a low expectation mode (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-reception effect corresponding to this, and a high expectation mode (FIG. 265 (e2) to FIG. 265 (e2)). A different aspect (second disappearance-related display SK2-1, SK2-2) appears as the second disappearance-related display SK2 when (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 265 (f1) and (f2), there is a situation in which “the second reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even if it is, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (the second disappearance-related display SK2-1) and the second mode (the second disappearance-related display SK2-). By confirming which of the two is displayed, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the “second post-reception effect display” is executed in a highly expected mode.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (b), FIG. 265 (g1) or (g2), the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (the integrated simulated image display IG) When the timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the display becomes difficult to visually recognize, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted in the second reception period The execution of the “second reception effect display UG2” as the post effect is started. However, here, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (second after-effect display UG2-1) is displayed as the second after-effect display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and “B2” from FIG. 264 (d) is displayed. (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2)) ”(in a case where the degree of expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), as shown in FIG. 265 (g2). The second mode (second after-effect presentation UG2-2) is displayed as second after-effect presentation UG2 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, “the integrated mimic image display IG”, “the second indication effect display ZEH2”, and “the second disappearance related display SK2 (the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the second disappearance related display SK2-2)” are displayed. The execution of the “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or the second reception effect display UG2-2)” is started while being displayed. Thus, even when the integrated mimic image display IG and the second indication effect display ZEH2 are continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the second reception period, the first effect device is provided. The post-acceptance effect (second after-effect display UG2) in the (effect display device 1600) can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other effect devices, and a decrease in gaming interest is suppressed. Will be able to do it. In addition, since the integrated display image IG and the second indication effect display ZEH2 are difficult to visually recognize, the effect display UG2 is started after the second reception, so that the second reception period has already ended. While the player's gaze point is changed from “integrated mimic image display IG” or “second sign effect display ZEH2” to “second effect display UG2 (second effect display UG2-1 or second effect display UG2-1). After the reception, it is expected that the display will be automatically shifted to “effect display UG2-2)” (after timing tG3c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display according to “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2-2)” is started. As shown in FIG. 256 (b), FIG. 265 (h1) or (h2), the “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2) -2) is displayed, first, among the "integrated mimic image display IG", the "second sign effect display ZEH2", and the "second disappearance-related display SK2", "integrated mimic image display IG2" IG "and" the second indication effect display ZEH2 "are not displayed. Then, after the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” are respectively hidden, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), FIG. 265 (i1) or (i2). , "The second disappearance-related display SK2 (the second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or the second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" is not displayed. The display related to the second post-reception effect display UG2 (the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is performed.

  In this regard, the "second reception effect display UG2" refers to a plurality of modes (here, the second reception effect display UG2-1 or the second effect display UG2-1 or the second reception effect display) having different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the action by the player has been received. It is displayed in any of the effect display UG2-2) after reception. Therefore, the “second post-reception effect display UG2” is compared even after the “integrated mimic image display IG”, the “second precursor effect display ZEH2”, and the “second disappearance-related display SK2” are hidden. It will be executed for a long time.

  By the way, in the effect example (FIGS. 262 and 263) corresponding to the above-described first reception period, even if the reception is made during the first reception period and the “first reception effect display UG1” is executed, The background image is not changed before and after the “first effect presentation display UG1” is started and is maintained. On the other hand, in the effect example (FIGS. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, when the reception is made within the second reception period and the “second reception effect display UG2” is executed, The background image is switched before and after the “second presentation effect display UG2” is started.

  According to such a configuration, under the conditions shown in FIGS. 265 (e) and (f) where the switching of the background image does not occur (the timings tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256), the effect display device 1600 (the first display). Even if there is an effect change in (1 effect device), the “second effect display UG2 after reception” can indicate that it is in a situation where it has not been started yet.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265, as the post-acceptance effect, the background image is switched to the same background image when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears and when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears. Different background images may be switched between when a low aspect appears and when a highly expected aspect appears. Further, the background image may be switched when an aspect having a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect having a low degree of expectation appears.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, the effect is displayed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 256). Various displays are provided within a limited and limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tG3c) of the second post-acceptance effect (the second post-acceptance effect display) according to the reception is set to be shorter than the received timing tG3a. The fact is that they have to be delayed.

  Therefore, also in this example, when an operation by the player is received within the second reception period, as shown in FIGS. 256 (b) and (c), the operation is performed based on the reception. And starting the second post-acquisition effect using the second effect device (specific effect after the second reception) prior to the second after-effect effect using the first effect device (second-after-effect display). I try to make it.

  According to such a configuration, the start of the execution is delayed from the timing tG3a at which the reception is made in the second reception period, only in a part of the effect after the second reception (display of the effect after the second reception), The effect itself after the second reception can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

  As described above, such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as a main liquid crystal, or may be capable of effect operation. It may be provided as an effect movable body or an effect lamp capable of effect light emission. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emitting effect, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), FIG. 265 (e1) As shown in the figure, the mode in which the “kimono for women” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the specific effect UGT2 (second effect) after the second reception corresponding to the second reception period. As a second post-acquisition specific effect UGT2-1), which is a mode in which the degree of expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT2 is low, the second post-reception effect using the first effect device (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is used. Execution is started earlier. On the other hand, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which the “kimono for men” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (the second production device) corresponds to the above-mentioned second production-specific production UGT2 (corresponding to the second reception period). As a second post-reception specific effect UGT2-2 which is a mode of high expectation of the second post-reception specific effect UGT2, a second post-reception effect using the first effect device (second post-reception effect display UG2-2). ) Is started before execution.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 264, apart from the second indication effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the second reception period. A sign effect (a second sign specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 264 (b) to (d)). The second sign specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the second sign effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in that the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs is different. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tG3.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tG2, the output of the allowable reception sound (corresponding to “♪” output in FIGS. 264 (c) and (d)) is started. That is, the acceptable sound corresponding to the second accepting period is audibly output in a manner straddling the timing tG3 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)”) at which the second accepting period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the second reception period, as the reception allowable sound, a long-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and a short-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. Are respectively output. In the example shown in FIG. 256 (d), the output of the long-permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound is started at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of one of the long-permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound may be started at the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs and thereafter.

  In the second reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the long-permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are audibly output, based on the reception being performed. The long-permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are terminated in the middle (in the audible output state).

  Further, in the second reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the allowable reception sound (long-time allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) is audibly output, the allowable reception sound is terminated in the middle. In addition, when the reception is made, based on this, based on the reception, the second post-reception output sound different from the first post-reception output sound (FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2) is output as “♪♪ ) Is started. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the fact that the reception was made The effect (the output sound after the second reception) performed accordingly will not conflict (overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 256 (d), such an output sound after the second reception is similar to the “post-second reception effect display UG2”, as shown in FIG. Is executed for a relatively long time even after "" is hidden ("Situation in which ♪♪ is output in FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)"). Equivalent). Further, as for the second post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (the expectation as the post-acceptance effect is relatively low) Case) and an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIGS. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception). It is desirable to output an output sound (aspect).

  In the second reception period, the long-permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are output as the permissible sounds. However, these two permissible sounds need not always be output. As in the reception period, only one reception-permitted sound may be output.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that the operation by the user is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the second reception period has occurred, the above-mentioned timing tG4 comes without any operation by the player being received. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (at the time when the second reception period has ended and the operation is no longer accepted by the player), at the timing tG3a (second effect device). As shown in FIG. 265 (e3), as in the case of the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the action is received by the player during the reception period of (1), the integrated simulation image display IG Is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see. In this effect example, since the second indication effect display ZEH2 is not displayed at the timing tG4, the second indication effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after the timing tG4.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends when the player's operation is not received in time, the integrated simulation is performed within the second reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Thereafter, even when the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 265 (f3), the second disappearance-related display SK2 is set as “an aspect in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see”. -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “second disappearance related display SK2- The first or second extinction related display SK2-2 ”is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ second extinction related display SK2 ”is displayed is“ integrated model image display IG (model image display IG). , Gauge image display) ”is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when the integrated model image display IG is continuously displayed after the second reception period ends without reception, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to indicate that the second reception period has ended. In addition, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated mimic image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the IG. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation by the player is not received within the second reception period, the “second disappearance-related display SK2-1” is displayed as the second disappearance-related display SK2. In the case, if the action by the player has been received within the second reception period, the effect has progressed from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))”. This is equivalent to a case where a post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation has been executed. On the other hand, the case where “the second disappearance related display SK2-2” is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 when the operation by the player is not received within the second reception period is the second reception period. If the action by the player has been received within the above, if the effect has progressed from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2)-(i2))” (relative expectation (If a high post-production effect has been performed).

  That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is not accepted in the second reception period, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed after the end of the second reception period. By simply checking the mode as the “second disappearance-related display SK2” (the second disappearance-related display SK2-1, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2), the effect after the second reception is less expected. Since it is possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether the game has been executed in a highly expected mode, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 265 (g3), among the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “second disappearance related display SK2”, first, “integrated mimic image display IG” is hidden. I do. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden, the “second disappearance-related display SK2” is hidden as shown in FIG. 265 (h3).

  FIG. 257 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the third condition is satisfied and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended), and the “third change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination being performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the third variation pattern. Then, thereafter, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the third variation pattern and the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the third variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (preliminary effect) in accordance with the result of the effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “third variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect according to the “third variation pattern”, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination), the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. When the elapsed timing tH3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance for effects after the third operation" is permitted. The third reception period (valid period) is generated. Thereby, when an action by the player is received within the third reception period, the effect after the third reception is performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the third reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the third post-effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received (in the first effect device) FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) is the “display effect after the third reception”, the “specific effect after the third reception” in the second effect device, and the “output sound after the third reception” in the third effect device. With reference to the above-described first post-reception effect (“first post-reception effect display” in the first production device, “second post-reception specific effect” in the second production device, and “first reception in the third production device”) ), But the other configurations are basically the same.

  For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH1 has arrived, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), on the display screen (the effect display device 1600), the execution of the "first sign effect display ZEH1" is started as the above-mentioned sign effect display. Note that the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” according to the example illustrated in FIG. 257 (b) also has a corresponding reception period (third reception period) at which timing (reception for the third post-reception effect is received). The display is hidden in response to the arrival of (allowable timing) tH3. However, it is the same as the case of the above-described first reception period that the image may be hidden before the timing tH3. In any case, even in the first reception period according to this example, the “first indication effect display ZEH1” is not displayed in a state where the operation of the player is allowed to be accepted.

  The timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), while the "first sign effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display) Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “first sign effect display ZEH1” is displayed. FIG. 255 and FIG. 255 show the configuration relating to the “integrated mimic image display IG” and “first omen effect display ZEH1” displayed in connection with the third reception period, and other examples related thereto. 262 and FIG. 263, and are omitted here.

  The timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the third reception period is set. Will occur. The point that the “integrated model image display IG” is not displayed when the reception is made within the third reception period or when the third reception period is ended without the reception being performed. The same is true. It should be noted that the third reception period according to this example is ended when the timing tH4 comes when no operation is received by the player.

  The timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period is terminated based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the third reception period (after the third reception) Effect) is started. Note that at least a case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and a case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed are also prepared as the third post-acceptance effect. The content of the effect (the effect display after reception, the specific effect after reception, and the content as the output sound after reception) is different from the above-mentioned effect after the first reception, but the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the plurality of modes is executed. The points and the like are the same as in the case of the first post-acceptance effect. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”. Further, at the timing tH3a when the action by the player is received (when the effect is started after the third reception in response to the reception), the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated It is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned first post-acquisition effect that the simulated image display IG is not made difficult to visually recognize.

  The timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3b has arrived, the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (the first common period corresponding to the first reception period and the third reception period) is regarded as “a state in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. The display according to (1st aspect of 1 disappearance related display SK1) is started. Note that the configuration of the “first disappearance-related display SK1” displayed in association with the third reception period and another example related thereto are as described above with reference to FIGS. 255 and 263. Therefore, it is omitted here.

  According to such a configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) relating to the “period from when the first precursor effect display ZEH1 is displayed to when the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed”, the first effect device has the first effect. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception period and the third reception period has occurred (whether or not it has occurred), whereby the second production device or the third production device To encourage interest in the game, and to enhance the interest in the game by giving them a strong interest in which of the modes (the first display after the reception and the third display after the reception) appear as the post-reception production display. Will be able to

  Note that, even in the third reception period, regardless of whether the post-reception effect corresponding to the third reception period is performed in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is Since the same mode (the first disappearance-related display SK1-1) is made to appear, the first production device can be used even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) is started. In the (effect display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be maintained as confidential. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and a different disappearance-related display may appear depending on the degree of expectation. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  The timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the “third post-reception effect display” as the post-reception effect in the third effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation by the player being received within the third reception period. (The type of the notice effect is different from the effect display after the first reception) ”). As the “display after third reception effect display”, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and a low-expectation mode and a high-expectation mode are executed as the third post-reception effect. As described above, a different aspect appears as the “effect display after the third reception” depending on the case.

  That is, in this case, the execution of “the third post-acceptance effect display” is started while the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” are displayed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred or whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred. It is expected that the display will be automatically shifted from the "simulated image display IG" to the "effect display after reception" (at and after timing tH3c).

  Then, in this example as well, when the display relating to the “presentation display after the third reception” is started in this manner, regardless of the mode, while the “representation display after the third reception” is displayed, first, Of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-1”, the “united model image display IG” is not displayed. Then, after the “integrated mimic image display IG” is hidden, the “first disappearance-related display SK-1” is hidden, and as a result, “ The display relating to “the effect display after the third reception” is performed.

  In this regard, it has been described above that “the third post-acceptance effect display” is also displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the action by the player has been received. Therefore, the “effect display after the third reception” also remains after “the integrated simulated image display IG” and “the first disappearance-related display SK-1” are hidden as shown in FIG. 257 (b). , For a relatively long time.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, the effect is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 257) and is limited. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-acceptance effect (the third post-acceptance effect display) according to the reception is set to be shorter than the received timing tH3a. The fact is that they have to be delayed.

  Therefore, even when an operation (operation) by the player is received in the third reception period, as shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c), based on the fact that the operation has been received, The third post-acceptance effect using the second effect device (specific effect after the third reception) is started prior to the third after-effect effect using the first effect device (the third post-effect display). I have to. The content of the special effect after the third reception is also different from the specific effect after the first reception, but is basically performed in the same manner as the specific effect after the first reception.

  For example, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the specific effect after the third reception, and a case with a low degree of expectation and a mode with a high degree of expectation are executed as the effects after the third reception. In some cases, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different mode appears as the specific effect after the third reception. As shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and (c), the third effect after the third reception using the second effect device is changed to the third after-effect display using the first effect device. The point that the execution is started in advance is also the same as in the case of the above-described first special effect after reception.

  Also, at the time of occurrence of the third reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, a precursor effect (common handling between the first reception period and the third reception period) is performed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). It is desirable to execute the first precursor specific effect that is performed. Also, in this case, the sign specifying effect (first sign specifying effect) on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first sign effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and is not the third sign effect. It is also executed at the point in time when the timing tH3 at which the reception period occurs has arrived, and it is more preferable that the steps are executed so as to straddle the timing tH3.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and even when the third reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tH2, the output of the acceptable sound is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the third reception period is audibly output so as to straddle the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs, and the acceptable reception sound is audibly output. Among them, the operation by the player can be accepted. This acceptable sound is preferably the same sound as the acceptable sound output when the first acceptance period occurs.

  However, in the third reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the allowable reception sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the allowable reception sound is changed based on the reception. I try to end it.

  In addition, in the third reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, but also when the reception is performed, The audible output of the third post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the first post-reception output sound, the second post-reception output sound, and the like, is started based on the above. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed in the reception period and the reception are performed. The effect (the output sound after the third reception) performed accordingly does not conflict (overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 257 (d), the output sound after the third reception is similar to the “display effect after the third reception”, as shown in FIG. 257 (d). Even after “1” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Also, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the third post-acceptance output sound, and a low expectation mode and a high expectation mode are executed as the third reception effect. It is desirable to output different output sounds (aspects) depending on the case.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives by simply looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but it is difficult to recognize the second effect device or the effect device. If the third effect device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tH3a arrives earlier. This makes it possible to encourage a player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 257, even when an operation by the player is not received within the third reception period, basically, an operation by the player is received within the first reception period. It is the same as when not performed.

  That is, in this case, after the third reception period has occurred, the timing tH4 comes without an operation by the player being received. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (at the time when the third reception period has ended and the operation is no longer accepted by the player), at the timing tH3a (the third effect device). As with the effect display device 1600 (the first effect device) when the operation is received by the player within the reception period of (1), not only the integrated mimic image display IG is not hidden, but also the integrated display. It is also made difficult to make the simulated image display IG difficult to see.

  Thereafter, even when the player's action is not accepted, the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (the first reception period and the third The display according to the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK <b> 1) corresponding to the reception period is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, “first disappearance-related display SK1- 2 is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation by the player is not received, it is not possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period, so that the player is strongly encouraged to perform the operation. Will be able to do it. In the third reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, when an operation by the player is not received, a different mode appears according to the degree of expectation as “first disappearance-related display SK1”. In addition, a mode (first extinction-related display SK1-2) different from a mode (first extinction-related display SK1-1) that appears when an acceptance is made is made to appear.

  After that, of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-2”, first, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden, the “first disappearance-related display SK-2” is hidden.

  FIG. 258 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect content when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination. 266 and 267 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended), and the “fourth fluctuation pattern” is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. Then, thereafter, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the effect description according to the fourth variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (a)). During the execution period of the fluctuation effect, an effect (advance effect) according to the result of the notice effect judgment is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fourth fluctuation pattern” itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 266 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE () indicating the jackpot expectation degree (the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing when the decorative symbol SZ stops in the variable effect). Here, it is assumed that the above-described “timer effect” and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol change. These displays may be displayed during the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings from each other.

  However, in the effect according to the “fourth variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 258, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ starts regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination). When a timing tI3 (a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) at which a fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the operation is performed, the “fourth operation is performed. The above-described fourth reception period (valid period) in which "acceptance for post-production" is permitted is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)). Thus, when an action by the player is received within the fourth reception period, an effect is performed after the fourth reception based on the reception. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the fourth after-effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received (in the first effect device) FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) shows the “fourth post-acceptance effect display”, the “fourth specific effect after reception” in the second effector, and the “fourth output sound” in the third effector. With reference to the above-described first post-reception effect (“first post-reception effect display” in the first production device, “second post-reception specific effect” in the second production device, and “first reception in the third production device”) After output sound "). Further, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the fourth extinction different from the first extinction-related display SK1 is defined as “a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. The point that the related display SK4 appears is also different from the case of the first reception period, but other configurations are basically the same.

  Hereinafter, the effect performed in connection with the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) will be described, but the description of the same effect as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect) is described here. Then I will omit it. In other words, for items that are not particularly mentioned, the effect is performed in the same manner as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same applies to other examples and modifications.

  For example, the timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI1 has arrived, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 266 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the first effect display ZEH1 is displayed as the above-mentioned effect display. Is started.

  The timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI2 has arrived, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display) Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “first sign effect display ZEH1” is displayed.

  The timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (d), while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the fourth reception period is set. Will occur.

  The timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. In other words, the effect progresses from the example shown in FIG. 258 or from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” or “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))”. In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is received at timing tI3a in the fourth reception period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258 (a), based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received at the timing tI3a, the fourth reception period is ended, and the fourth reception period is terminated. The effect after reception (the effect after the fourth reception) is started.

  In the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))”, the degree of expectation is relatively low as the post-reception effect corresponding to the fourth reception period. The example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and the reception corresponding to the fourth reception period is performed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-production. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation as the post-reception effects corresponding to the fourth reception period, and whenever a reception is received, a specific mode (for example, C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (I1))) may appear. In this case, even in the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the fourth reception period, a plurality of modes are not prepared according to the degree of expectation. An aspect will be made to appear.

  Similarly, in the fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 258 (b), FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2), the point in time when the operation by the player is received (fourth according to the reception) At timing tI3a, which is the time when the effect is started after the reception, the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see. .

  The timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3b has arrived, a “mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” appears. However, as described above, when the reception is received in the fourth reception period, the display related to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started (timing tI3b).

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "fourth annihilation related display SK4" is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

  According to such a configuration, even when the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is performed, the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, and thus, after the reception, The effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) can be indicated to be in a situation where the effect is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze destination of the player will be automatically shifted from the integrated simulation image display IG to the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) (at and after timing tI3b). Thus, even in the situation where the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) has already been executed, the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize the effect. Is made possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  Further, in the fourth reception period, a low expectation aspect (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-reception effect corresponding to this, and a high expectation aspect (FIG. 267 (e2) to FIG. 267 (e2)). A different aspect (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1, SK4-2) appears as the fourth disappearance related display SK4 when (i2)) appears. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) and (f2), there is a situation in which the “fourth reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet been started. Even if the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the first mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-) appear. By confirming which of 2) appears, it is possible to estimate whether or not the “fourth presentation after reception effect” is executed in a highly expected mode.

  The timing tI3c shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, while the display relating to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to see) appears, the player's operation within the fourth reception period. As a result, the “fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4” as the post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the reception of the first effect device is started. However, here, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and “C2” from FIG. 266 (d) is displayed. (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))) (in a case where the degree of expectation is relatively high as the post-reception effect), the fourth reception is performed as shown in FIG. 267 (g2). The second mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “fourth disappearance related display SK4 (the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2)” are displayed, respectively, The fourth stage effect display UG4 (fourth stage effect display UG4-1 or the fourth stage effect display UG4-2) "is started to be executed. Thereby, even if the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the fourth reception period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) may be used. The post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acquisition effect display UG4) can be started without being significantly delayed as compared with other effect devices, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display UG4 after the fourth reception is started while the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, the player is suggested to indicate that the fourth reception period has already ended. Is automatically shifted from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "fourth reception effect display UG4-1 (fourth reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth reception effect display UG4-2)" Is expected (after timing tI3c).

  Then, also in the production related to the fourth reception period, the display related to “fourth reception production display UG4 (fourth reception production display UG4-1 or fourth reception production display UG4-2)” starts in this manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) or FIG. 267 (h1) or (h2), the “fourth reception effect display UG4 (fourth reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth reception effect UG4)” is displayed. First, among the "integrated mimic image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2", the "integrated mimic image display IG" is hidden. . Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 258 (b), FIG. 267 (i1) or (i2), the “fourth disappearance related display SK4 (first 4 extinction-related display SK4-1 or fourth extinction-related display SK4-2) is not displayed, and as a result, the effect display UG4 (fourth reception-related display UG4) The display relating to the post-effect display UG4-1 or the fourth post-effect display UG4-2) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tI3b arrives by merely looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but it is difficult to recognize the second effect device or the effect device. If the third effect device is confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tI3a arrives earlier. This makes it possible to encourage a player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

  Further, even if the player merely looks at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth extinction-related display SK4 different from the first extinction-related display SK1 described above is “integrated”. A mode in which the chemical image display IG is difficult to visually recognize ". Therefore, by confirming such an aspect, it is possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type has occurred as the reception period before the “fourth presentation effect display UG4” is performed. become able to.

  In this regard, the “fourth reception effect display UG4” refers to a plurality of modes (here, the fourth reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth effect display UG4-1 or the fourth reception effect different) based on the fact that the action by the player has been received. It is displayed in any of the effect display UG4-2) after reception. Therefore, "fourth presentation effect display UG4" is executed for a relatively long time even after "integrated mimic image display IG" or "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is hidden. .

  In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the fourth reception period occurs, the effect is limited within a limited time (the thick line shown in FIG. 258). Various displays are provided within a limited and limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest. However, as a result, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-acceptance effect (fourth reception effect display) according to the reception is set to be longer than the received timing tI3a. The fact is that they have to be delayed.

  Therefore, even when an operation by the player is received during the fourth reception period, as shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and (c), the second effect is performed based on the reception. A fourth post-acceptance effect using the device (a specific effect after the fourth reception) is started prior to the fourth after-effect (the fourth after-effect display) using the first effect device. I have.

  According to such a configuration, the start of the execution is delayed from the timing tI3a at which the reception is made in the fourth reception period, in a part of the effect after the fourth reception (the effect display after the fourth reception), The effect itself after the fourth reception can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as the effect after reception), FIG. 267 (e1) As shown in the figure, the manner in which “one sword” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (the second rendering device) corresponds to the above-mentioned fourth rendering specific rendering UGT4 (fourth rendering) corresponding to the fourth reception period. As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-1), which is a mode in which the degree of expectation of the post-reception specific effect UGT4 is low, the fourth post-reception effect using the first effect device (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1). Execution is started earlier. On the other hand, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception), FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which “two swords” are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the above-mentioned fourth effect-specific effect effect UGT4 ( As a fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-2 which is a mode of high expectation of the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4, a fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) using the first directing device. ) Is started before execution.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 266, apart from the first indication effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the fourth reception period. (FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)). The fourth precursor specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs is different from the first effect effect display ZEH1. It is also executed at the time of arrival, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tI3.

  In this embodiment, the indication effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is to be executed as an effect (fourth indication specific effect) different from the first indication specific effect shown in FIG. 262. It may be executed as the same effect as the first indication specific effect shown. In this case, even when the second effect device is confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period will occur.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tI2, the output of the acceptable sound (corresponding to “♪” output in FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)) is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the fourth reception period is audibly output so as to straddle the timing tI3 (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)”) at which the fourth reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output.

  In this regard, in the fourth reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway (audible) based on the reception. (The output state ends in the middle).

  Further, in the fourth reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the allowable reception sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, but also when the reception is performed, Audible output of the fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to “♪♪” output in (e1) or (e2) of FIG. 267) different from the first post-acceptance output sound based on It has become. That is, in this case, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device in the fourth reception period, the effect (acceptable sound) performed in the reception period and the reception performed The effect (the output sound after the fourth reception) performed accordingly does not conflict (overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 258 (d), the output sound after the fourth reception is similar to the “output display UG4 after the fourth reception”, as shown in FIG. 258 (d). Is executed for a relatively long time even after "" is hidden ("Situation in which ♪♪ is output in FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)"). Equivalent). Further, as for the fourth post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (the expectation as the post-acceptance effect is relatively low) Case) and an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the effect after reception). It is desirable to output an output sound (aspect).

  In order to make it difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period will occur, the allowable reception sound output in response to the fourth reception period is set in the first reception period. It is desirable that the sound is the same as the acceptable sound output correspondingly. However, they need not always be the same.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 258, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C3 (FIG. 267 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the fourth reception period. It is assumed that the operation by the user is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the fourth reception period has occurred, the timing tI4 comes without any operation by the player being received. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (at the time when the fourth reception period ends and the player does not accept the operation), the timing tI3a (the fourth effect device). As shown in FIG. 267 (e3), as in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the operation is received by the player within the reception period of (1), the integrated simulation image display IG Is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

  According to such a configuration, even if the fourth reception period ends when the player does not receive the operation in time, the integrated simulation is performed within the fourth reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize the manner in which the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Thereafter, even when the player's action is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 267 (f3), the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is set as “an aspect in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see”. -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the "integrated mimic image display IG (simulator image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4- The first or second extinction-related display SK4-2 "is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the" fourth extinction-related display SK4 "is displayed is" integrated model image display IG (model image display IG) ". , Gauge image display) ”is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth reception period ends without reception, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to indicate that the fourth reception period has ended. In addition, even when the fourth reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated mimic image display IG for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation by the player is not received within the fourth reception period, the “fourth disappearance related display SK4-1” is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. In the case, if the action by the player has been received within the fourth reception period, the effect has progressed from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))”. This is the case when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation has been executed. On the other hand, the case where “fourth annihilation-related display SK4-2” is displayed as the fourth annihilation-related display SK4 when the operation by the player is not accepted within the fourth reception period, If the action by the player has been received within the above, if the effect progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (relative expectation (If a high post-acquisition effect has been performed).

  That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is not accepted in the fourth reception period, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed after the end of the fourth reception period. By simply checking the mode as the “fourth disappearance related display SK4” (the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1, the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2), the effect after the fourth reception is less expected. Since it is possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether the game has been executed in a highly expected mode, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 267 (g3), among the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “fourth disappearance related display SK4”, first, “integrated mimic image display IG” is hidden. I do. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden in this way, the “fourth disappearance related display SK4” is hidden as shown in FIG. 267 (h3).

  Note that, in the fourth reception period, as in the first reception period, the post-reception effects corresponding to the low reception degree (FIGS. 267 (e1) to (i1)) and the high reception degree (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2)), the same specific mode may appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. However, in this case, even when an action by the player is not received in the fourth reception period, unlike the case of the above-described first reception period, the same specific mode appears as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. Become.

  By the way, as described above, in any of the first reception period and the fourth reception period, during the period from the indication effect display to the post-reception effect display, the first effect display TE ( Here, the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed.

  In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 262 (b) and (c), the first effect display TE is displayed in a state where the “first sign effect display ZEH1” is displayed. The second effect display FE is not made difficult to recognize by the "first sign effect display ZEH1". After the end of the first reception period, as shown in FIGS. 263 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (when received, Mode) and the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (a mode in the case where the display has not been accepted) appear. The first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance-related display. SK1 (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 or first disappearance-related display SK1-2) does not make it difficult to see.

  On the other hand, also in the case where the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 266 (b) and (c), in the situation where the “first indication effect display ZEH1” is displayed, the first effect display is performed. The TE and the second effect display FE are not made difficult to recognize by the “first sign effect display ZEH1”. After the end of the fourth reception period, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) to (f3), (g1) and (g2), the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (fourth disappearance-related display SK4) -1 or the fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is prevented from being visually recognized by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to visually recognize by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4.

  According to such a configuration, even when the type as the disappearance-related display SK does not correspond to which type of the reception period, the second effect is displayed when the disappearance-related display SK is displayed. Only by confirming whether or not the display FE is difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to estimate which type has occurred as the reception period. Regarding the first effect display TE, regardless of whether or not the second effect display FE is difficult to visually recognize by the disappearance-related display SK, the second effect display FE is not difficult to be visually recognized by the disappearance-related display SK. Therefore, it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, the “second indication effect display ZEH2” is displayed, and then the “post second reception effect display UG2” is displayed. During the period up to, of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the first effect display TE can be displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed. .

  That is, in this case, the type as the reception period is estimated (at least the first period) by simply checking whether or not the “predictive effect display” or the “reception period” has occurred while the second effect display FE is being displayed. The second effect display FE itself does not indicate the degree of expectation for the changing symbol effect, since it is possible to estimate that it is neither the accepting period nor the fourth accepting period. Even so, it is possible to provide an interesting effect utilizing the second effect display FE.

  In addition, even when the second reception period occurs, the first effect display TE is difficult to be visually recognized by the indication effect display and the disappearance-related display as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period. It is not compromised.

  FIG. 259 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state in which non-probability change / non-time saving is performed), the start condition is satisfied (reserved exhaustion), and the “fifth change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination being performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the fifth variation pattern or the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern) is started, and the advance notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect according to the “fifth variation pattern”, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination), the fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. When the elapsed timing tJ3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, “acceptance for the effect after the fifth operation” is permitted. The above-described fifth reception period (valid period) is generated. Thereby, when an action by the player is received within the fifth reception period, an effect is performed after the fifth reception based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fifth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the fifth post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received (in the first effect device) The “fifth post-reception reception effect display”, the “fifth post-reception reception specific effect” in the second production device, and the “fifth post-reception reception output sound” in the third production device) after each reception corresponding to another reception period. It is different from the effects (“display effect after reception” in the first effect device, “specific effect after reception” in the second effect device, and “output sound after reception” in the third effect device). Also, the “fifth precursor effect display” corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is different from each of the precursor effect displays corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the method related to the display of the “fifth presentation effect display after reception” and the “fifth precursor effect display” (such as display start time and end time, and other image display until the display is hidden) , Etc.) are described in the display effects performed in connection with the first reception period and the display effects performed in connection with the second reception period (FIG. 255, FIG. 256, 262 to 265), and the other configuration is basically the same.

  Hereinafter, an effect performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) will be described. However, for the same configuration as in the case of the first reception period (first reception production) or the second reception period (second reception production), it may be mentioned that the same configuration is used, but more than that. Is omitted here. In other words, for items that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect) or the second reception period (second reception effect). The same is applicable for the examples.

  For example, the timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 has arrived, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the execution of “fifth symptom effect display” is started as the above-mentioned symptom effect display.

  In this regard, the “fifth precursor effect display” is of a type that is displayed across the timing tJ3 when the fifth reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 259 (b). That is, although the “fifth precursor effect display” is different from the above-described “second precursor effect display ZEH2” displayed corresponding to the second reception period in the effect content (display image), the “display start timing and With regard to the end time and how the image is related to other image display until being hidden, etc., the “second sign effect display ZEH2” will be described with reference to FIGS. 256, 264, and 265. The display is performed in the same manner as described above. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  The timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated mimic image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated mimic image display, gauge image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "simulated image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed.

  The timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth reception period occurs while the “fifth precursor effect display” and the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” are displayed. It will be.

  The timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the action by the player is received at the timing tI3a, the fifth reception period ends, and the post-reception effect (fifth post-reception effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period is started. It will be. In addition, the effect after the fifth reception is similar to the effect after the first reception (FIG. 263), the effect after the second reception (FIG. 265), and the like. There is a case where the second aspect having a high degree of expectation is executed.

  The timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b has arrived, a “mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” appears.

  In this regard, when the reception is received in the fifth reception period, the above-mentioned “first disappearance-related display SK1” commonly corresponding to the first reception period is referred to as “a mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. Is started. 255 and 263 regarding “first disappearance-related display SK1”, “start and end timings of display, and how they relate to other image displays before being hidden”. As described with reference to FIG. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, regarding the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, the effect after the fifth reception is “relative expectation degree”. A different aspect may appear between the case where the “lower first aspect” is executed and the case where the “second aspect having a relatively higher degree of expectation” is executed.

  For example, when the “second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the effect after the fifth reception, the “first disappearance-related display SK1” is set as “an aspect in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. (Here, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263), which is the first mode, is displayed. On the other hand, as the post-acceptance effect, the "first relatively-low-expected first display" is displayed. When the “mode” is executed, if a mode different from the “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” appears as the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, the first reception When the “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” is displayed corresponding to the period, the user is made aware of the possibility that the “second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation” will be executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect. Can improve the entertainment interest of the game Kill as to become.

  In this case, when the “second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect, the “second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the first post-acceptance effect. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) is higher than at the time. The proportion may be 100%.

  When the “first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation” is executed as the effect after the fifth reception, the “first disappearance-related display SK1- In a case where a mode different from “1” appears, “a first disappearance-related display SK1-2 which is a second mode as the first disappearance-related display SK1” may appear as the different mode. That is, in this case, when the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of the acceptance in the fifth reception period, or in the first reception period. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of not meeting the reception, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, when the “first disappearance-related display SK1-1” is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the “second aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the first reception period is displayed in response to the first reception period and the “first disappearance-related display SK1-2” is displayed, the effect after the fifth reception is “relatively expected”. In order to more appropriately raise the awareness of the possibility that the “second mode with a low degree” will be executed, the indication effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period is not “fifth indication effect display”, It is desirable that the "first sign effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period is executed.

  In addition, similarly to the case of the first reception period or the second reception period, the second reception period is based on the reception, as shown in FIG. The fifth post-acceptance effect using the effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610) (the specific effect after the fifth reception) is changed to the fifth after-effect effect using the first effect device (the fifth after-effect display). Start execution first. The same applies to the point that the specific effect after the fifth reception is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, a precursor effect corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth precursor specific effect) may also be executed in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). In addition, the sign specifying effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is not the fifth sign specifying effect but is executed as the same effect as the first sign specifying effect illustrated in FIG. 262. Is also good.

  Also, when the fifth reception period occurs, at the timing tJ2, the output of the reception allowable sound is started. As shown in FIG. 259 (d), this acceptable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when the acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (d), the "long-time allowable sound" and the "short-time allowable sound" are audible output as the acceptable sound in the same manner as the acceptable sound output audibly when the second reception period occurs. FIG. 256, FIG. 264, and FIG. 264 show "start time and end time of the audible output, and how they relate to other effects until the audible output is finished." The audible output is performed in the same manner as described for “acceptable sound” with reference to H.265. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, as to the acceptable sound output when the fifth accept period is generated, only one acceptable sound is output in the same manner as the acceptable sound output when the third or fourth accept period occurs. May be output, and when it is received, it may be output as being terminated halfway.

  In any case, in the fifth reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the allowable reception sound is being output audibly, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated, but also the reception is performed. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-acceptance output sound different from the post-acceptance output sound output in response to another reception period is started. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, similarly to the case of the second reception period, the effect performed within the reception period (acceptable sound) and the effect performed in response to the reception (fifth reception period) (Output sound) does not conflict (overlap).

  Note that the output sound after the fifth reception is also similar to the output sound after the first reception, the second output sound after the reception, and the like. Is audibly output as a different output sound from that in the case of being executed in the second mode having a high degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 259, if the operation by the player is not received within the fifth reception period, the operation by the player is received after the fifth reception period occurs. The timing tJ4 arrives without any delay.

  In this regard, also in the fifth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tJ4 (at the time when the fifth reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation by the player is no longer permitted). In, not only the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, but also the visibility of the integrated model image display IG is prevented.

  Then, after that, even when the action by the player is not accepted, the display related to the fifth disappearance-related display SK5 is started as "an aspect in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

  Regarding the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” when the reception is not performed in the fifth reception period, the provisional reception is performed in the fifth reception period in the same manner as in the second reception period. If so, a mode that has appeared (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) is to appear. However, as in the first reception period, a mode that may not appear when received in the fifth reception period may appear.

  FIG. 260 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and the “sixth change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination being performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern. Then, thereafter, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the sixth variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the sixth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “sixth variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect according to the “sixth variation pattern”, no matter what result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination), the sixth predetermined time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. When the elapsed timing tK3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance for effects after the sixth operation" is permitted. The above-described sixth reception period (valid period) is generated. Thereby, when an action by the player is received within the sixth reception period, an effect is performed after the sixth reception based on the reception. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content to be executed as the sixth post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received (in the first effect device) "After 6th reception effect display", "2nd reception device specific effect" in the 2nd effect device, "6th output sound after reception" in the 3rd effect device) after each reception corresponding to another reception period It is different from the effects (“display effect after reception” in the first effect device, “specific effect after reception” in the second effect device, and “output sound after reception” in the third effect device). In addition, when an operation (operation) is received by the player during the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect), the mimic image display (here, “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to see”) does not appear. In this example, the integrated image display is hidden. However, the method related to the display of the “presentation display after the sixth reception” and the “simulated image display” itself (the start and end times of the display, and how to display other images before the display is hidden) Is related to the first presentation period (FIG. 255, FIG. 262, FIG. 263), and other configurations are also described. This is basically the same as any of the above-described methods.

  Hereinafter, effects performed in connection with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) will be described. However, the same configuration as that in the first reception period (first reception effect) may be referred to as being the same, but further description is omitted here. In other words, for items that are not particularly mentioned, the effect is performed in the same manner as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same applies to other examples and modifications.

  For example, the timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK1 has arrived, the display screen (effect display device 1600) starts to execute the “first symptom effect display” as the above-mentioned symptom effect display.

  The timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK2 has arrived, "integrated mimic image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while "first precursor effect display" is displayed, and "integrated mimic image display, gauge image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "simulated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first sign effect display" is displayed.

  The timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed.

  The timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the operation by the player is received at the timing tK3a, the sixth reception period is ended, and the post-reception effect (the sixth post-reception effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period is started. It will be. In addition, similarly to the effect after the first reception (FIG. 263), the effect after the sixth reception has a case where the first mode having a relatively low expectation is executed and the case where the second mode having a relatively high expectation is executed. May be executed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 260, there is no processing corresponding to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 in the processing related to the effect related to the sixth reception period, that is, “integrated mimic image display IG (mimic image) Display, gauge image display) ”is not displayed until it is not displayed. This is the same (even when the timing tF3b does not exist) regardless of whether any of the “low-expectation mode” and the “high-expectation mode” appears as the effect after the sixth reception. The same is true (the timing tF3b does not exist) when the sixth reception period ends without the player's operation being received in the sixth reception period.

  According to such a configuration, in another reception period, when the reception period ends, the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is visually recognized until it is not displayed. Despite the appearance of a mode that makes it difficult to perform, in the sixth reception period, even if the reception period has ended, “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is hidden. Since the mode (disappearance-related display SK) that makes it difficult to visually recognize this does not appear during this period, is the state of the sixth reception period ended (the state in which the operation by the player is received and deleted)? ) Can be made difficult to recognize, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

  In addition, similarly to the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 260, based on the reception, the second production device (here, The sixth post-acceptance effect using the sub liquid crystal 1610) (the sixth specific effect after reception) is started prior to the sixth after-effect effect using the first effect device (sixth reception effect display). . The same applies to the point that the specific effect after the sixth reception is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute a precursor effect (sixth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, the sign specifying effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is not the sixth sign specifying effect but is executed as the same effect as the first sign specifying effect illustrated in FIG. 262. Is also good.

  Also, when the sixth reception period occurs, at the timing tK2, the output of the allowable reception sound is started. As shown in FIG. 260 (d), this acceptable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when the acceptance is made. 258, 266, and FIG. 258 regarding such acceptable reception sounds, such as “start time and end time of audible output, and how they relate to other effects until the audible output ends”. With reference to 267, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the “acceptable sound” corresponding to the fourth accepting period. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, as for the acceptable sound output when the sixth accept period is generated, the two acceptable sounds are output as in the case of the acceptable sound output when the second accept period is generated. When it is performed, it may be output as being terminated on the way.

  In any case, in the sixth reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the allowable reception sound is audibly output, not only the reception allowable sound is terminated, but also the reception is performed. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the sixth post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound that is output in response to another reception period is started. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, similarly to the case of the fourth reception period, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the effect performed in response to the reception (the sixth reception period). (Output sound) does not conflict (overlap).

  The output sound after the sixth reception is also similar to the output sound after the first reception, the fourth output sound after the reception, and the like. Is audibly output as a different output sound from that in the case of being executed in the second mode having a high degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 260, when an operation by the player is not received within the sixth reception period, an operation by the player is received after the sixth reception period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tK4 comes without any operation.

  In this regard, also in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tK4 (at the time when the sixth reception period ends and the acceptance of the operation by the player is not permitted). In, not only the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, but also the visibility of the integrated model image display IG is prevented. However, as described above, in the sixth reception period, after the timing tK4 has arrived without the player's operation being received, “an aspect in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see” does not appear. .

  FIG. 261 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the seventh condition is satisfied and a seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with non-probable change / non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and the “seventh change pattern” is selected as a result of the change pattern determination being performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern. After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the seventh variation pattern or the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the seventh variation pattern) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “seventh variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the effect according to the “seventh variation pattern”, even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination), the seventh predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. When the elapsed timing tL3 (which may be a timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, "acceptance for the effect after the seventh operation" is permitted. The above-described seventh reception period (valid period) is generated. Thus, when an action by the player is received within the seventh reception period, an effect is performed after the seventh reception based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the seventh reception period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to the present embodiment, the content to be executed as the seventh post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received (in the first effect device) "After 7th reception effect display", "2nd reception device specific effect" in the 2nd effect device, "7th output sound after reception" in the 3rd effect device) after each reception corresponding to another reception period It is different from the effects (“display effect after reception” in the first effect device, “specific effect after reception” in the second effect device, and “output sound after reception” in the third effect device). Also, the “seventh sign effect display” corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh sign effect) is different from each sign effect display corresponding to the other reception periods. Further, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, “an aspect in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” may be set to a value corresponding to each disappearance-related display corresponding to another reception period. Indicates that a different “seventh disappearance-related display” appears. However, the method of displaying the “effect display after the seventh reception”, the “seventh sign effect display”, and the “seventh disappearance-related display” (the start time and end time of the display and the time until the display is not displayed) How it relates to other image displays in between, etc.) are the same as those described in any of the display effects performed in relation to each reception period described above, and other configurations Are basically the same.

  Hereinafter, an effect performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) will be described. However, for the same configuration as in the case of another reception period (other reception effects), the same configuration will be mentioned, but further description will be omitted here. In addition, for items that are not particularly mentioned, the effect is performed in the same manner as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the present invention is similarly applicable to other examples and modifications.

  For example, the timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL1 has arrived, execution of the precursor effect display is started on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

  However, as described above, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect), a “seventh precursor effect display” not corresponding to the other reception periods is displayed as a precursor effect display corresponding thereto. I have. As shown in FIG. 261 (b), the “seventh precursor effect display” is of a type that is not displayed at the time when the seventh reception period occurs and is not displayed earlier than this. . That is, the “seventh sign effect display” is different from the above-described “first sign effect display ZEH1” displayed corresponding to the first reception period in the effect contents (display image). With respect to the end time and how it is related to other image display until the image is not displayed, etc., as described with reference to FIG. 256 and FIG. 262, the “first indication effect display ZEH1” has been described. The display is performed by a method. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  The timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated mimic image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "seventh predictive effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated mimic image display, gauge image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "simulated image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "seventh sign effect display" is displayed.

  The timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the above-described seventh reception period occurs while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed.

  The timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the operation by the player is received at the timing tL3a, the seventh reception period ends, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the seventh reception period (the seventh post-reception effect) is started. It will be. In addition, similarly to the effect after the first reception (FIG. 263), the effect after the seventh reception has a case where the first mode having a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where the second mode having a relatively high expectation is executed. May be executed.

  The timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3b has arrived, a “mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” appears. However, as described above, when the reception is made in the seventh reception period, the “seventh disappearance-related display” that does not correspond to the other reception periods is set as “a mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to see”. Is started (timing tL3b).

  Here, the “seventh disappearance-related display” is different from the above-described “first disappearance-related display SK1” displayed corresponding to the first reception period in the effect contents (display image), but is “the display start time”. And how the image is related to other image display until the image is not displayed, and the like, is described with reference to FIG. 255, FIG. 256, FIG. 263, FIG. The display is performed in the same manner as described for “display SK1”. The same applies to other examples and modifications. Further, in both the case where the effect after the seventh reception is executed as a mode with a relatively low expectation and the case where the effect is executed as a mode with a relatively high expectation, "Display" is the same as in the case of the above-described first reception period, in that the display is performed in the same manner.

  However, unlike the case of the first reception period, the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (the seventh disappearance-related display)” corresponding to the seventh reception period is different from the case of the first reception period. Alternatively, different modes may appear between the case where the “first mode with a relatively low expectation” is executed and the case where the “second mode with a relatively high expectation” is executed.

  The timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3c has arrived, while the display relating to the “seventh disappearance-related display” (a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) appears, the player performs the operation within the seventh reception period. The execution of “seventh post-reception effect display” as the post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation being received is started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 261, also in the case of receiving in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, based on the reception, the second effect device (here, The seventh post-acceptance effect using the sub liquid crystal 1610) (the seventh specific effect after reception) is started prior to the seventh post-acceptance effect using the first effect device (seventh after-effect display). . The same applies to the point that the specific effect after the seventh reception is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute a precursor effect corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh precursor specific effect). In addition, the sign specifying effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is executed not as the seventh sign specifying effect but as the same effect as the first sign specifying effect illustrated in FIG. 262. Is also good.

  Also, at the timing tL2, the output of the acceptable reception sound is started when the seventh reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 261 (d), this acceptable sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when the acceptance is made. 258, 266, and FIG. 258 regarding such acceptable reception sounds, such as “start time and end time of audible output, and how they relate to other effects until the audible output ends”. With reference to 267, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the “acceptable sound” corresponding to the fourth accepting period. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  However, as to the acceptable sound output when the seventh accept period is generated, the two acceptable sounds are output in the same manner as the acceptable sound output when the second accept period is generated. When it is performed, it may be output as being terminated on the way.

  In any case, in the seventh reception period, when an operation is received by the player while the allowable reception sound is being output audibly, the reception is not only terminated, but the reception is performed. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the seventh post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound output in response to another reception period is started. That is, in this case, in the seventh reception period, similarly to the case of the fourth reception period, the effect (acceptable sound) performed during the reception period and the effect performed in response to the reception (the seventh reception period). (Output sound) does not conflict (overlap).

  Note that, similarly to the output sound after the first reception, the output sound after the fourth reception, and the like, the output sound after the seventh reception is similar to the case where the post-reception effect is executed in the first mode having a relatively low expectation. Is audibly output as a different output sound from that in the case of being executed in the second mode having a high degree of expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 261, if an operation by the player is not received within the seventh reception period, an operation by the player is received after the seventh reception period occurs. The above-mentioned timing tL4 arrives without any problem.

  In this regard, also in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tL4 (at the time when the seventh reception period ends and the reception of the operation by the player is not permitted). In, not only the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, but also the visibility of the integrated model image display IG is prevented.

  After that, even when the player's operation is not accepted, the display related to the seventh disappearance-related display is started as “a mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”.

  Regarding the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” when the reception is not performed in the seventh reception period, the reception is performed in the seventh reception period in the same manner as in the first reception period. At times, an aspect that cannot appear appears. However, in the same manner as in the second reception period, a mode that has appeared (a mode different depending on the degree of expectation) may have appeared if it had been temporarily received in the seventh reception period.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which such a first reception period to a seventh reception period are prepared, the following excellent operational effects can be obtained.

  That is, first, regardless of whether any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, for the mimic image display that is displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), The display after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been received (after the effect change based on the reception has been started) can also be displayed. In this way, even after the effect is advanced based on the reception, it is determined in which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the mimic image display has been displayed within the reception period. Can be grasped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the contents of the effect to be advanced when the pachinko machine is accepted (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc., as the effect after reception, and the notice effect (expected expectation effect) ), A plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period) with different types are prepared, and a reception period (valid period) of the type corresponding to the result of the determination (effect determination) can be generated. It has become.

  In this regard, in the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when an operation by the player is received, the post-reception effect display (the first post-reception effect display to the seventh display) is performed based on the reception. The effect display after reception) can be displayed on the “effect display device 1600”. In the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, when an operation by the player is received, the post-reception effect display is displayed based on the reception. In addition, a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is further made to appear. That is, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the mimic image display, and also to confirm that the mimic image display is not displayed until the mimic image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility by making the image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display), the player's gaze target is naturally shifted from "mimic image display" to "post-acceptance effect display". Will be expected.

  However, since the mock image display is originally displayed during the reception period for which the reception has not yet been made, if the mock image display is displayed after the reception is made, After the reception, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the effect display is in the displayed state, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. In this regard, when the reception is made in any of the first reception period to the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period, the mimic image display is set to “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (the disappearance-related display). )) Is displayed (not visible) while the post-acceptance effect display is displayed in the appearance of "a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to see (extinction-related display)". I am trying to. In other words, in this case, after the action is received by the player, the display before reception (the display of the mimic image) is changed to the display after the reception while the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see (extinction-related display)” appears. The transition of the display effect to (effect display after reception) is realized.

  It should be noted that the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” and the “effect display after reception” are both common in that they are displayed based on the reception. However, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” refers to, for example, a mimic image display as shown in FIG. 263 (f1), FIG. 265 (f1), FIG. 267 (f1), and the like. When the display is displayed, the appearance of the mimic image display is made to be difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the “effect display after reception” means, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (g1), FIG. 265 (g1), FIG. 267 (g1), etc. Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. Further, in each of the above-described examples, the display of the “post-acceptance effect display” is started when the mimic image display is being displayed. The display does not necessarily have to be started when the display is in progress, and may be started after the mimic image display is hidden.

  As for the method of “appearing so that the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)”, “appearing so as to make the mimic image display difficult to recognize” includes at least a part of the area where the mimic image display is displayed. In addition, in addition to the technique of realizing the priority by displaying the image display different from the mimic image display (displaying on the front layer), a part of the mimic image display is lacking by the image display different from the mimic image display ( It is possible to adopt a technique realized by displaying an image (moving image) made to be visible (invisible). Further, instead of displaying an image different from the mimic image display, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing a numerical value (such as transmittance) relating to the display characteristics of the mimic image display itself. On the other hand, as a method of “appearing so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the mock-up image display” with respect to “after-acceptance effect display”, the “after-acceptance effect display” is displayed on at least a part of the area where the mimic image display is displayed. In addition to the method implemented by displaying (displaying in the rear layer) the “effect display after reception” in such a manner that the mimic image display is given priority display, at least while the mimic image display is displayed It is possible to adopt a method that is realized by displaying the “post-acceptance effect display” only in an area other than the area where the mimic image display is displayed.

  Further, as a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the mimic image display in at least a part of the area where the mimic image display is displayed, Both a method of changing a numerical value (e.g., transmittance) relating to the display characteristics of the image display itself may be adopted.

  In addition, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” means that the “post-acceptance effect display” has not yet been displayed before the “after-effect display”. It appears below. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the “effect display after reception” has not been displayed yet, the mimic image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the above-mentioned “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)”. From now on, while making the mock-up image display visible, the `` effect display after reception '' is in a state where it can appear soon, and the mind of the player should be changed from the `` mock-up image display that is hard to see '' You will be able to encourage advance preparations.

  In addition, when the image is received during the first reception period to the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, or the like, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is set to “the effect display after reception”. Can be displayed even after "" is displayed, and is not displayed while the "effect display after reception" is displayed. Accordingly, in the period in which “the effect display after reception” is displayed, in a period after “the mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction related display)” is not displayed, the “ Since it is possible to provide the presentation effect related to “post-acceptance presentation display”, it is possible to improve the gaming entertainment by changing the presentation effect during such a display period.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, FIGS. 263 (g1) and (h1), FIGS. 265 (g1) and (h1), and FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 267 (g1) and (h1), the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction related display)” includes not only the area where the mimic image display is displayed but also the mimic image display. Is also displayed in an area where is not displayed. In this area, at least a part of the “post-acceptance effect display” is displayed. At least a part of the “display” is displayed (for example, displayed on the rear layer) so as to be difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” appears not only in the mimic image display but also in the “post-acceptance effect display”. As it is expected to improve both the production performance until the mock image display is hidden and the production performance when the display of “production display after reception” is started Become.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples related to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the “post-reception effect display” before the “post-reception effect display” is displayed after the reception is made. In a situation where "" is not displayed, apart from the "mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", a specific effect after reception that does not make the mimic image display difficult to see (using the second effect device) (Presentation after reception) can appear in a mode according to the degree of expectation. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance effect prior to this without disturbing the effect of the first effect device.

  In each of the above-described production examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period, the specific post-reception effect (post-reception effect using the second production device) is “M Appears in a situation where the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to see (extinction related display)” has not yet appeared before the “mode in which the image display is difficult to view (extinction related display)” appears. Like that. Further, the specific effect after the reception (the effect after the reception using the second effect device) is continued until after the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is ended. I have.

  According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes the complex performance in the first performance device can enjoy the post-acceptance performance with the second performance device having the simplified performance, Various types of players will be provided with an improved game interest.

  In each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the precursor effect display is performed over the timing at which the mimic image display is displayed. In addition, in a part of each of the above-described effect examples, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, for example, the indication can be accepted in a state where the indication effect display is displayed. When the acceptance is performed, The “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction related display)” is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize both the mimic image display and the indication effect display (such as the priority display described above).

  However, on the other hand, at least at the point in time when “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” appears, neither the mimic image display nor the precursor effect display overlap with the entirety. , At least in part, so that visibility is not hindered. That is, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is executed in such a manner that the visibility of the mimic image display and the indication effect display are gradually deteriorated (the overlapping area is increased). I have.

  Also, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the mimic image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. Becomes Then, in this case, the dynamic display is not terminated and continues even though the “simple image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” appears after the acceptance of the mimic image display. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples related to the first reception period to the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period, “the mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is only the mimic image display. In addition, it has been made difficult to visually recognize the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed after the acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the remaining time as if it were left.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period of the plurality of reception periods, the first reception is performed based on the reception. The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and in addition to the first post-acceptance effect display UG1, a mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize can appear. Further, when an action by the player is received within a second reception period of the plurality of reception periods, a second post-reception effect display UG1 different from the first post-reception effect display UG1 based on the reception. The post-acceptance effect display UG2 can be displayed, and a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second mode) is that, unlike the second post-acceptance effect display UG2, the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize. The disappearance-related display SK2) can appear.

  According to such a configuration, the mimic image display can be performed without confirming which of the “first reception effect display UG1” and the “second reception effect display UG2” is displayed as the effect display after reception. It is possible to guess the type of the effect display after reception only by confirming what kind of aspect (the first disappearance-related display SK1 and the second disappearance-related display SK2) makes it difficult to visually recognize.

  As will be described later, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation (operation) by a player is received within a third reception period among the plurality of reception periods, the reception is performed. Based on the third post-acceptance effect display UG1 and the second post-acceptance effect display UG2 based on the first post-acceptance effect display UG1 and the second post-acceptance effect display UG2, Separately, the above-described mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the first reception period can be made available as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display.

  According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect displays appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. However, as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display, when the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears, it can be estimated that the second post-acceptance effect display will appear.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the “deletion-related display” is displayed (priority display) in an area including at least a part of the area in which the mimic image display is displayed, in which “the mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to see” is displayed. It was decided to be realized. However, it is also possible to realize an effect using an effect device (movable body or the like) on the front side of the display screen at a position overlapping at least a part of the mimic image display in a front view.

  Even if the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) appears as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, if the type of the reception period is different, the symbol change causes the big hit symbol. It is desirable that the ratio (expectation) at which the is stopped is different.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the first indication effect display is the same (first indication effect display), but “first disappearance-related display SK1” appears as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” (first example). (Third reception period) and a mode different from the “first disappearance-related display SK1” appears (fourth reception period) or does not appear (sixth reception period) ).

  Further, in the above-described effect examples, the sign effect display (the first sign effect display, the fourth sign effect display) is different, but the same form (the first disappearance-related display SK1) as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. ) Appears (first reception period, fifth reception period).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of the reception period until the user grasps which type is being performed as the effect after the reception, thereby improving the entertainment interest of the game. Will be able to do it.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect after reception (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device can be executed, and the effect after reception (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device. During the period, in the first effect device, there is a state in which the mimic image display is relatively easy to visually recognize, and a state in which the mimic image display is relatively hard to visually recognize.

  That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device based on the acceptance, which aspect has appeared as the mimic image display. It is possible to confirm. In addition, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device, the mimic image display is made to be relatively difficult to visually recognize. It is expected to prompt the player to naturally move the gaze target to the “second effect device”.

  In the above-described production example, the post-reception production (specific production after reception) using the second production device is the visibility of the mimic image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being received. Is started so as not to affect. More specifically, the mimic image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-acceptance effect (specific effect after reception) using the second effect device is: The image display is not an image displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor is an effect performed at a position overlapping at least a part of the predetermined area in a front view.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect display after the reception is started after the appearance timing of the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. May be started at the appearance timing of "."

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” is realized as an image display displayed using at least a part of the “region where the mimic image display is displayed”. I decided that. However, in this case, it is desirable that the image display be performed such that the area displayed in the “region where the mimic image display is displayed” tends to gradually expand as time passes.

  As described above, the mimic image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation. And, according to each of the above-described production examples, after the reception, the display mode is maintained and continued, including the display position, the size, the dynamic depiction, etc., so that after the reception, It is also possible to recognize in what form the mimic image display was displayed during the reception period.

  However, in this case, if it is in the period immediately after the reception, the effect must be performed after the reception under such conditions (the display related to the mimic image display is maintained). That is, the width of the effect is narrow, and only a limited effect (after-reception effect using only an effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, after a lapse of time, when a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” appears, the effect is performed after reception under the condition that “the visibility of the mimic image display may be deteriorated”. Since it is possible to perform the “display after-reception effect display in the first effect device” under such conditions. By performing the two post-operation effects having different properties (specific effect after reception in the second effect device, and effect display after reception in the first effect device) in a stepwise manner, the mode of displaying the mimic image even after reception is performed. Can be easily confirmed, and the role as the effect after the operation can be suitably exhibited.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when the second sign effect display is displayed as the sign effect display, if the reception is made within the reception period corresponding to the second sign effect display, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” is displayed. Appears as the second disappearance-related display SK1 (FIG. 265). In addition, in the case where the seventh precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, the seventh disappearance-related display appears as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” when reception is made within the corresponding reception period. It has become. On the other hand, when a “first sign effect display” different from the “second sign effect display” or the “seventh sign effect display” is displayed as the sign effect display, the sign-in effect corresponding to these is displayed within the reception period corresponding to this. When the acceptance is made, the first disappearance-related display appears (the first reception period and the third reception period) and the fourth disappearance-related display appears as “an aspect in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” ( (Fourth reception period).

  That is, in this case, when the second sign effect display or the seventh sign effect display is displayed as the sign effect display, it is recognized at that time what kind of form appears as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. Will be able to do that.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect examples, the "first sign effect display" is different from the specific mode (here, the "second sign effect display" or the "seventh sign effect display") as the sign effect display. Is displayed, there is a case where even if the reception is made within the reception period corresponding to this, "a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize" itself does not appear (sixth reception period). I have.

  According to such a configuration, the indication effect display is different from the specific mode (here, the “second indication effect display” or the “seventh indication effect display”) in a different mode (here, the first indication effect display). If executed, the above-mentioned “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” itself appears in the period from the time of the acceptance to the time the mimic image display is hidden. Will be unknown, so that after the reception of the mock image display will be improved until the display is hidden, the tension will be maintained appropriately. become able to.

  In addition, each of the above-described effect examples may be realized by being modified to the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further provided as another reception period (another indication effect display). Is also good. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from the time when the operation of the player is received during the reception period to the time when the mimic image display is set to the non-display state, “the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. Aspects "can appear. In this regard, in this modification, in the case where a specific mode (for example, the second precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) is displayed as the precursor effect display, Even if the reception is made within the reception period corresponding to this, the above-described “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” itself is prevented from appearing. In other words, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” does not appear until the mimic image display is hidden, and the “mimic image display” is not displayed. It is possible to recognize that the mimic image display is not difficult to visually recognize in relation to the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize”.

  In this case, also in this modified example, when the indication effect display is executed in the “first indication effect display” and is received within the corresponding reception period, the reception is performed within the corresponding reception period. When the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears (the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fourth reception period), the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” There is a case where this does not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the indication effect display is different from a specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display, the seventh indication effect display, or another indication effect display not described above) (here, the indication effect display). , The first indication effect display), it becomes unknown whether or not the above-mentioned “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears. The effect of rendering until the image display is not displayed is improved, and the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

  As for the configurations according to these modified examples (substitution examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration applicable to the above-described configuration before the modification.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when a specific mode (here, “second sign effect display”) is displayed as the indication effect display, the action by the player is performed within the corresponding reception period. Even if it is not received, the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” is made to appear in the same mode as when the reception was temporarily made.

  On the other hand, when a mode different from the specific mode (here, “second predictive effect display”) (here, “first predictive effect display”) is displayed as the precursor effect display, this corresponds to this. A case where a different mode appears as a “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” between a case where the action by the player is received during the reception period and a case where the operation is not received (eg, a first reception period); Even in the case where the action by the player is not received within the corresponding reception period, the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” appears in the same mode as when the reception was temporarily made. There are cases (such as the fourth reception period).

  According to such a configuration, an effect that is executed before the reception period occurs (an indication effect display) is used, and the effect after the end of the reception period and the effect when not accepted. And so on.

  Also, in each of the above-described production examples, a specific mode (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, or the like) appears as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. In the possible reception period, the audible output state of the reception-permitted sound is terminated in the middle, but a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first disappearance-related display) as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” In the reception period in which is allowed to appear, there is a case where the audible output state of the acceptable sound is terminated halfway, and a case where the audible output state of the acceptable sound is not terminated midway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output state of the acceptable sound at the time of reception, a situation appears in which it is easy to guess what kind of form appears as “a form in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see”. Since a situation that is hard to guess comes to appear, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, the acceptable sound that can be used for such determination is ended at a timing (timing within the receiving period) before the timing at which the receiving period ends. Since the audible output is performed as a sound, the reception should be performed while the acceptable sound is in the audible output state, or the reception should be performed after the audible output state of the acceptable sound ends. You can choose to play or play.

  In each of the above-described effect examples, during the reception period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursor effect display), a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 232 (a) to FIG. 232 (a) to FIG. (4 modes shown in (d)) can be displayed, and during the reception period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first precursor effect display), a mimic image is displayed. It is desirable that there be a mode that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) to (d) are not displayed, and only the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed). .

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect indicating that a reception period in which a player's operation is to be received will soon occur in a specific type of reception period. Then, a specific symptom effect display (a second symptom effect display and a fifth symptom effect display) among a plurality of types of symptom effect displays can be executed in such a manner as to straddle the timing at which a corresponding reception period occurs. The player's action can be accepted while the specific indication effect display is displayed.

  That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to accept an operation by the player while enabling confirmation of which type (aspect) is displayed as the indication effect display, the type (aspect) of the indication effect display is changed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to forgetting to confirm.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is received while the specific indication effect display is displayed, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, but after the reception, Even when the effect is started to be executed, the specific precursor effect display is displayed without being hidden.

  That is, in this case, an operation by the player is received while it is possible to confirm which type (aspect) is being displayed as the indication effect display, and the effect is started after reception in accordance with the reception. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest caused by forgetting to confirm the type (form) of the indication effect display.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, of the post-reception performances, for the post-reception performance (specific performance after reception) using the second performance device, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor performance display, fifth It is executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the indication effect display.

  In each of the above-described production examples, among the post-reception productions, the post-reception production using the first production device (post-reception production presentation) itself also has a specific precursor production display (second precursor production). Display, the fifth precursor effect display) is executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility (a specific precursor effect display is given priority display (front side display on a layer) with respect to the effect display after reception, etc.) ).

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, during the reception period in which the indication effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display, the fifth indication effect display), while the indication effect display is being displayed. However, when the operation by the player is not received, the indication effect display can be hidden before the timing at which the corresponding reception period ends. ing. That is, in this case, it is possible to play by selecting whether to start the post-acceptance effect while displaying the indication effect display or to start the effect after reception in a state where the indication effect display is hidden. become.

  However, for a particular indication effect display, the execution state may not necessarily be terminated within the reception period, and the execution state is not terminated within the reception period and is continuously displayed until the reception period ends. It may be a thing. In this case, the specific precursor effect display is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the mimic image display is displayed until the corresponding timing during the reception period. In a period after the timing, it is desirable that the display is performed using only an area different from the area where the mimic image display is not displayed, instead of the area where the mimic image display is displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, at the time of the occurrence of the reception period, an audible reception permission sound indicating that the reception is permitted or that the reception is permitted (soon) is made. Processing can be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the operation for reception.

  In addition, among the above-described production examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 256 to 259 and 261, the operation by the player is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is audible (output state) within the reception period. In this case, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” before the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” still appears. In a state in which the reception-permissible sound is not made, execution of a process for making the reception-permissible sound inaudible is started.

  In other words, in this case, even if the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” has not yet appeared after the reception, it is determined that the reception period has already ended. Can be suitably suggested to the player. This makes it difficult to cause inconvenience even if the timing of the appearance of the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” appears after it is received. Will be able to

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, even when an operation by a player is received while the acceptable sound is audible, the acceptable sound is not terminated halfway, and the audible sound of the acceptable sound is not terminated. In addition, a reception period (a first reception period or the like) for displaying the disappearance effect display is further prepared during the continuation of. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the situation is the accepted situation or the situation where the acceptance has not yet been made, so that it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

  In this regard, a reception period (FIGS. 256, 258, and 261) in which the acceptable sound is made inaudible when an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptable sound is audible; Even if an operation by a player is accepted while the acceptable sound is audible, the reception period (FIG. 255) in which the acceptable sound is not set to the inaudible state is generated in response to the “simulation”. Since the type as "a mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)" is made different, it is possible to estimate the subsequent development progress by checking the output state of the acceptable sound. Become.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, a plurality of types are prepared as the acceptable sound. In this regard, in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period, it is desirable that the same sound is output as the allowable reception sound. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception periods has occurred.

  On the other hand, the acceptable reception sound that is audible in response to the first reception period is the audible reception sound that is audible in the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. It is audibly output as a sound different from the allowable sound. According to such a configuration, when the output of the acceptable reception sound is started, by confirming the sound, it is possible to narrow down to a certain degree a candidate as to which type is occurring as the reception period. In addition, when a reception is made while the acceptable sound is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by confirming whether the acceptable sound is terminated in the middle. This makes it possible to provide an interesting effect using the character.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when the indication effect display is executed in a specific mode (here, the second indication effect display, the fifth indication effect display, the seventh indication effect display), the acceptable reception sound corresponding thereto is displayed. When the acceptance is made while the is output, the acceptable sound is terminated halfway, but when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first indication effect display), When the acceptable sound is output while the acceptable sound is output, the acceptable sound is terminated in the middle (third acceptance period, fourth acceptance period, sixth acceptance period), and There is a case where it is not completed (the first reception period). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting effect using the acceptable sound.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, there are a reception period in which two sounds (long-permissible sound and short-time permissible sound) are output as the permissible sounds, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the permissible sounds. . In the reception period in which two sounds (long-period allowable sound and short-period allowable sound) are output as the permissible reception sound, if the reception is performed while the permissible reception sound is audible, the reception is terminated halfway. In the reception period in which only one sound is output, there is a case where the reception is permitted to be performed audibly and the reception is terminated halfway when the reception is performed, and a case where the reception is not completed halfway. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting effect using the acceptable sound.

  Note that, for a reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) having different sound data are output as the allowable reception sound, if the reception is performed while the allowable reception sound is output, two receptions are performed. Only one of the acceptable sounds (long-permissible sounds and short-permissible sounds) may be terminated halfway, and the other may be continued without being terminated midway.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, the same mode appears as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” when the reception is performed during the reception period and when the reception is not performed. The reception period (the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, and the like) and the time when the reception was made during the reception period and the time when the reception was not made are set as " Since there is a reception period (a first reception period, a third reception period, or the like) in which a different mode appears as a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)”, It is possible to improve the directivity when not performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, when a reception is made during a specific reception period (a first reception period, a third reception period, or the like), the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” is set. Although the display is realized as a disappearance-related display different from that of the mimic image display, when the acceptance is not made, the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” is changed by changing the mimic image display itself (a numerical value (display value It is desirable to realize this by changing the rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether the reception is performed or the reception is not performed when the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur can be respectively executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (the effect display device 1600) is displayed in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. In the parentheses, the first effect display TE (here, equivalent to the above-described “timer effect”) and the second effect display FE, which are not directly related to the reception period, can be displayed. Has become. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, when an action by the player is received during the first reception period or the third reception period, the display of the mimic image display is displayed while the mimic image display is displayed. A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance-related display SK1) ”appears, but the“ mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display (first disappearance-related display SK1) ”also occurs in a symbol change in which the reception period does not occur. It does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE that can be displayed (the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE is displayed as priority display or the first effect display TE And the disappearance-related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

  That is, in this case, the disappearance effect display is displayed so that the visibility of the predetermined image display (the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE) irrelevant to the reception period is not affected. As a result, the game can be advanced without adversely affecting the performance that is not directly related to the reception period.

  However, when an operation by the player is received within the fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 267, while the mimic image display is being displayed, “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize ( Although the “fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” appears, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (the fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (It is difficult to visually recognize), but it is assumed to be displayed so as to affect (make it difficult to visually recognize) the visibility of the second effect display FE.

  According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the reception period, the type may affect the visibility when a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears. When the action is performed by the player, whether the image display is not directly related to the reception period or not should be checked. It will be possible to provide the directing effect.

  However, in this case, the first effect display TE is displayed as an image (a plurality of modes) relating to (imposing) the improperness (expectation) of the symbol change, and the second effect display FE is displayed in the symbol The fact that it is displayed as a display that does not relate to (or does not imply) a change (expectation) of the fluctuation may cause a decrease in gaming interest when the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected. It can be said that it is desirable in avoiding.

  Also, in each of the above-described production examples, the second reception period can be generated while the first production display TE is being displayed, but may be generated while the second production display FE is being displayed. It does not occur and occurs only when the second effect display FE is not displayed. In other words, the second effect display FE is made displayable only at a relatively early stage after the symbol change is started, and is hidden thereafter, so that the effect or decoration in the early stage of the change is changed. It is used to enhance. In this regard, by setting the second reception period to be able to occur only at a relatively late stage after the start of the symbol change, this is possible even though there is no direct relation to each other. Such relationships can be created.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the second effect display FE is displayed again in a state where it is easy to visually recognize even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to visually recognize by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. . That is, in this case, the display is not displayed when a predetermined timing comes later. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike in the case of the mimic image display, there is no appearance of a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second effect display FE.

  The first effect display TE is for displaying a predetermined effect result (degree of expectation) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation, but when the disappearance-related display is displayed during the execution period of the first effect display TE, The disappearance-related display is made non-display before the predetermined timing comes.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode in which the display priority is higher than the display priority. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set in the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE is difficult to visually recognize through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, but is made visible. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode in which the display priority is lower than the display priority. At this time, it is desirable that the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 behind the first effect display TE is not made visible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 263, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed on both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE so as not to affect their visibility. It has become something.

  In the case of the first disappearance effect display SK1 which does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the acceptable sound is continued without being interrupted halfway, and the fourth disappearance effect display which affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the acceptable sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance using the acceptable reception sound.

  The first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are both dynamically displayed, and even in a situation where any disappearing effect display is displayed, the dynamic displays are both continued. It is desirable to do.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, it is possible to appear “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” while the mimic image display is being displayed. In this case, a plurality of modes are prepared.

  That is, in this case, any one of a plurality of modes appears as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)”. Will be expected.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples, when a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance related display SK4)” corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 267), Although the disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the mimic image display and the second effect display FE, it is difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display corresponding to the first reception period. )) (FIG. 263), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is executed so that it is difficult to visually recognize only the mimic image display of the mimic image display and the second effect display FE. I have.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a staging effect as to which of the “first disappearance-related display SK1” and the “fourth disappearance-related display SK4” appears as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be improved.

  In this case, “simulated image display” and “predetermined image display” displayed in the first reception period, and “simulated image display” and “predetermined image display” displayed in the fourth reception period Are desirably displayed in the same manner.

  The mimic image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, and the disappearance-related display ends. It is desirable that the display is made non-display at a predetermined timing (prior to the stop of the symbol change) thereafter.

  The fourth extinction-related display SK4 may be an effect by an effect body performed in front of the mimic image display and the second effect display FE, instead of the image. However, it is desirable that the first disappearance-related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

  In each of the effect examples described above, the second reception period can be generated even when the second effect display FE is in a non-display state, and the second image display FE is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. A special mode (second disappearance-related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is prepared. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 265, as a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance-related display SK2)”, a special mode appears (second disappearance-related display SK2). SK2-2) and not appearing (second disappearance related display SK2-1). When the special mode appears, the degree of expectation (big hit) is higher than when the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed in any manner. It is desirable to increase the ratio of the symbols stopped. The proportion may be 100%. In this case, in the second reception period, it is desirable that a sign effect (second sign effect display ZEH2) of a special mode that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in the display state can be executed.

  In each of the above-described effect examples, in the first reception period, the first mode (first after-effect display UG1-1) is executed as the first after-effect display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e1)). -(I1)) and a case where the second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) having a higher degree of expectation than the first mode is executed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e2)-). Regardless of (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the "mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize".

  On the other hand, in the second reception period, as the second post-reception effect display UG2, the second aspect (second post-reception effect display UG2) having a higher degree of expectation than the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1). When UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as a "mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize", but a first mode as the second post-acceptance effect display UG. In the case where (second effect presentation display UG2-1) is executed, a specific mode does not appear as a "mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize" and a mode different from the specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-). 2) appears.

  According to such a configuration, depending on the type of the reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as the effect display after reception only by confirming “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. Since the case where the degree cannot be estimated occurs, it is expected that the effect of such a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” will enhance the game entertainment. .

  In addition, as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the “specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-1 or the second extinction-related display SK2-2)” which may occur in response to the second reception period. Is not available as a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the first reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to estimate the type of the reception period based on “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  However, as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the same mode may appear in the first reception period and the second reception period.

  As shown in FIG. 263, in the first reception period, when no reception is made, “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” is set as a mode that cannot appear when the reception is made (the first disappearance-related display). SK-2). However, if the reception is not made in the first reception period, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” itself may not appear.

  In the second reception period, any one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped) can be selectively audibly output as the reception allowable sound. In the first reception period, It is desirable that only one aspect be audible output as the acceptable reception sound. Further, in this case, any of the acceptable reception sounds (a plurality of modes) that can be audibly output in the second reception period are different from the acceptable reception sounds audibly output in the first reception period. It is desirable to prepare.

  In each of the above-described production examples, the first reception period to the seventh reception period are all generated in different fluctuation patterns. However, the same fluctuation period is used in the first reception period to the seventh reception period. A reception period having a relationship that can occur sequentially in the pattern may be included. That is, in this case, at least some of the first to seventh reception periods can be generated in a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

  For example, for a reception period (a second reception period, a fourth reception period, or the like) in which “a mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, the “mimic image display Occurs in the same symbol variation after the occurrence of a reception period (such as the first reception period or the third reception period) in which the form in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display) does not change in accordance with the degree of expectation It is desirable to make it possible.

  Also, for a reception period (a second reception period, a fifth reception period, or the like) in which reception can be performed while the precursor effect display is being displayed, reception may be performed while the precursor effect display is being displayed. After a non-acceptance period (a first reception period, a third reception period, a fourth reception period, or the like) has occurred, it is desirable that the symbol can be generated within the same symbol variation.

  In the reception period in which “the mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” depends on the degree of expectation. It is possible to selectively output a plurality of permissible acceptable sounds including a specific permissible sound that cannot be output audibly during a reception period that does not change, and when the specific permissible sound is audibly output, it is difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. It is desirable that an aspect having a high degree of expectation appears as “an aspect (extinction-related display)”.

  In a reception period (a second reception period, a fifth reception period, or the like) in which “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, the reception period dedicated to the reception period is used. Although the indication effect display is executable, a special notice effect can be executed at a stage even before the indication effect display is executed, and when the special notice effect is executed, It is desirable that the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is always executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation when the reception is performed during the reception period.

  In the reception period in which “the mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see (extinction-related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, a big hit is obtained as the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes hard to see (extinction-related display)”. (For example, the second extinction-related display SK2-2) that can appear only when the user is in the state. Further, a mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or the like) that cannot appear when the big hit is obtained may be prepared.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (a mimic image display, a gauge image, or the like) at least during the reception period in association with the occurrence of the reception period. Thus, at least the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) can be output within the reception period. Further, when an action by the player is received during the reception period, a post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect can be output based on the reception, and the reception-related effect display during the reception period can be performed. When a player's action is received while a mimic image display or a gauge image is displayed, the reception-related effect display (a mimic image display, a gauge image, etc.) is performed based on the reception. ) Is hidden. Similarly, when an operation by a player is received while a reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound or the like) is in an audible state during the reception period, the reception-related production is performed based on the reception. Sounds (acceptable sounds, etc.) may be made inaudible.

  In such a configuration, the output sound after reception related to the post-reception effect is audibly output based on the fact that the action by the player has been received during the reception period, and the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, , Etc.) are hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is set to a non-audible state (acceptable reception sound or the like), so that it is possible to easily recognize that the reception state is present.

  In this regard, in each of the above-described effect examples, the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) is terminated at the time when the post-acceptance effect is started in response to the reception being performed. However, the reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) is terminated when the reception output sound according to the reception is started, and may be inaudible. I have to be.

  According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display (mock image display, gauge image, or the like) displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the effect is started after reception of the display. On the other hand, the reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) which is made audible (output) during the reception period is not audible at the time when the output sound is started to be executed after reception. Becomes As a result, even after the performance has been started after the reception, it is possible to confirm the mode as the reception-related effect display (mock-up image display, gauge image, etc.) displayed during the reception period, while also receiving the reception-related effect sound. By making the (acceptable reception sound) inaudible, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

  As described above, the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, or the like) is executed as an effect display that indicates the rate (expected degree) of obtaining a big hit. In this case, the reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound) also differs depending on the degree of expectation (the mode as the reception-related production display) suggested by the reception-related production display (a mock-up image display, a gauge image, or the like). It is desirable to output

  However, in each of the production examples described above, during the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptable sound) is continued without being terminated even at the time when the output sound after reception is started to be executed. Accordingly, it is difficult to recognize whether the user is in the accepted situation, and the nervous feeling can be appropriately maintained.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, in the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the reception-related production display (a simulation image display, a gauge image, or the like), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display indicating the ratio (expectation) that exists. Also, in the first reception period, only one aspect of the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is configured to appear. Therefore, when a mode different from this aspect appears in another reception period. It is possible to appropriately improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, a plurality of modes including the specific mode are prepared as the precursor effect display, and prior to the occurrence of the specific reception period (for example, the second reception period), the precursor of the specific mode is displayed. An effect display (for example, a second indication effect display: FIG. 256) can be displayed, and an audible output of reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound or the like) can be started. Then, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) can be executed in such a manner as to straddle the timing at which the reception period occurs. A sign effect display (for example, a second sign effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed, and an operation by a player can be accepted while a reception-related effect sound (acceptable sound) is in an audible state (output). ing. In this regard, if an operation by the player is received while the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed within the reception period, it is determined that the reception has been performed. Thus, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is not displayed. Further, if an operation by the player is received while the reception-related production sound (acceptable sound) is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptance permission sound) is determined based on the reception. Sound) is made inaudible.

  In the above configuration, based on the fact that the action by the player has been received during the reception period, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden. Since the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is set to the non-audible state, an indication effect display of a specific mode that is in an execution state before the reception period occurs (for example, a second indication effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related effect sound are being executed, even if an action by the player is received, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in the received state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 256 and the like, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is a post-acceptance effect corresponding to the fact that the indication has been received within the corresponding reception period. Are not terminated at the time when the execution is started, and are displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is terminated when the output sound after reception according to the reception is started, and is made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, the indication effect display (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) of the above-described specific mode, which is displayed before the occurrence of the reception period, is received after the execution of the effect is started. , The reception-related production sound (acceptable sound), which is audible (output) before the occurrence of the reception period, is in an audible state when the output sound is started after the reception. Will be lost. Thereby, even after the performance after the specific reception is started, it is possible to confirm the form as the indication effect display that is displayed before the occurrence of the reception period, but also to display the reception-related effect output before the occurrence of the reception period. By making the sound (acceptable sound) inaudible, it is possible to suitably indicate that the reception period has already ended.

  The indication effect display (second indication effect display ZEH2) in the specific mode is displayed as a different display image in accordance with the degree of expectation, and is executed as an effect display indicating the ratio (expectation) at which the big hit is obtained. It is desirable to be done. In this case, for the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound), a different sound is to be output according to the degree of expectation indicated by the indication effect display of the specific mode (the mode as the indication effect display of the specific mode). Is desirable.

  However, in each of the above-described effect examples, during the reception period in which the first sign effect display is executed, the first sign effect display can be executed in only one mode, and the ratio of the jackpot (expected) Degree) is not executed as an effect display indicating the degree.

  In a reception period (a second reception period, a fifth reception period, or the like) in which a plurality of acceptable sounds (long-permissible sounds, short-permissible sounds) are simultaneously output, the output of the acceptable sounds and the reception Although the output sound does not overlap, in the reception period in which only one acceptable sound is output, the output of the acceptable sound and the effect sound after reception overlap (first reception period), and the output of the acceptable sound And the case where the output sound does not overlap after the reception (third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.).

  The long-permissible sound is, for example, a sound output as a sound effect (corresponding to the second permissible sound shown in FIG. 213 and the like), and the short-permissible sound is output, for example, as a message sound. Sound (corresponding to the first allowable sound shown in FIG. 213 and the like). The case where only one acceptable sound is output means that, for example, a message sound is not output and only a sound effect is output (corresponding to a case where only the first allowable sound is output in FIG. 212 and the like). That is. Note that the short-time allowable sound may be referred to as “sound output as a sound effect”, and the long-time allowable sound may be referred to as “sound output as a message sound”.

  When one of the two acceptable sounds is output as a “message sound”, the message image corresponding to the message sound (“pressing sound”) is output while the message sound (for example, the sound “pressing”) is audibly output. It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as "). In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period in which the post-reception effect (such as the output sound after reception) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period overlaps the period during which the effect is executed after the reception.

  In each of the effects described above, the mimic image display is displayed as an integrated mimic image display including the gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated mimic image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 232 and the like, and other configurations and the like can be appropriately adopted. That is, conventionally, since the mimic image display is displayed separately from the gauge image, it has been difficult to make both of them difficult to visually recognize by the indication effect display or the disappearance-related display. The gauge image may change according to the mode of the mimic image display that indicates the degree of expectation, and if it can be visually recognized, the meaning of making it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display is lost. In this regard, since the image is displayed as an integrated model image display, it is easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the gauge image.

  In each of the above-described production examples, the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display)” is such that the production display is made difficult to visually recognize after the reception. Appearance may be made so that the display is not difficult to visually recognize (for example, the effect display after reception is preferentially displayed). Also, in the plurality of reception periods, the reception period in which the effect display is difficult to visually recognize after the reception due to the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (extinction related display)” and the “simple image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” The mode may include a reception period in which the effect display after reception is not difficult to visually recognize.

  Also, not all of the first to seventh reception periods need to be prepared, and only a part of the reception periods may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

  Even during the first reception period, when the reception-permitted sound is received while being output audibly, the reception-permissible sound may be terminated halfway.

  The "first sign effect display" and the "seventh sign effect display" need not necessarily be "types that are not displayed at the time when the reception period occurs and are hidden before this", For example, you may make it display as "the type displayed in the form which straddled the timing which a reception period occurs". That is, in this case, the “first omen effect display” and the “seventh omen effect display” are the above-mentioned “second omen effect display ZEH2” displayed corresponding to the second reception period and the effect contents (display image). Although it is different, with respect to “start time and end time of display, and how it is related to other image display until being hidden”, etc., refer to FIG. 256, FIG. 264, and FIG. The display is performed in the same manner as described for the “second sign effect display ZEH2”. The same applies to other examples and modifications.

  Needless to say, when "at least a part" is described in the above description and the following description, it is intended to include "all".

  Next, a modified example of each of the above-described effect examples will be described. That is, FIG. 268 is a modification example of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. 269 is a modification example of “the effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. This is a modified example of “production of”. Note that, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are as described above in “Examples of effects related to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265)”. Another example applicable to the “production example” can be similarly applied.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a specific decorative member SDY (robin) as a fourth effect device. For convenience of explanation, in each of the above-described production examples, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) has been described. However, in each of the above-described production examples, as the pachinko machine 1, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is used. Object). In other words, in each of the above-described production examples, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) does not operate in connection with the occurrence of the reception period.

  Now, assuming that the “second variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first in the modification for the second reception period, first, an effect determination (advance determination determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern Do). Then, thereafter, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (see the situation illustrated in FIG. 268 (a)). )).

  Subsequent steps are the same as those in FIGS. 264 (b) to (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), “second sign effect display ZEH2” is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (c), “Integrated mimic image display IG” is displayed (timing tG2). Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (d), when the “second sign effect display ZEH2” and the “integrated mimic image display IG” are displayed, the second reception period occurs. (Timing tG3).

  Although the second effect device (sub-liquid crystal 1610) is not illustrated here for the sake of convenience of description, in this modified example, the “second reception device” using the second effect device (sub-liquid crystal 1610) is also used. The rear specific effect and the precursor effect are executed in the same manner as in the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). In addition, an effect using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable reception sound, output sound after the second reception, and the like) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

  Further, in this modified example, even when the operation by the player is received at the timing tG3a in the second reception period, the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), based on the reception, At the same time as the end of the second reception period, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started.

  The example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))” is a relative post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to the modified example. 268 corresponds to a case in which the first mode having a low degree of expectation is executed, and the effect progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2))”. This corresponds to a case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), the point in time at which the action by the player is received (the second post-reception effect starts in response to the reception) At the time point tG3a, which is the time when the integrated mimic image display IG is not displayed, the integrated mimic image display IG is not made to be difficult to see. Not only the integrated simulated image display IG but also the second symptom effect display ZEH2 is not displayed at the timing tG3a when the operation by the player is received (at the time the effect is started after the second reception). This is also the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265) in that it does not make it difficult to view the image.

  In the case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modified example (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)), This is also the same as the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). That is, first, at the timing tG3b, the display relating to the “second disappearance-related display SK2-1” is started as “the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. Next, when the timing tG3c arrives, “second post-reception effect display” is performed as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to an operation performed by the player during the second reception period. UG2-1 "is started.

  Thereafter, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), as shown in FIG. 269 (h1), while the “second reception effect display UG2-1” is displayed, First, among the “integrated mimic image display IG”, the “second omen effect display ZEH2”, and the “second disappearance related display SK2-1”, the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “second omen effect display ZEH2” Are hidden. After the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “second omen effect display ZEH2” have each been hidden, as shown in FIG. 269 (i1), the “second disappearance-related display SK2-1” is disabled. As a result, the display relating to the “second reception effect display UG2-1” is performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

  However, when the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b , As a “mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see”, the operation of starting the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) instead of performing the disappearance-related display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). Let it. That is, as shown in FIG. 269 (f2), by positioning (operating) the specific decorative member SDY (storage material) so as to overlap at least a part of the integrated mimic image display IG in a front view, The integrated simulated image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as a “mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the situation shown in FIG. 269 (f2) has a higher degree of expectation than the case shown in FIG. 269 (f1). Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, since the operation itself by the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) indicates the degree of expectation, it is possible to double as a post-acceptance effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the model image display IG. In this sense, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as an effect element indicating the degree of expectation even in an effect different from the effect after reception (such as a notice effect indicating the degree of expectation). Desirably.

  Next, as a “mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, “production using the fourth rendering device (specific decorative member SDY)” is performed in front view with at least a part of the integrated mimic image display IG. When the timing tG3c arrives while being executed in an overlapping manner, as a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in accordance with the fact that the operation by the player has been received within the second reception period. Of the second effect presentation display UG2-2 is started.

  That is, in this case, “Integrated simulation image display IG” and “Second sign effect display ZEH2” are displayed, and “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” is “Integrated simulation image display IG”. While the execution is performed at a position overlapping with at least a part of the image display IG in a front view, the execution of the “second reception effect display UG2-2” is started. According to such a configuration, the “second effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” makes it difficult to visually recognize the integrated mimic image display IG and the second sign effect display ZEH2, and thus the second effect is displayed. Since the presentation display UG2-2 after reception is started, while the second reception period has already been ended, the player's gazing point is “integrated mimic image display IG” or “second omen”. It is expected that the effect will be shifted from the effect display ZEH2 to the “effect display UG2-2 after the second reception” naturally (after timing tG3c).

  Then, also in the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modified example (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the above-described “ When the display related to the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 ”is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (h2), while the“ second post-reception effect display UG2-2 ”is displayed, First, a mode in which the “integrated mimic image display IG”, the “second sign effect display ZEH2”, and the “integrated mimic image display IG are difficult to see (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)”) In this case, “integrated mimic image display IG” and “second sign effect display ZEH2” are not displayed, and the process ends. Then, after the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “second sign effect display ZEH2” are respectively hidden, as shown in FIG. 269 (i2), the “integrated mimic image display IG is visually recognized. The “fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)” as a “difficult mode” is ended. In other words, the specific decoration member SDY is moved to the original position so that the “production using the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)” does not overlap with the integrated model image display IG in a front view. As a result, under the condition that the visibility is good, the display related to “second after-effect presentation display UG2-2)” is performed.

  In the case of performing the “effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” as the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” (the mode of relatively high expectation (FIG. 269 ( e2) to (i2)) are cases in which “production using the first production device (extinction-related display)” is performed as “a mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” (relative expectation). It is desirable to make the time from when the “mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see” appears until the process is completed to be longer than in the low mode (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)). In this case, when the “fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)” is executed as “a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, the “fourth effect device (specific effect)” is executed. Direction using the decorative member SDY)) "Direction of itself This makes it possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game, and thereafter, even after the “fourth production device (production using the specific decorative member SDY)” has been completed, it has been difficult to visually recognize the game until then. Exposing the effect display UG2-2 "after the second reception will be expected to further improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, in the first reception period or the third reception period, a case where a low expectation mode is executed as a post-reception effect and a case where a high expectation mode is executed as a post-reception effect are performed. The “mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (such as the first disappearance-related display SK-1)” is executed for the same time.

  On the other hand, in the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D3 (FIG. 269 (e3) to (h3))”, the operation by the player is received within the second reception period according to the modified example. It is assumed that there is no such a case.

  As shown in FIGS. 269 (e3) to (h3), in this modified example, if no action by the player is received within the second reception period, the case of the above-described example (FIG. e3) to (h3)). For example, when the operation by the player is not received, as shown in FIG. 269 (f3), the “integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” as the player within the second reception period. If the operation according to has been accepted, the mode that has appeared will appear.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 269 (e3) to 269 (h3), the "second annihilation related display SK2-1" is displayed when no action by the player is received within the second reception period. In the case, if the action by the player has been received within the second reception period, the effect has progressed from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))”. This is the case when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation has been executed. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when the operation by the player is not received within the second reception period, the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” is defined as “a fourth effect device (specification). The “effect using the decorative member SDY)” is executed when the action by the player is received within the second reception period from “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2)” in FIG. 268 (d)). To (i2)) ”(the case where the post-acceptance effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is being executed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (g3), the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “integral mimic image display IG become difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or fourth First, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the “integrated mimic image display IG” is not displayed in this manner, as shown in FIG. 269 (h3), the “integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2) -1 or the fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)).

  As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 268 and FIG. 269, “the mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to see” is performed as “display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)”. There is a case (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)) and a case (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2)) which is performed as “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)”. In this regard, in the above-described example, in the example described above, the timing at which the “display on the first rendering device (the rendering display device 1600)” starts to be executed, and the “draft using the fourth rendering device (the specific decorative member SDY)” is performed. The start timing is set to be the same (timing tG3b), but as for “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)”, the “first effect device (effect display device 1600)” May be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before the timing tG3b at which the execution of “display at” is started.

  According to such a configuration, depending on the type of “the mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” and the degree of expectation (ratio of large hit symbols appearing) suggested as an effect after reception, “one piece Since the time until the appearance of the “simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see” becomes different, it becomes more interesting and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In particular, "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" also functions as an effect after reception, like "specific effect after reception using the second effect device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  However, even in the case where “the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” is being executed as “a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see”, FIG. As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a part of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) is visible.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when the effect progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2))” (relative expectation degree). In the case where the effect has been executed after a high reception), the “display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” is not performed as “a mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. "Effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is to be performed. However, in this case, “display (extinction-related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” and “fourth effect device (specification) And an effect using the decorative member SDY) ".

  According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the “display (extinction-related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” and the “fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)” are displayed. Both the "use effect" and "the effect used" make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated mimic image display IG, and it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception has been performed.

  As described above, “the display (extinction-related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” and “the fourth effect device (specific decoration)” include “a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. When performing both the “effect using the member SDY)”, the disappearance-related display is displayed (such as a priority display) so as to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the integrated model image display IG. The effect using the effect device (specific decoration member SDY) "is executed so that at least a part of the integrated mimic image display IG and at least a part of the disappearance-related display are hardly visually recognized.

  Also in this case, the “production using the fourth rendering device (specific decorative member SDY)” which functions as “the mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” is started to be executed at the timing tG3a. The “display (extinction-related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” functioning as “a mode in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” may be started to be executed at the timing tG3b. .

  Further, as “an aspect in which the integrated simulation image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, “display (extinction-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)” and “fourth effect device (specific decorative member)” When the effect progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))” (relative display). (In the case where the effect is performed after reception with low expectation), the image display is displayed as a different image display from the “integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (extinction-related display SK2-1)”. It is desirable to do.

  Further, the fourth effect device is not necessarily provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY), and is at least a part of the integrated model image display IG (model image display). (For example, a flying object capable of performing an effect by flying on the front side of the effect display device 1600 or a frontal object on the front side of the effect display device 1600). Or a light guide plate that is provided in the same manner). The effect using the fourth effect device is not only executed based on the reception during the reception period, but also when different effect conditions are satisfied (for example, when a predetermined timing comes in a specific symbol change). It is also desirable to be performed.

  The effect example relating to “a mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progress as shown in FIG. 268 and FIG. 269 is performed.

  In addition, the effect example regarding the “mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. Instead, the information may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of the reception periods.

  In each of the above-described effect examples, while the integrated simulation image display IG (both the integrated simulation image display IG and the sign effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) is displayed, the effect display after reception is performed. However, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize the integrated mimic image display IG (both the integrated mimic image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period). This is started (FIGS. 263, 265, and 267).

  However, instead of this, while the integrated mimic image display IG (both the integrated mimic image display IG and the sign effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) is displayed, the effect display after the reception is started. However, the post-acceptance effect display is not difficult to be visually recognized by the integrated simulation image display IG (both the integrated simulation image display IG and the sign effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) (priority display, etc.). ), The display may be started.

  Hereinafter, a case will be described in which such a configuration is applied to the effect example relating to the second reception period. Configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the above-described examples (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265), and can be appropriately applied to other examples.

  The effect contents until the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the second reception period according to this modified example are the effect contents described above (FIGS. 264 (a) to (d), FIG. 265 (e)). Is the same as). For example, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 270 (e2), at the timing tG3a when the operation by the player is accepted, the “integrated mimic image display IG” or the “second omen effect display ZEH2” Is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG and the second indication effect display ZEH2 are not difficult to see.

  Also in this modified example, there are a case where a post-acceptance effect with a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where a post-acceptance effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. In the case where the low post-acceptance effect is executed, the effect is the same as the effect contents described above (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the “post-reception effect with relatively high expectation” is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period, the effect contents described above (FIG. 265 ( 270 (f2) to (i2) instead of f2) to (i2)).

  First, at the timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 270 (f2) in a situation where the “display after second reception effect” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not been started yet. Then, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display relating to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (the mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) comes, the player's operation is performed within the second reception period. The “second post-reception effect display UG2” as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance is started in the second mode (second after-effect display UG2-2). Is done. It goes without saying that the post-acceptance effect display indicates the degree of expectation (the rate at which the privilege is given to the player). The proportion may be 100%.

  However, as shown in FIG. 270 (g2), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example includes an integrated mimic image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second disappearance-related display SK2, and the like. Is not difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example overlaps with the area where the integrated mimic image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 are displayed. The integrated simulation image display IG, the second indication effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 are displayed (priority display) in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  According to such a configuration, the post-second-reception effect display UG2-2 itself can function as a “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, thereby improving the game entertainment. You can plan. Even in the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this example, priority display is not performed on the first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-described “timer effect”), and the first effect is displayed. The portion overlapping the display TE is made difficult to visually recognize.

  Then, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 270 (h2), first, the integrated mimic image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (i2), the second disappearance-related display SK2 is not displayed.

  Also in the modification shown in FIG. 270, when an operation by the player is not received within the second reception period, it is the same as the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 265 (e3) to (h3)). . In other words, when the operation by the player is not received, the "integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears as if the operation by the player was received within the second reception period. Will appear.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 and the second post-acquisition effect display UG2-2 are displayed as "an aspect in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". However, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 may be displayed without displaying the second disappearance-related display SK2-2.

  The effect example regarding the “effect display after reception” described with reference to FIG. 270 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, when applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progress as shown in FIG. 270 is made.

  Further, the effect example regarding the “effect display after reception” described with reference to FIG. 270 does not apply to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but is different from any of those reception periods. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth fluctuation pattern, eighth post-reception effect).

  In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example, when an operation by a player is received within a reception period (specific reception period), a mimic image display (here, an integrated mimic image display) is performed. While the IG) is displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the mimic image display is used to make it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. The second disappearance-related display SK2-2) "can be displayed, and the mimic image display includes the specific disappearance effect display after the display of the specific disappearance effect (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is started. (For example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is not displayed while being displayed.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the mimic image display. Also, the visibility of the mimic image display is reduced by the specific disappearance effect display until the mimic image display is hidden, and the mimic image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. As a result, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the mock image display is hidden is small, and a decrease in gaming interest when the mock image display is hidden is suppressed. Will be able to gain.

  In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example, the “specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2)” is a mimic image display (here, integrated display). The image display IG) can be displayed even in a period after it is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is displayed. The post-acceptance effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY or the second after-effect display UG2-2) is started to be executed. Then, the post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area which is a display target area of the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) ( 270) or an effecting body (the example illustrated in FIG. 269 or another example thereof) located at a position overlapping (at least a part of) the specific disappearance effect display in front view. It is realized as something.

  According to such a configuration, among the post-acceptance effects, a specific post-acceptance effect executed at a position overlapping with a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) in front view is specified. Can be recognized without shifting the gaze destination from the position where the disappearance effect display is displayed. That is, in this case, at the time when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gazing point in order to grasp the mode of the specific reception effect, It is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment.

  When a specific post-acceptance effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY or the second post-acquisition effect display UG2-2) according to the above modification example appears, the rate at which the privilege is given to the player is reduced. It may be set to 100%.

  The specific post-acceptance effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY or the second post-acquisition effect display UG2-2) according to the above-described modification is executed before the mimic image display is hidden. Since this is started and makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display, it is possible to suitably suggest that the mimic image display has been accepted even while the mimic image display is being displayed. . However, with respect to the specific post-acceptance effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above-described modification, the display after the mimic image display is hidden is performed. Execution may be started.

  Apart from the reception period in which a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY or the second post-reception effect display UG2-2) according to the above-described modification can be generated, the specific post-reception effect After preparing a reception period in which a post-reception effect different from the above can be generated, a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is a case where the different post-reception effect is executed. May also be displayed. The reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated may be any one of the first reception period and the third to seventh reception periods. However, it is desirable that the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is not displayed in a reception period (first reception period) in which the reception-permissible sound does not end halfway (another case). May be displayed)

  Note that, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example, upon occurrence of the reception period, the reception of the post-reception effect corresponding to the reception period is permitted, or A process for audible reception acceptable sound indicating that the reception is allowed (soon) is executed, whereby the player forgets to perform an operation for reception. It is trying to suppress.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types of indication effect displays are prepared, but in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, a specific indication effect display (second When an operation by the player is received while the indication effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a specific indication effect display (second indication effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the reception is performed, but the specific indication effect is displayed. While the sign effect display (the second sign effect display ZEH2) is displayed, a mode in which the specific sign effect display (the second sign effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize appears. Then, after the appearance of the mode, the specific sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is made to be hidden under the condition that the specific sign effect display is difficult to visually recognize.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, while it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the sign effect display, the visibility is reduced until the sign effect display is hidden. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception has already been performed.

  In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or other examples, the mode in which the specific indication effect display (second indication effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize is the specific indication effect display (second indication effect display). ZEH2) or another image display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 or the post-acceptance effect display UG2-2), or a front side of a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2). It is to be a production in a production body performed in.

  In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, “an aspect in which it is difficult to visually recognize a specific indication effect display (second indication effect display ZEH2)” is a specific indication effect display (second indication effect). Not only the indication effect display ZEH2), but also a specific indication effect display and a mimic image display are executed so as to straddle the front view, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. This mode may be performed in a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600. In this case, a specific precursor effect display or a mimic image display can be visually recognized through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable that

  Further, the “mode in which the specific sign effect display (the second sign effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize” is realized by a change (such as a change in transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the specific sign effect display itself. May be

  In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example, the specific sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is not displayed during the reception period. Then, even when the reception is performed in the non-displayed state, even in the case where the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize (the second disappearance-related display SK2-2, the post-reception effect display UG2-2, ) Is to be executed.

  In the above-described first reception period, when an action by the player is received, a plurality of effects (the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1), the effects shown in FIG. 263) are performed based on the reception. (E2) to any one of the effects shown in (i2), even if any of these effects appears, in a specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first reception period) (First mode) of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to) can appear. That is, in this case, even if any of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode also appears in accordance with the appearance, so that these are caused by the fact that the action by the player was received within the specific reception period. Yes "can be suggested to be a common production.

  On the other hand, in the above-described second reception period or the second reception period according to the modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example, when an operation by the player is received, the special condition (big hit winning) is obtained. Condition (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 or a specific mode) in which the appearance ratio (may be 0% or 100%) differs depending on whether or not a condition or a probability change entry condition is satisfied. Any one of a plurality of modes including an effect using the decorative member SDY and an effect display UG2-2 after reception) can appear, and when the special mode appears, the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. . According to such a configuration, a special mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears before the mimic image display is hidden, and the mimic image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the special mode. Thus, the player can enjoy the effect of changing from the mimic image display to the effect after reception (special mode) without changing the point of gaze.

  In this regard, even when the specific mode (the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (the first mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) corresponding to the first reception period) appears, the mimic image display shows the “specific The "mode" makes it difficult to visually recognize. According to such a configuration, when the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (special reception period) due to the special mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is suggested, and in the specific mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is not suggested. In some cases, the mimic image display may be difficult to visually recognize (specific reception period), so that the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (specific mode, special mode)” may have directivity. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, when the reception period exemplified in each of the above-described production examples and modification examples occurs, a mimic image display that indicates an object (such as a type of operation means) that is permitted to be accepted within the reception period is displayed. The display may be performed both during the period in which the indication effect display before the reception period occurs and during the reception period. However, in this case, the mimic image display that is displayed during the period in which the indication effect display is performed has a different form from the mimic image display that is displayed during the reception period, and the mimic image display is performed before the reception period occurs. It is desirable to be hidden.

  Hereinafter, a description will be given of a modified example in a case where the technique of performing the simulation image display in such an aspect is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 271 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 272 (g) and (h) are modified examples of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 264. (I) to (l) are modified examples of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” illustrated in FIG. 265. Note that, in this modification, configurations that are not particularly mentioned are as described above in “Examples of effects related to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265)”. Another example applicable to the “production example” can be similarly applied.

  Now, assuming that the “second variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first in the modification for the second reception period, the effect determination (advance notice) corresponding to the second variation pattern is first made. Judgment). After that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (such as the effect description according to the second variation pattern, the sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (see the situation shown in FIG. 271 (a)). )).

  However, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the timing tG0 before the above-mentioned timing tG1 has arrived, the "preceding type indication effect display SZE" is executed. I have. In the example shown in FIG. 271 (b), as the “preceding type indication effect display SZE”, another effect example (a mimic image display is executed within a period during which the indication effect display is executed, and then this is temporarily hidden) The image display used in the normal effect example that does not perform such an operation is performed. However, for the “preceding precursor effect display SZE”, another effect example (the precursor effect display is executed). It is desirable to execute the display as an image display that cannot appear in a normal effect example in which the mimic image display is executed within the period and then is not once hidden.

  Then, in this modified example, the mimic image display TMH (here, the integrated mimic image display) appears while the “preceding symptom effect display SZE” is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), at least a part of the mimic image display TMH (in this case, an integrated mimic image display) according to this example is hardly visually recognized by the "preceding precursor effect display SZE". The display is started in the middle. Further, although the mimic image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated mimic image display, an image in which a gauge image GG, a section image KG which is a display target area of the gauge image GG, and the like are not displayed ( This is displayed as a model image display that cannot be displayed during the reception period.

  After a lapse of the predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the mimic image display TMH (here, the integrated mimic image display) is displayed in such a manner that it is not difficult to visually recognize it by the "preceding type indication effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display relating to the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” has been completed, and is displayed in a form decorated with another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

  However, as shown in FIGS. 271 (c) and (d), the mimic image display TMH (here, an integrated mimic image display) appearing while the “preceding precursor effect display SZE” is displayed. Is displayed in a mode different from any of the modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) as a model image display that can be displayed during the reception period. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the reception period has not yet occurred, while displaying the model image display TMH for a relatively long time,

  As will be described later, when the mimic image display TMH (here, the integrated mimic image display) appears, the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) are set within a corresponding reception period. Among them, the mimic image display is displayed in a mode of high expectation (for example, FIG. 232 (d)). As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the “preceding sign effect display SZE” is displayed. The modes that can be displayed as the mimic image display need not necessarily be the above four modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)), but may be, for example, only two modes.

  Then, in this modified example, when the timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (e), the execution of the “normal type symptom effect display TZE” is started, and the “normal type symptom effect display TZE” is displayed as a model image. Part of the TMH is made difficult to visually recognize (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (f), the "normal type symptom effect display TZE" is displayed in such a manner that the entirety of the mimic image display TMH is difficult to visually recognize. While "TZE" is displayed, the model image display TMH is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the timing tG2 comes, as shown in FIG. 272 (g), the mimic image display (here, the integrated mimic image display IG) is performed in the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). ), The display is started in a mode with high expectation. In this way, when the display of the mimic image that can be displayed within the reception period (here, the integrated mimic image display IG) is started to be displayed, a part of the mimic image display is hard to be visually recognized by the “normal type indication effect display TZE”. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (h), while the “normal type indication effect display TZE” and the “simulated image display (here, the integrated imitation image display IG)” are displayed, the second Occurs (timing tG3).

  Although the second effect device (sub-liquid crystal 1610) is not illustrated here for the sake of convenience of description, in this modified example, the “second reception device” using the second effect device (sub-liquid crystal 1610) is also used. The rear specific effect and the precursor effect are executed in the same manner as in the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). In addition, an effect using the third effect device (speaker) (acceptable reception sound, output sound after the second reception, and the like) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

  Further, in this modified example, even when the operation by the player is received at the timing tG3a in the second reception period, the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), based on the reception, At the same time as the end of the second reception period, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started.

  Also in this modified example, there are a case where a post-acceptance effect with a relatively low expectation is executed and a case where a post-acceptance effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. In the case where the low post-acceptance effect is executed, the effect is the same as the effect contents described above (FIGS. 265 (e1) to (i1)), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the “post-reception effect with relatively high expectation” is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period, the effect contents described above (FIG. 265 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 272 (i) to (l) appear.

  First, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 272 (i), at the timing tG3a when the operation by the player is received, the “normal type precursor effect display TZE” or the “simulated image display (here, , Integrated mock image display IG) "is not hidden, and the" normal type sign effect display TZE "and" mock image display (here, integrated mock image display IG) "are difficult to see. Nor.

  However, in this example, the dynamic display as the mimic image display is performed as long as the “mimic image display (here, the integrated mimic image display IG)” is displayed at the time when the reception is performed in this way and thereafter. To continue. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced as time elapses.

  At the timing tG3b, under the situation that the “display after second reception effect” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not been started yet, as shown in FIG. 272 (j), The second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG has at the time of reception (FIG. 272 (i)), when the timing tG3b arrives, the display area becomes “0”. I am trying to be. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship). However, ignoring the previous rules, the display area was suddenly greatly reduced, which caused "the remaining time to be" 0 "unexpectedly, but we were lucky enough to accept it." It can be made to think that it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 (the mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to see) comes, the player within the second reception period In the second mode (second reception effect display UG2-2), the "second reception effect display UG2" as the post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the reception of the action by the user is performed. Is started. It goes without saying that the post-acceptance effect display indicates the degree of expectation (the rate at which the privilege is given to the player). The proportion may be 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (k), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example is an integrated mimic image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, and a second disappearance-related display SK2-. 2 and the like, it is difficult to visually recognize it, but it may be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 270.

  Thereafter, first, the integrated mimic image display IG and the second indication effect display ZEH2 are not displayed (FIG. 272 (l)). Next, although illustration is omitted, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 is made non-display, whereby the second reception-after-effect display UG2-2 is displayed with good visibility. Become like

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as precursor effect displays indicating that a reception period will occur. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 271 (b) to (f) and FIG. 272 (g)) is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, The mock image display related to the reception target is displayed both within the precursor period (mock image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and within the reception period (mock image display IG).

  In particular, in this modification, after the mimic image display (the mimic image display TMH) is displayed during the precursor period, it is not displayed within the precursor period. Since the model image display TMH that is displayed only during the precursor period (and is not displayed) is different from the model image display IG that can be displayed during the reception period, It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from a time period before the occurrence of the event.

  Also, in this modified example, if the image is displayed within the reception period, the mimic image display IG is not displayed based on the reception (FIG. 272 (l)). Until the mimic image display IG is hidden, a “specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)” can appear (FIG. 272 (j), (272)). k)). However, regarding the "specific mode (second extinction-related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display", the mimic image display TMH displayed during the precursor period (specific precursor display display) is not displayed. When it is turned off, it does not appear before it is hidden.

  According to such a configuration, in the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) that appears difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display that appears corresponding to the reception period. "Does not appear, and the mimic image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the mimic image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (a specific precursor effect display), even if the display is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player is not notified. It is possible to make it less likely that a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended before that time has elapsed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the “mode in which the mimic image display is made difficult to visually recognize” which can appear in response to the acceptance is changed to the “specific mode (the second disappearance) in which the mimic image display is hard to visually recognize” Related display SK2-2) ”. In this regard, in the modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), none of these aspects is displayed so that the mimic image display TMH displayed within the precursor period is not displayed as it is hidden. Has become. In the above modification, a mode (normal type indication effect display TZE) different from any of a plurality of modes prepared as “a mode in which the display of the mimic image is difficult to see” according to the reception is set in the mimic image display TMH within the aura period. Is made to function as a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” before the image is hidden. In other words, in this case, since it is recognized as a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” dedicated to the precursor period, even if a “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display” appears within the precursor period. Thus, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended without the knowledge of the player.

  In the above-described modification, the "normal type indication effect display TZE" is displayed as "a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize" before the mock image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. When the image is received within the reception period, the “second disappearance-related display SK2-2” is displayed as “a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display” until the image display IG is hidden. I decided that. In this regard, regarding the period from the display of the “normal type indication effect display TZE” to the non-display, the period from the display of the “second disappearance-related display SK2-2” to the non-display It is desirable to make the length longer than this in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  If the mock image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period, the reception period corresponding to the mock image display TMH is set to be hidden after the mock image display TMH is displayed. Acceptance (acceptance of post-reception effects corresponding to the reception period) is permitted for (operation means), and a reception target (operation means) different from the type of reception target (operation means) suggested by the mimic image display TMH It is desirable that no acceptance (acceptance of post-acquisition effects corresponding to the acceptance period) is permitted. That is, in the case of the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), the mimic image display TMH displayed during the precursor period indicates the operation button 410 as a reception target, and therefore corresponds to this. In the reception period, reception (reception relating to post-reception effects corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for a reception target (sword decoration 5001) different from the operation button 410.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the “operation button 410” and the “sword decoration 5001” as reception targets for effects after reception. In this regard, in the case where the effect is executed in such a manner that “the mock image display is hidden within the precursor period after the mock image display is displayed”, the “operation button 410” and the “sword decoration 5001” It is desirable that the side where the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol is high when it is set as the reception target is set as the reception target. That is, in this case, among the “operation buttons 410” and the “sword decorations 5001”, the reception target on the side where the rate of the big hit symbol appearing as a reception target is low has a corresponding reception period. Prior to this, the effect is prevented from being executed in such a manner that “the mimic image display is not displayed within the precursor period after the mimic image display is displayed”.

  Among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, the “production state related to the precursor effect” is a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods, or a different one of them. It is also applicable to the examples. In addition, the “production state related to the precursor effect” is not applied to any one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is applied to an eighth reception period (eighth reception period) different from any of the reception periods. (A variation pattern, an effect after the eighth reception).

  Further, among the modifications described above with reference to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272, such “the production mode related to the precursor effect” is a modification illustrated with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270 or another example thereof. It is also applicable to

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggestion display (display including the section image KG and the like) in which the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced as time elapses during the reception period. is there. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. In addition, since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced while the effect is in progress, it is recognized whether or not "acceptance has been made" after the acceptance. It is expected that it will be difficult to maintain the tension appropriately.

  In the modification described above with reference to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272, a specific area (section image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600) as the remaining time suggestion display, and the specific time is displayed. A description is given in which the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the section area (section image KG). Then, after the effect has been advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image GG) but also for the specific section area (section image KG). I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific sectioned area (section image KG) is displayed even after the effect has been advanced based on the operation received by the player, the specific image (gauge image GG) ) Can be easily determined whether or not the display area has decreased.

  In addition, "the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the effect is advanced based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted" means, for example, that the action by the player has been accepted. When the effect is advanced based on this, a meaning that includes a case where a predetermined display area is left as the gauge image GG at the time later than the gauge image GG is changed to a display area of 0 (non-display). (FIG. 272 (j)). However, in this case, it is required that the specific section area (section image KG) is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific section area (section image KG) , Is not displayed after the timing when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0.

  In the modification described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, when an operation by the player is received, a remaining time suggestion display (a gauge image GG, a section image KG, or the like) is displayed based on the reception. Prior to hiding the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much the display area of the gauge image GG has been left at the time of reception, a specific area (area image KG) is displayed. )), A specific image whose display area is a specific value (predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific division area (partition image) of a specific division area (division image KG) and the gauge image GG is displayed. KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship), Ignoring the law, suddenly greatly reducing the display area, which makes it seem that "although the remaining time was set to" 0 "unexpectedly, we were lucky enough to accept it." Will be able to be done, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the modification described above with reference to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272, when the operation by the player is received (at the time when the progress of the effect according to the reception is started), the execution is performed before the reception. The “depiction in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced” is continued without being ended. After that, when a predetermined timing comes, a specific image (gauge image GG) having a display area of a specific value is displayed in a specific partition area (section image KG), or a specific partition area (section). Only a specific section area (section image KG) of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

  That is, in this case, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the performance of the effect according to the reception is started, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, even after the reception is made, it is difficult to recognize "whether or not the reception has been made" and it is expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained. Further, at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing at which the performance of the effect according to the reception has started (for example, timing tG3a), the display area of the specific image (such as the gauge image GG) is significantly reduced. Is performed, it is possible to make it appear as if the reception was just in time within the validity period (reception period), and it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the mimic image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. . In this regard, when the timing tG3b, at which the predetermined time has elapsed since the reception, arrives, no matter which dynamic position the mimic image display is in at the time of the reception, after the reception, at the specific dynamic position, The mimic image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), when the timing tG3b arrives, the position where the button position is the highest, regardless of the button position up to that point). As depicted in). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), after the timing tG3b, the mimic image display is not dynamically displayed, but is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. As a result, the above-described effects can be more suitably obtained.

  Among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such as “description of the gauge image GG or the section image KG after the reception is performed (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” or “ "Dynamic display and still display related to the simulation image display" can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods or another example thereof. Further, “description of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after the reception is made (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” is applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. Instead, the information may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of the reception periods.

  In addition, the “reception of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after the reception is performed (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” and the “dynamic display and still display related to the simulation image display” are first received. When the application is applied to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any one of the reception periods may be applied), it is desirable not to apply the application to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the acceptance is made, there may be a case where a depiction in which the gauge image GG is greatly reduced appears (FIG. 272 (j)) and a case where the depiction does not appear. Improvement can be achieved.

  Even during the reception period during which the “description of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after the reception is made (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” and the “dynamic display and still display of the mimic image display” are not applied, After the acceptance, it is desirable to perform the depiction for reducing the display area of the gauge image GG and the dynamic display itself. In other words, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is largely reduced, ignoring the rules up to that point, and that the display is not performed, and the static display is not performed.

  In each of the above-described production examples and other examples, and their modifications, a plurality of reception periods (for example, a first reception period to a seventh reception period) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. I have. In this regard, in a predetermined reception period (for example, a first reception period, a third reception period, a fifth reception period, etc.) of the plurality of reception periods, the symbol change in which the predetermined reception period has occurred ends. Then, it is assumed that the symbol change can be continued even after the start of execution of the next symbol change (it can occur over a plurality of changes), and a specific reception period (for example, the second reception Period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) are not continued until after the symbol change in which the specific reception period has occurred is completed, and the symbol change is not terminated. You may make it complete | finished before. That is, in this case, the mimic image display related to the reception target is displayed during both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and when the action by the player is received within the predetermined reception period, In this case, the mimic image display is not hidden at the time of the acceptance, and the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (the disappearance-related display). Etc.) will appear. Thereby, it is possible to confirm that the form has appeared as a mimic image display even after the reception, and it is possible to indicate that the reception period has ended. It is possible to suitably obtain any of the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period.

  Further, the “predetermined reception period” is, for example, a first reception period, a third reception period, a fifth reception period, and the “specific reception period” is, for example, a second reception period, a fourth reception period. When the reception period and the seventh reception period are set, the mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (the disappearance-related display) includes a case where the reception is performed in a “predetermined reception period” that can be maintained over a plurality of fluctuations, This is executed as a different mode from the case where the reception is made in the “specific reception period” that does not straddle a plurality of fluctuations. That is, in this case, based on the type of “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (such as a disappearance-related display)”, it can be determined whether or not the reception period is ended within the symbol variation being executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Also, in both the “predetermined reception period” that can occur over a plurality of fluctuations and the “specific reception period” that does not cross over a plurality of fluctuations, a mimic image display imitating the reception target is displayed. The mimic image display may be displayed in a different manner (such as the size and position of the display) in the “predetermined reception period” and the “specific reception period”. For example, in a “specific reception period” that does not straddle a plurality of fluctuations, if the mimic image display is displayed in the above-described manner (displayed only at a predetermined position), it occurs in a manner that straddles a plurality of fluctuations. In a possible "predetermined reception period", it is desirable to display (move and display) the mimic image display itself so that the display position of the image display itself changes. According to such a configuration, even when a “predetermined reception period” occurs across a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to prompt the player to make an early reception.

  In the “reception period” that does not straddle a plurality of fluctuations, the operation button 410 may be used as a reception target and the sword decoration 5001 may be used as a reception target. In the possible “reception period”, the operation button 410 may be used as a reception target, but it is preferable that the sword decoration 5001 is not used as a reception target.

  Even in a “reception period” that may occur in a plurality of fluctuations, it is desirable that the indication effect display can be executed prior to the occurrence of the “reception period”. That is, in this case, the symbol change is ended while the "sign effect display" is being executed, and a reception period corresponding to the "sign effect display" may occur after the symbol change is ended. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment after the symbol change is completed.

  As described above, in the “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)” which may occur in a plurality of fluctuations, as described above, the “reception period” An aspect (such as disappearance-related display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display appears. This “mode in which the mimic image display is made difficult to visually recognize (such as disappearance-related display)” is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. However, it is desirable that the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (eg, disappearance-related display)” be continued without being interrupted.

  “A precursor effect display” executed in response to “acceptance periods (for example, a first acceptance period, a third acceptance period, a fifth acceptance period, and the like)” which can occur in a plurality of changes; As to the aspect in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize (such as the disappearance-related display), the time from the stop of the symbol change in the execution state to the start of the next symbol change (the symbol in the execution state) The execution period (the time from when the indication effect display is displayed to when it is hidden) is shorter than the time required for the suspension to be consumed after the fluctuation stops, making it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display. It is desirable that the time from the appearance of the mode to the end thereof be terminated.

  As described above, in the “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, and the like)” that can occur in a manner that covers a plurality of fluctuations, the “foreboding effect display” corresponding thereto And "extinction related display" can be displayed. In this regard, if the “extinction-related display” is displayed before the symbol change in which the “symptom effect display” is displayed, the same area (the overlapping area) as the area in which the “symptom effect display” is displayed ) Is used to display the “extinction-related display” in the form of using at least a part of it, and after the symbol change in which the “forewarning effect display” is displayed is completed (the hold is exhausted and the next symbol change is executed. If the "extinction-related display" is displayed in the display, the "extinction-related display" may be displayed by using only an area that is different from the area in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that this is executed over a plurality of fluctuations while watching the effect after reception.

  Also, as described above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the mock image display, and the “reception period (for example, the second reception period, In the fourth reception period and the seventh reception period), the mimic image display is displayed as one of these modes. However, in a “reception period (for example, a first reception period, a third reception period, a fifth reception period, and the like)” that can occur in a plurality of variations, a specific mode (for example, FIG. It is desirable to display only the model image display of (a)). However, a “reception period (for example, a second reception period, a fourth reception period, a seventh reception period)” that does not straddle a plurality of changes and a “reception period (for example, In any of the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.), it is desirable that the dynamic display of the mimic image display is continued after the reception.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of game states (the first game state and the second game state) having different game conditions (such as ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is launched into a game area) are provided. Game state) can be generated. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “acceptance period” in which the post-acceptance effect can be executed when an operation by the player is accepted is determined by the first game state and the second game state. It can occur in any of the game states. Further, when an operation by a player is received within such a “reception period”, it is determined that the “reception period” has occurred in any of the first game state and the second game state. Also, after the acceptance, the appearance of the mimic image display becomes difficult (such as disappearance-related display) while the mimic image display is displayed, and thereafter, the mimic image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. In this case, the display of the mimic image is hidden in the “mode (extinction-related display or the like)”.

  That is, in this case, there is an operation effect such as "It is possible to indicate that the reception period has ended while enabling confirmation of which mode has appeared as a mimic image display even after the reception is made." , Can be obtained even if the reception is made within the reception period generated in any of the first game state and the second game state.

  Note that the “first gaming state” corresponds to, for example, a normal gaming state (low probability / non-time saving), and the “second gaming state” is generated based on the result of the big hit determination ( This corresponds to a "game state different from the normal game state" that can be shifted to a state. Any game state may be used as long as it is a game state different from the normal game state.

  This point will be further described using a plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) illustrated in each of the above-described production examples and other examples, and modifications thereof. Reception periods of a predetermined type among the periods (for example, a first reception period, a fourth reception period, a sixth reception period, a seventh reception period, etc., but not necessarily all of them) May be set so that it can be generated only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third reception period of the plurality of reception periods is set to be generated only in the second game state of the first game state and the second game state. Even with such a configuration, the mimic image display related to the reception target is made up of a predetermined type of reception period (first game state) and a third reception period (second game state). It is displayed in each case. However, in the first gaming state (when accepted during the first reception period), the “simple image display becomes difficult to see”, and in the second gaming state (when accepted during the second reception period). Can appear in a specific mode that cannot appear (the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc., but not necessarily all of them).

  According to such a configuration, the first game state and the first game state can be checked only by checking which mode has appeared as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” without checking the type of the effect after reception. It is possible to know which of the two game states is being controlled, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize” in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270 also appears only in the first gaming state (when accepted during the first reception period). It may be set as an unobtainable “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. That is, in this case, it is expected that the gaming interest when the player is most disadvantageous (normal gaming state) is appropriately maintained.

  Further, according to the above configuration, in the second game state (when the game is accepted during the third reception period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as “a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”. However, the first disappearance-related display can appear also in the first game state (when received in the first reception period). That is, in this case, the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is only indicated, so that it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. Also, even when the game is controlled to the first game state, when the first disappearance-related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility of being controlled to the second game state. Since the game can be performed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in both the first game state and the second game state, and may be the first game state. It may be one that can occur only in the first gaming state of the state and the second gaming state.

  Further, as described above, in the reception period that occurs in the first gaming state, the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). In this regard, in the reception period that occurs in the second game state, only a specific image display of a specific mode (for example, FIG. 232 (a) having a low degree of expectation) among a plurality of modes may be displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, even when a mode of low expectation (FIG. 232 (a)) appears as the model image display, the possibility that the game is controlled to the second game state is determined. Since the player can be made to be conscious, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  In the first game state, when an operation by the player is not received within the reception period, a case where the same mode as the case where the mimic image display becomes difficult to appear appears as the “mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to see” (for example, The second reception period, the fourth reception period, the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, and the like) and the case in which a mode different from the case in which the reception is performed (for example, the first reception period) are performed. However, in the second gaming state (third reception period), the same mode as when the pattern is received is always displayed as the “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to see”, or It is desirable that a mode different from the case in which it is received is made to appear. According to such a configuration, when an operation is not received in the first gaming state, as a “mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize”, depending on whether the same mode as when the reception is performed appears. It is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the second game state has occurred.

  The reception period (third reception period) occurring in the second gaming state is the same as the case where it is received as "a mode in which the mimic image display is difficult to visually recognize" even if it is not received within the period. In the case where the mode is caused to appear as an aspect, the reception period (third reception period), which is generated in the first game state, becomes difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display even if it is not received. It is preferable that the valid period (set time) as the reception period is longer than any of the "reception period" in which the same mode as the case in which the data is received always appears.

  In any of the first game state and the second game state, a sign effect display corresponding to the reception period is executed before the reception period occurs. In this regard, in the first game state, a specific sign effect display (a second sign effect display, a fifth sign effect display, a seventh sign effect display, etc.) that cannot be generated in the second game state is executed. Is desirable.

[Special reception period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation as to which one of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (holding out). Pattern determination can be performed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., an advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (an advance notice effect, etc.) should be selectively caused to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such effect determination (fluctuation pattern determination, notice determination, and the like) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the content of the effect according to the result of the effect determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) relating to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect) and the like. And, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol. The transition to the probability gaming state is made executable.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background description and the movable body operation and the like are provided. Is provided as an effect having a "function indicating the degree of expectation that a jackpot is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the symbol production based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (regardless of the predetermined condition Is established), it is possible to generate a reception permitted state (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even in the case where a special result is obtained in the effect determination corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern (such as a preliminary judgment), the symbol effect based on the predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied). Then, it is possible to generate a reception allowable state (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the effect determination, the acceptable state (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception period in which the operation (operation) by the player is allowed can be generated, and the operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period. And a display change corresponding to the type of the reception period that has occurred. In the reception period, a mimic image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is represented as an image can be displayed.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that generates the acceptance allowable state (valid period) at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific variation pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect determination, a fluctuation pattern that generates an acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is desirable to avoid such a situation or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the acceptable reception state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like means that the reception of a change in display or the like on the effect display device 1600 as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Since only after-display (after-operation display) is performed, a change in the effect sound from the speaker, a change in the light emission by the lamp, or a directing operation by the movable decorative body, etc., the reception is allowed (in the valid period). The directability of the game itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest related to the reception period will decline.

  Note that, including the above-described examples and the examples described below, the “operation by the player” to be detected is directly operated by the player, such as the “operation button 410” or the “sword decoration 5001”. It is not limited to what is performed (pressing operation or sword-drawing operation), but "touch operation by a player to a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor or "player in a specific space to be detected by the non-contact sensor" Operation ". In short, what is necessary is just to provide one or a plurality of receiving means (operation means) for receiving an operation (a pressing operation, a sword-drawing operation, a touch operation, a non-contact operation, etc.) by the player.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with, for example, the following special effects. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below may not necessarily include all of the configurations. For example, even if only one of the effects (arbitrary configuration) is provided, the game Can be reduced, or some configuration may be selectively provided as necessary for obtaining further effects. In addition, each of the effects (configurations) described below is merely an example, and may have any configuration that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest related to the reception period.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, character information is displayed in association with the occurrence of the reception period. In the first reception period and the second reception period, the same operation as the operation performed by the player is displayed as different character information (for example, "press!" I am trying to. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 1-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, the player is required to perform the same operation (operation mode), but a display change (display after reception) occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. Are different from each other. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even when the same operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, the character information displayed in association with the occurrence of the reception period is changed to the character information of the reception period. Since it is made to differ from each other according to the type (the type of display after reception), the operation (operation by the player) in a state in which which type of display change is likely to occur as the display after reception is recognized. Can be performed, and it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  If a different operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, even if the reception period is of the same type (one that generates the same display after reception), it is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable to make the character information displayed different from each other in order to suppress an operation error by the player (for example, see FIG. 182 (c) and the like). In the same sense, when a different operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, and when the reception period is of a different type (generating a different display after reception), the reception period is It is desirable that the character information displayed in association with the occurrence be different from each other.

  Also, the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested, and the same character information and mimic image display as in the first reception period are displayed. For example, a reception period for generating a different post-reception display may be further prepared. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the display after reception simply by looking at the character information and the mimic image display. It is expected to be maintained.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 1-A” is adopted, in the first reception period, the character information is not displayed until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. On the other hand, in the second reception period, while the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) is continued, the character information may not be displayed during the second reception period. There may be. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively early after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). It becomes difficult to recognize whether there is any information, and it is also difficult to recognize the type as the reception period. It is expected that it is possible to preferably avoid a situation in which tension is completely eliminated.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 1-A” is employed, the second reception period includes a period in which character information is displayed and a period in which character information is not displayed. The same display change may be made as the display change regardless of the reception during any of these periods. In other words, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the user can perform the operation properly by confirming what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. It is possible, and it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

[Configuration 2-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the mimic image display, and in the second reception period, the mimic image display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 2-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, an effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, so that the operation (operation) by the player is detected. Of the game can be suitably improved.

  In addition, regarding the “multi-mode mimic image display” that can be displayed in the second reception period, the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears differs depending on which of the mimic image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve interest. In addition, any one of the “display of a plurality of models of images” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed in the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that “the mode with the lowest expectation” of the “simple image display in multiple modes” is the same as “one mode” that can be displayed in the first reception period.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 2-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided. In the first reception period and the third reception period, only one mode is displayed as the model image display. You may make it possible. Then, in the "second reception period" in which the mimic image display is displayed in one of the plural modes, the mimic image display is not hidden until the valid state is ended. On the other hand, of the “first reception period” and the “third reception period” in which the mimic image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is ended in the “first reception period”. The display of the mimic image is not hidden until the valid state is reached, but in the "third reception period", the valid state (the valid state is continued until the valid state (reception period) ends. In the meantime, the mimic image display that has been displayed may be hidden during the process. That is, in this case, even in the “first reception period” and the “third reception period” in which only one mode is displayed as the mock image display, it is determined whether or not the mock image display is hidden in the middle. Since the directing effect is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the entertainment of the game until the operation (operation) by the player is detected. Note that the mimic image display displayed in the first reception period and the mimic image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but not necessarily the same. It may be possible to indicate the possibility of being made.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 2-A” is adopted, in the third reception period, either the period during which the mimic image display is displayed or the period during which the mimic image display is not displayed is performed. , The same display change (display after reception) may be caused. In other words, in this case, the effective state (reception period) itself continues without any change even after the mock image display is hidden, so that the directivity using the “third reception period” ( In creating the non-display of the mimic image display), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that the “third reception period (display after the third reception)” of Configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or may be a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Configuration 3-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, after the mimic image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs, the mimic image display is not hidden until the first reception period ends. In the second reception period, it is possible to receive an operation by the player while the mimic image display is not displayed, and to receive an operation by the player while the mimic image display is displayed. The above-mentioned “acceptable sound” is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second reception period occurs. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 3-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, not only the “first reception period” in which the acceptable sound is audibly output and the mock image display is displayed, but also the acceptable sound is not audibly output and Since the "second reception period", in which the reception is made while the mimic image display is not displayed, is prepared, the player is aware of the possibility that the display after reception will occur at various timings not intended by the player It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 3-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided. In the second reception period, a simulation image is generated from the occurrence of the second reception period to the end thereof. While the display is not displayed and the mimic image display is not displayed, it is possible for the player to accept the operation, but in the third reception period, the mimic image display is performed only for a part of the third reception period. The operation may be accepted by the player during both the period in which the mimic image display is hidden and the period in which the mimic image display is hidden. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, the side (the reception while the mimic image display is displayed) as the first reception period and the side (the mimic image display is not displayed) as the second reception period ), It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, since the state where the operation (operation) by the player is accepted may continue even after the display of the mimic image is hidden, the operation (operation) by the player is accepted. It is expected to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when the mimic image display is hidden without being displayed.

  Note that the “third reception period (displayed after the third reception)” of the “configuration 3-A” is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or may be a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

  The acceptable sound is output audibly when the first reception period occurs, but may not be output audibly when the second reception period occurs and when the third reception period occurs. . That is, in the third reception period, there is a timing at which the mimic image display is displayed. In this regard, according to the above configuration relating to the third reception period, the acceptable sound is not output in synchronization with the timing (or before and after) when the mimic image display is displayed. . Thus, in the third reception period, even when the reception period occurs, the side (the imitation image display is displayed) as the first reception period and the side (the allowable reception sound is output) as the second reception period. Is not included), it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Also, as will be described later, when the “configuration 3-A” is adopted, in the third reception period, either the period during which the mimic image display is displayed or the period during which the mimic image display is not displayed is performed. , The same display change (display after reception) may be caused. In other words, in this case, the effective state (reception period) itself continues without any change even after the mock image display is hidden, so that the directivity using the “third reception period” ( In creating the non-display of the mimic image display), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

[Configuration 4-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, when an operation by the player is detected during the period, the display after the first reception is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but the operation by the player is not detected within the period. Sometimes, after the first reception, the display is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output. In the second reception period, when an action by the player is detected within the period, The display after the second reception is displayed and the second reception sound is output, and even when the operation by the player is not detected within the period, the same second operation as when the operation by the player is detected within the period is performed. The display is displayed after the reception, but the second reception sound is not output. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of Configuration 4-A are for describing the technical idea of Configuration 4-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation (operation) is not received by the player during the reception period, a demerit of directing can occur, so that a sense of tension when the reception period occurs is preferable. Can be maintained.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 4-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided. In the third reception period, when an operation (operation) by the player is detected during the period. The display after the third reception is displayed and the third reception sound is output, and even if the operation by the player is not detected within the period, the same third operation as when the operation by the player is detected within the period is performed. The display after the reception may be displayed and the third reception sound may be output. That is, in this case, when an operation (operation) is not received by the player during the reception period, the same display change (change after reception) as when the reception is performed is generated so as to produce a directing disadvantage. (2nd reception period), and there is a case where it is generated so as not to produce a directing disadvantage (third reception period), so that the operation (operation) by the player is received in time within the reception period. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when there is no game.

  Note that the “third reception period (displayed after the third reception)” of the “Configuration 4-A” is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the Configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or may be a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Configuration 5-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, the execution of the first variation pattern is started even if the number of pieces of determination information (the number of jackpot determinations in the hold state (the number of holds)) stored in the hold storage means is any numerical value. And when the first timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution of the first variation pattern has arrived, and the second reception period is determined by the number of pieces of determination information (holding When the execution of the second variation pattern is started when the number of the jackpot determinations in the state (the number of suspensions) is less than the predetermined number, the execution of the second variation pattern after the predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern was started. 2 can be generated when two timings have arrived. However, when the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage means is in a state of a predetermined number or more, when the execution of the second variation pattern is started, the second variation pattern is started. Over down said second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution are not to occur even arrived. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 5-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and the number of reservations is reduced, a reception period (a second reception period) of a type that has not been generated will occur. It is possible to expect that the game is not stopped, or to give an interesting impression on the game at the end even if the game is stopped.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 5-A” is adopted, when the “number of determination information stored by the hold storage unit (number of hold)” is less than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern is Even when the execution is started, at the stage where the second timing after the lapse of the predetermined time from the start of the execution of the second variation pattern has not arrived, the "number of determination information stored by the holding storage means (holding When the (number) increases (when the number exceeds a predetermined number), the second reception period may not be generated when the second timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern has arrived. That is, even when the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of holdings is decreasing, if the number of holdings is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation. , Which suggests that you are not trying to stop playing. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even when the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of holdings is decreasing, the symbol variation is not performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. If the number of suspensions is increased, the second reception period is not generated when the second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second fluctuation pattern is not generated. , As a “reception period of a type that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped”, it is possible to function more appropriately.

  In order to more suitably obtain such an operation and effect, even when the second reception period occurs, the determination information stored by the hold storage unit is kept during the second reception period. It is more desirable to end the second reception period at that point in time when the “number (number of reservations)” increases.

[Configuration 6-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, the first reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode regardless of the state of the production, and the second reception period occurs regardless of the state of the production. Is generated after being set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, it is possible to provide directivity related to the type of the reception period before the reception period occurs, using the specific BGM. Become like The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 6-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 6-A” is adopted, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period, a second reception period, and a third reception period are prepared as reception periods. The 3 reception period may occur depending on the state of the effect, while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is set to the suppressed mode or the non-audible state. You may do so. According to such a configuration, a case where the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppression mode, a case where the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, and In any case, the reception period may be the “third reception period”, so that the entertainment of the game until the operation (operation) by the player is received is appropriately maintained. To be expected.

  Note that the “third reception period (displayed after the third reception)” of “Configuration 6-A” is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of Configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or may be a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Configuration 7-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, if reception is performed within the period, display after the first reception according to the reception can be executed, and at least the effect design is displayed after the first reception. During this time, the display is given priority over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second reception period, if the reception is made within the period, the second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the effect design is displayed after the second reception display. During the second reception, the display after the second reception is made to be displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize it, or is made to be hidden. In addition, the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize” according to the configuration 7-A means “at least a part of the effect design is changed according to the transmittance through the second display after reception set to a predetermined transmittance. A mode where at least a part of the effect design can be visually recognized, or a mode where at least a part of the effect design is made invisible by the display after the second reception which overlaps with the effect, or a mode where at least a part of the effect design is hidden Means. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 7-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, the type as the reception period can be recognized by confirming whether or not the visibility of the effect symbol has been affected by the display after reception triggered by the operation by the player. Become like The “design for effect” is, for example, a symbol that forms a reach state as an effect on the effect display device 1600. In addition, an effect of whether or not to form a reach state, a pseudo continuous effect, It is a design that is also used for full rotation production.

  However, it has been confirmed that some of the players may feel disgust about the deterioration of the visibility of the effect symbols as the display after the second reception is displayed. I have. Therefore, as will be described later, when the “Configuration 7-A” is adopted, when the second post-acquisition display corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is displayed, a reception period different from the second reception period is displayed. (For example, according to the reception within the second reception period). Then, when an operation is received by the player during the different period, the reception may be used as a trigger to hide the display after the second reception, thereby making it easier to visually recognize the effect symbol.

  For example, if it is assumed that the display after the second reception according to the reception within the second reception period is to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, the display until the predetermined time elapses Then, the player can perform the predetermined operation only, so that the display after the second reception can be hidden at that time. Note that an operation required by the player to display the second post-acquisition display within the second reception period and a reception period different from the second reception period (a reception period generated according to the reception in the second reception period) In the parentheses, the operation required by the player to hide the display after the second reception may be the same operation or different operations. For example, in a reception period different from the second reception period (a reception period generated in response to the reception in the second reception period), the player may use a plurality of operating means to hide the display after the second reception. May be required to perform the respective operations.

  On the other hand, the display after the first reception is also a predetermined time from the start of the display (the same time as the predetermined time until the display after the second reception is hidden or may be a different time). Good) has been hidden. However, the display after the first reception which does not degrade the visibility of the effect symbol is not hidden by the player even if the player performs any operation until the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to do so in order to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an erroneous operation is performed against the intention of the player.

[Configuration 8-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppression mode. When the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppression mode, the first reception period is determined. As a trigger, the specific BGM is made inaudible, and during the second reception period, the specific BGM, which has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, is allowed to be audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output, and the reception is allowed. Even if the reception is performed, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode or the state in which the specific BGM is not audibly output is maintained. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 8-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, it is provided with an interest as to at what timing the specific BGM is set to the “audible output state or the audible output state in the suppressed mode”. Will be able to

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 8-A” is adopted, in the first reception period, when the reception is performed, all of the sounds that are audibly output at that time are inaudible (only the specific BGM outputs the audible output). In this case, only the specific BGM is made inaudible, and in the second reception period, when the reception is made, all of the sounds output at that time are made inaudible (only one sound is output audibly). At times, only the one sound may be made non-audible. That is, in this case, the specific BGM is set to the "audible output state or the audible non-output state in the suppressed mode" in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, or the audible output is performed at that time when the reception is performed. It is possible to provide a common performance between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making all of the sounds inaudible, thereby improving the entertainment interest of the game. become.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 8-A” is adopted, the specific BGM is made inaudible during the first reception period while the operation of the player is permitted (during the valid period). Although a situation may occur in which no sound is output, it is desirable that the reception period be continued even in such a situation. That is, in this case, in the first reception period, although the specific BGM is made inaudible upon receipt of the reception, the reception is not performed for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the first reception period. If not, the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been made, so that it is possible to make the player think that the first reception period has ended, and People's interests can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, when the reception is made, when the specific BGM is made inaudible as a trigger, a “display change according to the reception (display after the first reception)” is generated in accordance with this, but the reception is not yet made. When the specific BGM is made non-audible while it is not running, it is desirable not to generate “display change according to reception (display after first reception)” in accordance with this. That is, in this case, the first reception period is continued by confirming that the specific BGM is inaudible but “display change according to reception (display after first reception)” has not yet occurred. Be aware of the possibility of doing. Then, when an operation by the player is received before the first reception period ends after the specific BGM is made inaudible, the display change according to the reception (first display change (first reception) ), The anxiety (concerning that the validity period may have expired) when the specific BGM is made inaudible is eliminated, thereby improving the game entertainment. Will be able to

[Configuration 9-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a plurality of operation units including a first operation unit (first operation receiving unit) and a second operation unit (second operation receiving unit) as operation units. Means are prepared, and a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. In the specific reception period, both the reception of the operation on the first operation unit and the reception of the operation on the second operation unit are permitted as the reception for causing the display change corresponding to the specific reception period. A specific display change can be generated when an operation to the first operation means is received, and a specific display change is not generated when an operation to the second operation means is received. Since it is possible to generate a display change different from the above, it is possible to provide an interest in which operation means is operated. Note that the “specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change))”, the “first operation means”, and the “second operation means” related to the configuration 9-A are based on the technology of the configuration 9-A. It is just a name used to explain ideas. Therefore, it may mean the same as the “acceptance period” or “operating means” according to another configuration, or may mean a different accepting period or operating means from those accepting periods. .

  As will be described later, when the “configuration 9-A” is employed, the specific reception period is terminated when the first operation unit is operated in the specific reception period, but is terminated when the second operation unit is operated. The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific reception period. In other words, in this case, as a reception period using a plurality of operation means, it becomes possible to have a novel directing effect, so that various interesting reception periods based on such a directing effect are set. Can be provided.

[Configuration 10-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, a mimic image display imitating the operation receiving unit is displayed. In the second reception period, a plurality of mimic image displays imitating the operation receiving unit are displayed. Thus, the operation receiving section can be executed as a dynamic display that depicts a movement when the operation receiving section is made movable. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 10-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 10-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, for example, even when a plurality of operation receiving units having different required operations (for example, pressing and pulling) are prepared, the player may perform any operation. This makes it easy to recognize whether or not the operation cannot be performed in time for the effective period.

  As will be described later, when the “configuration 10-A” is adopted, the mimic image display is executed as “dynamic display depicting movement when the operation receiving unit is made movable by an operation by the player”. In some cases, it may not be executed as “dynamic display depicting movement when the operation receiving unit is made movable by an operation by the player”. In other words, in this case, not only when it is easy for the player to recognize what operation should be performed, but also what operation should be performed while the mimic image display is being displayed. Can be difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the player can appropriately maintain a sense of tension until the operation by the player is accepted.

[Configuration 11-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation units (a plurality of operation receiving units) including a specific operation unit (a specific operation receiving unit) are prepared as operation units. A plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, a mimic image display simulating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the mimic image display are displayed, and “the specific area is reduced by decreasing the display area of the specific image as time passes. In the second reception period, a mimic image of the specific operating means is displayed, but the mimic image is displayed. A specific image corresponding to the display is displayed, and “remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time in which the operation of the specific operating means is allowed to be accepted by reducing the display area of the specific image as time passes” is performed. I am trying not to be. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 11-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, even if a mimic image display imitating the specific operation unit is displayed, “acceptance of an operation to the specific operation unit is permitted by reducing the display area of the specific image as time passes. Since the "remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time" is not necessarily performed, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 11-A” is adopted, in the second reception period, a specific model image display that simulates a specific operation unit and a special model image display that simulates a special operation unit different from this are displayed. May be performed, the above-mentioned “remaining time specifying display” may not be performed.

  That is, in this case, in the second reception period, although both the reception of the operation on the specific operation unit and the reception of the operation on the different operation unit are permitted, the above-described “remaining time specification display” is performed. Will not be performed. As a result, the second reception period is generated without leaving the player floating that both the reception of the operation on the specific operation unit and the reception of the operation on the different operation unit are permitted. It is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the user is present.

[Configuration 12-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, a first operation receiving portion that is displaced by an operation by a player and a first peripheral decoration portion provided on the periphery thereof are provided. 1 operation means "and" a second operation means having a second operation receiving portion displaced by an operation by the player and a second peripheral decoration portion provided on the periphery thereof ". When displaying the first mimic image display imitating the first operation means, a first mimic image of the first mimic image imitating the first operation receiving portion and a first peripheral edge decorating the periphery of the first mimic image of the first mimic image are displayed. A decorative image can be displayed, and when a second mimic image display simulating the second operation means is displayed, a second mimic image of the second mimic image simulating the second operation receiving unit and a second mimic image of the second mimic image are displayed. A second peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery can be displayed, and the first peripheral decoration image and the second peripheral decoration image are displayed as images different from each other. Note that the “first operation means” and the “second operation means” of the configuration 12-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or "second operation means" according to another configuration, or may mean operation means opposite to each other. Alternatively, it may mean operation means different from those operation means.

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation means themselves are similar, the appearance of the first operation means and the appearance of the second operation means can be greatly different from each other. As a result, it is expected that it is easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 12-A” is adopted, the first peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image simulating the first peripheral decoration portion, but the second peripheral decoration image is displayed as the second peripheral decoration image. Alternatively, the image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion imitating a peripheral decoration portion different from the portion. That is, in this case, when the “first simulation image display” having the first peripheral decoration image, which is an image simulating the first peripheral decoration portion, is displayed, an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means. Can be suitably recognized. On the other hand, when the “second simulation image display” having the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image not mimicking the second peripheral decoration portion, is displayed, an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means. Can be provided as a more directing situation. In this case, the “second operation means corresponding to the second simulation image display” has an operation receiving unit (first operation reception unit) larger than the “first operation means corresponding to the first simulation image display”. Even when the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not simulate the second peripheral decoration portion, is displayed, such as being provided as a member, it is difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It is desirable not to do so.

  In order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operating means as a “scene with a higher level of directivity”, the second peripheral decoration image is an imaginary fiction that does not exist in the gaming machine. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image simulating the decorative part. However, in order to make it easy to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a part imitating the second peripheral decoration part. It may be made to be.

[Configuration 13-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receiving units including a first operation receiving unit, a second operation receiving unit, and a third operation receiving unit are prepared as operating means. As a reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared. In the specific reception period, the first mimic image display simulating the first operation receiving unit, the second mimic image display simulating the second operation receiving unit, and the third mimic image display simulating the third operation receiving unit are displayed. All of them are displayed, and when the operation of the first operation receiving unit among the plurality of operation receiving units is received, the receiving is performed among the first mimic image display, the second mimic image display, and the third mimic image display. At least the second and third simulation image displays that simulate the operation receiving portion that is not performed are hidden. The “first operation receiving unit”, “second operation receiving unit”, “third operation receiving unit”, and “specific reception period” according to the configuration 13-A denote the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. It is just a name used to describe it. Therefore, it may mean the same as the “operation receiving section” or “acceptance period” of another configuration, or may mean a different one.

  According to the above configuration, a mimic image display (the second operation receiving unit and the third operation receiving unit) different from the operation receiving unit (the first operation receiving unit) to which the operation is received (second operation receiving unit). Since the mimic image display and the third mimic image display are hidden, the operation receiving units (the second operation receiving unit, the third mimic image receiving unit, the third mimic image displaying unit, and the third migrating image displaying unit) are not receiving the operation although the mimic image display is displayed. This makes it possible to easily recognize whether or not further operation is necessary for the operation receiving portion.

  Also, as will be described later, when the “Configuration 13-A” is adopted, the first simulation image display, the second simulation image display, and the third simulation image display are displayed during the specific reception period. Of the one operation receiving unit, the second operation receiving unit, and the third operation receiving unit, the third operation receiving unit may be configured such that the operation reception is not validated (not permitted). That is, in this case, in the specific reception period, the first display change is generated when an operation is received on the first operation receiving unit, and the second display change is generated when an operation is received on the second operation receiving unit. However, since the operation to the third operation receiving unit is not received and the display change caused by the operation does not occur, until the operation by the player is received in the specific reception period. And the tension can be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 14-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases where the first reception period occurs and the case where the second reception period occurs, character information is displayed in association with the occurrence of the reception period. In the first reception period and the second reception period, the same operation as the operation performed by the player is displayed as different character information (for example, "press!" I am trying to. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 14-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, the player is required to perform the same operation (operation mode), but a display change (display after reception) occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. Are different from each other. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even when the same operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, the character information displayed in association with the occurrence of the reception period is changed to the character information of the reception period. Since it is made to differ from each other according to the type (the type of display after reception), the operation (operation by the player) in a state in which which type of display change is likely to occur as the display after reception is recognized. Can be performed, and it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  If a different operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, even if the reception period is of the same type (one that generates the same display after reception), it is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable to make the character information displayed different from each other in order to suppress an operation error by the player (for example, see FIG. 182 (c) and the like). In the same sense, when a different operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, and when the reception period is of a different type (generating a different display after reception), the reception period is It is desirable that the character information displayed in association with the occurrence be different from each other.

  Also, the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested, and the same character information and mimic image display as in the first reception period are displayed. For example, a reception period for generating a different post-reception display may be further prepared. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the display after reception simply by looking at the character information and the mimic image display. It is expected to be maintained.

  As will be described later, when the “configuration 14-A” is employed, in the first reception period, the character information is not displayed until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. On the other hand, in the second reception period, while the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) is continued, the character information may not be displayed during the second reception period. It is more desirable to do so. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively early after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). It becomes difficult to recognize whether there is any information, and it is also difficult to recognize the type as the reception period. It is expected that it is possible to preferably avoid a situation in which tension is completely eliminated.

  As will be described later, when the “configuration 14-A” is employed, the second reception period includes a period in which character information is displayed and a period in which character information is not displayed. Different display changes may be made depending on which of these periods the reception is made. That is, in this case, a display change is prepared that cannot be confirmed unless it is difficult to recognize what kind of operation mode is requested (a state in which character information is hidden). Tension can be suitably maintained through such rendition.

  In addition, when the first reception period occurs, the time from when the character information corresponding to the first reception period is displayed to when the character information is not displayed when no operation is performed by the player, and the second reception period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed to when the character information is not displayed when no operation is performed by the player be different from each other.

[Configuration 15-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the mimic image display, and in the second reception period, the mimic image display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. The “first reception period (display after the first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after the second reception)” of the configuration 2-A are for describing the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. This is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “first reception period” or “second reception period” according to another configuration, or may mean the reception periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, an effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, so that the operation (operation) by the player is detected. Of the game can be suitably improved.

  In addition, regarding the “multi-mode mimic image display” that can be displayed in the second reception period, the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears differs depending on which of the mimic image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve interest. In addition, any one of the “display of a plurality of models of images” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed in the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that “the mode with the lowest expectation” of the “simple image display in multiple modes” is the same as “one mode” that can be displayed in the first reception period.

  As will be described later, when the “Configuration 15-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided. In the first reception period and the third reception period, only one mode is displayed as the model image display. You may make it possible. Then, in the "second reception period" in which the mimic image display is displayed in one of the plural modes, the mimic image display is not hidden until the valid state is ended. On the other hand, of the “first reception period” and the “third reception period” in which the mimic image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is ended in the “first reception period”. The display of the mimic image is not hidden until the valid state is reached, but in the "third reception period", the valid state (the valid state is continued until the valid state (reception period) ends. In the meantime, the mimic image display that has been displayed may be hidden during the process. That is, in this case, even in the “first reception period” and the “third reception period” in which only one mode is displayed as the mock image display, it is determined whether or not the mock image display is hidden in the middle. Since the directing effect is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the entertainment of the game until the operation (operation) by the player is detected. Note that the mimic image display displayed in the first reception period and the mimic image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but not necessarily the same. It may be possible to indicate the possibility of being made.

  Also, as will be described later, when the “Configuration 15-A” is adopted, the third reception period includes a period in which the mimic image display is displayed and a period in which the mimic image display is not displayed. However, different display changes may be made depending on which of these periods the reception is made. In other words, in this case, a display change that cannot be confirmed unless the user is made aware of the possibility that the reception period has ended (a state in which the mimic image display is not displayed) is prepared. Tension can be suitably maintained through such rendition.

  The “third reception period (display after the third reception)” of the configuration 15-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or may be a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a simulation image related to the reception target (such as a simulation image of the operation receiving unit) is generated. By displaying the image as an integrated mimic image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the peripheral edge of the image, a decrease in the entertainment interest until the display (change of display) is performed after reception is suppressed. I am trying to do it. For such an integrated mimic image display, an operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and a fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach occur as a result of the advance judgment. It is desirable to be displayed in both the operation reception effect (reception period) to be performed, and to be displayed in both the low expected non-suppression reception effect and the high expected suppression reception effect. .

  Note that the “integrated model image display” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof, and thus details are omitted. For example, a display area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as “integrated model image display”, and the same is true in that the mode is displayed in any one of these modes.

  Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the reception permission state (reception period) occurs, it indicates that the operation reception is permitted or the operation reception is permitted. An acceptable sound is output, so that forgetting to operate is less likely to occur. Here, the “acceptable sound” means that, when the sound is started to be output, an acceptable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is allocated). , A sound in a state in which the acceptable reception state (reception period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the “acceptable sound” is a sound that is not output in a situation where an effect that has no relation to the acceptable state (acceptance period) is being performed.

  Further, each acceptable state (each acceptable period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptable state classified into the first type can be generated when the high expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) is selected, but the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) Is an effective period that cannot be generated (an effective period that is generated based on a specific condition (specific high expected variation pattern selection) being established in the effect determination based on the result of the jackpot determination). In addition, the second type of acceptable state refers to a valid period that can be generated regardless of either a high expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) or a low expected variation pattern (occurs as a result of a preliminary determination. Validity period).

  The “integrated model image display” according to the present embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and the second type of acceptable state (acceptance period). Here, both the first type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period) are receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that the event occurs as an allowable state (reception period), the “integrated mimic image display” displayed in those reception periods is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

  However, a special mode having a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among a plurality of modes prepared as “integrated model image display” is a first type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period). , And in the second type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). ing. In the first type of acceptable reception state (acceptance period), “integrated mimic image display” is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) including a special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to be displayed, and "integrated mimic image display" is displayed in a form according to the result of this determination. In the second type of acceptable state (acceptance period), any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) that do not include the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination, “integrated mimic image” May be determined, and the “integrated mimic image display” may be displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described configurations 1 to 15 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is only described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, with respect to each configuration described in the specification described below, it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration corresponding to it when it is desired to obtain a further effect.

  First, an example in which the configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 are embodied will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the contents of the effect that is advanced when the pachinko machine is received (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, and the like as an effect after the reception), and a notice effect (expected expectation effect). Are prepared, and a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, effect determination, etc.) can be generated. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a reception period A (reception effect A) to a reception period D (reception effect D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

  Each feature will be described for each reception period (reception effect) with reference to FIGS. 273 to 282. It should be noted that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 272 may be prepared as a reception period different from the reception period A (reception effect A) to the reception period D (reception effect D). Alternatively, it may be realized as any one of the reception period A (reception effect A) to the reception period D (reception effect D).

  FIG. 273 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the condition A is satisfied and the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs as a result of the determination. FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs.

  Now, suppose that in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and the “variation pattern A” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an effect determination (such as an advance determination) corresponding to the variation pattern A. Then, after that, the fluctuating production (decoration rendering according to the fluctuating pattern A, sound output of specific BGM reproduction, etc.) of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol) SZ is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 279 (a))”. Within the execution period of the fluctuation effect, an effect (advance effect) according to the result of the notice effect judgment is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “variation pattern A” itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 279 (a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

  In other words, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ as shown in FIG. 273 (a). When the timing tM2 at which the predetermined time A has elapsed from the time has come (when the condition A is satisfied), the above-described reception period A (valid period) in which “acceptance of the display A after reception” is permitted is generated (see FIG. 279 (b) "). The reception period A occurs in a state where the specific BGM is output without suppression. As a result, when an operation (operation) by the player is received during the reception period A, the display A after reception is performed based on the reception (the situation shown in FIG. 279 (c)).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is related to the occurrence of the reception period A. ), A gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes the mimic image display difficult to see (a mode that makes the mimic image display hard to see), depending on the acceptance. The display after reception indicating the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) is respectively performed. As described above, the mimic image display according to the present embodiment is displayed as an “integrated mimic image display” integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. Also, when displaying a mimic image display instead of the "integrated mimic image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), when the timing tM1 arrives before the reception period A occurs, “ Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) "is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tM2 when the reception period A occurs. The “integrated model image display IG” is hidden when the reception is made within the reception period A, or when the reception period A ends without the reception being made. In addition, the reception period A according to this example is configured to end when the timing tM3 arrives when the operation (operation) is not received by the player (see FIG. 273 (h)). .

  In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 273 (a) to (g) and the examples shown in FIGS. 279 (b) and (c), the operation (operation) by the player is received at the timing tM2a within the reception period A. It is assumed that it has been done. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 273 (a) to (g) and FIGS. 279 (b) and (c), the reception period is determined based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received at the timing tM2a. At the end of A, execution of the after-reception display A (after-reception effect A) corresponding to the reception period A is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 279, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period A, a first mode (for example, a display having a relatively low expectation as the post-reception display A) based on the reception is performed (for example, "Chance" is executed, or the second mode (for example, "Heavy heat") having a relatively high degree of expectation as the display A after reception is executed.

  However, although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 273 performs in the same manner as the “first reception period” shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), when an operation (operation) by the player is received (when an audible output of the reception sound A according to the reception is started) At the timing tM2a, not only the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, but also the visibility of the integrated model image display IG is prevented.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time during which the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in an easily recognizable manner" after the acceptance. However, although the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound A has already been started, the same mode as when the integrated mimic image display IG was in the reception period (see FIG. 255). In the example, if the display is continued as it is in the state shown in FIGS. 263 (e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and that As a result, there is a concern that "notice of the post-reception effect (in this case, reception sound A) in the execution state is delayed".

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tM2a at which the reception period A ends due to the operation (operation) received by the player. When (timing tM2b arrives), the display relating to the disappearance-related effect (the disappearance-related display A corresponding to the reception period A) is started as “an aspect in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. The “disappearance-related effect” here is an image (an image different from the integrated mimic image display IG) displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated mimic image display IG is not displayed. When the display of the “disappearance-related effect” is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden and can be visually recognized. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, while the “integrated mimic image display IG (mimic image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, “extinction related display A (extinction EF in the figure)” is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “extinction related display A” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. It is supposed to.

  According to such a configuration, even when the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is made, the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, so that the reception sound is reduced. A will be able to indicate that A is already in a running situation. As a result, even when the reception sound A has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated mimic image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize the reception sound A. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed in A. Further, even after the processing for audibly outputting the reception sound A is started, until the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (timing tM2a to tM2b), the integrated simulated image display is performed. Since the mode of the IG can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In addition, in the reception period A, the same mode appears as the disappearance-related display A regardless of whether the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A is performed in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode. Like that. Thus, even under the situation where the reception sound A is being executed, the effect display device 1600 can maintain the degree of expectation as confidential.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 273 (b) to 273 (d), a display relating to the disappearance-related display A (a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) appears. When the timing tM2c within the present period arrives, the “display after reception A” according to the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received within the reception period A is started. As the post-acceptance display A, a first mode (for example, "chance") having a relatively low expectation is executed, or a second mode (for example, "hot heat") having a relatively high expectation is executed. Is performed as described above.

  That is, in this case, the execution of the “display A after reception” is started while the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display A” are displayed. In addition, since the “display A after reception” is started while the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, it indicates that the reception period A has already ended, Is expected to be automatically shifted from “Integrated model image display IG” to “Display after reception A” (at and after timing tM2c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the “display A after reception” is started, the “display A after reception” is displayed as shown in FIGS. 273 (b) to 273 (d). Among the displayed images, first, of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance related display A”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the “integrated mimic image display IG” is hidden, the “disappearance related display A” is hidden, whereby the “display after reception A” (In FIG. 279, these effects are not shown).

  In this regard, the “display A after reception” is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 273 (d), the “display A after reception” remains for a relatively long time even after the “integrated model image display IG” and the “extinction related display A” are hidden. Will be executed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the output of the reception allowable sound is started at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 273 (f). That is, the permissible reception sound corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output while straddling the timing tM2 at which the reception period A occurs, and the player accepts the audible output while the permissible reception sound is audibly output. Operation (operation) can be accepted.

  Here, in the reception period A, as shown in FIG. 273 (f), even if an operation (operation) is received by the player while the allowable reception sound is audibly output, the reception is not performed. The permissible sound is not terminated halfway, but is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the plurality of reception periods, when an operation (operation) is received by the player while the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the reception allowable sound is generated based on the reception. A reception period in which the audible output state is terminated halfway is included. Therefore, when the mode in which the audible output of the acceptable sound is continued as a result of the reception while the acceptable sound is audibly output during the reception period A appears, it is determined whether or not the received sound is in the accepted state. Recognition can be made difficult, and it can be expected that tension is appropriately maintained.

  As shown in FIGS. 273 (d) and 279 (c), the post-reception display A according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the decorative symbol SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated mimic image display IG is displayed preferentially with respect to the decorative symbol SZ, but the display A after reception is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ. Instead, the decorative symbol SZ is preferentially displayed with respect to the display A after the reception. Then, as shown in FIG. 273 (d) and FIG. 279 (d), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display. .

  On the other hand, FIGS. 273 (h) to (n) and “Examples in which the effect progresses from FIG. 279 (b) to FIG. 279 (d) without going through FIG. 279 (c)” are within the reception period A. In the case where the action by the player is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period A occurs, the timing tM3 comes without any operation (operation) by the player being received (and the automatic button function is not enabled). In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (when the reception period A has ended and the acceptance of the operation by the player is no longer permitted), at the timing tM2a (the operation performed by the player during the reception period A). (At the time of reception), as well as the effect display device 1600, the integrated mimic image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated mimic image display IG is not made difficult to see. (In the example of FIG. 255, the mode shown in FIG. 263 (e3)).

  According to such a configuration, even when the reception period A ends in time for the player to receive the operation, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed within the reception period A after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in the reception period A, when the operation by the player is not received, as shown in FIG. 273 (j), the “deletion-related effects (reception) The display related to the disappearance-related display A) corresponding to the period A is not started. At this time, this may be performed as long as the integrated mimic image display IG itself is faded out. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is not displayed.

  FIG. 274 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the condition B is satisfied as a result of the determination and the reception period B (second reception effect B) occurs. FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a reception period B (reception effect B) occurs.

  Now, suppose that in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and the “variation pattern B” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination corresponding to the variation pattern B (e.g., an advance notification determination) is performed. Then, thereafter, the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol SZ (rendering description according to the fluctuating pattern B, sound output of specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 280 (a)”), and Within the execution period, an effect (advance effect) based on the result of the advance effect determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “variation pattern B” itself. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 280 (a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

  However, in the effect relating to the “fluctuation pattern B”, regardless of which result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination), as shown in FIG. 274 (a), the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is obtained. When the time tN2 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) at which the predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the operation, the above-mentioned reception period B (valid period) in which “acceptance of the display B after reception” is permitted is set. (FIG. 280 (b)). The reception period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is set to an inaudible state. Thus, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period B, the post-reception display is performed based on the reception. In the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), the reception period B is generated when the decorative symbol SZ is in the reach state.

  In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, similarly to the case where the reception period A described above occurs (FIG. 273), In connection with, a mimic image display indicating the reception target (operation receiving section, etc.), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes the mimic image display difficult to see (the mimic image display In such a case, the display after the reception indicating the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) is performed according to the reception. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”. As described above, the mimic image display is displayed as an “integrated mimic image display IG” that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be separately displayed. It may be displayed. Also, when displaying a mimic image display instead of the "integrated mimic image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), when the timing tN1 comes before the reception period B occurs, the “integrated model image display” is displayed. IG (simulated image display, gauge image display) "is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs. The “integrated mimic image display IG” is received when a reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the reception period B) or when the reception period B is ended without the reception being made. The fact that it is hidden is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 273 (reception period A). In addition, the reception period B according to this example is set to end when the timing tN3 arrives when no operation (operation) is received by the player (see FIG. 274 (h)).

  Here, in the above-mentioned “acceptance period A (see FIG. 279 (b))”, when the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed, no character information corresponding to this is displayed. In the "acceptance period B (see FIG. 280 (b))", when the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed, character information (here, "acceptance") indicating that acceptance is permitted. , "Press") are displayed. That is, in the “acceptance period A” and the “acceptance period B”, both are the same as the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) (FIG. 232 (a) to FIG. When the “acceptance period B” occurs, the character information that does not appear when the “acceptance period A” occurs (here, “press” in this case) despite the use of the mode shown in FIG. ) Is displayed to indicate that the degree of expectation that can be indicated as the display after reception is different. In this example, when the reception period B occurs, the expectation degree (ratio) in which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol stops is higher than when the reception period A occurs. Alternatively, in the display B after reception according to the reception period B, a mode suggesting that the expectation degree of the big hit symbol appearing is 100% may appear, whereas the reception B according to the reception period A may appear. In the rear display A, a mode indicating that the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears is 100% may not appear.

  In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 274 (a) to (g), it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is received at the timing tN2a within the reception period B. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 274 (a), the reception period B is terminated based on the operation (operation) by the player at the timing tN2a, and the reception period B corresponds to the reception period B. The display B after reception (the effect B after reception) starts to be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 280, only one mode is displayed as display B after reception corresponding to reception period B. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period B, a first mode (for example, a low expectation as the post-reception display B) based on the reception (for example, "10 destroyed!") Or the second mode (for example, "100 destroyed!") Having a relatively high expectation as the post-acceptance display B may be executed. I have.

  Although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 274 has an effect in the same manner as the “second reception period” shown in FIG. 256 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), a point in time when an operation (operation) by the player is received (a point in time when audible output of the reception sound B according to the reception is started) At the timing tN2a, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time during which the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in an easily recognizable manner" after the acceptance. However, although the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound B has already been started, the same mode as when the integrated mimic image display IG was in the reception period (see FIG. 256). In the example, if the display is continued as it is in the state shown in FIGS. 265 (e1) and (e2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted. As a result, there is a concern that "notice of the after-reception effect (reception sound B in this case) in the execution state is delayed".

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tN2a at which the reception period B ends due to the operation (operation) by the player being received. When (timing tN2b arrives), the display related to “disappearance related display B” different from the disappearance related display A is started as “a mode in which the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. Here, the “disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)” refers to an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated mimic image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated mimic image display IG). That is. When the display of the “disappearance-related effect” is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden and can be visually recognized. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the “disappearance-related display B” is displayed while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the “destruction related display B” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “integrated mimic image display IG (mimic image display, gauge image display)” is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when the integrated mimic image display IG is continuously displayed after the reception is made, the integrated mimic image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, so that the reception sound is reduced. B can now indicate that it is in a running situation. As a result, even in the situation where the reception sound B has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated mimic image display IG for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize the reception sound B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed in B. Further, even after the processing for outputting the reception sound B audibly is started, until the integrated mimic image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (timing tN2a to tN2b), the integrated mimic image display is performed. Since the mode of the IG can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the reception period B, the post-reception effect B corresponding to the appearance B has a low expectation and a high expectation appears as the disappearance-related display B. (Extinction related indications B1, B2) appear. That is, in this case, even if the “display B after reception” using the effect display device 1600 has not been started yet, the disappearance-related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is the first mode and the second mode. By confirming which of the modes is displayed, it becomes possible to infer whether or not “display after reception B” is executed in a mode of high expectation.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 274 (b) to (d), a display relating to the disappearance-related display B (an aspect in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) appears. When the timing tN2c within the existing period arrives, the “display B after reception” corresponding to the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received within the reception period B is started. As the post-acceptance display B, a first mode (for example, “10 defeats!”) With a relatively low expectation is executed, or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (for example, “100 It is as described above that the body destruction may be executed.

  That is, in this case, while the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B (disappearance related display B1 or disappearance related display B2)” are displayed, respectively, “display after reception B (first mode or first display) 2)) is started. In addition, since the display B is started after the reception while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize, the gaze destination by the player is " It is expected that the display will be automatically shifted from the “integrated model image display IG” to the “display B after reception” (after timing tN2c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the “display B after reception” is started, the “display B after reception” is displayed as shown in FIGS. 274 (b) to (d). Among the displayed images, first, of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B”, the “integrated model image display IG” is not displayed. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden, the “disappearance-related display B” is hidden, whereby the “display after reception B” (In FIG. 280, illustration of the progress of these effects is omitted). .

  In this regard, the “display B after reception” is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (d), “display B after reception” is a relatively long time after “integrated model image display IG” and “disappearance-related display B” are hidden. Will be executed.

  Incidentally, in the effect example corresponding to the reception period A described above (FIG. 279), even if the reception is made during the reception period A and the “display after reception A” is executed, the “display after reception A” is started. The background image is maintained without switching before and after. In this regard, in the effect example (FIG. 280) corresponding to the reception period B, when the reception is performed during the reception period B and the “display B after reception” is executed, the “display B after reception” is started. The background image may be switched before and after.

  According to such a configuration, during the period in which the background image is not switched (timing tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 274), even if there is any display change in effect display device 1600, “display after reception B” Can indicate that the situation has not yet begun.

  Further, at this time, as the post-acceptance display B, the same background image may be switched between a case where a mode with a low expectation appears and a case where a mode with a high expectation appears, or a mode with a low expectation appears The background image may be switched to a different background image depending on the case and the case where a high expectation mode appears. Further, the background image may be switched when an aspect having a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when an aspect having a low degree of expectation appears.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the output of the allowable reception sound is started at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 274 (f). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the reception period B is audibly output so as to straddle the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs, and the player accepts the audible output while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output. Operation (operation) can be accepted.

  Here, in the reception period B, as the reception allowable sound, a long-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, respectively. It is output. In the example shown in FIG. 274 (f), the output of the long-permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound is started at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, output of one of the long-permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound may be started at the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs or after that.

  In the reception period B, when an operation is received by the player while the long-permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are audibly output, based on the fact that the operation has been received, the long period is determined. The time-permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are terminated on the way (end of the audible output state).

  In the reception period B, as shown in FIG. 274 (f), when an operation is received by a player while reception permitted sounds (long-time permitted sound, short-time permitted sound) are audibly output. In addition to terminating the acceptable sound in the middle, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the acceptable sound B is started based on this. That is, in this case, in the reception period B, unlike the case of the display change, the effect performed in the reception period (acceptable sound) and the effect performed in response to the reception (second reception sound) are different. A conflicting (overlapping) period will not occur.

  As shown in FIG. 274 (g), the “second integrated sound” and “disappearance-related display B” are not displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, it is executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the second reception sound, different output sounds (forms) may be output depending on whether a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode appear as the display B after reception. desirable. On the other hand, for the first received sound, the same output sound (aspect) is output when a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode appear as the display A after reception. It is desirable.

  In the reception period B, the long-permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are output as the permissible sounds. However, these two permissible sounds do not necessarily have to be output. Thus, only one acceptable sound may be output.

  As shown in FIGS. 274 (d) and 280 (d), the after-reception display B according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the decorative symbol SZ. In this example, the integrated mimic image display IG is displayed preferentially with respect to the decorative symbol SZ, and the post-acceptance display B is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ. As shown in FIG. 274 (d) and FIG. 280 (d), the post-acceptance display B according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 274 (h) to 274 (n) assume a case where an operation by the player is not received within the reception period B.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period B occurs, the timing tN3 comes without an operation (operation) by the player being received. In this regard, the reception period B is different from the reception period A, and is set as “a reception period for which the above-described automatic button function is activated”. Therefore, in the reception period B, even if the timing tN3 arrives without the operation (operation) by the player being received, the operation (operation) by the player within the reception period B is thereafter performed. Then, the same post-acceptance display B is generated.

  However, in the reception period B according to the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tN3, at the timing tN2a (the player within the reception period B), despite the above-described automatic button function being enabled. 274 (i), the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden as well as the integrated simulated image display IG as shown in FIG. 274 (i). The display IG is not made difficult to see.

  According to such a configuration, even when the reception period B ends in time for the reception of the operation (operation) by the player, the integrated model image is received within the reception period B after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  After that, even when the operation by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 274 (i), when the timing tN3a at which a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tN3 at which the reception period B ends, As “an aspect in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”, the display related to the disappearance-related display B is started.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the “disappearance-related display B” is displayed while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. In addition, at least a part of the area where the “death related display B” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the reception period B ends without reception, even if the integrated model image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated model image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult, it is possible to indicate that the reception period B has ended. In addition, even in the situation where the reception period B has already ended, since it becomes possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it, It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated mimic image display IG was displayed during the reception period B.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of the disappearance-related display B that appears when the operation (operation) by the player is not received within the reception period B is the operation (operation) performed by the player within the reception period B. ) Appear if they were accepted.

  That is, in this case, even if an operation (operation) by the player is not received in the reception period B, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed after the reception period B ends. By simply confirming the appearance of the “extinction-related display B”, it becomes possible to recognize whether the post-acceptance display B has been executed in the mode of low expectation or in the mode of high expectation. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  After that, when the timing tN3b comes, the “display after reception B” is started to be executed in a mode in which the operation (operation) by the player has been received if the operation (operation) has been received within the reception period B (FIG. 280 (b)). After the situation shown in ()) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 280 (c) appears regardless of the presence or absence of an operation.)

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (k), among the “integrated mimic image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B”, first, “integrated mimic image display IG” is set to non- Display. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden, the “disappearance-related display B” is hidden.

  Note that the timing at which the “extinction-related display B” appears and the timing at which the “post-reception display B” starts to execute need not be later than the timing tN3 at which the reception period B ends, and the reception period B ends. May be the timing tN3, or may be earlier.

  FIG. 275 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the condition C is satisfied as a result of the determination and the reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a reception period C (reception effect C) occurs.

  Now, suppose that in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and the “variation pattern C” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (such as an advance determination) corresponding to the variation pattern C is performed. After this, the fluctuating production of the decorative symbol SZ (rendering rendering according to the fluctuating pattern C, sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the fluctuating production, according to the result of the notice production decision. The effect (notification effect) is additionally executed with respect to the effect of the selected “third variation pattern” itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 281 (a), a landscape depicting a desert is displayed as the background image HG3.

  However, in the effect relating to the “variation pattern C”, the predetermined time C has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started, regardless of which result was obtained as the effect determination (preliminary determination). When the timing tO2 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the “acceptance of the display C after acceptance” is permitted. A reception period C (valid period) is generated. The reception period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in the suppressed mode or is set to the non-audible state. Accordingly, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period C, the post-reception display C is performed based on the reception. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the reception period C (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a reception period C occurs, the degree of expectation (the rate at which a big hit symbol appears) is suggested according to the reception period C being received. Although the display C after the reception is performed, unlike the case where the reception periods A and B described above occur (FIGS. 273 and 274), in connection with this, a simulation indicating the reception target (such as an operation receiving unit) is performed. An image display, a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mimic image display (a mode in which the mimic image display becomes difficult to recognize), and the like are not performed. . The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include “0%” or “100%”.

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), when the reception period C occurs, a mimic image display, a gauge image display, and character information prompting an operation are displayed. Nothing is done. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize at which timing the reception period C occurs and at which timing the reception period C ends, and it is also difficult to recognize the existence of the reception period C itself. Will be done. Note that the reception period C according to this example is terminated when the timing tO3 has arrived when no operation (operation) is received by the player (see FIG. 275 (h)).

  In this regard, in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 275 (a) to (g), it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is received at the timing tO2a within the reception period C. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the reception period C ends based on the operation (operation) received by the player at the timing tO2a, and the reception period C corresponds to the reception period C. The display C after reception (the effect C after reception) is started to be executed.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 281, only one mode is displayed as the after-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period C, a first mode (for example, a low expectation as the post-reception display C) based on the reception (for example, A case where the number of ghosts appearing as a haunted group) is executed, or a second mode having a relatively high expectation as the display C after reception (for example, a mode where the number of ghosts appearing as a haunted group is large) is included. It may be executed.

  Then, as described above, in the reception period C, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), when an operation (operation) by the player is received, the disappearance-related display is not performed. In addition, when the reception period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 275 (f), the reception allowable sound is not output.

  As shown in FIG. 275 (d) and FIG. 281 (c), the display C after reception according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the decorative symbol SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display C after reception is not displayed preferentially with respect to the decorative design SZ, but the decorative design SZ is displayed preferentially with respect to the display C after reception. . Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (d) and FIG. 281 (d), the after-acceptance display C according to this example is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display. .

  On the other hand, FIGS. 275 (h) to (n) and “an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 281 (b) to FIG. 281 (d) without going through FIG. 281 (c)” are within the reception period C. In the case where the action by the player is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period C occurs, the timing tO3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being received (and the automatic button function is not enabled). However, in the reception period C, since no display change is caused by the end of the period C, the timing tO3 (the reception period C ends and the operation of the player Even when the time when acceptance is no longer allowed), only the background image HG3 flows on the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

  FIGS. 276 and 277 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition D is satisfied and the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs as a result of the determination. FIG. 282 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which a reception period D (reception effect D) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the “variation pattern D1 (FIG. 276)” or the like is obtained. Assuming that “variation pattern D2 (FIG. 277)” is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as an advance notice determination) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, thereafter, the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol) SZ (rendering description according to the fluctuating patterns D1 and D2, sound output of specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 282 (a)”). ), An effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect judgment is additionally provided to the selected "fluctuation pattern D1" or "fluctuation pattern D2" within the execution period of the change effect. Will be executed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 282 (a), a landscape depicting mountains and rivers is displayed as the background image HG4a.

  That is, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (such as a preliminary determination) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 276 (a) or FIG. 277 (a). When the timing tP2 at which the predetermined time D has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the SZ has arrived (when the condition D is satisfied), the "acceptance of the display D after acceptance" is permitted in the acceptance period D (valid Period (“the situation shown in FIG. 282 (b)”). As a result, when an operation (operation) by the player is received during the reception period D, the post-reception display D is performed based on the reception (the situation shown in FIG. 282 (c)).

  However, more precisely, when the variation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect is selected, as shown in FIG. 276 (a), the reception period D is a predetermined period after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started. This occurs when the timing tP2-D1 (the timing arriving after the timing when the reach state is formed) at which the time D1 has elapsed (when the condition D1 is satisfied), but does not generate the reach effect. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 277 (a), when the timing tP2-D2 after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (the condition D2 is not satisfied). (When it is established).

  In addition, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 after the lapse of the predetermined time D1 from the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect is shown in FIG. 276 (e). As described above, before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or inaudible is generated. That is, in this case, the reception period D occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state.

  On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, FIG. As shown in the figure, when the timing tP2-D2 arrives, the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. That is, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode.

  As described above, the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect has arrived, or does not generate the reach effect. The mode of the effect differs depending on whether or not it occurs when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the change effect of the change pattern D2 has arrived.

  First, FIG. 276 shows an example of an effect in which the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect. 282 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 276 (a) and 276 (b), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period D, the reception target (operation receiving unit or the like) ), A gauge image indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display indicating the degree of expectation (ratio of big hit symbols appearing) according to the reception. I have. As described above, the mimic image display according to the present embodiment is displayed as an “integrated mimic image display” integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. Also, when displaying a mimic image display instead of the "integrated mimic image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), when the timing tP1 arrives before the reception period D occurs, “ Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) "is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the reception period D occurs. The “integrated model image display IG” is not displayed (not visible) when the reception is made within the reception period D or when the reception period D is ended without the reception. In addition, the reception period D according to this example is to be ended when the timing tP3 arrives when the operation (operation) is not received by the player (see FIG. 276 (h)). .

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 276 (a) to (g) and in the example of following an effect route such as FIG. 282 (b) → FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (f) → FIG. It is assumed that an operation (operation) by a player is received at a timing tPx in the period D. That is, in this case, based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received at the timing tPx, the reception period D ends, and the post-reception display D (post-reception effect D) corresponding to the reception period D is displayed. Execution will be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 282 (c), only one mode is displayed as the after-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period D, based on the reception, the post-reception display D has a relatively low expectation in the first mode (for example, The cut-in by the princess character may be executed, or the second mode (for example, the cut-in by the samurai character) having a relatively high expectation may be executed as the display D after reception.

  However, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is received (here, at the timing tPx), the integrated model image display IG is not displayed. Not to mention not to make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated simulation image display IG.

  In addition, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276 (c), the disappearance-related effect occurs even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tPx when the operation (operation) by the player is received and the reception period D ends. Will not be displayed. That is, in the reception period D, the disappearance-related display corresponding thereto (an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated mimic image display IG is not displayed (an image different from the integrated mimic image display IG)). Is not prepared, and the integrated simulation image display IG is suddenly hidden.

  In the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 276 (b) to (d), when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated mimic image display IG is displayed, the player performs the operation in the reception period D. Execution of “display after reception D” according to the reception of the operation (operation) is started.

  However, in the reception period D, when an operation (operation) by the player is received, as shown in FIG. 282 (c), “display after reception D” is displayed on the integrated mimic image display IG. The display is started in such a manner as to overlap with the entire area and to give priority to the integrated simulation image display IG. The “display after reception D” may be displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600.

  According to such a configuration, at the time when the “display after reception D” is started to be displayed based on the reception of the operation (operation) by the player, the integrated simulation image display IG is suddenly hidden (display on the layer). Even if it remains), and it is possible to provide a different performance from the case of other reception periods using the disappearance effect or the like. Note that the after-acceptance display D according to this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display.

  Also, in the reception period D, unlike the case of the other reception periods, even if the display related to the “display after reception D” is started based on the reception, the reception is performed as an opportunity. The processing related to the display of the “integrated model image display IG” is not terminated. That is, in the reception period D, the process for displaying the “integrated model image display IG” is continued until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (here, timing tP3), and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Is terminated when is satisfied. Note that when the operation (operation) by the player is not received until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the reception period D is continued, the “integrated model image display IG” In addition to terminating the process for displaying, a process for terminating the reception period D is also performed.

  That is, in the reception period D, when the “display after reception D” is started to be displayed based on the reception, the period D is terminated based on the reception. The processing pertaining to the display of the "integrated model image display IG" itself is not terminated, and the display on the layer is continued. However, since “display after receiving D” is displayed with priority over “integrated model image display IG”, “integrated model image display IG” is changed to “display after receiving D”. As described above, the display is made non-display (not visible) (in FIGS. 276 and 277, the period shaded with a hatched image is displayed by the “display after reception D” (integrated image display). This corresponds to a period in which the model image display IG) is hidden (not visible).

  Note that, in this case, the “integrated model image display IG” may not be completely hidden, and may be made difficult to view through the predetermined transmittance set in “display after reception D”.

  In the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 276 (b), 282 (b), (e), and (f), the state in which the operation (operation) by the player is permitted is continued. Of the "integrated model image display IG" from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), or the "integrated model image display IG" from the non-display state The display state may be changed (the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even when the "integrated mimic image display IG" is in the non-display state, if an operation (operation) is performed by the player, the operation (operation) is accepted, and the operation is accepted. Based on this, the display D is performed after the reception (refer to the example of tracing the effect route shown in FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (c)).

  In this example, if an operation (operation) by the player has been received within the reception period D, is it received before the “integrated mimic image display IG” is turned off (FIG. 282)? (B) → FIG. 282 (c)) or is the reception performed when the “integrated mimic image display IG” is in the non-display state (FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (c)), or Regardless of whether or not the reception has been performed after the “simulated image display IG” is returned to the display state again (FIG. 282 (f) → FIG. 282 (c)), the same mode as the “display after reception D” (FIG. 282 ( c)) is made to appear.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 282 (e), despite the occurrence of the reception period D, the reception period C (FIG. 281 ( (see b)) can be provided as if it were suddenly replaced, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such a surprising effect. On the other hand, even if the player accepts an operation (operation) in a situation where the reception period C is assumed to be suddenly replaced (in a state where the integrated mimic image display IG is not displayed), the reception period is not changed. Since the same mode (FIG. 282 (c)) is displayed as the "display after reception D" corresponding to D, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, when the “integrated model image display IG” changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the “integrated model image display IG” is changed to the non-display state, it is expected that an atmosphere that is suddenly replaced with another reception period is more suitably created. become.

  In particular, in this example, the “background image HG4a” in which mountains and rivers are drawn is changed to a “background image HG4b” in which a desert different from “background image HG3” is drawn (see FIG. 282 ( b) → FIG. 282 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the “integrated model image display IG” changes to the non-display state, an atmosphere that is suddenly replaced with the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert is more suitably created. Will be expected.

  In this example, when the “integrated model image display IG” is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from the “background image HG4b” to the “background image HG4a”. (FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (f)). As a result, it is expected that an atmosphere that has been returned to the original reception period D from another reception period (particularly, the reception period C) can be more appropriately created.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 282 (c), the after-reception display D according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the decorative symbol SZ (displayed on the entire screen). May be one)). In this example, the integrated model image display IG is displayed preferentially with respect to the decorative symbol SZ, and the post-acceptance display D is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ. As shown in FIG. 276 (d) and FIG. 282 (d), the post-acceptance display D according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved. Note that the situation shown in FIG. 282 (d) shows a situation where the effect in the reach state progresses and enters the SP reach effect.

  However, when the display D after reception is preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol SZ, the effect (reach state or the like) by the decorative symbol SZ may be viewed until the display time as the display D after reception elapses. There is a concern that the entertainment interest may decrease due to the inability to play.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted during the period in which the “display after reception D” is displayed, and the acceptance is performed. With this as an opportunity, the process related to the display of “display after reception D” is to be terminated (see the example of tracing the effect path from FIG. 282 (c) to FIG. 282 (g)). That is, in this case, depending on the operation of the player, the timing at which the display of the “display D after reception” is ended can be made early (before the display time of the display D after reception has elapsed). (FIG. 282 (g)), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest caused by the inability to see the effect (reach state, etc.) of the decorative symbol SZ by the “display after reception D”. .

  Note that, in this example, in the reception period D, the operation content (the pressing operation on the operation button 410) required to start the display of the “display D after reception” and the period during which the “display D after reception” is displayed The operation contents (pressing operation on the operation button 410) required for ending the “display after reception D” early are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. You may. For example, the operation content required to start display of “display after reception D” is “press operation on operation button 410”, whereas the operation content required to end the “display D after reception” is The operation may be "a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001" or a combination of "a pressing operation on the operation button 410" and "a sword operation of the sword decoration body 5001".

  In any case, during the period in which the “display after reception D” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 282 (c), the operation required to end the “display after reception D” is any content. It is desirable to clearly indicate whether the character is displayed by displaying “character information (can be canceled in the figure)” or “simulated image display”. In this case, it is desirable to display the “simulated image display” at a position overlapping with the “display after reception D” and to give priority to the “display after reception D” (in the figure, “display after reception”). D "is displayed at a position that does not overlap with" D "). Also, the "character information" is not prepared as a separate image from the "display after reception D", and is displayed as a part of the display after reception (image on the same layer) itself. You may make it.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reception period D occurs, as shown in FIG. 276 (f), the reception-permitted sound is not output audibly, and in this respect, the "reception is not allowed". The presentation effect common to the “period C” is provided, so that the “reception period C” is made conscious. Even when the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden or returned to the display state, the acceptable sound is not audibly output.

  On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 276 (h) to (n) and the examples of tracing the effect paths shown in FIGS. 282 (b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are within the reception period D. It is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period D occurs, the operation (operation) by the player is not received (and the automatic button function is not activated), and the above-described “predetermined specific condition (here, Timing tP3) ”is established. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (at the time when the reception period D ends and the reception of the operation by the player is no longer permitted), at the timing tPx (operation of the player within the reception period D). (At the time of reception), as well as the effect display device 1600, the integrated mimic image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated mimic image display IG is not made difficult to see. I have.

  According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends in time for the player to receive the operation (operation), the integrated simulation image is received within the reception period D after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in the reception period D, when an operation (operation) by the player is not received, as shown in FIG. 276 (j), “an integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see”, The display for the effect is not started. At this time, this may be performed as long as the integrated mimic image display IG itself is faded out. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is not displayed.

  Next, an example of an effect when the reception period D occurs when a timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is shown in FIG. 277 and FIG. 282 will be described in detail. FIG. 282 is based on the assumption that the reception period D occurs after the reach state is formed, and does not correspond to the occurrence of the reception period D illustrated in FIG. 277. Also in the reception period D shown in FIG. 282, the difference is that the reception period D occurs in a state where the reach state is not formed and that the SP does not enter the SP reach effect after the end of the reception period D in the production contents shown in FIG. And the rest is basically the same, and for convenience of description, the description will be made with reference to FIG.

  When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, the reception period D is also the same reception period as the above-described reception period D. Therefore, the processing performed when the reception is performed and the processing performed when the reception is not performed are the same as the processing described above unless otherwise specified.

  However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect has come, FIG. As shown in ()), before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible. On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, FIG. As shown in (2), there is no occurrence of a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible before the timing tP2-D2 arrives.

  Therefore, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is shown in FIG. 277 (e). As described above, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode.

  However, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect, the reception period D In the state in which is generated, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode until then is set to a state in which audible output is performed in the suppressed mode or a non-audible state.

  According to such a configuration, while the specific BGM appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is being output audibly in the non-suppressed mode, the specific BGM is thereafter displayed. It is as if the above-mentioned reception period B (see FIG. 274) in which the operation (operation) by the player can be received in the state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state has occurred. The atmosphere changes, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In order to more suitably obtain such an effect, when the reception is made in the reception period B, a high degree of expectation (for example, a big hit symbol appears) that cannot appear when the reception is made in the reception period A It is desirable that the post-acceptance display be displayed in a manner that suggests that the ratio is 100%).

  Further, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a at which a predetermined time has elapsed after the reception period D has occurred, the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is not displayed. As described above, at the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is set to the non-audible state, the mock image display (the integrated mock image display IG) is hidden. It is set so as to arrive before the timing tP2a.

  When such a configuration is further provided, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or a state in which the specific BGM is inaudible while the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the atmosphere is more suitably changed to an atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state, the timing tP2a at which the mimic image display (the integrated mimic image display IG) is hidden is set. Since the time tP2a arrives, an atmosphere as if the reception period C (see FIG. 275) has occurred can be more suitably provided at the timing tP2a.

  In the reception period D according to this example, when the timing tP2b arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the model image (the integrated model image display IG) is not displayed, the model image display (the integrated model image display IG) is performed. IG) is displayed again as described above (see FIG. 282 (f)). However, even after the mimic image display (the integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed again, the specific BGM continues to be in the "audible output state in the suppression mode or the inaudible state". .

  FIGS. 277 (a) to (g) show the operation (operation) by the player when the specific BGM is in the “audible output state in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state” in the reception period D described above. Is assumed to be accepted.

  As shown in FIGS. 277 (a) to 277 (g), in the reception period D, as in the reception period B, as shown in FIGS. 277 (a), (b), and (e), the specific BGM is Even if an operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state, the specific BGM starts audible output in the non-suppressed mode as a trigger. Instead, the state of “audible output in the suppressed mode or inaudible state” is maintained. This also makes it possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) has occurred.

  FIGS. 277 (a ′) to (g ′) show the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is set to the “audible output state or the non-audible state” in the reception period D described above. Also, it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is received before, that is, while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 277 (a ′) to 277 (g ′), during the above-described reception period D, an operation (operation) by the player is received while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. In such a case, the specific BGM is set to the "audible output state in a suppressed mode or the non-audible state" with the reception as a trigger. That is, in this case, when the specific BGM is received while the specific BGM is in the state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state, the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode in response to the reception. However, when the specific BGM is received while being audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, the specific BGM is "audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the non-audible state." ". Thus, after the reception period D occurs, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation at an early stage when the operation (operation) by the player can affect the specific BGM, and the reception period D occurs. This makes it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension at the time.

  As described above, in the reception period D according to this example, triggered by the reception, the “simulated image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated mimic image display IG shown in FIG. 282 (b))” Does not end the process related to the display of. That is, by giving priority to the “display after receiving D” for the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, the “mimic image display corresponding to the reception period D ( Integrated simulated image display IG) "is not displayed (not visible).

  Also, in the “display after reception D” according to this example, as described above, the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted during the display period, and when the acceptance is performed, The process related to the display of the “display after reception D” is to be terminated early (see an example of following an effect route such as FIG. 282 (c) → FIG. 282 (g)). Also, at this time, when the “mock image display (integrated mock image display IG shown in FIG. 282 (c))” and the character information (cancelable) corresponding to the after-reception display D are received, this is triggered. To terminate the display process (see FIG. 282 (g)).

  In such a configuration, during the period in which the “display after reception D” is displayed, depending on the timing at which the action (operation) by the player is received, the “simulated image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated mimic image) In the situation where the processing related to the display of “Display IG)” is continued, a situation may occur in which the processing related to the display of the “display after reception D” is terminated early. That is, in this case, the display of “display after reception D”, which has been preferentially displayed with respect to the “display of the simulation image corresponding to the reception period D (the integrated simulation image display IG illustrated in FIG. 282 (b))” is ended. As a result, the "display of the model image corresponding to the reception period D" is displayed again. At this time, the "reception period D" itself may be generated again.

  As described above, if the process for displaying the “display after reception D” is terminated early and then the “reception period D” is generated again, the process for displaying the “display after reception D” is terminated early. Even after this, if the operation (operation) by the player is again accepted within the "acceptance period D" generated again by this, the "after-acceptance display D" can be displayed again. Become like As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when “display after reception D” is erroneously terminated early.

  By the way, as for the reception periods A to D shown in FIGS. 273 to 282, the fluctuation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as the fluctuation patterns, and a predetermined time A to D has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was started. The above has been described as what sometimes occurs. However, the reception periods A to D do not have to occur only when different fluctuation patterns are selected. For example, as described later, when one fluctuation pattern is selected, this is triggered. May be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

  Further, as described above, the reception period D is generated as a reception period having special characteristics as compared with the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such a reception period D may be set as a reception period that can occur only when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number. That is, in this case, when the number of holds becomes less than the predetermined number as a result of the player trying to interrupt the game, the reception period D occurs, and it is as if each of the reception periods A to C has changed. It will be possible to expect that the game will not be stopped because it will provide special special effects, or even if the game is stopped, it will give an interesting impression on the game Finally you can have it.

  FIGS. 278 (a) and (b) are tables showing setting examples of the conditions for generating the above-described reception periods A to D when realizing these effects.

  First, FIG. 278 (a) is a table referred to when the number of reservations is one of “2” to “4” when the reservation is consumed. In other words, in this case, even if the symbol change according to the reserved digestion is started, the reserved number does not become “0” and is one of “1” to “3”, and the risk of the game being stopped is Since the situation is low, the reception period D does not occur even if any of the “first variation pattern”, the “second variation pattern”, and the “third variation pattern” are executed as the variation pattern. .

  More specifically, when the hold is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed when the number of holds is any one of “2” to “4”, 70% of the effect is determined as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination). None of the reception periods A to D occur at a rate, and only the reception period A of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination).

  In addition, when the hold is exhausted and the second variation pattern is executed when the number of holds is any one of “2” to “4”, the reception period is 50% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination). Only the reception period C of A to D occurs, and the reception period A and the reception period C occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination).

  In addition, when the hold is exhausted and the third variation pattern is executed when the number of holds is any one of “2” to “4”, the reception period is set at a rate of 10% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination). B and the reception period C occur, and the reception period A, the reception period B, and the reception period C occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination).

  In addition, even if any of the “first fluctuation pattern”, the “second fluctuation pattern”, and the “third fluctuation pattern” having different fluctuation times is selected, the reception period A is 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. The reception period C is set to be 15 seconds after the start of the change, regardless of whether the “second change pattern” or the “third change pattern” is selected. Can be generated when the time elapses, and the reception period B can be generated when 35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation when the “third fluctuation pattern” was selected.

  In addition, the reception periods B and C are not subjected to the effect determination (preliminary judgment), and are always generated when a corresponding variation pattern is selected. It is a subject of a judgment (notification judgment), and can be generated only when a special result is obtained in the effect judgment. However, the reception periods B and C may be set as targets of the effect determination (advance judgment), or the reception period A may not be set as the target of the effect judgment (advance judgment).

  Next, FIG. 278 (b) is a table referred to when the number of reservations is “1” when the reservation is consumed. In other words, in this case, when the symbol change according to the hold exhaustion is started, the number of holds becomes “0”, and there is a risk that the game will be stopped unless a new hold is added within the execution period of the symbol change. , Even if any of the variation patterns including the “first variation pattern”, the “second variation pattern”, and the “third variation pattern” selected as the variation pattern is executed, D is generated.

  More specifically, when the hold is exhausted when the number of holds is “1” and the first variation pattern is executed, the reception periods A to D are set at a rate of 70% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination). Of these, only the reception period D occurs, and the reception period A and the reception period D occur at a rate of 30% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination).

  When the hold is exhausted when the number of holds is “1” and the second variation pattern is executed, the reception period C and the reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination). Then, the reception period A, the reception period C, and the reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination).

  Further, when the hold is exhausted when the number of holds is “1” and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period B, the reception period C, and the reception period B are determined at a rate of 10% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination). The reception period D occurs, and the reception period A, the reception period B, the reception period C, and the reception period D occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the effect determination (preliminary determination).

  In this embodiment, the “first variation pattern” is a variation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the “second variation pattern” and “third variation pattern” are set as variation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the “first variation pattern” is selected, the reception period D occurs in the mode described with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the “second variation pattern” or the “third variation pattern” is selected, the reception period D occurs in the mode described with reference to FIG. 276.

  Also, in the reception period A, the reception period B, and the reception period C, a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) from the start of the symbol change is set regardless of the type of the change pattern and the number of holdings. While each of the patterns can be generated when the time has elapsed, the accepting period D is set such that the symbol variation varies depending on which of the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern is selected. The time (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) from the start to the occurrence is different.

  That is, in this case, the reception period D can be generated by aiming at timing that does not disturb the relationship with the effect content for each type of the variation pattern. Therefore, the reception period D is set in any of the variation patterns. Can be suitably generated.

  In the above-described production example, a plurality of reception periods including a reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 2-A”) and a reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of “Configuration 2-A”) are included in the reception period. We have a reception period. In this regard, in the reception period A, only one mode (the integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 232 (a)) can be displayed as the model image display (here, the integrated model image display IG). In the reception period B, a plurality of modes (integrated model image displays IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) are prepared as the model images. "A mode according to the result of the determination (notification determination)" is selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, in the reception period B, the effect that cannot appear when the reception period A occurs is provided, so that the game until the operation (operation) by the player is detected is provided. It is possible to suitably improve the interest.

  Regarding the “simple image display in multiple modes” that can be displayed in the reception period B, it is desirable that the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears differs depending on which of the mimic image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the quality. In addition, any one of the “simple image display in a plurality of modes” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed in the reception period A. In this case, it is desirable that “the mode with the lowest expectation” of the “simple image display in multiple modes” is the same as “one mode” that can be displayed in the reception period A.

  In the above-described production example, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “Configuration 2-A”) is further provided. In the reception periods A and D, only one mode is displayed as the model image display. Can be displayed. Then, in the “acceptance period B” in which the mimic image display is displayed in any of the plurality of modes, the mimic image display is prevented from being hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the “reception period A” and the “reception period B” in which the mimic image display is displayed only in one mode, in the “reception period A”, until the valid state (reception period) ends. During the “acceptance period B”, the mock image display is not hidden during the valid state (acceptance period) until the valid state (reception period) is over (while the valid state is continued). On the way, the mimic image display that has been displayed until then is hidden (see FIG. 282 (e)). That is, in this case, even in the “acceptance period A” and the “acceptance period D” in which only one mode is displayed as the mimic image display, the effect of determining whether or not the mimic image display is hidden in the middle thereof is displayed. Is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment until the operation (operation) by the player is detected.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after reception) is performed regardless of whether the reception is performed during the period in which the mimic image display is displayed or the period in which the mimic image display is not displayed. (Display) as shown in FIG. 282 (b) → (c), and the production progress shown in FIG. 282 (e) → (c). That is, in this case, the effective state (reception period) itself continues without any change even after the display of the mimic image is hidden, so that the directivity (imitation) using the “reception period D” is used. In creating (non-display of image display), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period D, the mimic image display is hidden during the reception period D, and then the mimic image display is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the reception period D has ended even though the reception period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by displaying the mimic image display again thereafter. Will be able to do that.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the “reception period A” and the “reception period D” are shared in that only one mode can be displayed as the mimic image display. The content of the display change that appears when the display is different from each other. Thereby, it is possible to add interest to what kind of display change appears when the reception is made.

  In the above-described effect example, in the “acceptance period D”, the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) to be accepted is illuminated during the period in which the mimic image display is displayed, This may encourage the player to perform an operation (operation). In this case, during the period during which the mock image display is not displayed in the “acceptance period D”, the operation means (here, Then, the operation button 410) may emit light. In this regard, in the “reception period C”, if the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) to be received is not allowed to emit light, it is possible to determine which type of reception period is occurring. Be able to suggest.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 3-A”) and the reception period C (the second period of “Configuration 3-A”) (Equivalent to the reception period). Then, in the reception period A or the reception period B, after the mock image display (here, the integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, the reception period A or the reception period B The display of the mimic image is not hidden until the end of the game, and the player can accept an operation while the mimic image display is being displayed (see FIGS. 273, 274, and 274). 279, 280, etc.), during the reception period C, it is possible to receive an operation (operation) by the player while the mimic image display is not displayed (see, FIG. 275, FIG. 281, etc.), as described above. The “acceptable reception sound” is audibly output when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, but is not audibly output when the reception period C occurs.

  According to such a configuration, not only the “acceptance period A or the acceptance period B” in which the acceptable sound is audibly output and the mimic image display is displayed, but also the acceptable sound is audibly output. Since the “acceptance period C” is provided in which the game is accepted and the mock image display is not displayed, there is a possibility that the post-acceptance display will occur at various timings not intended by the player. It becomes possible to raise awareness, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In the above-described effect example, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “Configuration 3-A”) is further provided. In the reception period C (FIGS. 275 and 281), the reception period C occurs. The display of the mimic image is not displayed from the end of the game to the end, and the operation (operation) by the player can be received while the mimic image display is not displayed. However, the reception period D (FIGS. 276 and 277) In FIG. 282), the mock image display is hidden for only a part of the reception period D, and the period during which the mock image display is displayed and the period during which the mock image display is hidden are displayed. In any case, the operation (operation) by the player may be accepted. That is, in this case, the reception period D includes the sides as reception periods A and B (acceptance while the mimic image display is being displayed) and the sides as the reception period C (where the mimic image display is not displayed). ), It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, since the state where the operation (operation) by the player is accepted may continue even after the display of the mimic image is hidden, the operation (operation) by the player is accepted. It is expected to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when the mimic image display is hidden without being displayed.

  The acceptable sound is output audibly when the receiving periods A and B occur, but is not output audibly when the receiving period C occurs and when the receiving period D occurs. In other words, in this case, in the reception period D, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the sides as the reception periods A and B (the imitation image display is displayed) and the sides as the reception period C (the allowable reception sound is different). (Not output) together, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after reception) is performed regardless of whether the reception is performed during the period in which the mimic image display is displayed or the period in which the mimic image display is not displayed. Display). That is, in this case, the effective state (reception period) itself continues without any change even after the display of the mimic image is hidden, so that the directivity (imitation) using the “reception period D” is used. In creating (non-display of image display), it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the background image (FIGS. 279 and 280) that appears when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, and the background image that appears when the reception period C occurs (FIGS. 279 and 280). 281). This makes it possible to give an impression that "the background image differs depending on the type of the reception period".

  In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the background image changes during the reception period D, and the mimic image display is disabled from the period in which the mimic image display is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the change occurs. Since the display period is shifted to the display period, it is possible to provide an effect as if the display period has shifted to a different reception period within the reception period D.

  Further, in the reception period D, the background image that has been changed once is returned to its original state, and the mimic image display is started from the period in which the mimic image display is hidden in accordance with the timing of the restoration. Since the display period is shifted to the displayed period, it is possible to provide, within the reception period D, the effect as if it were returned to the reception period before the shift.

  Note that the background image changes within the reception period D when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D without an operation (operation) by the player being received, and the background image changes more than the predetermined time has elapsed. When an operation (operation) by the player has been received before, the background image does not change even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the generation of the period D. As a result, the background image is prevented from changing to a different background image during the execution of the display after reception according to the reception period D, and the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception periods A and B and the reception period D, when the reception is performed while the mimic image display is being displayed, the mimic image display is not displayed. At this time, in the reception periods A and B, “disappearance EF” as an image different from the mimic image display is displayed in accordance with the hiding of the mimic image display. In accordance with the non-display, there is no display of “disappearing EF” as an image different from the mimic image display. That is, in this case, if "extinction EF" does not appear when the reception is made, it is possible to recognize the possibility that "reception period D" has occurred. Despite having the sides as A and B, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decline in gaming interest due to no understanding of which reception period is occurring.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 5-A”) and the reception period D (the second period of “Configuration 5-A”) (Equivalent to the reception period). Then, in the reception period A or the reception period B, the number of pieces of determination information (the number of jackpot determinations in the hold state (the number of hold)) stored in the hold storage unit is any number, as shown in FIG. 278. When the execution of the third variation pattern (corresponding to the first variation pattern of “Configuration 5-A”) is started, the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the third variation pattern (the reception period A in FIG. 278) In the case of, the timing is 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of the reception period B, it can occur when the timing of 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) has arrived. When the number of pieces of determination information stored in the hold storage means (the number of jackpot determinations in the hold state (number of holds)) is less than “2” (ie, “1”), this is digested and the number of holds is reduced to “1”. 278, the execution of the second variation pattern shown in FIG. 278 (corresponding to the second variation pattern of “Configuration 5-A”) is started, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern was started. 270 (FIG. 278 (b), a timing at which 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), but it is possible that the number of pieces of determination information stored by the holding storage means is "2" or more. Sometimes, when the execution of the second variation pattern is started, it does not occur even when the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the second variation pattern has arrived (see FIG. 278 (a)). ).

  According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and the number of reservations is exhausted as a result, a reception period (reception period D) of a type that has not been generated will occur, and the game is stopped. It is possible to expect to be prompted not to be performed, or to end up having an interesting impression on the game even if the game is stopped.

  In the above-described effect example, when the “number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage means (number of holds)” is less than “2” (ie, “1”), this is digested and the number of holds is reduced to “1”. Even if the execution of the second variation pattern is started in the state of “0”, the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the execution of the second variation pattern (in FIG. 278 (b), 30 seconds after the start of the variation) When the “number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage means (the number of holds)” increases at a stage where the elapsed time has not arrived (when the number of holds changes from “0” to “1” or more), The reception period D may not be generated when the timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the second variation pattern has come.

  In other words, even if the symbol change (second change pattern) is started in a state of “0” when the number of suspensions is “1” and this is exhausted, even within the execution period of the symbol change If the number of holds is increased, it indicates that the game is not about to be stopped. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even when the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed in a state where the number of reservations is “0”, the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation. In this case, the reception period D is prevented from being generated even when the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the second variation pattern (in FIG. 278 (b), the timing at which 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation) has arrived. Therefore, the reception period D can be made to function more appropriately as a “reception period of a type that can appear only when a game is to be stopped”.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect more appropriately, even when the reception period D occurs, the number of pieces of determination information (holding It is more desirable to end the reception period D (end the state in which the reception is permitted) at that point in time.

  Furthermore, even in a situation in which the reception is made during the reception period D and the display after reception according to the reception is being executed, the "stored by the hold storage means" is performed before the display time elapses. When the number of pieces of judgment information (the number of holdings) increases, the display after reception may be terminated (not displayed) at that time.

In the above-described effect example, during the reception period D, the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 278 is started to be executed, and a predetermined time after the execution of the first variation pattern is started (in FIG. 278 (b), the variation start is started). (When 10 seconds have passed after the start), the timing has also occurred (provided that the hold number is 0). And
The timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern (the variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. 278 (in FIG. 278 (b), the timing at which 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation) arrives If the reception period D occurs at the time when the reception period D occurs, the specific BGM is set to the non-audible state before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D is generated while the non-audible state is maintained. (See FIG. 276),
The timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the first variation pattern (the variation pattern that does not form the reach state) shown in FIG. 278 (in FIG. 278 (b), the timing at which 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation) arrives When the reception period D occurs at the time, the specific BGM is not set to the inaudible state, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output, and the specific BGM is generated within the generated reception period D. Make the specific BGM inaudible (see FIG. 277)
Such a configuration is provided.

  According to such a configuration, when the reception period D occurs, it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. Or the reception period B (see FIG. 274), which occurs while the specific BGM is in the suppression mode or the non-audible state, can be seen as if it has occurred. Can be achieved. In addition, the reception period D, which looks as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) has occurred, looks like a change to the reception period B within the reception period D. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the above-described effect example, after the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 278, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and the specific BGM is audible. If the reception is made while the output is being made, the audible output of the specific BGM is terminated upon the reception (see FIG. 277). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be terminated at the timing of the acceptance, but may be continuously output thereafter. For example, even in the example of FIG. 277 (e ′), the specific BGM is not set to the suppression mode or the inaudible state at the accepted timing tPx, but the timing tPy shown in FIG. The specific BGM may be set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state based on the arrival of the (determined timing). That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM may be suppressed or inaudible in the middle of the display period of the display D after reception, and it is possible to provide an interesting performance.

  In the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 6-A”) and the reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of “Configuration 6-A”). ) Are available. The reception period A can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, regardless of the state of the effect (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the effect determination, and the like). The reception period B can be generated after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state regardless of the state of the production (result of the big hit determination, the result of the performance determination, and the like). By using the specific BGM, it is possible to provide directivity related to the type of the reception period before the reception period occurs.

  Further, in the above-described production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “Configuration 6-A”) is further provided as a reception period, and the reception period D includes the state of the production (the result of the jackpot determination). Or the result of the effect determination), when the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, or when the specific BGM is in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state. I did it.

  More specifically, a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 278 (b)) has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation of the first fluctuation pattern that does not form the reach state (see FIG. 278 (b) and the like). When the reception period D sometimes occurs, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode (see FIG. 277). On the other hand, for a predetermined time after the symbol variation of the second variation pattern or the third variation pattern (see FIG. 278 (b) or the like) forming the reach state is started (in the case of the second variation pattern in FIG. When the reception period D occurs when 30 seconds have elapsed in the case of the pattern and 50 seconds have elapsed in the case of the third variation pattern, the reception period D is set after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state. Is generated (see FIG. 276).

  According to such a configuration, a case where the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppression mode, a case where the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, and In any case, since the reception period may be the “reception period D”, the game entertainment until the operation (operation) by the player is received is appropriately maintained. Will be expected.

  Note that even during the reception period A, if an abnormal state occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state. obtain. However, the above-described “acceptance period A can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, regardless of the state of the production (result of the big hit determination, the result of the production determination, etc.). The meaning of "" means that when the reception period A occurs in a situation in which the abnormality is not notified and the effect is being properly performed, the specific BGM is always audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. The reception period A is generated ".

  In the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 7-A”) and the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of “Configuration 7-A”) ) Are available. Then, in the reception period A, if a reception is made within the period, the display A after reception according to the reception can be executed, and at least the display A after reception is displayed for the effect design (decorative symbol SZ). , The display is given priority over the post-reception display A (see FIG. 279 (c)). On the other hand, in the reception period D, if a reception is made within the period, the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the effect design (decorative symbol SZ) is displayed after the reception D is displayed. While being displayed, it is displayed or hidden in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize it by the display D after the reception (see FIG. 282 (c)).

  Here, the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize” means that at least a part of the effect design (decorative design SZ) is a part corresponding to the transmittance through the display D after reception set to a predetermined transmittance. Or at least one of the effect design (decorative design SZ), in which at least a part of the effect design (decorative design SZ) is made invisible by the post-acceptance display D, or at least one of the effect design (decorative design SZ). For example, a mode in which a part is hidden).

  According to such a configuration, by confirming whether or not the visibility of the effect symbol (decorative symbol SZ) has been affected by the display after reception triggered by the operation (operation) by the player, the reception period is determined. Can be recognized. The “design for effect (decorative symbol SZ)” is, for example, a symbol that forms a reach state as an effect on the effect display device 1600. , Pseudo continuous production, full rotation production, etc.

  However, some players may feel disgust about the deterioration of the visibility of such effect symbols (decorative symbols SZ) with the display D after reception. Has been confirmed. In this regard, in the above-described effect example, when the after-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is displayed, a reception period different from the reception period D is generated (for example, according to the reception within the reception period D). If the operation is received by the player during the different reception period, the reception D is hidden and the display D after reception is displayed (the processing related to the display of the display D after reception). Is finished), thereby making it easy to visually recognize the effect symbol (decorative symbol SZ) (see the effect progress shown in FIG. 282 (c) → FIG. 282 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, if the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is “displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started”, the predetermined time By simply performing a predetermined operation until the time elapses, the after-acceptance display D can be hidden at that time. Note that an operation (operation) required of the player to display the after-reception display D in the reception period D is different from a reception period different from the reception period D (a reception period generated according to the reception in the reception period D). The operations (operations) required by the player to hide the after-reception display D within the same may be the same operations (operations) or may be different operations (operations). Note that the “reception period different from the reception period D” is ended when the display D after reception becomes non-display.

  On the other hand, the after-acceptance display A is also a predetermined time from the start of the display (the same time as the predetermined time until the after-reception display D is hidden or may be a different time). Is hidden when elapses. However, the display A after reception which does not degrade the visibility of the effect symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is not displayed in response to any operation performed by the player until the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent such a situation from occurring, in order to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an erroneous operation is performed against the intention of the player.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the reception period B is further provided as the reception period. In the reception period B, if the reception is performed within the period, the display B after reception according to the reception can be executed. The effect design (decorative design SZ) is displayed or hidden in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display B after reception at least while the display B after reception is displayed. (See FIG. 280 (c)).

  However, in the above-described effect example, “display after reception B” and “display after reception D” are common in that they affect the visibility of the effect symbol (decorative symbol SZ). Instead, the post-acceptance display B is "displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display (the time may be different from the time until the post-acquisition display D is hidden)." In this case, the display B after reception is not hidden by any operation performed by the player until the predetermined time elapses. Thereby, when the visibility of the effect symbol (decorative symbol SZ) is affected by the display after reception, it is possible to provide the effect of determining whether the visibility can be improved.

  It is preferable that the reception period B is set as a reception period in which the above-described automatic button function is activated, and the reception period D is set as a reception period in which the above-described automatic button function is not activated.

  In the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 8-A”) and the reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of “Configuration 8-A”) ) Are available. The reception period D can be generated when the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode. When the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, the reception period D is accepted. With this as a trigger, the specific BGM is made inaudible (see FIG. 277), and during the reception period B, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is in the state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or not being output. After that, the reception is permitted, and even if the reception is performed, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode or the state in which the specific BGM is not audibly output is maintained (see FIG. 274).

  According to such a configuration, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, it is provided with an interest as to at what timing the specific BGM is set to the “audible output state or the audible output state in the suppressed mode”. Will be able to

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period D, when the reception is made, all the sounds that have been audibly output up to that time, including the production sound different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and in the reception period B, When the reception is made, all the sounds that are audibly output at that time (such as acceptable sounds) are made inaudible. That is, in this case, the specific BGM is set to the "audible output state or the audible non-output state in the suppressed mode" in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, or the audible output is performed at that time when the reception is performed. It is possible to have a common performance between the reception period D and the reception period B, such as making all of the sounds inaudible, thereby improving the entertainment interest of the game. .

  As described above, in the reception period D, a situation occurs in which the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output (during the valid period) while the operation (operation) by the player is permitted. Although it is possible (see FIG. 276 (e)), the receiving period is continued even in this situation (see FIG. 282 (e)). In other words, in this case, in the reception period D, when the reception is made, the specific BGM is made inaudible when the reception is made, but the reception is not performed for a predetermined time after the reception period D occurs. Since the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been made, it is possible to make it seem that the reception period D has ended, and the interest of the player can be reduced. Can be strongly attracted.

  In particular, in the above-described production example, since the background image is changed in accordance with the timing when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not been made, a reception period different from the reception period D occurs. The directing effect as if you are doing will be provided.

  In connection with the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible upon the reception (see FIG. 277), a “display change according to the reception (display D after reception)” is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been made (see FIG. 277), a “display change according to the reception (display after reception D)” is generated in accordance with this. There was no. That is, in this case, when the specific BGM is made inaudible, it is confirmed that "display change according to reception (display D after reception)" has not yet occurred, and the reception period D ends. To be aware of the possibility of not having. Then, when an operation (operation) by the player is received before the end of the reception period D after the specific BGM is made inaudible, the display change (reception in response to the reception) Since the “rear display D)” is generated, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the above-described effect example, during the reception period B, a predetermined effect sound (for example, an allowable reception sound) is audibly output until a timing tM3 at which the period ends is reached. When the production sound is made inaudible, the operation (operation) by the player is not allowed to be accepted, so that it is easy to determine whether or not the reception period B is continuing. Will be able to recognize. In the above-described effect example, the reception period B is set as the reception period in which the above-described automatic button function is activated, and the automatic button function is activated based on the arrival of the timing tM3. Has become.

  In the above-described effect example, the reception period B is generated when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the third variation pattern shown in FIG. 278, for example. Is made inaudible before a predetermined time elapses from the start of the third variation pattern, but for the reception period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible after the start of the third variation pattern. It is desirable that it does not occur during this time. According to such a configuration, in the third variation pattern, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, the reception period B first occurs, and thereafter, the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. Since it is possible to expect that the reception period D will further occur, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the reception period D can be generated only when the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern shown in FIG. In each of the variation pattern and the third variation pattern, it is assumed that the symbol variation can be generated when a predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. It is desirable to set so as to occur after the reception period (reception periods A to C, etc.). That is, in this case, the reception period D having a special effect can be made to function as the reception period last generated for the player who is trying to stop the game, so that the game is not stopped. It is possible to expect that the game is encouraged, or it is possible to finally give an interesting impression on the game even if the game is stopped.

  In the reception period D, the display D after reception appears for a specific time when received, but it is desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted when the display D after reception is hidden after the specific time has elapsed. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol change is started.

  Next, as a modified example of the above-described effect example, examples in which the configurations 1, 14, and 15 are embodied will be sequentially described.

  In other words, in the above-described effect example, when the reception is made during the period in which the mimic image display is displayed in the reception period D, and when the reception is made in the period in which the mimic image display is not displayed. And the same post-reception display D is to be generated. However, instead of this, when the reception is made during the period in which the mock image display is displayed in the reception period D, and when the reception is made in the period in which the mock image display is hidden, In this case, a different post-acceptance display may be generated.

  In other words, in this case, more precisely, the reception period D is a “reception period D1” that is a period during which the mimic image display is displayed and a “reception period D2” that is a period during which the mimic image display is not displayed. When the reception is made during the reception period D1, the display D1 corresponding to the reception is displayed, and when the reception is made during the reception period D2, the reception display is performed. After that, the display D2 is displayed.

  FIG. 283 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the above-described modification is added to the reception period D illustrated in FIG. 282 and the like.

  Hereinafter, the effect example illustrated in FIG. 283 will be described, but the same configuration as the effect example illustrated in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282 is not particularly described. That is, the reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 283 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282, and the same applies to another example. It is possible to apply.

  However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 283, first, a reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283 (b)), and when reception is performed in the reception period D1, display after reception according to the reception period D1 is performed. D1 is displayed (see FIG. 283 (c)).

  On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283 (b)), if a predetermined time elapses without reception (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or 277 arrives). , The model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 283 (e)). In such a situation (the situation in which the mock image display is not displayed), the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted is different from the case of the effect example shown in FIG. Is the same. However, in this modified example, when a situation occurs in which the display of the simulation image is not displayed (see FIG. 283 (e)), the above “reception period D1” ends and a different “reception period D2” occurs. It is supposed to.

  That is, when an operation (operation) by the player is received in the “reception period D2” in which the mock image display is not displayed, the after-reception display D2 corresponding to the “reception period D2” is displayed. (See FIG. 283 (h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide the performance in which the “reception period D1” is suddenly replaced with the “reception period D2” different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be provided. It will be possible to improve the entertainment interest through sexual effects.

  Moreover, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the mimic image display (the integrated mimic image display IG) changes to the non-display state, it is expected that an atmosphere that is suddenly replaced with another reception period is more suitably created. Will be done.

  In particular, in this example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 282, from the “background image HG4a” in which mountains and rivers are drawn, the “background image HG4b” in which a desert different from the “background image HG3” is drawn (FIG. 283 (b) → FIG. 283 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) changes to the non-display state, an atmosphere in which the reception period C which may occur in the background of the desert and suddenly replaces, is further improved. It will be expected to produce in a favorable manner.

  The “display after reception D2” according to this example is different from the “group notice” of the “display after reception C” shown in FIG. 281 (c), but uses a ghost character. It is a content that can be reminiscent of "Display C after reception" to a certain extent, such as common in the above, so that the atmosphere that suddenly replaced with the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert can be more appropriately It is expected to produce.

  Further, in this example, when the reception is performed within the reception period D2, the “background image HG4b” is returned (changed) to the “background image HG4a” displayed during the occurrence of the reception period D1. The display D2 after reception according to the reception is displayed. As a result, the post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs) instead of the post-reception display irrelevant to the reception period D1 (for example, the post-reception display according to the reception period C). It is possible to indicate that a predetermined time has elapsed since then (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or 277 has arrived), the display after reception corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs. Become like

  Note that if a predetermined period of time elapses without an operation (operation) by the player after the reception period D2 has been received (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 has arrived), FIG. As shown in ()), the reception period D1 occurs again, and the display returns to the state in which the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed so as to return from “background image HG4b” to “background image HG4a” (FIG. 283 (e) → FIG. 283 (f)). As a result, it is expected that an atmosphere that has been returned to the original reception period D1 from another reception period will be more appropriately created.

  When the reception is made during the reception period D1 (FIG. 283 (f)) that has occurred again, the reception period D1 is received in the same manner as when the reception is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 283 (b)) that first occurred. Is displayed after the reception according to the request (see FIG. 283 (c)).

  Needless to say, such a reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 283, during the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “Configuration 15-A”), a period during which the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed, There are periods during which the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is not displayed. These periods are made to function as a “reception period D1” and a “reception period D2”, and these “reception period D1” And a different display change depending on which of the “acceptance period D2” was accepted. In other words, in this case, a display change (reception is made within the reception period D2) which cannot be confirmed unless the reception period D is brought to a state where the possibility of the end of the reception period D is made conscious (a state where the mimic image display is not displayed). (A change in display at the time of the occurrence), the nervousness can be suitably maintained through such rendition.

  In the above-described effect example, the reception period D includes a “period during which the mimic image display is displayed” and a “period during which the mimic image display is not displayed”. However, instead of this, the “period during which character information related to acceptance is displayed” and “character information related to acceptance permitted” are hidden in the reception period D. There may be a “period that has been set”.

  FIG. 284 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the above-described modification is added to the reception period D illustrated in FIG. 282 and the like.

  Hereinafter, the effect example illustrated in FIG. 284 will be described, but the same configuration as the effect example illustrated in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282 is not particularly described. That is, the reception period D shown in FIG. 284 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282, and can be similarly applied to another example. .

  However, in the reception period D (see FIG. 284 (b)) shown in FIG. 284, first, as in the case of the reception period B (see FIG. 280 (b)), the contents are different, but reception is allowed. Character information (here, "please press") related to the operation is displayed.

  That is, as described above, the character information related to the acceptance being accepted cannot be displayed in the acceptance period A (see FIG. 279 (b)) where the expectation is relatively low. It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 280 (b)) where the degree of expectation is relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such character information (here, “please press”) in the reception period D, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be improved.

  However, in the reception period D according to this modification, as shown in FIGS. 284 (b), (e), and (f), the state in which the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to continue is continued. In the meantime, the character information (here, “please press”) related to the acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), May be changed from the non-display state to the display state (at timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even when the character information (here, “please press”) is in a non-display state, if an operation (operation) is performed by the player, the operation (operation) is accepted, After the reception, the display D is performed based on the reception (see the example of tracing the effect route as shown in FIG. 284 (e) → FIG. 284 (c)).

  In this example, if an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period D, the character information (here, “please press”) related to the acceptance is not displayed. 284 (b) → FIG. 284 (c), or when the character information (here, “please press”) is in the non-display state. (FIG. 284 (e) → FIG. 284 (c)) or whether the character information (here, “please press”) was returned to the display state and then accepted (FIG. 284 (f) → FIG. 284 (c)), the same mode (FIG. 284 (c)) appears as "display after reception D".

  According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 284 (e), despite the occurrence of the reception period D, the reception period A in which the character information related to the reception being permitted is not displayed. (See FIG. 279 (b).) This makes it possible to provide an atmosphere as if it were suddenly replaced, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such a surprising effect. On the other hand, even if the player accepts an operation (operation) in a situation (character information non-display state) that seems to be suddenly replaced with the reception period A, the operation corresponds to the reception period D. Since the same mode (FIG. 284 (c)) is displayed as the "display D after reception", it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, when the character information related to the reception being permitted changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the acceptance is changed to the non-display state, it is possible to more suitably create an atmosphere that is suddenly replaced with another acceptance period. Will be as expected.

  In particular, in this example, the “background image HG4a” in which mountains and rivers are drawn is changed to a “background image HG4c” in which mountains different from the “background image HG1” are drawn (FIG. 284 ( b) → FIG. 284 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the acceptance is changed to the non-display state, an atmosphere in which the acceptance period A which may occur in the background of the mountain and suddenly is replaced is provided. It will be expected to produce more suitably.

  In this example, when the character information related to the acceptance is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from “background image HG4c” to “background image HG4a”. (FIG. 284 (e) → FIG. 284 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere that has been returned to the initial reception period D from another reception period (particularly, the reception period A) will be more appropriately created.

  Needless to say, such a reception period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 284, first, as reception periods, reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 1-A”) and reception period D (second reception of “Configuration 1-A”) (Equivalent to the period). In both cases when the reception period B occurs and when the reception period D occurs, the character information is displayed in association with the occurrence of the reception period. In the period B and the reception period D, different character information (“press” in the reception period B; "Please press").

  That is, in the reception period B and the reception period D, the player is required to perform the same operation (operation mode), but a display change (display B, D after reception) generated as a result of the detection of the operation is performed. ) Are different from each other. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even when the same operation (operation mode) is requested to the player, the character information displayed in association with the occurrence of the reception period is changed to the character information of the reception period. A state in which which type of display change (post-reception display B, D) is likely to occur as a post-reception display because the display is made different depending on the type (type of display after reception). (Operation by the player), and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

  Also, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the reception period B is requested, and the same character information and mimic image display as in the case of the reception period B are displayed. A reception period for generating the post-display may be further prepared. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the display after reception simply by looking at the character information and the mimic image display. It is expected to be maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described modified example, in the reception period B, the character information is not hidden until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) is completed. In the reception period D, while the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) is continued, the character information can be hidden in the middle of the state. That is, in this case, in the reception period D, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode) unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively early after the occurrence of the period. It becomes difficult to recognize the type of the reception period, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type as the reception period. It is expected that it is possible to preferably avoid such a situation at all.

  In the modification described above, in the reception period D, a period in which character information is displayed (see FIG. 284 (b)) and a period in which character information is hidden (see FIG. 284 (e)) ), But the same display change (see FIG. 284 (c)) occurs regardless of the reception within any of these periods. In other words, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the user can perform the operation properly by confirming what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. It is possible, and it is expected to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

  Further, in the above-described modified example, during the reception period D, the character information is hidden in the middle, and then the character information is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "reception period D" suddenly changes to the "reception period A" in which the character information is not displayed, the character information is displayed again thereafter, and the misunderstanding is made. Can be eliminated.

  In the modification example described above, a change occurs in the background image during the reception period D, and the character information is not changed from the period in which the character information is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the change occurs. The period is set to be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately give an impression that the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

  In the effect example described with reference to FIG. 284, in the reception period D, when the reception is made within the period in which the character information related to the reception being permitted is displayed, the reception is permitted. The same post-reception display D is to be generated when the reception is made within the period in which the character information related to the presence is hidden. However, instead of this, when the acceptance is made during the period in which the character information related to the acceptance is displayed in the acceptance period D, and when the acceptance is accepted A different display after reception may be generated when the reception is made during the period in which the character information is hidden.

  More specifically, in this case, the reception period D is more strictly related to the “reception period D1”, which is a period in which character information related to the reception being permitted is displayed, and the reception period D being related to the reception being permitted. When the reception is made during the reception period D1, the display after reception D1 corresponding to the reception period is made up of two types of reception periods such as a "reception period D2" in which the displayed character information is hidden. When the reception is made during the reception period D2, the post-reception display D2 is displayed accordingly.

  FIG. 285 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the above-described modification is added to the reception period D illustrated in FIG. 284 and the like.

  Hereinafter, the effect example illustrated in FIG. 285 will be described, but the same configuration as the effect example illustrated in FIGS. 276 to 278, FIG. 282, and a modification example thereof illustrated in FIG. 284 will not be particularly described. That is, the reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 285 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 284, and can be similarly applied to another example. .

  However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 285, first, a reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285 (b)), and when reception is performed in the reception period D1, display after reception according to the reception period D1 is performed. D1 is displayed (see FIG. 285 (c)).

  On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285 (b)), if a predetermined time elapses without reception (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or 277 arrives). , Character information (here, “please press”) related to the acceptance being accepted is hidden (see FIG. 285 (e)). In such a situation (in a situation in which character information related to acceptance is not displayed), the operation (operation) by the player is accepted as shown in FIG. 284. This is the same as the case of the production example shown in FIG. However, in this modified example, if the character information related to the acceptance is not displayed (see FIG. 285 (e)), the above “acceptance period D1” ends and , A different “acceptance period D2” occurs.

  That is, when an operation (operation) by the player is received in the “reception period D2” in which character information related to the reception being permitted is hidden, after the reception according to the “reception period D2” The display D2 is displayed (see FIG. 285 (h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide the performance in which the “reception period D1” is suddenly replaced with the “reception period D2” different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be provided. It will be possible to improve the entertainment interest through sexual effects.

  In addition, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to the acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the acceptance is changed to the non-display state, the character information is suddenly replaced with the reception period A in which the character information is set to the non-display state. It is expected that the atmosphere will be created more appropriately.

  In particular, in this example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 284, the “background image HG4c” in which mountains different from the “background image HG1” are drawn from the “background image HG4a” in which mountains and rivers are drawn. (FIG. 285 (b) → FIG. 285 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information (here, “please press”) changes to the non-display state, an atmosphere in which the reception period A which may occur in the background of the mountain and suddenly replaces the reception period A is improved. It will be expected to produce in a favorable manner.

  The “display after reception D2” according to this example is different from the “conversation notice” of the “display after reception A” shown in FIG. 279 (c), but uses a princess character. It is a content that can remind the user of "Display A after reception" to some extent, such as being common in this, and it is more suitable for the atmosphere where the character information is suddenly replaced with the reception period A where the character information is hidden Is expected to be produced.

  Further, in this example, when the reception is performed within the reception period D2, the “background image HG4b” is returned (changed) to the “background image HG4a” displayed during the occurrence of the reception period D1. The display D2 after reception according to the reception is displayed. As a result, the post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs) instead of the post-reception display irrelevant to the reception period D1 (for example, the post-reception display according to the reception period C). It is possible to indicate that a predetermined time has elapsed since then (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or 277 has arrived), the display after reception corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs. Become like

  Note that if a predetermined time elapses (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives) without the operation (operation) by the player being received after the reception period D2 has occurred, FIG. As shown in ()), the reception period D1 occurs again, and the state is returned to a state where “character information related to the reception being permitted” is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed so as to return from “background image HG4c” to “background image HG4a” (FIG. 285 (e) → FIG. 285 (f)). As a result, it is expected that an atmosphere that has been returned to the original reception period D1 from another reception period will be more appropriately created.

  When the reception is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 285 (f)) that has occurred again, the reception period D1 is received in the same manner as when the reception is made within the reception period D1 (FIG. 285 (b)) that first occurred. Is displayed after the reception according to the request (see FIG. 285 (c)).

  Needless to say, such a reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 285, in the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of “Configuration 14-A”), “character information related to the reception being permitted” is displayed. There is a period and a period in which the “character information related to acceptance being accepted” is hidden, and these periods are to function as “acceptance period D1” and “acceptance period D2” Different display changes are made depending on whether the reception was performed in the “reception period D1” or the “reception period D2”. In other words, in this case, if the “character information related to the acceptance being accepted” is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a reception period different from the reception period that has occurred until then Since such an event occurs, it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance even when the operation (operation) by the player is not easily accepted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the display after reception is started when the mimic image display is being displayed. The display does not necessarily have to be started when the mimic image display is displayed, and may be started after the mimic image display is hidden.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the simulation image display is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the reception period occurs, but when the timing at which the reception period occurs occurs, Alternatively, it may be displayed later.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the mimic image display is displayed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. Then, in this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display is not terminated but continues even if the “disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)” has appeared since the acceptance of the mimic image display.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, “disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)” is not limited to a mimic image display, but also to a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the reception period ends. It was decided to make this difficult to see. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed after the acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the remaining time as if it were left.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, in the reception period D, even if the reception is made during this period, the display processing relating to the mimic image display (character information in the modified example) is terminated with this trigger. I tried not to let it. That is, the display D after reception is preferentially displayed with respect to the mimic image display (character information in the modified example) in which the display state is maintained on the layer, thereby displaying the mimic image (character information in the modified example). Is hidden (not visible). However, even when the reception is made during the reception period D, the display processing for the mimic image display (character information in the modified example) may be terminated with this as a trigger.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, a mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) that simulates an operation receiving unit to be operated is displayed during the reception period. The mimic image display does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, it can be realized by replacing the display with an arrow notation prompting an operation.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 277, if the specific BGM is audibly output without being suppressed in the reception period D, the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppressed mode in response to the reception. Alternatively, the specific BGM may be made inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not the specific BGM has been accepted. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that inaudibility may occur during the execution period of the display after the reception, and it is expected that the performance is improved.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are displayed before the respective reception periods are generated. It may be displayed according to the timing of occurrence. Depending on the type of the reception period, the display may be performed before the occurrence of the reception period, or may be displayed in accordance with the timing at which the reception period occurs. In short, as long as the reception can be performed while the background images are being displayed, the above-described operational effects related to the background images can be obtained.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the reception period C is assumed to be generated when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state. May be generated when the specific BGM is output in the non-suppression mode.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, in the reception period D, a period during which a mimic image display (character information related to the acceptance being accepted in the modified example) is displayed, The non-display period is included, but these periods mean that the player operates (operates) after confirming that the mimic image display (or character information) is in the non-display state. Is set as a time sufficient for the reception to be made in the non-display state even if the game is started, and after confirming that the mimic image display (or character information) has been returned to the display state, Even if the user starts the operation (operation), the time is set as a time sufficient for the acceptance in the display state, and the technical significance except for the display method by the so-called “blinking display” is set. It is clear that .

  For example, in the reception period D, the time for which the “non-display state” is maintained after the mimic image display (or character information) is changed to the “non-display state” is set as the reception period A or the reception period B. It is desirable to set a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the set time (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, after the mimic image display (or the character information) is returned to the display state, the time for maintaining the display state is also half the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as the reception period A or the reception period B. It is desirable to set the time value as above (1.5 seconds or more), and the time from when the mimic image display (or character information) is displayed until when it is not displayed is also accepted. It is desirable to set a time value that is half or more (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or the reception period B.

  Alternatively, the time from when the mock image display (or character information) is displayed until the mock image display is set to the non-display state, or when the mock image display (or character information) is set to the “non-display state” and the “non-display state” The time for maintaining the "display state" and the time for maintaining the display state after the mimic image display (or the character information) is returned to the display state are the shortest times for the symbol change (required for the shortened change). (Time) or more. This is because such a time value is set as a time value that allows the player to finish the symbol change early, while being a time value sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol change.

  Next, an example in which the above configurations 4, 9 to 13 are embodied will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the contents of the effect that is advanced when the pachinko machine is received (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice, and the like as an effect after the reception), and a notice effect (expected expectation effect). Are prepared, and a reception period (reception effect) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, effect determination, etc.) can be generated. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), a reception period E is further prepared in addition to the reception periods A (reception effects A) to D (reception effects D) described above. I have to do that.

  With reference to FIG. 286 and FIG. 287, features of the reception period E will be described. Note that the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 272 may be prepared as a reception period different from the reception period E (reception effect E), or may be prepared as a reception period E (reception effect). It may be realized as E).

  FIG. 286 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the reception period E (reception effect E) occurs.

  Now, suppose that in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable change / non-time saving normal game state), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and the “variation pattern E” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an effect determination (such as an advance notification determination) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern E. Then, after that, the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol) SZ (rendering effect according to the fluctuating pattern E, sound output of specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 286 (a))". Within the execution period of the fluctuation effect, an effect (advance effect) according to the result of the notice effect judgment is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “variation pattern E” itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 286 (a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 282 (a) is displayed.

  Here, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a arrives at a timing at which a predetermined time E has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. When this is done (when the condition E is satisfied), the reception period E (valid period) in which the “reception of the display E after reception” is permitted is generated (“the situation shown in FIG. 286 (e))”.

  In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a precursor display corresponding to the reception period E is performed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), a character KI of “Kunoichi” appears. Next, as shown in FIG. 286 (c), the character KI throws a smoke ball to generate smoke. Then, as shown in FIG. 286 (d), a state in which the character KI speaks a line such as "press the button and call that person" is displayed. At this time, the expansion of the "smoke" is depicted or the "mock image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and the "mike image display" are difficult to visually recognize by giving priority to the character KI or dialogue. Has been. Then, when the reception period E occurs after such a precursor display (FIGS. 286 (b) to (d)) is performed, the character KI and the dialogue are hidden, so that the “mimic image display” is clearly displayed. Will be done.

  In this example, “character KI” and “smoke” are displayed preferentially with respect to the background image HG4a and the decorative image SZ. The “smoke” may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), whereby the background image may be changed from “background image HG4a” to “smoke”. That is, in this case, “smoke” functions as the “background image” of the change destination. “Smoke” does not necessarily need to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the reception period E (it does not need to be displayed as a precursor display).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 286 (e), in the reception period E according to this example, as the mimic image display, an “integrated mimic image display IG” simulating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 were simulated. A “sword decoration image SYG” and a “special simulation image TM” imitating the special operation means (button “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 are displayed. In this example, a plurality of “integrated simulation image display IG”, “sword decoration image SYG”, and “special simulation image TM” are displayed respectively, but may be displayed one by one. .

  That is, in this case, in the reception period E, the player is prompted to perform an operation on the “operation button 410”, an operation on the “sword decoration 5001”, and an operation on the “special operation means 1410”. Thus, the player determines which of the “operation button 410”, the “sword decoration 5001”, and the “special operation means 1410” should be operated.

  In this regard, when an operation on the “operation button 410” is received within the reception period E, as shown in FIG. 286 (f), based on the reception, a reception sound such as “ping-pong” is received. E1 is output audibly, and a display change (display E1 after reception) in which an "image suggesting that the integrated simulated image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" are displayed, and a "cityscape" is depicted. A background change to the “background image HG5” occurs. After the “display after reception E1” is displayed in this way, the effect is developed while the “background image HG5” is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the operation on the “special operation means 1410” is performed during the reception period E, as shown in FIG. 286 (g), this operation does not generate any reception sound and does not generate any reception sound. Does not occur, and the reception period E does not end (the same as when no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). That is, in the reception period E, the "special operation image 1410" is displayed as the "special operation image 1410" even though the "special operation unit 1410" is not set as the reception target. . According to such a configuration, in the reception period E, a mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) simulating the operation means set as a target of reception in the reception period E, and Since a mock image display (special mock image TM) that simulates an operation means that is not set as an object of reception during the reception period E is mixed, it is difficult to recognize which operation means to operate. It is possible to give an operation opportunity in a location. It should be noted that for the “special operation means 1410” during the reception period E, an operation for the “special operation means 1410” is accepted, but this does not generate any reception sound, In addition, no display change occurs, and the reception period E is not ended (the same as the state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). Good.

  On the other hand, when an operation on the “sword decoration 5001” is received within the reception period E, a reception sound E2 such as “boo” is generated based on the reception, as shown in FIG. 286 (i). In addition to the audible output, a display change (display after reception E2) is displayed in which the character KI speaks a line such as "I'll repartition!" At this time, no change occurs in the background image.

  That is, after "display after reception E2" is displayed, the effect does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) as the reception period E is reset, whereby the remaining time as the reception period E is reset. Is returned to the state immediately after the reception period E has occurred (it can be said that "the reception period E occurs again"). According to such a configuration, the operation for causing the display E1 (samurai character) to appear after reception is not performed, and as a result, even if the display E1 (samurai character) after reception cannot be displayed, the remaining time remains. Since the “reception period E” can be restarted from the initial state in which the game is not digested, it is expected that the gaming entertainment can be appropriately maintained.

  Note that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is that “the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received once”, but not “the predetermined number of times the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed”. Be accepted only for minutes. "

  Incidentally, when an operation is performed on the “special operation means 1410” during the reception period E, it goes without saying that the remaining time as the reception period E is not reset.

  Then, as a result of the operation performed on the “sword decoration 5001” during the reception period E, the remaining time as the reception period E is returned to the state immediately after the occurrence of the reception period E (the reception period E has reoccurred). ) Case, the same as described above depending on whether an operation on the “operation button 410”, an operation on the “sword decoration 5001”, or an operation on the “special operation means 1410” is received within the reception period E. The phenomenon occurs (FIGS. 286 (f), (g), (i)).

  However, when an operation (operation) by the player is received during the reception period E in which the set time (remaining time) is not reset, a mode displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception, and the setting time When an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period E in which the (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-reception display D according to the reception is made different from each other (after reception). Display D1, D2, etc.). According to such a configuration, a stunning value is generated for the appearance of the display D after the reception without resetting, so that the tension during the reception period E is preferably reduced. Can be maintained.

  On the other hand, “an example of progressing from FIG. 286 (e) or FIG. 286 (g) to FIG. 286 (h)” includes “operation on the operation button 410” and “operation on the sword decoration 5001” within the reception period E. It is assumed that none of them is accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period E occurs, the operation (operation) by the player is not received, all remaining time is consumed, and the reception period E ends. In this regard, the reception period E is set as a “reception period for which the above-described automatic button function is activated”. Therefore, in the reception period E, even if both the “operation on the operation button 410” and the “operation on the sword decoration 5001” are not received and all remaining time is consumed, FIG. 286 (h) As shown in (2), the same display E after reception is generated as when the player performs an operation (operation) within the reception period E.

  However, if neither “operation on the operation button 410” nor “operation on the sword decoration 5001” is received within the reception period E, “operation on the operation button 410” is received within the reception period E. The same reception sound E (ping-pong) as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is received within the reception period E is not generated. I have.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the player succeeding in a selective operation by the player while displaying the same post-reception display E as when the “operation on the operation button 410” is received within the reception period E, Since it is possible to suggest that “display E after reception” is not in the displayed state, it is expected that when the reception period E occurs again, a more aggressive operation is encouraged. Become so.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the reception period E, it is difficult to recognize how much time remains as the reception period E, and the display E1 after reception is displayed. To give a hint as to which operation mode (operation type) is required.

  FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. 286 (e), and show the display contents with the passage of time during the reception period E. It is a figure showing a change.

  As described above, in the reception period E, the “integrated simulation image display IG” simulating the operation button 410, the “sword decoration image SYG” simulating the sword decoration body 5001, and the special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) A "special simulation image TM" imitating the button 1410 described is displayed.

  That is, in the reception period E, even though a plurality of types of mimic image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is one of the plurality of types of mimic image displays. (Integrated model image display IG). This makes it possible to imply that the operating means (the operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated mimic image display IG" among the plurality of types of mimic image displays is in a state to be operated.

  In addition, as time elapses during the reception period E, the “integrated mimic image display IG” is, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d), “movement upon operation by a player”. Is performed, a portion (button simulation image BMG) of the operation button 410 simulating the “operation receiving portion” is dynamically displayed. This dynamic display is the same as the content described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234, and is also the same when the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285.

  However, in this effect example, “sword decoration image SYG” and “special simulation image TM” of the multiple types of simulation image displays are portions of the sword decoration body 5001 that simulate the “operation receiving section” or special The portion of the operation means 1410 that imitates the “operation receiving section” is not displayed dynamically but is displayed statically. Note that, regarding the “sword decoration image SYG” and the “special simulation image TM”, the light emission mode such as blinking light emission may be changed.

  According to such a configuration, among the multiple types of model image display, only the “integrated model image display IG” expresses “the movement when an operation is performed by the player”. It becomes possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" of the type model image display is to be operated.

  As described above, in the reception period E, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, such a gauge image GG is generally used to render a picture whose display area gradually decreases as time elapses after the reception period occurs. This is used to indicate how much time remains as the reception period. The manner in which the gauge image GG is used is the same as when the “gauge image GG (here, the integrated model image display IG)” is displayed in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285. is there.

  However, in the reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, “the time has elapsed since the reception period occurred. Among them, "depiction that gradually reduces the display area" is not performed. That is, in the reception period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a state where the display area is maintained at the maximum value from the occurrence of the period to the end thereof. I have. According to such a configuration, in the reception period E, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time remains as the reception period E, and it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. Will be as expected.

  In particular, in the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time as the reception period E by performing an operation on the special operation unit 1410, but even if such processing is performed, Since the depiction that increases the display area of the gauge image GG is not performed, it is difficult to recognize that the remaining time as the reception period E has been reset, and it is expected that the tension is appropriately maintained. Will be done.

  The "dynamic display according to the integrated simulated image display IG" shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to (d) is repeated until the reception period E ends. Therefore, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the reception period E, the "dynamic display according to the integrated model image display IG" is terminated upon the reception. However, when an operation is performed on the special operation unit 1410 during the reception period E, the “dynamic display according to the integrated model image display IG” is not ended as a trigger. Also, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the reception period E, the process of generating the post-reception display D2 is performed, but the process of “dynamic display according to the integrated model image display IG” is ended. There is no need to restart or restart from the beginning, and only the “dynamic display according to the integrated model image display IG” that has been performed so far is continued.

  According to the above-described production example, first, as the reception periods, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 4-A”) and the reception period E (the second reception period of “Configuration 4-A”) are set. Multiple reception periods are prepared. In the reception period A (FIGS. 273 and 279), when an operation (operation) by the player is detected during the period, the display A after reception is displayed and the reception sound A is output. When the operation (operation) by the player is not detected, the display A after reception is not displayed and the reception sound A is not output. In the reception period E (FIG. 286), the period is not changed. When the operation (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the display E1 after reception is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even if the operation (operation) by the player is not detected within the period, the period is determined. The display E1 after reception is the same as when the operation (operation) by the player is detected within the above, but the reception sound E1 is not output.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation (operation) is not received by the player during the reception period E, a demerit of directing can occur, and therefore, a sense of tension when the reception period E occurs. Can be suitably maintained.

  In the above-described production example, the reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of “Configuration 4-A”) is further provided. In the reception period B (FIGS. 274 and 280), the game is performed within the period. When an operation (operation) by the player is detected, the display B after reception is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if the operation by the player is not detected within the period, the operation by the player within the period is performed. The same display B after reception as when (operation) is detected is displayed, and the reception sound B is output. That is, in this case, when an operation (operation) is not received by the player during the reception period, the same display change (change after reception) as when the reception is performed is generated so as to produce a directing disadvantage. (Reception period E) and a case in which directing disadvantages do not occur (reception period B), so that the tension when the reception period occurs is appropriately maintained, It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player does not receive an operation (operation) within the period.

  Also, in the above-described effect example, in the reception period A (FIG. 279), character information related to the reception being permitted is not displayed, and the reception period B (FIG. 280) and the reception period E (FIG. 286) are not displayed. In), character information related to the acceptance is displayed. In this regard, the character information displayed in the reception period B and the character information displayed in the reception period E are different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, by confirming whether or not there is “character information related to acceptance being accepted”, the reception of the target for which the automatic button function is enabled is determined. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a period. If "text information related to acceptance being accepted" is displayed when the reception period occurs, confirming the type of the character information Can be recognized.

  In addition, in the reception period B, as described above, the “disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)” appears when the automatic button function is activated (see FIG. 274 (j)). In this regard, in the above-described production example, during the reception period E (FIG. 286), when the automatic button function is activated (eg, when progressing from (e) to (h) in FIG. 286), the “destruction effect” (Extinction-related display) ”should not be caused to appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type as the reception period also depending on whether or not the “extinction effect (extinction-related display)” appears when the automatic button function is activated. .

  Note that, during the reception period E (FIG. 286), when an operation (operation) is received by the player and the mock image display (integrated mock image display IG) is not displayed in response to this, “ The disappearance effect (disappearance-related display) "may not be caused to appear.

  As described above, in the reception period B, the mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232). On the other hand, in the reception period A and the reception period E, it is desirable that the mimic image display is displayed only in one mode.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period A, the background image is not changed based on the fact that the operation has been received by the player (see FIG. 279), and in the reception periods B and E, the player The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation by. According to such a configuration, it is easy to recognize that the automatic button function has been activated and the display after reception has been displayed, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  However, in the reception period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is received, if the action (operation) is caused by an operation on the “sword decoration 5001”, the post-reception display E2 is displayed. No longer changes the background image to a different background image. According to such a configuration, while displaying the post-acceptance display E2 according to the reception, the player confirms that the background image that should be changed has not been changed yet, so that the reception is confirmed. This makes it possible to recognize that the period E has not been terminated.

  In the reception period E, a plurality of objects (the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001, but the special operation means 1410 may be included) as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player. Is set, and is different between a case where a player's operation (operation) on the operation button 410 among a plurality of objects is received and a case where a player's operation (operation) on the sword decoration 5001 is received. The reception sound is now output. Thus, it is possible to appropriately suggest that different effects are produced depending on which of the plurality of objects is operated.

  In the reception period B, the case where the “reception sound A” corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output based on the result of the effect determination (big hit determination) and the case where the “reception sound A” corresponding to the reception period A is A different “reception sound B” may be audibly output.

  In the above-described production example, during the reception period E, the player is provided with a plurality of options (here, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or the special operation means 1410 is operated). Is displayed, and a different display (post-reception display E1, E2) appears as the post-reception display depending on which of the options is selected by the operation (operation) by the player. Then, when none of the plurality of options is selected within the period (in this case, no action (operation) by the player is detected), a specific option among the plurality of options is displayed as a display after reception. Is displayed (here, when the operation button 410 is operated) (display after reception E1) is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, if no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same display after reception is displayed, so that the player performs a selective operation within the reception period E. Can be encouraged.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, as the operation means, the operation buttons 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion) of “Configuration 9-A”) and the sword decoration 5001 (“Configuration 9-A”) are used. A plurality of operation units including a second operation unit (corresponding to a second operation receiving unit) are prepared, and a plurality of operation units including a reception period E (corresponding to a specific reception period of “Configuration 9-A”) as a reception period are provided. A type of acceptance period is prepared. In the reception period E, both the reception of the operation on the operation button 410 and the reception of the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted as the reception for causing the display change corresponding to the reception period E, The display after reception E1 (specific display change) can be generated when the operation on the operation button 410 is received, and the display after reception E1 (specific display change) when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received. Since it is possible to generate a display change (display after reception E2) different from the display after reception E1 (specific display change) without causing the display, it is interesting to determine which operation means to operate. Will be able to

  In addition, in the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is triggered by this operation. However, when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not ended by this operation. On the contrary, the remaining time was extended. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated in the reception period E, the operation button 410 is triggered by this operation so that the remaining time as the reception period E1 is not consumed. In other words, in this case, as the reception period E using a plurality of operation means, it is possible to give unprecedented rendition, and various interesting productions based on such rendition can be performed. Can be provided.

However, in the reception period E according to the above-described production example, the remaining time as the reception period E can be extended only by performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001, and thus the tension is appropriately maintained. There are concerns that can not be. Therefore, a reception period F different from the reception period E is further provided. In the reception period F, as in the reception period E, an “integrated model image display IG” that imitates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 And a "special simulation image TM" imitating the special operation means (button "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Then, when the reception is made during the reception period F, similarly to the case of the above-described reception period E (see FIG. 286),
-When an operation on the "operation button 410" is received, the reception sound F1 is audibly output and the post-reception display F1 is displayed based on the reception of the operation.
-When an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", this does not cause any reception sound to occur, does not cause any display change, and ends the reception period E. No (no reaction occurs, no action is taken),
When an operation on the “sword decoration 5001” is received, the reception sound F2 is audibly output based on the reception, and a display change different from the above-mentioned display F1 after reception (display after reception). Processing such as displaying F2) is performed. Then, in the reception period F, even if an operation on the “sword decoration 5001” is received, the remaining time as the reception period F is not reset (extended), and the reception period F is not reset. May be continued to be digested as it is. That is, in this case, if an operation on the “sword decoration 5001” is received within the reception period F, the display F2 is displayed after the reception as an opportunity, but the reception period F is ended or the reception period F Is not reset, and the reception period F is continued thereafter (of course, operation of the operation button 410 is also allowed).

  According to such a configuration, a choice of “whether to operate the operation button 410”, “whether to operate the sword decoration 5001”, or “whether to operate the special operation means 1410” is presented to the player. Even when the reception period occurs, the remaining time as the reception period is not necessarily reset (extended) when the operation on the “sword decoration 5001” is received, so that the tension is preferable. Will be expected to maintain.

  Further, it is desirable that the reception period F be set as a target for which the above-described automatic button function is activated, similarly to the reception period E. When the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, similarly to the case where the automatic button function is activated for the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is received within the reception period F It is desirable to display the "display F1 after reception" which appears in the above. However, at this time, when the automatic button function is enabled for the reception period F, unlike the case of the reception period E (the reception sound E1 is not output audibly), the reception sound F1 is output audibly. Is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the reception period ends without any reception, it is possible to indicate whether the reception period was the reception period E or the reception period F. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this case, also during the reception period F, “integrated mimic image display IG” is displayed as a mimic image display imitating the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated mimic image display IG is It is desirable that the display area is not reduced with the passage of time.

  Also, in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, although a plurality of types of mimic image displays are displayed, a plurality of gauge images (predetermined images) GG used to indicate the remaining time are provided. It is desirable that only one of the types of the model image display (the integrated model image display IG) be associated with the model image display.

  Also, in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, as time passes in the reception period F, the “integrated mimic image display IG” is as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d). Then, a part (button simulation image BMG) of the operation button 410 simulating the “operation receiving part” is dynamically displayed as if “movement upon operation by a player” is performed, The “sword decoration image SYG” and the “special simulation image TM” are dynamic parts of the sword decoration body 5001 simulating the “operation receiving part” and the special operation means 1410 simulating the “operation receiving part”. It is desirable not to be displayed but to be displayed still.

  In the reception period E and the reception period F, the mimic image display (special mimetic image TM) simulating the special operation means 1410 is not necessarily displayed, and the pachinko machine 1 includes the special operation means 1410 itself. It may not be necessary.

  In the above-described production example, as the reception periods, “reception period A or reception period B or reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of“ configuration 10-A ”)” and “reception period E (“ configuration 10-A ”). A) (equivalent to the second reception period of "A"). In the receiving period A (or the receiving periods B and D), a specific mimic image display (here, an integrated mimic image display IG) is displayed as a mimic image display simulating the operation receiving unit. A plurality of mimic image displays (here, an integrated mimic image display IG, a sword decoration image SYG, a special mimic image TM) are displayed as a mimic image display imitating the operation receiving unit, and the mimic image display is performed by an operation by a player. It is configured to be executable as a dynamic display depicting movement when the operation receiving section is made movable.

  In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the mimic image display is executed as “dynamic display depicting movement when the operation receiving unit is made movable by an operation by the player” (for example, the reception period A, B, E) and a case in which it is not executed as “dynamic display depicting movement when the operation receiving unit is made movable by an operation by the player” (for example, a reception period E). In other words, in this case, not only when it is easy for the player to recognize what operation should be performed, but also what operation should be performed while the mimic image display is being displayed. Can be difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the player can appropriately maintain a sense of tension until the operation by the player is accepted.

  In particular, in the above-described production example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are prepared, and in the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D), a simulation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. The image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and a mimic image display (integrated mimic image display IG) simulating the operation button 410 is performed. At this time, the mimic image display simulating the operation button 410 is operated by the player. Thus, the operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display that depicts a movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

  On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both a mimic image display imitating the operation button 410 (integrated mimic image display IG) and a mimic image display imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) are displayed. One of the integrated mimic image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (in this case, the integrated mimic image display IG) describes a movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by an operation by the player. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated simulation image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is made movable by the operation of the player. It does not run as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the moment.

  According to such a configuration, when the mimic image display is performed, there are cases where this is executed as a dynamic display and cases where it is not executed as the dynamic display. It can be realized, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  Moreover, in the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the mimic image display (here, the integrated mimic image display IG) on the side where dynamic display is performed. When this is received, the first display change (display E1 after reception) can be generated with this as an opportunity, and corresponds to the mimic image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation is received, the second display change (display after reception E2) can be generated with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, regardless of whether the dynamic display is performed or not, the display after the reception corresponding to the type of the side on which the reception is performed appears. It is possible to give the display "meaning in the production". For example, even when an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the mimic image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on which the dynamic display is not performed. Thus, it is possible to give a surprise to the occurrence of a display change triggered by this.

  Further, in the above-described production example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the special operation unit 1410 are prepared, and in the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D), a simulation model of the special operation unit 1410 is provided. The image display (special model image TM) is not performed, and the model image display (the integrated model image display IG) simulating the operation button 410 is performed. At this time, the model image display simulating the operation button 410 is operated by the player. Thus, the operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display that depicts a movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

  On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both the mimic image display (the integrated mimic image display IG) simulating the operation button 410 and the mimic image display (the special mimic image TM) simulating the special operation means 1410 are displayed. , One of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (here, the integrated model image display IG) describes a movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by an operation by the player. This is executed as a dynamic display, and the other of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (here, the special model image TM) is made movable by operation of the player. It does not run as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the moment.

  According to such a configuration, when the mimic image display is performed, there are cases where this is executed as a dynamic display and cases where it is not executed as the dynamic display. It can be realized, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  Moreover, in the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the mimic image display (here, the integrated mimic image display IG) on the side where dynamic display is performed. When this occurs, the first display change (display E1 after reception) can be generated as an opportunity, and the operation receiving unit (here, the special model image TM) corresponding to the model display (here, the special model image TM) on which the dynamic display is not performed. Here, when an operation is performed on the special operation unit 1410), no display change (display after reception) is triggered by this operation. That is, in this case, even if the mimic image display (here, the special mimic image TM) is displayed during the reception period, it is not necessarily received when the corresponding operation receiving unit (special operation means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that the feeling of tension during the reception period is appropriately maintained.

  In this case, when the special operation means 1410 is operated in the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D) in which the special simulation image TM is not displayed, a display change (display after reception) triggered by the operation is performed. Will not occur. However, in the reception period A (or reception periods B and D) in which the special model image TM is not displayed, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410, a display change (display after reception) is triggered by this operation. You may make it do. According to such a configuration, the validity of the operation cannot be determined only by the presence or absence of the display of the mimic image display, and the feeling of tension can be suitably maintained.

  In the above-described effect example, in the reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special simulation image TM are displayed as still images. However, regarding the sword decoration image SYG and the special simulation image TM, the operation receiving unit (the sword decoration body 5001 in the case of the sword decoration image SYG and the special operation means 1410 in the case of the special simulation image TM) is operated by the player. What is necessary is not to be executed as a dynamic display that depicts a movement when the operation is made movable. For example, a movement (rotation or the like) different from a movement when the operation receiving unit is made movable by an operation by a player is performed. For example, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

  In the above-described effect example, first, a plurality of operation units (a plurality of operation reception units) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation unit (specific operation reception unit) of “Configuration 11-A”) are prepared. The reception period includes the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “Configuration 11-A”), and the reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of “Configuration 11-A”). Multiple reception periods are available. In the reception period A (or reception period B), a mimic image display (button mimic image BMG) imitating the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button mimic image BMG are displayed. , "Remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time in which the operation of the operation button 41 is allowed to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG as time elapses" is performed.

  On the other hand, in the reception period E, a button simulation image BMG (integrated simulation image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is performed, but the operation is performed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG as time elapses. The "remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time in which the operation of the button 41 is permitted" is not performed.

  According to such a configuration, even if a button simulation image BMG (integrated simulation image display IG) that simulates the operation button 410 is displayed, “the operation is performed by decreasing the display area of the gauge image GG with the passage of time. Since the "remaining time specifying display indicating the remaining time in which the reception of the operation on the button 41 is permitted" is not necessarily performed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. become.

  In the above-described production example, in the reception period E, a button simulation image BMG (integrated simulation image display IG) simulating the operation button 410 and an operation means (sword decoration body 5001) different from this are simulated. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (remaining time specifying display described above) that suggests (describes) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed. ing. In other words, in this case, in the reception period E, the above-described “Despite accepting both the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the operation means (sword decoration 5001) different from the operation button 410 is permitted. The "remaining time specifying display" is not performed. Thereby, the reception period E occurs when the player does not float up to the fact that both the reception of the operation on the operation button 410 and the reception of the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed. Tension can be appropriately maintained.

  It should be noted that even in a situation where the remaining time display (the above-described remaining time specifying display) indicating (representing) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed, the remaining time as the reception period E is not displayed. Needless to say, it is decreasing.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period E, the button simulation image BMG simulating the operation button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that forms the display area of the gauge image GG. And However, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that its display area is maintained without reducing its display area as time passes. That is, in this case, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the reception period E is reduced, so that a large display area of the gauge image GG is left. It is expected that the nervousness at the time of will be appropriately maintained. The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until the remaining time as the reception period E becomes “0” and the display becomes non-display.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period E, of the button imitation image BMG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001, only the button imitation image BMG is left. This is displayed as an image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and, consequently, whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled). Therefore, the tension can be appropriately maintained.

  In this case, even during the reception period F described above, only the button simulation image BMG of the button simulation image BMG simulating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG simulating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the remaining time. It is desirable to display the specific image (gauge image GG) used as an integrated image.

  In addition, a reception period G relating to the display G after reception can be generated. In the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed, and the button simulation image BMG simulating the operation button 410 is integrated with the above. It is displayed as a model image display IG. However, in the reception period G, unlike the reception period A and the reception period B, the gauge image GG in the integrated model image display IG does not decrease the display area as time elapses and maintains the display area. It is displayed in the form. According to such a configuration, even when a reception period in which only the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) is displayed as the model image is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is not necessarily reduced. Since it does not decrease, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the reception period.

  In the above-described production example, in the reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated mimic image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a mimic image display imitating the operation button 410, and then the gauge is displayed. By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is difficult to recognize the remaining time as the reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in the reception periods E, F, and G, unlike the case of the reception period A or the reception period B (integrated mimic image display IG), the model image display simulating the operation button 410 is displayed as a “gauge”. The remaining time may not be displayed by displaying it as "an image not including the image GG". That is, in this case, in the reception periods E, F, and G, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position in the display area.

  When displaying a mimic image of the operation button 410 as an “image that does not include the gauge image GG”, the “image that does not include the gauge image GG” is “button image included in the integrated mimic image display IG”. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image including at least the image BMG ”. That is, in this case, when the button simulation image BMG is displayed, there are both a case where it is displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG and a case where it is displayed as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In the above-described effect example, first, at least the following operation means are prepared as the operation means.
A handle 5012 (corresponding to a first operation receiving portion of “Configuration 12-A”) that is displaced by receiving an operation by the player, and is not displaced even if the handle 5012 is provided on the periphery thereof and receives an operation; A sword decoration body 5001 (corresponding to the first operating means of "Configuration 12-A") having a sheath portion 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration portion of "Configuration 12-A") (see Fig. 146 and the like); An operation button 410 (corresponding to a second operation receiving portion of “Configuration 12-A”) that is displaced by receiving an operation by a player, and a frame that is provided on a periphery thereof and does not displace even when the operation button 410 is operated A rendering operation unit 400 having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decoration part of “Configuration 12-A”) (corresponding to the second operation means of “Configuration 12-A”) (see FIG. 44 and the like).

  When displaying a sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001, a pattern simulation image simulating the pattern part 5012 (corresponding to the first receiving part simulation image of “Configuration 12-A”) and the pattern part simulation image A pattern peripheral decoration image (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration image of “Configuration 12-A”) that decorates the periphery of the mimic image can be displayed (see FIG. 287 and the like), and a simulation imitating the rendering operation unit 400 is performed. When an image display (here, an integrated model image display IG) is displayed, a button model image BMG (corresponding to the second receiving part model image of “Configuration 12-A”) imitating the operation button 410 and the button model are displayed. A peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the image BMG can be displayed (see FIG. 287 and the like), and the pattern peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as images different from each other.

  According to such a configuration, since the peripheral edge decoration images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operation means itself is similar, the case where the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the case where the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed. The appearance can be greatly different from the appearance when displaying, and it is expected that it is easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the pattern peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a part simulating a decoration part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1 and is an image display simulating the sheath part 5020. Although displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated simulation image display IG is displayed as an image including at least a part simulating a decoration part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, when the “sword decoration image SYG” is displayed, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 is in a situation in which an operation opportunity is given. On the other hand, when the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed, a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the staging operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a situation with a higher staging effect. Will be able to In this case, the “directing operation unit 400” is provided as a member having an operation receiving portion (operation button 410) larger than the “sword decoration body 5001”, such as a decoration portion that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. It is desirable that even if the peripheral decoration image SSG including at least the part simulating the image is displayed, it is not difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated.

  As described above, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the staging operation unit 400 (the operation button 410) as a "situation having a higher staging effect", the peripheral decoration image SSG is generated by the pachinko machine. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image simulating an imaginary decoration part that does not exist in the machine 1. However, in order to make it easy to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to the staging operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), a part imitating the frame unit 415 is included in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. May be included.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the remaining time is displayed only on the peripheral decorative image SSG of the pattern peripheral decorative image in the sword decorative image SYG and the peripheral decorative image SSG in the integrated model image display IG. Is formed as described above, and the remaining time can be displayed using the display area as described above.

  The "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an integrated image display of a pattern mimic image of the pattern 5012 and a pattern peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the pattern mimic image. The “integrated mimic image display IG” is displayed as an integrated image display of a button mimic image BMG imitating the operation button 410 and a peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery of the button mimic image BMG. . In this regard, the “sword decorative image SYG” does not separately include the “pattern mimic image” and the “pattern peripheral decorative image” as its image data, but as one integrated image data. It is prepared. Similarly, the image data of the “integrated mimic image display IG” does not include the “button mimic image BMG” and the “peripheral decoration image SSG” separately, but is prepared as one integrated image data. It is something to be done.

  In the above-described effect example, first, the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiver of “Configuration 13-A”) and the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 (“ A plurality of operation receiving units including an operation receiving unit of the configuration 13-A) and an operation receiving unit of the special operation unit 1410 (equivalent to the third operation receiving unit of the configuration 13-A) are prepared. As the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including a reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of “Configuration 13-A”) are prepared. In the reception period E (FIG. 286), the “integrated model image display IG (the button model image BMG)” that simulates the operation button 410 and the “sword decoration image SYG (the model pattern inside) that simulates the pattern part 5012”. Peripheral decoration image) ”and“ special simulation image TM ”that simulates the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410, and when an operation on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation receiving portions is received, Of the “integrated model image display IG”, “sword decoration image SYG”, and “special model image TM”, “sword decoration image SYG” and “special model image TM” that simulate an unaccepted operation receiving unit Are hidden at least (see FIG. 286).

  According to the above configuration, a mimic image display (sword decoration image) simulating an operation receiving portion (the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410) different from the operation button 410 to which the operation has been received. Since the SYG, the special model image TM) is hidden, the operation receiving portion (the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001, the special operation is not performed, but the operation is not received although the model image display is displayed). This makes it possible to easily recognize whether or not further operation is necessary for the operation receiving portion of the means 1410).

  In addition, in the reception period E, although the “integrated model image display IG”, the “sword decoration image SYG”, and the “special model image TM” are displayed, the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, the special operation Of the means 1410, the special operation means 1410 is configured so that the reception of the operation (reception regarding display after reception) is not validated (not permitted). That is, as described above, in the reception period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received, a first display change (display after reception E1) is generated, and when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received, the second display is displayed. Although a change (display E2 after reception) is generated, no operation is received for the special operation means 1410, and no display change is triggered by the operation. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity and the nervousness until the operation by the player is accepted in the reception period E.

  In the reception period E, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received, a second display change (display after reception E2) is generated. Both the "decorative image SYG" and the "special simulation image TM" are not hidden, and their display states are continued (FIG. 286 (i)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a display change that is significantly different from the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is received, and it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  In particular, in the reception period E, when an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the remaining time of the reception period E is increased with this as a trigger (FIG. 286 (i) → ( e)) In realizing the performance that demands further operation, it is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a shortage of remaining time.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received, a first display change (display after reception E1) is generated, but the first display change (display after reception) is performed. In the state where E1) has occurred, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed, and the “sword decoration image SYG” and the “special model image TM” are both hidden (FIG. 286 ( f)). As a result, even after the operation is received while a plurality of mimic image displays are being performed, it is recognized that the display E1 is a post-reception display generated due to the reception of the operation on the operation button 410. Will be able to do it.

  Also, at this time, since the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed at a position different from the position displayed during the reception period E (FIG. 286 (f)), the reception period E ends. To be able to suggest that you are

  In the above-described production example, when the remaining time runs out during the reception period E, the above-described automatic button function is activated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the reception period E. (See FIG. 286 (h)). Also in this case, in a state where the first display change (display after reception E1) has occurred, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed, and the “sword decoration image SYG” and the “special model image TM” are not displayed. Since both of them are not displayed, it is possible to recognize that the display is the display E1 after reception corresponding to the operation button 410.

  In the reception period D shown in FIG. 284, when the character information (please press) is not displayed, the display state of the mimic image display is maintained (FIG. 284 (e)). May be hidden according to the timing at which the character information is hidden. In this case, when the character information (please press) is returned to the display state again, the mimic image display is also returned to the display state again (FIG. 284 (f)).

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to some embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the automatic effect function, a display such as "auto button is being set" may be displayed, but the display is not necessarily performed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 1 is not the pachinko machine 1 that is set to the automatic production mode, but is implemented as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic production function is always enabled and the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not mounted, It is desirable that the display such as "Auto button setting" is not performed. In the pachinko machine 1 which is not equipped with the processing itself such as “setting to the effect state”, the validity period in which the automatic effect function is performed and the automatic effect function are set according to the type of the operation accepting effect in which the operation by the player is allowed. A valid period that is not played may occur.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, the “simulated image” may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and is, for example, an operation target such as an arrow image that moves up and down in a downward direction. The image may not be displayed as an image imitating the operation means.

  Also, when the automatic production function is employed in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically receiving) operation reception within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. It may be. In order to appropriately provide the player with an operation opportunity, an operation is performed when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after half or more of the operation valid period has elapsed after the operation valid period has occurred. It is preferable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the time when the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes one frame, and the post-operation effect is performed based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. In addition, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the automatic production function, if the bar display is not to be hidden after the expiration of the validity period and is to be maintained, the operation to be performed is performed in accordance with the timing at which the validity period ends. It is desirable to execute an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is continuously displayed, it is expected to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing "Is the validity period continuing?" Become so.

  Note that, in the above-described and later-described effect examples such as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 209, in the case where the post-operation effect is started while the mimic image (or the bar display) is not hidden and is maintained. Time from the timing of operation detection to the timing at which the mimic image (or bar display) is not displayed (period of timing tf2 to tf4, period of timing tg3 to tg5, period of timing th3 to th4, etc.) ", There may be only a time of at least several frames (eg, two frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame time. Even if there is such time, the period in which the mock image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the effect is started after the operation, and some players can recognize this. In some cases.

  In addition, in the description example of the "help image for promoting the effect understanding", the ruler is exemplified as the "reference image indicating the length unit in the horizontal direction", but other images may be used. You may. In short, if the player operates, it is sufficient that a display image that is rendered without being affected by the special effect appears.For example, it is not an image aiming to promote the effect understanding, but other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image suggesting a degree of expectation, an image suggesting a current production state, or an image suggesting a state related to production setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. Note that such images do not necessarily have to be drawn as one, and may be drawn so that a plurality of images are arranged side by side to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole.

  Also, in the example of the description of "preventing mischief against a plurality of operation means", mischief is greatly different from illegal acts such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures is difficult for the hall side. It can lead to profits. Therefore, an image appearing based on detection of an operation by the player (including an image appearing in the process until a specific moving image appears) is realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. Is also good. In short, when a player performs an operation on a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), the “effect display device 1600 executes a game effect according to the big hit determination. Display (playback) a specific moving image that cannot appear in the state where the moving image is displayed (the moving image may have a content that has nothing to do with preventing mischief (for example, moving to a state in which a predetermined movie is played). ) Has been performed), "Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed," Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the luminance setting value relating to the luminance of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current luminance setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. In this case, the player can operate the plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (procedure) to generate a function restriction period in which the above-described specific moving image is reproduced by himself / herself. It is.

  Further, in the example of the description of “prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means”, in a state where the decorative symbol is fluctuated, the partial restriction period may be always controlled.

  In addition, as for the example of "Prevention of noise by adjustment confirmation sound at opening of a store", the point is that control is performed in a normal state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after turning on the power. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to a normal state after passing a restricted state in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and when the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is ended early. As long as it is controlled so as to be in a normal state, the length of time to be maintained as a restricted state may be appropriately set (any of several seconds to several hours). Good. If the length of time that is maintained as the restricted state is set too short, the above-described effects in the game period immediately after opening the store will not be exhibited, but the noise when the hall side performs volume setting immediately after turning on the power supply. It is possible to suppress this.

  Further, in the example of the description of the “control on the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the degree of effect importance”, advantageous conditions are used when the first special symbol is changing and when the second special symbol is changing. While the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the side that can be played, the first special symbol on the side that can be played under adverse conditions is not changed. The case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is exemplified. However, it is also possible to apply the technology to a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not mounted. For example, a specific symbol in which a lottery is performed under more disadvantageous conditions than the first special symbol is prepared. Although the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side where the game can be played under advantageous conditions, the side where the game can be played under disadvantageous conditions is not output. A configuration may be such that a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output during the change of the specific symbol.

  Further, in the example of the description of the “period during which operation reception is allowed (valid period) itself”, the allowable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception effect and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception effects are described. The effect sound may be different from the acceptable sound. Further, in FIG. 210, the acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11). However, as “one sound data” that extends over the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. You may make it output.

  A mimic image imitating the operation receiving portion receiving the operation and a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery may be separately prepared as image data, and the image data may be combined and displayed as an integrated mimic image. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 232, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, “normal button mimic image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 232 (a) and (c)). In some cases, a "special button simulation image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)). However, when the “normal button simulation image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 232 (a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and the “special button When the "simulated image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)), the second operation means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operation receiving section) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

  In each of the above-described explanation examples, as the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets, those requiring a pressing operation (pressing operation) (buttons and the like) and those requiring an insertion / removal operation (removal operation) (swords) In addition to decorations), it may be realized as a device that requires a player action such as non-contact or touch (a proximity sensor or the like).

  Although the peripheral decoration image SSG does not simulate the peripheral decoration part actually provided on the periphery of the “operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given”, at least a part thereof simulates the peripheral decoration part. Any portion may be used as long as it does not have a portion, and a portion imitating a peripheral decoration portion may be provided.

  Regarding the second valid period in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” or the valid period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined set time is not limited to a finite one, and may be an infinite one unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

  When the specific image TG is displayed within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  Regarding the “automatic reception effect” described in FIG. 232 and thereafter, any of the realization methods related to the “automatic reception effect” exemplified earlier may be adopted. Regarding how the mock image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception effect is produced, any of the above-described realization methods may be adopted. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, the type of the effect state at the time of occurrence, or the type of the reception effect (post-operation effect) itself, or the reception effect. The same post-operation effect as when there was no operation by the player during the validity period (“automatic effect function” is activated), depending on the condition in which If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" is not activated). The timing at which the automatic staging function is activated may be a predetermined timing within the validity period, a timing at which the validity period ends, or a timing at which a short time has passed after the validity period ends. It may be.

  The reception periods (for example, the reception periods D and E and the reception periods F and G shown in FIGS. 282 to 287) exemplified in the above-described each production example are not necessarily the productions according to the result of the big hit determination (production determination). It does not have to occur in the pattern. For example, not during the period during which the symbol fluctuation is being executed, but during the period during which the symbol fluctuation is not being executed (for example, during the period in which the jackpot game is being executed, or during various intervals, etc.). (Based on the establishment). In this case, “x seconds after the start of the change” shown in FIG. 278 is applied to the design change of the y-second shorter than the x-second, and “after the start of the change” after the end of the design change of the y-second. The timing "x seconds later" may arrive, and the reception period D may be generated at the timing. According to such a configuration, since the reception period D occurs after the symbol change is stopped in the state where the hold is “0”, the player who wants to stop the game can be stopped. become. In this sense, it may be set as “x seconds after stop of fluctuation” instead of “x seconds after start of fluctuation”.

  In addition, the reception period (for example, the reception periods D and E and the reception periods F and G shown in FIGS. 282 to 287) illustrated in each of the above-described production examples is determined by setting the end condition of the reception period to “predetermined. It is not always necessary to set it as "the elapsed time value has passed", and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when 10 gaming balls are received in the special winning opening), the reception period is set. It may be a termination.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. In this case, the same operation and effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Ordinary symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening

Claims (1)

Determining means for performing a determination;
Holding storage means capable of storing determination information used for determination by the determination means,
A symbol variation executing unit that selects one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination information stored by the suspension storage unit, and that can execute symbol variation with the selected variation pattern;
Receiving means for detecting and accepting an action by the player;
Mimic image display means capable of displaying a mimic image display in which an object to be operated by the player is represented as an image,
A reception period in which reception of an operation by the player is allowed, and a reception period execution means for displaying a display after reception when an operation by the player is received within the reception period,
A plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as the reception period,
The first reception period,
When the execution of the first variation pattern is started regardless of the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage unit, the first timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern was started. Can occur when
In the second reception period,
When the execution of the second variation pattern is started when the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage unit is less than a predetermined number, a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern was started. The second variation pattern can be generated when two timings have arrived, but when the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage means is in a state of a predetermined number or more, the second variation pattern is started. It does not occur even when the second timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the fluctuation pattern has arrived,
The mimic image display means can display the mimic image display in any of a plurality of display modes,
The target object to be operated by the player has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light,
A gaming machine, comprising: an operation-related image display unit that can display an operation-related image that prompts a player to accept an operation during the reception period.